'^^;s^lf^:
4
D E I ' A R^r NI IS NT
SANSKRIT
GIFT OF
FITZKDWARD MAIvIv
MARLESFORD, SUFFOLK, ENGLAND
(H. C. 1846)
Received July 17, 1899
THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
GIFT OF
HORACE W. CARPENTIER
\ r
AN
INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR
ni.;
SANSKRIT LANGUAGE,
FOR THE USE OF
EARLY STUDENTS.
BY
H. H. WILSON, M.A. F.R.S. &c. &c.
BODEN PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.
LONDON,
PUBLISHED BY J. MADDEN AND CO.,
LEADENHALL STREET.
184L
Harvard University
Sa'.isicrit Dept. Library.
fitzb:- w^B^"^' eiiLi* i
July 3^.7,^,^18^9,
«^M^ftiin«p
Oxford, Printed by T. Combe, Printer to the University.
PREFACE
The design of the present Grammar of the Sanskrit
Language has been suggested by the experience which
I have now had in teaching the language, and by the
want which I have repeatedly felt of some such ele-
mentary work as that which I have here attempted to
compile.
Of the Sanskrit Grammars published in Calcutta, the
works of Mr. Colebrooke, Dr. Carey, and Mr. Forster
are too voluminous and difficult for beginners. The
Grammar of Mr. Yates is better adapted to such a class
of students, but it is not readily procurable in this
country. The Grammar of Professor Bopp, being com-
posed in German and in Latin, is not universally accept-
able to English students : and the only Grammar within
their reach, therefore, has been that of Sir C. Wilkins.
This work, however admirable in many respects, is
exceptionable in some parts of its arrangement, and is
inconvenient in use from its extent ; it is also growing
scarce. A new Grammar, therefore, on a somewhat
different plan, had become necessary; and as I found
no one disposed to engage in its preparation, I have
thought it incumbent upon me to undertake the task.
The structure of a highly elaborated form of speech,
such as is Sanskrit, abounding with grammatical inflex-
ions, cannot be explained with that brevity of which
a 3
iv PREFACE.
more simply constituted languages permit : much cannot
be described in a very few phrases. The present work
has exceeded the limits which I originally contemplated ;
but I found it impossible to be more concise, without
being obscure, or without omitting something that was
essential. As the extent of the book, however, is in
great part attributable to the multiplication of examples,
rather than of rules, it will be useful for occasional refer-
ence, without being cumbrous to the memory of the stu-
dent. I have endeavoured to make reference easy, by the
headings of the pages and other supplementary means.
The first topic of all Sanskrit Grammars is necessarily
the euphonic combination of concurrent letters, the ana-
lysis of which must be performed before the words can
be separated and read. In the chapter upon the com-
bination of letters, or Sandhi, as it is termed, I have
rather added to, than diminished, the number of the
rules which are to.be found in the Grammar of Sir
C. Wilkins : but, on the other hand, I have not imitated
Professor Bopp in the copiousness with which he has
explained the changes, as, however serviceable the rules
which he has assembled with singular industry and
correctness, they are not in all cases confined to modi-
fications of a euphonic character : they comprise .many
that occur as the consequence of verbal or nominal
inflexion : and although a knowledge of them will no
doubt facilitate the student's subsequent acquirement of
the principles of declension and conjugation, I have not
found him content to be detained so long upon what
appears to him to be but the threshold of the edifice,
into the interior of which he is eager to enter.
The general outline of the chapter on Declension is in
all essential respects the same as that followed in the
PREFACE. V
Grammars of Wilkins and Bopp ; but I have thought it
advisable to put more prominently forward than they
have done the scheme of technical terminations, devised
by native grammarians for the construction of the cases
of a noun ; as, notwithstanding the substitutions which
they partially undergo, they are applicable in all nouns
to a considerable portion of the case^, and in some nouns
to all. They are easily acquired, and so are their sub-
stitutes ; and familiarity with them once attained, the
subject of Declension, however complicated it may ap-
pear, becomes exceedingly simple, and is mastered with
facility.
It is in the chapter on Conjugation that I have
departed most widely from the course pursued by my
European predecessors. Professor Bopp has followed
in the main the example set by Sir C. Wilkins, of exem-
plifying, under the head of each class or conjugation,
only those tenses of the verb to which the conjugational
characteristics are confined ; and of illustrating the
remaining tenses of verbs in general in one collective
division, under the head of each several tense. I have
found this arrangement peculiarly embarrassing to be-
ginners. An entire verb is nowhere presented to them ;
and although the whole of the inflexions of most of
those of which the conjugational tenses are exhibited
are to be found in the Grammar, yet they can only be
collected by a diligent and protracted search. It rarely
happens that the young student is not disheartened by
the labour thus imposed upon him, and a competent
knowledge of the conjugation of Sanskrit verbs is in
consequence comparatively seldom acquired. In the
hope of removing some of the difficulties inherent in
the subject, I have brought the several tenses of the verb
vi PREFACE.
together, and explained their formation in consecutive
order. I have then detailed an entire verb in its dif-
ferent voices and derivative forms ; and finally, under the
head of each conjugation, I have given complete para-
digms of a number of the most useful verbs, arranged
in alphabetical succession, in the several conjugations to
which they respectively belong. An example of this
classification of the verbs was set by Mr. Colebrooke.
In the first volume of his Grammar, the only one pub-
lished^ he has assembled all the verbs of the first conju-
gation, with paradigms more or less complete. The limits
of the present work rendered it impossible to represent
all the verbs of each conjugation, but I have endeavoured
to make such a selection as comprehends those which
are of most frequent occurrence, or anomalous construc-
tion. The forms are taken chiefly from the native
Grammar, the Siddhanta Kaumudi, and from a MS.
collection of verbs I had compiled in India. The first
part only of Mr. Westergaard's very valuable work,
' Radices Linguae Sanscritae,' had reached me before my
collection was completed, or it would have saved me some
labour. The usefulness of the series will have been
materially enhanced by the alphabetical Index to all the
verbs specified, which will be found at the end of the
volume, and for the preparation of which I am indebted
to the promptly tendered assistance of Professor Johnson,
whom I have also to thank for the careful revision of
the proof sheets, with exception of those of the last
hundred pages, and for the correction of many errors,
ascribable to typographic inaccuracy, or to m}'' own
inadvertencies.
The chapter on Derivation does not attempt to follow
the detail with which the subject is illustrated in the
PREFACE. vii
Grammar of Sir C. Wilkins. The same copiousness was
no longer necessary, as my Dictionary, however incom-
plete, offers many of the same examples, and sufficiently
exhibits the principles of etymological developement.
By the alphabetical arrangement, however, of the tech-
nical affixes employed in eliminating derivative from
primitive words, a plan adopted from the example of
Professor Bopp, reference to any particular form of
derivatives will have been facilitated, and the process of
their developement, perhaps, have been rendered more
intelligible.
The formation of compound words is described much
in the same manner, but with some slight difference of
arrangement, as by Sir C. Wilkins. In the succeeding
chapter on Syntax, also, I have followed much the same
course, being guided, as he was, by the authority of
native grammarians, although appealing to different
works, and endeavouring to illustrate the rules by more
diversified examples. The subject, however, is yet but
imperfectly investigated. The native authorities restrict
their remarks to the application of the cases of the
nouns, and the tenses of the verbs ; and to have supplied
their deficiencies would have demanded a longer period,
and ampler space, than were compatible with the plan
and purposes of the present publication. My guides
have been principally the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the
poem of Bhatti, but I have drawn examples also from
other printed Sanskrit books.
The Prosody of Sanskrit has been much more suc-
cessfully illustrated than its Syntax; and in the Dis-
sertation of Mr. Colebrooke, in the tenth volume of the
Asiatic Researches, and in the remarks and annotations
of various continental scholars and critics upon the
viii PREFACE.
metres prevailing in the Sanskrit works which they have
edited, abundant materials exist for a comprehensive
treatise upon the laws of Sanskrit metre. In the chapter
upon the subject which I have added to the Grammar,
nothing more has been intended than a brief explanation
of the fundamental principles by which poetical metre is
regulated, and an exemplification of a few of its most
frequently recurring and popular varieties.
As the especial object of the present work is the
introduction of the juvenile student to an elementary
knowledge of the Sanskrit language, I have but rarely
adverted to the affinities which connect it with other
languages ; and in the few allusions which I have
admitted, I have purposed rather to intimate that such
affinities exist, than to explain their nature, or inquire
into their origin or extent. The more advanced student,
who may take an interest in the investigation, will find
in the writings of different continental scholars and
grammarians, and especially in the Comparative Gram-
mar of Professor Bopp, numerous and undeniable proofs
of the close connexion which subsists between the sacred
language of the Hindus and the languages of ancient
Greece and Rome, as well as those of the Celtic, Teutonic,
and Sclavonic nations.
It were superfluous in the present day to offer any
observations upon the value and interest of Sanskrit
literature. The study constitutes an era in the branch
of intellectual inquiry just referred to, and has given
an entirely new character to philology. The principles
of etymological affinity have been placed upon secure
grounds, and the history of languages, and through
them the history of man, has received novel and import-
ant elucidation. Nor is this the only service which it has
PREFACE. ix
rendered to general literature. The history of philosophy
and science is also largely indebted to it ; and in the
civil and religious codes which it has laid open to our
knowledge, and in the mythological and legendary tradi-
tions, and the dramatic and heroic poems, which it offers
to our curiosity, it presents a series of new, interesting,
and instructive pictures of society, in which the features
of a highly artificial, but original civilization are singu-
larly blended with the characteristics of primitive man-
ners and archaicg institutions. The history of mankind
can be but imperfectly appreciated without some ac-
quaintance with the literature of the Hindus.
It is, however, to the educated youth whose manhood
is to be spent in India, and who is there destined to
discharge high duties, and sustain heavy responsibilities
— who is to execute the offices of civilized government
over millions of subject Hindus, and to make that
government a blessing, not a curse, to India — a glory,
not a shame, to Britain ;— it is to him that the study of
Sanskrit commends itself, by considerations of peculiar
utility and importance.
A careful examination of the different dialects which
are spoken in various parts of India is yet to be effected ;
but enough is known to admit of their being distin-
guished as belonging to two great families, that of India
proper, and that of the Dakhin. Of the former, the
members are, as far as we are familiar with them, recog-
nised as Sanskrit. They have undergone great changes ;
have simplified their grammatical structure; have suf-
fered in a greater or lesser degree admixture and adul-
teration from foreign words. They probably also com-
prehend a small portion of a primitive, unpolished, and
scanty speech, the relics of a period prior to civilization :
b
X PREFACE.
but in the names of things of the most ordinary observa-
tion, in terms for the functions of life, as well as the
relations of society, as much as in those words which
are the offspring of civilization, and which spring from
science, philosophy, law, and religion, they are almost
wholly dependent upon Sanskrit ; a knowledge of which
consequently places the members of this family, Bengali,
Hindee, Punjabi, Guzerati, Marhatha, and others, almost
without effort within the power of any one to whom it
may become a duty to acquire either or all of them.
In the south of India the case is somewhat different.
Cultivated languages of local origin are there met with,
largely supplied with words which are not of Sanskrit
origin. There, however, as in the north, the introduc-
tion of Sanskrit was the precursor of civilization, and
deeply impressed it with its own peculiarities. The
spoken languages were cultivated in imitation and rivalry,
and but partially aspired to an independent literature.
The principal compositions in Tamil, Teloogoo, Canara,
and Malayalam, are translations or paraphrases from
Sanskrit works, and largely borrow the phraseology of
their originals : and hence so large a proportion of the
language of education and of society is Sanskrit, that a
knowledge of it is absolutely essential to a correct under-
standing of the spoken dialects of the peninsula.
There is, however, a higher point of view from which
the advantages to the servants of the East India Com-
pany in India of a knowledge of Sanskrit are to be
contemplated, than the aid which it is calculated to
afford them in their executive functions. It will not
only enable them to understand the uttered words of
those with whom they hold official intercourse ; it will
not only teach them to interpret the language of rej)re-
PREFACE. xi
sentation or complaint, or to express the decrees of
justice, or the commands of power; — it will enable
them to understand the people, and to be understood
by them. The popular prejudices of the Hindus, their
daily observances, their occupations, their amusements,
their domestic and social relations, their local legends,
their national traditions, their mythological fables, their
metaphysical abstractions, their religious worship, all
spring from, and are perpetuated by, the Sanskrit lan-
guage. To know a people, these things must be known.
Without such knowledge, revenue may be raised, justice
may be administered, the outward shows and forms of
orderly government may be maintained ; but no influ-
ence with the people will be enjoyed, no claim to their
confidence or attachment will be established, no affection
will be either felt or inspired, and neither the disposition
nor the ability to work any great or permanent improve-
ment in the feelings, opinions, or practices of the country
will be attained. It fortunately happens, it is true,
that much of this indispensable information may now be
acquired through the English language, in consequence
of the valuable translations and dissertations of various
of the Company's most distinguished servants ; but know-
ledge from the fountain head is more precise and effective
than when gleaned from subordinate, and not always
pure or profound, rivulets : and in proportion as it is
effective and precise, will be the respect and tinist of
the native population, the influence and power of their
English masters.
hz
CONTENTS.
Chap. I. Letters . . . (. ; . .
Pronunciation . . \. I .
Classification
Chap. II. Sandhi — Combination of letters
Sect. I. Conjunction of vowels .
Sect. 2,» Conjunction of consonants
Sect. 3. Changes of Visarga
Chap. III. Declension
General rules
Sect. I. Nouns ending in vowels .
CI. I. Nouns ending in '^ and ^r
CI. 2. Nouns ending in ^ and "cT
CI. 3. Nouns ending in "^ and "31
CI. 4. Nouns ending in "^, ^, oj, o|
CI. ^. Nouns ending in ^ . .
CI. 6. Nouns ending in $ . .
CI. 7. Nouns ending in ^ .
CI. 8. Nouns ending in ^ .
Sect. 2,, Nouns ending in consonants
CI. I. Nouns ending in oR, ^, n, V
CI. 2. Nouns ending in % "S[, »T, ^
CI. 3. Nouns ending in r, 7, T, ^ .
CI. 4. Nouns ending in tt, "^t "^^ V
CI. 5. Nouns ending in "q, ifi, ^, H
CI. 6. Nouns ending in T, '^, ^9 "T, H
Nouns in ^nr ....
Nouns in ^ ....
CI. 7. Nouns ending in v, t, 7^, ^
CI. 8. Nouns ending in "^r, "q, ^
CI. 9. Nouns ending in ^ . .
Sect. 3. Adjectives
Sect. 4. Pronouns and pronominal nouns
Sect. 5, Numerals ...
Ordinals
P. I
xiv CONTENTS.
Chap. IV. Indeclinables 90
Adverbs 91
Prepositions . 97
Conjunctions loi
Interjections ]o:j
Expletives 103
Chap. V. Conjugation 104
Sect. I. Roots and indicatory letters .... 104
Sect. 2. Classes of verbs 107
Sect. 3. Moods and tenses no
Sect. 4. Voices 113
Sect. 5. Numbers and persons 114
General principles of conjugation . . 116
Of the augment ^ i2>6
Sect. 6. Formation of the verb . . . . . . 1^2,
Passive voice 135
Sect. 7. Derivative verbs 135
Causals 135
Desideratives 138
Frequentatives 141
Ditto inserting t\ 141
Ditto rejecting ir 143
Impersonals 150
Nominals 150
Sect. 8. Conjugations.
First conjugation . 153
Second 191
Third 309
Fourth 214
Fifth 226
Sixth , . . 231
Seventh 237
Eighth 241
Ninth 243
Tenth 250
Changes of voices 259
Chap. VI. Derivation 268
Sect. I. Verbal derivatives 268
Infinitive 269
Participles 270
Present participles . . - 270
CONTENTS.
XV
Past participles 272
Participles of the second praeterite . . 272
Indefinite past participles 273
Future participles active 279
Ditto passive or neuter 280
Indeclinable participles 287
Adverbial participles 290
Sect. 2. Verbal nouns . . . ^ 291
Sect. 3. Nominal derivatives .^/ 311
CI. I. Miscellaneous affixes 313
CI. 2. Possessives 326
CI. 3. Degrees of comparison ; pronominals ;
numerals 330
CI. 4. Indeclinables 332
Chap. VII. Compound words 336
Sect. I. Dwandwa compounds 338
Sect. 2. Tatpurusha compounds 340
Karmmadharaya Tatpurusha compounds . 343
Dwigu Tatpurusha compounds . . . 346
Tatpurusha comp. with particles and prep. 346
Sect. 3. Bahuvrihi compounds 348
Sect. 4. Indeclinable compounds 354
Sect. 5. General rules 358
Chap. VIII. Syntax 361
Sect. I. Nouns 362
Sect. 2. Adjectives 385
Sect. 3. Pronouns 388
Sect. 4. Indeclinables 389
Sect. 5. Verbs . ... . . 393
Sect. 6. Derivative verbs 407
Sect. 7. Participles 409
Chap. IX. Prosody 415
Sect. I. General rules 415
Sect. 2. Varna-vritta class of metres . . . . 417
Sect. 3. Gaiia-vritta class of metres .... 427
Sect. 4. Matrachhandas class of metres . . . 429
SANSKRIT ALPHABET.
I
Initial.
Medial. Equivalent and power.
Equivalent and power.
^
a, as in America.
al
fa, as in singe.
^n
T a
— casa (Italian).
•z
't
— true.
^
f i
— chi —
-z
'th
•
i
t i
— cosi —
?
a
— dim.
^
o u
— furore —
^
ah
■■
^
Cs 6
— fui
^
n
— none.
'^
t, ri
— ricco —
fT
t
— tongue.
n.
£ ri
— riso —
'q
th
••
■
^
ca Iri
^
d
— den.
^
c^ Iri
^
dh
^
"^ e
— che —
^
n
_ not.
^
■=*> ai
— mai —
TT
P
— point.
w
T 0
— cosa —
TR
ph
— up-hill.
T au
— paura —
■^
b
— bind.
'^f
ah
— (ang)
H
bh
abhor.
w-
: ah
M
m
— man.
■^R k, as
in king.
^
y
— young.
■^ kh -
— khan.
T
r
— rain.
^ g -
- gun.
fT
1
— lion.
ri gh -
— afghan.
'^
V
— voice.
^ n -
— sing.
'ST
s
session.
■^ ch -
— church.
^
tsh
-^ shun.
•S; chh
^
s
— son.
^ j ■
— jet.
I
h
— house.
«: ;k
£
Ir
Varieties : -sr a, ^ ri, ^ 1, ^ e, :^ jh, xrr n, "^ ru, "^or ^ ru.
Numerals: cj^^JiM^Sba^O
3 4
G 7 8 9 10
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER I.
LETTERS.
i HE Sanskrit language is written in different parts of India
in the characters which are in use for the spoken dialects ;
but the alphabet which is regarded as most appropriate to it,
and from which the local alphabets are derived, is that which
is termed Nagari or Devanagari, the alphabet of ^the city/
or of ' the city of the gods,^ being a derivative from Nagara,
' a city/ compounded in the second form with Deva, ^ deus/
* a god/ It appears to have undergone various modifications
from a period of remote antiquity down to the seventh or
eighth century, when the letters assumed the form in which
they now^ occur.
As usually enumerated, the Nagari alphabet comprises forty-
seven letters, the long vowels being considered distinct from
the short ; the vowels are thus fourteen : the consonants,
among which the aspirated are distinguished from the corre-
sponding unaspirated letters, are thirty-three. The consonants
are classified according to the organ chiefly concerned in their
articulation ; and in order to effect their utterance, the short
vowel ^a' is attached to their respective sounds.
B
LETTERS.
Vowels.
W a, ^ a, ^ i, ^i, ^ u^ "gi u, ^ ri, "^ ri, ^ Iri, ^ Iri,
1? e, ^ ai. ^ o, ^ au.
Conlsoiiaints.
Gutturals, ^ ka, ^ kha, n ga, tt gha, "3? li.
Palatals, ^ cha, "S^ chha, »T ja, Vf^jha, ^ n.
Cerebrals, z t'a, 7 t'ha, ^ S.a, ^ &ha, ^ na.
Dentals, ir ta, "^r tha, ^ da, \r dha, ff na.
Labials, xf pa, xr pha, "^ ba, H bha, tt ma.
Semivowels, it ya, t ra, c5 la, ^ va.
Sibilants and aspirate, ^ sa, "^ sha, t^ sa, ^ ha.
To these are to be added two signs, which are occasionally
attached to vowels, termed Anuswara and Visarga. The first
is a dot over and after a letter; the second consists of two
dots after it. The first denotes a slight nasal ; the second, a
soft aspirate; as, ^ an (ang), "m ah. Another additional
character is 3S, with a sound partaking of ^ P and ' r/ but it is
peculiar to the Vedas. Some lists add "^ ksha and ^ jna, but
these are compounds ; the first of oj; k and "R sh, and the
second of IT j and ^ n. The first is sometimes expressed
by ^x.'
In designating a letter, the word cRTt kara is added to it;
as, -^HohK a-kara, the letter 'a;' wm, ka-kara, the letter
'k,^ &c.
When a vowel is uttered as an initial, or before a conso-
nant, it retains the form above given : when it is uttered after
a consonant, or as a medial or final, it assumes a different
form, which is written before or after, above or below, the
consonant with which it is associated ; with exception of ^ '^a,'
which, as a medial or final, is always left unwritten, being
understood to be combined with the consonant, and articu-
lated with it, as in the alphabet, unless the consonant be final,
which is denoted by a mark at its foot, a Virama or ^ rest,^ as
COMPOUND LETTERS.
^ k; or unless it be conjoined with another consonant, as
below. The forms of the vowels as medials and finals are,
T a, fiyji, ^ u, ^u, ^ ri, . ri, ^ Iri, ^ Iri,
, -^ ai, > o, 1
or in combination, ^ ak, ^SHR aka, ^TT^T aka, ^ iki, ^ iki,
'^ uku, -gr^uku, ^-^ rikri, "^ rikri, oj^lriklri, o|;3; Iriklri,
^^ eke, 1!% aikai, ^ftoFt oko, w^ aukau, w4 akaii, ^rsfi: akah.
When two or more consonants come together, without any-
intermediate vowel, they are combined into one compound
consonant — in which in general the component members may-
be recognised without much difficulty — one consonant being
subjoined to the other, as in ^r^ akka, w^ achcha, where the
transverse line of the lower is omitted ; or one consonant
following the other, as ^ptt agga, ^SIST ajja, where the per-
pendicular line of the first of the two is rejected. In some
cases the elements of the combination are not so obvious.
The letters most frequently recurring in conjunction with pre-
ceding consonants are tt ya and t ra. The first is easily
discernible in
^ kya, ^ chya, m tya, ?r dya, xq pya, J^ mya, &c. :
the second is usually designated by a short transverse stroke
at the foot of the letter or letters ; as,
■g; or ^ kra, ?i gra, ^ or ^ tra, TT dra, ir pra, ^ krya.
When T^ precedes a consonant, it is placed at the top of it in
the shape of a crescent ; as, ^ rka in wk arka, * the sun ;' or
^ rmma in vS dharmma, ^ duty/
The difficulties from this source soon disappear with prac-
tice. Some of the most useful combinations are subjoined.
It may be also here observed, that some of the single letters
may be written in a difierent manner, of which examples are
given at the foot of the Table at the head of this chapter.
B 2
LETTERS.
IRkka
WTktrya
^ grya
^ nghra
^jya
J {{a.
^ n^a
^ttya
j^ twa
^ dda
^ dbhya
K dhna
r^ nda
TT pna
^bja
ff{ mma
"^ schya
"g«I shfya
^5^ skha
^ spha
g hna
^kta
^ksha
TTghna
"W chcha
^jra
^{hya
^ Aa
"^ ttra
W tsa
i[ ddha
?r dma
wrdhma
v^ ndra
^ ppa
-sjTbbha
W msa
^S sna
"g shtVa
W sta
W sma
V hma
Compound
gjkna
^ kshya
xJTghma
^ chchha
Wjwa
^ S.hra
inrMya
^tna
l^tsna
3f ddhya
^ dya
lisr dhwa
^ ndha
"^r pma
«r bhya
"^Ipa
"i^r sra
"^ sh{rya
^ stra
^ smya
^hya
consonants.
"^kma
^ kshwa
1j Ilka
Tti chma
^jjha
J^nia.
XF Awa
TW tma
W tsya
^ dna
^dra
^ nta
■^ ndhra
5r pla
v^bhwa
''5R Ima
^ swa
W shna
^ stha
^ sya
ihra
^kwa
^khya
^liga
"^chchhra
^ ncha
;q3n^ha
r3R tka
W( tmya
W dga
^ dba
1" dwa
v^ ntya
^ nna
T? pwa
^ mna
^ vya
"^^ ssa
"*ir shma
^ sna
^ sra
^hla
M ktwa
irgra
^ ligha
^jja
^nja
^n^a
W tta
^ trya
idgha
^ dbha
ST dwya
•^ntra
"R pta
"•^ psa
w?mpa
"^ scha
? sh{a
^ ska
^ spa
^ swa
5|' hwa.
PRONUNCIATION.
Few observations are required regarding the pronunciation
of the letters of the Sanskrit alphabet. As a general rule, the
vowels are to be sounded like those of the Italian alphabet,
except the first, the short * a/ which has the obscure sound
of that letter in such English verbs as ^ adorn/ "' adore/ or in
the word ^ America ^.^ The vowels ri and Iri differ not in
' This is the only cause of embarrassment in the system here followed of
expressing Sanskrit words in English characters. It is difficult to our
practice to pronounce *ban' as if it was written *bun;' as in Sanskrit,
Bandhana, * binding/ is to be pronounced Bundhunu ; but u is necessarily
restricted to its proper office, as in Italian, * fui,' * furore.'
PRONUNCIATION. 5
sound from the syllables so compounded. They take their
place among vowels as subject to euphonic changes, of which
as syllables they would not be susceptible. The consonants
are in general pronounced as in English, and we have, it may
be suspected, several of the sounds for which the Sanscrit
alphabet has provided distinct signs, but of which signs are
wanting with us. This seems to be the case with the nasals
and the cerebrals. We write but one ^n,^ but we vary its
articulation, according to the consonants it precedes, as a gut-
tural, palatal, cerebral, and dental, in such words as ^ conquer,^
' singe,^ ^ none,^ and ^ content.^ So w^e write but one ^ t' and
one ^ d,^ but their sounds differ in such words as ' trumpet'
and ^ tongue,' ^ drain' and ' den :' in the first of which they
are cerebrals, in the second dentals : the term cerebral has been
adopted to express the Sanskrit Murddhanya from Murddhan
^«| ^ the head,' as these letters are articulated by touching
the palate with the tongue farther back in the mouth than is
practised in other articulations. The ^ v when compounded
with another consonant is pronounced and WTitten ^ w,' as
in fi" dwi, ' two.' Of the three sibilants, the first ^ s' ^ is
less decidedly ' sh' than the second, as in our ^ ss' in ' ses-
sion ;' it is a palatal letter : t^ sha is a cerebral, as in
* shore :' and ^ is a dental sibilant, as in ' sun.' Anuswara
is a slight nasal, rather stronger than the ^n' of the French
' bon.' It is used in writing, however, as a substitute for
other nasals, and then in general retains their pronunciation ;
as ^ ahan for ^T^ aham, ^ I,' is equally pronounced Aham ;
and ^T^cRTT: ahankara is pronounced ^TfUHl ahaiikara, for which
it is written. Before semivowels and the aspirate ^ the Anu-
swara is most appropriately used, and, whether original or
substituted, has the same nasal sound, as in ^T5r ansa, * a part,'
and iff^nr sahsaya, ^ doubt ;' in the latter of which it takes the
place of the final of ^ sam, ^ cum.' The aspirate denoted by
Visarga is rarely marked : TTR: Ramah is commonly articulated
as Rama.
O LETTERS.
CLASSIFICATION.
Besides the classification of the letters of the alphabet spe-
cified above^ there is another which it may be sometimes useful
to refer to. In this system the letters are thus arranged :
The object of this arrangement is to provide a convenient
mode of designating any particular set of letters to the exclu-
sion of all others^ which is done by combining any prior letter
with the consonant at the end of a series^ so as to form a
Pratyahara or syllable, denoting all the letters that intervene :
thus, ^r?^ means the whole alphabet ; "^ the vowels only ;
^75^ the consonants only ; ^nrr means W ^ T, inclusive of their
corresponding long vowels ; ^sr^ denotes the simple vowels ;
^ the diphthongs ; ^ the semivowels ; and ^ffjj^ all the con-
sonants exclusive of the nasals and semivowels. Other com-
binations may be formed on the same principle, with a like
purport.
There are some distinctions also affecting the vowels and
consonants generally, which it is advisable to particularise.
1 . Vowels have three times or quantities : they are, TT^
Laghu, ^ fight' or ' short f t^ Guru, ^ heavy' or ^ long f and
giT Pluta, ^ prolated.' They have also three accents, and are,
^<IW Udatta, ^ grave;' W^TW Anudatta, ^ acute;' and ^fT5T
Swarita, ' compounded' or ' circumflex.' The long and short
vowels are separately represented, as ^ a, ^rr a : the prolated
is the long a with three lines underneath it, or a figure of three
behind it, as ^ or ^ ^. The accents are thus severally marked;
W, ^, ^. They are rarely used, except in MSS. of the Vedas.
In combination and in inflexion the vowels are subject to two
changes, or rather substitutions, in which other vowel forms
take their places. These are called Jjm GuAa and "^flf Vriddhi,
rendered by Dr. Wilkins ^ conversion' and ' augmentation.'
COMBINATION OF LETTERS. 7
The Gufia substitutes are ^ ^ ^ ^flT. ^n^.
The Vriddhi substitutes are ^ ^ ^ ^3rR WToF.
Thus the verb H bhu, 'to be/ in its inflexions is subject to
Guiia ; that is, it becomes ^rt bho, ' o^ being substituted for ' u.'
In some of its secondary derivatives the 'uMs subject to
Vriddhi : thus i|W bhiita, ' a being/ ' an element/ furnishes
the adjective vufdch bhautika, * elementary/ This ^\^ll be more
intelligible as we proceed. It is only at present essential to
recollect the purport of the terms Guiia and Vriddhi.
2. Consonants. It is at present more important to notice
a distinction of the consonants into two classes : some of them
are hard, some soft. Wilkins calls the former surds ; the
latter, sonants ; in which he is followed by Professor Bopp.
The hard or surd consonants are the two first letters of the
five first classes of the alphabet and the sibilants ; the soft or
sonant consonants are the three last letters of each class, the
semivowels, and the aspirate.
Hard or surd letters, oB;s'"^'S[7<r'iT"'!T'TTfi^"^^.
Sofl or sonant, iTXTT^^^ir^TTr^V^'^HiT^Tlc?^^.
CHAPTER II.
SANDHI COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
Contrivances for avoiding the concurrence of harsh or
incongruous sounds, or the unpleasing hiatus which arises
from keeping sounds apart that are disposed to coalesce, are
not wanting in all languages. They are in general, however,
rather poetical or prosodial than grammatical ; such as the
elision of a final ' e' before an initial ' e^ in such a concurrence
as " the etherial height of heaven/^ which it was formerly the
fashion to write, as the measure demanded, '^ th' etherial -," to
say nothing of the synalepha and ecthlipsis of Latin verse,
" Monstr' horrend' inform' ingens," &c. Other instances of
8 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
a regard for euphony, however, do occur independent of
prosody, and especially in Greek, in which many of the
euphonic changes are analogous to those provided for in San-
skrit. In no language has the subject, however, been so
systematically investigated as in Sanskrit ; and the changes to
which letters are subject for the sake of euphony are nume-
rous, and carefully defined, forming that part of Sanskrit
grammar which is termed wfsg Sandhi, ' a holding together,'
* a junction f or uTi^ril Sanhita, ^ an association,' ^ a conjunc-
tion ;' either being derived from the verb compounded of the
preposition ^ sam, ^ cum,' and VT dha, ' to have,' ' to hold.'
SECTION I.
Conjunction of vowels.
1. When a vowel terminating a word is followed by a similar
vowel beginning another word, whether they both be short or
both long, or one be short and one long, they combine into
one long homogeneous vowel : thus
a with a makes a; as, ^m Daitya + ^rf^ ari =^i«nft Daityari,
' a foe of the demons,' a name of Vishiiu.
a with a makes a ; as, ^ sa -f ^TTSn^ agachhat = ^Mi^^r^ sa-
gachhat, ' she went.'
i with i makes i ; as, ^fw iti + ^ iva = ^[rfN" itiva, ' so indeed.'
1 with 1 makes i ; as, ^ S'ri + ^ isa = "^fhfr S'risa, ^ the lord
ofS'ri.' -
u with u makes li ; as, >TR bhanu + Tc^ udaya = ^TPJ^
bhaniidaya, ' sun-rise.'
ri with ri makes ri ; as, <j nri + "^f^ rishi = "^i^ nrishi, ^ a
man- (a mortal) sage.'
The concurrence of a final and initial oS never perhaps takes
place. TJ may however follow ^, and as they are considered
as homogeneous, a long "^ ri may be the result ; as, ^V^
hotri + o^chK Irikara makes -^IrichK ' the letter Iri (a sort of
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS. 9
incantation) of the Hotri/ or officiating priest. The concur-
rence of "^5 however, either with another ^ or with oj, is not
liable to any very strict rule, and the substitute may be either
a short or long ^; as, ^t^ with either ^<*ti. or o^ohii, may be
either ^"lij<+K or ^^ftt.
2. If a word which ends in either "^ a or ^t a be followed by
a word beginning with a different vowel, then a Guiia element
is substituted for both ; that is, if ^ or ^TT precedes ^ or ^, the
substitute is Tj; if "3" or "gi, it is ^; if "^ or "^j it is ^; if
"^ or '^, w^ ; as,
Tcr upa + ^ Indra = T^ Upendra, a name of Krishna.
Tc^ yatha + ^fwff ipsitam + "q-^f^ff yathepsitam, ^ as desired.^
7T^ Gaiiga + "^^or*^udakam = 7T^t^.?^Gangodakam, ^Ganges
water.'
JT^ maha -f "^f^ rishi = iT^it maharshi, ^ a great sage.'
W^ tava -f- oJ^BR Irikara = IT^^R tavalkara, ' thy letter og.'
3. If a word ends, as in the last case, with ^ or ^ and
is followed by one beginning with a diphthong, a Vriddhi
letter is substituted for both ; that is, if ^ be followed by i»
or ^, the substitute is ^ ; if by ^ or ^r, it is ^ ; as,
"^HIC Krishna + ^oR^ ekatwam = <Jit^|a(ir4 Krishnaikatwam,
' oneness with Krishna.'
fwr vidya -f- ^^ eva = "f^&^ vidyaiva, ^ knowledge,' * verily.'
^ deva + <^»y-5i aiswaryam = ^^vjSj devaiswaryam, ^ the
divinity of a god.'
W^ alpa + ^iW^ ojas = "^r^if^ alpaujas, ' of little radiance.'
•qiHT bala + -41 14^44 autsukyam = ■ctlcflf^^M balautsukyam,
' the maiden's sorrow.'
There are some exceptions to these two last rules, which it
may be convenient here to insert. With regard to these and
to other anomahes and exceptions, however, it may be advis-
c
10 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
able once for all to recommend to the student, in an early
stage of his studies, to content himself with a passing notice
of them, and not allow them to divert his attention from the
general rules. Familiar with the rules, he will find no diffi-
culty in the occasional deviations from them which occur.
a. W^ aksha before "grf^t uhiiii makes W«|l f^nf) akshauhini,
' a large army,^ instead of ^3T^frfl^, as it should do by rule 3.
h. When "^ ir, a radical signifying ' go,^ or any of its
derivatives, follows the '^ a^ of ^ swa, the substitute is not ' e,'
but ^ ai ;' as ^§t ^ self-going,^ ^ independence ;' ^ri.# ^ an inde-
pendent female sen-ant,' i. e. not a slave.
c. Verbal derivatives from the roots ^ttt in, ^ go/ and ^J
edh, ' increase,^ take the Vriddhi substitute after the vowel ^
of a preposition ; as, T^ + ^frT = "^^fw ^ he approaches ;' "gil +
^\|^ = ■g^^iTfl' ^ it increases.^ In general, verbs beginning with
IJ or ^ retain their own vowel, and cause the elision of the
final ^ of a preposition ; as, IT before ^»r^ makes ^ir^ ' he
trembles ;' ir before ^^tWjT makes iff^ ' he sprinkles.' The
^ which is evolved from "3^, substituted for the ^ of ^ vah,
^ bear,' takes Vriddhi after the short ^ a,' as fV^TT^ ' all-
sustaining,' becomes in the ace. plur. f^^y!^:
d. Derivatives from ^^ ish, ^ go,' ' wish,' take the Vriddhi
letter after the ^ a' of it pra^ as ^ praisha, ' a messenger ;' so
do those of "35^ uh, ' reason ;' as "m^ prau^ha, ^ proud,' ' arro-
gant.' ^ ish, ^ glean,' takes Guna after it, as Jn? presha, ^ a
gleaner.'
e. Roots beginning with "^ after a preposition ending in
^ a,' substitute the Vriddhi form ^n^ ar, as grr + ^^ifri makes
4m-q|rrt uparchchhati, ' approaches ;' by rule 2. it should have
been siM-clfw uparchchhati. The Vriddhi ^sn^ is also substituted
for an initial "^ when the word it commences is compounded
with a preceding word ending in ^ a,' and having the sense of the
instrumental case : thus "^ sukha and ^w rita may be joined
together, as ^H\^ sukhartta, '^ affected by joy ;' "^ftlT sita and
"^W rita, as ^tlTT# sitartta, ^ affected by cold.' If the first
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS. 11
member have not the sense of the instrumental case, the
words combine agreeably to rule 2 ; as, in?? parama and ^fff
rita make xn?T^ paramartta, ^ last- gone:' the same if the
first word retains the sign of the instrumental case, the words
coalescing in virtue of their juxta-position, but not forming a
compound : thus ^^ + ^TT makes "JJ^W^ sukhenartta.
/. The word "^^ rifia doubled or preceded by If, ^ffnn:,
cfi^fc5j '^n^, or ^, substitutes the Vriddhi syllable ^ix, not the
Guna ^TT: ; as, "■^lilnS rinarna, ^ debt of a debt f TH^ prarna,
' principal debt ;' ^r^nnrnj vatsatararna, ' debt of a mule ;'
cifiHI^ vasanarna, ' debt of a cloth ;' ^^TO Dasarna, name of a
country; r^^iiiBl Dasarna, name of a river, the Dosaron of
Ptolemy.
ff. Verbs formed from nouns beginning with "^ take either
the Guna or Vriddhi substitute after the ^ of a preposition :
-^wNrfrf rishabhiyati, ' he resembles or acts like a rishabha,'
i. e. a bull, with iff pra makes either lT%>^hrfrT or XTrt^ft^rnr.
So with an initial og^, as li«=hll3^rrt or XTT^RTCNfff. When the
initial is the long vowel ^^j either no coalescence takes place,
or the change is to the Guna syllable ; as, "^ and ^qhlO^fri
make either <fq^cM<}nfrt or Tq^rc^lfd'.
h. When "^ as the initial of a noun follows an inflected
noun ending in a short vowel, it may remain unaltered, or
follow rule 2 : thus w^ and "^fEf may make either ?rf fl or
i. Verbs formed from nouns beginning with ^ or ^ fol-
lowing a preposition ending in ^, either cause its elision, or
substitute the Vriddhi letter; as, "grxr and iid^fll^fd e^akiyati
make either dM^c^^ilfri or tIt^rHtI^ ' he is sheepish.'
k. When the particle ^^, ' verily,' ^ indeed,' is used to
intimate uncertainty, it causes the ehsion of a preceding ^;
as, ^ kwa and ^5^ eva make #"q' kweva in such a sentence as
#^a*j& ^ Where will you dine ?' When certainty is affirmed,
the combination follows rule 3 ; as, ^ i^xrr ^%^ hV^ ' I shall
certainly dine with you, my friend.'
c 2
12 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
/. The words ^rtw otu, ' a cat/ and ^fti? osht'ha, ^ the Up/
when compounded with a preceding word ending in ^^ either
follow rule 3, or cause the elision of the preceding vowel;
as^ ^<55 sthdla + ^sitg = ^c^ or ^|c5^ ' a fat cat f f^ vimba
+ ^iV? is either f%^^ or fV^? ' cherry-hpped/ If the words
coalesce without forming a new compound^ the rule is adhered
to : ir^ -f- ^iW make rTTr? ^ the lip of thee.'
4. When a word ends with any simple vowel^ except ^ or
"m, and is followed by a word that begins with a dissimilar
vowel;, or with a diphthong, the latter is unaltered, but the
former is changed to its analogous semivowel : thus ^ and ^
are changed to ^ y, "g" and "31 to ^ v, "^ "^ to t: r, and "c? «|[ to
■?J 1 ; as,
^fw + ^rnW!^ = ^[im«R^ ityakarnya, ' thus having heard.^
^^ + WRTf = ^ip^l^ri rijwayata, * simple-minded.'
>JT5 + W^T = >nw^ bhratransa, ^ a brother's portion.'
"55 + 'ilHVHi = HT^^ lanubandha, ' the adjunct ( Anubandha)
Lri.'
a. There are various rules for the correct orthography of
words coalescing in this form, but they are amongst the incon-
veniences of Sanscrit grammar, and are little observed in prac-
tice : it is enough here to remark, that under them the first
word may be also spelled ^^WHrS, l^rurnfiT^, or ^^^nnr^iT!^,
doubling the first conjunct consonant, the second, or both.
In general, however, the simplest form is used, unless the first
of the conjunct consonants be ^, when the second should be
doubled ; as, iftd ' Gauri' (the goddess) + ^fT^ ' here,' is most
coiTectly written iTT^igr Gauryyatra. So also in uncompounded
words the letter t: doubles the consonant conjoined with it,
as cirtr kartta, "sr?^ karmma, \n# dharmma, although it is not
uncommon to omit the duplication in writing.
b. In some instances, when the words are not compounded,
CONJUNCTION OF VOWELS. 13
and not inflected, a final simple vowel followed by a dissi-
milar vowel may either conform to the rule, may remain
unaltered, or, if long, may be changed to its short vowel : thus
W^ chakri + ^T^ atra, ^ The discus -armed (Vishnu), here!*
may make either ^d^d or ^qfg? ^^^ or w^ ^ssr^. If a new
compound be formed, the rule must be followed, and the
semivowel substituted ; as, i^ Hari + ^sr^ artha makes ^^Q
Haryyartha, ^ the object of Hari :' and so it must if an inflec-
tive termination be added to the word to form a case, as ttl^M
Gauryyah, ' of the goddess Gauri/
5. When a diphthong ending a word is followed by any
vowel or diphthong — even though the latter be the same —
beginning a word, the following syllables are severally substi-
tuted for the antecedent diphthong :
For Tj — w^ ay, as '^ -|- ^PT makes MM^i chayana, ' gathering/
— % — ^^rn^ ay, as % + ^ra makes Hm* nayaka, ' a leader/
— "^ — ^ av, as fTBrft + ^ = PmilN Vishnave, ' to Vishnu/
— ^ — ^rr^ av, as "5^ 4- ^ = "ggrrfw putravimau, ^ these
two children/
«. These syllables may be substituted for diphthongs before
Tl when it is the initial of the affix ^, forming participial
nouns in certain senses.
% from -(1^4-^= 'H^I jayya, ^ what may be conquered/
>Tt from >T^+ in^ = H^ bhavya, ' what may be' or ' is to be/
•ft + TH^ = fTT^ navya, relating to ^ a ship,' ^ naval.'
b. ift before xn^ substitutes ^ for the final, iT^ gavya,
^relating to a cow;' also before the affix ^, as iT^frT ^a
measure ;' but this is pecuhar to the Vedas. In ordinary use,
the words are ^ '^fw ' a measure of two kos/
6. Concurrent heterogeneous letters in some cases do not
follow any of the preceding rules, or they follow them option-
ally ; or one of the two vowels becomes quiescent, or is ejected.
14 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
These are termed TPpri Pragrihya, literally ^ what must be
taken out/ ' excipienda/
a. The finals ^ "gr and ij, when they are the terminations of
nouns in the dual number, are unchanged before other vowels
or diphthongs : ^^ im ' these two Haris / >TT^ ^ ' these two
suns/ W^ ^n|^^ these two women/
h. ^ml" the nom. plur. masc. of the pronoun ^^^ ^ that/
does not coalesce with a following vowel : ^r^ft ^^: ^ those
lords/
c. The ^ of fofig may be unchanged, or may substitute the
semivowel W^ before a vowel, as foR^T "3^ or f^m% '^What is
said?
d. ^ or "31 substituted, as they sometimes irregularly are,
for the proper ending of the locative case, are unchanged, as
^ft^ nt^ ^fvfw: ' Soma relying on Gauri / ?n6" for i^^T'^.
e. Prolated vowels, pluta, are incapable of combination ;
ijf^ "aiWT ^I^ ^ Come, Krishna (as if in calling), here/
f, ^ and wt being the terminations of an inflected word,
cause a following w to be ejected ; its elision is however
usually denoted by a pecuhar character; as, ^P%s^ ' O fire !
here/ f^wtsw ^O Vishnu ! here/
g. The ^ of ift is subject to various modifications before
^ : both may be unchanged, ^ may be elided, or wt may be
changed to ^r^ ava: thus Wt and ^lit make ift ^nt? 'fts^, or
^TRI' ^ is changed to ^T^ ava before ^^:^ and ^[^, making
by rules i . and i. ^\^'\'^ ^ a lattice,^ and J|^r^ a name of
Krishna ; also before f ^, making ^^^: \ or it may be changed
before this word to ^"^ av, by rule 5, regularly making n^t^
' lord of kine/
h. When the short vowel ^ is followed by the sacred mono-
syllable ^sft'^ Om, or by the preposition ^rr compounded with
a verb, it is rejected : thus f^nTR + "^ft»( becomes f^rift^R:
'Adoration (Om) to S'iva !' and f^^ + ^ (from ^T + ^ff)
makes %^f^ ' O S'iva, come !'
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS. 15
i. Particles, when single vowels, are not changed before
other vowels ; as, ^ ^ — t -g^ ^ O Indra ! O lord of Uma !'
^rr is an exception, if it implies diminution : ^rr 4- Tcnf makes
^Ui| oshnam, ' a little warm.' As an interjection it is un-
changed : ^rr ^ ' Ah, indeed !' The final ^ of a particle is
unchanged : ^r^ ^"^t ' Ho, deities.'
k. The final ^ of a vocative case takes various forms before
the particle ^fiT ; as, fTOrft ^fw, f^W ^W^ or f^^fTfrT.
/. In a particular class of compound words the initial of
the second word is preserved, and the last vowel of the pre-
ceding word is rejected ; in one case, along with the consonant
by which it is followed : thus
^Tofi + W5^ = "^T^F^ sakandhu, ' a sort of potherb.'
"^ + ^T^ = "^"^ karkandhu, ^ the jujube.'
c6l^-c^ + ^T — cgl^^c^l^ laiigalisa, ' the handle of a plough.'
»T"rt -h ^^ = TT^ipr marttanfl^a, ' the sun.'
^TrRT + f^ = T^TfNr manisha, ' intellect.'
SECTION II.
Combiifiation of consonants.
We must now recollect the distinction which has been
pointed out (p. 7) with regard to the two classes of consonants,
as hard or surd, and soft or sonant ; as, in addition to such
rules as affect peculiar letters, there are one or two general
rules which it will be of great use to bear in mind.
7. When two consonants come together, and are affected
by no special rule, there will be no change, if they are both
hard or both soft; but if they are of different enunciation,
and one is hard, and the other is soft, then the first of the
two must be changed to a letter of the same quality as the
second, which will be the hard or soft letter of the class to
which it belongs ; as, "SR to n, or n to ^ ; ^ to if, or »r to ^ ;
7 to ^ or ^ to ^ ; W to ^ or ^ to W ; xr to "^ or -q- to "q. The
further exemplification of this rule may thus be stated : —
«. If the consonants be both hard, there is no change:
16 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
thus, before the termination ^, the nouns skrvasak, harit, ap,
retain their finals, as ^§5(<+^, ^ftjf, W^, ^T^ before t^fff is
^T^rrfw ^ lord of speech/
b. If both are soft, there is no change : ^ before f>nT is
^^rfk: adbhih, ^ by waters/
c. A hard before a soft consonant must be changed to a
soft consonant of its own class : thus ^n^ iftwi ' the song of
the lord/ becomes vrT^trTT bhagavad-gita, 't' being changed to
^ d :' W^ before *f changes its final to "sr, and becomes ^nsr,
^ water-born/ ' a lotus/
d. A soft consonant before a hard consonant must be
changed to the hard consonant of its own class : fk^, ' to
break/ before IT^ changes ^ to it, >N^ ^ to be broken / so it
does before i|, and ^ft^H^ becomes Tft^fnT^ ^ in the destroyers
of races/
8. If the antecedent consonant be an aspirated letter, it is
not only modified by the preceding rule, but whatever form it
takes it is the unaspirated letter ; an aspirate cannot precede
an unaspirated letter, nor can two aspirated consonants come
together. Thus in the combination ^fv+^T^dadhi-atra, where
by rule 4. it makes ^rzj^ dadhyatra, and by the following
remark a. the V dh may be doubled, the duplication requires
that the first member shall be unaspirated, and the word
must be written, not ^i»I^ dadhdhyatra, but ^W daddhyatra :
so liV and 11 become "31^; T^H and V, c53T; «fi^ and fn^,
•2B^^; and f^wfc?!^ and «rnT, fqc^fc^J**!!*!^, the 73", which is
a hard letter, being first changed to the unaspirated or, and or
being changed to it before the soft aspirate H.
9. A hard consonant, when final, is changed to a soft
consonant; and a final aspirated consonant, to an unaspi-
rated : thus, ^T^ becomes ^p^ ; and f%^fH^, f%wfc5^.
When however it occurs before a pause, that is, when
not followed immediately by any letter, the change to a soft
consonant is optional : thus the nom. sing, of TT^ is either
^T^ or "mJl ; of fq^f^J^, f%wfc55^ or -fc5'^.
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS. 17
10. Final hard consonants, followed by words beginning
with vowels, are changed to soft (the vowels being soft or
sonant letters) ; as, ^t^ + f;^ becomes ^rrft^ Vagisa, ^ god of
speech/ a name of Vrihaspati ; not ^ the god of wine/ as Sir
Wm. Jones conjectured, from the accidental resemblance of
Vagisa and Bacchus.
When hard and aspirated consonants are followed by the
terminations of the cases which open with vowels, they are no
longer regarded as final, and are therefore not subject to
change: ^f^^ makes ^f^r^ — ^§^(ohT; f%wfc5^j fs^^fc?^ —
r«ic^rc4^ &c.
11. A consonant of the dental class, it "^ ^ V «T, preceding
a consonant of the palatal class, ^ "S? iT ^ >T ^^ or of the cere-
bral class, 7 7 "? ^ W, but excepting the sibilant (^), is changed
to the corresponding letter of that class; that is, IT ^ are
changed to ^ or t; ^ V to ifT or ^; and ^ to ^r or w.
^ + f^ = ^^ ^ pure reason.'
7T^+ ifl^ = jtt^ ' that life."
TTi^ 4- "^1^ = H^^HI ' having heard that.'
^rrf^^ + 'Ttl = "5nf#^^ a name of Vishnu.
inr + ^Nrr = TT^^ * a comment on that.'
mP*^ + ^^ = ^f^iwl<*^ ' O discus-armed ! thou goest.'
Before the cerebral sibilant, the dentals are unchanged, as
K»T Wff ' being the sixth.'
12. Dentals are also changed to cerebrals, when following
cerebrals; as, the affix 1^ with the verb fq^, 'to grind/
forms ^Y pesht'ri, ' a grinder.' They are not so changed
when they are radical letters, as "^^ ^ ' they six.'
13. Dental consonants before the letter cj are changed to
c5; as, Trn; + fc5JWfiT=fTfw^ff 'he writes that/ H^ + fc^^fw
makes >TTrfw^rfiT; as crvv and Xi'yw make crvWe'ya), A pecu-
liar mark is sometimes inserted to denote the change of the
nasal, as H^ffw^fw.
14. A nasal of the same class may be substituted for any
D
18 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
final consonant, except t or f , before a word beginning with a
nasal ; as,
^T^ + JTUfff = "^T^ «rTfw van nayati, ^ speech guides/
"^ + «T^fw = iiiU"c| fri shannavati, ' ninety- six/
V7: + HTTT = M^HI^ shanmasa, ' six months/
Vj^ + ^[TTft = ^fl^lft: Etan-Murari, " that Vishnu/
a. This rule does not preclude the operation of the general
rule, by which concurrent consonants must be assimilated ; it
only makes it optional : thus for "TT^ HilPcf we may also write
^TT H^Pd ; and for inn^ ^trfiC:, TnT^uft:; the nasals being
sonants.
b. The rule is absolute in one case, when the following
word is a technical affix; such as ^T[y implying, when con-
joined with nouns, ^consisting of;' and iTTW^ implying ^ so
much,' ^ merely ;' as, TH^ with ifir makes only '^r^*<n vanmaya,
' made of speech,' ^ eloquent ;' and WW with W(^ is WSTT^ tan-
matra, ' merely that,' ' a primary element.'
15. «T is changed to TIT in the genitive case of leiT ^six;' also
in the words H^Pri and «T^ after "q^ ; as, "^^ shaniiam, "q^rrfw
shannavati, myj|0 shannagari ; the z of "q^ being changed to
W by rule 14.
16. Before a sibilant, T and w may insert respectively the
letters ^ and z ; as, irr^ before ^w makes tttt ^ tr? or TTT^ "^
' sixth anterior,' and ^^TTtt^ + "^ = '^'T^ ^ "^ * sixth numerator :'
and 7 or ^ or Tf, before the dental sibilant, may insert the
dental w ; as, H^fc5^ "^r^ or T^fcJ^ rFT^ '^ the bee endures ;'
and ^ ^: or lEnri^ ^: ^ he being.'
17. The nasals T ^ «T, terminating a word, when preceded
by a short vowel, and followed by any vowel as the initial of
a subsequent word, may be doubled ; as,
irq^ + ^^n^ = Hi*|TI^ ' he sits facing the west.'
wm + ^ = ^iiiul^r * the lord of an excellent class.'
tT»T5| + ^ = TT5Tf%fw 'O king! thus/
18. rT following ^ immediately, or tc or "q either immedi-
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS. 19
ately or separated by an intervening guttural or labial conso-
nant, a vowel, % % '^, Visarga, or Anuswara deduced from if or
»T, is changed to w; as^ "^Tf becomes ^nn ^debt;^ TTft:+ fTfr =
Mfuid ^ bowed/ If final it is unchanged, as ^^.
19. A final jt terminating an inflected word may be changed
to Anuswara before a consonant; as, for ^ft?^ read ^ ^ ' I
salute Hari ;' so for in^ read w "^^Rfff ' he laughs at him.' Be-
fore IT5^ the final of ^ is unalterable ; as, w?SVrf ' a universal
monarch/ It is unchanged before a vowel ; as, ^n^TTiT: ' I
(am) come/
20. TT is optionally changed to Anuswara before ^ in con-
junction with JT, as f^ or f^ ?r?J"irfiT; but Anuswara derived
from TR may become % "?j, or % before ^ combined with these
semivowels severally ; as, fsfi or f^ ^, ftp or fo|r?5 ^T^xrfTT, f^
or foR"^ S^^^fiT. It may become rf before ^ combined with cf,
as f4 or foFT ^TT.
21. Anuswara followed by any consonant, except the semi-
vowels, sibilants, and ^, is changed, if in the middle of a word,
to the nasal of that class to which the consonant following it
belongs : ^ + f^ = ^H^^ti ' marked ;^ ^ + fqw = ^f^H ' wor-
shipped.'
a. If it be the final of an inflected word, the change is
optional; as, ^Tf»^ + "SfiK = "^^FR or ^TflJTt ^egoism;' T# or
H^^CIPm ^ thou doest ;' r# or r^^ ^[^[rftr ^ thou givest.'
b. If the following consonant be a semivowel, the Anuswara
may be optionally changed to the nasal form of the semivowel,
which is denoted by a peculiar mark above it; as, ^inr or
^^hm ^restraint;' xi<^"3R or 4wN ^ to what world;' WfF^ or
^f^WX: ' a year.'
22. Anuswara may be substituted for a medial ^ or ??,
when followed by a sibilant ; as, >n|f^ ^ bows ;' "q^rfftr ' reputa-
tions ;' "SRr a proper name.
23. A final it or ^ preceded by ^ or ^TT may be dropped
before any letter except a hard consonant or a sibilant, as ^
becoming wiT by rule 5. before ^TRTH: makes w ^trth: ^ they
D %
20 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
are come:' so "^ changed to WT^ before ^R^ becomes ht ^
^ those two/
24. When ^ follows any consonant, except a semivowel, a
nasal, or a sibilant, it is changed to "^ ; as, TT^ + f^ S'iva =
wi%9r tach-chhiva, ' that, S'iva.'
For by rule ii . ^ has been changed, before the palatal ^,
to the analogous palatal if; but the soft consonant '^, again,
has been changed to the hard consonant % before the hard
consonant ^.
25. When followed by '^n^ a final tf may interpose the
letter w, making ^^^ i^ ^r»J ; but by the preceding rule ^^r is
changed to "S^ ; and by rule ii . w will then be changed to "^,
and IT to ^, and the compound will be ^^^jr^. By a subse-
quent rule, however, the terminating letter of the conjunct ^
may be rejected, and the word will finally be ^^^^^m.
2i6. The augment l^ may be inserted after a word ending in
a short vowel, before one beginning with "^y as f^ i^ 'S[nrr;
but as "rf must be changed to ^ in such a position, the form is
r^HxriiNi ^ the shadow of Siva.'
«. The same augment l^ is optionally inserted after a long
vowel, whether medial or final; as, 7J^5ft"S[nn or c5^?teTm
^ the shadow of Lakshmi ;' ^ or ^^ ^ a barbarian.'
b. It is also inserted optionally after the particles ^TT^ and
»rr^ (leaving ^ and m) prefixed to verbal inflexions or deriva-
tives beginning with ^ (it is in like manner changed to ^) ;
as, vMltJ^K^Pri or ^TTSLT^xifiT ^ he covers ;' iTlf^l^ or mfe^l^ ' let
him not divide.'
27. "^ is changed to ^ before ^, as "5"^ for ^n, ' see,' makes
with ^irf^, ^^Th ^ will see :' (for ^ after a guttural becomes %
and oR and "^ form the compound ^,)
28. Before a palatal consonant, including ^, the dental Tff
is changed to i^; and before a cerebral, including ^, it is
changed to "ET ; as, TTTO + r^nlfrt = UHOaHlPd ^ Rama gathers ;'
TTR^4-^ = tm^ 'Rama sleeps;' U^HT + ^fNfi^ = tTH^^
^ Rama goes ;' TI^ + ^TO = CIH^itf ' Rama, sixth.'
CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS. 21
29. "^y not being final, is changed to i^ after any vowel
except ^ or vTT, a guttural consonant, a semivowel, and ^,
though the augment ^, Visarga, or a sibilant intervene ; thus
VgTff becomes in the plural, hhTm ^ bows ;' and f^ and ^ make
%Tg ^ in^ or ^ on S'ivas/
30. \Mien ^ff in the verbs WT ' to stay/ and ^cT^T ^ to stop/
and their derivatives, is preceded by the preposition "giT, it is
rejected; and as the final ^ becomes the hard consonant it
before a hard consonant, then "^ + ^T^T = ■3"r^n«T ^uprising,'
and "^ + ^tHH^ = TW>T^ ^ upholding.^
31. AVhen "f follows any consonant, except a nasal, semi-
vowel, or sibilant, the aspirate of the preceding letter may be
substituted for it, that letter, if a hard consonant, being first
changed to its corresponding soft letter ; as, ^rsR + ^rfff becomes
first Tfj^ -\- "^rfff, and then TFTRfff ' speech seizes.^
32. "^ when final, or before any consonant except a nasal
or a semivowel, is changed to ^, as TjfcJir, ' a bee,' becomes
JTufrifS ; such a ^ is changed to oR before ^, as ^^ for ^^ ^ burn,'
makes with ^qfrT, ^^rfiT ^ will burn.'
33. Any consonant may be optionally doubled after T^ or ^
preceded by a vowel ; as, ^ or ^r^ ' the sun / '^f^ or ^§"
' fire.'
34. Any consonant, except ^, followed by a consonant,
may be doubled ; as, "J^ + ^ may be "J^, ^ a son ;' fkt[ + ^ may
be "ftr^ ^ a friend.'
a. But when three or more consonants are joined together,
by virtue of a grammatical rule, one or more of the interme-
diate ones, if similar, may be rejected ; therefore "J^ and iwrf
are more usually written "g^ and f^T^.
b. A semivowel following any consonant, except a semi-
vowel, a sibilant, ^, or ^, may be doubled; as, ^nf^ or
^in^r«< ^ the sun.'
c. But when two semivowels are preceded by a different
consonant, one of them may be rejected ; so ^rTf^rOT becomes
^rf^, as before.
JSa COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
35. When a conjunct consonant is final, whether terminat-
ing a syllable or a word, the second member is rejected, as
^^, 'sL lame man/ becomes T[^«|; and f^^, ^what injures/
f^rT: so after nouns ending in consonants, the sign of the
nominative case ^ is rejected, as XTTT"^, ^ going,^ not xhr^.
If the preceding letter be T: the final is retained, as ^"5^
' strong / but not if the second member be a sibilant, as
fxi Gh1 ^, * who wishes to do,' becomes f^ibhT^.
There are other rules affecting the mode of combining
consonants, and the changes to which the combinations are
subject ; but their validity is matter of dispute : accordingly,
as different rules are followed, the derivatives of the compound
of ^ ^ cum,' and "^ * to make/ may be WTitten in a variety of
manners : #^r#T, for instance, may be written in a hundred
and eight ways. These are, however, matters merely of ortho-
- epical conceit, and in practice the simplest spelling, consistent
with the essential elements of a word, is to be preferred.
36. When a word ending with t^ is followed by one begin-
ning with T, one is rejected, and the preceding vowel, if short,
is made long ; as, "grni + T]R^ = ^HKH^ * he again sports /
fj^ + T^= ffk^ ' unimpassioned.'
SECTION III.
Changes of Visarga.
As preliminary to the rules for those changes to which the
soft aspirate termed Visarga is subject, it may be useful to
premise, that they contemplate the reciprocal equivalency of
(:) Visarga, ^, and ^; these signs being, according to circum-
stances, mutually interchangeable. There are, as is well
known, indications of similar reciprocity in the classical lan-
guages. The Greek e^, eTrra, aX?, become in Latin, sex,
septem, sal. In the older Latin writers a final ^s' was com-
monly ehded, at least for prosodial purposes ; and Pott sug-
gests that its place may have been suppUed by something hke
CHANGES OF VISARGA. 23
Visarga. Lucilius, according to Quintilian, wrote " Serenu'
fuit et dignu' loco ;'' and Cicero observes, " Plures antiquo-
rum sic locutos." The substitution of ' r' for ' s' was also com-
mon in Latin, and arbor, labor, clamor, were originally written
arbos, labos, clamos. The ' s' was also sometimes preserved in
the nominative, but changed in other inflexions, as flos, floris,
and the like.
The meaning of Visarga fV^ is literally ^ abandoning,'
' ejecting ;' and that of its synonyme fwit^fhT Visarjjaniya is
* that which may^ or ' is to be ejected, or abandoned/ It has
been a question, therefore, whether the symbol to which it is
applied ( : ) be a simple mark of ehsion, a kind of apostrophe,
or whether it designates a sound. It would be out of place to
discuss the question at present. It is usually considered to
denote a very soft and almost imperceptible breathing, and it
is sufficient for our purpose so to regard it.
37. A final ^ is changed to Visarga : TTfnr Ramas becomes
XJ^\ Ramah ; and TITO Ramais, ot: Ramaih.
88. Before a hard consonant Visarga again becomes ^:
f^ + Wnn = f^^m^nn ' Vishnu the preserver.'
a. It is not so changed before a hard letter foUow^ed by a
sibilant, as "sji: w^, ^ Which (is) the sword-hilt ?'
b. Before a sibilant the change is optional, as TJHX "^rff or
UHSt^lri. (The dental sibilant is changed to the sibilant of the
class of the consonant by which it is followed : see rule 28.)
c. Before the hard consonants of the guttural and labial
classes, Visarga may be unchanged : ^: "Sfittfw ' who does ;' w,
iT^ffT ^ he cooks.'
d. Before these letters a diiFerent sign X called Arddha-
visarga, ^a half Visarga,' is sometimes used, as ^X <*Cirri, "^X "T^.
The sign before a guttural is described as ^1<^I*J<*'1^ ' proceed-
ing from the root of the tongue ;' and before a labial, ^quiMlij
^ to be gently blown or aspirated.' Modifications of aspiration
are no doubt intended, which might have been of consequence
when the language was spoken, but are now of no importance.
24 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
e. The permanence of Visarga before cR is liable to excep-
tion, and it is changed to '^ before, i. the pronoun oR, as oir^
^ quisquis f 2. the affix ^, as ^r^r^ ' famous ;' and the parti-
cles -SF^ and "siimr, as tt^T^^ ^ of little fame f TJ[^r^!mf ' desir-
ous of fame/ It is also changed before xrr^, as m^|4:Mi^| ^ of
shght renown/
/. But it is not changed before "sf^, if that follows an
indeclinable word ; as, imT: "^r^ff ^ nigh to morning ;^ nor
before "SR!^, if it be derived from a radical final; thus fjR
makes ift: ' speech/ whence ift: ^fiTW? ^ desirous of speech/
g. It is changed before verbs and verbal derivatives com-
mencing with ^ when compounded with ^tt:, "gi::, ^TT^:, and
^:; as, TpT^nr: ^ salutation;^ "gt^idfrT ^ he places before;'
^nf^"3^ ^ manifested ;^ dt-JPri * evil-doing/
h. The numerals %: f^: and ^: change Visarga to ^ before
oil, as fM'*»=hCirri, f^'^sjvdffT, "^^^l^rfrT, ^ he makes two, three, four/
But if repetition is implied, the change is optional, as f^tchClPri
or flr'E^fiT ^ he does (any thing) twice/
L fwr: optionally changes its final, as ffTC: ^RR or Pril^l^hK
*■ abuse/
j. frrt: becoming f^: also optionally changes Visarga to ^
before ^, as f^: «»lP^if or Prfi^*! P^H ^ expelled/
k, Visarga is changed to ^ after ^rfiD^: compounded with
the particles ^F^ and xr^r, as <HPt^MigM, ^ptQmi^i, ^a little
butter/
/. It is changed after ^ni: and f^R: compounded with xy^,
as WM^sRf ^ foot below ;' f^lTW^ ' foot on the top/ If the words
are uncompounded, the change does not take place, as ^iv:
39. The letter t, (in technical grammar called l^ ru, to
distinguish it from the mere alphabetical sign) is substituted
for Visarga after any vowel except ^ or ^ and before a vowel
or a soft consonant ; as, tt§: "^^ becomes jj^'^mw ^ endowed
with qualities ;' ^f'H: ^1^ = ^uPh ^^fw ' fire burns ;' Hl5lPif
' the boat goes ;' ^r^trfTT ' S'ambhu takes/
CHANGES OF VISARGA. O5
40. If the Visarga be preceded by ^, and the initial of the
word following be ^, or a soft consonant, T is substituted
in place of t:, and "g" with the penultimate ^ forms the final
diphthong ^; as, w» W^" makes "Sfits^ ^ Who here ?^ w, inn
makes "^ iTrTt ^ Who (is) gone ?'
«. An initial W following ^ so formed is rejected, but its
place is marked by the sign s. See rule 6./.
b. HrRT changed by rule 37. to tt^: becomes by this rule
^nft in such compounds as JTTl»f, K^fl'H^, ^ mind-born -/ H^IM
' mind-delighting.'
41. After the short vowel 'ST, and before any vowel except
^, Visarga may be changed to ^, which by rule 23. may be
rejected ; as_, %^: and "^srrw become ^^ttt^ or ^ ^rr^ ' a god
sits '/ ^: and i[;^ become ^"^fqi^: or ^ ^j^ ' the god Indra ;'
*Tc55: TTT^ ' Nalah spoke/ makes r|c4^m-«< or more commonly
42. After the long vowel ^5 and before any vowel or soft
consonant, "^ is substituted for Visarga ; it is optionally rejected
before the vowels, absolutely before the consonants ; as, ^^r:
"^W make ^TR^ or ^^t '^T^ 'the gods (are) here/ ^"qr: and
'H^i: make %^ ^rrm: ' the gods are to be reverenced / ^^n:
wfWf^, said of Devi, makes ^«miir*Tf^ or ^^an ^rftrfVit ; fsnrr:
H\c6\, ' the garland of S'ri,' makes Piim iTTFJT.
«. After the interjections H^, vprfr^, ^rxft^, the Visarga, to
which the final is changed, is said to be again changed to ^,
which is ejected before a vowel or soft consonant ; as, >Tt ^^5
' O Indra !' ^ ^^ ^ O god !'
43. Visarga substituted for a radical final ^ may become i:
again before a vowel or a soft consonant; as, Trnn for HVUZ.
+ ^TW becomes MIH^^ ' the dawn (is) here.'
a. Such a Visarga may also optionally become ^ again
before a hard consonant ; as, ift: for fn^ before xrfir may make
Tfh^fT ^ lord of speech,' or, by rule 38, WturfTf, Visarga being
changed to ^.
b, Visarga substituted for the final of ^r^ for ^r^*^ ' a day,'
26 COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
becomes t^ again before any consonant except i: and vr; as,
^r^t^fw ' lord of day ;' ^t^t^ ' a number of days/ Before t
and H, "3" is substituted for it j as, ^T^krW ^ day and night ;'
^r^VfW: ' by days/
44. Visarga is substituted for a final Tf, except in the word
TT^rnr, before a hard consonant of the palatal, cerebral, and
dental classes, if followed by a vovv^el, a semivowel, or a nasal.
Anuswara is prefixed to the sibilant to which by rule 38.
Visarga is changed ; as, "SFTlf^^ + f^[f^ becomes ^rTftpf^lrf^
^ O bow-armed, cut ? tH!^ + lTt= U^reJT' O king, cross !^ but
TT^^ P^HliJ ^ let the quiet man collect.'
a. Before xr the substitution is optional, and the Visarga
does not become a sibilant, as by rule 38. c, but may or may
not substitute the Arddha- visarga : ^ "qif^ ' cherish men,^ is
therefore written, ^rXfiff, ^: -gifV^ or ^ X ^if^^ also with a mark
denoting the Visarga to be nasal, as W: "^nf^, or ^ X "^TTf^-
b. ^J| in combination with "^ and its derivatives, the word
oRT^ repeated, and "q?^ derived from "g^ prefixed to a word
beginning with a hard consonant, insert the augment ^, in
which case Visarga is said to be substituted for their proper
finals, preceded by Anuswara, and changed before ^ to ^ :
15(1^ before ortt: therefore becomes ^m ^R; «fiT^ before "^rr^,
"sf!^ ^RT^ ; and "g^ before ohlfohc^, "g^ ^r<*c4. By clause a, of
rule 34, however, one of the sibilants is rejected, leaving ^^K
' initiation ;^ "SEraiT^ ^ whom ! whom P and "g^'tfcRc^ ^ a male
koil (Indian cuckoo)'.
45. The Visarga which is the sign of the masculine nomi-
native of the pronouns w^ and t^^, or W* ' he/ vy(\ ' that per-
son,' is commonly dropped before a consonant; as, ^ '^^^i^
^he goes;' ^ ^T^^^ '^e gives;' ^^ f^GCj: ^that Vishnu;' but
not if the negative ^ is prefixed, as ^m: f^: ^ not that S'iva.'
a. In verse, for the convenience of the metre, ^ not only
rejects the Visarga, but allows the final ^ to be conjoined
with a following vowel, by the rules of vowel- Sandhi ; as, ^if^^
Trnn ^TErfir, ^ that Indra the king conquers,' for ^ l^: ; so ^
DECLENSION. SS^
^l^K^n TTT:, ^ that very Rama, the son of Dasaratha/ for
CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION.
SECTION I.
General rules.
46. Most nouns in the Sanskrit language are declinable in
one or more of three genders. They admit, with very few
exceptions, of three numbers, singular, dual, and plural ; and
of seven cases in each number; i. the nominative, 2. accusa-
tive, 3. instrumental, 4. dative, 5. ablative, 6. genitive, 7. loca-
tive : of these it may be remarked, that the third or instrumental
has the sense of ^ by' or ^ with ;' the ablative, ^ from -,' and the
locative, ^ in^ or * on :^ the rest have the usual powers.
47» Inflexion, whether of declension or conjugation, is
contrived by the Sanskrit grammarians on the same principle.
It consists of two parts; i. the Anga, ^body,' or inflective
base, that is, the word itself; and, 3. of certain particles,
which, being attached to the base, complete the inflected
word. The inflectional terminations of conjugation will be
hereafter specified. We are concerned at present with those
of declension only.
48. The inflectional terminations of nouns are twenty-one;
some of them are repetitions : they are attached to the inflec-
tive base in each of the seven cases of the three numbers, and
are as follows :
nom.
ftr
^
^
ace.
^
■^
Tinr
instr.
. z\
WIT
fi»w^
dat.
T
wn
«ni
abl.
Tftt
«n
«TO,
gen.
T^
^^^
^T^
loc.
fT^
E %
1^
DECLENSION,
The vocative has no separate termination, being considered as
a modification only of the nominative.
49. Now of these inflectional terminations it is to be re-
marked, that some of the letters serve only to form syllables,
and facilitate enunciation : they are rejected, therefore, when
those letters which are essential are applied to the base. These
auxiliary letters are the ^ of "ftr ; the if of ITFT ; the ^ of ^;ff ;
the 7 of rr; the T of the terminations T, Tftr (in which also ^
is subordinate), "3^, and fT : and the tf of ^. It is also to
be recollected, that by rule 37. a final ^ is changed to Visarga.
The actual terminations therefore will be.
nom. :
^
w:
ace. ^
^
^
instr. 'srr
vqf
fk:
dat. T?
«n
«(:
abl. w:
«if
«t:
gen. ^
^:
WT^
loc. ^
wh
50. In applying these terminations to the final letter of the
inflective base, a recollection must be preserved of the modifi-
cations which that final letter must undergo, whether it be a
vowel or a consonant, before the initial letters of the termina-
tions ; as in the following example :
ift * navis,^ ^ a ship.'
nom. iTt:
"5TT^
^TT^.
ace. 'TR
"TT^
^xm
mstr. ;tt^T
^«n
^f^l
dat. "^TT^
^«if
^t^:
abl. TH^:
^«if
•^:
gen. TfT^:
•{141:
^m
loc. ^nf^
^^.
^1
It will be observed, that before the consonants, the word ^ is
unchanged; before the
vowels, ^ becomes ^srr^ by rule 5.
The ^ of ^ is changed after ^ to "^
by rule 29.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. gQ
It is worth while to pause for a moment upon this scheme of
inflectional terminations, and to understand it fully, as it fur-
nishes a useful clue to all the varieties of nominal inflexion which
follow. If it were rigidly apphed, nothing would be so simple
as Sanskrit declension; and even as it is, we are authorized
to affirm that there is but one general declension in Sanskrit
grammar. There are however various modifications, both of
the bases and of the terminations, in the individual nouns,
which render it convenient to divide them into classes; and
no arrangement admits of more ready reference than that
which classes them according to their final letters; first, as
they are vowels or consonants ; and secondly, according to the
letter or class of letters in each of those two divisions.
SECTION II.
Nouns ending in vowels.
Class I. Nouns ending in ^ and ^.
51. Nouns ending in w form by far the most numerous class
of nouns, and commonly admit of three genders, forming the
feminine by adding ^f ; as, masc. "%"5r S'iva, the god ; fern.
?\\^ I the goddess S'iva.
52. In forming the inflexions of all nouns, such changes as
may occur are of two descriptions; i. those affecting the base,
2, those affecting the termination.
53. Nouns ending in ^ substitute ^TT for the final before if
substituted for ;? in the dat. sing. ; before the dual termination
wit ; and before the augment tT, in the genitive case plural, and
in the nominative and accusative plural neuter. They substi-
tute ;j for their final ^ before ^ft^ in the dual, and «nT and
^ in the plural. They insert tT before the signs of the genitive
case plural, and the nominative and accusative plural neuter.
The feminine noun changes ^JTT to ^ before the ^TT of the
instrumental case singular, the ^?r of the dual, and in the
30 DECLENSION.
vocative case ; and inserts tu before the four last cases of the
singular^ and "^r before ^n^ in the gen. plural.
54. Nouns in "^ substitute other terminations for those of
the scheme^ in some of the cases : thus.
Singular. Plural,
acc. ^ for ^ ace. ^ for ^
instr. ^ — ^T instr. ^^ — f^^
dat. XT — ^
abl. ^srr^ — Tftr
gen. ^ — ^
a. The feminine noun substitutes ^ for ^ in the nom. and
acc. dual, and ^"F^ for "% in the locative case sing.
b. The neuter substitutes in the three numbers of the nom.
and accus. severally '^ ^ ^, the latter with rf prefixed, as f^^
in place of the terminations of the masculine : in all the other
cases it adopts the terminations of the masculine.
55, We are now prepared to understand the construction
of the following forms of f^^, bearing in mind the alterations
dependent upon the laws of combination, in joining the in-
flectional terminations to the inflective base.
Masc. f^ S'iva the deity,
nom. f^: f^^ f^RT: S'iva, &c.
acc.
f^r^
fW
r^Nii;
SW, &c.
instr
. -M^
f^^T«?f
f^:
By or with S'iva, &c,
dat.
f^^nr
f^mrwn
r^r^«T:
To S'iva, &c.
abl.
fW^
f^^T«Tf
iV^:
From Siva, &c.
gen.
r^mw
f^^^:
fW^T
Of Siva, &c.
loc.
frjR
%^^.
r^i'i?
In or on S'iva, &c.
voc.
f^
f^T
%^t:
O S'iva ! &c.
Fem. f^'^J the goddess S'iva.
nom. %"^ 1^1% f^rrr:
acc. f^rrf f^? f^T:
instr. f^Rin fw^ f^^>T:
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
31
dat. f^r^ f^mrwrf %^TVq:
abl. f^rrnrr: f^Ni^rf f^rrw:
fw^: f^mt: f^^rni
%^rqf P^rmTl: fwi
Neuter f^r^ * auspicious/
Nom. and accus. f^r^ f^ f^RlffT.
The rest as the masculine.
gen.
loc.
voc.
a. Other nouns dechnable on the above models are.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
^r^: a horse
»srT^RT^: the sky
T^: a camel
ofiTcji: a crow
TTw: a quality
^»^: the moon
3^: fever
ir#: reasoning
^: a god
VR: virtue
rT^: a nail
tj^Tft a mountain
TP[j^: a fish
IT?: sacrifice
t::^: flavour
75^1^: iron
"^qfi: a crane
'31J|lc5: a jackall
f»*j^: the ocean
^^: the hand
•»il^'r|l a woman
'm^fl hope
1[^T wish
^F^rr a girl
3jHt the neck
■^i^ofiT moonhght
tRT decay
TTRT a star
^tc^ a swing
VRT an edge
TfTHT the nose
"qwr worship
wn^T a wife
Jrr?5T a garland
t:^ preserving
c^Tiil modesty
^TTTT a lute
-^fl^ beauty
wn an assembly
f^^ injury
^n|5 an egg
wnnf a seat
^^if an organ of sense
Wc^ a family
n^ a house
"S^^ an umbrella
Wc4 water
■fftt a shore
5:^ pain
■vnf wealth
T^jq dancing
■q^ a leaf
1^ a root
41m* youtli
t:^ blood
TJ"^ salt
^ a wood
^^ a scripture
^ a rule
f^ frost
b. Many adjectives and participles declinable in the three
genders belong to this class.
c. The feminine nouns ^Sf^T, ^iTT^ ^T^T, signifying chiefly
DS5 DECLENSION.
in poetic language * mother/ make their vocatives ^rg, ^T^,
W^, If the penultimate be not a conjunct consonant^ other
synonymes follow the usual form, as % ^nPyi, ^T^fT^^ ^f^TT,
' O mother ?
56. Besides those nouns which are formed from masculine
nouns in % by adding, as it is said, the feminine ending rPT,
that is, W[p there are nouns derived immediately from verbs
ending in ^ as tfT, ?TT, IJTT, and the like, in which the final ^rr
is an essential, not an accidental letter. Such nouns admit of a
variety of gender. The declension of the masculine and femi-
nine noun is the same. In the neuter the final is made short,
and the word is declined like %"#.
57. Nouns in wr, then, in which the final is a radical letter,
combine with the terminations of the nominative case, and
with those of the singular and dual accusative, agreeably to
the laws of Sandhi. In the accusative plural and the follow-
ing cases the final WT is cut off before the vowel terminations,
and they are affixed at once to the word, as if it ended in a
consonant : before the consonantal terminations there is no
change; as,
Masc. and fem. fV'^T ^ all- preserving.^
nom.
fw^T:
fr^
fw^Ji^j:
ace.
f^T^iqf
fw^^:
instr.
fTsg^TT
fT'^trrwrf
U^miCvt:
dat.
f^^^
f<T5fqT«T:
abl.
iwcr:
gen.
loc.
iqf^fTT
f^w^:
fTsgnrr
voc. f^WTl &c.
So T^t^m ' who drinks the soma juice ;' ^T^URT ' a shell-blower.'
58. The word ^T^T^ the name of an inferior divinity, a
Gandharba, is considered as a primitive, and is inflected there-
fore throughout without any elision of the final, which com-
bines with the vowel terminations agreeably to the rules of
Sandhi, and is consequently in every way regularly declined.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. SS
— ^T^: or ^TfT^
nom.
^T^:
ace.
^T^
instr.
ITfT
dat.
?lt
abl.
^i^t:
gen.
—
loc.
?T|
voc.
■^i^r &c
Class II. Nouns ending in ^ and "5".
59. Nouns ending in these two vowels may be conveni-
ently classed together, as they are analogously inflected ; recol-
lecting only that the semivowels to which they are changeable
before other vowels are respectively i^ and "5^.
60. In the masculine gender the changes of the base are,
the substitution of the long vowel for the final in the dual nom.
and accus.^ and in the accus. and gen. plural ; the Guiia letter
^ or ^ is substituted for the final before ^nr, T, Tftr^ and ^J^,
and in the vocative ; and the final is dropped before the termi-
nation of the locative case : •? is inserted before the termina-
tions of the instrumental case singular and the gen. plural.
61. In the same gender the dual termination ^is rejected;
J^ is substituted for ^5 and r^ for the ^ of ^nT ; the vowel
of ^sr^ in the ablative and genitive is dropped ; and ^ is sub-
stituted for fr ; as follows :
'HDh ^ fire.^ I "^rg ^ wind.^
nom. ^hDh:
ace. ^fjif
-m^m
^nft &c.
^Tg«n
'^i^^^:
■ ' 1
instr. ^uPhHT
dat. ^TTTR
abl. "^i
gen. —
loc. ^fpnft
voc. ^pr^ &c.
"^m
M DECLENSION.
62. There are some anomalies in nouns in i^. Thus ^d^,
^ a friend/ substitutes ^ for the final in the first five inflexions,
and inserts t( before their vowel terminations. In the other
cases of the singular, and in the gen. and loc. dual, it is more
regular than ^rl^Tf, the final ^ becoming ly before a vowel. In
the abl. and gen. singular "TO is substituted for Tftr and TH.
^^rfif ^ a friend.'
nom. ^T^T ^r^TRt 14^1^:
ace. m^\il — ^r^«5r
instr. m$m ^rf%«rf ^rftffn:
dat. ^^ — ^Frf%«r:
abl. ?T^r. — —
gen. — "^r^: m^Al
loc. ^IpmI — ^^rfi^
voc. ^^ &c.
a. In composition this word may be inflected regularly in
all the cases, or in all except the two first ; ^^rf^: or ^TO^T ^ a
good friend ;' W^n^ or ^T^Tf^ ^ to a good friend/ &c.
b. xrfff, ^ a master/ is declined like "^rf^ in the five last cases
singular ; as, xfiirr, tf^, ^1^:, "^Ti^. In the rest like ^rfrq-.
xrfTT in composition is declined like ^srfrq' ; as, H^frT ^ a king,'
(lord of the earth,) ^JxrfrT: ^J^TTt >JMri^: ^MH^, &c.
63. Feminine nouns in ^ and ■g' differ from the masculine
in the accus. plural, and in the third and following cases sin-
gular. They do not substitute f| for the Visarga of ^r^, nor
insert •? before TT. In the dative and following cases they
have two forms, one like the masculine : in the other they
insert '^rr before the affixes of the dative, ablative, and genitive
cases ; and, like feminine nouns in WJ, substitute wnT for the
sign of the locative f^ ; as.
Fem, irfif ' Mind.'
nom. nfw: md wfrm
ace. *ifff — »nft:
instr. fCFU *rfwwn flfwfH:
^ ^ a milch cow.'
^1 - H:
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
dat. WK^ or it's TfTTwrf 5PTfw«i:
abl. vnt: or iTTrr: — —
gen. ^l^t Hfdnf
loc, ?T1^orT?mT — ^rffTg
VOC. T»^ &c.
V^or^
v»ft: or ^^?5rT:
^or v^
35
64. Neuter nouns in ^ and "3" reject the terminations of the
nom. and accus. singular, substitute ^ and ^ for the dual and
plural terminations, and insert ^ before them and all other
terminations beginning with a vowel. They lengthen the final
before ^ in the plural.
nom.) f.
ace. j
' water.'
JTW ' honey.'
HWrf
instr. Trfw
dat. mH^M)
abl. 4\rm:
gen. —
mPciiri:
t&c.
loc. mKUll
VOC. "^rft: or TP
65. There are a few neuter nouns in ^ which before the
vowel terminations of all the cases except the two first, and
optionally before fr, drop the final vowel ; as,
^rf^ ^ a bone.'
ace. )
instr, ^^Hl ^rfw^
dat. ^rP(«T —
abl. ^f^n: —
gen. — '^m^:
loc. ^i^fH or ^sr^rf^ —
VOC. ^rPw &c.
o. ^^rf^ 'an eye,' ^ 'gbee,' and ^r^ 'a thigh,' are simi-
larly declined : the fact being, in all probability, that as nouns
F 2
S6
DECLENSION.
in ^ they are defective, and their deficiencies are supplied
before the vowel terminations by analogous but obsolete nouns
ending in r^, as 'iJW*^, ^T^^ ^^, ^^^.
b. Other nouns in ^ and '3', dechnable on the above
models, are.
Masc. in ^.
^rftr: a sword
"^f^ a sage
cfif^: a poet
filfc: a mountain
jrftir: a jewel
TJ^: the sun
TTfV* a ^^eap
fM>T: an ordinance
^kPvj: a charioteer
^fb a name of Vishnu
Fern, in i[.
r: agriculture
■^if^: patience
Trfir: going
»nffr: caste, sort
^: light
vfiT: firmness
ir^fH: nature
'^f^: understanding
"tTf: rain
^ijfifr: remembrance
Masc. in "l".
^rrg: fife
f^l sugar cane
^^: a season
ij^ a teacher
"W^l a relation
vrrj: the sun
ijij: death
f^^[rr: Vishnu
^: a bambu
"^W* an enemy
c. There are not many feminine substantive nouns in "3", and
but few neuter either in ^ or "g^. Adjectives of course, or
substantives used attributively, may, with few exceptions, be
declined in three genders.
d. When a noun in ^ or T, whether substantive or attri-
butive, is used in the neuter gender in the same sense in
which it is employed in the masculine, it is optionally declin-
able in all cases of which the terminations begin with vowels,
except the two first, either after the masculine or neuter form ;
as wrrf^ ^ eternal:^ neuter nom. and ace. ^r«TTf^> -^NHlH^tfl,
^^HltflPH; instr. ^hiP^ht; dat. ^RT^ or WTri^; abl. and gen.
^SRT^: or "^HiHi^h:; loc. W»TT^ or ^Rlf^f^; gen. and loc. dual,
^"Trfrert: or ^HlH^rfi: . If the sense differs, the neuter form only
is admissible : xfhj masc. ' a kind of tree ;' neut. ' the fruit of
the Pilu tree :' dat. Tfhj^, abl. and gen. iO<^h:, loc. tfhgf^, &c.
e. Other neuter nouns in i[ and T are derived from nouns
terminating in the long vowels ^ and "31.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS.
37
Class III. Nouns ending in ^ and m
66. The chief peculiarity affecting the inflective base, or
the word itself, in nouns terminating in ^ and "31, regards the
substitution in some cases of the syllables ^ and "^^ for the
finals f and "31 before those inflective terminations which begin
with vowels. When these syllables are substituted, the nouns
are inflected before the vowel terminations as if they ended
with the semivowels "^jr and ^. When those syllables are not
substituted, the final vowels combine with the vowels of the
terminations, agreeably to the laws of Sandhi, with very few
exceptions.
67. After the syllables ^ and T^ the inflective termina-
tions undergo no changes; after the finals ^ and "31 they
undergo a few, chiefly afler feminine nouns, analogous to those
already observable in feminine nouns of the preceding classes,
and depending on the same conditions.
68. ^ and "^ are severally substituted for the final ^ and
"gi of masculine nouns, when they are monosyllabic verbal
derivatives, or when the finals are preceded by a conjunct con-
sonant ; as, \h (for "^) ^ to think,' cj ^ to cut,' ^ ' to serve.'
Masc. ift ^
who understands.'
Mas<
nom. "^
fV^
f^:
W-
ace. "ftR
—
fvR:
w
instr. fVnn
>fh^
v^t:
,^m
dat. fVj^
>ft«i:
#
abl. fxR:
—
—
^■.
gen. —
f^nft:
fw
loc. fVrftT
—
^
^
voc. vh &c.
^&c
Masc. T^ ^ who cuts.'
"^
^«n
<5^: <5^
a. Nouns of this description are not considered as ceasing
to be monosyllabic by having particles prefixed to them, which
merely qualify their application ; therefore "mfh ^ a man of good
understanding,' "qr^n^ ' a man of excellent understanding,' and
the like, substitute ^^ for the final; ^>ft:, ^fv^, ^fVnr:. So
DECLENSION.
^^rpw: ^ self-existent/ from ^if ^ self/ and ^ ' being/ a name of
Brahma, makes ^7T»t:, ^xjwj^t, ^rrp^T^:.
b. They are considered as polysyllabic if derived from a com-
pound verb, as inyt ^ a man of superior understanding/ which
is a derivative, not from the simple verb ^, but the compound
verb inft and therefore is decHned irift:, "R"^, Tfm:, &c., the final
becoming i^ before a vowel, by rule 4 : and they are also con-
sidered as polysyllabic if the first member of the compound is
a subordinate term, or one not in opposition, as ^tpft ^ born
in the rains,^ ^ a frog/ There are also certain compounds of
H^ which are by special rule excepted from substituting T^ ;
as, 'J'T'^ ' born again,^ ^^ ' a snake/ oRTTPJ^ ^ born in a prison/
cRC^ ^ produced from the hand :' these are all declined, as "^tpg,
^frvft, ^T«^:, ^tTV#, &c.
69. Masculine nouns ending in ^ or "gi, when consisting of
more than one syllable in consequence of being compounded
with another noun as a subordinate term, or being derived
from a modification of the verb, merely follow the rules of
combination ; that is, f becomes t{^, and "31, "^j before a vowel
affix.
^HUl ^a genera? (from
t^ 'an
i^c5^^ a sweeper'
(Wc5'a
army,^ and »ft ^ who leads.'
place/ ^c"^^ who cleans').
nom. ^r||rfl:
«*1l»*4l
JH*ii»*{;
Wf^u: kic6^
<«irt»«i;
ucc. ^^T»l
w^T«ft«rr
i^^Ui —
^i^c5y^:
insLr, i^HMI
1 1 ^.— .^.
i^HlfflPH:
ls(f6MI <4c*51^»^i
<lat. ^vfirM
-
<«rc*ki —
;sic*M**i:
abl. iHI.*^:
%«rRft:
^ , ♦
IpIc^M: —
—
gen. —
— i^ioiufi:
^?lc4MI
loc mMI
&c.
^^r?5^: &c.
"^^^"i^
a. "5(t, ' to lead/ and its compounds substitute ^TT^^ for fr in
the locative.
b. tnft ' who drinks (moisture)/ i. e. the sun, derived from
m ' to drink / imt ' a road,' from irr ' to go / ^nTOJft ^ an ante-
NOUNS BNDING IN VOWELS. 39
lope/ from ^TiT ^ the wind' and ipft ' who outstrips ;' and n; a
demigod so named ; differ from JiHI«fl in three cases :
ace. sing, tpft* ace. plur. 'qtfh»( loc. sing, irft
— inft* — m\\A^ — Tnft
— ff — ff^ — f ^
They may, however, be also regularly declined in these cases,
as "qw, -qTin, xrfoT, &c.
c. fg^ in composition, as tj^ ^ who cuts barley,' makes
either ^r^^ or imt^Hf in the gen. plur., and i\^^\ in the loc.
singular.
70. Feminine nouns in ^ and "31, like mascuHne nouns, are
dechned in two ways : if they are monosyllables, or contain a
conjunct consonant, they substitute ^ and T^ for their finals ;
if polysyllabic, they change the finals, agreeably to the laws
of Sandhi, to ^ and "^ before the affixes commencing with
vowels.
71. Feminine nouns of the first description optionally prefix
wr to the affixes marked by a mute "3?, like feminine nouns in
the short ^ and "g".
72. They optionally prefix t^ to ^STR^ in the gen. plural, and
substitute ^ariH for fl? in the loc. singular ; as, "^ ^ prosperity,'
and ^ ' the earth.'
nom."^ Oftj^Tl f^snn
ace. f^nf — —
instr.fTjRT "^fh^f "^ftfir:
dat. f^JRorlV^ — "^i^:
abl. f^jRtorl^snrr: — —
gen. f^^ Oil ij for 5*01111*
loc. fW^Torl^f — "^(^5
voc. "^t &c.
>j^
^orWl — >t«t:
>p:or>j^T: — ■ —
^or>T^ — «|
^: &c.
73. Feminuie nouns of the second description, having more
than one syllable, and being derivative nouns from masculine
nouns by the substitution of the terminations ^ and -gr for the
masculine final, insert ^TT before the terminations having a
40
DECLENSION.
mute 1?, make the vowel short in the voc. singular^ and prefix
•T to the termination of the gen. plural.
The ^ of the nominative is rejected after such nouns in ^,
but not after "31. After both, Ti(^ is substituted for ^sn^, TT for
the ^snr of ^r^, and ^rn^ for fr ; as.
^
^ a river.^
^^^ a wife.'
nom.
^
^
^fra:
^: ^i^
^«r:
ace.
•fsfi'
—
^:
^ -
^:
instr
^rar
^T^twn
^^■^^5?:
^vsn i^rwqf
^vfir.
dat.
^
—
^T^:
^^: —
^«i:
abl.
^rarr:
«T^:
—
•
gen.
-~~"
^^
loc.
^raf
•T^S
^5^ —
^?i
voc.
irf^&c.
^&c.
a. The rejection of ;^ after a feminine noun ending in ^
depends upon that "^ being the feminine termination, or sign
of the feminine gender. If it is part of the word itself, the
sibilant becomes Visarga, as usual ; as, cJ^: ' the goddess
Lakshmi,' in^fh * a lute,' ird: ^ a boat.'
b, T^, ' a woman,' is inflected in the nom. and voc. like "q^,
and optionally so in the accus. singular and plural: in the
other cases like ^. But the insertion of rf before the gen.
plural, and of ^frr before the terminations with a mute T, and
the substitution of wr^ for fr are absolute, not optional as
in y^,
nom. ^ %^
ace. f^^ or ;^* —
instr. f^pn W^
dat. %|^ —
abl. r^^li: —
gen. — %nfti
loc. "fiE^nn —
voc. f^ &c.
* Wilkins has ^fW or (tp|Mi, but the Kaumudi expressly excepts
^ from the alternative.
-^pR: or ^:
^1
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 41
c. Feminine nouns in ^ and ^ when compounded so as to
form attributes, are to be declined like nouns masculine, when
used in the sense of a mascuhne noun, as TT^, ' a prosperous
man/ takes, in the dative, ablative, genitive, and locative cases,
only one form, viz. WpJj^, ^ftsRt^ and ^f^rf^T. If the compound
is only a qualification of the substantive, the feminine form
may be followed, as ^fnsft, ' good fortune,' makes ttPjr or ^Hfti^,
&c. If the noun is a word invariably feminine, it retains its
feminine terminations, although used as an attribute of a male,
as «jg^^^, ' a man of many good quaUties,' makes «i|^i|iS,
d. Feminine nouns formed from verbal roots, and com-
pounded with subordinate terms, however, when used in a
sense analogous to that of the masculine, take exactly the
same form, as iiiHilD ^ a female head of a village,' ^c6^ ' a
female sweeper,' make, accus. sin. and plur. i|iHil4, iflHluc,
^rtM, i«Ic*m: ; dat. yiH^, ^^TJ^ ; abl. and gen. ijiHd^:, i«(c4M: ;
gen. plur. i|lHlWI, lsl<4Mf; loc. ijmiWI (see rule 69. a.), ^ciPM;
voc. iiiH^fl:, ^^y^.
e. So "5^ ^ twice-being,' if it be appUed to man or woman
indifferently, is declined in the same manner ; mf. "J-T^", "5^T^:>
^jfTftt ; but if it mean ' a woman twice married,' it is dechned
Hke Tf} ^^, g^T^tr:, &c.
/. The object of these rules, and of others affecting nouns
ending in ^ and 'm, is to intimate that a word which may be
applied to an object either male or female is dechned in a
form common to both; that is, with the mascuhne termina-
tions : when it is hmited to a distinct female object, it is
dechnable only with the feminine terminations, as in the in-
stance of "jqil. So also ^ftr^ for instance, being ^ a male' or
* female frog,' is declined alike, ^T^, -v^, -f^, -h: ; but the
same word being the name of a plant, in which sense there
is no male, is dechned only, ^tp^, ^tr*^:, ^tr^, ^tpj.
74. Nouns in ^ and "31 which are susceptible of the neuter
gender, substitute the short vowels ^ and T for their finals.
G
{
iliHfiii irm%^t ifiHiinfVr
42 DECLENSION.
If the word is an attributive, and the sense of the neuter is
analogous to that of the other genders, the word is dechned in
all the cases of which the affixes begin with vowels, except the
two first, optionally, as if it were a noun ending in ^ long ;
that is, the final becomes i^ or "^ before the vowel : otherwise
IT is inserted, as after "^nft. Thus yjTTOt ^who leads or is
chief over a village f yiH^ult WRRU: ' a head man. Brahman ;'
illH^n '^TSRlfl' ' a Brahman woman head of a village f iUHPill "^
* a family, chief over a village/ The inflexion of the latter is,
nom.
ace.
instr. ij^lWloriimPlUHl ijlHPiH^rf ?I1H fill f^T.
dat. jjinm or ijiH^ii^ — qwfiir«r:
abl. illHim* or 'JJTFrftjr«Tt — - —
gen. ijmiKfltorifiHriUHi: uiHunni
loc. ii\Hm\ fTTHriir^
a. Nouns ending in ^ and "31 as derived from simple verbal
roots are not numerous, the roots not being in any number;
but they admit of being multiplied as compounded with other
words. Feminine nouns formed by the affixes ^ and "gs, and
especially the former, are more frequent.
T^l m. a leader, a guide. "ffffPT: m. a surety.
*H\(\ f. a damsel. ^i|: f. an army.
"^fjj^ f. the earth. >|: f. the eyebrow.
hDthI f« a sister. "^g^ f. a mother-in-law.
r^qitfl f. a shop. '^ f. a woman with good eyebrows.
Class IV. Nouns in "^ and '^, "^ and T^.
75. Mascuhne nouns in ^ substitute ^ for the final, and,
according to the analogy of nouns in ^n|, form the nominative
in "m ; as, fV^ ^ a father,' nom. fqiTT.
76. In one class of nouns in "^, ^, in another ^n^, is
substituted for the final before the vowel terminations of the
nominative dual and plural, and of the accusative sing, and
dual. Before the accus. and gen. plur. the vowel is made
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 43
long. ^ is inserted before ^sn^. Before the vowel termina-
tions of the instr. and dat. singular, and gen. and loc. dual,
^ is changed to the semivowel ^: it is changed to ^n: in the
locative and vocative cases.
77. The only changes in the affixes are, the rejection of TT
in the nominative ; the substitution of ^ for ^ in the accus.
plural, and of ^ for w in the abl. and gen. singular ; ;ff is
rejected; and the ^ of "5^ is prefixed to the semivowel jl,
which as a final is changed to Visarga.
ftr^ * a father.'
nom. fqWT PMriQ PMriU
ace. fxnft — ^^^T\
instr. fq^ f^t^ f^l[fvn
dat. fg^ — fqnrw?:
abl. fiT^ — —
gen. — fxT^: fqr^*
loc. fwfr: — PMijg
voc. ftnr* Sec.
■^ ^ a doer.
^T ^«rt "5jr|fH:
^ — —
^:&c.
a. Most masculine nouns implying affinity are declined like
fm^ ; as, >?T^ ^ a brother,' vflHIiJ ^ a son-in-law,' ^ ^ a husband's
brother :' but ^, ^ a grandson,' makes Tnrr, HHlO, "^TfrTC^ ^TTTR,
HHlCl^ in the first five inflexions.
b. Feminine nouns of affinity are declined also like f^l^,
except in the accus. plural; as HTIJ, 'a mother,' makes »rnrr,
HIdQ, HlriC ^TTrlT, HIrtO, TTTT: ; SO ^f^J ^ a daughter :' but ^T|,
^ a sister/ is dechned hke "qrrr ; ^^WT, *^yi9, &c. ; ace. plural,
^:.
c. ^, ^a man,' is declined Hke fxr^, except in the gen.
plural, where the vowel is optionally short, as ^Tnf or ^nnrf.
d. Nouns formed from roots by the addition of the particles
"5^ or ^ (in which the finals are used merely to distinguish
them from each other) are nouns of agency, and are declined
like o|f#. They are also decUnable in three genders.
e. The feminine is formed with the affix ^, before which
G 2,
44 DECLENSION.
the semivowel ^ is substituted for ^ : thus oR# becomes oR^
in the feminine, and ofi^ is declined like tT^.
y. The neuter is formed analogously to neuter nouns in ^
and ^; and as there are no substantive neuter nouns in ^^
the neuter of attributives being mostly usable in the same
sense as the masculine, then by a similar analogy the neuter
nouns in ^ admit also of two forms before the vowel termina-
tions of all the cases except the two first ; either inserting 7f
before them, or taking the same form as the masculine :
thus, nom. and accus. "Sfi^, oh^iiO, oh^^fill ; sing, instr. oh-^mi or
oR^; dat. ^3jf|% or -^^'y abl. and gen. "SR^: or "SR^ ; loc. ^5r^%
or "^fr:; gen. and loc. dual, ch^iifl: or oR|ft:. Before the other
terminations the forms are the same as in the masculine.
g. "#f , ' a jackay has lost some of its cases, and they are
in part supplied by the inflexions of "^tj, which are those of
nouns in T. Some of the cases belong to both nouns.
nom.
^StFT
"^tKld
-*lBIU
ace.
^Rhnt
'^^x
instr
. #FTor
^%5n
^tjvm
•%f5T:
dat.
"?Kt^ or
^t^
—
'5Rlf»»j:
abl.
*1§: or
"^t^t:
o'A'n
^rf.or
^ttjk
^n^
gen.
— ""
lor
^^t^oi
" "^rei
*i§3
J.UL/.
"""
voc.
^tr. or
^^tFt &c.
h. To the preceding examples of nouns in ^ may be added
'^^f ^ a man of the military caste ;' %rr m. ^ a conqueror,^ or
mfn. ^ victorious ;^ ^T^ m. ^a donor,^ or mfn. ^liberal;' VT^ m.
a creator;' mfn. ^cherishing;' '^ts ^a warrior,' mfn. ^war-
like f and ^"^ m. ^a priest.'
78. There are a few roots ending in "^ from which verbal
nouns may be formed; as, from "^, ^scatter,' comes "f ^who
or what scatters.' These are usually inflected by substituting
^ for the radical ; agreeably to which, "^ becomes f^, and is
then dechned like nouns ending in t:; as f^:, nom. ^, f^, f^:.
NOUNS ENDING IN VOWELS. 45
&c. If this change does not take place, the noun is regularly-
declined, substituting the semivowel ^ before the vowel ter-
minations ; as ^ ^ who injures ;' nom. Y*9 ^^ ^} &c. These
forms are of rare occurrence.
79. The same may be said, with still greater truth, of
nouns ending in "^ and o^; but grammarians admit the possi-
bility of their occurrence : thus iT*(j, the root tt'^ ^ to go,^ with
the affix oj, may be declined analogously to nouns ending in
^; as iTTT, 71?^^, 7T?|^:. In the ablative and genitive "3" is
substituted for the ^ of w^, and prefixed to the final semi-
vowel ; ^ is rejected, as being the last member of a conjunct
consonant : the form is therefore T^. This is of little prac-
tical value.
Class V. Nouns in ^.
80. There are no simple nouns ending in ^, but compounds
are exhibited to illustrate the declension of nouns so terminat-
ing ; as %, which is compounded of ^, ' with,^ and ^, * love f
^one who loves.' The declension is regular, except in the
abl. and gen. singular, where the initial of ^RT is rejected ; as,
sing. nom. ir:, ace. w^, instr. w^T, dat. ^, abl. and gen. ^,
loc. ^rftr ; dual nom. and ace. ^^, instr. dat. and abl. %wrf, gen.
and loc. ^fnfh ; plural nom. and ace. ^nn, instr. %fW:, dat. and
abl. ^:, gen. ^nrr, loc. ^.
Class VI. Nouns in ^.
81. Nouns ending in ^ are declined regularly, the termi-
nations are unchanged; the inflective base substitutes ^STT for
its final before the consonantal terminations, and is changed
to ^rr^, agreeably to the laws of Sandhi, before the vowels;
as ^ mf., ^ wealth,' makes
nom. TJI TIRi TXm
ace. -CR — T!RI
instr. tPn tT«rf TjfWt
dat. Tl^ — tT«n
40
DECLENSION.
abl.
Txm tT«n
tT«i:
gen.
i,l<4li
TPTT
loc.
TTfT —
^
82. The neuter of nouns in ^ is formed by changing the
final before the vowel terminations to ^5 and inflecting it like
neuters in ^. Before the consonants^ "m is substituted for the
final; as ift ^ wealthy;^ n. TTft; sing. nom. and ace. vftf instr.
Tfftm, dat. Trfr^j abl. and gen. irfw:, loc. Trftftr; dual nom.
and ace. uMi, instr. dat. and abl. THTwrf, gen. and loc. irlwh ;
plural nom. and ace. nOP^I^ instr. injfW:, dat. and abl. Tnr^K,
gen. TifOTfj loc. ITCTg*
«. Some grammarians affirm, that when it is used attri-
butively, a neuter noun ending in ^, like those ending in ^ or
T &c. (see rule 74), may take also the mascuhne form before
the vowel terminations zi &c., as i\ ClM I or im^; but this is
denied by the best authorities.
Class VII. Nouns in ^.
83. Nouns in ^, both masculine and feminine, substitute
the Vriddhi letter ^ for the final before the three terminations
of the nominative case and that of the accusative dual. They
substitute W[ for the final before the terminations of the accu-
sative singular and pliu-al. Before the other vowel termina-
tions ^ becomes ^ by rule of Sandhi 5, except before irftr
and T^, which reject their initial w, and consequently the
final is unchanged.
ift
^ a cow.'
nom. xft:
'U«?l
tr:
ace. ITT
—
nr:
instr. i^T
ift«n
ifrfW:
dat. 11^
...^
nt»r:
abl. nh
—
—
gen. jft:
n^:
TT^J
loc. vfw
—
^
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 47
84. In the neuter the final is changed to T, as iniii| i^
' pasture near the cow ;' which is dechned hke neuters in T.
a. Here also authorities differ as to the alternative of inflect-
ing the neuter optionally as the masculine in the instrumental
and other cases singular, Tq^pTT or "^xpT^T &c. : the former is
to be preferred.
Class VIII. Nouns in ^.
85. Nouns in ^, masculine and feminine, are strictly regu-
lar, as in the example already given of tft ^ navis/ ^ a boat.'
In the neuter the final becomes "3" ; as ^rffl^ «r?J ' the water,
beyond the boat f ^uPri^ ^^Pri^Ht, wfrnrfrr, &c.
a. The nouns that end in diphthongs are not numerous.
To the preceding may be added ^ mf. ^heaven/ and ^ m.
'the moon.'
SECTION II.
Nouns ending in consonants.
86. Nouns ending in consonants may also be conveniently
arranged according to the classification of the letters by analogy
of articulation ; distinguishing those ending with the nasals,
semivowels, sibilants, and with ^, as constituting separate
classes.
87. Nouns ending in consonants modify their finals before
the inflectional terminations, agreeably to the rules of Sandhi :
thus a hard consonant is optionally changed to a soft when
it is final, that is, in the nominative singular : absolutely,
before the termuiations of the dual and plural beginning with
>T. A soft consonant must be changed to a hard consonant
before ^.
88. Whatever other special modifications the inflective base
may undergo, they are, with a few exceptions, confined to the
first five inflections; that is, to the nominative in the three
numbers, and the accusative in the singular and the dual.
Whatever form the word assume before the termination of the
48 DECLENSION.
accusative plural, is preserved before all subsequent termina-
tions beginning with vowels.
89. The inflectional terminations are attached unchanged to
the final consonant of the base : the only seeming irregularity
is the rejection of ^ as the termination of the nominative sin-
gular; but this is the result of the rule, that of a final con-
junct consonant the last member shall be rejected. (See
rule ^S')
90. As the inflectional terminations are unchanged, there is
of course but one form for both masculine and feminine nouns.
In the neuter gender the terminations of the two first cases
dual and plural are changed to ^ and ^5 and •? is prefixed to
the latter.
Class I. Nouns ending in the gutturals ^, w, tt, '^.
91. There is no peculiarity in the declension of these nouns ;
their inflexion is conformable to the rules of Sandhi. The final
of the nominative may be either of the unaspirated letters, 0^ or
i^ : thus ^rS"^, ^ omnipotent/ makes f(|^|a(i or ^rf^^ ; and
"Nwft??^, ^ a painter,^ makes also f^wfcTs^ or fq^fcT'^. Before
the vowels the termination of the base is unchanged, as ^l^iojit;
r^c^fcM^. Before H the final must be the unaspirated sofl
consonant, ^rf^F^rf, fs^^f^yrwrf. Before the ^ of ^ the un-
aspirated hard consonant must be placed, v|^(aR ^, "N^rfcJ^ ^>
or the sibilant being changeable after a guttural to % the form
may be ^Sl^ ^ or in the compound letter, ^§^|v^.
In the neuter, the nominative and accusative forms are,
TRt^ or i|; *tS5l*1 ^t^
r^g^Pc^^ or 1^ P^dPc^WI f^^ffjyff
Class II. Nouns ending in the palatals % "% *r^ )fB^.
92. Nouns ending in a palatal commonly substitute oR for the
final before the inflectional terminations beginning with con-
sonants ; which again is subject to the usual euphonic changes.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
49
TT^
^ speech
>
^"^ ^ who eats
>
nom. ^^or^TPT
m^
^T^:
^x<
,v^
^
>F:
ace. tN
—
—
^^*
—
instr. c(TMi
TF«rf
^Tfnr:
^^
wm^
Hfhr.
dat. "^r^
—
tf«t:
^
. —
>jr«T:
abl. ^T^,
—
—
>F:
—
—
gen.
WT^:
m^f
>pT>:
^
loe. ^f%
^T^orciii^
HftT
—
^
voc. "^TSR
&e.
^'
&c.
n.
m^ or ^7^
^Ht
^
93. There are several anoinahes in this class, as regarding,
not the inflectional terminations, but the inflective base.
a. Derivatives from the roots W5^ ^cut/ >j^w^ ^fiy/ ^^
^ create/ ^ ' rub/ Tj»f ^ worship,^ TT5^ ' shine/ >JTif ^ shine/ ^W
^go/ substitute "^ for their final in the nom. sing., and before
the terminations beginning with H and ^; that is, they are
declined hke nouns ending in "^, which in those cases substi-
tute z before a hard, and "? before a soft consonant.
b, >J^ is further changed to >p^, ^ who fries,^ before the
terminations beginning with consonants; and to >J^ before
those beginning with vowels.
nom. >T^ or >|^
ace. >J^
instr. >ji5rr
dat. >|^
abl. >p5r:
gen. —
loc. >jf^
>IT«JT
HWt:
c. So "^^j ^ who cuts/ makes, ^ or '^^ ^^^ ^^^^
'fTwrf, "^7^. n=( m^^, ' creator of the universe,^ makes, nom.
sing. r^Hl^^ or -w^, nom. dual f^ng^[^, nom. ace. plur.
fr^^:, instr. dual f%ig^^«rf, loc. plur. fcfvj4j<^^; but F^,
50 DECLENSION.
a garland/ derived from the same root^ makes, nom. w^ or
Wl, W^) WW»; instr. dual W^, loc. plur. H"*^; and ^T^,
* blood/ is differently inflected, as will be noticed below.
VftjMa^', ^who cleanses/ makes, nom. sing. "Tft^ or -^, nom.
dual -H^, instr. dual -^^L &c. ^"3^, * a worshipper of the
gods/ makes, ^7 or ^"^j nom. dual ^^^, instr. dual ^^^wrf,
&c. ; but "^5fr«r^5 ^ a ministering priest,' which is also derived
from W, ' to worship,' is regular ; nom. sing, '^r^ or ^Ph^j
nom. dual ^^Ph^, instr. dual "^f^rwrf^ &c. tr^i^, ^a ruler/
makes, nom. sing, tt^ or tTT, nom. dual TI^, instr. dual TTT«rf ;
but P^vyU'^5 ^ a universal ruler,' has this peculiarity, that when
the final of TTW is changed, the short final vowel of f^ is
made long ; as, nom. sing. fTsSTTOT or -TJ^, nom. dual fT'^rTT^,
ace. sing. f^TSKnf, instr. dual IV^rnT^^Tf, &c. f«i'*JT»^, ^who
shines much,' makes, nom. smg. fWr^ or ->n^, nom. dual
fWnft, instr. dual fWr^«rf ; but this is a derivative from the
root, which is marked in the lists of radicals, as J-^JT^. There
is another root, >?T^ ^to shine,' without the prefix j, and its
derivatives are regular; as, nom. sing. fWT^ or fwT^, nom.
dual fwnft, instr. dual fwF^TT, &c. nfCJim, ' a mendicant,'
* an errant,' makes, nom. sing. "qft^T^ or "^, nom. dual XTpT^T^ff,
instr. dual nPi^di^wrf, &c.
94). Derivatives from roots ending in ^ or i^, formed by
adding the affix technically termed %?T, insert a nasal before
the final in the first five inflexions ; as, "^i^, ^ who joins,' from
^1^, 'join/ makes, nom. ^^, "J^, ^:; ace. ^, -g^; in the
rest it is regular, ace. plur. gif:, instr. sing. ^gpTT, instr. dual
Trnarf, loc. plur. "^^. It is regular throughout in composition;
as, ^-sgpjT^, a constellation so named, makes, nom. "^sng^ or -t[,
^nigg^ft, ^nisrg^:. ^ also, if derived from "gft^C, is regular ;
as, "g^ ' one who meditates ;' nom. ^ or ^t^, &c.
a, '95^, 'a curlew,' retains the nasal throughout; as, nom.
^, ^, ^: ; instr. -^^ ^^, ^^: ; loc. plur. ^^g or
95. Derivations of ^sr^ in the sense of ' going/ compounded
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS.
51
with prepositions and with certain other words, are very irre-
gular. They are,
f^m^^ moving all round.
44 «i^ moving equally.
5ffVT^ moving with.
f^^ moving crookedly.
HT^ eastern.
UTI^ western.
"3^^ northern.
^TT^ southern.
Which are thus inflected :
m^ ' eastern.'
nom. UTT TTT^
ace. TTT^ —
instr. TTT^ lTF«n xni^
m^:
dat.
abl.
gen.
loc.
TTFWi:
HI"*!!
TTTf
vm^^ western.
Ui(\m\ tcw^ vimfnr*
UrO-**: — —
Tnftf% — in?m
a. They form the feminines by dropping the nasal, and
adding the termination ^, as irNt, TUfi"^, and are declined like
•T^. The neuters are regular; as, nom. and ace. TTTofi, TTT^,
lTTf%; "fflTSR, TTrfNt, IT?Tf^; the rest like the masculine. W^^
is declined like ITT^ . "3^^ substitutes ^ for the antepenulti-
mate before the accus. plur. and following terminations; as,
"3^, '■df^41; "3^, "3"^Nr:, '3^'Nt, &c. Those derivatives also in
which the semivowel tj occurs, change it to ^, analogously to
the similar change in "Hm^. frnt^ changes its nasal to a
sibilant before the vowel terminations beginning with the
accus. plur.
nom. -ftn^T fffx^ PriiM^:
ace. ffTX^ — ffTC^:
instr. friiHiii fin§T«n fd't^O*?:
dat. frrt^ — fffxtrwi:
abl. ffil.'a: — —
gen. — fin:^: fwr^
loc. fTRfej — fircS^
b. When the derivatives are from a similar root, but which
H 3
52 DECLENSION.
has a different meaning, namely, ^r^ ^ to worship/ they follow
the rules of Sandhi only ; that is, ^ is rejected when final, and
before a consonant, when also the palatal nasal becomes the
guttural ; as, TTT^ ' who worships i' sing. nom. VX^, ace. TTT^,
instr. irn^, dat. tt^, abl. and gen. in^:, loc. Trrf% ; dual nom.
and ace. MI'JI^ instr. dat. and abl. TTTT^Tf^ gen. and loc. ITT^ ;
plur. nom. and ace. TTT^:, instr. Jir^P*?:, dat. and abl. TTT^^:, gen.
W^, loc. ITTf^. Fem. sing. nom. in^, W^, TTT^: ; neut.
nom. and ace. in^, VJ^, inf%.
96. There are not many nouns ending in -^, but they
follow the model of WZ &c. before the consonants, and option-
ally change "?[ to "^r before the vowels : thus ^rSlira, ^ who asks
all,^ makes,
nom. ^"tirr^ or -^ ^"trTT^ or -TTT^ ^#TTTS[: or -ITT^:
ace. ^"tTrrs[ or -irr^
instr. ^T'trrr^T or -H^TT ^TTT^«rf ^"iin^f^T:
dat. ^Swii or -TrT% — ^'tin"?«T:
abl. ^fin^: or -irr^, — —
gen. ^fin^: or -irr^ft: ^trnrarf or -ii^rf
loc. "^rfrnf^ or -iTT% ^fin^f
97. "^riT, ' to sacrifice,^ when compounded with the preposi-
tion ^i^, lengthens its penultimate vowel before the vowel
inflectional terminations, and is declined like a noun ending
in ^ before the consonants, as if it was an imperfect noun
supplied in part by the obsolete noun ^"^iT^. Thus W^tht,
' an inferior worshipper,' makes.
nom.
^rtRT^
-ii'^^iTi:
ace.
vii-^m^f
^mt«if
—
instr.
'U'cfiftPH:
dat.
•s
—
.ii^ifl»*i:
^M^r^
abl.
"^ifciiiiiT:
—
gen.
loc.
^H'^i^i^:
'i^^4lMl
^i(cin:«
voc.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 53
98. ^^5 ^a lame man/ drops, agreeably to the rules of
combination, the last member of its conjunct, when final, or
when followed by a consonant : hence, sing. nom. ^"^r, instr.
dual ^ivqf; plur. ^f»?:, loc. plur. ^"t^. Before the vowels
there is no change ; ^^, ^^^:, ^^T, &c.
99. "^T?^, ^ strong,^ may reject one IT before a pause or a
consonant, but is in other respects regular : sing. nom. "gt"^ or
"gPT, ace. "g?#, instr. ^tHI ; dual instr. "gsn^rf ; plur. instr. "gr^fW:,
loc. "gr^, &c. The neuter plural may be "gsfsS or "grf^; but
in composition with '^, ^much,^ the nasal, if inserted, must
precede the final consonant ; as, plur. nom. and ace. •^g^P^^ or
"^r^^ ^ very strong.^
100. "^i^^, 'blood,^ a neuter noun, optionally borrows its
inflexions in the accus. plur. and following cases from an obso-
lete noun, ^RHT, which is inflected like other nouns in «T.
nom.
^^1^
^^
^rwf^
ace.
—
—
— or ^reif^
instr.
, vitj^ii or ^ngrr
-im^i^l or -im^\
-iUfjOn: or ^hh{U\
dat
-hmJ^ or -H^
^3|tt: or %s^:
^I^Tvq: or ^^Rfvq:
abl.
gen.
loc.
^mi^: or "^mt:
^^ or ^m^
■^f^m Ul "ttltUI
Class III. Nouns ending in cerebrals, or 7, 7, T, ^.
101. Nouns terminating in these letters do not, as far as is
yet known, occur ; but z and "j are used as the substitutes of
nouns ending in ^, The first, as a hard consonant, is changed
optionally when final, and absolutely before the inflexions
beginning with vr, to ^.
Class IV. Nouns terminating in the dentals, w, "^T, ^, V.
102!. Nouns terminating in consonants of the dental class
are for the most part regular, being subject to no other
s. nom.
-^rrr(;or-^
— ace.
^ru
— inst.
^jon
d.inst.&c.-^ftwf
pi. inst.
^f^:
— loc.
^PCrH
54 DECLENSION.
changes than those which the laws of Sandhi require. The
final in the nominative is either the unaspirated hard or soft
letter if or ^ ; before H it is the soft ^ ; and before ^ the hard
consonant w ; as in the following paradigmas of "^IriT ^ green/
'HDhH"^ ^one who kindles fire/ cfi^ ^a bulPs hump/ ^rfrnr
' fuel.' '
^pHH^Mmfn. ^^^ f. ^rf^v f.
^TfTiTHiror-^ ^R^or-^ ^f^lfor-^
-Tifi^H'if ^fi^ ^rftnl
wfrjTH^ ^K^ ^rfinTT &c.
^rfTTR^ ^^3rf TrfiTwf &c.
The neuter form of the two first is in the nom. and ace. ;
^TT or -^, ffbrt, ^frfnT; wfii^lf or -^, ^iiDHH^ql, ^rfrTmf^;
but %1^5 ^who cuts much/ and similar derivatives, do not
insert the nasal in the plural ; as, "^Ihit or -^, ^ftr^t, ^fWf^.
a. "^l^, ' a tooth/ and tj?^, ^ an army/ are considered as
optionally substituted for ^ and ijriHl; as, sing. nom. ^w or
^^ or ^:, ace. ^ or ^, instr. ^T or ^^«T; dual instr. &c.
^^ or ^TTTwrf, &c.
h» So tr^, ^ a foot/ is the optional substitute for xrr^ in all
cases, and absolutely for xn^ in composition, but only in the
accus. plur. and subsequent cases beginning with vowels ; as,
sing. nom. "qTT or tj^ or tri^:, ace. xnf or xn^, instr. tt^t or TI^H ;
dual instr. &c. "qrarf xn^rwif, &c. : but ^mRT^, ^ tiger- foot,' a
plant so named, makes, nom. "arnnrn^ or ttrt, ^lym^^l, ^nnn^: ;
ace. ^arraxn^, ^TTRT^, ^mn?^:; instr. ^mPT^T, «mMm«qf, ^mr
tnfkt^ &c. In like manner, ^^, 'the heart,' is a substitute for
f^; nom. fW or ^, ^, ^fi^, &c.
103. 'T^, ' the spleen,' and l^pBlTj ^ ordure,' neuter nouns,
are declined analogously to -^^A ; that is, they optionally
substitute in the accusative plural and subsequent cases the
inflexions of obsolete nouns ending in •^, as irsR^ and "5r2R»|.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 55
nom. ^q^ i|<Jffl -Mjfnl
ace. — — — or ^^cmPh
instr. iTfin or "iT3iT ^Tfwf or V^fm 'f^ff^** or "JT^fifW:
dat. -q^ or i|^ T^f^: or it|iWK
abl. ^r^ or irg}:
gen. ^rfffh or TT^Rt: ^T^iff or xr^
loc. ^<*rri or tr^rfVf Ti-^ or iToiiW
So T^r^ifnf or ^lefclfn, ^fin or ^TSiT^ &c.
G. -^ ^who knows/ ehanges its initial to H whenever it
changes its final to the unaspirated letter^ that is, in the nomi-
native singular, and before the inflectional terminations begin-
ning with a consonant.
nom. ^ or >j^ -^^ -^V:
instr. "^ ^J?lf ^: &c.
loc. pliu*. >jig &c.
104. Besides nouns of a general character ending in den-
tals, there are certain declinable participles ending in WW and
^, and certain possessive nouns ending in T?^ and Tfrf , which
undergo some modification of the inflective base before the
terminations of the nominative, and before the accusative sin-
gular and dual. In all the other cases they are regularly
dechned like other nouns ending in T^; that is, the vowel
affixes are attached to the final ^ if is unaltered before ^, and
becomes ^ before H.
105. These participial and possessive nouns prefix an tf to
their final w before the teiTninations of the five first inflexions :
\
thus TT^ ' cooking,^ becomes XR^. Those ending in ^ or
JTf^ also make the penultimate vowel long in the nominative, and
accordingly fH^ becomes ^nr^Tn^ ' doing :' but by the rule
that the second member of a final conjunct consonant is to be
rejected, the final l^ is thrown out, and the words remain in
the nominative singular ^M*\^, ojiHNI«^. Before the vowels the
compound is unchanged, as M-Mifl, cjiH^^tfl, &c. : thus,
56 DECLENSION.
H^r^ ^ being.'
^Jirri[_^ ' going.'
nom. imf\^ H^^ H^til
ace. H4iT — vrwtn
Jid^^qf ntmfet&c.
nom. \rH<=(T^ VH^
ace. \R^nr —
instr. VRTcH &c.
f?rr
asc.
ft
nom. siflH^ 'iOH'ii
ace. ^H7i^ —
«5ftHd: &C.
«. To form the feminine gender of these nouns, ^ is added
to the termination, and the noun is decHned like »T^; as,
JIH^rt), ^H«lri1, ^iH'ril. The neuter is regular; as, TtrTTi^,
b. Participles of the present tense formed with ^n^ some-
times retain the nasal augment in the feminine noun through-
out, and in the nominative and accusative dual of the neuter ;
as, >T^ makes H^^, >T^rn^, >T^t?t:, &c. in the feminine ; and
in the neuter, >T^, H^^t, H'^Hfl.
c. This insertion of the nasal is imperative in the participles
of all verbs of the first, fourth, and tenth conjugations. It is
optionally inserted after verbs of other conjugations, which
either in their simple form or in their conjugational bases end
with ^ or ^TT. It is not inserted after any others.
Verb.
Part.
pres. masc.
Fem.
ist conj. >{^to be
>1^
H^i(\
3d _ i^ *° '''*
(VTT to shine
^51^
^T^lft
^^
HTlft or HT^
f 1 *^ sacrifice ;)
^ ( repeated, ^j
I'^'^x
l3r?ft
4th — f^^ to play
^'Nnr
^^
5th- il to bear;.,
^ ( increment
ith)
1^
1^^
THTf^
riHrft
■^1li{ri1or-^|i|>ri1
•^11.^111
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 57
6th conj. w^ to torment
7th — "^ to obstruct
«fV> riR to stretch ; with)
( increment TTg j
nth— |^.t«Hv; ^j^i
^ ( increment 'WWJ)
loth — "^ to steal
So in the nominative and accusative dual of the neuter, H'^^ ;
^i^t, m?ft or m?rr% &c.
d. The participles of the present tense of verbs, which take
a reduplicate form, even though the crude verb originally
terminates in ^ or ^rr, do not insert an iT before their final
TT, but are declined like nouns in general ending in that con-
sonant ; as ^ ^ to give :' part. pres. ^^ ; masc. nom. ;^^ or
^[^, ^^> ^^l ; ace. ^^, ^^5 ^^: j instr. ^^TTT, ^^wf? &c. :
fern. sing. nom. ^^T"; neut. nom. ace. dual ^^; plur. ^^fnT
or 1^^.
e. There are certain other verbs w^hich are analogously-
inflected in their present participles ; as, 1{^ * to eat ;' Tr^,
»r^^, ros^:, &c. : -^mr ^ govern f '^rvsi{, ^PET^, ^rnaw:, &c.
/. >T^, when a term of address, as * Sir,' * Your worship,^
is dechned amongst the pronouns.
ff, "^in^ ^ a deer,' wut ' the world,' and "^^ ' great,' are
declined like participles in the three numbers of the nomina-
tive and in the accusative singular and dual ; in the rest they
are regular.
nom.K ITT^
ace. -< ifintT
instr. "^irr
106. H^T^, ^great,^ makes its penultimate long before the-
IJMrrft
'jtr^d":
^illfl
^jm:
1^
'^^m:
'jMff!
?^*
^Mlfi
WTtf:
f^t
f^:
^^iqi
^^fkt &c,
58
DECLENSION.
first five inflexions of the masculine^, and that of the two first
eases plural of the neuter ; as.
nom. »7^rT
ace. JT^Tnf
instr. ^T^iTT
H^lifl
Fem. *r^; neut. nom. and ace. T^, JT^, H^Tf%.
«. Nouns of every description ending in dentals are nume-
rous ; of which the following are a few.
Substantives.
^mPhm^ f. a sacred treatise
^Hff n. a lotus
■j*^^ mf. a cannibal
5^ f. a stone
TrffPT^ f. ist day of lunar fortnight
*T^ m. wind
f%^ f. lightning
^rr^ f. autumn
wm{^ f. wealth
Hf^^ f. agreement
Possessives.
^rr^^^TiT long-lived
^gi"!^ abounding in lotuses
iflrn^ sensible .
mAt[^ dependant
"5^^ having children
^f^l^ having form
HJTTf^ majestic, divine
ir^r^l^ famous
<;r85ftTf^ prosperous
^i^^ff^ having elegance
Attributives.
^ who or what cuts
"Nt^ who or what gathers
xn^ who or what falls
Yi[ who or what is or abides
'3f^^^ who speaks
JT^ who or what churns
ij^ what torments
"^ who sends or drives
fn^ who or what breaks
f^ who or what knows
Participles.
ftT( doing
iT^ar?^ going
"^^ going
W^ conquering
^TR"?^ knowing
irn^ crossing
^Jf?^ taming
Vtj^ holding
•T^ sounding
^RTl^ flowing
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 59
Class V. Nouns ending in labials, xr, xfi, "^^ vr.
107. These, which are few in number, are for the most
part regular. The nominative ends in t^ or '^. The final
remains before the vowel terminations, and is "^ before i?, and
TT before ^; as gii^ * who presences :' nom. ^ or w^, tj^j, j^i ;
ace. Ti% nm, gir:; instr. Tvqj, ^J^, Tjf^:; loc. plur. ij^.
So cfi^ ^ a quarter of the horizon :' nom. ofi"^ or "^r^, cK^>^,
'^i^^t: ; ace. cR^5 ofi^^ft, cR^^t: ; instr. oir^iTT, ofi-^^orf ; loc. plur.
108. There is one irregular noun in this class, W^ ^ water,'
declinable only in the plural number : plur. nom. ^HTt, ace.
W^:, instr. wf^:, dat. and abl. WSJl, gen. "^rqf, loc. ^3^.
In composition it may be declined like any other noun in
T^; as, ^T^, from ^ ^good,' and ^T^ ^ water,' ^having good
water,' makes, nom. sing, ^t^ or ^'^, nom. dual ^t^, nom.
plur. ^tt:, instr. dual ^^]wrf, loc. plur. ^^, &c.
Class VI. Nouns ending in nasals, T, >T, ^y -T, T.
109' Of words terminating in nasals of the two first classes
no instances are known, and but few are met with ending in
TIT. They are quite regular, but may optionally insert ^ before
^; as ^^^ ^of a good class :' nom. '^nm, TnXJ^, "^n^l; instr,
&c. dual ^TTTT!T«if : loc. plur. mm^ or ^JK'idfi.
110. Nouns ending in «T are numerous, and present many
peculiarities. They may be divided into two orders ; one
ending in ^T«^, the other in ^«^.
Nouns ending in ^rT.
111. When regularly inflected, nouns in ^TJT drop the final
in the nominative singular, and before the terminations begin-
ning with consonants ; and in the masculine and feminine
genders they make the penultimate letter long before all the
terminations of the nominative, and those of the accusative
I 21
60 DECLENSION.
singular and dual : the vocative singular is unchanged. Thus
WW«T, ^ soul/ is declined as follows :
nom. ^imi
^\t*i\r{i
^^rTr^Tirr:
ace. ^TWT^
-iiif*<H:
iustr. ->Mlr^HI
^rrrff«iT
dat. -illrWH &c.
,
loc. "5!TfW^
voc. W^m'^
In the neuter form the vowel is made long only, agreeably to
general rule, in the plural; where however a nasal is not
inserted before a nasal : "^^T^T ' Brahma/ ' the Supreme / nom.
ace. 'S^r, "^^gnift, ^3^^.
112. In these two examples, ^^fmTtT and '^^•T, the final
'^ is preceded by a conjunct consonant, of which the final
letter is 17. If the last of such conjunct be ^, the noun is simi-
larly inflected ; as xng*! ^ a sacrificer :' nom. mSTT, -M'^ I «ll, ^3^ IH : ;
ace. ij3^|rf, if^T^, irs^rft, &c. : but if no such conjunct precede,
then in the accusative plural and following cases, of which the
terminations begin with vowels, the penultimate W is rejected,
and the antepenultimate and final coalesce ; as TTifJ^ ^ a king :'
nom. "cnTT, tnn^, tTiTT^:; ace. tT^n^, TPTT^, tT^; instr. TI^,
Xi»rwn, TT^rfWt ; voc. UST"^, &c. In the locative sing, the rejec-
tion is optional ; as tlf^ or tTWf^.
a. The same takes place before the feminine affix ^; as TT^
' a queen :' and optionally before the neuter dual ; as ^ftiT'T
^ the sky :' nom. ace. ^iftT, ^acfW or ^?Rt, ^infw.
b. When a noun ending in ^"5f^ is derived from a root
ending in ^ or ^, preceded by ^, "g", or '^, the vowel is made
long before the conjunct consonant of the accusative plural,
&c. ; as Mfl^n^^'^l ^ who sports :' nom. ""Tftf^^, ■qftf^'TRl,
T^ftf^^T^:; ace. -qftf^^T^, xrlrf^Tnft, TTftj^ti:; instr. "qft^IT,
irftf^^f, xrri:f^^rfH:, &c.
c. Tni"^, a name of Indra, may substitute l^ for its final,
and be declined like a noun in '^; as, nom. iT''s?Tr*^, HXRv^T,
Hil^nt: ; ace. ?iTj^, 'T'^iwr, HV^^rC, &c. : but it is also declin-
NOUNS ENBING IN CONSONANTS. 61
able as a noun in ^T when it changes its semivowel ^ to "3"
before the vowel terminations of the accusative plural and
following cases, and ^ is substituted for "g" and the w of jht;
nom. W^fWi
JTV4H1
^'^■^\■^:
,
HMMMI
*?^>h:
ace. ^^^^H
mstr. ^^\^\
dat. vr^^
WW^van
H^fe
loc. HH^U
voc. irq^'^
d. ig"^, ^a dog/ and "^'^^ 'a youth/ are declined so far
analogously to HTr^"^, that they change ^ to ^before the accu-
sative plural and the following cases, of which the terminations
begin with vowels. In ''g"^ the "3" is of course merely sub-
joined to the ^; in "g"^*^ it is preceded by the '3' of ^, and
consequently the two short vowels combine into one long one ;
they then follow the analogy of T.'R"'^, as by rule ii3, and
reject the penultimate ^; in consequence of which, "3" or ^
immediately precedes the final ^. '^•^, kvcov, ' canis/ ^ a dog :'
nom. "^j Wi^, ^T^n ; ace. igTif, "^TRT, ^: ; instr. "sprr, "^«lf,
TgrfW: ; dat. T?r%, "sgvqf^ &c. "^TT, ^ juvenis/ ^ a youth :' nom.
^^, 5^nft, ^T?T:; ace. ^^, ^^Tift, ^:; instr. t^, ^^^,
g^fk: ; dat. "^, '^^, &c.
e. 'ws^^, ^the sun/ is irregular in not making the penul-
timate long before the terminations of the nominative dual and
plural, and accusative singular and dual ; in the rest it follows
TT»T*T ; its "^ is changed to ^ by virtue of the ^ in "^T^.
nom. wc§Trr ^i^RTcft w^w:
ace. ^^nt?^^ — ^nS?^
instr. -^it^^^U ^5T#?«n --3ii§*<0r.
loc. ^n:q?rftii or ^s^^fw — ^nE§?f^
voc. "»H't5*<H
/. Compounds with ^^, ^to kill,' follow the analogy of
^n§H"?T, i. e. they do not make the vowel long in the nom.
62 DECI^ENSION.
dual, &c. They also change ^ to "set before the vowel termina-
tions of the accusative plural, and following cases, in which
also the penultimate vowel is rejected, and accordingly the
antepenultimate and final consonants combine.
^isr^";^, ^ the murderer of a Brahman/
nom. -^^T w?r^ -pi^^iir:
ace. W^T^ — "3^^:
instr. -^igrm ^^vqf "351^:
dat. '^^ &c.
g. ^\, ^ the sun,' is inflected after the model of ^n§H'!^ ;
but in the accusative plural, and analogous cases, an imperfect
noun, '^, is optionally substituted.
nom. "^ ijMlffl "^[TO:
ace. MM 111 — iiuii: or "^t
instr. MUill or Tjqr "^^wf "^^^fnt
dat. "JT^ or "i|^ &c.
h, ^"ff^, 'a horse,' belongs to nouns in ^HT in one case
only, the nom. sing. : in all the rest it is declined like a noun
in 7^, or '^\', as,
nom. ^rfr *ii§Tn ^^^*ax
ace. "^rtnt — ^i^:
instr. ^^rfin ^^* ^iflk:
dat. ^rt^ &c.
If compounded with a negative, and used attributively, it is
declined regularly as a noun ending in ^'t? preceded by a
conjunct consonant, of which the last member is ^; as ^^"t"^
^ one who has not a horse :' nom. "Wr|"tT, '^R't'nft', WrrfTrT: ;
ace. wq#R, W^#nn, ^R#fr: ; instr. '^nrtiTT, ^^#«?f, &c.
113. ^3sr^ neut., ^a day,' is very irregular, substituting ic:
for the final in the nominative singular and locative plural,
and "g* convertible to 'sft with the short vowel of ^r^ before H.
In the other cases it conforms to «ift?T^; as.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 63
nom.) g. - ^
ace. J^^* ^or^si^ ^sr^^
instr. ^i^ ^^t«n ^T^tftr:
dat. "^ — ^T^twr:
abl. ^: — —
gen. — ^I^. ^
loe. ^rf^ or ^r^fVr — ^'^♦^ or SH^^^g
a. Compounded with numerals^ with f^, or with ^THT^ ^rg is
substituted before all the terminations, and is dechned hke a
noun ending in ^; as wnn^ ^ the afternoon :' M'lm^:, Hm\^,
'Wnu^ly &c. : but in the locative case singular these com-
pounds take different forms ; as ^ | i\ \^, ^iimf^ or ^I^I^Ph.
b. Compounded with other words, W^ is declined in the
mascuhne and feminine like other nouns in ^SHT, except before
the terminations of the dual and plural that begin with H, where
it substitutes "3" for "q" ; as ^^i^tt ^ a long day :' nom. r()5i^|,
<(19|^IHT, ^-tr^T^: ; ace. <1Q|^IH, ^{iQl^i^, ^"t^^: ; instr. ^t%^,
^(ttr^W, ^fhtrftfn: ; dat. ^1^, &c. ; loc. sing, ^'ttlf^ or ^ttr^frr,
plur. i^^^:w or rflQl^i^ voc. ^ft^:, &c.
Nouns in ^^.
114. Many possessive nouns are formed with the affixes
^f^^ f^^, and f*T»T ; as, \rf^'5T ^ having wealth/ ' opulent / ^ft?*^
'having a staff/ 'an ascetic/ riqftjj'^ 'having devotion/ 'a
devotee / ^ifrRr^ ' having speech/ ' eloquent :' all of which are
declined on one model. They reject the «T before the conso-
nants ; retain it before the vowels ; and make the penultimate
of the base long in the nom. singular ; in all the other cases
the inflectional terminations are added, without any change,
to the final of the base : as vfVriT mfn. ' rich.^
masc. nom. "^"^ vf^T«ft vf^:
ace. vf^ — >Tf^:
instr. vfT?rr vfjw vf^fW:
dat. vf^ &c. loc. \rf^T|
voc, VfVfrf
64 DECLENSION.
The feminine affixes ^, as vf^fR% and is declined like "JT^.
The neuter is regular ; nom. ace. vfJT^ vf^rft, V^Tftr.
115. There are three irregular nouns of this class; Tffvji^
'a road/ ttT^'T ^a churning stick/ and ^^jfj^^^r ^a name of
Indra.^ These substitute ^T for the final syllable before the
affix of the nominative singular^ and for ^ before the other
affixes of the nominative, and those of the accusative singular
and dual: before the vowel terminations of the accusative
plural and other cases they reject the final syllable altogether :
before the consonants they reject the iT.
The two first also prefix a nasal to the consonant "^r,
before the first five inflexions ; viz. those of the nominative,
and the singular and dual accusative ; as "Cff^'^T ' a path/ ^ a
road.^
nom. "qr^: tT^^TlTn tp^THT:
ace. xff'MH* — xni:
instr. Jpsn xjf^vqf Xff^rfW:
dat. xf'^ &c. loc. xrfzrj
voc. '^f^^
So TRf^^ makes it^t:, h^ph, ^rm, nf^«rf, &c.
Compounded with other words, these are dechned in the
masculine in the same manner as the uncompounded word:
in the feminine, the final syllable is rejected, and the affix ^
is added to the antepenultimate consonant : in the neuter,
•T is rejected in the singular and dual, and prefixed to "^T
before the plural: as ^qHii*^, ^having a good road,' makes,
masc. ^xTPzrr:, &c. ; fem. "'gtnfl', Trqw, &c.; neut. nom. and ace.
^^^^ makes, nom. "^JipfT:, ^^TO^, "^^JWTW: ; ace. ^^^f^TO,
'^5^'WT^^? "^^JWi ; instr. ^^T, ^^W^^ &c.
116. Nouns ending in J^ are few: before the consonantal
terminations it is changed to *T ; as "R^rn^ ^ mild,' ' quiet/ makes,
nom. TJ^T^^, Tr^n^ft, TT^nw: ; instr. TT^TTHT, TT^TT^f, T^TT^: ; loc.
plur. 1T^^ or IT^T^.
NOUNS ENDING IN eONSONANTS. 65
Class VIL Nouns ending in semivowels, iT, t, T^, ^'
117. Nouns ending in if and c5 are of rare occurrence : if
they occur, they are regular.
118. Nouns derived from verbal roots ending in ^ or "^ make
a preceding vowel long before the inflectional terminations which
begin with consonants. ^ is changed to Visarga in the nomi-
native singular ; but not before the locative plural, if it be a
radical letter. ^ followed by a vowel, as in ^, is not doubled
after ^. Thus fn^ fem. ' speech :' nom. ift:, fJT^, fjR: ; ace.
fnt, fn$5 f^TC ; instr. fiRT, ^fb^, 'ftf^: ; loc. plur. Tft|.
Nouns ending in semivowels do not insert a nasal before
the neuter plural. TTC: n., * water,^ makes, nom. and ace. "^:,
TT^, ^rft; instr. '^m, '^T^, "^jf^l, &c.
a. f^, ^ sky,^ changes ^ to ^ in the nominative, and to "3"
before the consonantal terminations. The ^ of f^ becomes "^
by the rules of Sandhi. f^^ f. ^sky:' nom. ^:, f^, f^^:;
ace. f^, f^^, f^: ; instr. f^, ^vqf, ^f^: ; loc. plur. ^.
b. Used attributively, as in ^f^? ^ having a clear sky (a
day),^ the neuter form is, nom. and ace. ^, ^f^^, ^^^^ J ^^^
rest like the masculine.
Class VIII. Nouns ending in sibilants, ^, ^, ^.
^.
119. Nouns formed from verbal roots ending in 3(, with
the affix technically termed ffi''^, substitute for the final the
guttural letter "3^ before all the terminations beginning with
consonants; as f^ f. ^space.^
nom. 1^ or f^ G^^ii f^:
ace. f^^ — f^i^n
instr. f^^ f^'^TT f^fnr: &c.
loc. f^f^ f^'jft: f^
When formed with any other affix, it is said that "^ is sub-
stituted for the final ; and for 1^ the cerebral ^ is substituted
in the same cases.
K
66 DECLENSION.
fVar (f^) Svho enters/
nom. f^ or f%^ f^ f^:
ace. f^ — —
instr. f%^ f^Tfwrf fT^. &c.
loc. f^ f%^. f^^^
neuter nom. and ace. f^^ or f^, f^, f^%
«. «=n^5 ' who or what destroys/ takes either form.
nam. "^-^ or "^^-^ ^ ^;t^.
ace. "q^ — —
instr. iTW ^F«lf or Tf^ rffhr: or iTf fW:
loc. rr% ffHT or «T^
d, H^ ^who sees/ with its compounds ^?^, ti\i^[, ^¥^>
* such-like/ ' similar/ take the guttural substitute : so do the
derivatives of ^p{^ ^to touch/ WT^ or ITT?^, in^#, TVCWW?
WHT^Tt, &c. : so "fH^iS^ ^who touches Ghee/ "f^^ ^^ ^^
^HfHj^ft^ ^d^^fT, TJTT^^Twrf, &c.
c. f?r3T may be substituted for f«T5n ^ night/ and is then
declined like fV^T; according to some^ a palatal may be sub-
stituted for the cerebral before the consonants, except in the
nominative singular ; as f^r^^^ or ffT»|^f, "^^^? ^^ ^^^^*
1210. Nouns ending in "^ are inflected in one of three ways;
I. by substituting z for the final before the consonantal inflex-
ions ; 2. by substituting oR in the similar cases ; and 3. by
substituting before the same inflexions ' ru^ or ^.
The substitution of z is considered the regular form of
inflecting verbal derivative forms in "^ ; as fFT^ f., * light,^ from
fFr\ ' to shine .^
nom. fNr^ or fi^ fj^ ft^l
ace. fr^"R — —
instr. fr^m fj^Twrf fi^f^:
dat. frif^ &c. loc. frr^5 or fr^^r^
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 67
121. As in the case of nouns ending in ^, those in "^
formed from verbs by the affix f^ take the guttural substi-
tute ; as ;^Y^ ^ arrogant/ from y^ ^ to be proud.^
nom. ^Y^ or -"^ ^^m ^vq:
ace. ^[V^ — —
instr. ^v^ ^wwrf &c.
122. In the case of ^r^ * a friend/ and some other words,
particularly those in which the final is properly ^^5 but has
become "^ in consequence of being preceded by some other
vowel than ^ or ^TT (see rule 29)5 ^ is substituted for the final
before the consonantal inflexions, and the nouns are decHned
like nouns ending in ^.
^^ ^ a friend.'
nom. ^m: ^T^m w^:
ace. ;=r^ — —
instr. ^^ ^"ST^t ^Rijl^:
dat. ^T^ &c. loc. ^"ST:"! or ^njBg
(I. ■^rrf^T'^ for ^srrfV^ f* ^ ^ benediction/ is similarly inflected,
nom. -i^i^f): ^JT%^ ^nf^R:
ace. 'Hlf^R — —
instr. 'i^lP^im ^^n^fh^ ^STT^fS:
dat. ^iP^R &c. loc. ^r^fh"! or WT^fhg
b. cfl^ for ^V^j ^the arm/ besides being declined in this
manner, admits before the vowel terminations of the accusative
plural and following cases the optional use of ^«f, declined
like nouns in w^.
nom. ^:
^t^
^.
ace. ^
—
— or ^h^r:
mstr. ^>m or ^H^n
^^
TrfSI:
dat. ^ or ^tcSr
^:
abl. i^t^ or ^totJTI
—
—
gen. ^Yr. or ^^;
tfN^or
^triifh
^>Mf or ^hcin
loc. ^ or ^tfon
^:g or ^>ig
It is also neuter : nom.
and ace. ^:
K 2
, ^^,
iri^.
08 DECLENSION.
c. Neuter nouns with a penultimate ^ or "g" shorty make
the vowel long only before the nasal augment of the nomi-
native and accusative plural ; as^ \T7r^ ^ a bow/ ^TST"^ ' the
eye/ df%^ ^ light/ "^fV^ * Ghee/ severally for V^^, ^^\? &c. ;
as, nom. and ace. ^^:, dfMt, tNff^; instr. df^^L df^*^,
^rf^f^:^ &c. : so, nom. and ace. ^rcr:, "^1^% '^''^f^; instr. 'qw^,
d. Nouns derived from the desiderative form of the verb
are declined after this manner ; as ftnTfe"^, ' one who wishes to
read/ makes, mf. frrxT^:, fxprfST^, f'T'??(tv|f, &c. ; neuter nom.
and ace. fxRf?:, fxfxrlW, f^T^TfTf^. It does not insert the nasal
in the neuter plural, f^^, ^one who wishes to do/ rejects
the sibilant before a consonantal inflection (see rule 35); as,
f^:, "N^lt, f^^R^t:, f%^^h^, &c.
12(3. Nouns formed from verbs ending in the compound
letter "^ reject before the consonantal inflexions either the
first member of the compound or '^, and are then declined like
nouns in T^; or they reject the second member t^, and are
declined as if ending in o^.
The same words, accordingly as they are said to be
formed with different affixes, may take both modifications ; as
TT^ mf. ^ who or what pares' or ^ makes thin :' nom. sing. TT^
or ITT, If^ or w^ ; instr. dual, &c. iT^^rf or iTTWjf ; loc. plur. K^
or ir^', so ifta^, ^a cow-keeper,^ makes, nom. sing. ^ftT^ or
^frt:?, Tplr:^ or -tn ; instr. dual, &c. ifk^«rf or TftT7«rf ; loc. plur.
ifte^ or Wk.^* Before the vowels the final is of course
unchanged ; as irsll, tvIt;^.
a. Nouns in "^ formed from desideratives reject the sibilant
only ; as fxnr^, ^ who desires to cook/ makes, fv^^'^ or -t^,
frpT^, f^nF^rf, f^W^, &c. fsR^ ^ who wishes to speak,^ ^^^^
' what desires to burn,' are similarly inflected.
^.
124. Nouns masculine and feminine ending in ^, when
preceded by ^, make the penultimate long in the nominative
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 69
singular, and substitute T for the sibilant before the inflexions
beginning with vr, which with a preceding ^ makes ^.
'^vm ' Brahma
}
nom.
w.
^v^
hm
ace.
^v^
instr.
. %>reT
^vtwn"
^>itfH:
dat.
^>i^
^vr«i:
abl.
^vw:
—
gen.
^v^:
Iw*
loc.
Wh
^:^ or ^fg
voc.
^:
a. The vowel is not made long in the nominative, if the
noun retain the form of the radical whence it is derived; as,
^ ^ to clothe f WW^ ' who dresses well ;' nom. sing. ^: . So
fmiiil^ ^ who takes a funeral cake/ from frri^? and T^^^ ' to
take/ nom. sing. fxRIJir:.
h. Three masculine nouns in w^ are irregular, »hh^^ ^ time/
"g^ffriTFr ^ the regent of the planet Venus/ and "g^^t^^ ^ name of
Indra. They are declined in the nominative singular as if
ending in w^ ; ^R%^, "3^RT, "J^W* I^^ the vocative the first
and last are regular, ^R^:, "cr^^: ; the second has three forms,
^"^nr:, "t^ft, or "g^r^.
125. Neuter nouns in ^W do not make the penultimate
long in the nominative and accusative singular, but make it
long in the plural ; as ttxtR' ^ water :^ nom. and ace. ttti:, xnRft,
"qiiiPfi ; xpT^T, xpft^rf, trzftfiT:, &c. ; "'Txr:^ or Mi|^.
126. Nouns ending in ^ in conjunction with a consonant
drop the final (by rule '>,^ before the consonantal inflexions ;
so f^^ mf., ^who or what injures/ becomes, nom. f^, H^fHi,
f^^\ ; ace. f^^, n^««Ht, f^^: ; instr. f^^, f^^wrf, f^fr^:,
&c.
a. Derivatives from H^ and s^, Ho fall/ with the affix
ffi^, substitute ^ for the final (which becomes ^ and 's) before
the consonants, and reject the nasal throughout, ssi^ ^ who
70 DECLENSION.
falls :' nom. sr^ or uf^, jsr^, «PR: ; ace. m^, SEJ^, um: ; instr.
ts(m, vsfff^, s^fW:^ &c.
127. "5^5 ^a man/ drops the final sibilant before the con-
sonantal inflexions ; and it is otherwise peculiar in the ^nomi-
native, and in the singular and dual of the accusative ; as,
nom. "JTHT gni^SI "gm^:
ace. «4HI*^ — "5^:
instr. xprr '^^ "gf^r:
dat. Tj% — ■g«T:
abl. g^: — —
gen. "5^: ^: ^
loc. ^ — ifor^
voc. "g^r?^ &;c.
It may be declined in three genders as an epithet ; as "5^
^of a good man:' mf, ^gni*^ &c. ; neut. nom. and ace. ^ry^,
128. There are some participial nouns formed with ^pff,
which before the inflexions of the nominative, and of the accu-
sative singular and dual, prefix a nasal to the sibilant, and
make the preceding vowel long. In the nominative singular
the "IT is rejected, as the final of a conjunct consonant : before
the accusative plural, and following vowel inflexions, "^ is
changed to "3", as also before a feminine formed with ^, and
the dual neuter : the sibilant, when final (as in the neuter
singular), and before the consonantal inflexions, is changed
tof.
fVi'^^ * who is knowing, wise.'
masc. nom. "RIT*^ frg'T^ fTiTO:
ace. f^irM — r^riM:
instr. f%5^ f%irarf f^nrfk:
dat. f^^ &c. loc. f^rarr5[
voc. f^*^
fem. fw^ f^'sft ik^W*
neut. f^i{ f^^ f^^WTf^
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 71
«. If the termination Tff be preceded by ^, that vowel is
rejected when the W is changed to "g" ; as ^f^^ ^ Vvho is sit-
ting:' nom. «G(cnv^5 ^f^r^j ^f^^rnr:; ace. ^^m, Sfr-^i^t,
&g^: ; instr. ^^, ilP^MiJji, &c. : fern. nom. sing. ^^'^ : neut.
nom. and ace. ^f^T?^, ^JM^ ^f^f^ffir.
129- Superlatives formed with the termination ^x^T are
declined in the three numbers of the nominative, and in the
singular and dual accusative, analogously to participles in "srw ;
in the other cases they follow the analogy of nouns in '^m ; as
TH^THT ' most heavy.'
masc. nom. i|0^!^ JlO^lf^ 'lO^lfC
ace. -rrdw^ — ^vdT^:
instr. Tr^ij:m n^T[tvin TRNfrfW:
dat. ircNiir &c. loc. TRShETH or J|0^^
voc. iiCjmr\^
fem. i\()mH\ iiijmvti TT^T^r^:
neut. in^: Ji0^^1 TT^^riftr
Class IX. Nouns ending in ^.
130. Nouns ending in ^ substitute ^ for it, agreeably to
rule 33 : ^ undergoes the changes to which the rules of Sandhi
subject it. Tjfc?^ ' a bee/ from ^^ ' honey/ and f<^ ' who
or what sips/ is thus decHned :
nom. 'ivf^j^ or -f^f w^fc^J^ Jr^f^:
ace. ^fc^^ — —
instr. JTvf^r^ ^vni^^wn i^^fc5|fW:
dat. ?TYfc5^ — ?r^T«i:
abl. JfvfH^: — —
gen. — Ji^fc^^l: h^Pc^^i
loc. Hvf^^jf^ ''^^^ or -fcJTrW
voc. 5R^^
The feminine is the same as the mascuhne. f?5^ in the neuter
makes, nom. and ace. fc5T or -^, fc5^, fc5f^.
72 DECLENSION.
a. "gtnrr^j a name of Indra, is inflected like ^T^^^^ ^"^
has the peculiarity of changing ^ to "^ when the final is
changed ; as ^um^ or -T, "gnWT^, "gTT^T^wrf, &c.
131. Words formed with the affix ffi»T substitute "^ for a
final ^5 which becomes c^ or t\^^ agreeably to the rules of San-
dhi, before the consonantal inflexions ; as tIw^, ' a metre of
the Vedas.'
nom. "grfw^ or tt ^w^ TfoH^:
ace. "Tfwr^ — —
instr. Tfw^ "^laiFwrf ■^farrf^:
dat. '^ fuil^ &c. loc. Tfw"^
a. Other verbal nouns formed with the same affix substi-
tute either a guttural or a cerebral for the final; as ^ mf.
' one who is perplexed.'
nom. g^-g^ or g^-g^ g^ g^:
ace. g"^ — —
instr. g^ Sf**^ ^"^ W^ gf^ or gf^J
dat. g% &c. loc. g^g or g^
So ^1? 'one who vomits;^ %^ 'one who is kind;' ^r? ^one
who hates.'
h. But, monosyllabic verbal derivatives, ending in an aspi-
rated soft consonant, change their initial, if it be any unaspi-
rated soft consonant, except ir^ to its corresponding aspirate,
whenever the final is changed : therefore tttt for "^^^ becomes,
nom. sing, "g^ or "giT, ^ or "g^; instr. dat. and abl. dual
-grwrf or 'g|«rf ; instr. plur. g^: ; dat. and abl. plur. grwc or
gpr: ; loc. plur. g^ or g^g ; in the other cases, ^, ^:, ^r^,
&c. So ^ * what burns :' v^ or >PT, \i^ or Vf ; W^ or
Vfwrf &c. H^, who or what milks/ takes the guttural substi-
tute only ; as,
loc. Y^
nom. g^ory^
3^
ace. 5^
—
instr. 51^
gr«if
dat. ?^ &c.
NOUNS ENDING IN CONSONANTS. 73
^' "^T^5 ^what bears or carries/ substitutes ii for the first
two letters in several compound nouns before the accusative
plural and subsequent vowel inflexions : this "gi (by rule 3.
clause c.) makes, with a preceding ^, ^ not ^; as P^vycii^
mf. ^ all- sustaining/
nom. r^jy^r^or-^ H^^^lt f^^Hi^:
ace. r^iiym^* — fr^s^:
instr. r^iyi^i f^mmTWif fTss[^T^
dat. Pm^^ &c. loc. r^mcji^^
fern. nom. sing, fr^ftl^
If the preceding vowel be not ^ or ^ir, the "31 to which ^ is
changed combines with it, according to rule : thus ^f^T^ ^ earth-
sustaining;' nom. *T^, *^NI^, ^^T^t; ace. plur. ^:; instr.
sing. >j^, &c.
d. "%fr^T^, ^Indra/ (he who is borne on a white horse,)
presents several anomahes. In the nominative and vocative
singular, and before the consonantal inflexions, it is declined
as if ending in ^aw ; as "^rfr^^. In the accusative plural and
following cases mth vowel inflexions it retains its final, but
optionally substitutes "gr for TT; as,
nom. "^^t »ydm^ f^rim^:
ace. ^d«(l^ — iUfTl^: or nin«ii^:
instr. iyril^i or ^ri^i^i %r^«lf ^TfTTrfir:
dat. fiSrtl^ or T^rt^l^ — *5d«ri«T:
abl. %^;or^ri^l^: — —
gen. *5Hl^"l;or^fT^Ti^. i&Hl^l or iyrt^l^l
loc. wf^or^riMlT^ -^nrntforw^
e. ^MMf f. ^a slipper,' substitutes "i^ for the final before
the consonantal inflexions ; making T^rRT^ or <JMM^, TTT^wf,
^MmP^:, "^ttt^TST:, ^JMMi^; before the vowels, ^MM^^ &c.
/. >HH j^, ^ an ox,' is very anomalous. In the nominative
and vocative singular r^ is substituted for the final ; and in all
L.
74 DECLENSION.
the numbers of the nominative, and in the accusative sin-
gular and dual, wt is prefixed to the final; before which, "^r
regularly becomes ^. Before the consonantal inflexions ^ is
changed to ^.
nom. ^HHjIH vHHjl^ ^SHTfT^:
ace. -Hr{^\4 — -HH^^:
instr. ^HJ^l ^T?T|3Bf ^Rffk:
dat. ^R^ &c. loc. ^Hdr*j
voc.
^^HTf^
Compounded so as to form an epithet, this word may become
feminine and neuter; as ^^f"^^ ^having good cattle,^ makes,
fem. nom. ^^tT|^? neut. nom. and ace. ^riji^, ^Rf^;, ^^Tfff)^.
SECTION III.
Ad/ectives,
132. Adjective or attributive nouns are inflected in the
same manner as substantive nouns : admitting of the three
genders, and varying as to their inflectional terminations
according to their proper finals, agreeably to the rules already
given for the inflexions of nouns.
133. Adjectives admit of the variations of degree common
in other languages, as comparatives and superlatives. When
regular, they are formed by adding to the crude noun the
terminations IR and THT (technically called inT^ and "inTxr) : in
the former of which we have the Greek repo?, and in the
latter an approximation to raros and the ^ timus^ of the Latin.
Thus,
'grrar holy "grnnrc more holy ij^MriH most holy,
xrj eloquent ""T^TTC more eloquent iT^TR most eloquent.
a. Before these affixes a final «^ is rejected, and the final
^ of the participial affix ^ is changed to 1[^; as.
ADJECTIVES. 75
^^ young ^pnrc younger 4Jc|hh youngest.
fwg^^ wise f^^r^n wiser f^nriT wisest.
b. The same affixes, with a Uke import, are added to some
particles ; as "^[fif, ' more than/ may make ^rffTiR and ^rfrnnT
^ still more' or ^ most :' and although different etymologies are
assigned to T^ and "^TWR, which, besides other meanings,
denote degrees of excellence, or ^better/ ^best,' they are most
probably formed from "gr^ ^ up,' with the terminations of the
comparative and superlative degrees.
c. The terminations are sometimes added to substantive
nouns ; as, ;^ * a king f hmhi. ^ more a king ;' HCfriH ' most a
king/
d. When added to feminine nouns in ^ or "gi, the finals
may be made short ; as, HilriC or 'ifldi. ' more fortunate f O^rlH
or ^1hh ^most fortunate/
€. The same terms, with the syllable ^TTT added, give a
comparative and superlative force to the personal inflexions of
verbs ; as, iT^qfw ^ he talks ;' aT^TfrraTm^ ' he talks more than
he ought '/ *i«d4rHrtHI*i^ ^ he talks without stint or measure/
134. Attributives formed with irc and im are decUned in
three genders like other nouns in '^^ and like them offer a
marked resemblance to Latin attributives in ' us ;* as "giWrtC,
g^nrsTT, ^rnnrt, &c.
135. Attributives of comparison are also formed with tlie
affixes ^xr^ and jw, which are analogous to the Icov and
i(TTog of the Greek ; the former properly denoting the com-
parative, the latter the superlative ; although the distinction is
not always carefully observed. Those which are formed with
^ are dechned like nouns in ^ ; those with frr^ in the man-
ner explained under nouns ending in ^^ (see rule 129). They
take the three genders; as, ^^15 'strong;' "^T^hnr 'stronger,'
nom. cic^l^lH, "^r?5hrat, ^c^m ; ^tfc^a ' strongest,' "^fn^:, "^ffSOT,
'?Tf<5J¥, &c.
a. These affixes have the effect of causing, as in the example
given, a final vowel to be dropped. "^H rejects its own ^,
L 2
76
DECLENSION.
and consequently the vowels ^ and ^ are attached at once to
the consonant ; so tyj, ^ eloquent/ makes tR^THT and vfzw. If
the word be a monosyllable, however, the final ^ is not
rejected, and the usual change by Sandhi takes place ; as Jf
for finr, * dear/ with f xth and ^ makes ftxT^, W ; and ^
for TT^rW, ^ excellent/ ^^, W. They also cause the elision
of the possessive affixes Wi[^, ^5 f^, and of "^ when an affix
forming nouns of agency 5 so irfrRlf , ' having sense/ ' sensible/
becomes »T?ftir^ ^ more sensible/ irfw? ' most sensible / ^vrf^,
' possessed of intelligence/ makes ^^fhr^ ^ more intelligent/
^fw ^most intelligent/ vf^, ^having wealth/ ^rich/ vrfhnr
' richer/ vfrRr ' most rich / ^ from ^i ' to do/ ^ an agent/
* active,^ <+0^^ *^more^ or ' very active,' cfife ^ most active/
6. The affixes ^ir^ and ^ are attached, however, most
commonly to modifications of the original noun, or to what
are considered as substitutes for it ; although possibly in some
cases they are the proper originals become obsolete. The
following is a list of the principal instances.
Primitive. i
^rPinfi near
^r^ little, young
■^ large
1»5F thin
fTBpr quick
"^ small or mean
Tj^ heavy
jpn content
^ long
^ distant
^ firm
Vft^ large
^ large
U^rW excellent
ibstitute.
Comparative.
%^
^^TTT
^Rift^
^Ffhm^
^
^^^^
•ai^r
'jii^rlii^^
^
^Ml^fl^
TBJ^
■^til^^
'R
»TONm^
Wf
w^^.
^TT^
<iim)*i^
^
<^<lf^
^
'5<il^^
Mfcd^
iTOCpf-^tq^^
Tnr
Tnftxnr
(^
^IT^
i^
^MH
Superlative,
oh fill 8
ilfiB
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL NOUNS. 77
frnr dear
IT
^T^
^
•^ much
^
-^iftr^
^f^
>pr much
H^
>j^fhr^
>J%¥
^soft
^
H^^\
^f^
r^
M'H\i\\
Tjfk^
1^^ young
< -^m
dkliD^^^
«=Br<j.i«
(^
<*^^^^
c*r*i^
^rar heavy
^HTV
H\^i\H^
^RTfW
^old
V^
1^1^«x
T^
f^iR firm, stable
^
wTF^
^
^75 gross, bulky
^w^
^■^44^
^JiiP^a
"ftqiC much
^
Wii^^
^
"g;^ short
Fff
f^fhnr
"gftr?
c. "^y ^ much/ substitutes >jxr, and is anomalous in the first
form, as w^^, >Tfxn?.
d» Occasionally the regular terminations are superadded to
these superlatives to imply excess in a still greater degree ; as,
WrTt ^ more excellent f ^»riH ' most excellent,^ ' most best.'
SECTION IV.
Pronouns and Pronominal Nouns.
136. Pronouns and certain other nouns are classed toge-
ther, as agreeing in some pecuharities of inflexion, by which
they are distinguished from all other nouns. The Hst com-
mences with the distributive pronoun ^"t ' all ;' whence they
are called ^"frf^ or Sarva and others.
137. Besides the meaning ^all,' ^"t is a name of S^iva, and
in that sense it is declined hke any other noun in ^; but
when it is a pronominal noun it differs from its regular in-
flexion in the following respects :
DECLENSION.
nom. plur. u is substituted for ^^:, as '^^ for ^tSt:
dat sing. ^ " "^ — ^t^ — ^#nT
abl. sing. WITT Tftr — ^rtwTiT •— "5#n^
loc. sing. "ftRt^ fr — Tf^fe^ — "^W
gen. plur. ^ ^ — ^FTl^m'^ — ^frof
138. After the feminine form ^t, ^ is prefixed to the
terminations of the dative^ ablative, genitive, and locative sin-
gular ; and the final of the inflective base is made short. In
the genitive plural T( is prefixed to 'm\.
^t^all.^
Masculine.
Feminine.
nom
. ^:
^
^
^tT
^t
^ir:
ace.
^W
^gfr^
^tf
—
—
instr
. ^^
wtT«rf
^^.
^rf^
^trvqf
^fr^:
dat.
^t^
^it«T:
^rt^
_
^^«t:
abl.
^fiwrit^
—
^Iwi:
—
—
gen.
loc.
...Sr r.
f«|^fl:
^rfift:
«iWV(
— .
^§^1
^•~~
Neuter
nom. and ace. ^
1* ^'
^llP^l &c.
139. All the words of this class follow this model, as far as
regards the inflectional terminations, with exception of the
two first personal pronouns, which are altogether anomalous.
The class consists of the following pronouns and pronominal
nouns.
I. Personal pronouns.
^RR^ I.
3^^ thou.
a. Demonstrative pronouns.
^W^ this or that.
^Tf^ this.
^1^ this.
^1
that, or he, she, it.
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL NOUNS. 79
3. Relative.
71^ who, which, or what.
4. Interrogative.
fojiJ^ who ? or what ?
5. Honorific.
^TfT your honour, your excellency.
6. Pronominal nouns.
I. Distributives.
^r^one. f^wxr) . . ,
_ __ >• third.
idcfcHl. one of two. ^Hl^ j
iJohHH one of many. xn^JT first. *
^STHT other. ''qTiT last.
^THTrR either. ^^ half.
^in: other. ^r^ few.
omfn: which of two. cfrfinrxr how many.
cRim which of many. "^n? all.
Tcnx. whether of two. "ftm whole.
^nnT whether of many. ^ half.
IT'T two, twofold. R all.
.J
2. Locatives.
"^ prior, east. "^nrc inferior, west.
"qn after. ^ft^ south, right.
W^ posterior, west. '^'WT: subsequent, north.
^nn: inferior, other, ^t^iTT: outer.
140. The pronouns of the first and second persons are very
anomalous, but their irregularities are of exceeding interest, as
they present striking analogies to those of the pronouns of the
same persons in the classical and teutonic languages.
. both. ^ own
"5^Tq
80
DECLENSION.
wiit'i.'
nom.
^I^
^mf
^4
ace.
ITT or m
•
^rWT^ or -Pfi
instr
wm
^srmrwn
^IWTMt
dat.
i^^or^
^TT^Ivqf or ift
^T^TWI^ or ^:
abl.
^■<Twrf
^^Rll(^
gen.
■»Hf*{I«h*i^ or «Tt
loc.
T(f^
^5^thou.^
^STOTT^
nom
.1^
^
^
aec.
Frf or FTT
T^^i or ^
^*m\ or ?:
instr
. FRT
grrwqf
g^mf>?:
dat.
"5«r»T orw
:gcCT«rf or ^
^^T«n^ or m
abl.
^
^^T«rf
amrt^
gen.
inr or ^
5^: or ^
^jmioRJT or T.
loc.
1^
^H^:
g^l
141. The other pronouns are declinable in three genders, and
follow more nearly the model of the class, ^"j, in their inflexions.
Those which end in ^, as IT^ &c., reject their final conso-
nant before all the inflexions, except in the nominative singular
of the neuter ; and they thus become words terminating in m.
Before the nominative masculine and feminine, w^, w^, and
Vl^ change their it to ^ ; becoming therefore ^, m? W, Wf? W^)
V^; as,
IT^ ' that,^ or ^ he, she, it.^
Masculine.
Feminine.
nom.
W.
ift
^
^
^
in:
ace.
W
^
rTT^
irf
^
m:
instr
.^
WTwrf
Th
mn
(TTaif
wrfW:
dat.
ITw
—
>r.
TT^
—
TTTW?:
abl.
nwin^
—
—
Tiwr:
—
—
gen.
ir^
iT^>.
^•
—
TRh
Trraf
loc.
FftR^
Neuter
W^ or in^
— —
TTT^
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL NOUNS.
81
/ ma]
kes,
and iTrT^,
Hhis:'
T^
^
^J^: ^^
^
^
mi:
^r^ FfT
inn:
•^
"pnf^
^TfT^ ^
^
m
*irilH
masc. ^:
fern. ^^JiT
neut, 7^
The other inflexions are also like those of ir^ ; but in the accu-
sative singular, dual, and plural, in the instrumental singular,
and the genitive dual, in the three genders, ^iT i« sometimes
used for ^w; as.
^iTT«^ or ^HTT"*^
Tj^ or ^ wm: or T^yrr.
masc. ace. ^ orir^ ^^ or Tsrift
instr, s. ^^ or ^^
gen. d. ^inft: or ^^H^Tl:
fem. ace. win or ij^
instr. s. l^ri^l or vypH
gen. d. ^rnft: or liH^fl:
neuL ace. ^ ^ idHlPH
G. The second form is employed in the subsequent member
of a sentence in which the first has already been used ; as,
^^ ^l°KiimMlriHH f^iftq^^r '^T7^^, ^The grammar has been
studied by him ; now set him to read the Hitopadesa.'
142. The other two demonstrative pronouns, ^^ ^this^ or
^that,^ and ^;^ ^ this,' undergo various modifications, chiefly
of the inflective bases.
^'sr^ ' this' or * that.'
Masculine,
nom. ^THt ^n|^ ^nfft
ace. ^r^ — '^''l?!,
instr. ^T^TT ^TWn ^nftfW:
dat. ^n^^^{ — ^nftwi:
abl. >3{<^m[ri^ — —
gen. *!iijm -iHHift; 4i*jlm*
loc. ^wf^'t^ — ^nftT|
Neuter nom. and ace. ^:
M
Feminine.
^ — —
^Hm "^ff^^f ^w5t:
* this/ or
Uhat.'
Maseuline.
Feminine.
nom.
^
^
^
^'T
^
^[ht:
ace.
^
^«"i
^*
—
—
instr
. ^^
^rrwif
^fir.
^^rm
^5rT«n
^sTrfW:
dat.
^T^
—
^«j:
^
—
m^:
abl.
^^RTi^
—
—
^wi»
—
—
gen.
^^r^
^sTFnft:
^
—
•iMHqh
^raf
loc.
■1 /-wnr* o VI /I
a<^/-> J. J U
^^
This pronoun also substitutes ^Tf for the base in the same
cases as ^w^. See above, rule 141.
143. The relative pronoun xr^, ^who' or ^ which/ is declined
like w^; as, masc. nom. tji, '^, ^; fern. nom. tu, % irr: ; neut.
nom. and ace. tc^, % "^J?^, &c.
144. f^5 'who' or 'what/ is also declined analogously to
ir^y substituting "^ for its final and preceding vowel, except in
the nom. neuter, and thus becoming a noun in ^; as,
^ for f^ ' who/ ' which.'
Masculine.
Feminine
.
nom. w.
^
^
■sn
^
^:
ace. ^
^
^ir^
w
^
m:
instr. ^
^RTwrf
%
•sfim
^KTwrf
wfn:
dat. 'SR#
^"11
—
^:
^
-afiTvq:
abl. chwir^
— —
— —
"^iwrt
— "
gen. -aim
^irtft:
%^
^sift:
^RTOT
loc. ohfw^^
—
^I
"^iWf
^
Neuter nom. and ace. f^
oRtItt.
a. f%J^ to various of its inflexions may affix f%T^ or ^iT,
giving to it a more general and indefinite signification; as,
oirftjT^ 'some one,' 'any one,' 'a certain one/ ofi^f^ 'to
some one / %f^ ' some ones,' ' any ones / f%f^^ ' some-
thing/ 'any thing.' The neuter also occurs in the obsolete
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAIi NOUNS. 83
form of oKrf; as ofif%7^ * any thing/ ^^ is also added to
inflexions of f^»^ in a like sense ; as, «R^3^ ' some one ;' f^fi^^R
*any thing, something.'
b. The preceding pronouns may be compounded with ^75^,
1^5 or ^^5 derivatives from ^^ ^ to see/ to signify ' similarity /
when IT^, TTiT^, "J?^, &c. become "rTT &c. ^ is substituted for
^T^ and ^;^, and crI' for fsfi?^; as,
WTg^? ril^^i» or ril^Kj, such like.
^cTTFJi;:. ^nrn^, or ^in?^, this Hke.
7nF5^^ Tir^^^ or ifi^Hi, how or what like.
^^, f^, or ^^, that or this like.
<^t\, chl^^r, or ofi^g^Blf, how like.
These are dechnable in three genders, forming the feminine in
^; mn. "37?^, f. ril^^O ; or as nouns ending in ^, as dl^^C,
TTFl^, nig^ii, &c.
b. To TT^, ^IT^, XT^, may be added Ti^, implying ^ quantity,'
when they are similarly changed ; as, WTT?^ ^ so much / ^mT?^
* so much ;' iHTff ' how much / which are dechnable hke
nouns in ^ ; as, dNI»^ , riNrfl, UTTr^, &c. : they are also used
in the neuter form as adverbs, as, i\\^^ ' how much,' ITT^ ' so
much ;' and correlatively, as TJXWf[^ HNit^ ^ as much as.'
c. ^;^ and f^ in a similar sense have ^n^ joined to the
vowel of the base ; as, ^in^ ^ so much / H+ai^ ^ how much :'
nom. ^^•T, ^[mft, ^[Tf^j, &c.
d. To ofi substituted for fopi^ may be also added fk, to form
"Sfifif ^ quot,' ^ how much,' ^ how many.' It is the same for aU
genders, and is declinable in the plural only; as, nom. and
ace. ojrfTT, instr. "Sfifffik:, dat. and abl. "5fifw«i:, gen. ofcHldlH^, loc.
ohPrig. Similar derivatives may be formed from TT^ and xi^, as
irfir and xrfw, but they are of very rare occurrence.
145. iTTfl', an honorific term for ym^, and which, hke
^ Your honour,' ' Vossignoria,' &c., although used for the
second, is a pronoun of the third person : it is decHned like
other nouns in ^; as,
M 2
84 DECLENSION.
nom. H^^ vRnft vr^nr:
ace. H^ — >T^t
instr. HTffT >T^?n H^fk:
dat. H^ &c. loc. iT^
fern. >TTift H^ >TqTiT:
neut. >l^ H^ H-^f^
146. With respect to some of the following pronominal
nouns^ a few observations will be necessary.
a, ijofi, ^ one^^ ^ some one/ is also the numeral ^ one,' and
will be again noticed. In this place it admits of three num-
bers ; as, ^joK ^ one / t^ ^ two ones / ^ ' some ;' as ^ ^T^f^T
^ some ones/ or ^ some, say.'
b, ^^ and the six following words in the list of pronominal
nouns, which are analogous to comparatives and superlatives,
differ from them in being inflected like ^"f. They are also
peculiar in forming the neuter in "ff ; as, ^nqiT, ^nmnj^,
^nqimTl^. The two terms preceding w^, <e<*Hi: and i^ohdH,
make their neuters like other nouns in ^, as ^T^irfT^, ^"^iiT'f.
c, "g^T, ^ both,' is dechnable in the dual only ; as, "3^,
d, "^^nr, ^ both,' has no singular : nom. dual "^vr^, pi. "^i^.
e, fsTHT and f^THT have two forms in the nom. plural, f^f^
or %Tnrr: &c. ; so have fklThr> ijril^ ; and the two last have
also two forms in both the masculine and feminine before the
inflexions of the dat., abl., gen., and loc. sing. ; as, f^ril^l^ or
%ffhr#, fsnfHn^, fkiftxi^, &c.
f, ir^R ' first,' ^tH ^ last,' w^ ^ few,' "SfiffHR ' how many/
have two forms in the nom. plur., THHTT: or w^, ■m.Hi: or
^TH, &c.
g, W{, when meaning ^ equal,' ^ same,' is not a pronoun : it
is declined like nouns in IST; nom. plur. ^fmr:, dat. sing. ^TRTT.
h, %H has two forms in the nom. plur., %^, ^rn: .
i. ^, when implying ^ property,' is a noun ; as a pronoun
it has two forms in the abl. and loc. sing., ^ni[ or ^^9TT?^, ^
or ^^R^.
NUMERALS. 85
y. T|^ and the remaining terms have two forms in the abl.
and loo. sing., and nom. plural, ^Tli; or «^Swir(^, ^" or TJ^fe"!^,
Tjlf or ^t: ; so XHTf^ or M^^wiit^, &c. They are pronouns only
as signifying relation in time or space ; ^ before/ ' after/ ^ east/
' west/ and the like. In any other sense they are nouns ; as
^^pr ^ clever :' nom. plur. ^fj^^:, dat. sing, ^ftpin^.
k, ^SFin: is a pronoun in the sense only of ^ outer / as, ^rttt:
or ^Tnft I^T: ^ outer houses / W^flT^qT: ^lld°hl^i: ' of the outer
petticoat:' but if a city be intended, it does not take the
pronominal form ; as W^axnTf (not Wnn:^) "jft: ^ in the outer
town,' the suburb or Pettah.
SECTION V.
Numerals.
147. The first ten numerals are^ i^ one, % two, f^ three,
'^r^ four, -q^";^ five, ^ six, ^TW^ seven, ^r^"^ eight, T|^^ nine,
^^^n^ ten.
148. The nine first are compounded with ^-T, ' ten/ to
form the next nine, undergoing in some instances slight changes
of termination ; as,
^<*^^l»^ eleven. 'qt?:^!*^ sixteen.
IT^*^ twelve. ^Hd^|«^ seventeen.
^Tft^r^ thirteen. ^TFf^^ eighteen.
-^iril^CtT fourteen. rT^^«^ nineteen or
xr^'^T^ fifteen. "grrffwffT one less than twenty.
149. With fq^frffT^ ' twenty,' the simple numerals are com-
bined on much the same plan ; as,
^^fifr^rffT twenty-one. 'qrf^'fiT twenty-six.
^if^^rfiT twenty-two. ^Hr^^lPrt twenty-seven.
c^^lR^lPri twenty-three. wrrfw^T twenty-eight.
-^j^r^'^lfri twenty-four. H^f^^lTw twenty-nine or
U^R^lPri twenty-five. ^Rf^T^ one less than thirty.
150. The rest of the series and 4t^ decimal subdivisions
are composed analogously to fr^rfw and its subdivisions.
Ob DECLENSION.
f^"^ thirty. ^rrrftr seventy,
^r^rfr:^ forty. ^H^flPri eighty,
■q^mi^ fifty. ^mfri ninety.
"qfF sixty.
Higher numbers have distinct denominations.
"^nf a hundred.
Tff^ a thousand.
wgiH or ^rgif ten thousand.
cT^I or c5^ a lac, a hundred thousand.
5. * ♦ ?-one million.
Hgin or -IT j
ofitftrt a krore, ten millions.
W%^: or -^ a hundred millions.
H^ri^t or -^ a thousand millions.
int ten thousand millions.
¥TfTtnf a hundred thousand milUons.
^§: a billion.
a. Numerals, when declinable, are inflected upon the same
principles as other nouns, but in some cases they undergo pecu-
liar modifications of the base, which it is necessary to notice.
b. ^oR, ^one,' is dechned as a numeral in the singular
number only, in the three genders, ^or:, ^oRt, tjcf. It retains
the pronominal form of inflexion ; as, IT^R^ ^ to one f ii<^kH\\
^from one,^ &c.
c. % is declined in the dual only, substituting ^ for its
final; as, nom. and ace. masc. ^, fern, and neut. ^^ instr. &c.
?rT«Tf, gen. and loc. 17ft: .
d. fw and the rest are declined in the plural only, f^
substitutes "firo in the feminine gender.
Masc. Fem.
nom. ^7j:
frrer:
ace. ^t^
fro:
instr. fwf>T:
fif^:
NUMERALS. 87
^^* ^f^: fw^:
abl.
gen. Wiwi friljilll
loc. f^ fiT^
Neuter nom. and ace. ipftfw. The rest as the mascuUne.
€. '^f^, 'four/ inserts ^ before the final in the nom. masc.
and nom. and ace. neuter^ and substitutes TPJ for the last
syllable before the inflexions of the feminine.
nom. ^rc(K:
f . -^na*
n. ^T^rft:
ace. -"(jJU
instr. ^sr^f^,
dat. ) ^
abl. \^'
'«4Hiri.&c.
gen. ^rJ^SlH
loc. ^^tjeI
y*. The remaining numbers to twenty, declinable in the
plural only, are the same in all genders. A final H is rejected
before all the affixes, and the terminations of the nominative
and accusative are dropped : ^r?^ substitutes ^ for its final
vowel in the two first cases, and optionally elongates it in the
rest : thus "^^»T, ' five,^ makes, nom. and ace. t^, instr. XT^fn:,
dat. and abl. tt^wt:, gen. tt^t^TT'T, loc. xf^. After which
model are inflected ^nr'T, «1M"4, ^"T, FofiT^^»T, &c.
"q^ 'six,^ makes, nom. and ace. '^^, instr. "^rfvn, dat. and
abl. "^twt:, gen. "qirf, loc. ^^.
"^rr^ ' eight / nom. and ace. "^r^, instr. ^sif5t: or ^rgrfWt, dat.
and abl. "^TFwn or ^rrw:, gen. ^TTRf, loc. W?^ or ^TFT^.
g, fr^rfff 'twenty,^ f^^ 'thirty/ &c. are decUned Hke
other nouns with similar terminations ; but they are confined
to the feminine gender, and to the singular number, unless
midtiples of them be signified, when they take the other
numbers ; as, sing. R^rPd ' twenty,^ dual fr^nft ^ two twenties/
plur. r^^lri^jt ' many twenties i' otherwise the number does not
vary with the substantive with which it may be connected ; as
88 DECLENSION.
f^^Tim, f^^TiTT, '"JHinC^lril ^:5 ^ with twenty, thirty, forty
arrows, &c. Instances however do occur where they take
the plural number, to agree with a plural substantive ; as
TTW^rfkt^: ^ with fifty horses/
h. ^ ^ a hundred,' and IT^ ^ a thousand,' are both neuter
nouns, and are usually limited to the singular, except when
repetition of them is intended ; as, "^r^ ' two hundreds,' ^r^
^ two thousands,' "^irfif-f ^ many hundreds,' ^^^ifiiji ^ many
thousands.' In construction they are commonly employed
with nouns in the genitive plural, as ^ ^nftrff *a hundred
(of) female slaves ;' although they are also used attributively
with plural nouns, as i^r^ f^TlTt: ^ a thousand ancestors.' The
other numerals are inflected, like nouns in general, according
to their gender and termination.
151. Numerals in composition with nouns to form attri-
butives are inflected, like other nouns, according to their
finals ; as, ftnrf<3': T^tsk ' a man having three friends ;' ftrirf^:
^ ^ a woman having three lovers ;' finrfw ^c5 ' a family hav-
ing three agreeable persons :' but finrfw^, ^ a man who has
three mistresses,' makes fii^frifil, flT^rrirf^, frnrfw^:, finifwwqf,
&c. The same term may be used in the neuter ; as fn^frifj '^
^a family with three beloved females;' nom. and ace. ftnrf^,
frnrfif^^, ftnrfrrfw, &c. "^w^ in such a compound becomes
^i^T^ in the nominative and in the accusative singular and
dual ; as, nom. Ph^-cjhi:, fil^^rflO, ftnr^r^Tt: ; ace. ftni^n^Tt,
Pnn-ciHlO, ftnr^wr. ; instr. fu^xjriii, &c.
a. Similar compounds of "qi^ are inflected like nouns in '^,
and those of the numerals ending with tf like nouns in ^t^;
but ^rF«^ may in composition be inflected like a noun in "^P^
(p. 59), or like a primitive noun masculine in ^STT (p. 33),
or in the plural number like the simple numeral; as, nom.
ftnTTFT, fiRT^T^, ftniTFT?T:, or ftnnFr:, ftnim, ftnnFT: or ficRm;
ace. PHuiyH*, finiwT^, ftnn^:, or ftr^rm, frnn^, fw^iyi:,
finnFr'?[ or frnrreT; instr. fir^rr^, frnmrwrf, fiRFfW:, or frnrr^r,
ftnTTFTWlf, fWFTfW:, &c.
ORDINALS. 89
b^ "gifT, implying ^ less/ is used alone, as above exhibited, to
signify one less than the numeral to which it is prefixed ; as^
^hR^iPh: ' twenty minus one/ i. e. nineteen ; "gR"^^^ ' thirty
minus one/ i. e. twenty-nine. It may also be used with a
definite number; as, ^dcitlHR^lfd: ^twenty minus one;' xpg^
f#^ ^ thirty minus five,' i. e* twenty-five ; t^^flH^iH ^ a hun-
dred minus ten/ i, e. ninety. The term ^f^jcfi, ' more/ but
which is declinable, is also compounded with numerals to
denote addition, as xr^rrfVcR ^TT ^ a hundred plus five/ or
'^ one hundred and five.*
Ordinals.
15^. The ordinal equivalent of ^ one* or ^ first* is most com-
monly inm, declinable in three genders, TT^m:, -iTT, -4, and
according to the rules of pronominal inflexion (p. 77). Other
synonymes are, ^rf^:, "^rrer:, Wlf^: ; the first is restricted to the
masculine gender, the others are declinable in three genders*
153. In forming ordinals from the other cardinal numbers,
certain terminations are either added to or are substituted for
their proper finals, and the word is declinable in the three gen-
ders. In the case of ^"J^? ' four,' other words are optionally
substituted.
fiTfm:
-in
--^
second.
w:
-^t
-i
sixth.
^rfhr:
-^
-^
third.
TETBPRft
-^
-^T
seventh
^^:
-^
-%^
1
-m»h:
-Ht
-^
eighth.
^^:
-"m
■M
s fourth.
^;t^:
-T#
-H
ninth.
^:
•^
-^\
1
^^:
'^
-TT
tenth.
^"t^r:
-^
-*T
fifth.
154. The termination ^, derived from the technical affix ^,
being added to ^^T^»T and the rest as far as twenty, is substi-
tuted for the final syllable, leaving ^^iST^-^:, -^, -H, ' eleventh ;'
iTT^^, --^ft, -"^, ' twelfth,' &c.
155. The same affix, causing the elision either of the final syl-
lable or final vowel, is also added to the numerals from twenty
upwards. In another form they add TTR to their finals ; as,
N
90 INDECLINABLES.
r^^lPHriH: or fr^F: twentieth. ^MPririH: or iswtf: seventieth.
fci^lrlH: or fcT^: thirtieth. 'il^nPririH: or ^r^ftw: eightieth.
^HlHCj^JriH: or 'cihiPl^i: fortieth. "fl^frnw: or "JrTff: ninetieth.
^T^I^It^h: or M^i^i: fiftieth. '^iTWlVR: or ^nr: hundredth.
MpgrfH: or "^t sixtieth.
a. In these as in the cardinal numbers the decimal subdivi-
sions are expressed by prefixing the numeral^ as ij^cf^PririH: or
^cRf^: ^ one and twentieth.'
b. There are other modifications of the numerals, declinable
or indeclinable, in different shades of meaning ; as, "§^1^^ ' a two/
^ a duad f W^, W^, ^a triad ;' also fkl!^ and f^irq^ in simi-
lar senses. f§t ' twice ;' f^: ' thrice ;' J^fi^ or ^^^i ' once -,'
fsm ' twice/ &c. : but these belong more especially to the
subject of derivation.
CHAPTER IV.
INDECLINABLES.
156. The indeclinable words of the Sanskrit language com-
prehend nouns used as nouns, and nouns or particles used as
particles, that is, in some other sense than that which is
expressed by a noun or a verb.
157. I. Nouns w^hich retain their character of the names of
things or notions, but which are employed in one unalterable
inflexion, w^hatever may be their relation to the other members
of the sentence in which they stand, may be either simple
monoptote nouns, or compounds of the indeclinable class : the
latter will be noticed when treating of the different classes of
compounds : the former are not numerous ; the principal are
the following :
^ki{*{ setting, decline, of the ^if^ remainder, et cetera.
sun or of fortune. "sp^ water, head, happiness.
^rftcT what is, existence. '^^Wl patience, pardon.
ADVERBS. 91
FT food. Ph*^^ a pair.
rpRTT reverence, salutation. "^tt a year.
^rrftcT non-existence. ^ the fortnight of the moon's
"^f^ the fortnight of the moon's increase.
wane. ^^ heaven.
^^ sky, atmosphere. ^r% salutation, greeting.
^ earth.
«. Besides ^rf%, as specified in the above list, there are a few
other verbal inflexions which may be used in the sense of
nouns ; as H^frr and f^w ' what is,' ' existence ;' ^ini^ ^ what
may be,' ^ scepticism :' or of pronouns ; as, ^TftR ^ I,' properly
* I am ;' ^rftr ^ thou,' properly ^ thou art.' They are also used
absolutely, or as particles ; as, w^, ^^ ' so be it,' implying
assent ; ^f^ ^ come,' ^ begin ;' xf^ and t[^^T( ' see !' Ho !' ^ be-
hold !' and a few others of rarer occurrence.
158. 2. The other division of Indeclinables, termed PHmrii:,
comprises a variety of terms, the origin and character of which
are sometimes of difficult determination, but which, from the
functions they fulfil, may be considered as adverbs, prepositions,
conjunctions, interjections, expletives ; and particles properly
so termed; that is, syllables which are affixed or prefixed to
words to modify their meaning, although in themselves they
are apparently insignificant.
Adverbs.
159- Adverbs are numerous, and are variously formed, but
they are in most instances, and very possibly in all, attributive
nouns adverbially employed in some one or other unvarying
inflexion. The prevailing form is that of the neuter accusa-
tive ; offering in this respect an analogy to such Latin adverbs
as ^ facile,' * difficile,' ' dulce,' ' ceterum,' ^ multum,' and the
Uke : but other inflexions, either regularly or irregularly con-
structed, are also in use as adverbs. Thus ^?PT, ^ truth,'
means also Hruly ;' ^g^, ^happiness,' occurs as ^^ ^happily ;'
fiT:, -in, -TT, ^ done,' furnishes ^^^ ^ done with,' "^ enough :'
N 2
9^
indeclinabl.es.
from wnf , * place/ comes wr% ^ in place/ ^ suitably/ * fitly /
and from '^, ' strength/ ' force/ ^^\^ ' by force/ ' forcibly/
^ violently/ It may be a question if every Sanskrit noun which
is capable of being used attributively may not be employed
as an adverb, to denote the variations of mode, circumstance,
kind, degree, or those modifications which adverbs are intended
to express. The following list furnishes some of those in most
familiar use. The manner in which such are formed as differ
from the inflexions of the nouns hitherto described^ belongs
to the head of derivation.
^<*Wlf^ suddenly, unexpect-
edly, without a wherefore.
^i|fi^ before, preceding.
^r$ before, in front of.
>Hp*(Urt^ > without delay.
^ss^fer?^ continuously, continu-
aUy.
^S^TRH^ ignorantly.
^'»A^\ quickly.
^Ri^ henccj, hereafler, more-
over.
^nft^ very much,
^rw here.
^n^r so, thus.
^sr^f^ how-else, yes.
^rST rightly, truly, clearly.
^srer to day.
^^1^ now, at present.
Y down, downwards.
^rV^cTT?^ below.
^sn^T.*^ moreover, further.
>Hm\§^ the day after.
^Y^ now.
^gfTf^ always, eternally.
^(pfTO^ I without, except;
^3nfi [within, among.
'^RTTTir J
^HTir moreover,
^sn^ other, otherwise.
^niT^ elsewhere,
^v^nn otherwise.
^rfHTT^quickly, entirely , around.
near.
repeatedly, quickly,
^J^ quickly, a little.
^^ there, in the next world.
'sn?^ quickly.
^rsfi behind in time or place.
'^rc?'^ enough; it is also a
prefix.
^r;? without, outside.
^re^if^ repeatedly, more than
once.
^mrgfw improperly, unfitly.
^ifrn=gr?nT improperly, unsea-
sonably.
ADVERBS.
93
SHjjIH by day.
'51l»4Koh 1 successively, seria-
^n"5^ ) tim.
^STRTTT near, afar.
^m-t^^M^^ forcibly, violently.
wrf%^ present, in sight.
^THT hence, from hence.
3[d^rif|^ here and there.
^fiT so, thus, ita.
1[1R?T again, another,
^rt\^^ either day.
^f^ traditionally.
^7^ thus.
^r^MlH, now.
H;^ clearly, truly.
^ like, as, so.
1[5 here, in this place, in this
world.
|;qi^ a httle.
■g^^ high, loud.
>Jrll*i, subsequently.
■g^^Tfr a subsequent day.
grrf^ secretly, privately, in a
whisper.
'grn^lH^^ on both sides.
"3"^ dawn.
^^in^ rightly, truly.
"^V^ rightly, truly.
IJSRW at one place, together.
itdhf^y at one time.
^oRVT once.
ijoCT^ at the same moment.
5Trff at this time.
^^ also, verily, so.
^^ thus, so, as.
^rt?^ yes, so be it: it is also
an inceptive mystical term
prefixed to prayers and
charms.
-. >■ What if, how, if ever.
«hvji|^ how.
^ }• some how.
c(iV|7(IH how then, how indeed.
iR^ when.
cfi^rf^ some when, some time :
^ ^R^tNt^ never.
oRff when, at what time,
cfif^f^ some when, at some
time.
f<+r^'c4 what truly, what indeed.
f^R^ further, moreover.
f a little, something ; as
^ ■< Vvdth a negative "^
^ I fw^ nothing,
"ftfi^ but, also,
f^ but what, but how.
fw^ what.
f^pn^ what, what how.
fcPTir or what, or also,
fifig^ what, how.
f^Vr or, either, but how.
f^hfel^ or perhaps.
f^R?5 indeed, possibly,
f^g what then, how.
^fW whence, how.
"^ where.
u
INDECLINABLE^.
^^P^rl^ somewhere.
"^fVf^ abundantly.
"^^ excellently.
"^jqi^ excellently, well.
Y^ enough.
■gi where.
^f^l^ somewhere ; 7f -^ifqif
nowhere.
Wf^ certainly.
"Nl?^ a long time. Other cases
of this noun are used in the
same sense, as Tmum, f^m,
INtxt^FT for a long time,
^rr^ sometimes_, some-w^hen.
»fl^*^ silently, happily,
aift^ quickly, frequently.
^^^ I quickly.
■fTf^ (tt^) therefore, then.
innr thence, from or after that.
ff^ there.
iT^T then, at that time.
ri<Hl'\ then.
Tnrr thus, so.
"rnnf^ thus, thus even.
H^^ in like manner,
ri^lrl^ therefore, from that.
wf^ then, at that time.
iTRiT so far, so much.
fcnS^ J honestly,
jm thouing.
^Uiflqhl*^^ silently.
?^ silently.
ffTC^ ) crookedly; also dis-
^ by that, therefore.
f^TT by day.
f^^iTT fortunately, luckily.
^t^R^ vilely, badly.
F^ badly.
JTTT far off, distant.
^t^^ in the evening.
^ I speedily.
fTf«FT 1 no-what, nothing, ex-
ttT^ j cept.
iT^ by night.
>■ no, not.
'i'-H.^ only.
^ I no, not.
H n I many, various.
"qTT evidently, verily.
fH<*m near.
frRW^ willingly, readily, very.
"^qTT perhaps,
"^rp^ certainly, truly.
rft no, not.
^ perhaps.
xnc?T^ after, afterwards.
"qt:^^ day after to-morrow.
Xfirff^ all round.
xj^^pdfthe morrow, the day after.
xn^TTW sufficiently, abundantly.
xj"3T well, good, right.
XHSTTf^ after^ afterwards, behind,
east.
^^ again ; ^: ^^=R again and
again, repeatedly.
ADVERBS,
95
"qtlHT ^ before either in place
■gx^ > or time, in front,
ycwift^ ) formerly.
"TO in the east, in front, for-
merly.
YStt^ formerly, in front.
H^-iff day before, yesterday,
forenoon.
w^ separately, distinctly,
apart.
vin in the morning.
HWT^ widely.
Tfn'T 1 . , .
>■ wearily, with fatigue.
irffff^^ daily, day by day.
injTT on the contrary, otherwise.
TWT^ early, in the morning.
Tm'^ violently, forcibly.
irr«^ before in place or time,
in front, formerly, in pre-
sence of, east, hereafter.
irrfl^ early, in the morning.
T^t^^^ in a contrary way, con-
tinuously.
VT^^ mostly, for the most
part.
ill^ in the forenoon.
^Tqr after death, in the next
world.
'qTHTr^ 1 violently, by violence
'4c6[t{ ) or force.
"^rf^^ out, without, outside.
>Tnr^ speedily, quickly.
}
at the same time.
i|Tnr again, repeatedly ; much,
abundantly.
>J^P^ much, very much.
?r^ speedily, quickly.
i1HI<* a httle, slowly, dully.
ITT or »rrT 1 no, not ; prohi-
HT^ ) bitive ^ do not.*
/^ >■ no, not, except.
HlP^iii^ without delay.
fir!m^ ) together, mutually, in
frnft j conjunction.
f«T2iyT falsely.
gVT vainly, idly, unprofitably.
g^ repeatedly.
^^ falsely.
^^ (^5) whcit ; Tnr, TTi^, that-
which.
irnTfT whence, wherefore.
"H^ where.
"ZHTT as ; if^, wm, so-as.
xnn^rqT^ any how ; seldom,
xnrr^^ in order or succession.
^r^rTfT^ properly, rightly.
^T when.
iTT^ as far as, as much as ; ^Nrf^,
TTTTi^, as much as, so much.
XToR bad, ill.
'^W{ fitly, properly.
^nm{ (--q^) at once.
'^ bad, ill.
^ wherefore, why, because.
TT# by night.
^^ like, as.
^T^ only.
96
INDECLINABLES.
r^Him in two ways, optionally,
alternately.
r«im<* universally.
fVg many.
f^^TTmr aloft, in the air.
^T vainly, idly.
% verily, indeed.
51^^ slowly.
^rn^ eternally, continually.
5To|3^ quickly.
^^ speedily.
^7^ well, good, right.
^nnnT always.
"^^j always.
^renr at the same time.
f always, continually,
j eternally.
^nfHt^ entirely, rightly.
lErginftT^ happily.
'^'Hlfri now, at this time.
^'iJ^H before, in the presence
or face of.
^IT?[T^ entirely, completely ;
rightly, properly.
"^"tinr wholly, every way,
every where.
^"t^ every where.
^^^ always.
^^4^1 hastily, precipitately.
^IHflt^ visibly, manifestly ; be-
fore or in sight.
^rrf% awry, indirectly.
wrfJT half, equally.
^TFgrm now, opportunely, fitly*
^i\^^^ evening.
TTofiJ^ very, exceedingly.
^'gUTC. in concealment, privily. ^"Ntw for a long time.
W^f^ at once. KiTT uselessly, idly.
^»TRnr^ wholly, altogether, all ^ good, excellent, very
about, all round, on every W^^ of one's-self.
side.
W{\ together, equally.
W^l near to.
^nfhr'^ 1 near to, in the pre
^rrft^ j sence of.
f^ verily, for, because,
f^^^ without, except.
%fft: ^ because, by reason
^7^ j on account of.
i?rF yesterday.
or
The same difficulty that exists in other languages applies to
various terms in the preceding list, and they may be sometimes
thoyght to be rather conjunctions or prepositions than adverbs.
Several, no doubt, fulfil either office, and in any case the
embarrassment is that rather of denomination than of appli-
cation, as the connexion of the sentence will readily point out
the sense in which they are to be employed.
INDECLINABLES. 97
Prepositions*
160. The most important of these are used chiefly in com-
bination with simple verbs, and form with them compound or
derivative verbs, which, either in their own inflexions, or those
of the nouns derived from them, constitute the bulk of the
language. The verbs thus compounded sometimes retain the
meaning of the original, or more frequently they have the
sense of their component elements; but in many instances
they express significations which depart widely from those
which they might be expected from their composition to con-
vey. In all these respects they offer striking analogies to the
compound verbs of the Greek, Latin, and German languages.
A preposition combined with a verb is termed an Upasarga
(•g-iT^:). The name Gati (irfiT:) is also given to it, as well as
to other verbal prefixes. The Upasargas are twenty-one in
number.
a. The principal or primary notion conveyed by these prepo-
sitions is in general sufficiently obvious, and may be rendered
by equivalents in English or in the classical languages. Usage,
convention, and metaphor, however, extend the primary notion
through a variety of modifications, which can become familiar
only by practice. The explanation of them all is the province
of a dictionary, and in this place all that can be attempted is
the explanation of, i. the principal purport of each preposi-
tion ; 2. the equivalents by which it is usually translated ;
and 3. its exemplification by nouns of frequent occurrence,
derived from verbs compounded of a simple verb and a prepo-
sition ; as in the following arrangement.
wfir I. Going beyond a real or imaginary limit: 2. ^ over,*
'beyond,^ Urans,' ^ex:^ 3. "^rfirWH: (i) Agoing over or
beyond f (3) ^ transgression f ^aCA^m: ' excess.'
^^riV I. Being above in place or degree: 2. ^ over,' ' above/
'upon,' 'super:' 3, 'grfvHH: (i) 'going over or on;'
Q
Q8 INDECLINABLES.
{2,) ' going over or through/ as a book ; ^rfVofiTt: * office/
^ superintendence / ^nzTTWT ^ presiding spirit.'
^nr I. After in order or manner: 2. ' after/ Mike:' 3. ^T^^^:
^ a follower / ^r^^w: ' an index,' ' a series / ^g^rfin ^ imi-
tation/
^FfR I . Coming within a space or interval : %, ^ inner/
^ within/ ' inter/ ^ unter :' 3. 'SRrtirf ' disappearance /
WnrtTJft ' the pervading or inner soul/
^Ttr 1. Taking away in substance or kind: 2. 'from,' 'away/
' oiF/ airo, ' de/ ' dis/ ' ex :' 3. ^iicj^n:: ' carrying off /
^nm^: ' detraction,' ' censure.'
^srfiT I. Affirming of a certainty: 2. 'verily/ 'indeed' (but this
is more frequently used alone, as an adverb or conjunc-
tion): 3. wftniFf ^ a covering :' it is also fwFf, the initial
being rejected.
^rfk I . Being present, opposite, or near to ; also, being
above in place or degree : 2. ' to,' ' unto,' ' ad / ' before,'
' opposite,' ' ob / ' up,' ' super :' 3. ^rfW^ ' in front or in
presence of/ shPhjih: 'approach/ ^riWR: 'a high land/
"^mnr: ' a person of high rank.'
^r^ I. Being below in place or degree ; also, being sepa-
rated : 2. ' down/ * off/ ' from,' ' de/ ' dis,' ' ex :' 3* ^TTiTTT:
' coming down as from heaven to earth / SH'^oh^H ' cutting
off,' ' excision / ^M'lri: ' gone away/ ' departed / sh'^jOh:
' despised.'
^T or ^^rr^ J. Bounding or limiting; also reversing: 2. 'to,'
' unto/ ' as far as,' ' ad,' ' re :' 3. *ii|<*K: ' form / ^srnfiTZfT:
'sky;' ippnf 'going;' ^TPm^ 'coming;' ^ ^ gift' or
' giving ;' ^TT^'pf ' taking.' It is also used conjunctively
with nouns in the ablative case : as, ^i^lHIrt^ ' as far as to
the village ;' ^rra^'^Tl^ ' as far as to the ocean.'
T7^ or "^ I. Being high in place or excellent in kind : 2. ' up,'
' above,' ' superior,' ' super,' ' valde :' T^* ' flying up ;'
Ti^: ' excellent ;' TSR: ' great effort.'
TH I . Being near or next to ; whence also, being less than :
PREPOSfTIONS. 99
2. * near/ * less/ viro, ' sub/ ' infra:' 3. Ttpm: * approach /
^M^r^: ^ a minor Veda or scripture.'
ft: 1. Condition of badness, pain, difficulty, and the like:
3. ^ in/ ' un/ ^i;?, ' dis :' 3. ^i^mk: ^ wicked / ^:# ^ un-
happiness/ ^ pain / ^W^: ' unbearable / ^t^: ' difficult of
access.'
frf I. Being within, below, or under ; also, being contrary
or reverse : 2. ^ in,' ^ on,' ev, ^ in / ^ down,' ^ sub / ^ un' or
* in/ ^ r€ :' 3. f^JT^rr: * a dwelling / f^T^ir: ' a heap / PHMriH
^ coming dow^n / fn^fd: ^ iniquity.'
ftfiC. I. Being out or exempt from; whence also affirmation,
as excluding doubt : 2. ^ out,' ^ without,' ^ ex,' ^ ab/ ^ ne :'
3. f^^. ^ going forth,' ' exit / fw^: ^ certainty / Ph^m:
^ faultless/
^TTT I. Being opposite or opposed to; whence also reverse:
2. ^ over,' ^ back,' xa^a, ' ob,' ^ re,' ^ de :' 3, tto^ ^ turned
back ;' ijCR^t ' defeat.'
ijfc I . Being all round or about ; whence also fulness,
completeness : 2. ^ about,' ' around,' irepi, ' per,' * circum :'
3. 'qfftfv: ^ circumference ; ' T^fWR: ^ maturity ;' irft^RTO
* perfection of fabric/
H I. Being before in time, place, or quality: 2. 'fore/ 'be-
fore,' ' above,' irpo, ' pro,' ' prae :' 3. TW^: ' first birth ;'
inrraf ' going forth,' ' proceeding ;' IWT^: ' preeminence.'
nfw I. Reverted, or reflected, or repeated action or condi-
tion : 2. 'again/ 'back/ 're:' 3. Tlfff^RR: ' retaUation/
' requital ;' uPriHim ' reply ;' irfflf^^ ' a reflected image ;'
irfirf^ ' day by day/
f^ I. Being several or separate; whence also privation:
2. ' apart,' ' away/ ' without/ ' dis,' ' de/ * se :' 3. "N^fiTC
' separate or new form/ ' change of form ;' Pm^I'I: ' dis-
junction/ ' separation ;' f^%^: ' distinction ;' fr^^t; ' with-
out ears.'
TO I . Being conjoined with ; whence also completeness :
2. ' with/ ' together with/ avv, ' con :' 3. ^T^: ' associa-
o 2
100 INDECLINABLES.
tion ;' ^nftt: * union ;' 4i«hK: * perfect fabric or perform-
ance.'
^ 1. The opposite of H^, or condition of happiness, ease, and
the like : 3. ' good,* * well,' eu, * bene :' ^^ * happiness ;'
?r^xr: ' handsome.'
b. Some of these prepositions are used separately or without
verbs, especially ^rfir, ^rfv, ^^, w^^, ^R, wfvr, Wi, T^, xrft,
and irfw; and there are others which are not subject to be com-
pounded with verbs; as, "^sptftir * except,' ^<mT * with,' ^^ ' except,'
f^irfr * without' or ' except,' and ^^, ^, ^rf^TH^, TETRiJ^, or ^RTt»^,
' with,' * together with.' Some of the words given as adverbs
may be considered as prepositions ; as w(f^, «*flq, 'near to.'
c. Besides prepositions in the sense in which they are usually
understood, a number of words which are actually or were
originally nouns, of which some are included in the above list
of adverbs, are prefixed in one unvarying or uninflected form,
analogously to particles, to the verbs w^ * to be,' ij^ ' to be' or
* become,* and cfi ' to do.' To these, in native gi'ammars, the
term Gati, ' motion' or ' transition,' is extended ; and a few of
them may be conveniently specified here, as illustrative of the
manner in which they are used with nouns derived from the
verbs above specified.
^n^T% assisting the weak ; %M.Ni^<*uii giving such assistance.
^rt*|^ ornament ; WcJljTT:: decoration.
'fiilP^^ manifestation ; ^rRb|if: appeared.
"rt I f ^t^Not &c. promising, making
^ assent ; "^
gitT^ f ' I assent.
^ J
dk^\(6i V striking; *«llc!0*J7r: &c. wounded, slain.
WR^ diffusion ; rTTTI^tHlf: diffused.
rf»nr reverence ; HHl<hK: reverential salutation.
TT^ an animal, a victim ; ^T3[p|Tf: hurt, slain.
CONJUNCTIONS,
101
tnrj^ in the hand ;
Hlgfi^ manifestation
Tfizsp^ continuity ;
T5r^ faith ;
.^1^ good ;
;frr^Tc^ manifestly ;
miiffcfclAU marriage.
Trr^tftcT appearance.
mwfrf tied in regular order.
^r^rr^raf believing, trusting.
^(c^lU treating kindly or hospitably.
^IKjI^'cf: being manifest.
Most nouns may also be combined in this manner with verbs
by the substitution of the technical affix f^, leaving the vowel
^ for their finals; as, ^raiT ^ black;' ^U»n<*^^i 'blackening,'
' making black,' &c, : but this subject belongs to derivation.
Conjunctions,
161. The principal conjunctions are the following:
r inceptive, used to begin a fsR^ but, or, moreover.
' ^ -^ sentence or a subject; fopfT^iT or, perhaps.
V. 'now,' 'then,' * thus.' "^ and, or, but.
^rfiT and, also. %?^ if.
^rr^ 1 %^ and also.
*>, >- but, how. , ^
^^HfT j ' W but.
^sm^tfer^ inceptive, and imply- ^ but how ; implying doubt.
ing doubt. "qTr but not.
^fcT conclusive, used to finish Tfg but, if, is not, nonne.
a sentence or a subject ; fTTr or not, if not.
' so it is,' ' finis.' •? if, how ; implying doubt.
"^TT also, or. "^op^ either, or.
TiTT^ ] whether ; implying g^ perhaps, or if.
TfTT^j doubt or interrogation. %T^ if .
^^ also.
f%^ but.
f^fi^ but.
f^^ but how ; implying doubt.
f^ how, but.
n+^rr or how, or also.
r**j^ or how, or what.
?ft^ if not.
^ if, perhaps.
iTf^if.
TT or, either.
^if.
f^ for, because.
102 INDECLINABLES.
Interjections.
162. These are numerous : they are mostly sounds devoid of
signification, other than the unpremeditated utterance of natural
emotions : some are significant words, and of them some are
capable in other senses of inflexion, although others appear to
have become obsolete both in inflexion and meaning.
Of the simple exclamations the principal are the vowels, as
^ ^srr, ^ ^5 T "31, "^ ^, ^, ^, which may express surprise or
sorrow, Hke ^ ah !' ' eh !^ and ^srfiT, ^l^, ^^r^, ^r^, ^n^>Mri, l^, ^,
"^T^, are exclamations of a similar kind. Others are, f^ff
implying * contempt -' f^ importing the same, also ^ grief,^
' alas !' ^ ah me !' ^TT implying ^ grief;' ^ ' anger' or ^ sorrow ;'
^T^ or ^T^ ^ grief;' f%i^ ' alarm ;' ^ * displeasure,' &c.
a. Vocative particles, used in speaking or calling to, are
frequently employed ; some of which are respectful, others
disrespectful. Of the former class are, ^ift, ^r^, ^T^, ^T^^t^^,
^, ^, ^, w, VJZ, 'on^, >TTf^ H^T, ^^, %, % ^. Of the latter
are, ^, W^, t, ^. 'W5F may be used in either.
b. Some ejaculatory syllables are mystical, like the monosyl-
lable ^ft?^, which is typical of the three great deities of the
Hindu mythology, Brahma, Vishnu, and S'iva, and of the
three Vedas, and should never be uttered in the hearing of
ears profane. Others are used with charms and mystical
prayers peculiar to certain sects ; as ^, ^, ^*, 1^^. Others,
again, of which some are significant words, are uttered in the
act of pouring oiled butter on the sacrificial fire, as a libation
to the manes or the gods ; as ^TT, ^, ^^, ^^, ^^^j ^VT,
and ^rr^.
Expletives,
163. Syllables used mostly to complete the metre of a line
are considered to be devoid of signification ; they are, fsFcJ, ^^,
^^ ^5 ^5 % Wj ^ "f^ j being identical, therefore, for the most
part with the conjunctions.
INTERJECTIONS EXPLETIVES PARTICLES. 103
Particles,
164. These are syllables added to words, either as prefixes
or affixes, to qualify their purport. The specification of them
properly belongs to derivation, but a few may be advantage-
ously noticed here.
^ may be prefixed to nouns of any kind, to give them a con-
trary or negative sense ; as, V'^: * virtue/ wir»#: * vice ;' ^
' being,^ ^mi^ ' non-existent.' Before a vowel it is changed
to ^T^; as, "^^R^: ' finite,' ^m^d: ' infinite,' * eternal.'
^ is a prefix implying ' surprise ;' ^?^w * wonderful !'
oRT prefixed to nouns gives them a depreciatory sense; as,
yi%M: * a man,' cfiiy^-tc: * a contemptible man,' * a wretch.'
It also signifies ' diminution ;' as, cRT + THU = ohluil * a little
warm.'
^ is also a depreciatory prefix ; "^p^ * wickedness.'
'qiT 1 These are added to pronouns and adverbs to give them
f%7^ ) a more extended sense ; as, cfT^y^, cfcOyif^ ' any one,'
* some one ;' ^5r5zng^, ^SR^rf^ff ' any how ;' ^ifff^ ' any where,'
&c.
Wf^ implies ^ resemblance,' as "^l^l^lMit^ ^ like a Brahman.'
I5R is usually an expletive, but when affixed to a verb in a
present tense it gives it a past signification ; as, H^rfrT ' it
is,' ^^PriW * it was.' It is also used with the prohibitive m
or ?nT ; as, HWT * no,' ' not,' ' do not.'
i%f^ is added to particles to imply * doubt and interrogation ;'
as, i^fi^Ti; * How is it?' 'Is it so?' 'sr^tf^ * Whether?'
* Is it so ?' and the like.
^ prefixed to cB and its derivatives implies ' consent ;' <a1«niO
' assent,' ' promise.'
104 CONJUGATION.
CHAPTER V.
CONJUGATION.
SECTION I.
Roots and indicatory letters.
165. The vrj or ' radicaP of the Sanskrit language^ although
in strictness it fulfils no specific grammatical function^ and is
equally the theme of a noun as of a verb, may be most con-
veniently considered as identical with the latter, or as the
crude verb ; in which condition it undergoes the usual modi-
fication of conjugation, and the varieties of voice, mood, and
tense.
166. As arranged in the Dhatu-pafhas (illijm^i:) or ^glossaries
of roots,^ the root is usually interpreted by an active or abstract
noun in the locative case ; as, ^^-f^HPt ' in' division ; JFT-TTlft
^in^ going; ^J^^TfTRf ^ in' being; ^T-FR ^ in' knowledge;
and the like ; intimating one general and comprehensive idea
to which the different modifications expressed by its deriva-
tives may be referred.
167. AH the roots, with a few doubtful exceptions, as
WTf^t^ * swinging,' -sHNUlt ' ascertaining,' ^Ic4 * playing,' tj^
' seeking,' are monosyllables : many of them are unihteral, as
^ ' going,' "^ ' injuring :' the greater number, however, termi-
nate in consonants, as w^ ' discussion,' VM * sounding,' KT^
* shining.' In all cases, however, the root has some vowel,
most usually the short ^, attached to the final consonant, not
as a radical letter, but for the sake of pronunciation or
accentuation, and the mark of quiescence is therefore not
subjoined : the roots specified, although ending as radicals in
consonants, are written, it#, JT»f, >TRr. The whole number is
about nineteen hundred.
168. In the original lists the roots have attached to them
certain supernumerary letters or Anubandhas (^g^»vr:), which
have one of two objects ; i . Some of them denote the class or
ROOTS AND INDICATORY LETTERS. 105
conjugation in which the verb is inflected ; ;2. Others intimate
those pecuUarities to which each single verb is subject in its
inflexions. It will be useful to specify the principal of either
class for the sake of occasional reference.
I. General Anubandhas.
lign.
Verb.
Conjugation.
H
'^ 75
second.
fH
1 f75
third.
"JT
f^^
fourth.
^
I^
fifth.
^
I^^
sixth.
XT
^V^
seventh.
^
THT^
eighth.
n
^n
ninth.
^
T^^
tenth
( a subdivision of the first conju-
^
1^^^
( gation, ^ and other verbs.
^
^qil$
another subdivision.
2. Special Anubandhas,
^ is added to all roots not terminating in any other radical
or indicatory vowel ; as TJV (^ + ^). This vowel should be
accented, and the accents mark the voice in which the verb is
conjugated. The grave shews that the verb takes the voice
which is termed the i^tmane-pada, 'the reflective;' the acute
accent indicates the Parasmai-pada or * transitive ;' and the
circumflex denotes that the verb takes both voices. The
accents, however, are no longer marked in manuscripts.
^!rr denotes the optional insertion of i^ before the affix of one
of the past participles, and its absolute insertion before an-
other; as, Pn^I (fE^ + ^ ^ to perspire;^ indef. past part.
^Q^ri: or "fisrw: ; perfect past part, 'ftrf^f?^'^.
^ indicates the insertion of a nasal after a radical vowel in
all the tenses ; as, fiFff^ for f^ ' to abuse ;^ nin^fd, fHf^ff^
f«Tf^Trr, &c.
106 CONJUGATION.
^^ indicates two modes of inflecting the indefinite past ; as,
^5^^ (^ + ^)j ' to swell/ makes either ^TBRtrh^ or ^^^.
^ prohibits the insertion of ^ in the past participle ; as,
"3^ ("^ + %) ^ to wet / past part. "^^.
T marks the optional insertion of ^ in the indeclinable past
participle ; as, ^ ' to tame' (^^ + "3-), ^f»n^T or ^Tn^.
"31 indicates the optional insertion of ^ in certain of the
tenses ; as, fqv (f^ + "gj), ' to accomplish ;' definite future,
&^ or ^fvnT ; indefinite future, ^M^fri or ^fVoTfiT ; indef. past
^?fr^ or ^V^rT.
^ prohibits the substitution of a short vow^el for a radical
long one in the indefinite past of the causal verb; as, ^ft^
(^ft^ + '^) ^ to sprinkle,' ^rf^n^fhBTf^.
"^ denotes that this is optional ; as, >?T5{ (^JT»r + "^), ^ to
shine,^ makes either ^rf%>JMH^ or ^^^nn^.
o5 restricts the indefinite past of the simple verb to one
form ; as, xfH (xpsr + oj) ^ to eat ;' indef. past ^nmif .
^ prohibits the substitution of a Vriddhi letter in the inde-
finite past ; as, 's^ ( ofi^ + ^) ^ to encompass ;' indef. past Wofi^fhr
not ^°M<f1ri^.
^ indicates the change of the usual termination of the
past participle, W to fT ^ as, HW^ (h^ + ^) ' to break / past
part. Httt:.
^ prohibits the insertion of ^ in those tenses in which it
might else be inserted ; as T>ft (t>T + ^) ' to begin ;' def. fut.
T3TT; indef. fut. 1:4^ frl ; indef. past ^TCST.
1? indicates the reflective voice ; as, f«il^ (f»5R + '^) ^ to smile,'
^ indicates both voices ; as, fjT's^ (f^ + ^ ) ' to serve,^ ^^fif
or ^RW.
fsT indicates the optional employment of the past participle
in the sense of the present ; as, fsyfi^ ^ to perspire ;' "fe^
^ perspiring,' ^ perspired.' This is an instance of what is not
uncommon, the annexation of more than one Anubandha to a
verb. The present occurs in the lists, as fHftNc^l.
VERBS. 107
J indicates that the verb may take the affix ^ to form
abstract or active nouns ; as, 7^xr ^ to tremble ;' wg: * a trem-
bling/ ^ a tremor/
T indicates the formation of participial nouns with the affix
fpnr; as, Tcr^ ^to cook' or ^ ripen;' ^f=m ^cooked/ 'ripened/
"ET indicates the formation of feminine derivatives with 7V{,
as in the case of the last quoted verb X(^, which occurs ^^T^,
and therefore forms the derivative, xp^ ' cooking,' ' maturing.'
With regard to the roots themselves it may be added, that
those which in the lists are marked as beginning with the
cerebral nasal or sibilant, w or "R, change usually those letters
in inflexion to the corresponding dentals ; so ^PT, ^ to bow,'
makes fTrrfTf ' he bows ;' ^, ' to bear,' ^^n|W ' he bears.' There
are a few exceptions.
SECTION II.
Classes or Conjugations of Verbs,
169. The conjugational inflexion of Sanskrit verbs is effected
by a scheme similar to that which has been described under
the head of the Declension of nouns. The verb in its inflected
form is composed of two elements ; i . the Anga or ' base,'
the modified verb to which the inflexions are subjoined; and
%. certain letters or syllables which constitute the inflectional
terminations, and are subjoined to the base. These termina-
tions, which will be presently specified, are subject to but few
changes in themselves ; but there is some variety in the man-
ner of attaching them to the base. The crude verb, on the
contrary, is liable to a greater number of modifications, most
of which are special ; that is, they are restricted to the indi-
vidual instance ; and, as not being reducible to general rules,
they constitute the chief difficulty of Sanskrit grammar.
170. Certain changes, affecting a greater or lesser number
of verbs ahke, have the effect of distributing them into ten
classes or conjugations. These changes regard the manner in
which the base is fitted to receive the affixes, either immedi-
ately, or mediately through the intervention of a vowel or a
p z
108 VERBS.
syllable, accompanied in some instances by the substitution
of a GuAa vowel for the vowel either of the base or of the
adjunct, when it is capable of such substitution.
a. Each conjugation is designated by a word compounded
of the first verb of the conjugation with the term ^rrf^, equi-
valent to * et cetera/ added to it. They are severally, i . v^rf^
or >T 'to be,' and other verbs; 2. "^l^Tf^ or ^ ' to eat/ and
others ; 3. ^3fTfc^ or ^ ^ to sacrifice/ &c. ; 4. f^^^ or f^^
* to sport,' &c. ; 5. W^ or "^ * to bear,' &c. ; 6. "g^lf^ or ^
' to tease,' &c. ; 7. "^vrf^ or ^v ' to obstruct/ &c. ; 8. TRTf^ or
TR ' to stretch/ &c. ; 9. ^^^^ or ■# ' to buy,' &c. ; 10. "^^
or ^t: ' to steal,' &c. The following are the characteristic
peculiarities.
I. The first conjugation, ^^rf^, interposes ^ between the
final of the verb and the inflectional termination, and requires
the Guna change of the simple vowel. Thus before fw, the
affix of the third person singular of the present tense, the verb
i|^ ^ to be' substituting GuAa becomes ift, and ^ being inserted,
^ with ^ becomes wm the entire form therefore is (n^-fff)
H^fifr. Before the letters % ^, of a termination this ^ is made
long ; as, H^lfn * I am.'
Q,. In the second conjugation, ^^iH^, the affixes are attached
immediately to the base, with only such change as the rules of
Sandhi require : ^, ^ to eat,' with fw makes ("^-fiT) ^r%.
3. The third conjugation, called »T5|Tf^, requires the redu-
plication of the base, and the substitution of the Guna vowel
before certain terminations : no vowel is interposed, "g, ^ to
sacrifice/ becomes W^; and with "fir, (^^-fir) '^^Vrf.
4. The fourth conjugation, f^^rrf^, interposes ir, and in
some cases elongates a radical vowel : f^, ' to sport/ thus
makes (^Nr-fw) ?(t^rfif.
5. The fifth conjugation, ^StI^, is chai'acterised by the addi-
tion of g to the base ; the T of which substitutes the Guna
letter ^ before certain affixes ; as ??, ' to bear young,' becomes
^^ and in inflexion (^«ft-"fiT) ^^fir.
CONJUGATIONS. 109
6. The sixth conjugation, ^^if^, Hke the first, intei-poses 'sr;
but it differs from the first in not substituting a Guna letter for
the vowel of the base : W^, * to torment/ makes (^-fw) Tf^.
7. The seventh conjugation, ^^^nf^, subjoins Tf to the last
vowel of the base : 15V, ^ to obstruct/ becomes therefore ^w .
The vo\yel ^ is however inserted between the members of the
conjunct consonant before certain afiixes ; and in combination
with fff the verb makes (^7JT^-fv) ^lilf^.
8. The eighth conjugation, THTTf^, adds ^ to the final of the
base ; for which, before certain affixes, the Gufia element ^ is
substituted : thus Tfg for TT^, ^ to stretch,^ makes (w^-frf) TnftfrT.
9. The verbs of the ninth conjugation, ^\ H^ , take ttt after
the final ; as ^ ' to buy,^ ("^tel-fw) -^liiilPri.
10. The tenth conjugation, ^i^iH^, inserts ^ni before the
affixes, and substitutes the Guna letter for a radical vowel:
^, ^ to steal/ becomes (^^k^-fji) ^k^rfrT.
b. Of these conjugational distinctions it may be remarked,
that their especial object is obviously, in every conjugation
except the second and third, to interpose a vowel between the
base and the terminations. In four of them the vowel is
either mediately or immediately ^, and consequently an ana-
logous mode of adapting the terminations to the base prevails
in all of them ; that is, in the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth.
The vowel of the fifth and eighth classes is "3"; of the ninth
wr. The second and third dispense with any vowel. Professor
Bopp has accordingly distributed the verbs into two principal
conjugations ; the first composed of the first, fourth, sixth,
and tenth ; and the second of the remaining conjugations.
The first he considers as agreeing most nearly with Greek
verbs in w ; the second with those in /uli,
c. It is also to be borne in mind with regard to these con-
jugational characteristics, that they are limited to four tenses,
the present, the first praeterite, the imperative, and the potential,
in all the conjugations except the tenth, in which the distinctive
sign is preser\^ed in some other tenses. In the other nine
110 VERBS.
conjugations the tenses beyond the four above named have
not the conjugational characteristic distinctions. Accordingly
Dr. Wilkins has given the four tenses specified above alone
under each conjugation, and has classed the other tenses pro-
miscuously together. Professor Bopp has followed a similar
distinction in regard to the same, under the denomination of
^^ Tempora specialia^^ and '' Tempora generalia.'^ The incon-
venience however of searching for different tenses of the same
verb in different places, seems to be more than equivalent to
any advantage resulting from the more distinct exhibition of
conjugational peculiarities in the four special or conjugational
tenses ; and although the peculiarities of these will be noted
in the following pages, yet the whole of the tenses of each
verb, when particularised, will be kept together.
SECTION III.
Moods and Tenses,
171. The moods are not distinguished from the tenses by
native grammarians, who arrange the inflexions of the verb
under nine subdivisions. One of these, however, being again
subdivided, we have ten divisions, tenses and moods, of which
the verb consists. There is another, an imperative, peculiar
to the Vedas ; which, not occurring in other books, need not
be farther noticed in this place. Adopting the principle of
classification common in European grammatical systems, we
shall arrange the Sanskrit verb in the following manner :
Indicative mood.
Vi. Present Tense.
v-^2. First praeterite or imperfect tense.
3. Second praeterite or perfect tense.
4. Third praeterite, indefinite praeterite, or aorist.
5. Absolute future.
k/6. Indefinite future.
^^7. Imperative mood.
MOODS AND TENSES. Ill
8, Potential mood.
9. Benedictive mood.
10. Conditional mood.
On which distinctions a few observations may be necessary.
172. The present tense requires no remark; it is defined
as denoting present action — action begun^ and not completed :
^ "Sfirrfw ^ he does' or ^ is doing ;' ^t Tnacfir ^ she goes' or ' is
going.'
173. The first praeterite corresponds in the adoption of the
temporal augment, and apparently in application, with the
imperfect of the Greek verb. It is defined as denoting action
recently past — action only not of to-day. But it seems espe-
cially used to signify action past, but not perfected ; or " it
represents a past action continuing during another past action,
and accompanying it ;" as, ^Hil\ ^'^RfHn^ ^^-^HH^^*^ ^ The
Rishis having gone to Manu, spake this speech.' What they
said then follows; so that the act of speaking was not then
perfected. Again ; ^ riMMill^W ^llHI^t^'a ft^^ f^^: ' The
hostile Rakshasas regarded not all those (omens), but attacked
their enemies.' In both cases we have the action accompany-
ing another action, and only begun, not done and past.
174. The second praeterite is the absolute past; it relates
to an action entirely out of sight, or concluded, and also agrees
in purport, as well as construction by reduplication, with the
Greek praeterite ; as, »iMHI(*il iT^ ITHITT^ ZTT^Jtrrr HI^NpriHI ^cH
^ Jambumali abandoned life, slain by the son of the wind with
a stone.'
175. The third praeterite is the past of any period, but
usually remote ; as, ^^mffr^T^ ' There was a king ;' ^nj^tft
"frgv^n^: ^ There was a prince, a friend of the gods ;* that is,
they were, at some time or other, in fact long*ago ; but this
is undetermined. The application of this tense is both that of
the Greek aorists and " plusquam-perfectum ;" and in its forms
it varies so as to correspond more or less with them, sometimes
112 VERBS.
taking only the augment, and sometimes taking the reduplica-
tion and the augment also. It has hence been termed by
Professor Bopp the '^ Praeteritum augmentatum multiforme/'
and may be suspected of being an aggregate of more than one
tense under a common denomination.
176. The first future is the definite future, denoting action
which will be after a fixed period, not remote, although not
immediate ; as, ^OTtw "^ET: ij^lrilfa ^ Thou shalt depart to-
morrow to Ayodhya.'
177. The second future defines no limit to the commence-
ment of the action : it will be at some future period, or it will
be contingent on some future event ; as, cf^^W^rd f^:^
"^T^iqfVnnf JH^T^ ' The sun will shine without fear ; the wind
will blow unrestrained;' that is, when the power of the
enemy Ravana shall be overturned.
178. The imperative mood is defined as implying not
simply command, but the various significations of the poten-
tial. In general^ however, it denotes, in the second and third
persons, injunction, advice, or command ; as, f^T ^TTJ W
'^ftJTirrg ^ fngC ^ Let thy purpose be cruel, shew sternness,
to these (thy guards).' In the first person the senses are
those of intention or volition, and the verb is commonly put
interrogatively, as asking for acquiescence or command ; as, fofi
-SR^rfw w ' What may I do for thee ?' ohMl^rifrH^ ^f^ ^ Tf^
' Let us do that which is agreeable to thee, O queen.'
179. The senses of the potential, which may be also ex-
pressed by the imperative, are said to be, i . ^w ' command-
ing ;' as, r3( ajR tx^\ ' Thou mayest go (i. e. Go thou) to the
village :' 2. Ph HnsTJT ' directing ;' as, l[;^ 0ffWt ^f^^T ^ Let the
daughter's son eat in this place :' 3. ^TPRT^W ^ inviting ;' as,
>T^Tf^ wr^fhf ^ Let your honour sit here :' 4. ^nifly ' expression
of wish ;' as, »71^. "JWfTHrnJR TT ^ Let the Guru teach the boy :'
5' "'^'^rw: ^ interrogation' or ' inquiring ;' as, ^^iHhfhT TIT ri^H^t-
xfhr ' Shall I peruse the Veda ? or shall I study logic ?' and
6. m^f^\ ' asking ;' as, >ft Htirf <?J^?T ' O may I obtain (i. e.
VOICES. lis
give me) food. It is also very commonly used as the subjunc-
tive mood with the conjunction ^if;' as, "Pg^ ^ ^IM ^ ^
irfw: ' If thou be not my protector, then I may (or shall) die.'
180. The benedictive or optative mood is considered as a
modification of the potential; as, ^irT ^ili^HH-^^ri* ^^: ohiufn
«l»yHI ^ Mayest thou preserve unshaken firmness, and be steady
in the afiairs of thy friends.'
181. The last tense is the conditional, which is susceptible,
like the moods, of all times, and is commonly used with the
conjunctions irf^ and ^ ; as, ^TWfTorf^ ^rgn ^^MI^H^ ^ "rrf
^ She (Sita) would not have been purified, if I had not pro-
tected her ;' i|NWl'4H^nP**U4l HI^I^^O^^ im: ' You will grieve
as long as you live, if you do not relinquish this error.'
SECTION IV.
Voices,
182. The preceding moods and tenses are common to the
usual distinctions of active and passive voices ; but the San-
skrit verb, Hke the Greek, has two active voices, as well as
one passive: they are called severally Parasmai-pada and
Xtmane-pada, which terms are retained by Professor Bopp,
and rendered by Dr. Wilkins ^ common' and ^ proper' forms.
183. The Parasmai-pada is that inflected word or verb
(pada) the action of which is addressed to another than the
agent (from Parasmai, dative of Para, ^ another'), ^tmane-pada
is a word or verb the action of which is addressed or reverts
to the agent himself (from i^tmane, dative of i^tman, ^self').
These might be rendered therefore ' transitive' and ^ reflective'
verbs, but that it is in a peculiar sense that the action is said
to affect either a different agent or the agent himself: it is
the result rather than the action, and this is therefore com-
patible with an intransitive verb. Thus, ' Devadatta cooks :'
in the one case he cooks for his master, the verb is then put
in the Parasmai-pada, ^^^^ m-^iPh ; but in another case he
Q
114
VERBS.
cooks for himself, the Atmane-pada is then employed, and the
phrase is ^^^^ tf^. In ordinary usage, however, the dis-
tinction of import is little observed, and some verbs are conju-
gated in one voice, some in the other, and some in both,
without much attention being paid to their signification or
relations.
184. The passive voice takes the terminations of the
-^tmane-pada, and prefixes xi ya or in some cases ir^ to them
before those of the four conjugational tenses. Before tt the
radical vowel takes neither GuAa nor Vriddhi. In the other
tenses the form is the same as in the active, with a few
special changes to be hereafter noticed.
SECTION V.
Numbers and Persons.
185. The Sanskrit verb in its different tenses has three
numbers, singular, dual, and plural; and three persons in
each number. They are arranged in native grammars in an
inverse order to that which we follow, the third person being
placed first, and the first person last; but it may be more
convenient to follow the European order. The terminations
by which the persons are distinguished are shewn in the
following scheme.
Indicative mood.
Present tense.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
Pers. Sing. Dual.
Plural.
Sing.
Dual.
Plural.
I- M ^
'^
^
'»%
^
2. "ftn^ "T^
^
^
'm^
a
3- M ^
^5ri^
^
w^
^
First
praeterite or imperfect.
I. wf?n^ w
^
^
If?
«rf?
%. ftf^ if
IT
^^
■amf
vi
3. f^ m
^
^
WMl'
^am
NUMBERS AND PERSONS.
115
Second praeterite or perfect.
I.
iin^
^ »T
^
^
«?%
2.
^
^3r^^ ^
^
'm^
^
3-
w^
n^ ^
^
^
^
Third praeterite or indefinite
past.
I.
^
^ W ftl
^^
wff
2.
^J^
W W t?m^^
'RTOT
^
3-
^iftf^
First or definite future.
FTirf
Wif
I.
Hifm
m^ iTT^R^
cn%
ni«^
niw^
2.
irrf^
ITT^m^ TTTW
TTRI
irraT^
WT^
3-
in
wrd im:^^
m
ITTO
inr^
Second or indefinite future.
I.
^tnftr^
^H«^ iM\HH^
^
^JIT^
5WW^
2.
WftT»3[
w^ ^m
^H
^ivi
^^
3-
^irfrrn
tflfit^ ^rfnf
^
wS^
^
^nf^
Imperative mood.
^ih|»(
I.
^N»( 'eilH*^
^^
^n'^H^
2.
f^
W TT
^
-iiivn
l^
3-
Tl
irf ^
in
viifli*
'STfTl
Potential or subjunctive mood.
I.
uf
ViX^ TR
t^
f^
^^
2.
^qi^
^msf ^rnr
t^
t^
3-
^
^TTirf g^^
^
t^lTlTf
tt^
Benedictive or optative mood.
1.
im
irr^ ^nw
Htw
^^(hf^
2.
m^
Tref Trer
_n _♦
mm
3-
"^
Tjjmt ^1^^
^nrrerT
Conditional mood.
_>^
I.
^
FTR ^TTT
w
f^iNPc
2.
^1^
^nf Wff
jpniT^
^*n^
^irs#
3-
^3ni:
Q 2
WfH
^«nin
WiT
116 VERBS.
a. In the passive voice ^ is substituted for ^5 the termina-
tion of the third person singular of the Atmane-pada.
h. Of these inflectional terminations it is to be remarked, that,
like those employed for the construction of the cases of nouns,
they comprehend some letters which are not retained in the
inflexion, being introduced merely for the sake of enunciation,
or of indicating some change in the base.
c. T| in "fin^a "ftn^^ f'T^j and every where else, is rejected;
but it is an indicatory letter, denoting that, where there is no
rule to the contrary, the vowel of the base is to be changed to
its Guna substitute: thus f^ v. 3d conj. ^to know,^ before
the terminations of the singular in the present tense, makes
^i^i tIw, Tfw. Before those inflexions which have not an
indicatory xr the vowel is unchanged ; as, i^^, f^^f^jT, &c.
d. In the first praeterite the ^ of f^, "ftrc|[, ^^rftr^, is inserted
merely for articulation : the real terminations are therefore ^,
^, »^. In the i\[tmane-pada in this tense the f^ of IT'^^ is
superfluous.
e. In the second praeterite w is indicatory, and denotes
that in some cases the Vriddhi, and in others the GuAa
element is to be substituted for a radical. A final ?T is every
where commuted to Visarga, agreeably to the rules of Sandhi
(see rule 37). Other modifications of a less general nature
we shall now proceed to notice under each tense separately,
together with such modifications of the base as are not exclu-
sively of a special or conjugational character.
General principles of Conjugation,
186. Present tense. The inflective terminations are subject
to few changes. The initial ^ of the third person plural is
rejected after an inflective base ending in "^; that is, after
those of the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations ; so
that ^t, ' to go,^ makes -^difnf not ^?uf^ ' they go ;^ ^V, ^ to
increase,^ ^V^ not ^^[VT^ ^ they grow.' In other cases it is
preserved ; as, ^ ^ to eat/ ^fnT ; ^ ^ to mix,' ^hTm. Afler
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 117
verbs which are either polysyllabic^ or become so by redupli-
cation, the nasal is rejected ; as, i^'^^U ' to be poor/ makes
<^ri.<rri ^ they are poor f ^ for ^ ^ to sacrifice/ ^jd^fd * they
sacrifice/ Verbs of which, although monosyllabic, the inflec-
tive base ends in a consonant, or in any vowel except ^, also
reject the nasal in the j^tmane-pada ; as, ^rPff 2d conj. ^ to
rule / ^rra^ ^ they rule / f ^ to do / ^t^ ' they do.' The
same applies to the analogous terminations of the first prae-
terite and imperative, '^SRT and 'snirf. For the initial ^i of the
second and third persons dual, and for ^ of the first person
singular, in the ^tmane-pada of the first, fourth,, sixth, and
tenth conjugations, ^ is substituted, which with the conjuga-
tional affix ^ becomes ^ ; as, ^, ^^, ^^. The initial w or
■^ of a termination in this or any other tense, when following
an inflective base ending with an aspirate, is changed to V,
before which the aspirate becomes the unaspirated letter (r. 8);
as, 1^, ' to oppose/ makes ^^irfe.
The changes of the base in this tense will be specified
under each conjugation,
187. First praeterite. The ^ of wfir^, ^, and ^RT is
rejected after ^; and after some verbs TH is substituted for
^n^. The 'm of ^mrf and wmf substitute ^, as in the present
tense.
Besides the special changes to which the base is subject in
this tense, there is one modification which is universal, the
prefixing of the temporal augment ^ to a verb beginning with
a consonant ; thus ^^ makes ^sn^lj^ ^ he went / and ^TT to one
beginning with a vowel. In prefixing the temporal augment
to a verb beginning with a consonant, no change takes place.
For ^n and the radical vowel the Vriddhi equivalent of the
latter is substituted ; as, ^T7 ^ to go,' ^riTTT ^ he went / ^ ^ to
wish/ ^^ ^ he wished.' If the verb be a compound with a
preposition, the augment is inserted between the preposition
and the simple verb : thus from vtr, ^ to speak,' comes nfrfiTR
Ho speak again/ Ho reply/ first praeterite, Mi<4Hmri 'he replied.'
118 VERBS.
188. Second praeterite. In general the terminations un-
dergo no other changes than those which arise from the rejec-
tion of the indicatory or servile letters. After roots in m, ^
is substituted for the vowel '^ left by w^ ; as, ^ ' to give ;'
first and third pers. sing. ^.
The changes of the base are more numerous, and the most
important may be conveniently noticed here. One of these,
which may be regarded as universal, although subject to a few
exceptions, is the reduplication of the root ; in effecting which,
certain substitutions for the radical letters sometimes take
place.
a. If the verb commences with the vowel ^, the repeated
vowel is ^ which combines with the radical ^^r ; as, w^ ^ to
eat,' ^rr^ ' he ate.' But if the verb contain a double con-
sonant, «T is inserted after the reduplication, and before the
radical vowel ; as, w# ^ to worship,' 4{M^ he * worshipped.'
It is also inserted before ^5?^ * to spread ;' as, "^R^i ' he spread :'
but not before ^T^ ' to eat ;' as, ^rr^ ' he ate.'
b. If the verb begins with ^ or "3", convertible to the Vriddhi
or GuAa element, the substitutes in the reduphcation are ^
and '^; as, ^ ^ to go,' ^i||i4 ^he has gone,' ^([^ ^ thou hast
gone ;' "^^ ^ to wither,' wt^ ' it has withered :' when the
initial is not so changed, the reduplication of the initial pro-
duces a long vowel ; as, f;^:, ^S^:.
c. An initial ^ substitutes "^ ; as, ^ ^ to go,' ^TR * he
went :' followed by a consonant it inserts tT ; as, ^if, * to be
firm,' makes ^rnj% * it was firm.'
d. A verb beginning with a single consonant, not a guttural
nor an aspirate, is simply reiterated ; as, t:^ ' to sound,' tti^ ;
"q^ ' to cook,' MMW.
e. A guttural consonant is changed to the corresponding
palatal, or "sfi ^ to % and it xr to "ST; as, "^ *to make,' ^crr;
;ST^ ^ to dig,' ^^TiT ; ?Tf * to take,' ^*\\t 5 'qrr ' to eat,' W(PS'
If is also substituted for ^ ; as, ^ Ho take,' »T1TC. In some
cases the reduplication of an initial semivowel is the corre-
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 110
spending vowel ; as, mf ^ to sacrifice, ^ttHT ; and ^^ * to
speak/ T^T^.
/. The unaspirated is substituted for an aspirated conso-
nant ; as, >iiT ' to whirl/ ^HTH.
g. When the initial is a double consonant, the first only is
redupUcated ; as, "Pit * to serve/ f^r^rnr ; f^^ ' to throw,'
r«<i^M. If the compound be a sibilant and a hai'd consonant,
the latter is reduplicated ; as, ^ ' to praise,' WFR" ; WT ^ to
stay^ or ^ stand,' iT^. If the consonant is soft, the sibilant is
repeated ; as, ^ ^ to remember,' ^rwR. If a sibilant and hard
consonant followed by ti occur, the medial is repeated; as,
^^ ' to ooze/ -j^^rt.
h, w is the reduplicate of a medial or final ^, ^rr, ^, '%,
and for a final t^, ^, ^ ; as, "^i ' to make,' -"icfcK ; m ^ to shine,
"51^ ; ^ ^ to sing,' »nft ; also for the "31 of ^' to be,' '^^.
t. Any other short vowel, medial or final, is repeated ; as,
gi^ * to be pleased,' ^[g^. A long vowel is made short ; as,
l^fNs ' to sprinkle,' f^nrft^. For a medial diphthong the analo-
gous short vowel is repeated ; as, ^ ^ to go,' Pmmc* ; cytoR ^ to
see,' t^cil<*.
k. Verbs which begin and end with a simple consonant, hav-
ing a medial '^, and of which the first consonant is unaltered
in the repetition, do not double the verb before the termina-
tions of this tense beginning with a vowel, whether it be the
vowel of the termination or the augment ^, to be presently
noticed. Such verbs change the radical ^ to if ; thus T^q
makes, dual and plural in the third person, m-*!^:, ^: ; and in
the first, mP**^, mP«4H.
L Of those changes which afiect the primitive or unredu-
plicated syllable of the inflective base, some are special, and
will be hereafter noticed : the most general are the following,
and concern chiefly the vowels.
m. The terminations of the first and third persons singular
having an indicatory TU are said to require the substitution of
the Vriddhi letter; but this affects only final vowels and a
120 VERBS.
medial ^; as, Tjft ^to guide/ third pers. sing. ffTTR; ^ ^ to
run/ ff^TH (^ and T becoming severally ^ and ^, changeable
before a vowel to ^rn^ and ^^rr^ ; see rule 5) ; im ^ to go/
WU^' The termination of the first person singular is option-
ally % and it has therefore two forms, wi^ or ^j||H.
n. An initial short vowel, and a medial, except ^, takes the
Guna substitute before TJirt^ ; as, ^, ' to wish,' makes ^^ ;
^ ^ to know,' '^•^t^T. A vowel long either by nature or posi-
tion, when initial, requires a different form of inflexion, as will
be presently explained : when medial, it is unaltered ; as, ifl^
* to live,' finfNr; %W ' to learn/ r^iP^inj.
o. The second person, "^n^, requires the GuAa change of
any final vowel, and of a short medial vowel ; as, "ftf ' to con-
quer/ iwt^ ; fs^ ' to hate/ f^%^. The same if ^ is inserted ;
as, r^TJlHlvj, f^[tf^.
p. Before the other terminations of this tense in the Pa-
rasmai-pada, and all those of the Atmane-pada, the radical
vowel, if initial or medial, is unaltered ; as, T^ ' to burn,'
^Mj: ("gr becoming "gj by virtue of the reduplication only, as
above, clause b) ; f^ ^ to hate,' f^PirM^:, "f^ft^. A final vowel
is unaltered before the consonants ; as, cR ^ to do,' ^^r^, "^^ ;
and is changed before the vowels only according to the rules
of Sandhi, ^"sr^:, ^T^. A final "^is rejected before a vowel ; as,
^ ^ to give,' ^^^:, ^ ; and roots ending in diphthongs change
them, with few exceptions, to "^y and are similarly inflected. ^
and ^ final undergo the changes of Sandhi, as, f% ^ to gather/
"N^irj:, except when the root consists of a single vovv^el, or
when ^ is preceded by a conjunct consonant, in which cases
i;;5^ is substituted ; as, ^ * to go,' ^^ ; f^ Ho serve,' f^rf^RTj:.
A final ^ or -gj substitutes ^, as, ^ * to run,' J^T^:, except H,
which substitutes -gr^, '^ij^g: . A final ^ substitutes the GuAa
^, and so does ^ when preceded by a double consonant ; as,
^ ' to remember,' ^r^rq:, fiwv*- There are some anomalies
in regard to the changes of the radical vowels ; but these will
be pointed out as they occur.
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
121
q. Initial semivowels are sometimes changed to their corre-
sponding vowels, and the verb is inflected as if commencing
with them ; as, ^^ ^ to speak/ "grrr^, "^i^p^ "^T^t •
r. Some verbs, having ^ between two consonants, of which
the latter is a nasal, reject tjie medial before all the termina-
tions except those of the singular in the Parasmai-pada ; as, iftT
* to be born,^ ^»nTPT, W^? 'T^ ; n^T ^ to go,' ^i^H^:, &c.
8, Before "^rc^ and the other affixes of the second praeterite
beginning with consonants, as ^, H, ^, »r^, %, ^, all roots,
except ^, ^, ^, "^^ ^3 "^ ^ ^5 insert \\ as, tt^ makes ^fq^ZT,
^fq^, ^f^, ^fq^, ^^, ^f^, ^f^%. Before ^t^ it is
sometimes optional ; as, ^f%^ or qqoj«'i| ; the v in set is changed
to cT.
189. Besides the formation of the second praeterite upon
the principle of reduplication, there is another form of it,
which may be regarded as a compound praeterite tense, the
radical verb being combined with the inflexions of the auxiliary-
verbs ^nj ' to be,' ^' to be,* and "^ ^ to make.' The syllable
^Ti^ is interposed between the radical verb and the auxiliary
inflexion : thus ^v, ' to increase,' becomes in this tense,
T^^rmnr
^imnn^
^^nH!f«H
^VTHlftl^
^VT^mr^:
^vmi^
^vmro
^^VTTTOW:
^i*< 1^:
^>it^^
^vf^»j5f:
^vr^^:
a. Verbs of which the initial is any vowel except ^ or ^,
and which is long either by nature or position, before two
consonants (except ^^ ' to go,' and -gi?! ' to cover'), also the
roots ^^R ' to go,' ^rm ' to sit,' and ^ ' to hurt' — verbs of
more than one syllable — all verbs of the tenth conjugation —
B
122 VERBS.
and all derivative verbs, as causals, frequentatives, desidera-
tives, and nominals — take the compound form of the second
praeterite.
h. In inflexion, H^and 'sra always follow the Parasmai-pada ;
ofi takes either Pada, according to the voice of the primary
verb.
c. ^SRT^T and ^FTO ' to shine,^ ^ft^T ^ to be poor,' f^ ' to
know,' WPJ ^ to be awake,' and ^^ ' to bum,' may be conju-
gated either in the reduplicate or compound praeterite.
190. Third praeterite or indefinite past. The inflexions of
this tense are so various, that it has been termed by Professor
Bopp the " praeteritum multiforme ;" and Dr. Wilkins has
specified eleven modes in which they are formed. In these
latter, however, he comprises not merely changes of termina-
tion, but modifications of the base, and those affecting the
terminations by the insertion of certain augments.
a. The alterations of the terminations are not many, but
the terminations themselves are referrible to two classes. They
are, i. the terminations of the tense, as specified in the scheme,
p. 115; or they are, %, those of the first praeterite, as found
in the same place, p. 114.
h. The changes of the first class are confined to the elision
of the ^ combined with rT or "^i afler a short vowel, or any
consonant except a nasal, a semivowel, and ^. ^, w, ^ of
the Parasmai-pada, and ^, wf of the i^tmane-pada, become
irf, if, W, and w, m The only change of the second class is
the optional substitution of T?fT' for ^i^, the termination of the
third person plural.
c. The principal modifications, however, arise from prefixing
certain augments to these terminations. To the tenninations
of the first class ^ is prefixed, either singly or with ^, as "ftf ;
to those of the second class, in like manner, ^ is prefixed,
either singly or with the sibilant, as ^.
d. When 1^ is prefixed alone to the terminations of the first
class, the ^ of the second and third persons singular of the
PRINCIPLES OP CONJUGATION.
123
Parasmai-pada is rejected. In the other persons the dental
sibilant is changed, of course, to the cerebral after ^ (rule 29).
We have then,
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
:^ ^
JW
^
l[^f^ 3[^f
;: ^
^
jnr:
d^Mmf ^or^*
?{ ^
^:
JB
^MIHI iHd
In the Parasmai-pada only, ^ may be prefixed to these termina-
tions, making ftr^, ftTE^, "ftn*? ; ^, "ftr?, fw ; ^^ftl^, fwf, f^'5«
e. The inflexions of the third przeterite becoming those of
the first, the tense preserves an analogy throughout, and
instead of inserting the augment ^, which cannot belong to
the first praeterite, inserts % which does belong to it in several
conjugations. The terminations of the base then become,
Parasmai-pada.
^: Wrf ^nr
^ ^snrf ^"'^ or "gr:
Here, agreeably to rules already specified, ^ has become ^rr
before ^ and H ; the initial of ^, ^T^, ^sfjt is rejected after a
vowel; ^ is dropped before '^; and the ^TT of ^mrf and ^rnrf,
having been changed to ^, form "^ with the augment ^; so
does the ^ of the first person singular.
/. Sometimes, but rarely, and only after a verb ending in a
vowel, the augment ^ is rejected, when the terminations of
the first praeterite are attached directly to the base. It is
more usual, however, to prefix ^ to them in both voices;
making therefore.
Atmane-pada.
^
^TT^ ^3Tmf^
^m:
5^^f ^s#
^nr
inri ^^ or ^ff
Parasmai-pada,
Modifications of the base
Wff
Atmane-pada.
These are for the greater
part of a special description, and will best be adverted to
R a
124 VERBS.
under each particular case. A few of the most general ones
may be here inserted.
h. The indefinite praeterite prefixes the temporal augment,
whether it retains its own terminations, or adopts those of
the first praeterite; as, ^ 'to go, ^^rto^; ^^to be,' ^HTT^.
In a few verbs, w hich take the terminations of the first prae-
terite, the root is also doubled ; as, "Psf ^ to serve,' ^rf^rf^T^Tl^.
«. Before the terminations of the first class, or those which
are its own, verbs having simple final vowels commonly sub-
stitute for them the Vriddhi element in the Parasmai-pada,
and the Guiia in the Atmane-pada ; as, lift ^ to take,' ^T^^^,
^¥ ; Y ^ ^^ shake,' w*n^, ^nftF ; ^ * to make,' W3RT^. A
short vowel is however sometimes unchanged before W^ when,
agreeably to clause h, the sibilant is dropped; as, third pers.
sing, ^tmane-pada, ^r^. Verbs ending in diphthongs com-
monly change this to WT ; as, wt, ^ to destroy,' makes ^r^rati^
or ^nrnr .
Of roots ending in consonants, those which take the aug-
ment 1^, either with or without the sibilant, and have a
medial "^, optionally substitute the Vriddhi 'STT in the Parasmai-
pada ; but not if they end in H, "^j "5, or a double consonant,
or are distinguished by an Anubandha ^; nor do the roots
TJ^TFT and ''j^ admit of the alternative ; as, iTT, ' to read,' makes
^mi)f^ or 'HMdlrt^; but >m * to w^ander,' WjrftT^; tr * to restrain,'
^nNh^. If they end with ^ or c^, the vowel is invariably long ;
as, ^^ or ^75 ' to go,^ ^r^T^, ^!r^T<^^. So it is in ^ ' to
speak,^ and -gr^ ' to go,^ W^T^, ^T^TTifti^. In the i^traane-pada
the change does not take place ; as, 1^ ' to hasten,^ ^H^fr?.
j. Any other medial short vowel substitutes the Guna
element in both voices, except in certain verbs. If the final
is a double consonant no change takes place, nor is a long
vowel changed ; as, f^ ' to know,' ^1^"^; "J^T ^ to flower,'
^f^^; ^ ' to shine,' ^srsftfw.
k. Of those which do not take the augment ^, and w hich
are marked in lists of roots by the Anubandha '^, the medial
PRINCIPLES OP CONJUGATION. 125
vowel substitutes the Vriddhi element in the Parasmai-pada,
before the proper inflexions of the tense ; as, ^T»f ^ to worship/
-ciijUSjIfi^; but not in the ^tmane-pada ; as, ^ ^ to hberate/
w^ ; ^ of w being rejected (clause b), and ^ becoming oR
before TT, as in declension (rule 9a).
I. Before the terminations of the first praeterite — and before
which, it should be remembered, the augment ^ cannot be
inserted — ^verbs ending in vowels undergo the GuAa change
when the affix begins with ^; when the augment ^ is not
inserted, they are unchanged ; as, ^ ^ to go,' makes ^TOTjT ; ^
* to give,' ^T^Tf^; and final diphthongs are changed to ^STT; so
that ^, ' to drink,' makes ^snm^. The verbs that insert the
sibilant before the terminations of the first praeterite in the
sense of the third, are those which end in '^Tj ^, or ^, having
any other penultimate than ^ or ^TT. There are a few excep-
tions. The final sibilant or aspirate is changed to "Sfi before ^,
and that again is changed to "^ (rules 27, 28), making the com-
pound Ty ; as, f^ ' to shew,' ^^rf^^ ; ^ * to be thin,' ^r^refl^.
Before a double consonant a vowel is unchanged. Verbs of
the fourth conjugation of the class gmH^ are inflected with
the terminations of the first praeterite in the Parasmai-pada
with the augment ^, when the radical vowel is unaltered ; as,
"J^ ' to nourish,^ ^'"S^* So are verbs of the class ^rtlH^' of
the first conjugation, ^T^TTr^; and verbs distinguished by an
Anubandha oE ; as, ^ ^ to be able,^ ^T^nfir^. In the -^tmane-
pada some of these verbs may take ^, and undergo the usual
changes ; as, ^, ' to shine,' makes ^i^tTirrig.
m. Verbs which have an Anubandha ^ are conjugated in
the indefinite praeterite with both classes of terminations ; as,
(fS[f^) f^, * to cut,' makes either 'njrfflrt^ or "^rf^l^.
n. Verbs having an Anubandha ^ do not insert ^ before
the terminations of the third praeterite ; as, (^>ft) ^ ' to ob-
struct,' ^rdr^ftf^, -^Orlf, '^Or*j: ; or Atmane-pada, ^r^, -^^^^kjihI,
0. Verbs with an Anubandha "35 optionally insert ^; as.
126 VERBS.
(fi?v) f^ ^ to be perfect/ ^rtwtir, ^it^, ^itif : ; or ^ri>fh^,
jo. All the verbs of the eighth conjugation, except cfi ^ to do,'
besides taking ^5 and being inflected on the principle of clause
df may dispense with the ^ in the Atmane-pada, before the
terminations of the second and third persons singular ; before
which also they drop their own finals ; as, inT ^ to stretch/
^TiTfT, ^nnrr: (the ^ of ^ and FTT^ being rejected by clause b).
g. All verbs of the tenth conjugation, and causal verbs, are
inflected with the terminations of the first praeterite with the
augment ^. The root is doubled before them, according to
rules to be given when treating of the causal praeterite ; thus,
^, ' to steal,' makes ^i^^gTj^.
Of the augment ^.
191. The insertion of this augment is not restricted to the
cases in which it has already been pointed out in the second and
third praeterite, but is extended to the terminations beginning
with consonants in the other tenses which are not comprised
within those that take the conjugational distinctions, except
the benedictive of the Parasmai-pada. The objects of the
insertion and exception may be easily understood. In the
former case it is intended to supply the place of the conjuga-
tional vowel; in the latter, the initial of the termination is
the semivowel if, which may be united with a preceding con-
sonant, and does not need the interposition of a vowel.
a. Although, however enjoined in most cases, there are
many exceptions to its insertion. In the two futures, the
conditional, and the benedictive Atmane-pada, as in the third
praeterite, ^ is not inserted after verbs distinguished by an
indicatory 5^ ; T>T-^ * to begin,^ T^TT ' he will begin :' and it is
optionally inserted in verbs having an indicatory ^; as, i^v,
* to accompHsh,' makes in the first future %^ or ^fiiril. In
the tenses now named, however, a more general prohibition
to the insertion of i^, and which is not applicable to the
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
127
praeterites, is when the vowel of a verb has the grave accent.
These verbs are specified as follows.
h. Monosyllables ending in any vowels except "31 and ^,
and except ^, ^, ^, t^ ? (^d conj.), ^, ^, -^^ ftr, frg, m
Verbs ending in ^ also insert ^ before the terminations of the
indefinite future.
c. The following verbs ending in consonants do not insert
this prefix.
^T^ to eat.
^TR to obtain.
^ to attract, (i. 6.)
^ to be angry.
"^ to cry aloud.
f^Tl to throw.
■^ to pound.
"^V to be hungry.
f^ to be distressed.
'TT to go.
TRT to eat.
f%^ to cut.
"^ to touch.
TJTR to bow.
mil to tie.
"ftjinT to cleanse.
ITT^ to send.
mr to inflame, (i. 4. 10.)
■fifxj to drop.
^ to torment.
^ to be satisfied.
HTT to be satisfied. (4.)
?nf to abandon.
f?^ to shine.
^ to bite.
^ to bum.
f^ to shew.
f|[^ to smear.
J^ to do wrong.
5^ to milk. («.)
CT to be proud.
g^ to see.
■fe"^ to hate.
"q^ to cook.
^ to go.
frr^ to grind.
Y^ to cherish. (4.)
TT^ to ask.
"qv to bind.
-q^ to bind.
mr to serve.
H^ to break,
fn^ to break.
^ to enjoy.
>J^ to fry.
ir?r to think.
JT^ to merge,
fir^ to urine.
?r^ to be free.
^ to perceive.
THT to sacrifice.
TW to copulate.
128
VERBS.
TR to stop.
Tpf to join.
^ to fight.
T^ to colour.
T>T to begin.
TH to sport.
TIV to accomplish,
ft^ to purge.
ftSH' to hurt.
^»T to be sick.
^ to obstruct.
^T^ to hurt.
^ to ascend.
c3H to acquire.
fc5xy to smear.
■fe^ to lessen.
ff^ to lick.
<5Tf to disturb.
T^T^ to speak.
^TT to sow.
^?r to dwell, (i.)
^ to bear,
f^ to differ.
f^iT to differ.
f%^ to know. (4. 6. 7.)
f^ to enter.
f^^ to pervade, (i. 3. 9,)
^l\r to pierce.
i^rsfi to be able. (5.)
^ to wither.
^R to vow.
f^ to hurt, to distinguish.( 1.7.)
^ to be pure. (4.)
3R to dry.
fW"Er to embrace. (4.)
"q^ to embrace.
■R^ to wither.
fw^ to sprinkle.
fiTO to accomplish.
lE^I^ to embrace.
r^ to sleep.
^nv to accomplish.
T^ to abandon,
1^ to creep.
^«^ to go.
w^ to touch.
The figures mark the conjugations in which the verbs
are inflected without l^; in any others they may insert it.
The same verb sometimes belongs to more than one conju-
gation, either with the same or with a different sense.
192. First future. The terminations undergo no change
whatever, except when the verb ends with an aspirate, when
IT is changed to v, as in the present tense. The changes
of the base are few and simple. The final vowels i[, % ^,
"31, ^, '%, substitute the GuAa elements, ^, ^, ^, whether
the augment ^ be inserted or not. If inserted, the first
two are changed by the rules of Sandhi to ^, W^; as.
PRINCIPLES OP CONJUGATION. 129
f»f * to conquer,' ^WT * he will conquer ;' ^ Ho sleep/ ^if^ril ' he
will sleep / ;^ ^ to cry/ iS^A\, A final ^ and ^ are changed
to ^rr, and this vowel, as well as ^, undergoes no change;
as, ^ ' to give/ ^TiTT ' he will give ;' ^ ' to drink/ VTrTT ; ^
* to sharpen,' ^fftirr. The medial vowels ^, T, "^, if followed
by a single consonant, also substitute the Guna letters ; but
"^ is sometimes changed to ^; long vowels are unchanged ; as,
fir^ ^to sprinkle/ %^; ^ 'to be sad/ ^ftf^WT; 1^ 'to see/
^STT ; 'fN' ' to live,' ifHVirr. The final consonants when not
separated by the augment ^ from the dental w, which is the
initial of all the terminations of this tense, combine with it,
according to the rules of Sandhi: thus xr^ makes tj^; tth,
iRrr. After an aspirate, TT is changed to V ; as, H>? ^ to gain,'
cTSErr. >T after ^ derived from a final ^ (rule 3:2) is changed to
^, and the first ^ is rejected ; as, ^ ' to grow,' TfeT.
193. Indefinite future. The terminations of this tense
differ from those of the present only in having ^ prefixed to
them, on the same principles as verbs of the first conjugation ;
making therefore mC^, W^y not wifnT, &c. ; 5^^, ^^, not
^tTT^, WI^. After ^ the sibilant is changed to "q ; and after
a final vowel or consonant it undergoes such changes as the
rules of Sandhi enjoin.
a. The changes of the base are not numerous. A final or
medial short vowel, the latter not being long by position,
substitutes the GuAa element, which before ^ is changed to
the form which the laws of combination require. Final con-
sonants are also modified according to the same rules. A
final palatal is changed before ^ to the hard guttural ^ and ^
after "SR becoming % the compound TJ is formed ; as, tr^ ' to
cook/ TT^^fiT; ftuftr ' to wash/ f^ferfw. After a final cerebral
sibilant the same change takes place ; as, ^ for 1^, ' to see/
makes "^^jl^. "^ also is changed to ^ ; and as in the declen-
sion of nouns in ^ when the final is so changed the initial is
changed to its aspirate (rule 131, 6), so ^, ' to bum/ makes
V^rfir ; 5? * to milk/ Vlvt^ifri.
194. Imperative. The changes of the terminations are
130 VERBS.
few, and where the terminations are analogous to those of the
present, as ^3r^, ^?^f, W\yn, ^rnrf, they undergo similar modifi-
cations, when such are necessary, as in the first, fourth, sixth,
and tenth conjugations. In the same conjugations, f^, the sign
of the second person singular, is rejected, leaving only the con-
jugational sign W; as, >j;^+f^ becomes >1^ 'be thou.^ In the
other conjugations, after any consonant except a semivowel or
a nasal or ^, fxf is substituted for f% ; as, ^^ ' to speak,^ ^^fnr ;
also after ^ ' to sacrifice,* as ^ff>T- TTTW is substituted for the
terminations of the second and third persons singular in a
benedictive sense ; as, H^rilH^ ' may thou' or ' may he be.'
a. The changes of the base are conjugational, and analogous
to those of the present.
195. Potential. ^ is substituted for the xrr of all the termi-
nations of this mood, and is prefixed to ^if, which becomes xf,
and also to ^, in the Parasmai-pada of the first class of conjuga-
tions, and with their conjugational sign ^ becomes by the rules
of Sandhi (rule 2) ^; as, ^T^l^, ^(t^l^^ ^^^ ^sftT^"r^. In the second
series xrr is unchanged ; as, ^rem^, &c. In the first class of con-
jugations the initial ^ of the terminations of the i^tmane-pada be-
comes with the conjugational ^, ^; as, 1^^, ^aimi. In the second
class it is unchanged ; as, wm Ho sit,' ^rratrT, ^STTOhncrf, ^rnftt5|,&c.
a» The changes of the base are conjugational.
196. Benedictive mood. The terminations are not liable
to change : ^ may be inserted before those of the i^tmane-
pada, when ^ becomes ^.
a. The following are the principal changes to which the
inflective base is subject in the Parasmai-pada, and when ^ is
not inserted in the i^tmane-pada.
b. Of verbs ending in vowels, most of those which termi-
nate in ^T, either as a primitive or as derived from ^ or ^,
substitute ^ in the Parasmai-pada ; they are unchanged in
the Atmane-pada ; as, ^T ' to give,' ^^, ^V^. Some change
it optionally before ti; as, ^ 'to sing,' irnm^ or Ttirn^. Those
in which ^t is preceded by a conjunct consonant, except wi
' to stay,' do not change the ^rr j as, wn * to blow,' wmrn^.
PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 131
Those ending in ^ or ^ substitute ^ in the Parasmai-pada, and
the Guiia letter ^ in the j^tmane-pada ; as, ^ ' to take/ ^mi\^,
^rg. Those ending in "g" and "gi substitute "gi and ^ ; as, ^
^ to hear,' ^Ulr^; ^ ^ to praise,* ^^\t{9 Wl*flv. "^ short sub-
stitutes ft, and ^ long ^, in the Parasmai-pada ; as, ^ ' to
make,' P^HIH;; W ^ to cross,' "rfhtril^. Verbs ending in ^, and
beginning with a compound consonant, substitute the Guna
^ for their final ; as, ^ * to spread,' ^cntr?^. In the ^tmane-
pada the vowel is unchanged ; as, ^ ' to make,' ^irh?. A final
^ is unchanged ; as, ^ ^ to wither,' ^fhniT .
c. Verbs ending in consonants change their finals accord-
ing to the rules of Sandhi, or others of an analogous appli-
cation, only before the sibilants of the i^tmane-pada ; nor do
their preceding vowels undergo any alteration ; as, f^ ^ to
cut,' f^^TTi;, fiS(W\^ ; xr^ ' to cook,' M^mt\^, tt^^f. If the final
be a compound, of which a nasal is the first member, it is
rejected in the Parasmai-pada, as ^"^r ^ to bite,' ^^TTTrT ; not in
the i^tmane-pada, as t^^ ^ to embrace,' w^ ; nor does this
apply to roots inserting a nasal in consequence of an Anu-
bhandha ^; as, ^f^ * to rejoice,' rrs^rnr.
d. Some verbs containing semivowels change them to their
corresponding vowels in the Parasmai-pada ; as, tt^ ' to ask,'
•J^-llft;; T^ ^to speak/ "gnni^; ^^r ^to sew/ ^mict;; ^Hf ^ to
worship/ ^i<j|f^; ^ ^ to bear/ ^r^TTW; ^RT 'to dwell/ TBTTTI;;
^ ^ to subdue,' "g^xrn^. There are a few verbs containing the
semivowel % and ending in ^, which admit of a similar modi-
fication, and reject the diphthong ; as, ^ ^ to weave,' "gnrnr ;
^ ' to conceal/ ^fhm^; and ^ ' to call/ f^T?^.
€, When ^ is prefixed to the terminations of this tense in
the Atmane-pada, the changes of the base are analogous to
those of the other tenses before the same augment.
197. Conditional mood. The terminations generally follow
the analogy of those of the indefinite future (see p. 115).
a. The base prefixes the temporal augment, but in all other
respects is analogous to the inflective base of the indefinite
s 2,
132 VERBS.
future; as, ind. fut. viP^qPri 'will be/ cond. ^wfw?^; ^siwfw
* will eat/ cond. ^STTiWrl]^.
SECTION VI.
Formation of the Verb,
198. From this general view of the formation of the tenses,
we may now proceed to trace an entire verb through all its
inflexions in the two active voices and in the passive voice.
In following the example of Mr. Colebrooke, and offering ^, 'to
be/ as an example, we select a verb of general usefulness, and
frequent recurrence, ^is a verb of the first conjugation: it
is properly confined to the Parasmai-pada, and in its character
of a substantive verb cannot well admit of any other. With
prepositions, however, it takes a transitive sense, and may then
be both active and passive; as, ^r^H^ 'he perceives/ ^5r5>J3J^
* it is perceived.* We may, however, lay aside the preposition
for the present, that the purpose for which the verb is exhi-
bited, that of supplying a model of extensive application, may
not be embarrassed by unnecessary complexity.
199. >T^as a verb of the first conjugation changes its vowel
to ^ before the sign of the conjugation ^. It changes it to
^ also before the augment ?f, which it admits : and before ^
and \, ^ becomes ^r^. The inflective base with the augments
is therefore >T^ and >Tf^. In the second praeterite ^ is added
to the radical vowel, and the verb being repeated, the base is
^^. In the third praeterite in the Parasmai-pada the verb
takes the terminations of the first : in the iitmane-pada it
retains its own terminations with the augment ^.
^j^^tobe.'
Indicative mood.
Present tense, * I am/ &c.
Parasmai-pada. Atmane-pada.
H-^rft?
H^T^:
>t^t»t:
H^
H^^
h^utI
H^ftr
H^^:
>TT?T
>T^
H^^
>?^5^
«^
h^ct;
H^fw
>T^
>T^
>J^
FORMATION OP THE VERB.
133
First praeterite or imperfect, * I was/ &c.
-SM^
'SM^T^
^>T^T1T
^M^
^>T^^ ^nH^mH^
ysnm
^I^Trf
^M^ff
^M*^^v^^:
^M^ ^w^ssr
^>T^
^^H^dl
^fW^
-iWMri
^*T^Hl ^H^ni
Second praeterite or perfect
, * I was "
or have been/ &c.
^^
^^^
•^■>jf^
^
c^^ifci^^ <4Hr=JH^
^^Jf^
^»25T
^^
^^
^SPI^T^ ^^(|)
■^1?
"^^IFS^
^^•
^
^H^T^ ^^
Third praet., indefinite, or aorist past, ' I
was or had been/ &c.
"»P??^
^3nj5
^T^
^^Wf^ftf
^wfcj^jH^ ^wf^^irf^
^!P|:
^
W^
-^Hf^ai:
^Hp^mvii ^HrMuf(g')
''^
^^*
^^f?^
^wf^
'3r*Trtr»(Trff ^hH^mh
/* ^
First or
definite fut
lire, ' I will be/ &c.
H^^rilm:
HNrtlf<*^ HmrtlW^
>TfT?nr.
>Tf^
HTcJril
Second or indefinite futur
e, ' I will
or shall be,' &c.
nr^m^H
HNuim:
^iPcimm^ HP^ttliH^
^ff^mv) Hpciuju^
HrmMPfi
Hf^mri:
♦ifciui^ *«r4U*ni
Imperative mood^
' May I be/ &c.
H-^rf^
H-^T^
HTR
>^t
H^i|^ H^wi
>T^
vr^^
^r^
i?^^
«^ *i^s4
H^
H^
m^
^Tfrff
*T^riI H^iil
Potential or
subjunctive
mood, ^
I may be/ &c.
H^
H^
H^
M^
H^^ H^id^
vfhwm ^^
H^^ldf Hc^i^f^
Benedictive or
optative mo
od, * I wish I may be,' &c.
^HI«H
^M\^
ii\m
HNMN
Hic(mm^ Hi«4Mmi^
^^*
1^'«
^^'«
♦ffciiflai:
hPc* Ml^^i^f hP^mIi4(^
^^x
^^IWI
'^^ni:
HN»(ly
HP^»O^I«f HpcJMtJC^
134
VERBS.
Conditional mood, ^ I shall be^ if/ &c.
"^WpcliMrt ^>Tf%^irf ^wf^Ui^ri
Passive voice,
200. In this voice ^ is prefixed to the terminations of the
conjugational tenses in the Atmane-pada; and before ^ the
radical vowel is unchangeable. In the non- conjugational tenses
the radical vowel optionally substitutes the Guna or Vriddhi
diphthong, and thus >T^ becomes >ft or >^; making consequently
before a vowel >T^ or HT'^. It takes the latter only before the
termination 3( of the third praeterite. In every other respect
there is no difference between the tenses of the passive voice
and those of the active in the Atmane-pada of the first
conjugation.
Present tense.
I
First praeter.
Second praeter.
Third praeter.
ist pers.
2d pers.
3d pers.
First future.
Second future.
Imperative.
Potential.
Benedictive.
^
^
^
^
^
^nj^iRf^^ &c.
-^^^PR^ &c.
f HP«4«i
^W P"=l M Pt^
^TH I Pq «i P^
^I^P^Hl'm*
{^THp^Mlrif
^THiP^Hifif
VP^ril^^
NlPMril^^
><Pc|UfH^
^wip«i"^ni
HlP^rilW^
H P«l m IH%
^JTTRt &C.
>u1hP^ &c.
Hp^mlnf^ 1
&c.
}
&c.
&c.
DERIVATIVE VERBS. 185
Conditional, j""^ 'SMf^^RT^ """"^T^ \&.c.
SECTION VIL
Derivative Verbs,
201. Before proceeding to any detail of individual verbs, it
is desirable that some notion should be entertained of those
secondary or derivative forms of which the simple verb admits.
Some of these might perhaps be more correctly designated as
moods; for causality, desire, frequency, or intensity, are but
different modes or conditions of the same action ; and the modi-
fications by which they are expressed are no more to be regarded
as distinct verbs because they take all the tenses of the simple
verb, than are the moods of the Greek verb, of which the
same circumstance may be predicated. As however the deriva-
tive forms have been hitherto given separately, and as their
annexation to the simple verb as moods would present to the
learner a rather formidable array of verbal inflexion, the distinct
explanation of them may be here also observed.
Causals,
0,02. All verbs admit of a modification implying causality,
as causing to be, to do, &c. In the language of the original
grammarians, "ftrj^ is added to the verb ; that is, the vowel ^,
which is convertible to ^, and becomes ^n^ before a vowel ; the
W in the afiix indicates the substitution of the Vriddhi element
for the radical vowel ; ^ therefore becomes ift, which with ^
makes Hlf^, or before a vowel ^TT^.
a. The causal verb may be conjugated with the termina-
tions of either voice; with those of the Parasmai-pada when
it is strictly transitive; with the Atmane-pada when it is
reflective, or when the consequence of the action reverts to
the causer or instigator. ^ is inserted before the terminations
in the conjugational tenses, and ^ in the non-conjugational ;
130 VERBS.
except in the third praeterite, which takes the terminations of
the first praeterite. The second praeterite is formed with the
auxiHary verbs "^^ ^5 '^T^.
b. Verbs ending in ^J, whether primitive or derived from
the change of a final diphthong to 'm, insert it, fj, or "g, before
the causal augment ; as, xrr ' to drink/ xninTfiT * he causes to
drink ;' v^ * to preserve/ tnc^^rffT ' he causes to preserve / ^
* to know,' ^rnrrffT ^ he causes to know/ ^ he teaches/ In some
instances the radical vowel is optionally made short; as, ^
^ to sharpen' or * kill/ inTnrfw or ^q^fri ' he causes to kill /
Wr ^ to bathe/ "^^T^-gfiT or t^M^ifri ^ he causes to bathe.'
c. Roots ending in ^ or ^ when substituting the Vriddhi ele-
ment ^ change the latter of course before the vowel of the causal
form to ^BTT^; as, f^ ^ to collect,^ ^^TTgfw ^ he causes to coUect :*
but IT is sometimes replaced by xf, and the vowel in both cases
made optionally short ; so that fsr makes also MRilftf, '^^^frf,
or -ciM^fH. Roots in ^ long sometimes either change the radical
to the GuAa element, or preserve it unchanged, interposing a
consonant before the causal augment ; as, "^ ^ to be ashamed,'
\^^?^ ; ift Ho be pleased/ Tft^rnrfiT or Mlniifri, Roots ending
in '3', "3i, ^, and "^ mostly change their finals to the Vriddhi
substitutes.
d. Roots ending in consonants usually change a medial ^
to ^rr ; and ^, T and ^ to ^, ^ and ^. Long vowels are
unchanged. There are exceptions, ^s in the class of roots
called Hdlft* or "q^ ^ to endeavour,' with other verbs of the first
conjugation, which do not make the vowel long, as xr?, MdAlfri.
Of roots ending in H, some do and some do not make the
vowel long; as, itH 'to go/ iiH^fri ; W\ 'to wish/ "^mRrqfrT.
^, 'to kill,' substitutes "qTrr; as, Miri^fii 'he causes to kill.'
^, ' to ascend,' optionally substitutes xf for the final ; as,
Cl^^fri or Jcmnfrf ' he causes to ascend or grow/ ' he plants.'
e. These general rules for the modification of the base
are applicable to all the tenses except the benedictive in the
Parasmai-pada, and the third praeterite. In the former the
DERIVATIVE VERBS. 137
causal augment is rejected, although the vowel of the base
undergoes the change to which it is Uable in this form, as
>J^ becomes irnqTff. In the third praeterite, which takes the
terminations of the first, and the conjugational augment ^
before them, the root undergoes reduplication, with some
peculiar modifications of the radical vowel. With very few
exceptions the causal augment is rejected ; as, ^rr^, ^ to ask,*
makes ^jrqrrpqi^ not ■»i(i|^M^f^. In general the radical vowel,
if long, is made short ; as, ift ^ to please,' ^tftfwr^ * he caused
to please ; ^ ' to shake,' ^^TiT ' he caused to shake.* There
are some exceptions, as in the instance of "m^ ; so also ^pTff,
^ to govern,* makes ^r^r^mn^. Some verbs take both forms ;
as, HT^ * to speak,' wf^HTWl^ or ^rf^>T^ ^ he caused to speak.'
/, In doubling the root before the third praeterite of the
causal, the general rules are mostly to be observed (see p. ii8);
but there are also some peculiarities.
ff. If the verb consists of a vowel followed by a consonant,
the first member of the reduplication is the entire root, with
the vowel modified as usual: to this, ^ is added, with the
radical consonant ; as, ^T^ * to go,* "^jftZrl ^ he sent,* or ^ caused
to go ;* "^ ' to worship,* $fc5c5ir ^ he caused to worship.*
h. If the verb begin with a consonant, the reduplicated con-
sonant wiU conform to preceding rules (p. ii8). The redupli-
cate vowel will be ^, ^, or 'g'.
i. ^ is repeated for a radical ^ prosodially long ; as, H»T,
^ to obtain,' makes ^c^rtWTr^ ' he caused to obtain ;* and for ^
when it is preceded by a double consonant ; as, ^ ^ to tram-
ple,' ^nTO(^ ' he caused to trample :' for ^rr medial, which is
preserved in the inflexion ; as, ^^rro ^ to govern,* ^T^nfTT^ ;
and for ^ and ^ in some verbs ; as, TiT * to be,' '^5r^^#f^ ' he
caused to be ;* ^ ^ to tear,' ^l^T^^ ' he caused to tear.'
j, \, becoming ^ before a single consonant followed in its
inflected form by a short vowel, and remaining unchanged
before a double consonant, or before a single consonant if
followed in its inflected form by a long vowel, is repeated —
138 VERBS.
I, for ^ or ^sn when not followed by a double consonant ; as,
TT^ Ho cook/ ^nfhr^; ^T Ho shake/ ^Hp^iaH^; V^ ^to
stand/ ^fiffsxTrT ^ he caused to stand :' ^, for ^, ^, ^, ^ ; as, f*r
**to conquer/ ^nft^nTTT; T? Ho surround/ ^^^Trf : 3, for "g" or
■gi preceded by »r, a labial, or a semivowel ; as, »T ^ to make
haste/ ^^^lTic(t| ^he caused to make haste / H Ho be/ ^iisHH^ri^
* he caused to be / p5 ' to cut/ ^r<^h55^ : 4, optionally for "gr or
"31 preceded by the same consonants in composition with others ;
as, "^ ^ to hear,^ wfi^TJT^l^ or ^sr^'sjsr^: 5, for ^, when that does
not substitute ^ ; as, ^ Ho be/ ^Hc/l^jriii^, otherwise ^s^^rtr^ ;
or in some cases where it does take Guiia ; as, "35 ' to make,^
^NhKTi^ ' he caused to make/ #
k, "3", liable to be changed to "3! by the same circumstances
which require the alteration of ^ to ^, is repeated for T, ^, ^,
^ ; as, ^ ^ to grow,' ^ST^^^ ^ he caused to grow/ ' he raised /
^cfi ^ to seek,^ w^^cfil^ ^ he caused to seek ;* "b^ ^ to sleep,^
^^MMri ' he caused to sleep/
/. Some of the forms of this tense are apparently anomalous,
although they arise out of previous rules : thus ^ ^ to go,' with
^srfv prefixed, ^ to read,' makes ^srarrfwi^ or "^arwifhrTif ' he
taught' or ^ caused to read / ITT Ho smell/ ^wfinTT^ or ^r»fHM7^
^ he caused to smell / ^«T Ho kill,' W5fhnrf|[; and ttt Ho drink,'
^snfhm^ * he caused to drink/
m. It is not necessary, either in the case of causal deriva-
tives or those about to be described, to multiply examples
under their several rules. In the succeeding pages para-
digmas will be given of many of the most useful verbs, and
these will include examples of their derivative verbal inflexions,
Desideratives.
203. When the agent wishes, intends, or expects to do the
action, or be in the condition, which the verb imports, ^,
technically called ^t^, is added to the root. The ^ is rejected
before the terminations of the non-conjugational tenses. The
DERIVATIVE VERBS. 139
root undergoes reduplication, and is conjugated in the same
voice in which the primitive is conjugated.
«. Before ^nr the augment ^ is very commonly prefixed.
Its exclusion occurs for the most part after those roots v^^hich
do not take the same augment before the non-conjugational
tenses (see p. 137). This does not prevent the use of the
augment before the personal terminations in those tenses in
which it is enjoined in all derivative verbs. After ^ the ^ of
T^ is changed to "^.
b. The reduplication of the radical syllable follows the rules
affecting consonants (r. 188. cl. dio g). There are some pecu-
liarities in regard to the vowels ; ^ being usually substituted for
a radical medial or final 'sr, ^T, ^5 ^5 "^, "^j ^, ^ ; and ^ for "7,
^gi, ^, ^. When the root begins with a vowel, the redupli-
cation is the radical syllable itself, followed by the final con-
sonant with ^ prefixed ; as, ^T^ ^ to eat,' ^%f^r^ ^ to wish to
eat.' Very commonly, however, there is no reduplication, but
the initial letter or the whole syllable is changed ; as, ^sm^ ' to
obtain,' ^ ' to wish to obtain ;' ^V ' to increase,^ ^r^ ^ to wish
to increase,' &c. The same occurs with verbs beginning with
consonants ; as, ^ ' to give,' f^, "ft^rRfw ' he wishes to give ;'
ft{ ^ to scatter,' and »ft * to kill,' f?n^, "ft rFfw ^ he wishes to scat-
ter' or ' kill ;' ^Hfi ' to be able,' f^"2^, as f^i^fw ' he wishes to be
able,' ^ he learns ;' cJH Ue obtain,' fc^, as fc^Htfcf ' he desires
to obtain ;' ^ * to go,' fqiflri ^ he wishes to go ;' ^nr * to fall,'
PMi^fri * he expects to fall,' &c.
c. Besides the changes to which the radical vowels are
subject in the syllable of redupHcation, they are occasionally
subject to the same or similar changes in the radical syllable
also. When ^ is not prefixed to ^"^5 a radical short ^ and T
become long ; as, f^y ' to conquer,' makes lirfWiT ; "J ^ to join,'
^jj^Mfri. The long vowels remain for the most part unaltered ;
as, ^T ' to know,' fif^^rfifT ' he wishes to know ;' >J^ ' to be,'
"^iT^filT ^ he wishes to be.' "^ and ^ are commonly changed
to ^; as, ^ Ho make,' "N^fitffiT ^ he wishes to make:' but
T 2
14)0 VERBS.
when preceded by a labial, the substitute is "3i^; as, H, ' to die/
makes g^jSfri ' he wishes to die.'
d. When ^ is prefixed to t^, a final ^ may be dropped ;
as, ^fic^T ^to be poor/ ^W^fff; otherwise <^n.<[lf(rri. Other
final vowels may substitute the Guna or Vriddhi elements,
changed before ^ agreeably to the rules of Sandhi. Thus f^,
^ to serve/ makes ^^^'^^^^^^f^ ; otherwise f^i^^lqfri. ^, ^ to go/
substitutes im, which takes ^ and makes fiTTfwfrT ; but not if
^rfv be prefixed, as ^rfvftTTra^. '^, ^ to purify,' substitutes ^
for its radical, which becomes the Guna 5^, and by Sandhi
^ before the augment fqiir^Mpri. "3r|, ^ to cover/ takes
different forms, ^^^-jr^Mfri, 'g^l^^^ffl', or ^4*1?* Pri. Those
verbs in ^ or "^ which prefix ^ to ^, change the radical letter
to ^; as, ^ ^ to go/ wfrfWiT ' he wishes to go.' w ^ to cross/
with ^, is ffTlfft:^ ; without it fwiftf fw.
€. Most roots ending with consonants prefix ^to ^"JT. When
they do not, the finals combine with the sibilant, agreeably to
the laws of Sandhi ; as, xj^ ' to cook,' fxR"^ * to wish to cook.'
Of i|Hj Pri ; V[Zy which takes ^, makes PirMP<SiiPri ^ he wishes to read.'
inr ^ to spread/ and "^ ^ to serve,' take both forms ; as^
Priril^Pri or PrirtPHNPrf, ftRrnrfrT or ftref^T^fiT.
/. Verbs having a medial ^, ^, "g-, "gr, when ^ is prefixed to
% optionally substitute the Guiia letter ; as, ^^ ' to please,'
^^px(t(Prt or 'ijClP«m Ph. There are a few exceptions ; as, ^
* to weep/ ^ivP<^MPri. When the final is ^ it is changed to T,
when ^ is not inserted ; so f^, ' to play/ makes f^H;5fif,
f^f^f^Brfif, or Pt^^Pm^Prt ^ he wishes to play.' A medial "^ or ^
is usually changed to ^ when ^ is inserted, but remains
unchanged when it is not ; as, "gir, ^ to dance,' makes either
PhhP54Ph or fVT.JrWPrt.
ff. Some verbs take the form of the desiderative, although
they have the meaning only of the simple verb ; as, ^"q ' to
blame/ ^Jjm^ ' he blames / f^ ^ to cure,' P^ofcrMPd ' he cures /
^Tf ' to investigate,' Hlnrnfi ; and a few others.
DERIVATIVE VERBS. 141
Frequentatives,
204. When repetition or intensity of the action or condi-
tion is signified, x[, technically called tt^, is added to the verb.
The nasal '^ intimates that it is to be conjugated in the
-^tmane-pada only. The root is doubled. Again, it is said
that the affix is rejected ; when tt is not inserted, although the
verb retains the reduplication. In that case the frequentative
form may, according to some authorities, be conjugated in
either voice, although others restrict it to the Parasmai-pada.
«. Verbs implying motion take the frequentative form in
the sense of tortuous motion, and some others in an ill sense
of the verb.
b. When conjugated with ir, the verb follows the model of
verbs of the first conjugation ; that is, it inserts ^ before the
terminations of the four conjugational tenses. When i^ has
been rejected, it follows that of verbs of the second conjuga-
tion, or is inflected without the intermediate vowel ^.
Frequentatives inserting i^.
205. In the reduplication initial consonants are repeated,
agreeably to general rules (p. ii8). A verb beginning with a
vowel repeats the whole, and makes the vowel of the primitive
syllable, if short, long ; as, ^r^ ^ to wander,^ ^dl<WH ^ he wan-
ders much.' A monosyllabic vowel is changed to its GuAa
representative in both syllables ; as, "^ ^ to go,' ^n:nS^ ^ he
goes often .^
a, A medial ^ or ^n is represented in the reduplicate
syllable by ^:[', as, xr^ ^to cook,' qm*i|^ ; f^T^ ^ to ask,^
m^lx^ri. If a root with a medial ^ ends in a nasal, the nasal
is repeated ; as, tth ^ to go,' »<^«|7l ^ he goes frequently,^ or
' crookedly.' Some follow different forms ; as, inr, ^ to be
born,' makes either ^T^R^ or MNI^ri -, and ^ ^ to kill,' »ffTiT^,
^^'>Mri, or ^^i(H. Some verbs insert a nasal in the redupli-
cate syllable ; as, w^ ' to speak,' «iy<^ri ^ he talks much.'
Some with a nasal in the primitive, retain it only in the redu-
14S VERBS.
plication ; as, ^ ^ to bite,' ^«S[^^ ^ he bites much :' and verbs
ending in xf, "FS, % insert a nasal optionally ; as, ^erc5 ^ to go/
^^^W or 'MMt-M^ ^ he goes crookedly' or ^ repeatedly 3' th??,
^ to bear fruit/ has only one form, xf jj^^. The verb '^er, * to
go/ also inserts a nasal, ^^^§ir. Some verbs, having a medial
^, require ^Ttfl" to be placed after the reduplicated consonant,
and if they have nasals, drop them ; as, "q^ * to go,' mlM^^ ;
or ^ * to fall,' i^rnl'ilW^.
b. The simple vowels i[, ^, T, "3?, '^, "^ final or medial, and
whether radical or derived from the changes to which a radical
vowel or diphthong is subject in this form, substitute the
GuAa letter in the reduplication ; as, f^ ^ to know,' TfTO^ ;
H * to be/ "^^t^ixi^. ^ ^ to give,' becoming ^1, makes ^^hl^ ;
and ^ ^to sing,' first changed to m, makes ift, and then
^7fhr?r. The vowel ^ is put after the Gufia substitute of ^ ;
as, "^?r ' to dance/ "^^m^.
c. The radical syllable is also subject to various modifica-
tions, affecting chiefly the vowels. A final ^rr, whether primi-
tive or substituted for a final diphthong, is changed to ^; as,
^ ^ to give/ ^^^. ^ and ^, when final, are made long ; and
if long, are unchanged ; as, f% * to gather/ ^^hl^ ; "^ * to coo,'
^'^oMi'^ or oRjbM^Ti. "^ preceded by a single consonant is changed
to ^ ; as, "^5 ^ to make,' becomes ^^hiiiri ^ he makes' or ' does
incessantly.' If the initial is a double consonant, the vowel is
changed to ^; as, ^, ' to remember/ makes ^rr^R^"^. When
medials, the radical vowels are for the most part unchanged.
d. Some verbs containing semivowels combined with con-
sonants change them, and the vowels following them, to their
analogous vowels : thus ^, ^ to cover/ becomes ^ ; as, ^«(lti^
'he hides repeatedly:' fsj, * to increase,' becomes zj, and
makes ^r)'9Nr) ' he increases constantly :' ^r^, ' to sleep,' be-
comes wq ; as, "Jfftxrar^ ' he sleeps frequently' or ' soundly :'
^tpT, * to make a noise,' becomes ftn^; as, ^Pm*^^ ' he makes a
great noise :' n, * to swallow/ becomes frr^, and again changes
^ to c5 ; as, ^Jf^q^ * he swallows voraciously/ In others, the
DERIVATIVE VERBS. 143
changes are arbitrary ; as, '^j Ho go/ changes its ^ to "^i :
and TRFJ, ' to bear fruit/ changes it to '3' ; as, i|i^i5^, if^^fi.
Frequentatives rejecting tt.
206. The rules regarding reduplication are generally the same
for this as for the preceding form of the frequentative verb.
a. The vowel of the reduplicate syllable is the Guna equi-
valent of that of the base ; or ^ for ^, ^ ; ^ for "g", "g; ; ^ for
^, '^. The vowel ^ or ^ may be optionally subjoined to ^;
thus "oR, ' to make/ in its reduplication becomes ^rrNi, ^ItoR,
or ^ ; "^, Ho go/ becomes w^ or ^rfbj. The final ^ of n
' to swallow/ and w ' to cross/ becomes ^srr ; as, WTT, ITTW. The
changes of medial vowels, and the rules affecting the insertion
or ejection of a nasal in the reduplicate syllable, are the same
as those of the preceding class of frequentatives.
b. As being inflected in the second conjugation, no vowel
is interposed between the terminations and the base : ^, ^ to
give,' therefore makes ^T^rfff, and tt^ ' to cook/ mqf^, in the
third pers. sing, present tense. Optionally, however, ^ may
be prefixed to terminations containing a mute xr, and begin-
ning with a consonant. Before the same terminations a final,
and if short, a medial vowel undergoes the usual Guna sub-
stitution ; and when "^ is inserted, the final combines with it,
according to the rules of Sandhi ; as, "Sfft ^ to sleep,' jj^ifrf or
^^I^IPri; and H ' to be/ ^WrfrT or -^W^flr.
c. Verbs ending in ^TT change the final to ^ before the
terminations of the conjugational tenses beginning with conso-
nants not having a mute t^; as, "^ Ho abandon,' in^t^:, ^ii^ln:;
but ^ ' to give,' and VT ^ to have,' before the same, drop their
final vowel, as ^Ti":, ^T^t. Before terminations containing xj
the change is optional, as iTT^rfw or WT^ffT, ^ being changed
to its Guna equivalent. Before vowels the final is dropped,
as, third pers. plur. irr^fir, ^T^[fiT; the nasal being rejected after
a reduplicate (r. i86). Before tt the final is optionally changed
to I5r, as wr^TTTl^ or ^n^XTTif , "»rr and ITT, change the final to \,
and are inflected like verbs ending with ^.
144
VERBS.
d. The changes of ^^ ^, "g*, "gi, ^, ^, when final, are analo-
gous to those to which they are subject in conjugational
inflexion. Before those terminations which reject x^ they
substitute the GuAa letters ij, 'sft, ^, which undergo the
usual changes before vowels. Before a termination beginning
with a vowel, and not containing a mute "t^, they are changed
according to the rules of Sandhi, or in some cases i^ ^ make
^1^, and "3" "31 become T5[, before such a vowel. Before similar
terminations beginning with consonants they are unchanged.
In like manner medial short vowels are changed to GuAa
vowels before the terminations rejecting "i^.
e. There are some special modifications, which will be
noticed in the paradigmas. We may now give the continua-
tion of >j^ in its derivative modifications.
Causal form of >T Ho be :' vrrf^ ' to cause to be.'
Present tense, ' I cause to be,^ &c.
Parasmai-pada. Atmane-pada.
>TT^TfiT ><n^r: NNiim:
\RJ^^f^ HHnvi: ht^^to
HRxrfir htt^tit: >TRTrfnr
m^ll^ HT^^ W^Xfd
HTTtrW iTT^ >TRW
First praeterite, '
'^f^iT^^f{^ ^WN^m ^WNAiiH
^WN^Ii ^WI<4^H ^nTRTTfT
^WN-Mrl^ ^WH-Hdf ^WTsnT"*^
I caused to be,' &c.
Second praeterite, ' I have caused to be,^ &c.
>4I4^I^<*^ >TT^RT^^^
Third praeterite, * I
^\^i\\H^ HT^m^raiT^ HT^xmgf^
had caused to be,^ &c.
^i^hr^^: ^a^fHr^^ ^Rtn^sEi
■^i^fbT^ ^ni^wf ^sNt^"^"^
DERIVATIVE VERBS.
145
First future, * I will cause to be/ &c.
HNf-Hriin?? ^NPilril^: HT^fTfTTFT:
HTTftnrrftr >Tt^fwrwt HT^ftnn^
m^ftnn HNfMriiu HRpMriK:
Second future, ' I shall or will cause to be,' &c.
^mPMtinrH hnP^uit^: ^TRf^TBnrT:
jTTTftrsrftr vrr^ftrHr^: HNriim'ii
HNP^mfri ^n^^PTBTrr: xNT^mrnt
Imperative, ' May I cause to be/ &c.
Potential, * May I cause to be/ &c.
>4|c(Hril
Benedictive or optative, ' I pray I may cause to be,' &c.
>TT^mT
HT^rren
HTarr^:
Conditional, ^ I shall cause to be, if,' &c.
^3i^mPi4U(iT ^w m p44 u{ I c| ^rHi^pMU4i*i
WTT'^f^: ^MT^XTHTrf 'SMT^fWrT
^MT^franT ^MNP^tt(ri( ^^WT^'^niT^
^MMPm^I^MI: ^JHNpM«)«iif -^HNP^^lMi^
^WNP^Iuirt ^MMPnuidf WHmPq«4'n
Desiderative form of >T^ Ho be :' ^iji^ ^ to wish to be.'
Present tense, ^ I wish to be,' &c.
Parasmai-pada. Atmane-pada.
TI?T^ TJ?T^- Ti"^*
Tf?^ Ti^» 11?^
^J?^ Tl?^- Tl?^
u
346
VERBS.
First praeterite, ' I wished to be/ &c.
Second praeterite, * I have wished to be/ &c.
or -^^cj:^ I o c^. t o cv e
w^T^^iR w5T^r^: ^iJ5T^:
Third praeterite, ' I had wished to be/ &c.
^a^nfi^^TT ''sr^^TfT^: ^rwHTtcm:
^ijT^: ^f^!^ ^^^
^>T5hr ^3rf>|f^* '^if^:
First future, ' I will wish to be/ &c.
■j^ffVrrrftR "^^rfwr^: ^j^rfwr^Rt
^^jPTrrrftf w^rfMriii^: '^Hfwrrr^
^^^m ^^rmiiS fHfT^rnr:
Second future, * I will or shall wish to be,' &c.
^^jfMmirH "^Hf^wr^: ^^jfronr:
g^rfTTorft? ^ijfMttCM: ^^Pmuivi
^^rMUifcT ^Hf^xqin W^fmuP'ri
Imperative, ' May I wish to be/ &c
Ti^rfVr ^pjm^ ^^tr
TI?I Tf?^* Tf?^
T3^
T^*
Potential, ^ I may wish to be/ &c.
Benedictive, * I pray I may wish to be/ &c.
-DERIVATIVE VERBS. 147
Conditional ^ I shall wish to be^ if/ &c.
^T^jjfTTST'^ ^sr^Hf^^TR w^^jfTTOTW
^rj^ff^w: ^swfq'Bnf ^r^^HfMuirt
^r|HfM«iH^ ^Tw^rMUirii ^r^^***M*^
^rwHTMmd ^^jf^uidf ^r^>|fM***nT
Frequentative form of >|^' to be/ with the affix xr^; ^fl^ *to
be repeatedly ;' conjugated in the i^tmane-pada only.
Present tense, ' I am repeatedly/ &c.
"^^ni^ '^hr^^ "^^^l^
First praeterite, ^ I was frequently/ &c.
'5R^t>T<crqT: ^N^>|wf W3ft>|jrs4
Second praeterite, ^ I have been frequently/ &c.
Third praeterite, ' I had been frequently/ &c.
First future, ' I will be frequently/ &c.
Second future, ' I will or shall be frequently,' &c.
-^V^^rrrn^ "^ijfq^ -^^iftroTs^
U 2,
148 VERBS.
Imperative, ^ May I be frequently/ &c.
■sflmi^ vsTlmlv^i «ri«i<^*^
^sft^^m "^^h^tTrf "^^ifwr
Potential, ^ I may be frequently/ &c.
■cfi*u|iiii: ofjHiim'qf '^t^r^
Benedictive, * I wish I may be frequently/ &c.
'^tJjfMMlM "^t^jftT^fW^ "^t^Tftr^Nrf^
Conditional, ^ I will be frequently, if,' &c.
^T^t^jftwrn ^R^>|ftr^^ ^«ri*^<4*ui4 (^)
^r^tiTfti'BTiT ^r^t^^ftrsTcrf ^R^fM^Mf*
Frequentative form of >|^Ho be/ after rejecting the affix "H^ in
the Parasmai-pada.
Present tense, * I am frequently/ &c.
•TlHcflrH or cflHirH ^^H^: Wt^t
^H'«nOsr or m^^TiPm ^ft^j^t «flHXf
■ofl^^lfri or ^iflfiT ^^^* ^iHclPri
First prseterite, ' I was frequently,' &c.
^?^ft>T^: or ^?^^: ^r^^t^Jif ^T^tHTT
^nftH^jtrf]^ or ^fsftVptr^ ^r^t^fTT ^sr^tHjt
Second praeterite, * I have been frequently/ &c.
^^H'Ni'^^ii: ^^m^si^^ •Nlnm^^cjiH &c.
or
^Hl< or "^t^ «jn*}n^^ or ^fl^jT^^* ^Ft^jf^ or «fl*4r^H
if|*^r4V4 «r)^^^: or ^Tt*JTg: ^tg^ or ^>|5
^^tm^ or ^^ ^^^^« or ^Tt^j^g: ^^: or 'ftHj:
DERIVATIVE VERBS. 149
Third praeterite, ' I had been frequently/ &c.
^nft>T^: or wtnh w^^^ ^R^^
^ET^W^ or 'H^TlHiri ) ^ . ^ ^
or
First future, ^ I will be frequently,' &c.
Second future, * I will or shall be frequently,' &c.
^H r«i m I Ph cfiHP^mici: ^Tciujih:
^Hpsmfy ^^t^rfrsT^: ^^Hfrnnr
^^^rf^Rrfif ^W^tqif: ^rtHf^^rf^
Imperative, ^ May 1 be frequently,' &c.
^^tH^ or ^W^ ^t^Jfff ^^
Potential, ' I may be frequently,^ &c.
Benedictive, ' I wish I may be frequently,' &c.
^^^JTTPff ^TtH^rra" Wt^TTPW
^^■^ttt: ^^t^j^rref ^^tHxrrer
^^tH^rn^; ^'tmrrerf ^Iwn^:
Conditional, ' I shall be frequently, if,' &c.
^T^t^rf^Hp^ ^ErrNf^ujc^ •»iJ«fiHr^u|iH
150 VERBS.
The conjugation of the frequentative form of the verb, after
rejecting IT^, in the ^tmane-pada, is not admitted by all gram-
mariansj and it is unnecessary therefore to exhibit it at length.
The following exemplification of it in the third person singular
of each tense will be sufficient.
Pres. "^^ij^, ist praet. w^t^, iid praet. "qW^T^, 3d praet.
^fR^hrf^, ist fut. "^Wfrnr, ;ad fut. ^^H^ u{^, imp. '^t^Jfrf, pot.
■«flH «i) ii) bened. ^tHfqMlg, cond. ^H^tHf^mri.
These derivative forms or moods may be used also in the
passive as well as in the active voice ; as, HT^ ^ it is caused
to be 5' "^^f^ ^he is desired to be;^ "^^J^ ^ he is to be
frequently.' They may also take other derivative forms ; as,
the causal of the passive, vrr^^ ' he is caused to be ;' the
desiderative of the causal, HTTfwffT 'he wishes to cause to
be :' or more than one desiderative may be combined ; as,
^vuir^MuHr ^ he causes the wish to occasion frequent exist-
ence.' These complex forms, and even the simple derivative
forms, seldom occur, except the causal. The desiderative
form is most frequently met with in the derivative nouns ; as,
Hd^l^l ' the wish to know ;' g^§ ' one who desires to die.'
The frequentative is rarely used.
Impersonals,
There is another specified form of a verb, which can
scarcely be considered as distinct — that of the impersonal — as
it is nothing else than the third person singular of each tense
of the passive form, either of the simple or derivative verb,
being used with a noun in the instrumental case ; as, >niw ^ it
is ;' wm >J5^ ^ it is by me,' i. e. I am ; "^ij^ ' it was ;' ^Pcfdl
*it will be;' f^J^ ^ it is desired to be;' ^^mm 'it is fre-
quently,' &c.
Nominals.
Nouns are also not unfrequently employed as verbs. In-
stances of this are not wanting in other languages, but not
DERIVATIVE VERBS. l5l
perhaps to a like extent. At the same time it is to be
remarked, that the verbal form of the noun occurs only in
specific inflexions, and that its conjugation in every pejson
and tense is only theoretically allowable. The most common
inflexion is that which is usually given in example of the
formation of such verbs, the third person singular of the pre-
sent tense, and it is that of the first conjugation. There is
no peculiarity in the mode of inflexion : the modification is
confined to the base, and is chiefly the insertion of cjrrRT, or
of "XT called technically isr^ or ^T^, between the noun and the
verbal terminations.
ofiTT^ is inserted before the terminations to imply desire;
as, (jcNchiH^Pd ' he wishes for a son ;^ ^^ojni^rfff ' he desires
heaven.'
IT is more extensively employed, and in most cases with
some modification of the vowel of the noun. The principal
changes are the substitution of ^rr for ^ ; ^ for ^ and ^ ; "38
for "g"; and tc^ for '^. A final "^ or ^ is usually rejected.
The senses expressed by these forms may mostly be resolved
into desire and imitative action : thus from xj^, ^ a son,' comes
ggfHrfiT, I. 'he wishes for a son;' 2. ' he treats as a son:*
CMI^Ph, I. 'he wishes for a king;' 2. 'he acts like a king:'
\jrft¥ftr ' he desires wealth ;' VHinfri ' he longs to acquire
wealth :' P^UJJ ' Vishnu ;' f^tonrfif fl"3nT ^ he treats the Brahman
as if he was Vishnu :' irnn^ ' a palace ;' m^^lMPri "^^f f^"^:
' the beggar acts or Lives in his hut as if he were in a palace :'
^^ ' a kite ;' ^^TRTfl' ^STSfi: ' the crow acts like a kite :' ^j{imi.><^
' a nymph ;' ^"^TT^ ' she acts like a nymph.' A final ^ is
sometimes retained ; as, "^^T^, ' fame,' makes either xr^TPTW or
AI^H^^W ofiTJ^: ' the vile man acts as if he were famous.'
In some cases ^ is prefixed to tt, implying desire ; as, "sfhc
' milk ;' ^li^^Pri ^TH: ' the child longs for milk :' ^ig ' a horse ;'
^T^r^fiT ^"^TT ' the mare longs for the horse.'
Sometimes the augment is dropped ; as, ' he acts like
Krishna' may be either ^Uii|i(ri or ^wrfcT ; 'he acts Hke a
15^ VERBS.
father' may be f«T^phTf^ or fqirrfiT; tr^t 'arrogant/ it^ or
^'^►Tru^ ' he acts arrogantly.'
The class of words called H^iiH^ takes t( in the i^tmane-
pada to imply becoming or acquiring that which the word
denotes ; they lengthen a final vowel before tt ; and optionally
adopt the Parasmai-pada, rejecting the augment ; as, >pT
'much/ 'many;' ^prRW, >J5rfiT, 'becomes much :' xrft^ 'learned;'
TTfefTT^, xrftlTfTfrr, ^ becomes learned/ &c. The class termed
Hir^rilH^ in a similar sense may take th in either Pada, or
reject it in the Parasmai-pada ; as, ^H^rilM^, cfin^ril^fri, or
cyrf^TrflT ' becomes red/ ' reddens.'
^r^ and other words are conjugated with xr, in the ^tmane-
pada only, to signify making ; as, ^|«<^i^^ ' he makes a noise.'
^r^ and others are so conjugated to signify feeling or experi-
encing / as, ^i«i|i4ri ' he enjoys happiness ;' oRST^ ' he suffers
pain.' The last also denotes, doing what will incur pain ; as,
"cirrn^ 5^» ' ^^^ wicked man commits what will bring him
pain,' i. e. sin. vir ' smoke,' "gr^rT ' heat/ "^rf ' froth,' TT^
steam,' are used exactly as in English : wtr^ ' it smokes ;'
T^nm ' it grows warm,' ' it heats / thHI^fl " it froths' or
' foams ;' ^TOITO^ ' it steams.'
tTTT^ ' reverence,' THT^ ' penance,' ^ft^ ' service,' do not
reject ^ before ^ ; as, riH^fri ^"^"5? ' he salutes the gods ;'
HM^Pri Trq: ' he performs penance / ^ft^^trfif ^ ' he serves
his Guru.'
A class of words called ohu^ i H^' is conjugated with tt in the
sense of doing or suffering what the noun implies ; as, oia!|
' scratching,' ohll^^fd or ch^j^JHW ' he scratches;' h^ ' sin/
»r|TjfTT or Tf(mT^ ' he sins ;' "3^ ' dawn,' "gr^^fiT ' it dawns ;'
iT^ ' worship,' iT^hr^ ' he is worshipped,' &c.
There is no apparent limit to this conversion of a noun
into a verb, but the pleasure of the writer, or the practice of
his predecessors. Little or no difficulty can arise from it,
however, as the context will sufficiently explain the meaning
of such a term, whenever it occurs in a sentence.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 153
The general construction of the Sanskrit verb having
been thus premised, we now proceed to offer paradigmas of
individual verbs which are of most frequent occurrence, with
such occasional remarks as they may seem to require ; arrang-
ing them under the conjugation to which they severally belong,
in alphabetical order. The person given is the third person
of each tense in the primitive, and of the present tense in the
derivative forms ; with an occasional notice of other persons
in the former, and other tenses in the latter. When there is
no sufficient authority for the derivatives they will be omitted.
SECTION VIII.
I. First Conjugation.
212. The modifications of the inflectional terminations in
this conjugation have been pointed out (rules i86, 187, 194,
195). Those of the inflective base arise out of the charac-
teristic insertion of ^ before the terminations beginning with
consonants, and its elongation before ^ and it. As it is de-
rived from the syllable ^t;^, which contains a mute t^, a medial
or final radical vowel is changed to its GuAa substitute, and
the latter is combined with ^ agreeably to the rules of
Sandhi ; that is, ^ and ^ become ij, which before a vowel is
changed to '^^J, t and "gi becomes ^, which is also changed
to ^^ before ^ ; "^ and "^ are changed to ^. Thus, as has
been seen, ^, ' to be,' makes HTrf^, ^3M^, &c. As further
exemplifications of the peculiarities of this- conjugation, the
following conjugational tenses of f«T ^ to conquer,' and ^V ^ to
increase,' are subjoined.
f»T ^ to conquer.' ^V * to increase.'
Present.
]
conquer, &c.
I increase,
&c.
^^iiffr
»!^
^VT^
F^IPT^
^nHir
snrr. inm
1JV%
1!^
F^
^fPTfw
3^-Mfit 'snTT'ir
»na
IJ^
1»V^
154
4
VERBS.
First praeterite.
I conquered, &c.
'ii»t*|IH
^^m -n^^^
*i(»<A(H
'il»i^4'^
^VfT
Imperative.
May I conquer.
&c.
]
^hiPh ^^I^
^mn
^nr w^nr
»rTfT
5[nm
^^■^ ^Mril
^nrj
vym
I increased, &c.
May I increase, &c.
Potential.
I may conquer, &c.
^I^ «T^ »r^
w^ ^irf w^J
I may increase, &c.
a. Of the remaining tenses of f^ it may be observed, that, as
a monosyllable ending in a short vowel, it does not take the
augment 3^ (rule 191, b). In the reduplication of the second
praeterite and of the desiderative it substitutes fn for f*r in the
radical syllable, thus :
2d praet. fiFTTir (ftFTj:, IV5:, f^T^ or ftpTftnr, f^tfrir^, &c.) ;
3d praet. -ei^iflfl (^T^FT &c.) ; ist fut. ^WT; 2d fut. viuifri ;
bened. *fhrn^; cond. ^»)tt|H^. Pass. pres. ^fhr^ ; 3d praet. ^nrrftr;
1st fut. l^frnn or "^ilAlril. Cans. pres. ^iM^fri; 3d praet.
Wiflipn^. Desid. "ftpft^. Freq. ^ijhj^, and %%% or ^^i^lPri.
Other verbs ending in ^ will be analogously conjugated.
b. ^v, as beginning with a diphthong prosodially long, is
conjugated in the second praeterite with the auxiliary verbs.
It takes the augment ^.
2d praet. TJVT^, ^Er*ng>|5, ^fVTRT^; 3d praet. ^fw; ist fut.
;^\lirr; 2d fut. idPimr) ; bened. ^fMt^; cond. ^fVarff. Pass.
Hjxrk. Caus. innrfk or -?!■. Desid. i^n^fuM^.
The most useful verbs of this conjugation are the following.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 155
^ra (^f^) * to mark/
The ^ which is added to the verb in the Hst of roots is
indicatory, and denotes the insertion of a nasal before the final
consonant in all the inflexions (p. 105).
Pres. '^Tf^; ist praet. 'HlfH; 3d praet. ^iiMJi; 3d praet.
^srrflj^; 1st fut. ^ffTTT; 2d fut. '^rffj^; imp. ^ffcTf; pot.
'3r%!T ; bened. 'iif^fMlK ; cond. ^TPfuiri. Pass. ^W^. Cans.
'SfqfrT or -tI". Desid. ^f^f^R^.
W^ (^^rcj^) ' to pervade.'
The indicatory ^ shews the insertion of ^ before the non-
conjugational tenses to be optional (p. 106). The cr of "Sf is
rejected before a rf and t;, with which the sibilant combines,
and they become cerebrals after "^.
Pres. ^^^; ist praet. VNiHJct^; 2d praet. ^IHH| (-^UmPhjvj or
thmh) ; 3d praet. ^T^|^, ^rrftpf, ^rf^:, or ^T^fhr, ^rr^f, ^^tt^: ;
1st fut. ^pHiril or ^l^; 2d fut. -^ife^urfrf or ^T^rfl!; imp. ^T^;
pot. ^^1^; bened. »!ia^li|^; cond. ^Klf^jmrt^ or ^T^Tc^. Pass.
W^^. Caus. ^HHj^Pri ; 3d praet. ^rrf%^. Desid. ^iiP^PtijMPff.
This is also a verb of the fifth conjugation, q. v.
^rsT ' to go.'
This verb is defective in the non-conjugational tenses, and
its place is supphed by ^ before the terminations beginning
with a vowel or with ir, and optionally before the rest ; when
^ does not, and ^nr does, take the augment ^.
Pres. ^»iPH ; ist praet. »MMr^; 2d praet. r<^m (P^^t|:, f^^,
fW^, f^^ or -mPiT'if, f¥^ or ^niPdM, M^H or ^jiiP^h) ;
3d praet. ^rl^ or ^n*fhf ; ist fut. WT or ^ifsnrr; 2d fut. ^mPd
or 'iiPiimPri ; imp. ^SHT^; pot. ^liin; bened. "qrhm^; cond. ^n^uji^
or ^rrftnm^. Pass. ^hr^. Caus. ^i^i^Pd. Desid. ^kP^P^^mPh or
f^^Wff. Freq. ^*i^.
^Z * to go.'
This and the next are examples of a verb regular throughout.
Pres. ^S[zfif ; ist praet. '^TTrf ; 2d praet. ^TZ ; 3d praet. ^ffT^;
X 2
156 VERBS.
1st fut. ^fdjfT ; 2d fut. ^dmfd ; imp. "^fZ^; pot. "^f^; bened.
^R5m^; cond. >5{ir^m>t;. Pass. "^i^. Caus. ^l^qftf or -7^.
Desid. ^rf^f^:^. Freq. (but meaning ^ to go crookedly') ^diwd,
^rrf^ or "STRlffT.
^ ^ to be fit' or ' worthy.'
Pres. ^"fir; ist praet. ^nfl^; 2d praet. '3TH| ; 3d praet.
^rr^i^; ist fut. ^firr; 2d fut. ^ff'Hrfrr; imp. ^^; pot.
^'7l(;; cond. "^nff^- Pass. ^i^. Caus. ^^^Pri or -^. Desid.
wf^ff'qflT. Freq. ^5rf#^.
1^ ' to go.'
In the conjugational tenses ^ is changed to the GuAa
element Ji, which becomes ^ni before the vowel 'sr. It does
not take i^ except in the 2d praet., and becomes ^ before a
vowel termination, and ij before a consonant. Its derivative
forms are those of the same root conjugated as a verb of the
second conjugation, in which it is most usually inflected.
Pres. ^nrftr; 1st praet. "^rnn^; 2d praet. ^xmT (^^t, tj:,
-^vfjT^ or ^^, ^% tftnr); 3d praet. $^; ist fut. ^nfT;
2d fut. limPd ; imp. ^snrj ; pot. ^rt^; bened. ^^rn^; cond,
^ ' to see.'
Pres. 1;^^; ist praet. ^-^pr; 2d praet. ^^fTg?nt; 3d praet.
^fvjjK ; ist fut. ^f^pr ; 2d fut. ^ft^Hi^ ; imp. ^vjfHl ; pot. ^^;
bened. t%^ ; cond. ^ft^jHTri, Pass. f;^. Caus. I^HlMPd.
Desid. ^P^pHj^^.
^x| ^to envy.'
Pres. ^T^ ; ist praet. $^; 2d praet. ^^i^^ij. ; 3d praet.
^^; 1st fut. ^^in; 2d fut. ^tqfrr; imp. ^^ ; pot.
t^; bened. ti^Tri;; cond. ^^Tinr. Pass. f;^. Caus. j^i^<<Pri ;
3d praet. ^fi^^ or ^^i^. Desid. ^^P^MPrf or ^PulfMMPri.
^ ' to sound.'
Pres. ^3nr?^ (laiL-^); 1st praet. >iiNH; 2d praet. "3!^ ("^rf^);
FIRST CONJUGATION. 157
3d praet. ^^ ; ist fut. ^fhn; 2cl fut. ^ft^; imp. ^ST^mf; pot.
^f^; bened. ^fWt^ ; cond. WSTif. Pass. "gjil^. Caus. ^Rl^^iw.
Desid. 'grfwi'. Freq. ^r|5^.
So other verbs ending in ^ ; as^ ^ ^ to sound ;' ^ ^ to go ;'
g ' to jump/ &c.
T^ ' to go.'
Pres. ^ft^rffT; ist praet. '^^; 3d praet. ^NW ("^s^,
T^3^^) ; 3d praet. ^^^h^; ist fut. ^Jlfisirii; 2d fut. 'innymPH;
imp. ^iWj; pot. ^ft^; bened. gfioMir^; cond. "^^r^. Pass.
>j^^. Caus. ^^Tifk. Desid. ^ftf%f^^^.
"gn^ ^ to reason.'
Pres. "3!^; ist praet. >iit^H ; 2d praet. vJi^M^; 3d praet.
■4!n^y ; ist fut. "grf^irr, 2d fut. *n^uj"S ; imp. '*^HI ; pot. "3!^;
bened. "grf^^; cond. ^H^uih. Pass. "^r^^. Caus. ^^i(^.
Desid. ^hHiir^M'i^.
With a preposition it takes both Padas ; as, ^nj^fff or ^PT^
^ he assembles.'
■^ ^ to go/ ' to gain.'
This substitutes ^^ before the conjugational tenses. Its
other changes are to the GuAa or Vriddhi substitutes required
by rules previously stated.
Pres. "^^aefw; ist praet. ^^n^T^; 2d praet. '^TTt (^nfor, ^rrft^,
^nfbr) ; 3d praet. "^rNf?^ {mil) ; ist fut. ^rtr ; 2d fut. ^ri.mrri ;
imp. '=^'051^ ; pot. "^^nr ; bened. ^i^li^ ; cond. '^srrftrHn^. Pass.
^?x^. Caus. ^r^irfiT. Desid. ^srftJWff. Freq. ^su^ri^ and ^rtf^,
^rfbrff, ^rt^dfiT or ^rfbrfirt^.
With ^ it takes the iitmane-pada, if used intransitively ;
as, ^^53^ ' it collects.'
"^af ^ to be straight' or ^ honest/ ^ to gain,' ^ to go/ ' to live.'
Pres. ^r^; ist praet. ^STT^; 2d praet. ^T^; 3d praet.
^if^g ; 1st fut. ^r^ril ; 2d fut. ^nSuj^ ; imp. ^^Hl ; pot.
^53TWcT ; bened. -erf^MlK ; cond. THlP^mri. Pass. ^i^d. Caus.
^^qfiT ; 3d praet. 'anHS'lff. Desid. ^Tf^*R^. Freq. ^r^Tr?^.
158 VERBS.
^i^ ' to be dry' or ^ arid.'
Pres. wt^rfir ; ist praet. ^^; 2d praet. ^hifT^RiR; 3d praet.
'^^i^; ist fut. ^frfWT; 2d fut. wVT^iqfw; imp. ^Tt^; pot.
^ft^; bened. ^^ft^iTTr^; cond. ^stftsimi^. Pass. ^f^w^. Caus.
^fh!nrfiT ; 3d praet. ^h1P^ji^t|^. Desid. ^^V-^faMPri.
^ * to desire.'
This verb by special rule becomes WW^ in the conjugational
tenses, and optionally so in the non-conjugational.
Pres. dkiH^k ; ist praet. 'sr^fimxnr ; 2d praet. 'g^ or ^rffrt^R^I ;
3d praet. '^NhfiJnr or ^r^^CTlT; ist fut. ohmrMril or 4rHHI; 2d fut.
<*IHr^«M^ or ohHHui^ ; imp. wwmn ; pot. -ajimw ; bened. cMnrMMl^
or c|rf?T"Efl¥ ; cond. ^sr^rnrfxrHTiT or ^ToRfN^Hnr. Pass. cFmf^ ; 3d praet.
^SehlfH. Caus. "SfimrrfK. Desid. f^^cj,^*^^n^^.
f^ ' to cure.'
In this sense the verb is conjugated in the desiderative
form only.
Pres. r^rohrMfrt ; ist praet. ^^rNfsfiWT^; 2d praet. r^fchf^l^chK;
3d praet. ^rf^f^Fl^; ist fut. -Nf^fifknn; 2d fut. fqf^rfw^fir;
imp. r^r*rt{j ; pot. f^r<*fSri^ ; bened. f^f^Ju^m^ ; cond. ^f%-
^ Ho be able.'
The Anubandha "gj renders the insertion of ^ optional
(p. 106) ; the radical vowel is changed throughout to oj, which
becomes ^Hc^, the GuAa substitute of oj, where that substitu-
tion is required. As belonging to the class ^Wlf^, it may be
conjugated in the third praeterite in the Parasmai-pada also.
This verb may likewise be conjugated in both voices in the
two future and the conditional tenses.
Pres. <*<^^ ; ist praet. ^^ch^d ; 2d praet. ^r^ (^aPm^ or
^^) ; 3d praet. W^TT^ and ■sHchr<:Mg or ^njgff ; ist fut. "^TH
or oHn^rtl ( cfc^d^^iTii) or ^KJ^ffir!^, and ^fi^7nf5ff or ^fi1%nnilT) ;
2nd fut. oh<d^|44d or ^^Thj^, and ch^jt^f-Mfd or <*rgMmrri ; imp.
olKd^Hl* ; pot. "SR^^; bened. "Sfif^T^ or ^^^ ; cond. ^^^(^Tr
FIRST CONJUGATION. 159
or »n<*r<4jiqrt, and ^oR^t^ or Wofif^Toni^. Pass. ^an^. Caus.
^i^nrftr. Desid. r^qhfglUM^ or f%^^.
^gw ^ to go/ ' to walk.'
This verb, under different circumstances, may be conjugated
in either voice. In the Parasmai-pada it makes the radical
vowel long in the conjugational tenses, and prefixes ^ to the
terminations of the rest. Not so in the Atmane-pada. In
the conjugational tenses it is also optionally conjugated in the
fourth or the first class. The vowel is short in the causal, as
the verb ends in ?t.
Pres. -^ihPh or -^iw^frf, -^mk or "^3^; ist praet. ^-rhlHif; or
W^JTHHTj W^RTiT or ■»H'*«^1T ; 2d praet. M^\H, 'sp^ ; 3d praet.
^T^ppftl^, ^TW ; ist fut. ^r*j-Hr, "^mn ; 2d fut. "^rfTrarfrT, '^Tt ;
imp. "^HT^ or ^|W|H, -^Hrlf or "^i^qiff ; pot. "^iT^ or -^iwir^, "^F^
or "^ff^TT ; bened. ^^jHTTr^, W^ ; cond. ^r^ifHn^, ^T^^qiT. Pass.
'^snjjt. Caus. -gpnrfiT; 3d praet. ^rf^Rjrn^. Desid. P«|'^^^H^^H.
Freq. ^^brtw, ^^fPRtfifT or ^^^rf^.
^ ' to cry.'
This does not take ^ except in the second praeterite. The
third praeterite is formed with the terminations of the first. A
final palatal sibilant, not followed by a vowel or % is changed
to '^; and "^ before ^ becomes "^, which with the following
sibilant forms "SJ ; see rule 27.
Pres. ^^\rA ; ist praet. ^^HRt^; 2d praet. ^-*)^J (^|^t%^,
-jslt^lrf:, "f^f^) ; 3d praet. "^T^i^j^; ist fut. -^m ; 2d fut.
^VJ^fff ; imp. ^^iri ; pot. -^l^c^; bened. ^^Tn^; cond. ^r^t^T^.
Pass. '^^. Caus. -^t^Rfw ; 3d praet. ^'5:5ri^. Desid. -m^kiTh.
Freq. "^^xr^, -J^ntiii^firri, ^'^^fF.
"SSPj^^ to bear' or ' be patient.'
The final H becomes ^ in conjunction with the ^ or H of a
termination, and is changed to ttj by virtue of the preceding "Cf .
It becomes Anuswara before any other consonant : see rules
14, 18—22, &c.
160 VERBS.
Pres. '^HTt ; ist praet. ^\^ha ; 2d praet. ^^fS^ (^nB^fW^ or
^q^, ^qr^s^ or ^^, ^«fe|rH^^ or ^r^Tlsrt, ^VifpHH^ or ^^^hI) ;
3d praet. ^re|f?7¥ or W^H ; ist fut. '^fkin or -^m; 2d fut.
^pHm'i^^ ^^^; imp. -^wm; pot. -^^i bened. "^^ or
-ct^ ; cond. xMHjPHmri or ^sr^t^JTW. Pass. ^IM^. Caus. ^^^^1\ ;
3d praet. ^^P^ti^Hri. Desid. pMHirHMf^ or PMHJ^^. Freq. ^l^i^TW,
and ^vjjhIPh or ^^"fir.
"ft^ ^ to waste.^
It takes ^ only in the second praeterite : ^ is substituted
for the radical vowel before a vowel termination not requiring
Guna or Vriddhi.
Pres. Hl^Pfl ; ist praet. ^SHj^il^; 2d praet. "Nr^ (P"MP«|i|rj:,
f-ctHiP^iMj or P^^m, fq^^rfq^) ; 3d praet. ^^T^^; ist fut. "^th ;
2d fut. %HrfiT; imp. W^i pot. "S^^; bened. "C^fhrnr; cond.
^T^onr. Pass. -^N^. Caus. "SfT^nrfw or -w. Desid. f^ia^f^.
Freq. ^^jhnl', %«i(^Pri or ^^Pd.
'^ ' to waste' or * decay.'
Verbs ending in ^ adapt their final to the ^ of the conju-
gational tenses, agreeably to the laws of Sandhi ; that is, they
change it to ^TRT. Before the terminations of the non-conju-
gational tenses they change the final to ^tt. Verbs ending in
^rr change the final to ^ in the first and third persons singular
of the second praeterite of the Parasmai-pada, and reject it before
the terminations of the same tense in either Pada beginning
with a vowel, and before the augment ^. In the benedictive
they change WT to Tf ; optionally if beginning with a conjunct
consonant.
Pres. "S^TUfff ; ist praet. ^TC^T^; 2d praet. ^^^ (^^% -^^1%
or ^^^, ^^^, ^ftgR, ^^^) ; 3d praet. ^H|l^1f^; ist fut. T^mr ;
2d fiit. "sp^fw ; imp. H|Nri ; pot. Hjl^i^^; bened. Hfl^lrl^ or
^^If^; cond. ^HH^f^. Pass. Hjfl<4^. Caus. H|qi|PiT. Desid.
ft<H|!MpH. Freq. %^fhT^.
So % ^ to sound,' ^ ' to sing,' %* to be weary,' ^ ' to cleanse,'
"5^ ' to meditate,' "^ ^ to sound,' ^ ^ to melt,' % ' to decay,' and
FIRST CONJUGATION. 161
others ; as "^rnrfif, ^^, cfinrr ; jinPh, wft, ttttt ; wnrfw> ^^,
xirnrr. % has but one form in the benedictive, ^rnrn^.
^iT ' to dig/
This takes both Padas. The penultimate is rejected before
the terminations of the second praeterite, not having a mute
% except that of the second person plural, and becomes
optionally long, with rejection of «^ before xr*
Pres. wrfw or -T( ; ist praet. ^^^, W^r^TiT; sd praet. 'srijfH
(^•^^:, ^^^g:), "^^ ; 3d praet. ^si^Tlhr, -^mf^ ; ist fut. wT^m ;
2d fut. ^rf^T^rfw or -^; imp. K^^, ^im; pot. ;^%i^, wkif;
bened. ^»^ir^ or WUTftr^, ^^T^t^; cond. ^^r^fH^, ^^li^fHmrt.
Pass. i^'iiA or 4sllM^. Cans. IsJUnPrf ; 3d praet. ^^lijfHft^. Desid.
r^^^rHMpH or -^. Freq. ^^^^tT or ^K^i^i^, and ^i^HlPri or
iT^'togo/
This verb substitutes tv^ in the conjugational tenses. It
takes ^ only in the second praeterite and second future. In
the former the penultimate is rejected, as in the last example.
The indicatory oj denotes the inflexion of the third praeterite
with the terminations of the first.
Pres. iiTjdlPd ; ist praet. ^nT^[7^; 2,d praet. 1{JU^ (WT^l? Tfip^
or »fJ|PHVj, ^Ph^); 3d praet. ^RHT^; ist fut. Tpjn; 2d fut.
ilPHmPri; imp. TIW^; pot. TT^i^; bened. 1TiTT»^; cond. »3|/|pHU|i(^.
Pass. Tir^k. Cans. JiH^Pd; 3d praet. ^nftirm^. Desid. frfJiPHMPif.
Freq. ^^Hj^, if^-HlPd or wwf^.
With certain prepositions this verb may be conjugated in
the iitmane-pada, as ^^tsI^. In this Pada the nasal of the
verb is optionally rejected before the terminations of the third
praeterite and benedictive tenses, as wm, ^to go together,'
making WUVtf or ^mrrer, WV^ or «i|Vl«. It is inflected also
in the Atmane-pada of the causal, when compounded with ^rr
to signify delay ; ^|J|H^I<< TrTTr^ ' wait a little :' with ^ in the
Parasmai-pada it means ^ to come ;' ^TWFT^ ' come hither.'
Y
162 VERBS.
TTT^ * to agitate.'
The changes of the final before a consonant are those of
Sandhi (rule 32), and in some cases require the aspiration of
the initial, as in declension (rule 131, b): ^ being changed to
the aspirate ^, a following ir or "^r is changed (rule 186) also to
If; that again becomes also ^, and the first ^ is rejected. The
sibilant of ^ WW is rejected between two consonants not
being nasals or semivowels, and the IT and "q are permuted to
^ as before : ^ is optionally inserted.
Pres. m^; ist praet. ^5|J||^ri ; 2d praet. ^PTT^ (»rMI^ or
»rTTf^, M^l^ or iTTrf^J^ -|^) ; 3d praet. WTT3" (^ilMIVijIdf, ^mTST:,
wmssi, ^4111 r«ij) or ^^JnP^g (^RTf^mm &c.); ist fut. JTrar or
^llP^Hl; 2d fut. mvw^ or Jiif^mH; imp. JU'^Hf; pot. m^;
bened. iii8|l» or inff^; cond. ■^mviMri or ^JuH^md. Pass.
nv^. Caus. m^^k. Desid. ^JiiP^Mri. Freq. WHTT^^.
g^ * to protect.'
This verb with a few others, as fV^ ' to go/ and trrii and
XPT * to praise,' inserts ^(V\ before the terminations of the
conjugational tenses, and optionally before those of the rest.
It takes ^ optionally.
Pres. jflm^jPfi ; ist praet. ^jflMl^ri^; 3d praet. jflm^NK or
1^*^ (fT'I*' ffrfxnr, or fjfVqnzr) ; 3d praet. ^nf^rnrf^, wMl^,
or ^snft^fh^; ist fut. Jilmi^rii, ifrftnTT, TXtsu; 2d fut. iflmPM^iPff,
JnPMmffT, 'fmrHPri ; imp. iftqi^j; pot. Tflxn^T^; bened. 7fmiu(n|^;
gam^; cond. ^jriMiP^mi^, 'snftftr^, ^^r^fh:^. Pass. grq^.
Caus. jftui^j^Pff or iftxnrfw; 3d praet. ^lijiriMNit^ or ^r5[g^.
Desid. gnimPMMpH, fg«^, ^^nPMMPd. Freq. ^1jjm^.
7p( * to blame.'
This takes the desiderative form (see f^)> but is in other
respects regular.
Pres. fg^; ist praet. ^ jJjmri ; 2d praet. fgwng^; 3d
praet. ^i^JJPmy ; ist fut. ^^ijPmdl; 2d fut. ^JJPmm>^ ; imp.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 163
fijmril; pot. ^Jj'iiri ; bened. ^Jjrmiflg , cond. ^^JjfmiMH. ,
Pass, jiji^ri. Desid. ^J|r»*mrt.
7^ * to take.'
When ^ is not inserted, the changes of the final are those
specified under xrr^. This is also a verb of the ninth conjugation.
Pres. irtTi" ; ist praet. ^n^rt ; 2d praet. Wjt ('T'jff^ or
arj%); 3d praet. '^nrrffF or ^r^re^TT; ist fut. Trffin or irtt;
3d fut. irft^ or rji^ ; imp. irfirf ; pot. ir^ff; bened. irff^
or TJ^^ ; cond. HiTJif^mH or ^MVtSri. Pass. r^. Cans, 'l^ilfrt.
Desid. fanrff^ or fw^W^* Freq. ip^Nj^, 'HO'l^TTrt or aiO'lf^.
xr^ ' to eat.'
In the second praeterite, before the vowel terminations, this
verb rejects its radical vowel, and xr in composition with ^
necessarily becomes or, which with the sibilant makes "BJ".
Before a termination beginning with ^, the final is changed
to w. The verb is imperfect, and wants the third praeterite
and benedictive in the active voice, and all the tenses except
the two futures and conditional in the passive.
Pres. xnrfiT; ist praet. ^nmTr; 2d praet. mm\h (^TE^:, »r^:) ;
ist fut. Jim; 2d fut. TlwrfiT; imp. xmf; pot. xmii;; bened.
Tr^trnr; cond. SMili^^it^. Pass, ist fut. xren; 2d fut. XTr^;
cond. ^Mr^jri.
W * to smell.'
This in the conjugational tenses has for its base ftnr. In
the other tenses it is unchanged. It is one of the verbs
which optionally attach to the final the afl&xes of the first
praeterite in the third.
Pres. rHuPri ; ist praet. '^rftTTn^; 2d praet. if^ ; 3d praet.
^nrrw or iHiiifflf^ (^iiihi, winwf, ^:, or ^Enrr^:, &c.) ; ist fut.
irnn ; 2d fut. mwfir ; imp. fwsrif ; pot. f»r&i^ ; bened. iinii^
or ^xm^; cond. ^sniT^m^. Pass. XTTq?^. Cans, irnnrffr ; 3d praet.
^HifUMft^ or ^rftrftRfi;. Desid. nHHI^fd. Freq. i^lll^rt, and %^
or %xnftfw.
Y 2
164 VERBS.
^m ' to eat.'
As a verb having a short ^ between two consonants, of
which the former is repeated without change in the reduplica-
tion, it substitutes ij for the radical vowel, and is not doubled
before the terminations of the second praeterite, which begin
with a vowel except that of the second plural.
Pres. -ciHTri ; ist praet. ^T^HTT; 2d praet. ^^mn (^^t, ^g:,
^^iTT^r, &c.) ; 3d praet. ^r^rfti^; ist fut. ^fNin ; 2,d fut.
Mfnuifw; imp. ^qJTg; pot. ^^; bened. ^wrn^; cond. ^T^rfiraTrl^.
Pass. ^qr^j^. Cans. xjih^Ph. Desid. -cj^rHMfrt. Freq. ^^^mr^.
With ^rr prefixed, in the sense of sipping water, it lengthens
the radical vowel, ^TRFTfir.
^qrt ' to go.*
As ending in ^, the radical vowel is made long in the third
praeterite : rule 190, L See p. 1^4.
Pres. ^qrfff ; ist praet. ^r^RT^; 2d praet. ^q^rt (^t:^:) ; 3d
praet. '^T^T^; ist fut. ^fcffl ; 2d fut. ^ri^uifd ; imp. ^^tj; pot.
'^fb^; bened.^qr^TT^; cond. ^^r^ircni;^. Pass. '^w. Caus. ^kaiPh
Desid. P^-cjn.Mrri. Freq. ^^^3^5 ^^fri or ^^^.
It is conjugated in the Xtmane-pada, preceded hj Tif with
a transitive import ; V^^^tc^ ^ he goes beyond or transgresses
duty :' and by ^ with a noun in the instrumental case ;
f^ #^W ' he travels with a chariot.*
^sgfw^: ' to drop* or ' sprinkle.'
The indicatory ^ denotes the optional inflexion of the third
praeterite with the affixes of the first preceded by '^.
Pres. x^^riPfi ; ist praet. '^rnftin^; 3d praet. ^xijlrt (^[^jftfrn?,
^^girg:, ^pgf^^) ; 3d praet. '^T^gin^ or ^T^xfhfti^; ist fut. x^^Prfdl;
ad fut. xiflPriuiPri; imp. ^iftiTf; pot. TiftTh^; bened. "^gwTr^; cond.
^T^zftfirsn^. Pass. ^Jiq^. Caus. T^fld^Pri or -^ ; 3d praet. ^^T^^gWi^
or ^M-jx<4rict^. Desid. -gx^PriMPri or -jx^flPriMPrf* Freq. '^Hgm^ or
Vi^^rilPri, M>*iriPr(.
So "sgffqc in the same senses. The reduplication is as m
the second praeterite, ^Wtlf.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 165
»PT ' to yawn.'
This verb prefixes rf to the final, whenever that is followed
b^ a vowel. In the frequentative the nasal is confined to the
reduplication. «t before any consonant except a semivowel or
a nasal becomes Anuswara, which before i? is changed to it.
Pres. "3n*»^; ist praet. ^np^TTT; 2d praet. »nr^; 3d praet.
^gnrfTH^; ist fut. 9ir*HHl; 3d fut. ^ffrH^; imp. »iMdl; pot.
"5T»TiT ; bened. 5ffwTi(l8 ; cond. ^ii^if^Hmri. Pass. ifw!^. Caus.
^♦HUfri. Desid. n»i'ir*'HM^. Freq. »fw«l^^ ^i^HlPn, ^i^iPm.
,fk ^ to live.*
Pres. ^eiPri ; ist praet. wwNt^; 2d praet. ftnfl^; 3d praet.
^nfN^; ist fut. iftfVfTT; 2d fut. ^fir^mfrt ; imp. *fl^; pot.
ift^; bened. iftgn^; cond. ^infifVon^. Pass. "sfNr^. Caus.
^fMfiT; 3d praet. ^MP^'^'^ft^ or ^nfH^Rii;. Desid. f^nfHWw.
Freq. ^ifN^.
So ^^qf ^ to spit,' and TfNr or tft^ Uo be fat/ &c.
Wf^T ^ to yawn.'
This verb inserts a nasal by virtue of the indicatory ^. In
the frequentative, ^ is substituted for the vowel.
Pres. iTwr^; 2d praet. "sr^p^; ist fut. »jP**{ril. Caus. ^wnrfir.
Desid. ^iijPMMri. Freq. ^n5t^«r^, ^O'J^^IPd.
ijt: ^ to have fever.'
Pres. ^rcfw; ist praet. ^sjifTj^;; ^d praet. iiirTt; 3d praet.
^:»jlOri^; ist fut. ijPui; 2d fut. ^Pc«MPd ; imp. ^ft^ ; pot.
,5^; bened. ^fj^lrf^; cond. ^^P^^mit^. Pass. i^r^. Caus.
T^rrfw; 3d praet. ^rfiHi^. Desid. Pd^Pi^MPd. Freq. in53^^
WT5|T^or ^rnjft.
r^, ^ to hasten,' takes the iitmane-pada : it is else similarly
conjugated.
% ' to go.'
Pres. ^^; ist praet. *^<fichri ; 2d praet. t:^; 3d praet.
^<glP<*« ; ist fut. ^^ftfifrTT; 2d fut. d\^<mA ; imp. ^^; pot.
166 VERBS.
;8T^; bened. ^f^R^; cond. vM<g1r<*mri. Pass. ^?RW. Caus.
^c^nPri. Desid. ^<nr<*M^. Freq. J^^TFT.
WT * to bow.'
This verb takes !^ only in the second and third praeterites,
and prefixes ^ to the latter ; in which, tr ' to refrain/ and t]R
* to sport/ agree with it.'
Pres. "ifirfw; ist praet. ^PTHl^; 3d praet. HHIH (^^^ hPhvi
or ^R^, %i^) ; 3d praet. ^snW^ (^snT^gf, ^Rftr^:) ; ist fut.
^ST^fTT ; 2d fut. if^fjT ; imp. "^"j ; pot. tt^i^ ; bened. r|«|it(^;
cond. ^nfen^. Pass. H«|^. Caus. HH^fd or "Tnnrfw. Desid.
ffifi^rri. Freq. "5RT?rff, nHHlPri or Tfrrf^.
# (^) ' to lead.'
The ^ intimates its being conjugated in both voices.
Pres. H^fd or -^ ; ist praet. ^BRXTi^, ^H^d ; 2d praet. f^RT^
(fiRfinT or fiT%^, f^T^:), f^ (rnf-ilM) ; 3d praet. ^5?%^
(^»^), ^T^ (-HHmdl); ist fut. ^; 2d fiit. ^uifd or-^;
imp. .TiT^, •T^rrrf ; pot. "JT^, "^T^ ; bened. nl^Id^, %^ ; cond.
^T^^ or -xqiT. Pass. '^t^. Caus. Hiiinfd or -^. Desid.
CwWlMfd or -^. Freq. %^fhr^, HH^Ofd or ^^iT.
xift is used in the ^tmane-pada in the sense of preceding or
worshipping, as "Jni^ * he leads' or ' precedes,' ' he worships ;'
also after different prepositions, as Tif , ^^^rl ^ he leads up' or
* raises ;' "Ttr, ^MH^ri ' he gives' or ^ pays' or ^ averts :' but if it
is transitively used, it is regular, P^H^Pfl ; also if it concerns
part of the body, as in^ f^Tfirfw ' he averts or turns away the
cheek.'
ftrf^ ^ to blame.'
Pres. r^r^Pd ; ist praet. ^siPh^c^; 2d praet. PiiPHr<^; 3d praet.
^Ff5Tn(^ ('ilP^f^KJ) ; ist fut. PHP><df ; 2d fut. P^Pn^mPd ; imp.
"ftn^; pot. "ftr^; bened. f^r^m^; cond. ^rfVri^^^. Pass.
fVnr^. Caus. r>i»<<JPd. Desid. PHP^Pn^MPd. Freq. f^rf^T^.
So may other verbs ending in 5, with an indicatory ^, as
FIRST CONJUGATION. "167
^, ■^, ^ to call ;' %f^ ' to be moist ;' ^ * to be happy/
&c.
i f(fr5r ^ to endure/
The verb in this sense is conjugated in the desiderative
form : in the sense of ^ sharpen' it is a regular verb of the
tenth conjugation.
Pres. rriPriHI^; ^st praet. wfifrfiT^ffT; 2d prset. firfiT^fT^;
3d praet. ^rfirfrPE^f^; istfut. ffrfrrft^; 2d fut. ffTfirft^wS'; imp.
rriPriHIHf; pot. fn fff^ "rf ; bened. frfffTf^T^; cond. ^rrirrif^mrf.
"ff ^ to cross over.'
The verb substitutes the Guna syllable ^ in the conjuga-
tional tenses, and changes ^ to ??: in the second praeterite,
except in the first and third persons singular. The augment
^ may be made long every where except in the third praeterite
of the Parasmai-pada ; and it may be omitted in that tense,
as well as in the benedictive of the Atmane-pada. When ^ is
not inserted, "^ is changed to ^. In some senses the verb is
conjugated in both voices.
Pres. irrfff or -i(; ist praet. ^r?nj^, ^riM ; 2d praet. intxt
(^:, ^fbr, ik, irwrn or ina), ft; 3d praet. ^sriiOf^ (^nnficsf) —
Atmane-pada ^nftt, '^nrfe or ^tiO^ ; ist fut. irftlfT or riOdl ;
2d fut. -rrftarfff -W or iT^Nfw -W ; imp. iniW, Trcnf ; pot. Tlbt^,
Ifbr; bened. TfWn^, Kftj^ or hOmIs or riW^; cond. ^nrtrw^-'anT
or 4<riOu{fl^ -WfT. Pass. iftx^. Cans. TTRTTfir. Desid. rririri.Mrri,
rririOHrri or rriifi^Pri. Freq. "aSmX imrdflf or ITTrrft.
aqif * to abandon.'
The root does not take ^; and before a hard consonant the
soft final palatal is changed, agreeably to rule 7, c?, to ^.
Pres. TlwfiT; ist praet. ^snqin^; ad praet. imr^ (WHHTj:,
rnirf^ or im^) ; 3d praet. ^nm^ ('^IWTW, ^t<jiva:) ; ist fut.
mw^; 2d fut. l^n^rfw; imp. WiTf ; pot. "RT^i^; bened. iq^crTT^;
cond. ^TiiT^n^. Pass. ?T5?r^. Caus. KIN^lfd. Desid. fffl^reffir.
Freq. riltM^ii^, iTTiinftfiT or inwf^.
168 VERBS.
^ ^ to give.'
This is an exception to rule i88, k^ not substituting ^ for
the vowel in the second praeterite.
Pres. ^; ist praet. "^I^^; :^d praet. ^ (^^^, ^f^^) ;
3d praet. '^I^f^; ist fut. ^f^ffT ; ^d fut. ^ff^uiri ; imp. ^^;
pot. ^^ ; bened. ^^^ ; cond. »n<^n^mrt. Pass. ^?r^. Cans.
f^I^nPri or -^. Desid. 1^^^^. Freq. c^^^ri, and ^T^^Hw or
^ ^ to have' or ^ hold.'
Pres. ^>J^; ist praet. "^>nT ; 2d praet. ^ (^>n^^ ^^^) 5 3^
praet. '^r^fw; ist fut. ^virr; 2d fut. ^fv^; imp. ^VcTT; pot.
^^ ; bened. ^^fvMly ; cond. -^Hf^rnmii. Pass. ^^n^. Cans.
^T>rqfiT or -W. Desid. f^f^ftrq^. Freq. ^T^iiq^, ^T^^ftfiT or ^T^.
^ ^ to bite.'
This verb drops its nasal in the conjugational tenses ; also
before any termination beginning with it, and in the radical
syllable of the frequentative. The final ^ before a consonant
becomes ^y and "R before a sibilant becomes cR (rule 27).
Pres. ^^; ist praet. W^^; 2d praet. ^^ (^^f^ or
1^) ; 3d praet. ^I^t85ftf^ (^m) ; ist fut. ^ ; 2d fut. ^^rfw ;
imp. ^^; pot. ^^; bened. ^fmiT; cond. 'Hr(vi*jT^. Pass.
^^. Cans. ({^mPri. Desid. f^-Sfflf. Freq. ^^^ or ^^^ftfw
or ^^.
;^15 * to burn.'
The changes of the final before a sibilant, and the concur-
rent change of the initial, are like those of ttt^ ; p. 62. Before
a dental the substitute of ^ is tt ; w or ^ after an aspirate
become V; and if as the initial of a compound is changed
to TT.
Pres. ^^ ; ist praet. ^T^^ ; 2d praet. ^^T^ (^^j ^fV^ or
^^prv) ; 3d praet. ^^rvTsfhr (^r^rnn) ; ist fut. ^nn ; 2d fut.
V^^ffw ; imp. ^^ ; pot. ^^^; bened. ^^\\\ cond. ^nr^n^.
Pass. ^?r^. Cans. ^T^Trftr or ^. Desid. f^T^. Freq. ^T^^,
r^^^frt or ^T^fHy.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 169
^(^ Uogive.'
^ is also a verb of the second and third conjugation, and
in order to distinguish it from them, an indicatory ttt^ is added
to it in the first. This verb substitutes tt^ in the conjuga-
tional tenses. In the third praeterite it takes the terminations
of the first, and substitutes ^ for "m in the benedictive ; in
which some other verbs ending in W[, either as a primitive or
as substituted for a diphthong, concur : see "% and TTT.
Pres. M^Ca ; ist praet. ^nr^SfT; 2d praet. ^ (^f^ or ^^9
;^w:) ; 3d praet. ^H^\i{ ; ist fut. ^TfTT; 2d fut. ^TWfff ; imp.
TT^jf ; pot. ^ratlT ; bened. ^TTTrT ; cond. ^I^T^qiT . Pass. c(h(^.
Cans. ^in^Pri. Desid. f^wf^. Freq. ^^hrff, ^T^lfir or ^T^.
With ^T or ^q prefixed in the sense of receiving, and with
^BP^ or ^1^ and T( in its own of giving, it takes the Atmane-
pada ; as, ^rnrssw ^ he takes ;' ^snr^ or ^hnrsar^ * he gives.'
I ' to run.*
Pres. ^^ ; ist praet. -Hf^^A^; 2d praet. 5^ (ggc(H;, d^Pclvi
or 5^)j 3d praet. ^?^T^, ^^Mlif^; ist fut. ^ttH; 2d fut.
ffimPrt; imp. ^^; pot. ^^; bened. ^^TiT; cond. >H(^1«4H^.
Pass. i|Tm. Cans. ^T^Trf?r. Desid. rf^MPif. Freq. ({t<^ri, ^t^eflfri
or (^'^^flPrt.
?^ (jf^) ' to see.'
This is another verb of the first conjugation inflected by a
substitution, as it takes tf^T^ before the conjugational tenses.
Before the terminations of the other tenses beginning with any
consonant except it, ^ is changed to t. The changes of the
sibilant are as usual. ^ indicates two forms of the third
praeterite (p. 106).
Pres. TT^^ifw ; ist praet. ^M^i^ri^; 2d praet. ^^ (t^^^rj:, ^^f^
or ^^); 3d praet. xSr^^lff or ^r^T^TT; ist fut. "^ft; 2d fut.
i\4*iPH; imp. M^HH ; pot. "«T^^; bened. irmff; cond. ■gr^^^nr.
Pass. ^^TT^. Cans. (^ ji^^Pri ; 3d praet. ^MtO^^I't, or ^<<jiH.
Desid. Pf^^Hi'^. Freq. c^Pi^^^jd or t^Pc^^ilPn or ^|ff .
170 VERBS.
With ^ prefixed in an intransitive sense it takes the
Atmane-pada ; fiui^ij'!) ' he contemplates/
^ (^) ^ to protect/
The "^ denotes its being restricted to the i^tmane-pada. In
the conjugational tenses it is regularly inflected^ ^ becoming
^TT before ^. In the second praeterite it substitutes f^fn for
the reduphcate ; and in the third, ^ for the final ; after which
the ^ of ^ and WT^ is rejected. In the rest it is conjugated
like verbs in ^.
Pres. ^^; ist praet. ^r^^iH ; 2d praet. f^ (f^^^, f^fru^);
3d praet. ^^rf^ (^rf^^Tiff, ^rf^W, ^rf^:, ^P^fif) ; ist fut. ^TiTTj
2d fut. ^T^q^; iil^p. ^xnrf; pot. ^^; bened. ^nftF; cond.
HSi^l^ri. Pass, ^hut. Cans. t^m^Pri. Desid. f^[f^. Freq.
^ ' to shine.'
This gives name to a class of verbs, ^rrf^, of which the
third praeterite takes two forms ; one being that of the first
praeterite of the Parasmai-pada, without change of the radical
vowel ; the other being regular. There are in all twenty-two
verbs of this class.
'3fm to be able. ^^ 1 x
« ^ >■ to resist.
■^ to agitate. <g7 J
ws to exchange. ^ to be.
7!]M to hurt. Y^ to grow.
TO to hurt. 5W to be beautiful.
m to shine. ^m to break wind.
*^ I to fall down. ft^ to be white.
>nr ) V^ to sweat.
ft^ to be unctuous. ^ly*^ to drop.
^^ to shine. W to trust in.
^ to resist. #^ to fall down.
Several of these will be found in their places.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 171
Pres. ygrtwk ; ist praet. ^reftcnr ; 2d praet. f^^ ; 3d prset.
'Sj^TflT or ^tflfria ; ist fut. iTirHHI ; 2d fut. ^flfriui'ii ; imp.
^Vcn; pot. }stktf; bened. tftfw^; cond. ^iTlPHMH. Pass.
^jcck. Caus. ifhnrfw. Desid. O^^fdHri or H^tflfriM'S. Freq.
"^^i^lri, ^^Tfftfw or ^>f%.
'^ ' to run.'
This is one of the few exceptions to the insertion of ^ in
the second praeterite : rule 188, s,
Pres. "5Tfcr; ist praet. iH^^H^; 2d praet. j^fR (j5^*5 ^T^) 5
3d praet. ^rpr^ ; ist fut. "^fhrr; 2d fut. ^ImPd ; imp. "5^;
pot. ^5^; bened. "^TTTrT ; cond. "^T^fNTT. Pass. "5^. Caus.
^pRxrfir; 3d praet. ^I^^T^ or ^pH^^ri. Desid. F^nrfTT* Freq.
^r^TUiy il^^CA or ^^^ti.
So "5 Ho be firm.'
^ ' to drink.'
Before the conjugational tenses ^ becomes ^n^; before the
rest it is inflected Hke a verb in "m ; but it has three forms in
the third praeterite : see ^ ' to give,' ^ * to protect/ &c.
Pres. vrrfir; ist praet. '^nnTfT; 2d praet. ^ (^Vfft, ^^fv^) ;
3d praet. ^^i<*nf (^<^virif, ^T^v^), or ^nniT (^snmrf, ^i), or
'snmftri; (^mPHgl^ ^nnftr^:) ; ist fut. vtwt; 2d fut. >nwf»f ;
imp. "^Tff; pot. >l^; bened. wn^; cond. ^wiwd^. Pass.
>fN^. Caus. vnnrfw or ^ ; 3d praet. ^sr^hyxn^ or -TTiT. Desid.
fVFfffTT. Freq. ^vHt^, ^IMPd or ^TVrffT.
>ft^ ^ to be quick,' ^ to gaUop.'
The ^ in every case becomes ^.
Pres. >ftT:fw ; ist praet. whCff; 2d praet. ^Vtc; 3d praet.
^nf^^Tf ; ist fut. vflPui ; 2d fut. \fl PcmPn ; imp. vttj; pot.
>ffc^; bened. ^ftx^TrT; cond. ^TM^Pi^mH. Pass, vt^tt^. Caus.
Vhrxrfw; 3d praet. vSJmI^H. Desid. ^vtft^. Freq. JVT^,
^^OPh or ^>ftf^.
un ' to blow/ as fire or an instriunent.
This verb substitutes vi^ before the conjugational augment.
z 2
172 VERBS.
Pres. V5Tfw; ist praet. ^mniT; 3d praet. ^i^; 3d prset.
^urt^Itt; ist fut. wmn ; 2d fut. liii^frf ; imp. viht ; pot. xiki(;
bened. x^irrff or i»nm»|;; cond. waTTOTfT. Pass. im^. Caus.
miM^rri. Desid. f^UTTO^. Freq. ^nftn^, ^n^fk or ^T»rrfw.
tp^ ' to cook.^
A final palatal, as ^ or 5T, becomes "s^, when not followed
by any other letter, and before a termination beginning with any
consonant except a semivowel or a nasal, and combines with it
according to the rules of Sandhi. The vowel is changed to ^
in the persons of the second praeterite not having an indicatory
T^. In the third praeterite the ^ preceding ^ &c. is rejected,
and the radical vowel is made long in the Parasmai-pada only.
The verb takes both Padas.
Pres. xr^fff -^; ist praet. '^fHT^, SHM^ri ; 2d pra^t. TfXfT^,
^ ; 3d praet. wma^lrt; {w^, ^^T"^:)^ ^^7^ (^mmTTf, ^R-sp) ;
1st fut. T^raJT ; 2d fut. xr^fiT -w ; imp. "g^^ -rrf ; pot. tj^ -it ;
bened. XT^im^, t|1^ ; cond. ^PT^n^ -W. Pass. tr^. Caus.
•qM^Pri -w; 3d praet. ^^nflTT^l^. Desid. fxTTWflT -^. Freq.
iniT^, xinHtffr or Tmrf^.
iTrr (tTct) ^ to go.'
The indicatory oS denotes the inflexion of the third praeterite
with the terminations of the first, and before them xf is pre-
fixed to the radical final. In the desiderative the vowel may
be changed to ^ ; and in the frequentative, rft is added to the
reduphcate syllable.
Pres. xnrfiT; ist praet. ^rqin^; 2d praet. xnrnr ; 3d praet.
^KMVirt^; ist fut. "qfFin; 2d fut. TTfrT^qfTT ; imp. fTfTj; pot. "qwr^;;
bened. xnmT^; cond. ^nrfcntn^. Pass. tn?iw. Caus. tmnrfrT.
Desid, fqqrdMPd or fWfir. Freq. Tr»ftxrWW, MrflMrilfff or Mvflqf^.
This verb substitutes fxf^ before the conjugational '^; in
the other tenses it agrees with other verbs in ^.
Pres. fT|^f?r; 1st praet. ^ftr^; 2d praet. xnft; 3d praet.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 173
^?xrn^; 1st fut. vjjn; ^d fut. m^Pd ; imp. "ftr^; pot. "ftj^;
bened. ^Wi{; cond. ^!<M[^ri. Pass. x[twk. Caus. mn^fri -^.
Desid. r^Mi^fri. Freq. ^tfhm, ^T^ or Miqirri.
TjT, ^ to preserve,' is a verb of the second conjugation, q. v.
(yh) ^UTift ' to grow.'
In the third person singular of the third praeterite this verb
optionally substitutes ^ for ^.
Pres. UTRW ; ist praet. ^TOTRIT ; 2d praet. fxr^ (frrN^) ;
3d praet. ^nmftr or ^^ujiP^^ ; ist fut. "crrfwr; ^d fut. xqrfirsm ;
imp. "CTRirf ; pot. \n\kd ; bened. mPimly ; cond. xsmPi^mrf.
Pass. mim>. Caus. "omniw.
Tfi^Tt ^ to approach.'
As this verb changes its tr to tr in the reduplication of the
second praeterite, it should not substitute i^ for ^ (r. i88, ^) ;
it does so optionally by special rule.
Pres. MHllPri ; ist praet. '^nWr^; ijd praet. MMjim (mMIj: or
T^:, mhP^m or iJiPmvj, &c.) ; 3d praet. '^rusrfhi; or wqjRIlhT ;
ist fut. MiPmril ; 2d fut. MiPilimPlT ; imp. iPT^ ; pot. "Hi^; bened.
ihiuiift^; cond. ^iftPillu{f|^. Pass. TRini^. Caus. iwlli^Pd. Desid.
PMMiPiyqPri. Freq. "qiRTniW, tfiwulPrt or xhuftp.
155J ' to bear fruit.'
This differs from the preceding only in the change of ^ to
^ in the second praeterite being absolute, and the vowel being
long only, in the third praeterite, as the verb ends in TJ. In
the frequentative the radical vowel is changed to T.
Pres. xjic^fw ; ist praet. 'SHRcJl^; 2d praet. qihici (^^:) ;
3d praet. -^^Milc^lri ; ist fut. ihPc«5ril ; 2d fut. ififc^ujPri ; imp. tRc^jw ;
pot. "qr^TT; bened. ih^ IH ; cond. ^ni!%anT. Pass. iF^tnr. Caus.
iRTcyqfTf. Desid. PmhPc5qPri. Freq. xi^^, ^^c^ or xf^tc^.
-^V * to despise ;' ' to bind.'
This takes the frequentative form.
174 VERBS.
Pres. -^tm^; ist praet. ^snfhTf^nr; iid praet. -^r^i^^^; 3d
praet. ^eNHrfw?; ist fut. ^PrMHl ; 2d fut. ^fi^mw ; imp.
"^H rH ri f ; pot. cfiHrUH ; bened. ojl^rrM^S ; cond. ^^hrfw^EtnT.
Pass. ^hrww. Caus. ^rH^4rf.
^V, or with ^, ^fv^ ^ to know.^
There is some difference as to whether these are distinct
roots or not. With ^ there are two forms in the third
praeterite (see p. J 06) ; without it, only one. The causal of
^V also is restricted to the Parasmai-pada. There is another
verb ^5 ^ to know/ of the fourth conjugation, which also
substitutes ^ for the third person singular of the third prae-
terite in the ^tmane-pada. They are both inflected hke other
verbs with a medial "g", except in the desiderative, which does
not insert ^, and changes the radical consonant to VT.
Pres. cTIviPh -W ; ist praet. ^sN^VT^- ir ; 2d praet. J^, ^^ ;
3d praet. (of -^v) ^Rhfh^, (of ^fvx:) ^TwNtw or ^^^, W^tf^ ;
ist fut. "^Ttfwr; 2d fut. -^^fWlT -W; imp. -^t^, ^VrTT; pot.
'^^l^ -IT ; bened. 'g^zmr, ^^fVj^t? ; cond. ^RVftron^ -TT. Pass,
-areq^. Caus. ■^"hnrfiT or (ff^) W^Rfw -K. Desid. f^jwf^.
Freq. ^^ujrf, -oftg\|l fri, ^'^Ife.
>J5^ * to nourish.'
It takes both Padas. Before a tt, ^ becomes ft. or iQ". In
the third praeterite, i^tmane-pada, the ^ of ^ is rejected afler
a short vowel. In the desiderative, "g* is optionally substituted
for the radical vowel, being preceded by a labial.
Pres. Hi:fiT-"ff; ist praet. ^WTIT -IT; 2d praet. "^^tr ("^TWT:,
^nrt, '^^), -q^; 3d praet. '^RT^, ^OfiT (^SOf^Trrf) ; ist fut.
^rtr ; 2d fut. ^rftwfw -^ ; imp. httt -in ; pot. Wb^ -w ; bened.
fOTTcT, >J^ ; cond. ^wfbqT^ -TT. Pass. iWff. Caus. vritTrfiT ;
3d praet. '^N^HTjT . Desid. f^^fcMpff -w or ^f^jtfcT -W. Freq.
"^^jftxiW, "^^^f^, ^TiH r^ or "q^M^.
Y^^ ^ to hold,' and ^^ ' to take,* are similarly inflected.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 170
HT ' to wander' or ' whirl.'
This verb optionally takes the form of the fourth con-
jugation.
Pres. Hirfw, Hi^rfrT; ist praet. ^WRT^, ^JWr^; 2d praet. "wm^
(^tTj) ; 3d praet. ^wftl^; ist fut. ^jfkwi ; 2d fut. ^jfHtMfd ; imp.
>jiTW, ^sHRT^; pot. H^7|^, HT^; bened. >j«iif|^; cond. ^wPHUlit^.
Pass. >JTir^. Caus. H^nrfrT; 3d praet. ^rfV>jRl^. Desid. f^rHHPri.
Freq. -^^jT^rff, wftfir or wf^.
^7^ ' to churn.^
The nasal is rejected before a ij.
Pres. JT^rftr; ist praet. ^nr^; 2d praet. »m^ (HHPrViiq) ;
3d praet. ^HRF^; ist fut. irfV^nn; 2d fut. ^d^^^rfrT; imp.
iT?^; pot. »r^; bened. Hitqicl^; cond. ^mf^^nqi^. Pass.
?Tn^. Caus. Hr^q^^Pri -W. Desid. pHHP^vmPd. Freq. HTR^,
HIHr^qlPiT or m^ff^.
iracT ^ to bind.'
There is nothing peculiar in the simple inflexion of this
verb. Before a ij the final is optionally rejected ; and in the
frequentative form, which rejects xr, its conjunct final may be
rejected altogether before a termination beginning with a con-
sonant not a nasal, and having an indicatory i^; whilst before
any other consonant ^T is rejected, and ^ changed to "gr, which
then substitutes the Vriddhi element ^.
Pres. w^^fir ; 3d praet. '^RT^ftTj;; ist fut. HP^ril ; bened. ^Wt{
or iT^nm^. Pass. ?T^ or TT'tq^. Desid. HTTf^T^fw.
Frequentative, present tense.
*<ih^Ph or HiHi Ph hih1«^: hphj?:
m^NtfT^ or HmPH H\Him h\h\^
HIH^Pri or HIHPri m^in HIH*<<Pri
These modifications are rather curious than useful, as the
verb is of unfrequent occurrence.
»TT5T * to investigate.'
This verb takes the form of the desiderative, ^fhrf?^.
176 VERBS.
Pres. pfhrrow ; ist praet. shhIhI^H ; 2d praet. ift*iwr^ ;
3d prset. whIhIPh^ ; 1st fut. jfhrfiwr; 2d fut. Hlnir^^^; imp.
iflHJ^ril ; pot. »OHli?T; bened. ?frRff%f^ ; cond. %H*f)Hiftr^Tfr.
Pass. *flHl^ri. Caus. hIhi^^H.
^ (%t) ' to barter.'
The final diphthong becomes ^m before vowels, and ^
before consonants : it is changed to ^ in the desiderative.
Pres. w^; ist praet. ^TfRTfT; 2d praet. ^; 3d praet. WTTFT;
ist fut. ittht; 2d fut. iTPEEm; imp. ^nnrf; pot. jikn; bened.
HlfOg ; cond. ^WTWrT. Pass. »ft^. Caus. m^^k. Desid.
fin^. Freq. »l>fl^>, HH^^frf, m^ or Hmifri'.
^ * to remember.'
This substitutes ir^ in the conjugational tenses.
Pres. HTfir; ist praet. ^HRl^; 2d praet. it^; 3d praet.
w^nfh^; ist fut. ^nn; 2d fut. mi^Th; imp. ittj ; pot. irtt;
bened. ^mi^ or %imT; cond. W^T^l^. Pass, yi^rf. Caus.
tilM^jfri ; 3d praet. ^rfir^m^. Desid. f^^i^fri. Freq. HltilH^,
HiyiPrf or in^fir.
H«T ^ to worship.'
^ is substituted for the semivowel before the terminations of
the second praeterite, except in the singular of the Parasmai-
pada, where it is the letter of redupHcation. It is substituted
for XT before t^. xrsT is one of those verbs which change ^ to
TR before w and "^, and to oU before a sibilant, analogously to
their derivatives when nouns (see Declension, rules 92, 93).
Pres. Tnrfw -h; ist praet. ^RiTlt, -if; 2d praet. ^iTR (i^h
^TlfrR or -^Tcw, ff^), ^% ; 3d praet. ^ni"«^rl, ^3ni¥ (^HT'S^f) ;
1st fut. irer; 2d fut. "q^rfw -w; imp. inrf -erf; pot. ^i^ -w;
bened. ^^tTTT^, '^r^; cond. ^snraRT^ -w. Pass. ^3?T?r; ist praet.
ia*|H. Caus. ^N^fd -^ ; 3d praet. ^snihiWf^. Desid. fVnTBffir -B.
Freq. ^i^s^irl^ Tmif?.
mr * to make effort.'
This is in every respect regular.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 177
Pres. THTW ; ist praet. ^snnnr ; 2d praet. ^ ; 3d praet. ^snrffT^ ;
ist fut. irfinrr; 2d fut. MPriui'Il ; imp. xrrnrf; pot. xr^; bened.
^?T^ ; cond. ^.Hi^rrimri. Pass. imk. Caus. illri^Pri -^ ; 3d praet.
^^nOxiH?^. Desid. fil^fdMW. Freq. irrqmw^ ^NrilPri or T(TTJ[f^.
"5JII7 ^ to restrain.'
This substitutes "S^ for its final before the terminations of
the conjugational tenses. Although it does not take ^ in the
futures^ it does in the second and third praeterites.
Pres. M^^A ; ist praet. ^ir^; 2d praet. m\\H (^fk^ or
woi^) ; 3d praet. 4(4^1 ft; (^nriwf) ; ist fut. ttcTT ; 2d fut. Tc^jfH ;
imp. "JTSTJ; pot. "iriil^; bened. ^w^M^; cond. "^7?^7r. Pass,
"qi^^. Caus. mn^fri or "q^nrfif. Desid. ftphrfir. Freq. 4^4«j^^
"if'jnOf^ or xNftr.
'^^ is conjugated in the i^tmane-pada when preceded by ^TT
in an intransitive sense ; as, ^in^ri IT^ ^ the tree spreads :'
by "gTT in the sense of marrying ; tjir: ^1ril*JMTOcT ' Rama mar-
ried Sita :' also by ^TT or "^"^ or TW, signifying to heap together
for one's own use ; "^t^"?^ ^'ii-crflri ' he heaps up the rice.'
T^ ^ to colour.'
This drops its nasal whenever ^ is inserted before the
terminations and before ^. Before consonants W becomes oR.
Pres. t^rfff -^ ; ist praet. ^TtSTri; -W ; 2d praet. TXI»T (ti^
or Ttftnr, ^^^0' ^ ' 3^ P^^t- '^n^^fT (^^), '^rti? (m«|irii) ;
ist fut. t^; 2d fut. t^rfcT -^ ; imp. t5TW -Iff; pot. i^ -w ;
bened. TSSTTl^, t^F ; cond. ^at^n^ -IT. Pass. t5^w. Caus.
tsRfw or TM^fif^ Desid. fef^RflT -W. Freq. TK55^, TRsfH^.
T?T ^ to commence.'
This verb is invariably conjugated with the preposition "^.
The final is changed before a consonant, agreeably to the laws
of Sandhi. Before a vowel, except in the conjugational tenses
and second praeterite, "tT is inserted, which becomes Anuswara,
and then again »^ before vf, as in the causal. In the desiderative,
^ is substituted for the vowel, and the root is not repeated*
A a
178 VERBS.
Pres. ^rCH^; ist praet. ^rrOTTT; 2,d pragt. ^TT^ (wft*n^,
wfn^) ; 3d praet. ^^rrcw (^HK^lldl) ; ist fut. 'snt^lT; 2d fut.
^rnTs^W ; imp. ^rn^^Tin ; pot. ^mOT ; bened. vsimfly ; cond.
^K»W7T. Pass. ^TRWTff. Caus. ^KJ^nfri ; 3d praet. '^mjwn^.
Desid. ^iTj^mri. Freq. '^TTOTw?^, WTOXMHlf, ^TTT^cfk.
With exception of prefixing "m, c5H ^ to gain' is similarly-
inflected. Pres. ■?5¥ra' ; 2d praet. '^; 3d praet. Wc53r; 2d fut.
ciTi^^. Caus. crPH^rfir. Desid. fH^, &c.
T?T ' to sport.^
It is conjugated analogously to other verbs ending with IT.
Pres. T?7^; 1st praet. xMlJHd; 2d praet. T^ ; 3d praet. TOFT;
ist fut. T??rT ; 2d fut. t^ ; imp. THTTT ; pot. T^; bened. t^;
cond. ^STOTlf. Pass. T«?^. Caus. T!»nrfiT; 3d prset. ^O^JHi^^.
Desid. ftr^. Freq. tcrirff, TT^ftfiT or tcfnT.
fror^ ' to rest/ makes frorfw ; but when it means ^ to lead
a married life/ f^Tjrfir or f^TH^.
^ ^ to grow' or ' ascend.'
For the changes to which a final ^ is subject, see iTT^
(p. 162). In the causal the verb optionally substitutes x|
for If.
Pres, CI^Ph ; ist prset. WTh^; 2d praet. "^^ (i>^^g*^
^nCIP^vj) ; 3d praet. ^I^^ ('K^Hfcri) ; ist fut. d^ ; 2d fut.
^&^"fiT; imp. Cl^H ; pot, Cl^r\, ; bened. ^?rnT; cond. ^Cl«<<7^.
Pass. ^J^;?!^. Caus. O^^nt or ^flTRfw ; 3d praet. »H^^^H^ or
^r^^T^;. Desid. l^-^^fw. Freq. O^^ri, d^'^lfri or ttdf^.
<5fN ( TJ^) ' to see.'
Pres. ci\M^ ; ist praet, ^Tcft^iT; 2d praet. <^cfl^ ; ^d praet.
^oflP^g ; ist fut. c5Vf%rn ; 2d fut. c^tPM^r^ ; imp. cfNirf ;
pot. TJ^W; bened. rTlP-^tflg ; cond. ^rFftf^THTrT. Pass. cjV^.
Caus. HHirfw. Desid. <j<J1PMHri. Freq. cjftojt^, ?ytc7NtfrT or
"^V^, ' to see/ is similarly inflected.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 179
"^^ ' to speak.'
This and the following substitute ^ for the semivowel in the
second praeterite and before xr.
Pres. "^^ ; ist prset. ^^^T^^; ad praet. T^ ("3!^:, "^^f^,
"35^, T^ or -m^, -Sif^^) ; 3d prset. W^T^ti^ ; ist fut. ^f^;
2nd fut. ^ff^uifri ; imp. "^w ; pot. "q^?^ ; bened. T?m^; cond.
^srqf^xTr^. Pass. "3^^. Cans. m^Alfri ; 3d praet. ^Rt^i^.
Desid. r^Mn^Mfri. Freq. 'qiWff, ^T^*^ or ^T^rf^.
It is sometimes inflected in the i^tmane-pada, especially-
after certain prepositions, and in particular applications ; as,
W^^ ^to repeat/ ^^^^ ; ^^r^ ^ to reproach (oneself)/
^>4^<ri ; f^ ^ to dispute,' U^f(^ ; weqr^ ' to repeat together,'
^tf ^ to weave,'
Pres. T«Tfrr-^; ist praet. ^r^tn^-rr; 2d praet. -gr^T^ (t^f^
or T^fg^, "^nrw:), "gi^; 3d praet. ^m»4lr(^, ^rtt; ist fut. ^m;
ad fut. Tcwfrf -^ ; imp. "^^ -irf ; pot. "^^ -w ; bened. Tom^,
^Hfi^ ; cond. ^^«^,|^ -ir. Pass. T'oi^. Cans, cjiq^^rri -tI". Desid.
r^N^rH -^. Freq. m^uj^, ^TT^xftftr or ^T^ff.
-g^ ' to dwell.'
IT is substituted for the final before a sibilant immediately
following it, and not conjoined with w.
Pres. "^HfrT; ist praet. ^sr^l^; 2d praet. T^m ("^^ftni or
"^^^, -gnr^:) ; 3d praet. ^^s^rrotT^ (-ii^irCi, ^ttt^:) ; 1st fut. -^mj;
2d fut. "^j^rffT; imp. '^W^; pot. '^^; bened. "rBTn^; cond.
^cjt^H. Pass. THTW. Cans. <:<(f<4jrri -^. Desid. f^'^wfw. Freq.
^T?^^, mM^lfri, ^nHw.
^ ^ to bear.'
The changes of ^ before a following consonant are those
already noticed (see ttt^ &c.) ; but whenever ^ is changed to
^, this verb substitutes ^ for its vowel.
Pres. "g^fff-^; ist praet. ^T^^ -W; 2d praet. T^T? ("^i^:,
T^f^ or W^ra"), "^il ; 3d praet. ^s^iiHiIri^ {^mt^, 'SRT^:) ^rrr^ ;
imp. -^^ -in ; pot. ^^^ -TT ; bened. "^^HT^, ^'^ ; cond.
A a 2
180 VERBS.
^STTOTiT -If. Pass. "^^; ist praet, 4l^d ; 3d praet. ^Rlf^.
Caus. Nl^^Pri -^. Desid. fw^ -^. Freq. "^m^, ^rftfe.
Preceded by Tf or trfic. the verb is conjugated in the Parasmai-
pada only ; as, l^^^fri, xrfa^fri.
Y«S ^ to accept.'
Pres. tI^ ; ist praet. "^"^^tt ; 2d praet. "^^ ; 3d praet.
^a^f%; 1st fut. "^f^jn; 2d fut. '^Irarff; imp. ^wf; pot.
^iFrT ; bened. '^Hiifly ; cond. ^sr^fwiT. Pass. "^'^. Caus.
^^rf?T ; 3d praet. ^^r^^^if^ or w^t^^. Desid. f^'^r^Mri. Freq.
^0<i4M^, ^fft^i, ^d^t or ^rtf#, ^t^mr, ^ft^fTT or ^^[^^^
(see rule 206, a).
^ ^ to be.'
This is peculiar in optionally inflecting the second future
and conditional in the Parasmai-pada, and rejecting the aug-
ment ^ before their terminations and those of the desiderative.
As one of the class ^ITtI^, it has two forms in the third
praeterite: see p. 169.
Pres. "tI^; ist praet. ^^'^ri^; 2d praet. "^ff (^r^, ^fk^) ;
3d praet. "^T^lTTir or ^Rf#F ; ist fut. cjP^rti ; 2d fut. "^fw^w or
"^liSfif ; imp. "^tTrf ; pot. "^^ ; bened. "^ff^tF ; cond. w^ffTinf
or -S'JftMri;. Pass. -^FHt. Caus. -^tiifw. Desid. r^'^P^Mri or
fq^wfrr. Freq. ^(^\f^^, ^T^cftfir or ^toft, or ^^^ifHlf, &c.
as in the last.
^ (^ ) ' to weave.'
The final becomes ^btt before the consonants of the non-
conjugational tenses. In the second praeterite there are two
forms ; in one the reduplicated root is "^ before the termina-
tions rejecting iT, and "gjxr or "35^ before the rest; in the other
the substitute is ^r^, and ^ being changed to ^rr, as in ^ &c.,
the tense is inflected accordingly : see ^.
Pres. ^nrfiT -W ; ist praet. ^^i(i[^ -Tf ; 2d praet. "^^nr (^«^:,
Tgr^:, -^^ftrzT, ^^m or ^^^^ -grf^, ^if^n) or ^ (^^.', ^:)^
"3!^ {-wm, ^3ifxft) ; 3d praet. ^i<^i^1ft^ (^SRrerf), ^'^IW; ist fut.
^TrTT; 2d fut. mf^lPrt -TT; imp. ^iTJ -ITT; pot. ^^ -IT; bened.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 181
-gjT^mr, ^nft¥ ; cond. sum^rf^ -it. Pass. -mfk. Caus. ^m^Pri -^.
Desid. fV^l^fff -^. Freq. "^RTW, ^Rlfw or ^RfiT.
^ * to cover.'
The initial is not changed. The verb as usual is inflected
as if ending in ^JT in the non-conjugational tenses, except in
the singular of the second praeterite of the Parasmai-pada : in
the redupHcation "^ becomes ^. Before a it, ^ is changed
to ^.
Pres. cMi^Pri -W; ist praet. "^r^-m^ -TT ; 2d praet. f^c^m
(f^^:, ^^0^ ^^ » 3^ P^^t. ^sT^mfhi;, ^snsrrer ; ist fut. -^mn ;
2d fut. "sn^fiT -^ ; imp. ^nrw -ITT ; pot. ^7^ -w ; bened. "^miT,
^mfi? ; cond. '^a^amttlT^ -TT. Pass. ^^TW. Caus. ^n^nrflT. Desid.
f^^mrfrT -^. Freq. ^^"^irff, ^TEftfrT, ^W.
^ (^^) ' to wither' or ' decay;' ^ to go.'
This substitutes ^fliT before the terminations of the conju-
gational tenses, which are those of the j^tmane-pada. Those
of the other tenses are the terminations of the Parasmai-pada.
Pres. ^n^ri; ist praet. "^r^fhnr ; 2d praet. ^|^|^ (t^R(^:) ; 3d
praet. "^T^l^; ist fut. "5r^; 2d fut. "^rwfiT; imp. "^ihnrf; pot.
^n^ri; bened. ^^TimT; cond. w^T?^. Pass, ^fl^ri. Caus. ^ilri^fd.
Desid. r^l^lf^fff. Freq. "^T^raw, ^n^tflT or ^^fw.
When the verb means * to go/ the causal retains the final,
^llf^^Pri ' he causes to go,' or ' drives.'
^rftr ' to desire ;' ' to bless.'
This is never used without ^rr prefixed.
Pres. '^rr^hrw; ist praet. ^TT^hnT; 2d praet. ^rr^nw; 3d praet.
^l^iP^« ; ist fut. 'sa^lwr ; 2d fut. ^IPJHxyw ; imp. ^^prfff ;
pot. ■^15!*) H ; bened. "^"rfrftrq^F ; cond. "5rr5lf^"Hrrf. Pass. ^srr^T^^.
Caus. ^sn^hnriTT. Desid. 'HlP^l^jP^Md. Freq. ^T^nwrw, ^TT^-
i^i^lPd or "eii^ji^lPw.
The root ^hf^ ^to praise,' differs from this in being inflected
in the Parasmai-pada, and as its nasal is not derived from an
182 VERBS.
indicatory ^, in dropping it before ^ ; as, pres. ^^^rfw ; bened.
ki^\\; pass. "5T^5 &c.
^f^^ * to sprinkle.'
Pres. "^ftcir^; ist praet. w^fHprr; 2d praet. %5ft^; 3d prset.
"'sr^tf^; ist fut. "^^wt; 2d fut. ^i fchm h ; imp. "^ft^Rirf; pot.
^1^(1 ; bened. "^fH^fi^ ; cond. ^n^ilfohuiri. Pass. "^fN^^. Cans.
^flch^fiT -^ ; 3d praet. w^%^ -TT. Desid. f^^^Rq^. Freq.
^l^n^Mri, ^l^flchlfw or ^Ullfrh.
^^ ' to sorrow.'
Before the sign of the desiderative, a radical medial ^ or T,
when the final is neither it, % nor % is optionally changed to
the Guna vowel when the augment ^ is inserted.
Pres. "SffNf^; ist praet. '^srsfff^; 2d praet. "OT^fH (^U^*) 5
3d praet. ^r^fNhir; ist fut. "^ftf^in ; 2d fut. "^ftfq^Tf ; imp.
XffN^; pot. ^ft^r(; bened. ajxnirf^; cond. 'il^flP^mit^. Pass.
^^^k. Caus, ^[ft^xTTfT -^. Desid. ^^f^^W or ^^^"qfcT. Freq.
^ftSjxnv^, ^flsj-cflfTT or T[fh[fti%.
So ^M * to shine ;' except that, as belonging to ^dlH^
(p. 169), it makes in the third praeterite wgHl^ or ^r^fNt?^.
f^ (f^) ^ to serve.'
This verb, as indicated by the Anubandha t^, takes both
forms. Before a vowel termination not requiring the Guna
or Vriddhi change of the final, ^ is substituted for it. In
the third praeterite of the Parasmai-pada it takes the termi-
nations of the first, with reduplication : and in the frequenta-
tive form it optionally rejects the augment ^, which augment
it takes as an exception to the general rule, 191, b.
Pres. "^nrfff -^ ; ist praet. ^nnn^ -TT; 2d praet. %^rPT (f^fOilAiH:,
f^l^MPuvj, %f^5rfxR), f^f^ ; 3d praet. ^rf^riisRTl[ -W; ist fut.
^Pmhi; 2d fut. "^rfPTBifw -^; imp. "^RW, ^^RlTf; pot. ^5R1T -W;
bened. Tahrn^, TTftr^; cond. ^rjrfwi^ -W. Pass. "^sfhr^. Cans.
^^rrmrfiT -^ ; 3d praet. ^r^mUft^ -IT. Desid. P^mP^ MPri -^ or
f^r^fw -^. Freq. "^NHl^, %^^ffT or ^mfff.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 183
^ * to hear.'
This changes the vowel to "^^ and adds r[, the proper
termination of the fifth conjugation, in the conjugational
tenses, 'g' before a vowel becomes ^ by the rules of Sandhi ;
or before ^ and ^ it may be ejected. In the second praeterite,
even '^tii does not insert ^ (rule 188, s). In the third praeterite
of the causal, ^ is optionally substituted in the reduplication.
Pres. gi^nPrt (^w:, 9ji|«i r*t\, ^^t or "sn^:, "^^t or inm:) ;
ist praet. ^^r^nrftit; (^snjfTf, W^pF^) ; 2d praet. W^V^ i^^'^i*}
^^ft^); 3d praet. ^pj^^It^ (^^T^FT, W^g:) ; ist fut. ^"VffT; 2d
fut. tflmPri; imp. -^nit^ ('^Twm, W^)' P^*- W^» bened.
"?J5n^; cond. ^^mNlf;. Cans. ■^rr^PTfir; 3d praet. ^T^^Ri^ or
'^rf^T^Rfi;. Desid. "g^f^W. Freq. "^ft^f^ff, ^fNNtfrf, ^^W.
The verb is conjugated in the i^tmane-pada preceded by
^ with an intransitive sense, wswfk ' he hears :' otherwise,
as, m^ #5nnVfw ' he hears the speech.^ Preceded by irfrT or
^TTT it retains the Parasmai-pada in the desiderative form,
''^nai^MPri or fffriSj^i^Mrri ^ he serves or attends upon.'
fsg (^rrf^) ' to increase.^
This verb optionally substitutes T for f^ in the second
praeterite ; absolutely before the if of the benedictive and the
passive ; and optionally before the Ty of the frequentative. In
the third praeterite it has three forms ; being conjugated with
its own terminations and the augment ^, or with those of the
first praeterite with or without reduplication : in the latter case
it rejects its own final.
Pres. "^RffT; ist praet. w^g^; 2d praet. f^ngPT (f^^s^^
f^lHJpMVj) or -sprr^ (sjsi^g:, "5^^^, ^:5T^ or ^^TT^) ; 3d praet.
xsvj^ift^ (^^HJiP^yf), ^5T%f^g^ (-i^P^iPHi^rii) or ^ngrr (^^rw) ; ist
fut. saP^ril ; 2d fut. -^rfwffT ; imp. -sgirj ; pot. '?GR7T ; bened.
3nrn^; cond. "^ngfrorr^. Pass. "Sjrrff. Caus. «yi^inPri; 3d praet.
^P^IHjit^ or W3T^r^. Desid. P^I^P^MPri. Freq. ^I^I^H or
^tsTTTfl", ^IHj4)Pri or %^.
184 VERBS.
^^ ' to embrace/
This root rejects its nasal before the terminations of the
conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^^rfff; 1st praet. ^RnfW; 2d praet. lET^r^ (^rrf^^ or
'R^*"^^); 3d praet. ^^TOT^rT (^sratw) ; ist fut. "ifw; 2d fut. "^^fiT ;
imp. "Jff^rj; pot. "^7^; bened. ^HnUT; cond. '^m^i^. Pass.
^^Ts^TT. Cans. TNnrfrf. Desid. "ftPFT^frf. Freq. "^rftnRTff, ^H^^
or ^rwf^.
^ ('^) ^ *o decay/ ^ to be sad,' ^ to go.'
This substitutes "^ before the terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses.
Pres. ^ft^; ist praet. "^rrf^; 2d praet. w^ (&T5*5 W?^
or ^f^) ; 3d praet. ^w^i^^ (-il^^ril) ; ist fut. ^r^; 2d fut.
^n^rfir; imp. ^"J; pot. "^fi^; bened. '^raT7(^; cond. '^tttmt^.
Pass. itTlR. Cans. ^T^nfiT ; 3d praet. ^#^1^. Desid. "ftr'^r^fiT.
Freq. ^m^^lT^^ ^rra^tfw or ^rr^w.
With frf prefixed, the initial becomes ^, as fHiflt^fd ' he sits ;'
and this is repeated in the reduplication of the desiderative, as
frrfq'WWfrT, and third praeterite causal, as "hi^N^; the sibilant
following in fact ^ and ^; otherwise it is not changed, as,
2d praet. f^M^K ; nor is it changed after the ^ of llfw, as
TrfTRf^fifT * he opposes.'
iPE^r ^ to go.'
This verb changes ^ to ^T throughout.
Pres. ^rarfw -^ ; ist praet. -ii^-rrtrt^ -TT; 2d praet. F^n5T, ^TTT^;
3d praet. ^mTiftf^, -^ii^pTTig ; i st fut. "^fWrH ; 2d fut. ^^irarfff -^ ;
imp. ^-ni j -Trf; pot. "JfT^i^ -IT ; bened. ^tj^ij^, ^rPsN^j cond.
>H^Pwimf(^ -7T. Pass. ^TrHTfl". Caus. ^rapTfw -^. Desid. ftnrf^-
^ -W. Freq. ^TRRtRT^, fil^-nfifri, ^TRTf^.
iq^ ^ to bear,' ' to suffer.'
This verb takes the augment ^,' but optionally rejects it
before the terminations of the first future : for the change
that ensues, see tw^, ^, &c. In the desiderative the initial
sibilant is not changed after a vowel in the reduplicate syllable.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 185
because such change does not take place when the % which
is the sign of the desiderative itself, is changed to "^ in conse-
quence of the augment ^ preceding it,
Pres. ^T^; ist praet. ^^^ri ; 2d praet. ^; 3d prael. ^Rrfi^
1st fut. fiH^rtl or '^J; 2d fut. ^H^m^; imp. ^r^; pot. TT^
bened. ^P^iflg ; cond. SH^H^mri. Pass. TT^. Cans. WW^
3d praet. ^^M^f(^. Desid. fa^H^q^. Freq. TTRT^, ^m^lPri or
The initial is changed to "R after the ^ of f^, xrft, and f^, as
fff^^; if the temporal augment intervene, the change is
optional, as riii^^ri or .^m^h ; it does not take place when ^
has been changed to ^, as fdNP^HI or fn^'^dl.
fq>j (f^) * to accomphsh.^
Pres. ivfcT; ist praet. ^ravc^; 2d praet. "ftr^ (lirf^vj:,
"ftr^fVnr or fti^ir) ; 3d praet. ^3ra\fh^ (^?^fwf) or '5{^rtftir
(^i%irf, vH^ry:) ; ist fut. ^f^nrr or ^^ ; 2d fut. Jrymfri or
^r^rfw ; imp. %>f5 ; pot. ^ff ; bened. teimr^; cond. ^raf^mcT
or -^irWrt^. Pass, "ftrui^. Caus. ^^nrfcT; 3d praet. 'K^IPmmt^.
Desid. P^PMPimPd or P^PtlrMPrf. Freq. ^PtfWJVf, ^TT^rtfw or %^ir-
There is also a verb fro, ^ to go/ which is without the
Anubandha ^, and which therefore inserts the augment ^
invariably; as, ■ftr^fv^, ^fvflT, W^vhr, &c. The initial 1J of
either verb is not changed after the ^ of a preposition, except
fff, when meaning prohibition ; as, f^^vfw ^ he forbids.'
"5 * to bear children.'
This takes ^ optionally in the third praeterite.
Pres. ^nrffT; ist praet. ^nr^; 2d praet. ^^r^ (^f^^ ^mP^vi
or ^T^) ; 3d praet. ^r^^l^ or ^fiNlr|^; ist fiit. ^fhn; 2d fut.
fTl^MPri; imp. ^T^; pot. ¥%1^; bened. ^^m^j cond. ^n^luiri^.
Pass. ^31^. Caus. flN^jPri. Desid. i^flMPcT. Freq. ^fhl^T^,
fTlMc/lPd or TfV^rfw.
The same root is also inflected in the second and fiflh
classes.
B b
186 VERBS.
^ ' to hurt' or * kill.'
Pres. ^^ ; ist praet. ^njjlf ; ^d praet. ^^ ; 3d praet. wf^ ;
ist fut. *\Jif{\ ; 2d fut. ^n^m^ ; imp. ^wf; pot. ^W; bened.
^f^^; cond. ^^^xqiT. Pass. ^T^. Caus. '^^f^f -^; 3d
praet. ^^i^^n^ -w. Desid. ^^^. Freq. ^^ft^^STW, ^f^,
^^ (^) ' to serve.'
The reduplication of ^ is i^ (rule 188, i),
Pres. %^ ; ist praet. «5if<c|rt ; 2d praet. "fti^ ; 3d praet.
wfw; ist fut. ^fNlTT; 2d fut. ^T^rff; imp. ^[wm; pot. ^^;
bened. &f^^; cond. ^Mflf^mri. Pass. ^^. Caus. ilmiPri ;
3d praet. ^rfW^^. Desid. fa^fcim^. Freq. i^^, i^^tfiT,
So similar, but less frequent roots, it^, ^^, ^"f , &c. meaning
also ' to serve' or ^ gratify by service.'
^fW * to stop' or * hinder.'
The sibilant being changed, the following letter also becomes
a dental,
Pres. ^5r»>T^; ist praet. ^TH^^TfT ; 2d praet. ITRP^; 3d praet.
"»nwr*HF ; ist fut. w r*H H I ; 2d fut. MPuimTi ; imp. wuidl ;
pot. w^^ ; bened. ^eH^'^ ; cond. ?Hwr*H*Mri. Pass. ^cfw^.
Desid. fwf^RT^. Freq. irrerwR^, TTTCWtfw or Trrefftl.
FT ' to stand' or ^ stay.'
This verb substitutes "fir^ before the terminations of the
conjugational tenses. Although properly conjugated in the
Parasmai-pada, yet in various senses, or afler certain prepo-
sitions, it may take the i^tmane-pada also. Before it the WT
becomes ^ or ^. In the third praeterite the verb takes the
terminations of the first ; and in the ^tmane-pada changes its
vowel to ^. In the causal form it inserts t^.
Pres. rriafd -^; ist praet. ^srfinn^ -IT ; 2d praet. ir^, w^; 3d
praet. ^^TWH^, safari (wftq^nrf) ; ist fut. WTIH; 2d fut. ^n^fir -it;
imp. fws^ -wf; pot. f(ff^ -TT; bened. ^^TTTf^, ^wnftF; cond.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 187
^J<^l4:Mft^ -IT. Pass, m\^i{. Caus. ff^lM^Pri -^ ; 3d praet. ^arfw-
f^xn^ -W. Desid. rriyi^Pri. Freq. ^^hr^, TTT^IT or rii^lfri.
T{ is used in the Atmane-pada to signify ' to appeal to' or
' rely on ;' also with the prepositions w^, ^T^, T(y and f% ; also
with ^TT, meaning ^ to affirm ;' with "g"^, except it mean ' to
stand up' or ^ rise ;' and with "gir, if the sense be intransitive,
or it mean ' to praise^ or * worship/ or ^ to have a regard
for/ &c.
fir^ * to spit/
The vowel becomes long in the conjugational tenses : the
initial sibilant is unchanged. In the reduplication IT is substi-
tuted for the cerebral optionally in the second praeterite. The
desiderative optionally commutes the final semivowel to ^.
Pres. "ffNfrT; ist praet. ^rfl^if^; 2d praet. frt^^l or fz2^
(Ph Pimij: or IrftRj:) ; 3d praet. ^^rNh^; ist fut. ¥fwr; 3d fut.
&pcjmPri; imp. ift^; pot. if^; bened. "^Nrni;; cond. ^^r^f^r^.
Pass. i?Nn^. Caus. i^xrfir. Desid. frftflP^MPri or ja^MPd. Freq.
f^Nt^, "^al^lPri.
"Nt (P^i') ' to smile.'
Pres. FTPf^j ist praet. ^kHmi ; 2d praet. "ftrf^^ ; 3d praet.
^W8 ; ist fut. win; 2d fut. ^^xq^; imp. fH^HI ; pot. kHi\ti ;
bened. i^xft? ; cond. ^HWmH. Pass, -^ffrcit. Caus. wnTTfrT -W.
Desid. P^wPmM>. Freq. St*fl^^, ^^ifHlT, ii«*iPri.
With f^ prefixed, and in the causal form, it makes P^lwm^PH
* he or it astonishes / that is, the object itself astonishes :
when the object differs, the Parasmai-pada is used, either in
the regular form, or with "q substituted for tt ; as, WT ^^ if
f^^RTxnrfir or Pclf^HlM^Prl ' she astonishes him by her form.^
f^ (f^rfis^) ^ to melt/ ' to perspire.'
The verb belongs to the class giTTf^; see p. 170.
Pres. ^^; ist praet. ^d<^H ; 2d praet. "ftrfN^; 3d praet.
'^T^f^ or ^rf^f^; ist fut. QP(^riI; 2d fut. ^^f^^; imp. "^^;
pot. ^^ ; bened. yP^^Mlg ; cond. ^T^fV^TrT. Pass, fssrn^. Caus.
^(^4<Pf( -w. Desid. PjH^P(^m7^. Freq. %Ptcj*|H, SPM<{1^»* ^^ %^i%.
B b 2
188 VERBS.
15 ^ to go.'
When it means ^ to go quickly' or ^ to run/ ^ is optionally
substituted for the root before the conjugational tenses (i. e. a
different, but imperfect root, >^ or VT^ is also admissible in
these tenses). For other particulars, see the analogous roots
Pres. ^nfiT, VT^; ist praet. ^sratr^, ^mTTTf^; 2d praet. "^RTPC
(^ro^.) ; 3d praet. ^HftitfTf^^ or ^TRTl^; ist fut. ^jrtr; ad fut.
^Tftsrfrr; imp. ^TCJ, VT^ ; pot. TITT^, VTTrT; bened. "fignrn^;
cond. 'srofbiTf^. Pass. "ftRW. Caus. ^ntTTfcr -^. Desid. r^^l^Pri.
Freq. ^^Nw, ^O^OPri, ^O^P^ or ^^itft.
W«T (mj,) ' to go,' ^ to creep' or ^ glide.*
The medial may be changed to ^ in the two futures and
conditional. It is adso optional to double the final after a
conjunct ^; as, TV^QPff &c.
Pres. ^fff; ist praet. ^irrti^r; 2>d praet. ^ra^; 3d praet.
^TTT^ (^5i^Mril) ; ist fut. ^TTH or ^; 2d fut. ^44jPri or ^Tt;^^;
imp. ^r^; pot. ^I^; bened. warnf; cond. ^w^^cn^. Pass,
^rq^. Caus. ^^^Pri -^. Desid. f^'JErfW. Freq. ^O^m^j ^-
^rftfif or flO^PA.
^1?^ (^rf^) ' to go' or * approach.'
The nasal is rejected before it, and in one form of the third
praeterite : in the frequentative, tf^ is added to the reduplicated
syllable.
Pres. ^R5^ ; ist praet. ^T^f?^; 2d praet. -ci^r^ (^"^rf?^ or
M5J5*irV() ; 3d praet. -n^^t\^ (-^^^^rif), '^ST^ihftlT (-H^irJl, ^HOTf :) ;
ist fut. ^wt; 2d fut. Wr^trfw; imp. ^r^^j; pot. "^K^; bened.
'^sm^; cond. ^T^rBTc^. Pass. ^ra^. Caus. 4<*irr^i|Prt -^. Desid.
P^uhryPd. Freq. "^-jft^^, ^»/]l^r<{)Prf or xj.f|^;hP^.
5EiT^ ^ to envy' or ' emulate.^
Pres. 5^^ ; ist praet. ^M^^^ri ; 2d praet. "q^q^f ; 3d praet.
^"Wpgg; ist fut. wffin; 2d fut. ^qff^; imp. miM ;
pot. frMJTH; bened. ^P^tOtf ; cond. ^sJwP^^qTT. Pass. m^^.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 189
Caus. ^qfrrfw -w. Desid. PM^^riMri. Freq. mi^^h, m^r^JTrf
or mi^rj.
5F«finT (44^1! 41) ^ to increase/
In the causal the final is changed to ^.
Pres. l^lUff; ist praet. ^?^qinnT; 2d praet. q^hl*) ; 3d praet.
^n^qirlTr?; ist fut. ^iPuril; 2d fut. HhlHimri j imp. HhNrif;
pot. ^Mi\*\t{ ; bened. FRrWtF ; cond. ^^rMiiP^md. Pass, ^qirnnr.
Caus. 44»Ni^rri; 3d praet. ^iTqwici,^. Desid. rMWilfMHrf. Freq.
^ ^ to remember.'
Pres. F?T:fTT -^ ; ist praet. >H^i.r^ -IT; 2d praet. ?!^rr, ^wft;
3d praet. ^TFTT^, ^HjiJiT; ist fut. ^Rtl; 2d fut. wfbrfrT -W ;
imp. ^nrj -irf; pot. ^ib^ -W; bened. m<^ii^, ^R^; cond.
'^^wH.ujfl^ -IT. Pass. ^Hitw. Caus. WTCqfw -^. Desid. ^Mj^^rt.
Freq. ^rronSw, ^iwOPd, ^rr^Rft.
W^ (^^) * *^ o^ze' or ^ drop.'
This belongs to the class ^rilH^ (p. 170). For the effect of
•g^ see p. 106. The second future and conditional are option-
ally conjugated in the Parasmai-pada, and so is the desidera-
tive : see '^ and oR^.
Pres. w^ ; ist praet. ^TW^ ; 2d praet. ^r^^ (^r^qf?^ or
^T^fw, ^l^rf^^ or mM^"^) ; 3d praet. ^i^id (-H^idl), ^^P^g
or '^r^^ ("^^Pr<mril or >n^*f^iril); ist fut. ^Pn^rii or T^im;
2d fut. ^Pr^^ujPrt -w, ^iT?5Tfw -w; imp. W^; pot. ^ir^;
bened. ^Pr<«t{)a or ^^rtflg ; cond. '^iwfT^xEn^ -If, ^TOi^l^ -IT.
Pass. WfJ^' Desid. P^^Pr^M^ and P^^'rtlPri -W. Freq. ^n^iTOT,
^lf:M><{lPri or ^rrofw.
^ (^1) ^ *o ^^ down.'
This verb also belongs to the class ^HlP<^.
Pres. ^irtI" ; ist praet. ^h^a ; 2d praet. ^r^ ; 3d praet.
^nnn^ or ^%iP^» ; ist fut. ^ftnrr; 2d fut. « Paul's ; imp. #^;
pot. ^^ ; bened. ^fpHtflg ; cond. -dJ4jPf<«jrt. Pass. to^. Caus.
190 VERBS.
jfl^fri -^. Desid. "ftl^Brftrq^. Freq. ^»fl|jl^rf, H^^^^fflPri or
sst^ and OT, ' to fall down/ are similarly inflected.
^ * to drop.'
This is one of the exceptions to the insertion of ^ in the
second person singular of the second praeterite (p. 121). The
root takes both the augment and reduplication in the third
praeterite.
Pres. ^r^ ; ist praet. ^WTrT ; 3d praet. ^g^T^ ("S^J^? ^5f^) ;
3d praet. vM^^mr^; ist fut. wttH; 3d fut. ^Nrfw; imp. W^;
pot. HTif ; bened. ^^TTiT; cond. wt^T^. Pass. ^JJ^. Cans.
^N^Pri ; 3d praet. ^i^fjcir^ or ^rftra^. Desid. ^{^mPh. Freq.
1 (V^) ' to take.^
Pres. "5T:fif -^ ; ist praet. ^T^TIT -W ; 2d praet. ^TfR ('Tift,
'T^)? 'T^; 3^ praet. ^^nffrt^, ^Tf 7T ; ist fut. -^j 2d fut.
^ri^mPri -^ ; imp. "^ -TTT ; pot. "^ -w ; bened. ff^, ;f^ ;
cond. TH^Pj^mri^ -TT. Pass. f^. Caus. fRxrfw -w. Desid.
ftn^tfff -w. Freq. %f^, ^^OPri, IT^- or ^P^^OPri, or if^- or
^J^ ' to be or make glad.'
Pres. ^T^; ist praet. >n^^H ; 2d praet. »r^ ; 3d praet.
'sr^Tf^; ist fut. ^iPf^rii; 2d fut. ^iP<mw; imp. ^^hI; pot.
^T^ ; bened. ^rf^pfti? ; cond. 'il^lP<^u|rt. Pass. ^m^. Caus.
^\i^^t^ -W. Desid. f^T^Tf^. Freq. ifr^ra^, ill^KlPrt or
^T^ * to taste/ and ^T^ ' to sound/ are similarly inflected.
t (^ ' to caU.'
When the root is doubled, or before % the semivowel and
following diphthong are changed to T. The third praeterite
takes the terminations of the first in the Parasmai-pada,
and optionally in the ^tmane-pada. In the passive, the third
praeterite, second future, and conditional, optionally insert ^.
Pres. ^vfft -^; ist praet. '*H4^f{^ -TT ; 2d praet. gi^ (^g^lij:.
SECOND CONJUGATION. 191
g^fr^T or '^it^), ^[f^ ; 3d praet. '^ib^ (^d^)^ ^^ (-H^Al) or
^r^rm ("^r^wrm); ist fut. 2^t; 2d fut. dfrwftr -^; imp.
3|TTW -ITT ; pot. 5^7^ -W ; bened. f^TTT, 3fT^ ; cond. -Hd^l^T^ -IT.
Pass. 1X1^ ; 3d praet. ^jj^^iPil^ -^Hd^lPM^, ^T2^ or ^^Hsi ; 2d fut.
d^T^W or «i^irMmri ; cond. ^■H<j^i^ri or wsfTf^^TrT. Caus. d^l^nPrf ;
3d praet. ^nj^^. Desid. ^^MPrt -^. Freq. ^fft|^, ^fl^^lPd,
afl^iPn.
Second Conjugation.
213. The characteristic peculiarity of this conjugation is
the attachment of the inflectional terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses immediately to the termination of the base, with-
out the interposition of any vowel (rule 170, a. 2).
a. There is but one general change of the terminations ; f^ in
the second persons of the imperative is changed to fv after any
consonant except a nasal, semivowel, or ^. It is said, indeed,
that the terminations of the first and second persons of the
first praeterite, H and ^ left by f^xf and "ftn^ (p. 114), are
rejected afler an inflective base ending in a consonant; but
this arises from a general rule not restricted to conjugational
inflexion. A conjunct consonant, when final, loses the second
member of the compound Jrule ^^) : therefore ^ ' to kill,^
ist praet., making in the first instance ^^^, ^I^^, must
become ^Tf •T, rejecting the finals l^ and ^. The same in
other verbs ending in consonants, of whatever conjugation.
b. The changes of the vowels of the base are analogous to
those of the first conjugation, before the terminations having
an indicatory t^. A final ^ or ^ is in general changed to ^;
^ and "gr to ^ ; and "^ "^ to ^. An initial or medial short
vowel is similarly changed before the same. A long vowel is
unaltered. Other changes are special, or follow the general
rules of Sandhi.
c. Final consonants are combined with the terminations
agreeably to the laws of Sandhi, or to special rules, or to niles
affecting all similar combinations in whatever conjugation.
192 VERBS.
Some of these have been noticed under individual verbs of
the first conjugation ; but it may be useful to collect them in
this place, as they particularly apply to the conjugational
tenses of verbs of the second and third conjugations.
I. Final consonants are unaltered before a nasal, a semi-
vowel, or "5, except by special rule.
2,* A final palatal before other consonants, or when not
followed by any letter, is changed to oR, which before a soft
consonant becomes t[ (rule 7, c), and makes with a sibilant, "Ef
(rule ^7).
3. A final ^ or V may be changed optionally to t in the
second person singular of the first praeterite ; and t: final
becomes Visarga.
4. A final ^ or "gf is changed to "^ before any consonant
except a nasal, &c., as above.
5. A final "^ is unchanged before w or "^r, but they become
the cerebrals z and z in conjunction with it (rule 12). "^
before ^ is converted into T^ (rule 27). Before f\| and ur, "^ is
changed to Z; and after Z, V becomes ^ (rule 12); when ^
takes the place of the hard consonant z (rule 7, c),
6. A final "^ is changed to ^ before any soft consonant
except a nasal, &c., as above ; and to ir before a sibilant,
except in the present tense and imperative mood. Before "ftr
and ^ it is sometimes retained, sometimes rejected: it is
usually rejected before ^; it is also sometimes rejected before
fv, else it is changed to ^.
7. A final "Cf rejects cf, and leaves ^ final before any conso-
nant except a nasal, semivowel, or ^.
8. A final 15 before any consonant except a nasal, &c. is
changed to xr, if the verb begin with ^ followed by any vowel
except ^ ; if it begin with ^, or with any other consonant, ^
final becomes z ; except in t^, when it becomes v : some verbs,
as g^, take both. After an aspirate, w and ^ become v (rule
186), when other modifications occur, which, although previ-
ously noticed, may be repeated. Thus j( and ^ become ^
SECOND CONJUGATION. 193
before a sibilant, and "Sfi forms with it "?f (rule 29, ^2,) i "^
becomes n, and ^5 "f, before any soft consonant (rule y, b) :
V after ^ becomes ^ (rule lij) ; and when ^ is repeated in a
conjunct, one ^ is rejected. The initial of a root ending in
an aspirate, being it, T, ^5 or "^5 is changed to its correspond-
ing aspirate, tt, ^, V, or >T, when its final is followed by ^ or
sr, or by no other letter.
d. This conjugation includes a class of five verbs, called
^t^lH^ or ^ ^ to weep/ "b^ti * to sleep,' "sg^ ^ to breathe,' ^R ^ to
breathe,' WS^ ^ to eat,' which form a partial exception to the
non-interposition of a vowel between the base and inflectional
termination, as they insert ^ before any consonant except tt, and
^ or ^ if the termination consists of a single consonant, as in
the second and third persons singular of the first praeterite.
e. Another class, termed iT^rf^, is also included in this
conjugation, the verbs of which are termed ^rwiw or ^ redupli-
cated ;' they are, "»TW ^ to eat,' WT^ ^ to wake,' ^^fr^T ^ to be
poor,' "^oFTO ^ to shine,' "^rra ^ to govern,' ^hft ' to shine,' and
^^ ^ to obtain.' These cause the nasal of the terminations
of the third person plural of the present and imperative to be
rejected, as also of the same person of the first praeterite,
Atmane-pada ; and T^ to be substituted for ^^ in the same
person of the Parasmai-pada.
The verb which is given as a model of this conjugation, ^
* to eat,' is inflected in its simple form in the Parasmai-pada
only ; but in composition with some prepositions, as with f^
and ^rfff, it may be conjugated in the Atmane-pada, as ^W^
' he eats much reciprocally.' It may therefore be exhibited
in both forms, omitting the prefixes of the compound verb for
the present, for the sake of comparison. The final of 'W^
becomes TT before a hard or surd consonant (rule "J, d)i w is
inserted by special rule before the terminations of the second
and third persons singular of the first praeterite, Parasmai-
pada. The nasal of the third person plural in the present,
first praeterite, and imperative of the iitmane-pada is rejected.
c c
194
VERBS.
"^ ' to eat/
Present tense, ^ I eat/
&C.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada
^?ftr
^i^: ^t?t:
^
^^
^ra^
^ifw
WR: ^Tr^
^Tw
^SF^^
^^
^rfw
^
^Tff
^r^
First praeterite, * I ate' or * have eaten/ &c.
WT^
^Tsr ^rm
^snf^
wnrf^
WT^.
^iT^ 'UTir
^IrVli:
^i^mi
^
mii[^
^TT^
^^THT
Imperative, * May I eat.
'&C.
"^r^
^
^?^-^^
w%
W ^si^
Wr^
^si^rm
^^
^
W^ 'Sj^
^^
^r^TTT
Potential, ^ I may eat,'
&c.
^iren*^
^nr^m
w?rr:
^'€nd ^srernr
-*!<{)«
^r{li.«j^
Of the remaining tenses it is only to be remarked, that the
second praeterite is optionally borrowed from tt^ (see p. 163) ;
and the third praeterite and desiderative mode are formed with
the same verb, w^ does not insert h^ (p. 12^7), except in the
second praeterite.
2d praet. W^rm or ^TT^ (^snc^^, ^n^:), if$ or wi^ ; 3d praet.
^HRH^ -W; 1st fut. ^twt; 2d fut. ^sn^fff -W; bened. wmff,
WWftF ; cond. wmr\ -Tf. Pass. ^fnt. Cans. '^T^irfTr -^ ; 3d
praet. SHlH^^fi^ -TT. Desid. HHHrtirri.
For the remaining verbs of this conjugation, selected as
most useful or remarkable, the paradigmas, as in the first
conjugation, with occasional observations, will be sufficient.
SECOND CONJUGATION. 195
^PT ^ to breathe.'
This is one of the class ^^jf^; see rule 213, d.
Pres. -Mf^fff (^ftnf:, ^^rOit) ; ist praet. ^^TTTiT or ^^rr^
(^TUpHril, ■STT^^); 2d praet. '^IR (^rPTft, ^^t) ; 3d praet. ^\^\
(^TTfVr^f, ^^rf^^:) ; ist fut. '^rfVnrT ; 2d fut. »ijrH«rriT ; imp. '^^;
pot. ^^?TT7^ (^^Tirf) ; bened. "^i?mr (^SRTTWf) ; cond. ^iufnui'ff.
Pass. ^^. Caus. 'HM^Prt. Desid. wfVffinfw.
The »T of this verb becomes w after a preposition giving
cause for it, even in both syllables of a reduplication ; as,
mPniriT ^ he breathes' or ^ lives/ HiPiiiPiUHfw ' he desires to live.*
^5nr ^ to be.'
This auxiliary verb admits of the four conjugational tenses
only, except in composition, when it has a fifth tense, the
second praeterite (p. 121). The other tenses are suppUed by
^ ^o be' (p. 132). Before those terminations which do not
require a change in the radical vowel of a verb, the initial of
"^^ is rejected : the final is rejected before a termination
beginning with ^. In the first praeterite, the second and
third persons singular are borrowed from a defective third
praeterite, prefixing ^ to the terminations. Th^ second person
singular of the imperative substitutes ^ for the root, and f^ is
changed to fVi, Like some other verbs, ^HW takes the j^tmane-
pada, compounded wdth prepositions, in a reciprocal sense ;
as, ojKj^ (^tM^) ^ to be mutually.' In this Pada ^ is substi-
tuted for the root in the first person singular, present tense :
^ is changed to ^ before V. As this verb is useful, the inflex-
ions may be exhibited in detail, omitting the prepositions of
the Xtmane-pada.
Present tense, ^ I am,' &c.
Parasmai-pada.
Atmane-pada.
"^rfTER ^:
FT.
t
«^ W^
■^rfti ^n
w
i
^ ^
^^ ^:
?rf%
^
Trnr w?^
C C,2
196
VERBS.
First praeterite, ' I was,'
&c.
^rm^
^H ^i\\kH
-ilM«
^Mi^r^
^rnft:
^mW 'iJI«
■^iwi:
-ifl^mi
^i5««
'SH^fT
'srrerf '^rra''^
'iiiM
^TOTWr
^l^ii
Imperative, * May I be,
'&c.
^i^lPH
-imm -amn
^
-ilfJI^i
'5^«l»^|
^
w w
^
?
^
w ^
w
^TifT
■^nrr
Potential, ' I may be,'
&c.
^
WR 'mm
^dW^
w\:
min 4^»ri
^^l^lf
¥^\\
wm ^.
^^ftrT
^"5^
The second and third persons singular of the benedictive
are considered to be ^cTTiT .
^rw * to sit.'
The final is optionally doubled before a consonantal termi-
nation, except SET, before which it is rejected.
Pres. ^rr^ or -^ifQ (^^rrS or ^rr^, ^sttot^, ^^) ; ist praet,
^5frrer; 2d praet. ^TTOT^; 3d praet. ^mPflg ; ist fut. ^rrftnfT;
ad fut. 'snftrHT^; imp. "mm ("^(vm, wrorfH); pot. ^iffld ;
bened. ^ifatflg ; cond. ^ipHmri. Pass. ^1^^. Cans, ^srwrrfw-
Desid. ^arftrftr^^.
^ (^) ' to remember.'
This is always combined with the preposition ^rfv, and with
no other : the final indicatory "^ distinguishes it from ^ (^)j
as below. In the second and third praeterites and in the
derivative forms it substitutes the inflexions of tht.
Pres. ^n^ (^nflir:, "^rfVnrf^) ; ist praet. ^t^tt; 2,d praet.
^BrfvsPTR; 3d praet. ^rairrnr; ist fut. ^JP^ITT; 2d fut. ^n^xqfiT;
imp. "^Wtr ; pot. '^r\i\ M I A; bened, '^nfhrnr ; cond. ^sr&Hnr . Pass.
^R\fhi^. Cans, ssiPMJiH^rri. Desid. '^srfvftFTf'T^fiT.
SECOND CONJUGATION. 197
^ (^) * to go ;' ^T>ft ' to study.'
The indicatory "^ restricts this to the j^tmane-pada ; and it
is invariably combined with the preposition ^rfV ; as, ^nit ' to
go over/ as a book, ^ to read/ ^ to study .^ It borrows the
forms of m, * to go/ in the second praeterite and frequentative^
and optionally in the third praeterite and conditional, of the
active voice, and the causal mode. Before a vowel termination,
^ is substituted for the radical vowel.
Pres. ^v^ (^snfhn^, ^sPlhrff); ist praet. 'grSlT (^^Wimrf,
^S^d) ; 3d praet. ^^rfv*Ft (^if^nTTTa", ^rn^fjll) ; 3d praet. ^T^
or ^Tuqift? ; ist fut. ^5|U|HI ; 2d fut. 4iulm"J) ; imp. ^T>fhrf ; pot.
^nfNhr ; bened. ^3fu)»=fl« ; cond. ^rm»fh[nr, ^r^tqir. Pass. '^nfh?^.
Cans. ^sramrirfiT; 3d praet. ^BranrftrPTiT or ^unfbrqTT. Desid.
^(^J'togo.^
The indicatory ttt distinguishes this from the two preceding
-verbs, as well as from ^ of the first conjugation (see p. 156).
Before the vowel terminations of the present and imperative,
"XT is substituted for the root; before other terminations, ^.
The third praeterite is borrowed from iTT in both the active
and passive voices ; and the causal and desiderative are derived
from TFT.
Pres. ^fw (^, "irfnT, ^^, ^:, ^, ^, X^, 1^:) ; ist praet.
^^ (^, ^srni^, ^:, H '^n^J ; 2d praet. ^imr (t^, t?») »
3d praet. ^nmr; ist fut. ^^rTT; 2d frit. ^dmPd; imp. ^ (^,
T^ ^, "Trf^, ^m^5 ^TR) ; pot. ^[^nT^; bened. ^rrnr (with a
prep, short, fFrfbrnr, Wbrren) ; cond. ^^. Pass. f^T^ ;
3d praet. "^sunf^. Caus. JlH^fd. Desid. flFTfiT^.
^ ^ to praise.'
After the cerebral of the base, the K and ^ of a termination
are changed to z and 7; and as they are hard, the radical
final is then changed to the hard consonant of its class, Z.
This and ^, as below, insert ^ before ^ and li in the present,
and ^ and ^ in the imperative.
198 VERBS.
Pres. ^ (^TTW, $[5^, t^T^^ f?T% ff^, ^, t.^^^ t^"^) » ^^^
praet. ^; 2d praet. ^^i^rfi; 3d praet. ^f^F; 1st fut. ^fkwT;
2d fut. j^Himri; imp. Ijf , pot. f;3fhr; bened. ^^^; cond.
ijff^nr. Pass. ^T^. Caus. ^^Mfrt. Desid. ^frfr^.
f;C ' to go,' ' to shake.'
Pres. 1^; ist praet. ^; 2d praet. |tT^'^; 3d praet. ^ft]?;
ist fut. ^ftjn; 2d fut. ^fbrff; imp. f#f; pot. ^iS^lT; bened.
f;^ ; cond. ^ftWiT. Pass. |x5^. Caus. fi^qfff. Desid. ^Ixftqw.
^ ' to rule.*
For the changes of the final ^, see rule 214. ^ is inserted in
the present and imperative tenses before ^ and ssf ; see f;?.
Pres. ^ (tf^5 t^^) ; ist praet. ^ ; 2d praet. |^^»Mi ;
3d praet. $f^ ; ist fut. %t^AJ ; 2d fut. ff^r^w ; imp. ^ ;
pot. ^;^ ; bened. ff^r^ ; cond. j^P^imri. Pass. t;^!^^. Caus.
^^pqfiT. Desid. ^r^iH^i^v).
■gjOT ("^n^^) ^ to cover .^
This verb takes both Padas. Before terminations reject-
ing IT, and having more than one letter, the Vriddhi change of
the vowel is optional : before a vowel, T^ is substituted for the
final ; but optionally before the augment ^, prefixed to which
the final may also take the Guna change or ^, which becomes
^R. In the reduplication the second syllable only is repeated,
and the proper radical consonant tt resumes its dental character
when detached from ^. The desiderative takes various forms
(rule 203, d).
Pres. wifff, -gptffrT ("^i^:, ^^I^Pri), "5R^; ist praet. 'ifinH'*!^
^^?Nhf, ^mucnTT^or ^TiMrT {Mi^^^l &c.), '^^^^ '^^;
ist fut. ^jar^ril, ^S^f^WT ; 2d fut. -gi^f^wfiT -w, "gpml^^^fjf -^ ;
imp. -gBlf% or "gp^, "gj^ ; pot. ^^, ^^ ; bened. <*%^Hf^,
^^^^flgor <iiinr^MlK ; cond. ^iDr^Sr^m'tf -W or ^^f^mrf -W. Pass.
gi^TT^. Caus. -gi^T^Trfrr; 3d praet. "^wg^. Desid. "^P^^
^ -% <hi|Hrc<Mrri -% -gjf gfWlT -^. Freq. ^h^Pf^^lH, wfW^Hw
or ^^rflPH.
SECOND CONJUGATION. 199
(^f^^) ' to speak^ or * say/
For the changes of "C^, see rule 213, c, 7. The verb has but
the conjugational tenses, and optionally the second praeterite.
In all other forms ^qr or ■^r^TT is substituted for the root. The
substitutes may be inflected in both Padas.
Pres. '^ (^HjlH, "^r^^, ^, ^r^, ^^^ ^^t) ; I St praet.
W^ {w^r^m, ^-^^ti) ; 2d praet. "^^, ^^ or ^^^, ^q^,
^q^i^fl; 3d praet. '^Wf[^y ^TWiT, ^^T^^Trer, -U^^imlff ; ist fut.
WfTwr, 'sfi'^mn; 2d fut. ^rrr^fiff -^, ^^n^irfw -k; imp. "^^ i"^^,
^ji) ; pot. ^^^ ; bened. mv^, ^nw{, mrvTif^, «*5ir«1^,
^^Tmr, cfc^lNIH^; cond. ^^i^h^ -it, ^t^^tt^ -W. Pass, wwk,
ct»^imri. Cans. ^qTTnTfw,^^rTxr^; 3d praet. ^'q^qTTiT^wf^^^lT.
Desid. r^jomitfri ^, Pcich^ii^fw -^. Freq. ^r^irnrff, -Mlofe^H^ri.
MckiVH * to shine.^
This is one of the class »ia|ir<, or reduplicated verbs. ^
may be rejected before the terminations of the second and
third persons singular, first praeterite, or changed to f^ when
they are dropped : it is also rejected or changed to ^ before f^
(rule 213, c, 6).
Pres. ^chifw (-^'♦IW:, -^chl^rrf) ; ist praet. W^^BTiT, ^T^^
(^i\Mdk\: or ^^eM^); 2d praet. "^^fiTOT^^^RTT: ; 3d praet. w^^finftiT
(^T^^RTftm ) ; 1st fut. ^diir^ril; 2d fut. ^rarTftrarfTT; imp. ^RFTTJ
(^^fiTf>T or ^ohin^) ; pot. "^^RTWnr; bened. xIom^i,^^ (-^41^1^1) ;
cond. ^r^TRTftrnrr^. Pass. -ejoM^"^. Cans, -cjchi^jjrri ; 3d praet.
^T^T^oFT^ or ^^^TRT5r?T. Desid. frq^RTftmf^.
^TW ^ to eat.'
This is the type of the Abhyasta or reiterated roots in its
inflexions, although not itself a redupHcate. It also belongs
to the class "^^if^ (rule 213, d),
Pres. ^rHlPri (^Hsjri:, TiHjPri) ; ist praet. ^H»lHfiri^ or ISHT^
(^nr^:) ; 2d praet. »T3TW ; 3^ praet. ^r»r^|tlT (^nrftpr) ; 1st fiit.
arf^TTT ; 2d fut. iffw^qfifr ; imp. »T^ ; pot. »r^Tf^; bened.
ir^TTfT; cond. ^M»ir«|^M"rr^. Pass. ^f^r^. Cans. iT^^xrfw. Desid.
f»T»rftj^fw. Freq. ^n^nSfHT^ »TT5f^f^fw or ^rnrfi?.
200 VERBS.
aTPj * to wake.'
The final becomes ^ before a consonantal termination
rejecting t^; and in the first praeterite, when the inflectional
termination is rejected (rule 213, c, 3) ; the ^ of ^ becomes
Visarga. Before other consonants the vowel is unchanged.
Before the vowels "^ is changed to ^5 except in the second
praeterite, and before ^5 when it becomes ^. The second
praeterite has two forms.
Pres. inn ft (iTPpr:, ^nrrfff) ; ist prset. ^nrm: (^s»*rT^,
^^nrm^, ^nrm:, 'sriTPjif, &c.) ; zd praet. ^tfto^^^rtc or ^rmPTR
(^rrwmtj:) ; 3d praet. w^TFrdrT (^TiTTTTiT^) ; 1st fut. "srmftjn;
2d fut. ^rmft^rfff ; imp. ttpt^ (^rnjirt wnrj) ; pot. "STPpmr ;
bened. itptt§tf. Pass. ^THTcqw. Cans. ^TPKTftr. Desid.
"ftrrsf ("ftrrf^r) ' to cleanse.'
For the changes of the palatal final before consonants, see
rule 213, c, %,
Pres. fVfi; (fVnnw, f^if^), f^ (f^fiTT^, fVpr^) ; ist praet.
^M^; ad praet. f^PHJ (f^Tf^Tf^) ; 3d praet. ^P^r^jg; ist fut.
PhP^hi ; id fut. PhP^ mri ; imp. f^m (f^, fH^54) ; pot, fififhT ;
bened. PhPh»^«; cond. ^^fTf^^Trf. Pass. ^A^- Caus. "ftm-
irfw -W. Desid. PHPnPlsJMrf. Freq. ^^^^, %PwW)Pri, %f^f^.
So frrf^T ' to paint/ and P^lPd ^ to tinkle.'
^ftr^T 'to be poor.^
In the conjugational tenses ^fTT is changed to ^ before a
termination beginning with a consonant, and not having a
mute II. It is rejected in all tenses before a vowel termina-
tion of the same kind, or one not having "q ; also before the
augment ^, and before xr in the benedictive. As a reduphcate
root, it rejects the nasals of the third person plural, present
tense, &c., and substitutes ^ for ^n^ in the first praeterite
(rule 213, c). In the second and third praeterites it has two
forms.
Pres. t^Pi^^lPrt (^ftftrtr:, <^Pi.<[Pri) ; ist praet. ^s<;P<.^^ (^l^frftrTftj
SECOND CONJUGATION. 201
^6?^i:) ; 2d proet. <^ri.^MchK or <r^ri.^ (^^fti^Tg^, ^^f^O *
3d praet. ^n<^ri,<n>l^ (^^T^ftft^^ '^l^ftftTTO ^^ '^^Tc^I^'^ff ('H^fX^I-
fwsi) ; ist fut. v^nLf^rii ; 2d fut. ^n^P^mfd ; imp. ^ft^ (^ftftnrt,
^it^, ^^ft^rrfw, ^ft^n^, ^ftl^T^) ; pot. ^ftf^nTTiT ; bened. <^r<4|lrl^;
cond. ^r^ftf5^. Pass. ^jSJ^. Desid. f^[^ftf5^ or f^ft-
Tr(^) 'to cut'
This retains its final unchanged in all the tenses except the
second praeterite.
Pres. ^rfcT; ist praet. w^ (^^T^ or ^^l) ; 2d praet. ^
(^:, ^5:) ; 3d praet. ^^r^nfti^ (-ii^iMi, w^:) ; ist fut. ^T?n;
2d fut. i5[TWrw ; imp. ^ (^Tf^) ; pot. ^Tqii^; bened. ^T^;
cond. '^l^T^qi^. Pass. ^T^. Caus. (^milfd. Desid. f^^rofiT.
Freq. r^l^niri, ^ifw or ^f^.
In this manner a number of other verbs in WT, belonging to
this conjugation, may be inflected ; as,
^ to go badly, to fly. tjt to go.
in to preserve. ^ I to give, to take.
'm to eat. HT )
in to fill. "m to blow.
vrr to shine. "'STT to cook or mature.
JTT to measure. WT to bathe.
^PTT is conjugated only in the non-conjugational tenses: see
^^. TTT takes 7^ in the causal, xncJ^rfir. WT makes the vowel
of the causal optionally short, ^m^Prf or ^tRfifT.
^ (^Nh?) ' to shine.'
This is one of the class of reduplicated roots, and is usually
considered peculiar to the Vedas.
Pres. ^hft^; ist praet. ^^RfNhf ; 2d praet. ^hm^; 3d praet.
^Tfw; ist fut. ({IfMril; 2d fut. ^MVbi^ ; imp. ^hfhrf; pot.
^fhfhr ; bened. ^^^ ; cond. ^r^tfvxqir. Pass. f^>fhm.
5^ ' to milk.'
For the changes of the final and initial, see rule 213, c, 8.
D d
VERBS.
Pres. ^>fhT (57>n, 5^, >ft%, ^:, wjv, ^: 52^, ^i), ^
(pT^, P^, v%, yi^) ; 1st praet. wift^ (^'V) ; 2d praet. 5^^^,
5^ ; 3d praet. ^r^lT (wj;^, '^TV^^), ^^W (^^|TlTf, ^^r^^Tjr,
^Tj^^^:, ^rg^i^, ^jvfi^, ^rvi^f^) or '^sjni (^r?niT:^ ^ry«r) ;
ist fut. ^Vvt; iid fut. V^fTT -^; imp. ^^, ^Tvf; pot. ^^m^;,
5^; bened. g^TTfT, >ft^f^; cond. ^nft^l^ -IT. Pass. 5^^. Caus.
^Tl^^rri ; 3d praet. '^STU^. Desid. ^^^flf -^. Freq. ^>5^,
^flri^lPri or ^^^^fh|.
f^, * to anoint,' is analogously conjugated.
ft^ ' to hate.'
The verb is regularly inflected. T^ is optionally substituted
for ^r^. The changes of the final are either those of Sandhi,
or of the declension of nouns in "^ (see also rule ^^13, c, 5).
Pres. %fw, f^; ist praet. ^^ (^rfk^, ^3%^ or ^fkg:^
^^5 ^f%^, &c.)5 ^i%F (wff ^Trrf) ; 2d praet. f^t^, f^^ ;
3d praet. ^^P^Hijri^ -w; ist fut. ^¥1; 2d fut. Ja^jfrf -^; imp.
^ (^^%? i'^f^)^ fk^f (%^^ %^) j pot. fl^miT, fg'^TlT ; bened.
ftr^TTfT? r^Hp^ ; cond. ^H^^tf^ -TT. Pass, flrar^. Caus. ^^^.
Desid. r^r^vsjCri -^. Freq. ^fk^^, ^fk^Mir or ^f^.
"^ ^ to speak.'
This is an imperfect verb, admitting of the conjugational
tenses only. It inserts ^ before the consonantal terminations
rejecting t^; and before it the Guna substitute ^ becomes ^r^.
■^ is substituted for the final before other vowel terminations.
In the present tense the inflexions of ^srr^ in the three num-
bers of the third person^ and singular and dual of the second,
in the same sense, ^ he speaks,' &c., but with the terminations
of the second praeterite, are considered to be optionally sub-
stitutes for those of ^. For the non-conjugational tenses,
see '^^.
Pres. rfcOfrf (-^.j "^^rPtT, wsftf^, -^t, ^, "3^T, -f^:, ^:) or
^n? (^n^:, ^sTTf:, ^tt^, ^tt^:), ww; ist praet. ^rar^, ^r^;
imp. -^^ (iin, 1^, ^, -swrftrr), fwf ; pot. f^Tfi;, f^.
SECOND CONJUGATION. 203
^ ('^) ^ ^^ clean,' ^ to sweep/
The vowel takes the Vriddhi change before the terminations
of the conjugational tenses beginning with consonants having
a mute t|[, and optionally before those beginning with vowels
not having such letter. It is so changed throughout in the
non- conjugational tenses. The final »r is changed to "^ before
a termination beginning with any consonant except a nasal,
a semivowel, or ^. The changes to which such final "^ is
subject before other consonants, or to which it subjects them,
are those of Sandhi : see also rule ^213, c, 5.
Pres. inft (^:, TT^f'tf or ij^lfiij JTlf^, HlPrA, ^ift, ^[t»t:) ;
ist praet. 4IHI^ or '^mrl (^npf, »il*J=HH or ^wr^'?r, ^^mrf, ^HI^H,
^s^) ; 2d praet. ttrt^ (HHTf^ or »WTt) ; 3d praet. '^nn^ffr^
(^Hif^Klj ^imTf%:) or ^nHiHjTrf ('HHili, ^HivS:) ; I St fut. hiPShi
pr ^ntr; 3d fut. Hir^uifrf or HT^fw; imp. ht| (^, JpPj or
Hl^*^, ^f^j HI'S I fill) ; pot.^3?rnT; bened. Jp^rnr ; cond. ^smrf^anT
or ^nm^l^. Pass. *jTMri. Cans. Hl'S^fri ; 3d praet. ^inn^rT.
Desid. Phh ^^S^^ri or fipj^^. Freq. hOH:H4^, HOm^fff or
Hfbnff.
g^ to join.' ^
This verb takes the Vriddhi substitute before a consonantal
termination having an indicatory t^; and "T^ before one begin-
ning with a vowel. It inserts the augment ^ (rule 191, b),
before which "g" is changed to ^, and that becomes ^r^,
Pres. "^fiT (gw:;, 'pf^, ^^, '^tf^, f^:, -gn:) ; ist praet. wi^
('^rgirf, ^sr^:, ^Tf^) ; 3d praet. "jTrr^ ("3?^*? f'rfV^) ; 3d praet.
^RT^^; istfut. -qi^iTT; 2d fut. iif^^ifTT ; imp. ^ (^, g^iT) ;
pot. "5^ni^; bened. ^U||f(^; cond. ^nrfWiT. Pass. ^Jnrff. Caus.
ill^^Pd. Desid. ^^JMPrf or ^JirfWcT. Freq. xfrj^TW, ^fN^tf^ or
*il*ri Pn.
So "^ ' to sneeze,' ^ ' to whet' or * sharpen,' w * to praise,'
nj ' to distil' or ^ drop ;' which all take ^. Other verbs in "g"
are conjugated in the same manner, except that they do not
take ^ ; as, ^ * to coo' or ' sound ;' ist fut. "sptlTT, 2d fut. "SRhqfif,
3d praet. 'sr^T^;: ^ 'to assail;' rftiH, ^frarfiT, ^T^^: ^ ' to
D d 2
204 VERBS.
bring forth,' ^ to be rich ;' ^EftrTT, ^FTt^fri, HHrittflH . See also ^
and ^.
7^ ^ to sound/
This verb optionally prefixes ^ to any termination beginning
with a consonant in the conjugational tenses. It also takes ^.
Pres. ^ufw or t^^ (^: or x^:, ^f^ or x:^ff^) ; ist praet.
W&r^ or WT^; 2d praet. ^^xrR (^^^0 ; 3d praet. ^STCT^;
ist fut. Tf^; 2d fut. Tf^Tirflf ; imp. ^oj or T^; pot. ^^m^
or t^hmi;; bened. ■^tttit; cond. ^ni^pcimrf^. Pass. T^irff. Cans,
TT^7if?r. Desid. "^^ifWif. Freq. d^x(^, ^dt^tfw, tldftr.
^ ('^f^ ' to weep.'
This is the leading root of the class ^r^iH^ (rule 213, «?).
Pres. Cin^fri (^1T:, ^^^) ; ist praet. ^rd^ or saO<(lf^
('^^^f^rrf, ^rr^^: or ^r&^:) ; 2d praet. ^d^ (ijClf^'^) ; 3d praet.
'^n^ (^^r^:) or ^^irt^ (-3Rtr<si) ; ist fut. Or^Hl; 2d fut.
trf^wfcT ; imp. rrf^ (^ir^^) 5 pot. ^?m^; bened. ^^TTiT; cond.
^fldf^^. Pass. '?5^. Caus. Clt^^fri ; 3d praet. ^5r^^^5[T^.
Pesid, iN^r^nfri. Freq. 0^^^, d^^ or dd%.
f^ ^ to lick.'
See rule 213, c, 8. Where the final is changed to ^, and
one ^ has been rejected, the vowel, if not changed to the GuAa
letter, is made long.
Pres. :^f^ (c^:, fc^^fHT, "^f^, c^:, ifeftr, ?^4}, fc5^:), ^sfti"
{fc^, T^)', ist praet. ^r^ (*Hc«5l<3l, ^^5 '^cT^), ^Tt:^
('HPc^^IhI, ^rfcTl^) ; 2d praet. Pc^^^, fcjfc^t ; 3d praet. ^rf^^J^,
?s<ro5«jri or ^Tc^; ist fut. 1^^; 2d fut. "^^frT-^; imp. "^
(<5yH^), Tto* (fci5^) 5 pot. fc^^lrl^, fc^^lff; bened. "fisj^mr,
fc^;^ ; cond. ^^T^ -W. Pass, fc^^, Caus. ^^i^fri. Desid.
rc^rt^Hjfri -^. Freq. c^frt^^, V^ft^^lPri or ^(Jftf.
^T^ ^ to speak.'
The final becomes oR before some terminations (rule 213, c, 2).
In the tenses in which this verb is substituted for j|^, it may
SECOND CONJUGATION. 205
take the Xtmane-pada. The third person plural of the present
and imperative is wanting. In the third praeterite, "g", con-
vertible to ^, is substituted for the radical vowel. The tense
is formed with the affixes of the first praeterite, with ^ pre-
fixed (rule 190, a).
Pres. "^fii (li^, ^ft^, ^fEJT, ^^^, W^Rl) ; ist praet. ^T^,
^r^n (^r^w^ '^r^^'?^, ^r^, ^r^) ; 3d praet. <m{M ("3?^,
^1^), "31%; 3d praet. >H^t^ (^T^qirf), ^T^IT (^nJl^Vji) ; ist
fut. ^qw ; 2d fut. "^^rfw -^ ; imp. "^ (^ffhy) ; pot. ^rnm^;
bened. T^qTiT, MVjflg ; cond. ^Hcjyt^^rf -W. Pass. ^x^jh. Cans.
^m^Pri. Desid. r^cj«i|rri -^. Freq. "^T^^, m^f^.
^ ' to subdue.'
The final is changed to i^ (rule 21^, c, 4), and "^ to "^,
where the terminations have no mute "il, or where ^ is not
inserted.
Pres. "^ (t^,, T^rf^, ^ftl^ ^f^) ; ist praet. "^^ {^^, W^P^,
"^f^, mi, ^m^) ; 2d praet. -gm^F ("^i^O ; 3d praet. ^H^i^flrf
or ^R^; ist fut. c^r^irii; 2d fut. ^r^imrri ; imp. "^ (^ffv,
^^^); pot. T^'TTl^; bened. ^^nirt^; cond. ^irf^nm^. Pass.
Tfq^. Caus. m^l^Pri. Desid. f^-^ri^frr. Freq. TR^.
f^ ^ to know.*
This verb is anomalous in some respects. In the present
tense it admits the terminations of the second praeterite, with-
out the reduplication, as well as those of the present. It
optionally forms the second praeterite with the auxiliary verbs
(rule 189, c), and the imperative with '^.
Pres. Tfw or ^ (f^^ or f^^:, f^^f^if or f^:, ^fw or ^,
■f^Tr^: 'or r^lf^^:, fVr^ or f^, Tf^ or ^, frsi or f^, f^: or
f^; ist praet. Wf^ (^^T^, ^rf^:, ^I^ or ^:) ; 2d praet.
f^ (fqrf^^.), r<4<^NchR, f^^TTTHT, r^^iy^; 3d praet. ^^{iAj
ist fut. ^P^ril; 2d fut. Tf^xqfifT; imp. ^ or f^^Tffd^; pot.
f^aifl^; bened. f^^iTTT (fwren) ; cond. Wf^mc^. Pass. fWfl".
Caus. ^k^^. Desid. IMVf^^. Freq. ^fWff, ^f^^lPrt, ^wfw.
206 VERBS.
With ^5W prefixed^ it takes the ^tmane-pada, as ?ff%% ; in
the third person plural of the present, first praeterite, and
imperative, t may be added to the final, as M?^r(k or ^T?^, &c.
^ ' to go/ &c.
According to some authorities, ^ is not substituted for the
radical before a vowel ; the change is that of Sandhi only,
Pres. ^ff (^hn, Pm^r-d) ; ist praet. ^i^ (^^i^ or wsi^) ;
2d praet. f^^m {f^^'^^: or f^^:) ; 3d praet. "^rl^; ist fut.
^TTT; 2d fut. ^mfrf; imp. ^; pot. and bened. "^fhrn^; cond.
^nn^. Pass. "^fhr^. Cans. m^ilPri^ Desid. "MWiT. Freq.
^^hiff, ^^xftfff or Wir.
The verb has many meanings ; as, ' to throw,' * to eat,' * to
conceive,' &c. In the latter, the causal, ' to impregnate,' is
m^^jPri or mxnrfff.
^^, a synonymous verb, is similarly inflected ; but in the
Atmane-pada : Pres. ^^ (^^TT^, ^^), &c.
^rw {W^) ' ^o bless,' ^ to teach.'
The vowel is changed to ^ before terminations beginning
with consonants which have not a mute xr in the Parasmai-
pada. For the change of the final, see rule 213, c, 6.
Pres. -^nf^ (f^:^ ^imPri), l^TT^ (w^) ; ist praet. '^T^m^
(^^TFT, ^sT^rng:^ ^tw» ^^ ^^rr?^)? '^^hh ; 2d praet. ^rw^? ^njn^ ;
3d praet. ^rf^T^, ^H^nPflK ; ist fut. "^TTftnfT ; 2d fut. ^(iP^uiPd -^ ;
imp. ^^ (^^nfv), ^rrar; pot. P^iuiir^, ^jnftir; bened. "ftfr^rn^,
^irftNb? ; cond. ^sr5rrft?'sn^ -W. Pass. f^xq^. Cans. 5ii^4Pri.
Desid. P^l^nP^MPri. Freq. $P5(U|^, ^il^ll^Prl or ^TT^T%.
In the sense of ^ blessing,' ^t is usually prefixed, ^rT5rn& or
"^rf^; for, according to some, the vowel is altered in the
Atmane-pada also.
^ (l^ft^) ' to sleep.'
This verb changes the final to the GuAa element 1^ in all
the tenses except the second praeterite. ^ before a vowel
becomes ^, except in the plurals of the present, first prae-
SECOND CONJUGATION. 207
terite, and imperative, where tc is inserted before the termina-
tions from which the nasal has been rejected. The verb
inserts ^ (rule 191, I),
Pres. %^ (^TW, ^rS", %^, %^, "51^, ^N%, -^tH^) ; ist prset.
W«T (>H^IU) ; 2d praet. 1%^ ( f^r^Mlri, f^lf^) ; 3d praet.
^r^rf^; ist fut. "^rftrrrr; 2d fut. ^iPmuih ; imp. -^hn (^nmrf,
^trirf) ; pot. ^fnftw ; bened. ^|fMMl«. Pass. ^nzrw. Cans. ^rrmrfTT.
Desid. r^l^lPMK^. Freq. ^(I^I^H, jl^|^4irrt, W^^-
i^Rf ^ to breathe.'
This belongs to the class ^^Tfc^ (rule 213, d : see also rule
213, c, 6).
Pres. -sgiTffffT; ist praet. ^ngifh^ or ^r^EWi^; 2d praet. ^IHII^;
3d praet. "^nERrhr; ist fut. igftrwr ; 2d fut. Tgrffimfrf ; imp. ^yf-H^;
pot. and bened. *y^lfl^; cond. ^rsgf^rBr?^. Pass. «y^^*
"fs (^) ^ ^^ bring forth/ as a child.
The verb optionally admits ^.
Pres. ^ (^m^, ^^, ^) ; ist praet. ^l^; 2d praet. ^f^;
3d praet. ^sraf%F or wtF; ist fut. ^irwi, ^PmhI; 2d fut. ^fNr^,
flP^mri ; imp. ^TTT (^;^, i^, ^T^T^) ; pot. "5^ ; bened. ^ft^,
'Rn^tfls ; cond. ^raVsTff, ^rafTBTrT. Pass. ^5^; 3d praet. ^wrf^.
Cans. ^NAifri ; 3d praet. ^raH^. Desid. ^^tI". Freq. ^^^^H,
TETN'^ftfw or ^ETt^W.
f ( J5t) ' to praise.'
This optionally admits ^ before the consonants of the con-
jugational tenses, except xr.
Pres. ^^fiT or ^^ItfiT, ^w or T^^ ; ist praet. ^i^^ or
^T^cT^, WTT or ^ifrjcdd ; 2d praet. -g^i^ (^^O' "51^ 5 3d praet.
'iiijHNl^, W^; ist fut. ^FTtcn; 2d fut. ^Ww -w ; imp. ^fft^
or w^j, ^^, ^^^Idf ; pot. ^^irf^, ^tJmIh ; bened. ^JJ^TTT , iidl^Os ;
cond. ^Ji^yTimw -w. Pass. i^ir^. Cans. ^N^fci. Desid. ggnfif -7^.
Freq. Hl^J^rl, iftFlfrT.
"E^ ^ to sleep.'
A verb of the class "^^rf^ (rule 213, d). The vowel is sub-
208 VERBS.
stituted for the semivowel in the second praeterite, in the
reduplicate syllable, and before the vowel terminations in the
radical syllable also. Before the ^ of the benedictive and
passive and frequentative the same change occurs, and in the
third praeterite of the causal.
Pres. ^f^rfw; ist praet. ^K^Mij^ or ^T^Tfti^; ad praet. ^mim
(iT^*' "SfSO 5 3d praet. ^^T^T^ (^T^m, >i<^l«^:); ist fut.
^ttt; 2d fut. ^x;^frr; imp. ^fxrj; pot. ^tuTc^; bened. ^jom^;
cond. '^T^rt^. Pass. ^rq^. Cans, ^m^fri; 3d praet. SH^gqi^.
Desid. ^gmPd. Freq. ^^^^ ^I^Mlfff or ^if^pH.
^^tokiU.'
The final is rejected before the terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses beginning with any consonant except a nasal or
a semivowel, and not having an indicatory i^. In the same
tenses and second praeterite tj"?^ is substituted for the root,
which becomes ir before a vowel termination, not having a
mute tj. "3T is substituted in the second person singular of the
imperative. In the benedictive and third praeterite ^rv is sub-
stituted ; Tr«^ is substituted in some tenses of the passive, in
the desiderative and frequentative modes ; and xm^ is substi-
tuted in the causal, ^tt takes ^ in the second future and
conditional in the active voice : "^PT admits the augment in
both futures, conditional, and third praeterite of the passive.
"ST^ also takes the augment i[.
Pres. "^friT (^TH, irfnT, ^1^, "^f^) ; ist praet. ^r^"^ (^T^,
^U^) ^^^^9 -^i^HH) ; 2d praet. trtr (»rjrg:, ^:, «nrf^ or
ififT^) ; 3d praet. ^?^>ft7^ (^Rfwf) ; ist fut. "fnTT ; ad fut.
^Ph ttlPri; imp. -^ (^WT^, IT^, ^, f^JTrfrf) ; pot. ^^am^; bened.
TqTflT?^; cond. ^T^irr^. Pass. pres. "^^ ; 3d praet. ^?^f>l or
vHmPrf (^sr^fwTirf or ^^rnrf or ^yiPHmdi) ; ist fut. f^ifT or
ViPhKI; 2,d fut. ^P^^Uri or MlPHmfl ; bened. ^fv^ or ^iPhmIb.
Caus. xmnrfir; 3d praet. ^nfhnn^. Desid. PiiHi»<HPrt. Freq.
'^r^^ or »nfh|7^, ^*M»{iPri or inrf^ or iTf^ftfw, »i^PM or W^-
THIRD CONJUGATION. 209
Third Conjugation,
214. The characteristic pecuharity of this conjugation is
the redupUcation of the radical syllable before the terminations
of the conjugational tenses.
a. The reduplication takes place according to general rules,
and whatever other change of the base occurs is special,
except the substitution of a Guna for a radical vowel before
those terminations which reject t^, and the modifications of the
final which the rules of Sandhi require. A final vowel is
changed to the GuAa letter before ^ in the first praeterite.
b. The terminations are also unaltered, except those of the
third person plural, present and imperative, which reject tf;
and the third person plural of the first praeterite, which sub-
stitutes "3^ for ^n^. The compound form of the second
praeterite is optionally used in four verbs, Wt, "^, >T, and n,
c. The model of the class is ^ ' to sacrifice ;^ the only
pecuharities in the inflexion of which are the optional change
of the vowel to the semivowel before the terminations of the
first person dual and plural of the present tense, and the substi-
tution of fv for f^ in the imperative. It is thus inflected in
the conjugational tenses i
Present, ' I sacrifice,' &c.
1^^ ^1^: or ^. gfR: or ^:
First praeterite, ' I sacrificed,' &c.
^rff# ^ifp ^iffH
^fTf^: ^STffK ^T^fW
^f^^ ^^11^* ^'■pi:
Imperative, ^ May I sacrifice,' &c.
l^^rf^ %^^\"^ p'^IH
f^ w^ ^^
E e
210 VERBS.
Potential, ^ I may sacrifice,' &c.
W^ If^^ W^
ffm: ^g^irt W^
In the non-conjugational tenses the reduplication does not
take place^ except where required by general rules.
2d praet. "g^T^ or ^^^^TT^RTrc; ist fut. "fhrr; 2d fut. "j^VBrfrr;
bened. f^Tr^; cond. ^r^htn^. Pass. |T(^. Caus. ^T^irfw. Desid.
fg^Mfff. Freq. idd^^ ^fMHw, ifl^tfir.
^ ' to go.'
^T^ is substituted for the root in the reduplication. The
verb rarely occurs in this form, except in the Vedas. In the
first and second persons of the first praeterite, the final of the
conjunct having been rejected, the ^ of the Guiia substitute
for ^ or wr becomes Visarga.
Pres. ^irft i'^:, '^^)y ist praet. ^tt: ; imp. ^^; pot.
For the other forms, see "^, p. 157.
tR ' to produce.'
Before terminations beginning with consonants, not con-
taining an indicatory x^, the vowel of this verb is made long ;
and before such a termination beginning with a vowel, the
medial radical ^ is rejected : see "iR, fourth conjugation.
Pres. »nrf% (^nnw:, ^r^frr) ; ist praet. ^i^ttw (^nnrnff,
^nr?:) ; 2d praet. ^HTHT ('Tfr^:, »T?:) ; 3d praet. ^l*rr?ftTT or
^nr^; ist fut. ^rf^Trrr; 2d fut. ^rf^rarfiT; imp. ^nrf (^T»TTwf,
^rg^ ) ; pot. ^H**j|rl^ ; bened. "sr^Tit;; cond. ^n^PHmH^- Pass,
irir^. Caus. ^iH^PiT. Desid. nH^rHMPri. Freq. ifiRT^ or
^Ml^^, ^'HHlTri or ifwfnr or HTHHlPri, ^TTWfnT.
"ftlirar ( PiUPd^) ' to cleanse.'
This takes both Padas, and in the reduplication changes ^
to ^ ; see "ftjlf^T, second conjugation, p. 200.
THIRD CONJUGATION. 211
Pres. ^fiJ (^f^ns:, ^fn^rd), ^^; 1st praet. ^31%%^, ^MHfw^;
2d proet. fiT%iT (f^^^T^.)^ f^f^% ; 3d praet. '^T^tlf; or SHf^^tt^,
^5f%F; ist fut. ■^; 2d fut. -^^ifTT -^ ; imp. "^^^ hTh^*;
pot. ^fiTWTrT, HpH^iOri ; bened. fnii^irf^, f^T^; cond. ^ST^W -if.
Pass. Ppiiif^. Caus. ^irrfir. Desid. fHH^ij^H. Freq. -^5^^,
^^nftflT or ^^.
^ (^) ' to give.
This drops "^ before all the terminations of the conjuga-
tional tenses not containing an indicatory tr, making conse-
quently ^. In the second person singular of the imperative
it substitutes ^ for the reduplicated verb. It takes both
Padas. It is unnecessary to give more than the conjugational
tenses, as the rest are the same as those of ^, first conjuga-
tion, p. 169.
Pres. ^tTtt (^w:, ^^), ^; ist praet. ^T^^ (^r^, ^sr^:),
'S?^ ; imp. ^^ (^, ^^, ^), ^, (^m? ^) ; pot. ^mJ{,
VT (vit() ' to have' or ' hold.'
This is inflected like the preceding, but the initial is
unchanged before a termination beginning with any consonant
except a nasal, a semivowel, or ^, which does not contain an
indicatory t| . The other tenses are analogous to those of ^,
first conjugation.
Pres. ^vrfcT (VW:, ^:, ^t»T:), vi (^VTff) ; ist praet. '^^VTT^,
^mw; 2d praet. ^, ^^; 3d praet. ^nm^, ^fviT or ^ftmw;
1st fut. vnn ; 2d fut. xrmf^ -w ; imp. ^vt^ (^)> vwf (v?^) ;
pot. ^TflTrl[, ^>fhT ; bened. ^^TTrT, vnftF ; cond. ^^nnw»^ -W. Pass.
vNw. Caus. \(iMi|frf. Desid. fViT^ -7^. Freq. ^^ftr^, ^t^
or ^Tvrftr.
iTO ^ to shine.'
Before a termination beginning with a vowel, not containing
a mute t^, this verb, like »nT, rejects the medial vowel : >t being
then conjoined with '^, necessarily becomes i^ (rule 7, d : see
also, for the changes of ^, rule 213, c, 6).
Pres. ^Hfe (^>?w:, W^^) ; ist praet. ^5Rh: (^RH^, isc^^,,
E e 2
212 VERBS.
^rh:) ; 2d praet. ^HTO ; 3d proet. "^i^TRftiT; ist fut. HP^Hl ;
2d fut. >TftrBrfff ; imp. ^H^ (^H^, ^^> '^^^} ^>TOTf^) ; pot.
•gH^TTT; bened. H^TIT; cond. ^rHP^uirt^. Pass. H^H. Caus.
Hnnrfw. Desid. f^HTftlwfiT. Freq. ^TH^, ^m^ftfrT, ^THf%.
>ft ' to fear.'
This may make the vowel before a termination beginning
with a consonant, and not containing an indicatory T3[, short.
It optionally takes the compound form of the second praeterite
(rule 214, b),
Pres. f%>Tfff (f^vftw: or fM^Tfr:, fVwrfff) ; ist praet. ^Wi^
(^rN^fhrf or ^f^i^f, ^f%wg:); 2d prset. fw^ (^^^0 or
f^Hxn^^R; 3d praet. ^SR^W ("^21, ^5:) ; ist fut. ^;
2d fut. >hqfw ; imp. f^[>^ (f^^ftlff or fWriff) ; pot. f^^fNTiT,
r^fH^ITT^; bened. >fhnr^; cond. ^whtcT. Pass, vfhrw. Caus.
inTnrfw, vtrw^, mxR^ or >f^^ii^. Desid. f^Mt^. Freq. "^Hhnr,
"qH^ftftr or "^^fiT,
>T ( ^*^) ^ to nourish' or ^ support.'
Pres. N^rft (f%>f?r:, f%>jf?r) ; ist praet. ^rfw. (^rf^^firf,
^srf^iT^.) ; imp. f^H# ; pot. f%>prr»^.
The other tenses are the same as those of >J of the first
conjugation, p. 174.
TT ('TT^) ' to measure.'
This verb, ^ * to go,' and ^ ^ to abandon/ drop their final
vowel before a termination beginning with a vowel, and not
containing an indicatory iqr : before such a termination begin-
ning with a consonant, they change it to ^. The vowel of
reduplication is ^.
Pres. f^jffk (f^mri, fR^wk) ; ist praet. ^^nfftir (^srfimTwf, ^rfH^nr) ;
2d praet. ^k ; 3d praet. 'STHTO"; ist fut. HTfTT; 2d fut. i^T^iR ;
imp. fJTJfhrf ; pot. fR^TT ; bened. JTRftF ; cond. ^Himw. Pass.
iftTck. Caus. mxnrfH -W ; 3d praet. ^nfftiT^ -TT. Desid. "ftrwfrT -TT.
Freq. ^iftiTff, HTHlfri or HT^.
THIRD CONJUGATION. 213
f^^ (f^PH^) ^ to discriminate.'
The verb, like fJUlif, changes ^ to ;j in the reduplicate
syllable. For the effect of the Anubandha, see p. io6 ; and
for the changes of the final, rule 213, c, 2,,
Pres. ^^^ (%fTi5:, ^f^irfw, W^, %^f^, $f^^, ^f^^:) ;
ist praet. ^i^^ (^^fcl^l, wf%^», ^1%^^) ; 2d praet. f^»T ;
3d praet. '^r^^ (^^, '^tt^.), ^rf^ini;; ist fut. t^; 2d fut.
^^rfir; imp. ^^^ (^^frv, %f^lTTf^); pot. ^f^l^TTl^; bened.
f«i5^lfl^; cond. ^sr^^i^. Pass, f^a^rf. Cans. ^^nrfrT. Desid.
Irf^f^. Freq. %f^5^^, %^f^.
fT^ ^ to surround.^
Pres. ^Tf¥^ ^f^; ist praet. xH^^d, ^f^¥; 2d praet. f%^,
f^f^; 3d praet. VH^«|lft^, ^^; ist fut. w^ ; 2d fut. ^^^rfw-^;
imp. %^, %iwf ; pot. %fwn^, %f^^ ; bened. f^imiri, PciHfly ;
cond. "ei^vt^fi; -w. Pass. f^^. Caus. ^^nfff. Desid. r^r^HjPri.
Freq. ^fW^, ^rfe.
F * to go.'
Pres. 1wr#; ist praet. ^srftw:; 2d praet. ^nnx; 3d praet.
^ii^nfff^ or ^^TOtTi;; ist fut. ^rtr; 2d fut. -^rlrsrlTr; imp. "ftmf ;
pot. "ftmirn^; bened. "ftnrrJ^; cond. ^raft^ir. Pass. "ftR^.
Caus. Wirfw. Desid. "ftrettfiT. Freq. wNw, ^itft.
IT (^) ' to go.'
Sec *rr above.
Pres. f»T^^ ; ist praet. ^Jrftr^; 2d praet. if^; 3d praet.
^^TOT; ist fut. i^TTn; 2d fut. -fT^ ; imp. liT^hrf ; pot. "ftf^;
bened. ^ifily ; cond. ^n^l^ri. Pass. "^rtiw. Caus. ^in^rrf.
Desid. fiT^T^. Freq. ^HTT^^ ^i^lfrt or ^ilfrf.
^ {^PO ^ ^o abandon.'
The Anubandha c^ is to distinguish this root from the
preceding. The redupHcate is regular in other respects. The
inflexion is analogous to that of in. In the second person
singular of the imperative, iff^ or ^"ft is optionally substituted
for the root : ^sn is dropped before the tt of the potential.
214 VERBS.
Pres. ^^iPri (iT^:, ^T^) ; ist praet. '^TJT^Tff; 2d praet. »T^;
3d praet. ^T^TH^; ist fut. "^TTTT; 2d fut. "^T^fw; imp. »T^
(wf^, ^^in$ or ^r^rf^) ; pot. W^mr; bened. ^^TTr^; cond.
^r^T^lT . Pass. "^w. Caus. ^Ttnrfw ; 3d praet. ^nfr^trr^. Desid.
rH^r^Pri. Freq. %^^, ^fw or WTFrfrT.
"^ ' to be ashamed.'
Pres. fti^fw (f^r^:, f^n^MPd) ; ist praet. ^rftf^Tf ; 2d praet.
ifnTO or ^hrn^^FR; 3d pra^t. 'Sil^i^; ist fut. jm; 2d fut.
^mPri ; imp. fif^ ; pot. PH^l^lr^^; bened. ihmr ; cond. ^3^1^.
Pass, fhrff. Caus. ^q^Pri. Desid. Pdi^MPri. Freq. ^^hnr,
^^rftfw or W^.
Fourth Conjugation,
215. The syllable % technically termed ^'tT'T, is interposed
between the inflective base and inflectional terminations of the
conjugational tenses.
a. The terminations of the conjugational tenses are the same
in this as in the first conjugation (rules 170, 186, &c).
b. Before % as has already been seen in the preceding con-
jugation, a radical vowel is not capable of a Guna substitute,
and a consonant is unchanged.
c. The terminations of the first praeterite are substituted
for those of the third in the Parasmai-pada, and sometimes in
the j^tmane-pada, after verbs belonging to the class gmP^ or
g^, &c. ; comprehending nearly a third of the whole con-
jugation.
d. A final "^ is changed to ^, and a final wt is rejected,
before ^. "^ is changed to Wl before other terminations.
e. The class of roots called ^pnrrf^ or jv^y Sec. — all of which,
except »T^ ^ to be glad^ or ' intoxicated,' end with it — make a
medial w long ; and roots which end with ^ or ^ usually
prolong a medial ^, "3", ^, 0?.
/. Any other changes are special. The verbs of this class
are somewhat numerous: most of them are to be found in
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 215
other conjugations, sometimes in the same, sometimes in dif-
ferent acceptations, when the non-conjugational tenses often
adopt different modes of inflexion.
g. The model of the class is f^^ ("f^f ) ^ to play,' * to shine,^
&c., which by the clause e, above, becomes ^"^ in the conju-
gational tenses.
Present tense, * I play,' &c.
^Nrf^ ^r^: ^Nm:
^Nrftr ?fNr^: t{l«Mvi
^Nifw ^[Hir: ^Nd^
First prceterite, ' I played/ &c.
^^^\ ^H<1<^N ^Ht^lcqm
^^: ^r^Nnf ^"Ntt
'iJ({]«Mff^ ^({l«Mdi -^cflcqi^
Imperative, ^ May I play,^ &c.
^^Tftf ^I^N ^Ntr
^Ng ^h^ ^t^
Potential, ^ I may play,' &c.
ffi'^M ?{)«*i'4 ^^T
^t^ r{)«Mn <{l«Mfi
^^ ^t^irf c(t^:
There are no peculiarities in the non-conjugational tenses.
In the desiderative there are three forms (rule 203, /) : in the
frequentative, rejecting it, the final is changed to "g*.
^dpraet. f^', 3d praet. ^^ (^51^^, ^^f%^:) ; ist fut.
^f^in ; 2d fut. ^^^Tf ; bened. ^ft^m^; cond. ^fTCTiir . Pass.
^N^. Caus. ^TirflT. Desid. f^f^i^-^, f^^r^MPrf or f^^MPri or
j^^fw. Freq. ^^^(N^, ^^^Htt or ^^ftfir.
^Pff (^) ' to throw.'
This is a verb of the class ymH^ (rule 213, c), and subjoins
■^ to the final in the third praeterite.
216 VERBS.
Pres. iH^fri; ist praet. ^siT^"?|;; 2d praet. ^rm; 3d praet.
^TTWi^ (^snWrTf^ ^STT^) ; ist fut. ^fHTH ; 2d fut. ^^^frT ; imp.
^T^ ; pot. '^TWri;; bened. 'sr^TT!;; cond. -^rrftrqiT^. Pass. ^^r^.
Caus. ^m^Pri* Desid. ^^rftmfw.
t ' to go.'
Pres. "|tr ; ist praet. ^iTr^;; 2d praet. ^aUN^i; 3d praet. ^;
ist fut. inrr; 2d fut. vy^; imp. ^wf; pot. fi^; bened.
^^ ; cond. ^"enr. Pass. ^im.
For the derivative forms, see ^, second conjugation.
^^ ^ to increase.'
Pres. ^uifff ; ist praet. '^TT^T^ ; 2d praet. ^r^rt ; 3d praet.
^rrtlT; ist fut. ^f^; 2d fut. ^srf^^rfiT ; imp. -=^14^ ; pot.
■^ulff^; bened. "^"um^; cond. ^^rrf^^TT. Pass. "^wid. Caus.
^fxrfir. Desid. ^rff fwfir or ^?#fir.
' to throw' or ' send.'
Pres. f^tqfw; ist praet. ^T^pan^; 2d praet. P^^q; 3d praet.
^i^Hfld; ist fut. "^rn; 2d fut. %^^qfff; imp. fw^; pot. f^^;
bened. fBjmr^^; cond. ^x^. Pass, ft^^q^. Caus. "^TrfrT.
Desid. P^rajt^rri. Freq. ^i8^, ^^fW.
»nT (ynf^) ' to be born.'
This verb is changed to »n before the conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^mjt; ist praet. ^nrPTcT; 2d praet. tT§; 3d praet. ^»iPH»;
ist fut. »fPffriT ; 2d fut. ^Pnm^ ; imp. wmn ; pot. »n^; bened.
^rf'T^; cond. ^nfffftqir.
For the rest, see »R^ third conjugation.
m (ot) ^ to grow old.'
See rule 215, d. It optionally substitutes ^ for the redu-
plication of the second praeterite ; takes the terminations of
the first praeterite for those of the third ; and elongates the
augment ^ in the futures and conditional.
Pres. ^fhtfif; ist praet. ^snft^lT; 2d praet. if^TR ('Hrrg:,
^Ijjivt, »nr^, ^^); 3d praet. ^»in!)i^5 ^nro^; ist fut. wftin,
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 217
^T^; 2d fut. ^fft^rfw, ^Ottirri; imp. "iftit^; pot. ilWw; bened.
»fh:§n^; cond. ^Hfft^TT, ^HtQ^. Pass. ifh§^. Cans. »RTrfif,
JTK^rri. Desid. n»<^n.^rri, nH^iOMPrij ftnf^fw. Freq. ^^^,
^ (^) ' to fly.'
It takes the augment ^ (rule 191, b).
Pres. "^TlW; ist praet. ^il^H ; 2d prset. f^^ ; 3d praet
^nfcrer; ist fut irfrnrr; 3d fut. Tfir^; imp. fhm; pot. "^^;
bened. Tftr#¥ ; cond. -SffMUfri. Pass. ^hrff. Caus. ttWw.
Desid. fs^tm. Freq. ^s'hm, is^lfd, irfir.
It is also a verb of the first conjugation ; sf^, Hffii^cij Tmri",
3ncr^ (wsi) ' to perish,'
It belongs to the class Y"^Tf^j and may in the third prae-
tcrite change ^ to ij. It inserts a nasal before any consonant
except a nasal or semivowel, and optionally inserts 3^,
Pres. H^Ajfrt ; ist praet. '^RT'^'T; ^d praet. T?[T^ (^^t, "^t?
hP^n, ^); 3d jH-aet. w^r^TT, ^T^^; ist fut. ttft, ^f^iTiT ;
2d fut. "Jff^fw, "Hr^l^Mfri ; imp. «TT^^ ; pot. "JT^^; bened. "fTT^W ;
cond. 'sr^fenr or "^Rf^^. Pass. "^tj^. Caus. "JTT^nrfcf. Desid.
f^^, fH^r^RffT. Freq. •?TT;t^, TfrT^fw, HTHf?-
^ir^ * to bind,'
The final is changed to % which undergoes no other change
than conversion to ^ before a soft, and if before a hard conso-
nant, by the rules of Sandhi. It takes both Padas.
Pres. rf^frT -Ti; ist praet. ^r|4(W -IT; 2d praet, HHI^ {^T!^
or %f^, ^^0' ^ » 3^ P^^^- '^'^Ir^'t^ (^ST^T^gf), W^ (-HHrHlril) ;
ist fut. "5^^; 2d fut. '^mrfu -k; imp. ^?T^w-wf; pot. "?rdiT,
^T^ ; bened. "JT^TW , ^Tl^ ; cond. ^SRWiT -IT. Pass. ^Ff^m, Caus.
TfT^irfTr. Desid. fTTHr^rri -W. Freq. "irrJT^^:, HH^IPri, TTT?Ti%.
"rnr ^ to heat,' ' to perform penance,'
Pres. inn^ ; ist praet. 'UriuicT ; 2d praet. w^ ; 3d praet. ^rwrr;
ist fut. "rTFTT; 2d fut. ITX^^ ; imp. Tfxinrf; pot. Tn^TT; bened,
Ff
S18 VERBS.
ir^ ; cond. ^drmrMrf. Pass. Tfiq^. Caus. iTT^nfrf. Desid.
rririmri. Freq. rildmri, WTrTfTT.
"jTi * to satisfy/ * to be satisfied.'
As belonging to the class gmH^^ it should take the form of
the third praeterite which that class requires; and as a verb
of the fourth conjugation, it should not insert ^. In both
respects, however, it offers optional deviations. It may be
conjugated also in the fifth, sixth, and tenth conjugations, to
which the different forms should perhaps be restricted : they
are always, however, given together in this conjugation.
Pres. ijuifrt ; ist praet. WflWi^; 2d praet. inr^ ("^ij^'j:, Tnrfl'^,
AA\% t{(A\^); 3d praet. ^^I^W, ^^nnffi^, WrTT^TfT, ^(^jmOil^;
1st fut. W^, W^j irfSwT ; 2d fut. TTX^^, ^mifri, wfR'arfrT ; imp.
Tnq^; pot. "5"^; bened. "H'orn^; cond. ^hhhSh^, ^<?f4Mit^, ^snrfqTanr.
Pass. 1^. Caus. wt^. Desid. finntfiT, frTW^^, frirlfqMfrf.
Freq. Tn^^xtr^, ITC^^TftfF, dOHfS.
^, ^ to be proud,^ is similarly conjugated.
^ ' to decay/
This root changes its final to ^ in the non-conjugational
tenses, except in the second praeterite.
Pres. ^Ntt; ist praet. ^SRfhnr; 2d praet. f^^ ; 3d praet.
^H^T^; 1st fut. ^TTTT; 2d fut. ^^T^; imp. c(Nrrf; pot. ^^ ;
bened. ^nrhr; cond. ^^T^Enr. Caus. ^TiRfjT. Desid. f^^'^Mrf or
r<<I^H. Freq. ^f{li|ri, ^^^flfri or ^^.
So »f!^ ' to injure,' and (?fi^ ' to embrace ;' but the latter
takes two forms in the non-conjugational tenses; as, w^¥,
v4c4l<!H ; "^TTT, c6ldl ; T^^MH, c5T^T^ ; "^^^ WHflu ; and 4I(^U(h
or vTTi^i^rt.
^ ^ to shine.'
This verb optionally inflects the third person of the third
praeterite like the same in the passive voice : see wnr, p. 173.
Pres, ^hq^; ist praet. ^<flmri ; 2d praet. f^^; 3d praet.
^tfxr? or "^r^tf^ ; 1st fut. ^ftfqin ; 2d fut. ^Mxraj^; imp. <{lujril;
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 219
pot. ^-^i bened. ^tlW^ ; cond. ^ST^ftftrnnr. Caus. ^hroi[fi[.
Desid. f^tftri^. Freq. ^^t^ff, ^^hitflf or ^^.
"^ ^ to oppress/ ^ to injure.'
This optionally substitutes V or ^ for the final (rule 213,
c,8),
Pres. "^T^rfw; ist praet. ^"^^W; 2d praet. w^t^; 3d praet.
^^[^; 1st fut. '^trm, "5^, ^If^HI ; 2d fut. "?fHT^lT^ ift^fw;
imp. 1^ ; pot. i^T^;; bened. |^TTT ; cond. ^^"iP^mff^, 'smt^lt;.
Pass. "5^. Caus. "^rV^irfrr. Desid. g^V^^Mfd, Jlf^f^. Freq.
<0<l^ri, ^"V^iHtt, ^>^>fHi or ^>^ftf^.
So fniT^ ^ to be kind,' and "om^ * to vomit.'
fpf ' to dance.'
This verb optionally takes the augment ^ before ^ in the
non-conjugational tenses.
Pres. "Jprfff; ist praet. "^f^lTff; 2d praet. ^nr^ ; 3d praet.
^R^fff; 1st fut. Trftcn; 2d fut. "?rf§TqfrT or HrfSfrt; imp. ^fJWW;
pot. "^T^; bened. "^TiT; cond. 'SRft^ or ^R?#7^. Pass.
1^. Caus. tI^. Desid. ffUP^MPri or fir^ji^Pri. Freq.
H0«JK4ri, HlO^rtlPri, ^H^^^.
tj^ ^ to go.'
This forms the third singular of the third praeterite in ^.
It does not take the augment ^.
Pres. TT?i^ ; ist praet. ^qtTd ; 2d praet. ^ ; 3d praet. ^^rqif^
(-^Mr^lril, vMMrWrt) ; ist fut. "q^ ; 2d fut. HWK ; imp. "q^nif;
pot. xraiT; bened. Mr^fly ; cond. ^HTi^nr. Pass. "q^. Caus.
TT^AjPrf. Desid. fwff. Freq. mMtl>i, m^^ or TTT^fW-
"jq ' to nourish.'
This is the first verb of a class which in this conjugation
requires the terminations of the first praeterite to be substituted
for those of the third, when the radical vowel is unchanged
(rule 190, /. p. 125).
Pres. 'g^ff; ist praet. iHg«lrt^; 2d praet. "gqtq (^f^:) ;
F f 2
220
VERBS.
3d pr^t. ^sf^^ ('^rgwiTf, ^r^^) ; ist fut. ift^ ; 2d fut. itMtt ;
imp. TJBjH; pot. "5^; bened. ^WTW; cond. ^nft^nr. Pass. 'JorS'.
Caus. ift^fiT. Desid. "g^^fw. Freq. Tftj^, ^>^tfw, ifm^fF.
The class gmfr^ consists of the following verbs.
^sro to throw.
T^ to assemble.
^V to increase.
^ to be angry.
^ to embrace.
"^ to become thin.
^ to be angry,
fp!^ to become moist,
f^ to let loose.
"^ to be hungry.
"WH to be agitated,
gtr to disturb.
7TV to be greedy.
«Rf to let loose.
f^ to throw.
i!jM to hurt.
^ir^T to perish.
im to toss.
IW to hurt.
o
TT^ to be pleased.
inT to satisfy or be satisfied.
IT^ to thirst.
c
^ to toss.
w^ to become bad.
^ to burn.
1^1 to fall.
inr to weigh,
grr to break.
^ to be perplexed or foolish.
XTff to take pains*
^ to disturb.
T>T to hurt.
^ to disturb.
^ to be angry.
c57 to roll on the ground.
cgxf to be lost.
cj^ to covet.
"^^ to fix.
f^ to convey.
^ to cast off.
^V to be clean or pure.
3R to become dry.
f%^ to embrace,
fq'^ to become perfect,
ft^r^ to be kind or bland,
fe^ to sweat.
^"q to rejoice.
^ to oppress or wrong.
Many of these verbs, however, take other forms also in the
third praeterite, as belonging originally perhaps to different
conjugations ; but they are now so blended, that they are
usually placed together under this conjugation, however incon-
sistent vv'ith their cletssification under the head gmH^ ; see ^f^.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 221
ift ' to please or be pleased.'
It is a verb also of the first and ninth conjugations.
Pres. ■rfhrn; 1st praet. ^TTlhrfT ; 2d praet. fxrj(ft; 3d praet.
^?^; ist fut. ^m; 2d fut. ^^; imp. Tfhnrf ; pot. "rfftir;
bened. p^ ; cond. ^^Ilmri. Pass. ifN^. Caus. Hiil^jPri or
ifNnrfrr. Desid. fxnfrqfrr -^. Freq. ^iftiTw, ^inftiiT, ^^.
So >ft Uo uphold/ i;(t Uo drink/ ^ ^ to injure/ i^ 'to
choose/ &c.
^ ^ to understand.'
This forms the third person singular of the third prseterite
optionally in ^ (see ^). When the final is changed by the
rules of Sandhi before a sibilant, '^ becomes vr.
Pres. ^«iw 5 ist praet. ^T^WiT ; 2d praet. "^^ ; 3d praet.
^rq^ or w|^ (^iff^rnrf, wwir) ; ist fut. '^tirr; 2d fut. ntw^ ;
imp. ^|xiT?rf ; pot. "^i^ ; bened. M^^ ; cond. ^OTlWff.
For the other forms, see "^^ first conjugation, p. 174.
This drops its nasal before ^, and in the third praeterite.
Pres. >3^irffT; ist praet. ^w^^TtT; 2d praet. '^^; 3d praet.
W^JSfnr; ist fut. Hf^; 2d fut. Wn^iuifri ; imp. >3r^; pot.
>j^^; bened. >T^xnTT; cond. ^r4%^lT. Pass. >j^^.
For the other forms, see ^, first conjugation, p. 189.
JT^ ' to be mad/ ' to be dehghted/ ^ to be intoxicated.^
As belonging to the class ^MHlfc^, the vowel is made long
in the conjugational tenses (rule 215, e),
Pres. Hl^Pri; ist praet. '^nrrair; 2d praet. imr^; 3d praet.
^RT^^; Tst fut. ?Tf^; 2d fut. HPt^mfd ; imp. ttRJW; pot.
Hrdw; bened. JTmff; cond. ^^TRf^WiT . Pass. H^. Caus. m^^.
Desid. fann^MPd. Freq. HIHtlri, ^TT^fw, »TT*Tfw.
iT^ ' to know' or ^ to respect.'
Pres. »r^ ; ist praet. -^HHt^d; 2d praet. w^ ; 3d praet. ^^;
ist fut. ^vX\ ; 2d fut. »r^ ; imp. H"^ ; pot. ^^ ; bened.
VERBS.
ihfh? ; cond. wf^W. Pass, tt^tw. Caus. HiH^Prf. Desid. iiVRwk,
Freq. HTHvtiH, HIHfif.
■ftr^ (f^rf'T^T) ^ to be unctuous/
This verb takes the Guna substitute of the vowel in all the
persons of the conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^fiT; ist prset. ^3W?rTT; 2d praet. "fi^; 3d praet.
^rfiT^rT; ist fut. Mf^m ; 2d fut. ^"orfw ; imp. ^?nr ; pot. ^W;
bened. firerTW; cond. '^f^'on^. Pass. f?ra^. Caus. ^^xrfff.
Desid. f*T^f^f(fr or ^H^^^^^^ri. Freq. ^frow, ^^.
^ * to be silly/ ^ to be bewildered.'
It is conjugated like 7^, &c.
Pres. ^^tt; ist praet. ^^rpnr; 2d praet. grft^ {^^tr^? yrfe
or *^H\rt% gf%^ or ^^); 3d praet. w§^; ist fut. jf^T,
jffeT or HlP^ril ; 2d fut. jft^ftfT or ifffV^rfrf ; imp. ^prj ; pot.
g^; bened. g^irf; cond. ^ift^nr or ^fnrtfigrHnT. Pass. g^.
Caus. hI^mPh. Desid. ggf^qPfi or ^HlP^NPrT, gf^fw or gHtHjPri.
Freq. H^pr^, *flg^1 Ph, *f^>3v or iMf^.
gv ^ to fight.'
Pres. "501^; 1st praet. ^TfXiqTT; 2d praet. gg^; 3d praet.
^Tfg (^rgwTiTr) ; ist fut. xptifT; 2d fut. -^tmi^; imp. "gunrf;
pot. ^^ ; bened. ttIt^ ; cond. ^nftSTW. Pass. "iJ«IW. Caus.
TflvirfTT. Desid. fgw^. Freq. xfrg^, "ifhfrfw.
^, ' to engage in devotion/ is similarly conjugated : Pres.
Tjiir^ ; 3d praet. ^rpi; ist fut. ^flw, &c.
T!^ ' to colour.'
Pres. T5?rff ; ist praet. ^ijM A ; imp. T^mtf ; pot. Tl^ir.
The rest as in T^, ^tmane-pada, of the first conjugation,
p. 177.
T.V * to hurt.^
This verb inserts *f in the second praeterite, but optionally
before the augment ^: it takes ^ optionally in the futures
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
and conditional. In the third praeterite it belongs to the
class gmH^.
Pres. TXiifTT ; ist praet. '3rT:an|;; 2d praet. tTT^ (t^^:? T?f?inr
or tt:^, ixT^^^T^, ^); 3d praet. ^m^IT^ (^iT^nrf) ; I St fut. xjVrn
or T;irT ; ad fut. TJ^rorftr or T:STriT ; imp. jjx^ ; pot. "T^; bened.
irumr; cond. ^snrfVsni;, wrr^T^. Pass.XiflW. Caus.Ti>Rfff. Desid.
n^l^PuMfrf. Freq. TKWff, &c.
TIV (tt^) tr. ^ to propitiate ;' intr. ^ to be finished^ or
' accomplished.^
Pres. TTWfw; ist praet. ^nT«n^; 2d praet. T?nV; 3d praet.
"^JtTwtrr; ist fiit. TT^; 2d fut. TI^IT; imp. TT^; pot. TTWrT;
bened. TI«m^; cond. 'ilUfWff. Pass, irnzi^. Cans, nv^fir.
Desid. ftwffT or ftnwfrf. Freq. I^KIUiri, &c.
■qrv and WT^ in the same senses are similarly conjugated.
<W * to covet.'
It takes ^ optionally in the first future, absolutely in the
second.
Pres. "pywrfw; ist praet. "^sn^wTr^; 2d praet. cJcTtH ; 3d praet.
^TH^TTT; ist fut. TiUn, c5tfW»rr ; 2d fut. <5V5TGrfw; imp. <5«tw;
pot. "<5^^; bened. cJ^TTTT; cond. "^rcyt"5T5TlT. Pass. 7^i^Jt, Cans.
<5^H^. Desid. "^cg-*^. Freq. "?fr«5«rff, Htcytfiff.
f^ ' to be/ ^ to exist.'
Pres. f^irw; ist praet. ^rfWrT; 2d praet. f^f^; 3d praet.
^^; ist fut. ^^; 2d fut. ^?9rff; imp. fWrTT; pot. f^dw;
bened. ^T^; cond. ^^j^TBTrT. Pass. f%?r^.
For the rest, see f^ ^ to know,' second conjugation.
"gr*T (w^) ' to pierce' or ' injure.'
This changes the semivowel and following ^ to ^ in the
conjugational tenses, and also in the benedictive, and before the
terminations of the second praeterite beginning with vowels.
Pres. r^uifd ; ist praet. ^^rf^TZTfT; 2d praet. f^anv (f^fr^rff:) ;
3d praet. ^^r^TTr^; ist fut. ^nn; 2d fut. ^TWfw; imp. i^v^;
224 VERBS,
pot. fr^; bened. f^TTT; cond. ^T^i?jn!;. Pass. fro^. Caus.
^nv^, Desid. f^cqrt^rd. Freq. ^f^vrk, ^T^nltflT, ^TT^fif.
^nfi * to be able.'
This is also a root of the fifth conjugation, q. v. According
to some, it may take ^.
Pres. 5(<wrri -^ ; 1st praet. ^ii^|«Wf^ -tt ; 2d praet. ^nrra, "^ ;
3d praet. -5(^r<=hff, ^^T^T^'^, '^qpr^, ^r^rfe; ist fut. ^m, ^iPohrtt;
2d fut. 5l«^rd -w, ^^Kwfir -^ ; imp. "^r^, ^(^Mrif; pot. -^r^ -IT ;
bened. "^T^TTTt;, ^[T^, ^f^t^; cond. ^H^[^ri^ -IT, 'S^rO*^!^ -IT.
Pass. -^r^. Caus. "^TFRfw. Desid. f^fw -^. Freq. ^|^(4Mri,
^ (^) ' to be tranquil.'
This is the first of a class of which the vowel is made long
in the conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^ii^^fri ; ist praet. ^sn^nwn^; 2d praet. ^t^th (%^f :) ;
3d praet. '^r^?^ or sh^ihIcI^; ist fut. ^fHrfr, "^TRH; 2d fut. ^iPHmfri,
^terfrr ; imp. '^U^ ; pot. ^1^; bened. "^rRTlT ; cond. -ii^rfHurr^,
-ii^iWtt;. Pass. ^iwr^. Caus. "^n^Trfif. Desid. f^fn^flT, %5mfTr.
Freq. ^l^iw^d, l^T^rfnT.
The other roots of this class are,
^R to be sad. ^J^ to wander or whirl.
T3^ to be patient. WT to be weary.
nmr to be distressed. jt5[ to be mad.
^ to tame.
f%^ ' to embrace/ ' to adhere to.'
In the first sense this verb inserts ^ before the terminations
of the first praeterite in the third : in any other it does so
optionally. It may also take the j^tmane-pada in the third
praeterite, and ^ in the third person singular. In the sense
of embracing, ^t is usually prefixed.
Pres. fV^rfir ; ist praet. ^^srf^xqi^; 2d praet. f^T^^ ; 3d praet.
wHa Hj f\^ ^f%^ or ^rf%fT? (^^P^Hjlrif, 'ilO^HITT, ^f^^Tt, "^f%f ) ;
1st fut. -^T; 2d fut. ^Vi^Pd ; imp. f%Tai^; pot. f^^; bened.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 225
P^mir^; cond. ^r#^n^. Pass, fa^rt. Caus. ^irqfir. Desid.
f^rf%^. Freq. %f^^^, %^.
/ ■
^ "^^ ' to bear.'
Pres. ^'^Pri ; ist praet. ^ra^; ad praet. ^tot^ ; 3d praet.
^3Rn^; ist fut. ^^^M or ^>^T ; 2d fut. ^rf^^ifif; imp. ^H^^;
pot. ^!W; bened. ^^IH ; cond. ^raf^"Bn^.
For the rest, see ^, first conjugation.
ft^r (f^^) * to sew.'
This makes the vowel long in the conjugational tenses, and
before t^,
Pres. ^fNfrr; ist praet. wNt^; 2,d praet. "ftr^^; 3d praet.
^sra^; 1st fut. ^Pcjrii; 2d fut. ^P^mfri; imp. ^'Nf ; pot.
^ft^; bened. iffNrnT; cond. wfrsTr^. Pass. ^D«Mrf. Caus.
iimiPd. Desid. ftrftrfV^W. Freq. Jifl«=Hri, flMlPH.
f^^, ^ to eject saliva,' is similarly conjugated.
"^^to bear,' as children.
Pres. ^^; ist praet. 4jij^ri ; 2d praet. ;g^ ('«gPM^) ; 3d
praet. wtF, "sraf^ ; ist fut. ihm, ^TiTT ; 2d fut. ^ft«q^, ^P^uj^ ;
imp. ^^nrf ; pot. ^w; bened. ih:^ ; cond. ^M^lmri, ^^^P^mri.
Pass. ^3?^; ist fut. viP^dl ; 3d praet. ^rorfV.
For the other forms, see "5 first conjugation, and "^ second
conjugation.
tetV ^ to destroy.'
Verbs ending in ^ lose it before the it of this conjugation
(rule 215, c?) : in other tenses 'STT is substituted for the final.
Pres. wfir ; ist praet. ^ii^i(^; 2d praet. ^a^ (^^0 ; 3^ praet.
^Rrnr or ^gnrrahr; ist fut. min; 2d fut. ^m^irfw; imp. ^-g;
pot. 1^71^; bened. WTci;; cond. ^^rar^li;. Pass. -^t^^. Caus.
^mnifTT. Desid. f^iTRrfw. Freq. i^hr^, wmrfif or ^T^frr.
In like manner are conjugated "sft ^ to cut,' ^ ^ to cut,' and
^ ' to pare.' ^ has but one form, ^?^TiT, in the third prae-
terite.
VERBS.
^ ' to abandon/
For the changes of the final, see xiif, first conj., p. 176.
Pres. WrfJ^; ist praet. ^rffiqif; 2d praet. ^r^ (^^W) ;
3d praet. ^(^ (^iJHjiril) ; ist fiit. ^r?T; 2d fut. ^r^K; imp.
^•i^ rfi ; pot. ^WW ; bened. m^ ; cond. ^w^ir. Cans, ^nt-
xrfrr -W. Desid. fti^^. Freq. fiO-ij^Kjri, ^^J^^IPri, ^rfbrfl.
Fifth Conjugation,
216. In the conjugational tenses the verbs of this class
affix the syllable "g to the base.
a. Before those terminations which reject t^ the vowel is
changed to the Guna letter ^, which combines with a follow-
ing vowel, agreeably to the rules of Sandhi. Before the vowel
of any other termination "5r becomes "^ when the root ends
with a vowel ; but T^ if it ends with a consonant, with which
•T combines. Before the consonant of a termination not con-
taining XT, the "g" of g is unchanged, but it may be dropped
before ^ or tr, if it be not preceded by a conjunct consonant.
b. The termination of the second person singular of the
imperative f^ is dropped after g attached to a final vowel in
the root : if attached to a final radical consonant, f^ is retained.
c. The type of the class is "g'sr ^ to extract,^ as a juice or
spirit: of which the conjugational tenses in both forms are
the following :
Present tense, ^ I extract (the Soma) juice,' &c.
Parasmai-pada. Atmane-pada.
l^frf^ IT^* IT^
W^ ^^: wf^f^
1^ l^^l^ IT'^T^
First praeterite, * I have extracted juice,^ &c.
^^W^: ^^TfJTT ^^
^^^^ 'Sl^lff ^!TH^
^^^ ^T^T^
FIFTH CONJUGATION. 227
Imperative, ' May I extract juice/ &c.
1^ ?1^ 1^=^
IT"
^H'^nI
«HMIH^
«HTV||
1^^
^•<{lril
^l^^in
Potential, ^ I may extract juice/ &c.
W": f^ff w^^Tff
The other tenses are not dissimilar from those of 1 of the
second conjugation. It takes ^ in the third praeterite of the
Parasmai-pada, and, according to some, optionally in the
j^tmane-pada also.
2d praet. "f(m"c(, ^^ ; 3d praet. ^RrrsftTT, "^^rt?, ^^^rf^ ; ist fut.
Htm; 2d fut. ^fNfiT -W ; bened. ^^TiT, ^rWf ; cond. WNW -IT.
Pass. ^xr^. Cans. ^T^rrfw ; 3d praet. w^W?^. Desid. ^WMPd -^.
Freq. ^^^5 ^iMtOfrf, ^^cT.
There are not many verbs in this conjugation. The fol-
lowing are amongst those of most frequent occurrence. A
few which have been met with in previous conjugations, are
repeated here for the sake of the difference which their inflex-
ions present.
^r5{^^ to pervade.'
For the effect of the Anubandha ^, see p. 106.
Pres. "^r^ (^nf^5 ^^r^^) ; ist praet. "^T^; 2d praet.
^H^r (^MM^nri, ^IhT^iI) ; 3d praet. ^TTT? (^TTWTWf), 'srrf^I^
(^if^miril) ; ist fut. ^TFT, ^r%rTT; 2d fut. w^w, '5r%HT^;
imp, ^"^ ; pot. %Sig^ri ; bened. 'Hp^mly, ^rsft^ ; cond. ^STT^nr,
'i^lf^mH. Pass. -^^i4ri. Cans. WT^PTfiT. Desid. ^rf^rf^T^.
^q (^nr^) Ho obtain.'
For the effect of 05, see p. 106.
Pres. ^nrftfrT (^STTgir:, -HJ^^^H^) ; ist praet. -xiM^rf; 2d praet.
^mr ("srrcr^:, ^rg:); 3d praet. ^smnr; ist fut. -mrn; 2d fut.
^r^Eirfir; imp. ^rT?ftw (^T^) ; pot. ^T^^rT; bened. ^nTJrni[;
G g 2
VERBS.
cond. '«!m:MH. Pass. VHim^. Caus. (with T? prefixed) yiMnPff.
Desid. ^"MPri.
^V ('^) ^ to increase.*
Pres. (^^Vfir (^fff:, "^^f^) ; ist praet. ^nft^; imp. ^W;
pot. ^fTO^.
For the rest, see "^^ second conjugation.
^ ('^) ^ to injure.'
Pres. oMin Ph, f^; ist praet. ^r^"Vfr, ^T^ir; imp. ^^iifhr,
wirf ; pot. "fS'^rnr, <jih1 h .
The rest Hke "^ ^ to do :' see eighth conjugation.
^ff^ * to injure.*
This verb and fvf^, ^ to go/ drop the semivowel before 'g ;
and the influence of ^ is suspended in the conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^li^Pri ; ist praet. ^r^whT; 2d praet. "^^RF; 3d praet.
^cjljcflri^; ist fut. "<jP<w H I ; 2,d fut. "^Ijsnqfw; imp. <j.iin j ; pot.
^xrn^; bened. fcrjani^; cond. -^r^friTsnT. Pass, '^m^, Caus.
<*U«<^Pri.
fq (f^) ' to collect.'
The palatal becomes optionally the guttural in the redu-
plicate base, in the second praeterite, and desiderative.
Pres. f^HiPri, f%g^; ist praet. ^^rfM^H, ^rfNr^; 2d praet.
fcixjin or "N^fiFT, f^ or f%^ ; 3d praet. ^5T%^, ^T^ ; ist fut.
wr; 2d fut. ^mPd -^; imp. "N^fVw, f^^wf; pot. f^«JMIH^,
P^rcflri ; bened. "^hrnr, ^i^ ; cond. ^3T%^ -w. Pass. ^qh|¥.
Caus. ^TiPTfir. Desid. P^x/ImPh or P^ohl^Prf. Freq. "^^N^,
^ ^ to deceive.*
The nasal is rejected before "5, and before ti. In the second
praeterite it is optionally conjugated as if it ended in a single
consonant (rule 188, k),
Pres. ^\ftf^ (^^0 ; ist praet. ^tftw; 2d praet. ^^ (^i^:,
^>TH ; ^^fwT, "^fw^; ^fVvRj ^^) I 3^ praet. ^<^*41»t;^; ist fut.
^fnrm ; 2d fut. ^fwifrT ; imp. ^^tw ; pot. ^^Tn^^; bened.
FIFTH CONJUGATION. 229
^wni^; cond, ^Mr^r**<U4ri^. Pass. ^witI'. Caus. ^T>rrfiT. Desid.
f^^frvpETfir, fV^frr or >fh^. Freq. ^pj^^q?.
^ (-g*^) ^ to shake' or * tumble.'
Pr^. "yfVffT, ^^; ist praet. ^T^^Ti;, ^r^T^' ^^ P^^*' 1^^^»
5^^ ; 3d praet. "^qtir, ^r\ft? ; ist fut. \ft?n; 2d fut. vVsifTT -^ ;
imp. 'jFftH, "g^T; pot. vg^, "g^^^; bened. v^TT^, >lt^; cond.
^nfN^ -cT. Pass. VT?^. Caus. >J»Rfrr or VN^Pd. Desid. ^V^fw.
Freq. ^V'nr^, ^hr^tfrT, ^WVfw.
V (y^) * to shake' or ^ tumble.*
It inserts ^ before the usual terminations optionally, except
'^ and TT of the second praeterite, where it is absolute.
Pres. "Wtftfir, ^w; ist praet. ^^^V?!^, ^'^^; 2d praet. HVT^
(5>rf^, ^^, HVf^), H^ ; 3d praet. ^IVT^TT, ^ivf^ or ^r^;
1st fut. vf^rn, VtWT; 2d fut. vf^Hrfw -^, >fMw -w; imp. "^Tt^,
vftTT ; pot. Y3^5 H^ 5 bened. VTrnr, vf^t^g, >ft^ ; cond.
^nrlrcnr -it, w^fVsn^ -w.
The other forms are the same as in the preceding.
TJ ' to delight.'
Pres. ij-nnrri ; ist praet. ^rjrifti^; 2d praet. xnnt:; 3d praet.
wm^; ist fut -qfr; 2d fut. i^oqfrf ; imp. Y^'^ P^*-
"J^Hillft^; bened. finrnf ; cond. ^nrfbqTT. Pass, fsnrk. Caus.
i:iK7Tfir. Desid. 'J'ltfjr. Freq. ^[jft^i^, ^Tl^fff, ^t.
ftr (fJT^) ^o throw.'
This substitutes "m for its final in all the non-conjugational
tenses except the second praeterite .^tmane-pada, and before if.
Pres. fqrftfrf, f^wk; ist praet. ^rf^T^fh^, ^fH'^W; 2d praet.
TTi^, frrr^; 3d praet. 'STJmfti^, ^RTCT ; ist fut. Tnwi; 2d fut.
Hiwfd -7^; imp. fk^, fk^; pot. fir'JiITf^, PhhIh ; bened.
H\mi{, HTfw; cond. ^^RT^^nr -w. Pass. ifhi^. Caus. TtimiPri.
Desid. fVrPRfff -^. Freq. ^?ft^, Wltfff, ^^.
230 VERBS.
TTV ^ to accomplish,* * to injure/
In the second sense it substitutes ij for the radical vowel
before the vowel terminations and the augment ^ of the
second praeterite.
Pres. tmrfrr; ist praet. xSUHliI ; 2d praet. TXR (tTTVJ:,
TTTftm, Tnfv^ or "brj:, "tfV% TfVr^) ; imp. TT?ftw ; pot. TT^iTT?^.
For the rest, see TTV, fourth conjugation.
T (^) 'to choose.'
This optionally prolongs the augment ^, except before "^ in
the second praeterite : before the other consonantal termina-
tions of the same it does not take ^. It optionally inserts ^
in the benedictive, and may change its vowel to "31 in that
tense, the benedictive, and third praeterite, i^tmane-pada. In
the latter it has different forms.
Pres. jiinPri, Y^ > ^^^ P^^*- "-H^nrift^, 'ij^inri ; 3d praet. ^^R
(^^toj ^rw^:, Tf : or ^^^:, ^^), ^Ri: or ^ (^f^) ; 3d praet.
<g<mOri^, x^fiLK, ^^i5i¥, ^^r^, '^Tft ; ist fut. -^ftjn, ^^hn ; 2d
fut. -^fxycffTf -w, mC^^A -^ ; imp. Y^> IW^ 5 pot. f^^,
^Ijcflri ; bened. fwcm^ or ^3§T1^, ^It^, ^^tF, J^ ; cond.
SHc<ri,«4ri^ -TT, 'smTCNrT -7T. Pass, f^wk, Caus. ^c^frf -w. Desid.
rc^^n^Mfri -% r^^OMfri -W, f^fw -^. Freq. %^hl^, Ml^rf,
^nn {W%) 'to be able.^
Pres. ^i^Pri ; ist praet. ^^^ir; imp. ^#5; pot. ^^^.
For the rest, see ^nF, fourth conjugation.
^ (^5^) ' to cover.'
This inserts ^ optionally, except in the second future and
conditional where its insertion is absolute, and may prolong it
when inserted.
Pres. fjunpH, ^^; 1st praet. ^^JxiftlT, ^Rf^; 2d praet.
fT^cIR, ITO^; 3d praet. ^IrflOrl^ or ^sren^, ^wtoj ^T^rt^F,
^Wl^ or "^Tfpf ; ist fut. ^T, %if<:H I, inOrii; 2d fut. wft^rfiT -^,
H^Nrfw-^; imp. 4<|iuig, ^^uril; pot. Tf^^HT^;, «f<HlH ; bened.
SIXTH CONJUGATION. 231
^rtn^, ^Ff^, 4Hfltfl» ; cond. SH^Pcuiri^ -W, SH<y(Ou(H^ -W. Pass.
W^' Caus. WRTTfw. Desid. fri^ft^Mrri -W, friidOMrri -^.
Freq. in^Fn^, HKyiOfri, WTCrft.
Sixth Conjugation.
^17. This class is characterised by the insertion, before the
terminations of the conjugational tenses, of "^j that is, of the
short vowel % with the effect of precluding the operation
of an indicatory "g; and the vowel of the root therefore is
unchanged either to the GuAa or Vriddhi element.
a. The terminations of the conjugational tenses undergo
the same modifications as in the first conjugation.
b. Verbs ending with vowels change 1^ ^ to ^, '3' ^ to "3^,
^ to ft^, and "^ to ^, before the ^ of the conjugation.
c. A class of verbs called from the first of them JT^nf^
insert a nasal before the finals in the conjugational tenses.
d. The class of verbs termed ^CTf^ extend the prohibition
of the Guna or Vriddhi change to the non-conjugational tenses,
except the first and third persons singular of the second
praeterite.
e. The type of the conjugation is ^, ^ to inflict pain.* It
takes both Padas.
Present, * I inflict pain/ &c.
^^
rt^N:
j^tit:
#
d<«"^^
^•rI
IS^
5^-
w^
5^^
.1^
^^
J^fTT
5^:
I^^
g^^
#^
I^
First praeterite, ' I ha
Lve inflicted
pain,' &c.
^f^*\
vinf^iq
•«<nr;i*i
"^a^
^sij<mn$
^m:
^Hi^A
'H^<rT
^^T^^^:
-5{^^V||
^r^s4
-Hi\
^fjt^ril
^^^
^rj^
-ifrj^rii
^^^
Imperative, ^ May
I inflict pain,* &c.
^Tf^
g^T?
5^T17
3t
g^T^
l^n^
^
^^
I^W
g^
1^
g^^
W^l
g^
^^
g^
3^
g^
2S2 VERBS.
Potential, ^ I may inflict pain/ &c.
I^ 1^^ ^
1^: -^ ^
t^ 1^ 1^*
The other tenses are,
2d praet. "gift^, wj^; 3d praet. '^nftRftw, 5srg^ ('^rprm,
^jrWd); ist fut. iftWT ; 2,d fut. ifh^RffT -^ ; bened. "pm^,
ft^; cond. '^nftr^l^ -Tf. Pass. -pr^. Caus. ift^Trfw. Desid.
gjK<rri -^. Freq. iftpT^, iftrftf^.
^ ^ to wish.'
This makes ^^, ^ to wish/ in the conjugational tenses. It
may insert ^ in the first future.
Pres. ^^fd ; ist praet. ^^aeiT ; 2d praet. ^^ ; 3d praet. ^^;
ist fut. idfMril or JTSi; 2d fut. ij^rfif; imp. '3^^; pot. 3|^7r;
bened. ?[STnT ; cond. ^^rm;^. Pass. ^[bt^. Caus. ^J^irfw.
^ (^) * to sound/ * to coo.*
According to some, the vowel is unchanged in the non-
conjugational tenses.
Pres. '^^; ist praet. SH*^d ; 2d praet. ^^; 3d praet. ^^;
1st fut. ^f^, frrr; 2d fut. ^Hiuirt, '^^; imp. '^^; pot.
^^ ; bened. ^|f^tF, "^^t? ; cond. w^jfTBTrT, -il^«ld. Pass. "sgci^.
Caus. chHupH. Desid. -jcjiMd. Freq. xTicMi'ri or chloM^'^.
■^ ^ to be crooked.'
This is the first of a class of verbs which retain the vowel
unchanged, except before w^.
Pres. "fdw; ist praet. "^T^Tr^; 2d praet. ^^^ (ff^^ ; 3d
praet. ^^jld^; ist fut. "^frcTT; 2d fut. ^duifn -, imp. "5^;
pot. "^^; bened. ^<wirt^; cond. ^T^roTf^. Pass. <^^^. Caus.
•^^^Pd. Desid. ^-^nfMPd. Freq. '^1<*W^, "its^.
The class consists of a number of verbs having, with few
exceptions, a medial "^ : the most useful of them are.
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
'^ to contract. ^ to bind.
"^ to be childish. fT^ to throw.
^ to be thick. "j^ to make a riot.
ipf to sound. "5? to inflict pain.
T[S to preserve. ^7 to cut.
ij? to make effort. "j^ to abandon.
^ \ ^f^ to bud, to expand.
"57 t- to cut. ^ to throb.
^^ ' to draw fiirrows/ ' to plough.'
This takes different forms in the third praeterite.
Pres. "^^ -w ; ist praet. ^st^t^-it; 2d praet. "^rait, "^^5
3d praet. ^TsRT^hr, ^HBTC^ or ^Wf^, and W^ or ^<*«;jrt ;
ist fut. "oistT or ^iST; 2d fut. chaSPri -W or W^ffif -W ; imp.
'^'3? «^Mril ; pot. "^iT -If ; bened. ojiU{ir|^, <*«|Ty or ««{)» ; cond.
^rar^ -W, 'TTfhy^ff;^ -TT. Pass, f^, Caus. "^t^. Desid.
f^^^^. Freq. x<0<^mri, ^^^ft.
"^ ' to throw.'
Pres. f^RTifH; ist praet. "^rf^njT^; 2d praet. "^^FR (•^^i.tj:,
x|oh^:) ; 3d praet. 'STcFT^TT; ist fut. cjiftifT or ofcOril ; 2d fut.
^n^mPri or chOmPri; imp. f^RTrj ; pot. f^Tj^;; bened. "^h^Tr^;
cond. ^ntftron^, Wsr6^. Pass. chl-i4ri. Caus. «*KHPri. Desid.
r*l<+Pl.MPri. Freq. ^^M^, ^T^#.
IT ' to swallow.'
This verb optionally substitutes c5 for the t which is derived
from the radical final, except before xr.
Pres. fxRfff, fJlt^PH ; ist praet. ^JTG^, wf^n^ff; 2d praet.
WIT^, WTTc^; 3d praet. xSillOr^, ^H^JIc^lrl^; ist fut. JlPui, ipQm,
Vfc^m, Jlc^lril ; 2d fut. JT PhutPh, Jr^TSR^T, J|P<*iU|fw, Jlc^lujPfr ; imp.
fiTCJ, fncJ^; pot. fjfb^, fJT^; bened. jfl^IW; cond. -iJ^iPi^mrl^,
^3rin3mH, ^mfcTeri!;, ^Mc^laCrT. Pass. ifh^. Caus. J| K^Pd,
mTJUffT. Desid. "ftnTtofiT, fwiPc^MPri. Freq. ^n^R, »rFTf#.
H h
234 VERBS.
^W (^) ' to hurt/
Pres. ^wfif; ist praet. W^pnT; 2d praet. '^^t ; 3d praet.
^R-^fi^; ist fut. ^#?TT; 2d fut. ^ff^HrfrT or '^fw ; imp. ^iT^;
pot. '^W; bened. ^^WTi^; cond. ^r^ff^, ^^r^r^W. Pass. '^m^.
Caus. xi^^Pri. Desid. f^^ft^ or fq^fw. Freq. "N^m?,
Tj ' to praise.^
This root takes ^ (rule igi, b ; see also ^ &c. in the second
conjugation).
Pres. ^^Ph ; ist praet. ^TiT; 2d praet. tjnm ; 3d praet.
'^^T^fT, ^g^it;; istfut. -yrf^Trr/ jP^hi; 2d fut. irfrarfff, "^^^rf^ ;
imp. "g^J ; pot. g^7i[ ; bened. ^XTrrf ; cond. wrfw^? ^"gfTHTif .
Pass. ^pcr^. Caus. -^mirflf. Desid, j.ji(fw. Freq. "N^^J^ff, ^>N^.
ziT, ' to praise/ is similarly conjugated; so is f 'to sound.^
wxr ' to satisfy.'
Pres. "5^; ist praet. -iiijUr^; 3d praet. ^nnff?^; imp. "^ttj;
pot. "5^-
For the rest, see WtT, fourth conjugation.
OT ' to be firm.'
Pres. ^^fri ; ist praet. '^Ig'^ri^; 2d praet. JifN ; 3d praet.
^srphr; ist fut. -gf^T; 2d fut. -gfroTfTr; imp. "pw; pot. ^W;
bened. "g^Errir; cond. wgfTsrrT. Pass. "g^. Caus. ^NMPri.
Desid. S^l^fif. Freq. ^>^^, ^"^^-^tfir.
XT (ij^) ' to extend.'
Pres. ftnr^ ; ist praet. ^rfrnTrT ; 2d praet. xi^ ; 3d praet. wp
(^»fmrif) ; ist fut. xr#r; 2d fut. trft^i^; imp. Pm^ihI ; pot.
fv^ ; bened. "ij^ ; cond. w^ftxTiT. Pass. frnrS". Caus.
MKuPri. Desid. "J^jtffT. Freq. Tijfhi^, xmrff.
The verb is commonly used with f^ and ^TT"^ prefixed ;
«!mPni|^ * he conducts business.'
Jrt3i ^ to ask.'
This verb changes ^ to ^ in the conjugational tenses. The
final "S^ becomes iR before a consonant (rule 213).
SIXTH CONJUGATION.
Pres. Y^afiT; ist praet, '^s^^; 2d praet. ini^; 3d praet.
xsmnflit;; ist fut. jm; 2d fut. -g^fTr; imp. y^; pot. "^i^;
bened. ^J^^^T?^; cond. ^H«?1T. Pass. iJ^^^H. Caus. TT^TTfw -If.
Desid. rMMKjPH. Freq. m3'Jt^^^, tmrf^.
>n5T ' to fry.'
This verb also substitutes the vowel "^ for the semivowel in
the conjugational tenses, and optionally in the non-conjuga-
tional tenses, when it becomes the Guna ^. It also converts
the penultimate consonant to *T throughout: see ^^, first
conjugation. A final if becomes "^ before a consonant. It
takes both Padas.
Pres. ^j-wlPri 'It; ist praet. "^anwi^ -IT ; 2d praet. "^Hlt, ^>r53T,
^HW:, ^^31^; 3d praet. ^M^fFrT, ^WT^^, ^Hjf, W^TF; ist fut.
hIt, >JFr; 2d fut. HT^ffT -W, W^fif -W; imp. ^JWJ, H'rirrrf;
pot. ^J^TT -IT ; bened. >jTTqTrr, HiB|f?, >J'^ft^ ; cond. ^^w^l^ -IT,
^sw^nt; -W. Pass. >Jt5?i^. Caus. H^xrffT. Desid. f%iT^ -w,
fWB^ -K. Freq. ^^pw^, ^T>jf^.
c5j^, ' to be ashamed,' becomes in like manner <5iiT ( (^irTfiT,
iTRT ^ to be immersed in water/ ' to sink/ ^ to drown.'
This also converts the sibilant to if. In the non-conjuga-
tional tenses it inserts a nasal before the conjunct final, and
one tT is rejected (rule 34, a).
Pres. HTrifri ; ist praet. ^mWiT; 2d praet. ?nf^ (^^w^,
*JhPw(vj); 3d praet. '^mf^fh^ (^mfw) ; ist fut. w^ ; o^d fut.
jR^fff; imp. JTWJ; pot. H'-^ri; bened. Hri^rTlT; cond. »HH^1T.
Pass. HTi^rf. Caus. ^n^Tjfrr. Desid. f»Tif^. Freq. JRrnr^.
w^ (g^) ' to liberate' or ' loose.'
The class of which this verb is the first, inserts a nasal in
the conjugational tenses (rule 217, c).
Pres. g^rfiT- ^; ist praet. ^ig^ -W; 2d praet. g^ft^, gg^;
3d praet ^ig^l^;, ^srg^; ist fut. »ftl«T; 2d fut. ^fft^fw -ff ; imp.
H h 2
236 VERBS.
5^j 5^^; pot. ^T|;, g^w; bened. ^^i\\i{, *fH^; cond.
Wl^l^ -IT. Pass. g^. Caus. irNrrfw. Desid. g^gjPiT -^.
Freq. tTIHxHH, ^rhftfti.
The other verbs of this class are,
Y^ (^fir) to cut. t^xr (<^+*irH -w) to cut.
f^ (fi^n?^) to hurt. f^ (f^;^ -^) to find.
fq^ (fxf'^rflT) to be organised. fiT^ (fwfir -li) to sprinkle.
fc5XT (fc5J«TfiT -w) to smear.
Of these, the three last have an Anubandha "^y and therefore
make one form only in the third praeterite, Parasmai-pada : fc5^
and fE^ have two forms in the ^tmane-pada, ^Hp^Mri or ^fc5Tr,
^ftRTT or ^rftl^ ; ^ and f^ take ^, ^rfflTT, ^^ITT, &c.
This verb follows the Parasmai-pada in the second praeterite,
feitures, and conditional. In the desiderative, "g* is substituted
for ^.
Pres. f^r^^; ist praet. ^if^tnT; 2d praet. jtrr ('WJ:, ^^^^,
JTpg^) ; 3d prast. ^T^; ist fut. irfr; 3d fut. Hfr^rfw; imp.
r^^rif ; pot. f^gmr ; bened. ^^ ; cond. ^^mftTSTi^. Pass. f^xrS".
Caus. HTTTrffT. Desid. yjtfif. Freq. ^^Nw, TRff .
to deceive.*
This substitutes ^ for the semivowel in the conjugational
tenses, and in the second praeterite ; and before it.
Pres. fT^; ist praet. ^rf¥^; zd praet. f^T^ (f^^^^*) ;
3d praet. ^ij^xjlr^ or ^T^n^ftw; ist fut. ^qfqin ; 2d fut. ^^P^mfri;
imp. fr^ ; pot. f^f^; bened. fN-^HTrT; cond. ^r^rNrarrT . Pass.
f^nfk, Caus. ^mifri. Desid. f^^ifq^. Freq. ^f^xnd,
W^ (^1L) ^to cut.'
This substitutes the vowel for the semivowel in the conju-
gational tenses, and before ^. In the non-conjugational tenses
it optionally inserts ^ ; and when it does not, the final ^ is
rejected.
Pres. ^^jffT ; ist praet. 'sr^^; :zd praet. TSrs i4uC^% ^^?) ;
SEVENTH CONJUGATION. 237
3d praet. ^ra^jh^, ^TWT^ftTT ; ist fut. dOyril, ^ITT ; ad fut. "^ftjrilfw,
^Vi^fff ; imp. f^' P^*- T^' ^^^^^* I^TTiT; cond. -iiriPyxqw,
^m^l^. Pass. "1^^. Caus. W^^iT. Desid. fc^dOyMfd or
fVarw^' Freq. cjij^^ff, ^iO^^^rri, ^rd^fV.
^»T ^ to let go/ ' to abandon/ ' to create.^
Pres. ^wfrf; ist praet. ^mm^; 2d praet. ^ERT^ ; 3d praet.
^^IKfllT; ist fut. WW{; 2d fut. H^rfw; imp. '^^; pot. "^%f!;;
bened. ^wnf ; cond. ^TH^pr. Pass. TOTfl".
For the rest, see ^, fourth conjugation.
FT^ ^ to touch. ^
This optionally substitutes the Guna syllable or the semi-
vowel only in the third praeterite, futures, and conditional.
Pres. ^^iPri ; 1st praet. ^n=^7T; 2d praet. trw^ (q^^j^lg:);
3d praet. 'SR^JTT^, ^^IWTS^ or -Kf^Jii^Iri^; ist fut. ^qfr, WSJ;
2d fut. ^q^ftf, ^JT^rlir ; imp. ^pft"^ ; pot. ^^IT; bened. 4Hj^^rri;
cond. '^T^q^iT or ^TOT^ni;. Pass. ^-qw. Caus. ^q^rrfff. Desid.
PMHIl^frT or rmri4Hirri. Freq. qO^^^ri, trO^f^.
Seventh Conjugation,
218. The characteristic peculiarity of this conjugation is
the insertion before the radical final of tT, before the termina-
tions which contain an indicatory Xf, and rf before the rest.
a. All the verbs of this class, which are not many, end in
consonants ; and the union of them with the initial conso-
nants of the terminations takes place according to the rules
of Sandhi. fVy is substituted for ff in the imperative. The
single consonants of the first praeterite are rejected after a
consonant (rule 213).
b. A verb containing a penultimate nasal compounded with
its final, rejects it in favour of the conjugational sign before the
conjugational tenses.
c. The type of the conjugation is ^ ^to hinder' or ^ obstruct :'
it takes both Padas.
S38
VERBS.
d. After an aspirated consonant the cT and "^ of an inflexional
termination become V (rule i86) : "if preceded by t. is changed
to w (rule i8).
Present, ' I obstruct/ &c.
First praeterite, ^ I obstructed/ &c.
Imperative, ^ May I obstruct/ &c.
Potential, ^ I may obstruct/ &c.
^rurr (N»*Mr4 ^rarnr
^rtxn: ^vuiiH ^^wnr
The rest are,
2d praet. ^^, ^^^
3d praet. ^T^tt?^ or ^srrhf^ftT^, ^n^^
(>n^i^lril, ^sr^WW) ; 1st fut. d^ ; 2d fut. Clr^Pri -W ; bened.
^HITTI^, ^wt? ; cond. ^r&r^cn^ -it. Pass. ^xq^. Caus. ^t>r»3rfff.
Desid. ^^i^Pri -W. Freq. ^"^um, Cl'0%.
^^ ( ^'9' ) ' to become manifest.'
Notwithstanding the Anubandha "35, the augment ^ is
inserted in the third praeterite. This and the two following
reject the nasal penultimate (rule 218, h),
Pres. ^nfrh ('^T^:, ^iiyPfi) ; ist praet. ^3{H«*; 2d praet. 'STM^;
3d praet. ^rrsfh^; ist fut. w^, ^rf^TTT ; 2d fut. ^f^fir, ^f^^rfff;
imp. ^H?fi (^r^jIV, ^R5rnf»T) ; pot. ^wnr; bened. ^i^JlW; cond.
^Brferw, SHiPyufH. Pass. vhhj^. Caus. ^gi^f^fri. Desid. ^jr^nHMfrt.
SEVENTH CONJUGATION. 239
^ (j^) ' to shine/
Pres. ^:^ (^) ; ist praet. ^ ; 2d praet. ^-Mr^3«; 3d praet.
^fV^r^; ist fut. ^r^idl ; 2,d fut. ^f^^jtq^; imp. ^; pot. ^tfr;
bened. 3^f^^^g; cond. ^f^f^xtriT. Pass. ?[ifl^. Caus. ^^^i^fcf.
Desid. l[1^=^f>r^.
Tfi^ (T5^) ' to wet.^
Pres. g'Trf^ ("^nT:^ ^r^Pfl) ; ist praet. 4tHf^; 2d praet. Tf^T^^fiTT:;
3d praet. '^Tgfhr; ist fut. Tff^in; 2d fut. ^rr^mPH; imp. T^ ;
pot. <fti^; bened. <iil\t^; cond. "»ii1r<*Mr^. Pass. W^. Caus.
■^r^xrfrT. Desid. TfVi^^.
"^ ("f^?) ' to play/ ' to shine.^
The augment ^ is optionally inserted before ^ in any of the
non-conjugational tenses.
Pres. "^fk, ^^ ; ist praet. ^M^iUit;, ^r^ ; 2d praet. ^rs[t5 "^f^
(^^^ or '^^); 3d praet. "^C^^, ^^TSF^Ti;, '^Tf^Tf, ^5rsr% ;
ist fut. "gfffTrr ; 2d fut. "srfftqfjr -^ or "Sn^fw -W ; imp. "^TJT^,
"^^iTf ; pot. '^:'f?nTT , t|^ri ; bened. "^pTR^j "S^ff^^ <|rt/la ; cond.
^ii^nimrl^ -^5 ^n|W7^ -TT. Pass. "^W. Caus. ^^^ifri. Desid.
rx^;^r^^ Pri -% f^^wflT -K. Freq. ^^1?r^, xi^OPri, ^^ft.
W^ ' to injure.^
This verb inserts ^ before the conjugational sign before the
terminations beginning with consonants which reject xi. For
the changes off, see rule 213, c, 8.
Pres. i}ii)Pd ( iji) r\i^, l^f^, ir^t, ^^Pnf, ^53^) ; ist praet. ^T^^
(^HJIHJ) ; 2d praet. wsf; 3d praet. WrT^; ist fut. "ffffwT;
2d fut. irff "ojfw ; imp. "^^ ("5^? T^) ' pot* i^^^ 5 bened.
•^^m^; cond. ^nrff"ai"?^. Pass. l^Jt. Caus. H^^Pri. Desid.
iTTTft^fw. Freq. hO^^itI', irtfl.
fW^ fnf^^) ' to break/ ^ to divide.'
Pres. firTi%, f>T%; ist praet. ^Phhv^, ^^rW^; 2d praet. fw^^
f%fW^; 3d praet. ^rfW^W or ^r^w'h^, ^rfk^; ist fut. Hwr ;
2d fut. >^wrffT -K ; imp. fH^r^^ fwwf ; pot. fW^mr, fWr^ ;
240 VERBS.
bened. fjRrT?!;, fWr^ ; cond. ^n^SffT^ -TT. Pass. f^mk. Caus.
d^ufw. Desid. f%f>TWfTfr -W. Freq. ^^jjrk, "^iWw.
There are several other verbs in this conjugation similarly
inflected ; as,
"^ ('^^) ^ to send :' TOrf%, "^^^ "^tWl, ^^\ or ^sn^wft{,
f^ (f^^) ' to cut :' fw^% fi^, "twT, ^^rfSRTfT or '^r^wt?!;,
^ (l^) ' to join/ ^ to unite :' IJ^rf^, 5^, ^«ftw, "^^^i^ or
ft^ (ftf^) ' to purge :' tof^, ftii, "tw, ^rft?^l^ or ^ft^W,
f^ (f¥^) ' to separate :' f^^fi;, f^, ^, ^3if^"i|; or
>T^ ^ to break.'
See rule 218, b.
Pres. H^rf^; ist praet. ^WT5R; 2d praet. "^^T^; 3d praet.
^awfsf^; 1st fut. HW; 2d fut. >t^fjT; imp. ^J^; pot. Hi^rni^;
bened. H5??Tf^; cond. 'W^T^. Pass. Hiif^. Caus. >T^^.
Desid. "fwejfTT. Freq. -stHWk, -#4%.
»T»T ^ to eat/ ' to enjoy/ ^ to cherish.^
Pres. >prf^, >J^; ist praet. W>pr^, ^n|li ; 2d praet. "5*Tt»r,
^>|% ; 3d praet. ^sw^^fhi;, w^ ; ist fut. >rtw ; 2d fut. H^^rfir -w ;
imp. >pT^, ^W; pot. ^Tt{^, ^J^^j bened. ^JWTri;, >JW^ ;
cond. "Wt^ni; -TT. Pass, ijiir^. Caus. Hl^^fri. Desid. f H^ -^.
Freq. ^^>J5iT^, ^^tHt%
f^ (^i^f%^) ' to fear/ ' to tremble.'
This verb does not change its radical vowel when ^ is
inserted.
Pres. f^TTf^j ist praet. -^HpcJHoh; 2d praet. f%^ (f^^^nr) ;
3d praet. ^arf^raf^; ist fut. f^fs^ril; 2d fut. -f^ftfBifiT; imp. f%^ ;
pot. r^Tqiri;; bened. f%wn^; cond. ^^ftr^Tr^. Pass. f^w.
Caus. ^iTufiT. Desid. f^f^pTii^rrf. Freq. ^^mi, %^.
EIGHTH CONJUGATION. 24)1
%'R ("f^"^) * to distinguish/
Pres. %^ ; ist praet. -^f^H^ ; 2d praet. f^^ (f^T^fT^) ;
3d praet. -3jr^rMrf; ist fut. ^; 2d fut. "^fw ; imp. fi^PTf
(%fj(I5 or f^n!?f^, f^'^fmrn) ; pot. fgfNnr ; bened. f^nqri^; cond.
•^qr^. Pass. %«l^. Caus. "^rWw. Desid. f^r^nsfpH. Freq.
ftf^ ( ftr^), ^ to grind,' is similarly conjugated.
ff^ (f^f^) ' to injure^ or ' kill.'
The nasal which the verb derives from the Anubandha is
replaced by the conjugational sign in the conjugational tenses.
Pres. f^^Tl%; ist praet. ^^IT (^^*WIH, ^^rf^t or ^nP^Hri^,
'STf^HflH) ; 2d praet. ftrf^; 3d praet. "^rf^^fh^; ist fut. f^fwr;
2d fut. f^T^tufri ; imp. f^H^; pot. f^FTTr^; bened. f^^T!^;
cond. ^rf^f-Hmfl^. Pass, f^^ri. Caus. f^^nrfir. Desid. fa n^T^MPff.
Freq. ^f^^W, ^fw-
Eighth Conjugation.
219. In this conjugation 'g' is subjoined to the root, which
before a termination containing an indicatory tr becomes ^.
a. Before a termination beginning with "sr or H the augment
"3" may be rejected (see rule 216, a),
b. f^ in the imperative is rejected.
c. In the third praeterite of the i^tmane-pada the sibilant of
^j Wr^5 may be rejected, when a radical final consonant is
dropped.
d. There are but few verbs in this conjugation, and with
one exception, that of ^, they all end in nasals ; being
therefore exactly analogous to verbs of the fifth conjugation,
which insert "^.
e. Such verbs as have a penultimate short vowel, other
than ^, change it optionally to its Guna equivalent in the
conjugational tenses.
The type of the conjugation is THT ^ to stretch,* which takes
both Padas.
I i
24£
VERBS.
infrfir ir^:
if^ wg^ ^T^ 'f'yT^ ^n»T%
Present, * I stretch/ &c.
First praeterite, ^ I stretched/ &c.
WrPT
SHHVmrtf
Imperative, ' May I stretch,' &c.
J .,_, , ♦
, , ,t 1.11- ■. ...
ri^M fiHI'ill
ritjril rtH*^
rtjiti n»<nfli*
Potential, ^ I may stretch,^ &c.
The other tenses are,
2d praet. mrR, ^; 3d praet. ^nP^?^ or ^TrTpftTir, Wrnr or
^riPHg ; ist fut. drHHI ; 3d fut. irf^THrfrr -^; bened. Tnmi^,
irf^^ ; cond. SHrtPHUIrf -If. Pass, in^ or imk. Cans. in^iTfiT.
Desid. frnrfrT^ -w, fdril^frt -^, fcTirRfiff -^ Freq. iPir^, WnnftfiT,
ri»dr»H.
The remaining verbs of this class, which, except "^5 end in
a nasal, are the following : they all may take both Padas.
^Tir ' to go :' ^rtfVftr, ^w or ^rjiVfif, ^^, wftSin, ^rntsffi^,
'5rr# or ^rrPS^.
•?^ ' to kill or hurt :' it does not elongate the vowel in the
third praeterite : ^spprfff, W^, '^^fwin, ^ST^pr^W, ^(^ or
^HlfniK.
f^ ^to kill or hurt:' ftprfrfiT or ^Trfrfir, f^^ or ^w,
"^ftnTT, ^T^TifhT, wf^lT or ^r^fw.
-^ ^ to shine :' ilSlfri, XT^ or ^ilfifH, ^^y 'jHnidl, ^ii^ril,
^Miii!jfr«, ^wirt or ^nrfity.
NINTH CONJUGATION. S4S
-jm ' to eat grass :' ^Tfftfw or w^tfff, ip^ or ir§ff, rrfiSnT,
•»nHiilTrf , ^Hriri or ^snrft§¥.
irq^ ^ to understand :* 'T^^? TpTfTT, ^!r*nT or ^nrPfiT.
W^T * to ask :' ^^W, ^^^, ^f^ffH, ^T^W or -HmnlF, ^T^rT or
^W, ' to give/ optionally rejects the final, and makes the
vowel long before xr; it does the same before the IT
and "^rnr of the third praeterite : '^hIPh, ^"^W, ^fHHI,
^nmw or ^miTf, "snnfhr or ^rar^fhr, ^mw or ^fRrfVr^
(^nrRrr: or ^mfTrer:).
^ ' to do/
In the conjugational tenses the radical vowel substitutes, as
usual, the GuAa letter before the conjugational sign in the
inflexions which have an indicatory x^^; but before the rest it
substitutes TJl. It rejects the conjugational sign before ^5 it,
and XT. It takes both Padas.
Pres. -gidfir (^^:, fff^, ft: f^O^ 1^ (ifrw, ffw) ;
ist praet. ^?T^7^ (-if^ijril, -il<+<^H), -H*^H (-5i*|lril, ^*Sri) ; 2d
praet. "^^fiTT (^^J? '^^y ^^^, ^<*K or '^^t, ^^), ^ (^^) 5
3d praet. Wohltffi^ (^T^filtt, ww|:), ^"^ (*ii<*mril, 'H^Mri, ■et<*'qi:,
-^M<jiMmi, "^Tfi, w^) ; ist fut. "Sfiti; 2d fut. <*ri,uird -^; imp.
^^ (f^, ci«i:^iriii, <*mn), "5^ (^tTfTT, ^tirf) ; pot. fwri^,
4^ri; bened. f^nrn^, g;^; cond. ^<*fl,iirff -W. Pass. f^HTW;
3d praet. '^Er^iTfi:. Caus. ctiKuPri -W ; 3d praet. »H^«*l,f^ -TT.
Desid. fq^'^^fw -^. Freq. Q^a{>^, ^^»cHtt, ^fbfi^Hw or xiOohOPd,
^ff , '^PlLchP^ or xiOohP^.
Ninth Conjugation.
220. The verbs of this class subjoin "5TT to the root before
terminations beginning with consonants which reject x^; tft
before the other terminations beginning with a consonant ;
and tT before those which begin with a vowel.
a. The terminations undergo no change.
b. Verbs ending in consonants substitute ^TT«T for the con-
jugational sign and the termination f^, in the imperative.
I i 2
2U
VERBS.
c. A class of verbs called i^rf^ from ^ ' to purify/ ending
in vowelS;, make them short in the conjugational tenses.
Some others make the vowel short only before the termina-
tions of the second praeterite not requiring Guna.
The model of the class is "^ ^ to buy,' which takes both
Padas. The «T of the conjugational augment becomes ^ (rule
i8).
Present, ' I buy/ &c.
■^Nhr:
First praeterite, ' I bought/ &c.
Imperative, * May I buy/ &c.
sa-^hliiilri '^nRNIhf ^sr^Tohri: ^^-^ilmi^f w^M?^
sH-^lnilrif w^^tw^ w^Mif -H-^mtii ^r^Nnr
May I buy/ &c.
kc.
^^iW"^: ^liin^iivji ^^^hifh^
Potential, ^ I may buy/ &c
The other tenses are,
2,d praet. "Nott ("Nf^inrj:, "N^iftm or fq^), Nf^^; 3d praet.
^T^^, ^3^!?; ist fut. 9fiTT; 2d fut. -awfw -^; bened. -^trmi,
^!^ ; cond. ^^r35^ -7f. Pass. ^^Twk, Caus. "ginnrfff. Desid.
r^^lMfri -^. Freq. ^^5hr^, ^W^, ^^.
So ifh^ * to desire,^ and ift^ ' to injure' or ' kill :' the latter
in the non- conjugational tenses substitutes ^TT for the final:
see fir, fifth conjugation.
^T^T ^ to eat.^
Pres. wwrfw; ist praet. WWrT; 2d praet. Wl^; 3d praet.
NINTH CONJUGATION. 245
^^tt^tt; 1st fut. ^^nn; 2d fut. wf^mfw; imp. SH^lff; pot.
^rahmr ; bened. "^xm^; cond. -iilP^iuifi^.
For the rest, se^ ^^r^T, fifth conjugation.
"% ' to go.'
As belonging to the class i^lf?^ the vowel is short in the
conjugational tenses.
Pres. ^rrnfrr ; ist praet. '^n^W; 3d praet. ^SJTT^^^; 3d praet.
^TT^; ist fut. wfbrr, w^in; 2d fut. ^^rftrarfir, ^^rfir; imp.
'•^mi^ ; pot. •^Tijtxrnr ; bened. ^^tt^;; cond. -mtoiK.
See ^ of the first conjugation.
ffi^ ( f^i^ ) ^ to be distressed.'
Pres. r^Sjifri ; ist praet. ^f^iairl^; 2d praet. f%#^ ; 3d praet.
^^^fh^ or ^fir^; 1st fut. "i^fTT, ^^T; 2d fut. "jj%«rfiT>
trs^; imp. fw^l pot. fli^t^; bened. ffrr^Tl^; cond.
^f^WW, ^^r^^nr. Pass, f^^ijri. Caus. "J^TErflT. Desid.
fqi^nrfw, Nfll%^, fqfire^. Freq. ^r^^i\% ^^.
'm^ ' to be agitated.'
Pres. "^wfTT; ist praet. "^mVTrr; 2d praet. "^^^5 3d praet.
^T^WtlT; 1st fut. "C^Hin ; 2d fut. TB^rfW^sifw ; imp. -^^fT^ ("^^TTW) ; '
pot. ■^^fhniT; bened. "^^mt;; cond. ^5n^Y5rHnT . Pass. -^wr^. Caus.
"E^tiT^. Desid. ^ftr^fiT. Freq. ^^t^Wff, ^'llsfirJtT.
JEF^ ^ to arrange in order.'
This rejects the radical nasal in favour of the conjugational
sign ; also before xf, and optionally before the terminations of
the second praeterite^ when before those which do not require
the change of a radical vowel, ij may be substituted for ^.
Pres. ^T'^^^W ; ist praet. '5r?l'5(^r^; 2d praet. ^U^^i, ^RTT^
(»ii|*-^i:^ ^r^O 5 3^ praet. "^IF^^^; ist fut. ?ifV^nn; 2d fut.
fffV^rarfw; imp. JjT^HTJ ; pot. ?I'5^^?fhrnT; bened. ?TWnT; cond.
^ij^v^mrT. Pass. KWTi- Caus. ^-viMfri. Desid. rdj^nrvmrri.
Freq. ^ilijJa^H, ^ii^'-v/lpH, i^ffe.
Other verbs are similarly inflected ; as, "^^ ' to suffer pain :'
246 VERBS.
f'^^^Trfw, ffVwT, "^^ or ^^, f^mi^. — -q^ ^ to churn:'
* to loosen :' ^^^nfiT, ^1^:^nn, ^T^F^ or ^v^vn (^fr5P?5r^:, ^^^zr^:),
arf^ ^ to take.'
This substitutes ^ for the semivowel in the conjugational
tenses. It makes the augment ^ long in every tense except
the second praeterite.
Pres. Jj^lPd, 'f^ ; ist praet. >^Jj^lri^, ^nj^Jhr ; 2d praet.
^RTT^ {Wl^:, ^ur^% Wjf^) ; 3d praet. v^jjj^lri^, -iii|^1»; ist
fut. JJ^tTfT; 2d fut. Jj^ird -^; imp. ij^^ (^^T^), 'J^fhlf ;
pot. 'T^fhni^, Jj^lri; bened. 'pnii;, ij^1tfl«; cond. ^sr^l^fBn^ -W.
Pass. ^j^. Caus. aii^^fd -TT. Desid. r^^^Pd -¥. Freq. ^f^fn^,
iiii^^Pd, ^mrf^.
^ ' to know.'
This becomes ^TT before the conjugational terminations.
Pres. ^iHifd, «n^t^; ist praet. ^jifRTTt^, ^sHTRtw; 2d praet.
^T^, t1%; 3d praet. '^T^TRftl^, ^?^T^ ; ist fut. ^mn ; 2d fut.
^TT^fTT-^; imp. ^TRTf, ^Rtirf ; pot. ITF^xm^, ^pOit; bened.
§Trn^, FRTTT, ^rr^l?; cond. ^t^t^w -it. Pass. ^iT^. Caus.
sjimAlPd. Desid. f^r^rrofw -W. Freq. "sn^TT^, ^fl^Pd or ^T^IT.
tETT ' to become old.'
The semivowel is changed to ^ in the conjugational tenses,
and to ^ before if.
Pres. PfTHlPd ; ist praet. ^rftrTTW; 2d praet. ftn^n; 3d praet.
^3^(^1ft^; ist fut. -RHWr; 2d fut. i^^l^Pd ; imp. PkhiJ; pot.
f»rfNm^; bened. "sfhrn^; cond. Wa^TTW?^* Pass. WRW, "sfhnr.
Caus. 3inW^. Freq. ^^1i|d, ^^IxMlPd.
¥(^)''^(H!T)^'to*i'e«^ble.'
As the verb with the long final vowel shortens this in the
conjugational tenses, there is no difference in the inflexions:
in the other tenses the difference is that of the insertion or
omission of ^5 except in the third praeterite Parasmai-pada,
where it is inserted in both verbs.
NINTH CONJUGATION. 247
Pres. vhiPh, vrft^ ; ist praet. ^srVTfnr, '^Tg^ftlT ; ad praet. ^VR,
jg^ ; 3d praet. ^mT^, ^rvf^T? or ^nf^ ; ist fut. ^ttH, vf^in ; 2d
fut. viluffd -w^ vf^TqfiT -^ ; imp. V^, V^fhrf ; pot. vrfhnTT , ^^^ 5
bened. Y^trrrT, >rt^, vf^TR^ ; cond. ^snihir?^ -W, "^nrfTHTlT -TT.
For the rest, see v and ^, fifth conjugation.
Y^ ^ to nourish.^
In this conjugation it takes ^.
Pres. yuiiifri ; ist praet. ^rgwn^; 2d praet. '^^; 3d praet.
wN^r^; ist fut. tftfqin; 2d fut. xflfq^rftf; imp. ijmiij; pot.
ytun^lrt^; bened. "J^mt;; cond. ^KiflPMUif^.
The rest as ^, fourth conjugation.
'^ ' to purify.^
This is the first verb of a class ending in long vowels, of
which the final is made short before the conjugational sign.
Pres. JHiCa, ^^ ; ist praet. ^gHTff, '^r^'^ftlT; 2d praet.
T'^^ Yi^» 3^ P^^*- ^^n^» 'ii^r^V; ist fut. TTf^WT; 2d fut.
irf^^rffT -w; imp. ^gpTTj, gnldf ; pot. 'J'ffhrnr, '^^; bened.
""gPtrn^, ^^^ ; cond. w^fran^ -if. Pass. ijir^. Caus. qmnPri.
Desid. yijKfH -w or fWWlT -^. Freq. M\^'a, TT>ftfif.
The following verbs belong to the class x^rf^ :
^ ^ to go f as above.
^ ' to injure :' fmfiff f^, -^flkm, ^in^, ^MchiOfi, ^Rift:?,
-^ * to sound :' ijmfif, ifbTT, tt^ITT, ^STttt^, 'fhtTrT.
»J ^ to decay :' ^mCti, wPm I, "*iOfil, ^3nTKbr, ifNtri^.
^ ' to tear :' ^iin fd, ^fbrr, ^^drTT, ^a^iOrt;, ^htlr^.
v^' to shake;' as above.
^ ^ to fill :' Ynfff? ^^^^5 ^TT^^ ^nrrdTT, !*«!;.
^ ' to threaten :' ^jrinffT, ntar, vn^, ^^SMT^, ^^TtT.
>^ ' to support :' fwrf^, ^, ^R§^.
55^ ^ to injure :' ^ifrT, "dbTT, ^R^dm, ^UHlOrt^, »ft%11(^.
^ ' to roar :' ft^urfw, "bfT, ^sr:^.
<?ft ^ to cling to :' fc5^TTfw, ^TH, ^^.
S48 VERBS.
<^^ to cut :' rJHlfri, 75^, Hf^rTT, ^T^T^lt;? ^TFjf^F.
"^ ^ to choose :' see ^ below.
lj\ ^ to choose :' f^^rjifiT, WT^ ^t^.
^ ^ to support :' f^TTTfrT^ ^, ^^.
3[ ' to injure :' see below.
m ' to spread :' see below.
"jft (ift^) * to please/ ^ to desire.'
This and several other verbs of the class ending in long
vowels do not make them short, as not belonging to the class
Pres. if) III I Pd, Tjt^; ist praet. ^nflwiTi;, '^nfNfhr; 2d praet.
fxTTTPT, fxrflR; 3d praet. ^sit^, ^TW; ist fut. THH ; 2d fut.
i^rfw -^; imp. ifhUTf, ifhjfhrf; pot. Ilkft^, Tft^tw; bened.
ifhmT, i^ ; cond. w^ -Tf. Pass. ifhm. Cans, ifliii^rif.
Desid. finf^TT -^. Freq. ^^, MH^lPri, ^^.
So gi ^ to sound/ ch^llfri, ^rfff, &c. ; and "^ ^ to cook/
Tftiirrfw, 'ifl^fly^. ^ * to cook/ and ^ ' to choose/ are option-
ally long or short ; ^/l^Iirrf, fHWlfw ; "^hOTfif, Priori Pri.
^^ ^ to bind.'
This drops its nasal in the conjugational tenses, and before tt.
Pres. ■qmfrr; ist praet. ■^T^Trrrr; 3d praet. WW^ («i«j prefer or
-^RT^) ; 3d praet. ^Wlrtflrt^ (^n4^f, '^mfiW:) ; ist fut. 'srST ;
2d fut. >fii5rffT; imp. "qnT^; pot. w^hrnr; bened. '^Tzrn^; cond.
^THp^ni;^. Pass. -srar^. Caus. ^^^. Desid. f^Hr^rfir. Freq.
WT^Tflir, cTHHOPri, «iiqP^.
jft ^ to kill' or ' injure.'
This verb, like fiT in the fifth conjugation, is inflected as if
it ended in ^TT in the non-conjugational tenses, except before
the terminations of the second praeterite beginning with vowels,
and before xr.
Pres. tflHlPri, *fl«^ri ; ist praet. ^^nfhm^, ^nfliftiT; 2d praet.
»nft or WTH^ (Ph«|^:, hPhv^ or httt) ; 3d praet. ^wnftT^, Sm*h« ;
NINTH CONJUGATION. 249
ist fut. min; 2d fut. Hl^fri -^; imp. Tf^TTJ, jfbftTff; pot.
♦flffliilrt, Jfhfhr; bened. jftim^; cond. wiTT^T^ -IT.
For the rest, see f^, fifth conjugation.
"5 ^ to join.'
Pres. -g^Tfw, ^^; ist praet. ^STfmt;, '^STJ^; imp. ^Tf,
^pflirf ; pot. "g^fhm^, grfliT.
For the rest, see ^, second conjugation.
? ("^) ^ to choose.'
Pres. '|Hlirri, ^#w; ist praet. ^ar^Tjm^, ^T^tlT; imp. ^^,
^Tifhrf ; pot. "i^rfhrn^, <j^nH.
For the rest, see "^ of the fifth conjugation. '^ ("^) and ^
('^*^)j verbs having the same meaning, are similarly conju-
gated : the first is of course restricted to the j^tmane-pada.
'SI ' to hurt.'
It is one of the class mfr^.
Pres. ^prfw; ist praet. ^ranoTi^; 2d praet. "^r^TTT: (^i^Kg: or
T^mw:); 3d praet. ^^qiTi^^; ist fut. ^(Pui, ^T^WT ; 2d fut.
^ftlQTfiT, I5r6"arfw; imp. "SJTHTTf ; pot. -gntihrnT; bened. "^ftx^TTT;
cond. w^rirailT, ^^^lOmTT. Pass. ^^fh^^. Caus. ^TTirfTr. Desid.
f^mft^fif, n^l^lOMPri, fw^^fifT. Freq. ^^fi^Sri, ^lUlPS.
f^ (f^) ' to bind.'
Pres. fH^fifd, ftnft^; ist praet. "^iPTTiT, wftr^; 2d praet.
Oh mil, ftm; 3d praet. 'ii^Mlrt^, ^F; ist fut. d?rr; 2d fut.
^Tirfifr -^ ; imp. fHHij, ffulrif ; pot. -ftn^hrnT, ftnfhr ; bened.
^E(hm^, ^^ ; cond. ^i^it; -"ff- Pass. ^fN^. Caus. f^i^^Pri.
Desid. ■ftraNfrT -^. Freq. ^^, witfw, %^fw.
^ ( ^*T ) ' to leap,' ' to cover.'
Pres. i^HlPri^ ^"^ ; ist praet. "^^, 'W^nld ; 2d praet.
^^\% 1^ ; 3^ pr^et. ^sr^tftTi;, vii^^g ; ist fut. ^^RtiH ; 2d fut.
^^MPri -ff ; imp. ^?TT^ ^nlrif ; pot. ^ifrmr^j *5*<»fld ; bened.
Kk
VERBS.
^^^\, ^^ ; cond. ^n^-HTf^ --rr. Pass. ^W. Caus. ^N^jfif.
Desid. ^^^fiT -W. Freq. W^^^Ti, ^^tfw.
It is also a verb of the fifth conjugation.
^^n^ C"^^) ^ to stop.*
This rejects its nasal before the conjugational sign, and
before xr.
Pres. ^a'^jrffT; ist praet. xMiH44lft^; ^^ praet. H^cTFiT; 3d prset.
^ST^cMiT or ^ST^cWhfi^^ ; ist fut. wf^fTT; 3d fut. ^HNuifd ; imp.
^cHITf; pot. ^Vhmr; bened. ^cr«m^; cond. SHMPwran^. Pass.
^cP^. Caus. W^Hilfrf. Desid. fiT^fwr^fir. Freq. ril«*^ri,
diiH*Htfir^ rrreffW.
It is also a verb of the fifth conjugation, HVtfff, &c. In
the same manner are inflected ^*>J, ^T^, and '^i»>t, having
the same meaning.
^ (^™) ^ to cover.^
Pres. ^lilirri, ^Hft ri ; ist praet. ^r^TW, '^T^intiT; 2d praet.
ITWR, ITRft; 3d praet. ^S4HlOlT, ^srwfts', -H{fiO^ or '^rsftt ; ist fut.
wfbrr, «i!)rii ; 2d fut. ^crftsrfrr -% w^'orfw -w ; imp. ^wtw,
^^#(Tf ; pot. ^iifli^IrT, ^^Tiftw ; bened. ^cfhtlrf;, ^cTft^tF or aS^^;
cond. •^r^cTftiBriT -w. Pass. ^fft^^. Caus. WKAtPff. Desid.
frtMtofri -^3 PriwOTEird -^, flT^tfif -W. Freq. W^cfhtw, lOWft.
Tenth Conjugation,
221. Verbs of this conjugation take for their conjugational
sign ^5 technically termed ■ftr^ ; and they extend the insertion
to all the tenses except the benedictive, Parasmai-pada. ^ is
converted to ^5 and Tj becomes ^r^, before a vowel. The indi-
catory in of the sign requires the substitution of ^sn for a
radical medial ^, and of the Guna equivalent for any other
short medial vowel.
a. Before the terminations of the conjugational tenses all
verbs of this class insert ^pT, that is, ^ ; whilst as they all
take the augment ^ in the two futures and conditional, there
is in all these tenses a vowel, before which the conjugational
sign ^ becomes ^, and then wi^.
TENTH CONJUGATION. 251
b. In these modifications of the base, verbs of the tenth
class are analogous to the causal mode of verbs ; and this
analogy extends to other particulars, such as the insertion of
certain augments, as tr, ^, "5T, &c., before the conjugational sign.
c. The analogy to the causal mode is still more evident in
the identity of the construction of the third praeterite. It is
formed with the terminations of the first praeterite, preceded
by ^ (rule 190, e. p. 123), and with a reduplication of the
root, agreeably to the rules already given for the causal (rule
202, e to /. p. 136, &c.).
d. Although not peculiar to the causal, an analogy is also
presented to it in common v>dth derivative forms in the second
praeterite, which in this class is formed with the auxiliary
verbs (rule 189. p. 121).
€. Verbs having a medial ^ do not make it long when they
are said to belong to the class fin^, that is, have an indicatory
IT ; and ^ or any other radical short vowel is unchanged in
the class oir^rrf^, the verbs of which are said to have an indi-
catory final ^.
f. Verbs of this conjugation, with the conjugational sign
attached, are considered to be polysyllabic, and therefore do
not take the frequentative mode ; nor can they be considered
as having a causal mode, since it is the same with their own,
and it is only necessary to substitute a causal for an active
signification to the same inflexions.
g. All verbs signifying ' to speak' or * to kill' may be con-
jugated in the tenth, as well as in the class to which they
belong, as may a variety of other verbs ; and most of the
verbs which belong to this conjugation may be inflected also
in the first. The number of verbs is therefore somewhat
indefinite ; but from the uniformity which prevails amongst
them, not only in the employment of the conjugational sign,
but in the formation of the second and third praeterites, and
the insertion of the augment ^ in the other tenses, they may
K k 2
252
VERBS.
be regarded as offering fewer difficulties than the verbs of any-
other conjugation.
The verb which is given as the type of the conjugation is
^ ^ to steal,' which admits of both Padas.
Present, ^ I steal/ &c.
^I^^iPh ^^tTTTT^: ^terro:
^turftr Mimm mIim^
^tafiT ^k^nn ^^hr^rf^ir
First praeterite, ^ I stole,' &c.
■^n-Jl^^H^ >ij-Jii.^m ^r^txTTR
W^'kiK ->^^1l.^ri -^-^X^ri
^^-cTli^iift; w^kmrf ^sr^k^
Second praeterite (in both Padas), * I have stolen,^
''^k^rnrnr ^kTrnrrfti^ '"Tli^iiiHiP^H
or ^qk^TT^Jf^, ^U^I^<*K or -^"il^^l^rfi, &c.
w^kTT^
&c.
Third praeterite, ' I had stolen,' &c.
^^^
First future, ' I shall steal,' &c.
^'TkfwrftR ^'^kfwr^: -^^kftrrrrw:
^^fkftnrrftr ^fkftnrT^: ^fkftnrT^
^kftnn -'Tli.rMriiQ ^^kfiwR:
^sfkfEnrr^ '^kf^Tirr^^
"^krftnnTj
Second future, ' I will or shall steal,' &c.
•Mli.rM«4irH 'qkfron^: ^UPumiH:
^'Tkftrarftr -cTicr^mvi: ^l<:rt|HT'^
^IcrMmPrt ^^kftrsTrr: ^^^kftroif^
"^kfiTGw ^kftr^ ^firars^
'^kftrai^ ^i:fEr^ ^"kfw^
TENTH CONJUGATION.
253
Imperative, ' Let me steal,' &c.
Potential, ^ I may steal,' &c.
^k^nmrf
Benedictive, ^ I pray I may steal,^ &c.
^kf^nrts4
Conditional, ^ I will steal, if,^ &c.
^r^fjrarR; w^firan^ ^HkftrorR
^p^kfqx[T: "i<-^"li.r^mri ^^kftrarff
^^HkfqTnnr w^f^rsnri ^^r^kfjm'?^
^NkftrsT^: ^r^kf^rnnrf ^^r^kftrstscr
^NkPErnrrr ^sn^kfcr^wf ^sr^kf^m'if
The remaining forms are.
Pass. ^^; 3d praet. ^r^ftft:. Cans. ''^kqfiT. Desid. ^^-
TfxrqfrT.
^ ' to disrespect.^
This substitutes ^ for the radical vowel in the reduplication
of the third praeterite.
Pres. ^Hg^Pri ; ist praet. ^npnr; ^d praet. ^^^i*{m ; 3d praet.
^rrf^TTiT; ist fut. ^r^fcnrT; 3d fut. ^^uimfd; imp. ^rprtf; pot.
^H^iifT^; bened. ^TgmT; cond. ^siTgfxn'Tf^. Pass. ^a^Ati. Desid.
^ ' to hurt,' * to pain.'
Pres. ^\i\C({ ; ist praet. "^nf^; 2d praet. ^sifxrr^^TT: ; 3d
^ praet. ^rrff^l^; ist fut. "'H|P^ril ; 2d fut. ^H^Pi|iqPff ; imp. ^if^;
pot. ^ar^^; bened. ^TTT^; cond. ^arfftrsTr^. Pass. vr|Tff.
Desid. -^ff c^fq^fw.
254 VERBS.
?c5 ^ to send/
Pres. ijc^trfw; ist praet. TO"^7T; 3d proet. ^H^nHHT ; 3d praet.
^<9(51|;; ist fut. iTTyfEnn; 2,d fut. iJHftraiflT; imp. ijc5J^;
pot. irc5^lT; bened. ^"^mf^; cond. TOftTHT?^. Pass. ^;^w.
Desid. ^f^f^f^flT.
WH * to wink/ ^ to close. ^
This and most other verbs make the medial ^ long through-
out (rule 221). They have the vowel optionally short in the
third proeterite ; when the redupHcated vowel is ^, changeable
to ^ (rule 202, j. p. 137).
Pres. chiiLiiiPri ; ist praet. ^^rsiTRpn^; 2d praet. chiitnimnr; 3d
praet. w^oRTOTT or ^Nt^Trrw ; ist fut. ofirrnftnTT ; 2d fut. cfrrofqxqfiT ;
imp. ^RTO-irff; pot. ohiiii^H^; bened. ■SFHRTTT^; cond. ^nRTftn-qn;.
Pass. cRXnnf. Desid. "NroRT^irf'T^rfiT.
^jr^r ^ to speak.'
This is the first of a class rejecting a final ^, and the
radical vowel therefore is unchanged : it is optionally changed
to ^ in the reduplication of the third praeterite.
Pres. cK^nrnr; ist praet. ^oji^nJT^; 2d praet. "SK^XTRUT; 3d
praet. "^T^^jTziTf^ or '^r^^; ist fut. "SR^rfxnn; 2d fut. "SR^rftiwfiT ;
imp. "^Rxrj ; pot. "Sfi^lT ; bened. "^EWnr ; cond. ^^fi^rfq^qiT . Pass.
oRJEq^. Desid. ■N^fi^rftzr^fw.
Other verbs of this class are,
' cRc^ ^ to count :' 'Wc^T^, W^^ic^JT^.
"^ ^ to contract :' ^T^fiff, ^r^f^»
^^ * to astonish :' "^^Tfir, ^^^TJ^-
7^ ' to count :' Triij-qfrf. But this optionally inserts ^ in
the third praeterite : ^nTJTCrf^ or ^nftiFrn^.
71^ ' to speak :' 7T^"fir, "^iiT^'rr.
TjTir ' to advise :' ^^, -H^jyuirt^.
1T5 ^ to take :' ^Vt^j ^nrjflT.
%SC^ ^ to sound :' SctH^Pri, ^SSRf^.
VZ ' to tie :' TT^xrf^fr, ^snTTTrT.
11^ ' to go -: TT^Tlfir, ^STTR^TT .
TENTH CONJUGATION. 255
xr5T ' to tie :' V^m^ti, -HMM^Irt^.
^ ' to contract :' ije^fri, wg^Tl^.
^ ^ to seek :' ijJ|i|H, "»KH*J'lrt.
T?^ * to make :' t^^rflT^ ^snj?^.
T^ ' to leave :' T^rrfw, ^nx^. It also makes ^r^T^.
^Z ' to surround :' cjd^Pri^ ^T^'^TiT .
«R ^ to choose :' IJTfftf, "^(^^Tj^.
-^ ' to speak ill :' -^tZ^fftf, ^fr^T^TTir .
^R ' to be weak :' "^r^nrfff, w^fm^.
^cPT ' to sound :' WH^fri, ^nreTTiT .
^ ^ to envy :' ^^xrfiT^ ^rq^W .
^t ' to sound :' ^C^fri, W^T^ni;.
^»TR ^ to play,' as a child.
Pres. •^HRirfTT; ist praet. W^HTTTTif; ^d praet. *HKiimifi ;
3d praet. '^^TTTTT; ist fut. ^KHMril ; ^d fut. "^iTKfwfff ; imp.
^JTPCxrj; pot. ^KiifT; bened. <*Hl4n!;; cond. ^T^TTf^rarrT.
"^ * to be feeble.'
Pres. '<*q^rri ; ist praet. w^xnriT ; 2d praet. <*Mqitl^; 3^1
praet. '^rsft'^mT; ist fut. "^itrftnrr ; 2d fut. -^irf^rarfiT; imp. <*Mi|H ;
pot. "^q^l^ ; bened. "^rcnw ; cond. ^cjqfquirf. Pass. "^rinr.
Desid. fg-f MrMMPri.
c
"^ ^ to be able.
This substitutes ofi^ in its inflexions : see the same root in
the first conjugation, p. 158.
Pres. "SF^rqfw; ist praet. ^ra^T^; 2d prast. oh«d4^IHI« ;
3d praet. IStP^cR^tj^ ; ist fut. cfi^qfinrr; 2d fut. oh<d4 Hm mfw ; imp.
cfi^nrj ; pot. 'SF^q^; bened. "Sfi^am^; cond. "^nF^rftr"^.
^ * to sound' or ' utter/ * to celebrate.'
This substitutes ^^ for the radical penultimate in all the
tenses except the third praeterite, where it is optional.
Pres. ^^qfri ; ist praet. -Hofl^qii;; 2d praet. "sM^TPfTRT ;
3d praet. vS'cf]<*ri"r|^ or 'UpMcJ^tf^; ist fut. "afi^^tf^TlT ; 2d fut
256 VERBS.
^tfwfir; imp. ^"^fxrj; pot. ^it^; bened. "s^TTT; cond.
^T^^tf^T^. Pass. ^^^. Desid. f^tfir^fiT.
TT^ ' to proclaim.^
Pres. ^iM^fri ; ist praet. '^ciflMMW; 2d praet. xflM^N^TT;
3d praet. ^si^;^^; ist fut. xft^ftnTT; 2d fut. "^fW^'orfw; imp.
xft^^; pot. i^^W; bened. xfVanii;; cond. -i^ylMPn^TT. Pass.
-guTff. Desid. ^^l^^^^^ri.
fq (f^) 'to collect/
This verb optionally substitutes ^TT for its vowel, when it
also substitutes tf for xf. As belonging to the class finr, it
makes the vowel short, so that W[ becomes w.
Pres. ''^^Tifif -% ^'^rnrfrT -W ; ist prast. ^fT^xpTrf -IT, ^T^rnriT -TT ;
2d praet. ^qTnT^^5Tt, ^MMl^Ji ; 3d prait. 'inl^Mff -IT, W^l^^ -IT;
ist fut. -^tjfxrrn, ^rrftnTT; 2d fut. -^qf^uirri -% xj^r^mPii -^;
imp. ^q^tj -irf, ^r^W^ -in ; pot. ^^^ri; -TT, ^^7^ -7T ; bened.
-^mti^ or ^wnr, -^jqriml^, ^^rfMt^ ; cond. -mqPnuirf -TT, ^^ST^^-
•ftl"HTlT -IT.
See f%, fifth conjugation.
f%ff (fqflT) ' to think.'
Pres. fsRT^cT; ist praet. ^rfNr^iTirr^ ; 2d praet. P«i'Hi||Hm ;
3d praet. ^rfqfqfnTfT; ist fut. f^nrfWT; 2d fut. "N^iTftrarfiT;
imp. pM>ri^f ; pot. fq^^; bened. P^tMIH^; cond. ^nP^tdrmMrt;.
Pass, fxini^ri. Desid. "Nf^Tirf^^^fiT.
"^ ' to know/ ' to make known.'
This verb is one of those said to have an indicatory jt.
Pres. s^MMPd; ist praet. '^TfR^; 2d praet. ^M^l^°hli:; 3d
praet. ^H^sjMft^ or -ii^s^MT^; ist fut. "^mftrfTr; 2d fut. ^f^TorffT;
imp. '^^v:^ ; pot. ^M^ft^; bened. ^nmi^; cond. ^r^xrfir«rr^. Pass.
^nUT. Desid. f^TfRftrffir.
The other verbs of the class fiTTT in this conjugation are,
^^ ' to pound :' xjimfri, wq"'^!^, ^ST^NrtJT^.
^^ ' to pound :' ^^fiT, ^I^^^ or ^'q^'H^lT .
f%; as above.
TENTH CONJUGATION. 257
Tm ^ to fted :' Trnnfrf, w^^^mf^, 'snftxpfnT .
•^75 ' to live :' ^c^^ffT, ^^R^Tc^lT, ^T^cyrT .
ijt? * to give pain/
This makes the radical vowel optionally short in the third
praeterite^ when the vowel of the reduplication is made long.
Pres. xjt^TifTr ; ist praet. ^i^^^rn^; 2d praet. xfti^NohK; 3d
praet. ^fTjftftm^ or ^rfxpflTfT.
The same applies to the following verbs :
»f^ ^ to live :' l(\^^^t^, -^C^^^t[^ or wiftftr^.
^"hr ' to shine :' ^txRfrT, wf^trTW or ^r^H^W.
KR ' to speak :' >Tm^rf, 'srf^HT^ or wwl^i^.
HTO ' to shine :' HT^nrfk, ^f^Hnn^ or ^i^HWiT.
HTO ^ to shine :' Hm^, ^^rf^^JmiT or w^hnn^.
iftrJ ' to close :' Hh5^, ^fifmh^T^ or ^^nftfrTc^,
Tpi ' to throw.'
A penultimate ^ may remain unchanged in the third
praeterite.
Pres. XTT^t^rfw; ist praet. ^qn^^H^; 2d praet. MlQ^iH'l^ ; 3d
praet. ^^n^Y^ or ^nrrtl^; ist fut. Mi'^Pilril; &c.
^ ' to fill/
Pres. TlKufri ; ist praet. ^snnTTn^; 2d praet. MK^mnc; 3d praet.
^nftTTOT; 1st fut. TmrftnTT; 2d fut. xiKP^mfri; imp. tttttt^; pot.
ITTOIT; bened. XTR^; cond. W^kHmuit^.
So TX, third conjugation, xnt, ^ to cross over/ is given in
similar forms, except in the third praeterite, which is ^^MMIM*
This and some other verbs do not substitute 3^ for the
radical vowel in the reduplicate syllable of the third praeterite.
Pres. TTT^Rfw ; ist praet. "^nrRnn^; 2d praet. in^nn^^JK ; 3d
praet. ^rqiT^; ist fut. nmP^lriT; imp. TTT^nrj; &c.
l1
258 VERBS.
The other verbs that come under this example are,
^ ' to tear :' ^TTirflT, ^I^^l^.
1^ ^ to hasten :' Frrnrfw, ^nTFRTT .
^ * to trample :' ^r^rrfrr, ^SH*dr^7(;.
^F>R^ ^ to touch :' WT^PTflf, W^^q^li;.
Vf ' to remember :' ^K^Pri, ^nr^^jf .
• ^ ^ to spread :' ^cTTTTrfff, ^nTOT?^.
^"? ^ to make effort,' and T? ' to surround/ have two
forms : ^r^^^i^ or 'Hp^^gri^, ^T^^^ or ^^T^.
jh ' to please/
This verb optionally prefixes tt to the sign of the conjugation.
Pres. xfNrqfiT -W, HN^frt -W ; ist praet. ^UHlniilri^ -K, ^nrnnnt^ -IT;
2d praet. iO^HIIHTTr, UI^^IHI^ ; 3d praet. ^nqlPMillit; -K, ^iiqlvi^rf^ -TT ;
Ist fut. iflmrMdl, iH^Hlril ; 2d fut. nllilP^mriT -% TTRftniTfTT -^ ;
imp. ifhijTrj -■cTT, imniw -irf ; pot. ifN^i^ -w, wm\ -W ; bened.
UNIrt;, TfhafMtl?, m^PMMl« ; cond. ^4if)l»lP^mri^ -IT, ^^umPqmri^ -IT.
For the rest, see ift of the ninth conjugation. So also Y,,
^ to shake,' makes wrrrfiT or \iNi4Pri, &c.
iT^ (t%) ' to advise.'
Pres. TT^i^r^fw -^; ist praet. '^jrn^RTT -IT; 2d praet. H«t5(ijlHI«;
3d praet. wf^^TSjTr^ -TT ; ist fut. H«^P^ril ; 2d fut. H«^PMU<Pri -^ ;
imp. iT^^nrg -irf ; pot. H«^^ft^ -IT ; bened. H^^q Iff, H^^T^ ; cond.
^^Ht^Pumrt^ -7T. Pass. W^. Desid. f^TH^^f^mf^ -ff.
So ^f^ ^ to speak falsely,' irfgr ^ to support,' as a family,
and irf^ ^ to contract.'
7^ ' to melt.'
^ This optionally takes the augment xj before the conjuga-
tional sign.
Pres. c^m^Pri or c^Hl^Pri ; ist praet. ^Hc^lMMft^, WFJIxnTri;;
2d praet. WIM^IHIfi, HnnrnTT^ ; 3d praet. -UriHc^Mil^, ^Mc*ilc^^»t;;
1st fut. WIMPmhi, <?I^P^ril; 2d fut. <;5mPMU|pH, HnrfVorfjT ; imp.
cTRXt^, Tyr^W; pot. cTR^lt^j HTTRI^; bened. HRI^; cond.
^<^IMpMmrf^, ^TTST^rfWri;.
c^ is also a verb of the ninth conjugation.
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES. 259
^V ^ to laugh at.'
Pres. ^i^^Pri ; ist preet. W^rt^; 2d praet. ^iji^rnnr; 3d
praet. ^st^^tIt^ or ^^T^fhpr^; ist fut. ^l^P^dl; 2d fut. ^ftrarfTT;
imp. T[rt^ ; pot. "^rf^ ; bened. "^TT^ ; cond. ^sr^f^TSTir .
Pass. 9|U|rf. Desid. f^l^l^fxT^.
WJ{ ' to tranquillize.'
Pres. ftiH^Pri ; ist praet. ^WTTqiT; 2d praet. «iHiU^<+.K;
3d praet. ■^H^TRTT or w^^iTlT; ist fut. H m Pm ht ; 2d fut. m^-
fwfif; imp. ^TTT'q^; pot. ^"R^; bened. fiiRiirt^; cond. ^WR-
firoiir. Pass. mr^^. Desid. fg^inP^MPff.
On the conjugation of Verbs in different voices, ^c.
222. The forms of the roots which have been given in the
preceding pages are those which are usually assigned to them
by native grammarians. The student must not be surprised,
however, if he finds occasional departures from the models
here specified, or a verb inflected in a different conjugation,
or in a different Pada, from that in which he will have found
it here represented. As to variations of meaning, they will be
frequent ; for in the examples cited, the principal signification
only of each verb has been purposely stated, in order not to
occasion doubt or perplexity in an early period of study. The
other senses will become famiUar by practice. Of the varia-
tions of inflexion, the greater number are ascribed by gram-
marians to poetical license, or even to error (jth!<) ; but it
may be doubted if they do not, sometimes at least, arise from
circumstances which have been yet imperfectly investigated in
the history of the grammar of the Sanskrit language. The
variations of import are no doubt often imputable to the hber-
ties taken by Sanskrit writers, relying upon the purport in
which they employ any particular verb being rendered intel-
ligible by the context of the passage in which it occurs. Some
part of the uncertainty, however, proceeds from an incomplete
L 1 2
260 VERBS.
analysis, and the want of examples to illustrate the abstract
term which is used to express the meaning of the root.
Authors consequently disagree as to the interpretation. How-
ever, these difficulties need not embarrass the student : he
must be contented to take the verb as he finds it, and must
not look upon its regular grammatical type as absolutely
unalterable.
223. There is one class of modifications, and that the most
frequent, which is recognised by grammarians. A simple verb
may be inflected in one Pada, and when compounded with a
preposition may be inflected in the other, either in its primi-
tive, or in a modified sense. A few of these compound verbs
have been already noticed, but it may be useful to extend the
number of instances, arranging them in alphabetical order,
^sra ' to throw,' preceded by any preposition, may take either
Pada ; as, with fVf^ ^ to throw off:' T^ f^fTtl^fir orfni.^^
* he casts off the bond.'
"3if ' to reason,' preceded by any preposition, may take either
Pada ; as, with "^nr ' to throw off' or ^ repel,' ^nft^TT VT^
* let him remove sin ;' h^^mI^Ph ' he removes that :' also
with WR^, as ^aH^frf -^.
'^, which in its simple state admits of either Pada, is restricted
to one or other according to the prepositions with which
it is compounded, and the meanings thence derived :
Wg<*CirH ' he imitates ;' ^^^M ' he overcomes ;' ^rj^^
* he informs against ;' "^T|i;^ ' he reviles ;' "grr^W ^t
* he worships Hari ;' "g'q^^^ ^ he changes' (as a property) ;
^JM^ClPri ' he pohshes ;' XRT^frT * he does well ;' TT^^ ' he
offers violence to,' as a female ; ^frrTF^ U^ixri TTW^t ' Ravana
carries off Sita :' also ' to recite ;' as, ttt^: H^M ^ he recites
hymns.' ^ is used with f% to imply change or produc-
tion of some kind or other; and when the verb is used
intransitively, or the production is confined to sounds, the
Atmane-pada only is employed ; otherwise, the Parasmai-
pada ; as, "STT^ f^^t^ ^ the scholars change,' i. e. they
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES. 261
learn ;' ^tT"^ fcj ^|n rf Jii^ch: * the singer varies his notes \'
but "N^ r^ohCirri oFR: ' passion transforms the heart.*
^ ' to scatter,' when the act of an animal or bird, takes the
^tmane-pada after '^^, and inserts a sibilant : ^nTf^^jTff
"^W: ' the cock throws up (the earth, either for pleasure,
or to make a hole to lie down in) ;' but o'WJrRTtTf^tTfrr ^
^ the woman scatters flowers.'
■gw, ^ to go/ without a preposition takes the j^tmane-pada,
signifying ^ being engaged in' or ' assiduous/ or ^ becom-
ing manifest' or ^ developed in ;' as, ^^ "gnrw ^if: ' the
understanding is engaged in (the study of) the Rig-veda ;'
^TtinnTRT "^5*7^ ^he is assiduous for study;' ^^ifr^sf^TiT
^T^rftn ' the S'astras are manifested (or fully understood)
in him.' So with "^xi and "qn in the same meanings :
' ^M'+Hri, MU-*H^; but not with ^?^, as ^^imflT. So with
'^rr prefixed, meaning * to ascend,' as a heavenly body, not
as any thing else : ^T^WW ^^t: ^ the sun ascends / but
^r^rmffT wr: ^ the smoke rises.' Also with fV, meaning
^ motion of the feet :' ^rrg fr^iTlf ^Tsft ^ the horse trots
well ;' but fw^iTTfir ^rf^: ^ the joint splits.' So with "^xr or
IT, implying ^ power' or ^ valour :' ^M"*Hrf, H-*Hrf * he is
mighty' or ' valiant ;' but "grrwrfw ^ he comes' or ' ap-
proaches ;' M^iHfri ' he goes' or ^ departs.'
^, ^ to buy,' is restricted to the i^tmane-pada, when preceded
by ^R", xif^, or f^. The two first have the same meaning
as the simple verb, ' to buy ;' the latter means ^ to sell :'
^T^^hD^, Mn.-:hUnri, ' he buys ;' fr^tw ' he sells.'
sRt^, ^ to play,' takes the i^tmane-pada after ^ ^"^j iilx:, and
-^m ; as, ^rratr^ ' he plays much ;' »ii«j5ftlirf * he plays like ;'
^ Pi^Mi) ^ H ^ he plays again ;' ^*$h1^rl ' he plays well' or ^ com-
pletely :' but not if ^"^ influences the government of the
case ; as, HRN<*H jAl^fd ^ he plays with the boy ;' nor
if, with W{^i it denotes ' making a noise ;' as, ^■aJt^fff ^"^
' the wheel creaks.'
ft^ ' to throw,' preceded by ^rfir, ^>T, or nf^, is confined to
262 VERBS.
the Parasmai-pada : ^rfwf^xrfiT ^ he throws much' or
' beyond ;' ^f^ft^rrfw ^ he throws on ;' TTfflfH|qf7r ^ he
throw^s or sends back.'
^ wdth ^ takes the i^tmane-pada : ^^W "^T^ ^ he sharpens
the weapon ;' "^l^i^R ^^W ' it aggravates (his) grief.'
im ^ to go/ has a variety of prefixes, and consequent modifica-
tions of form and sense. With WT prefixed, and used in
the causal form to signify ' to have patience/ it takes the
i^tmane-pada : ^TTJIHMy ITT^IT ' wait or delay a little.^
With ^ it takes the i^tmane-pada in an intransitive
sense: TT^ ^"^^ ^ the sentence is plain' (or is cohe-
rent) ; ^If fW: ^iT5a[^ ^ he goes with his friends :' but
?JT'T ^n^sarfir ' he goes to the village.'
7T ' to swallow,^ preceded by ifm, takes the meaning of ' pro-
mising' or ' uttering/ and is conjugated in the i^Ltmane-
pada : ■^TTT ^fhr^ ' he promises a hundred (rupees) / ^ i Th rfV
TnTjrnT ^f/iT.7t * he proclaims the qualities of the prince :'
otherwise ^ilTfrf TClH ^ he swallows a mouthful.' It takes
the i^tmane-pada after m^ ; ^T^mfff "^fHw fq'^rr^: * the
goblin swallows blood.'
'^ ' to go,' with "grr*" in the sense of ^ going astray' or ' departing
from/ takes the i^tmane-pada ; as, >IT#g^T^ ^ he deviates
from virtue :' not if it is intransitive ; THq^^i^frt ' the tear
overflow's : but it is so used with ^, or with ^»^, '^'fT, and
^rr, connected with a noun in the instrumental case ; t;^
^^^^ (or ^ijf^i-Moi) mn ' the king rides with (in) a chariot.'
fflTj ' to conquer/ is limited to the i^tmane-pada after xftT and
f% ; as, TTU^TW, f%»T^5 ^ he conquers.'
^ * to know,' w ithout a preposition, if used in certain senses
intransitively, is conjugated in the i^tmane-pada ; ifff^"^
^TT^Ttt ' he engages (in sacrifice by means of) Ghee :' also
after ^nr, in the sense of ' denying / ^iHHM^iMl^ ' he denies
the (debt of a) hundred rupees :' after vfif, in the sense of
^ acknowledging ;' ^* xrfrnrRft ' he acknowledges the hun-
dred :' and after ^H, in that of * demanding' or * expecting /
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES.
^ ^%jh1^. It is used in the j^tmane-pada without a
preposition, and transitively when the result of the action
reverts to the agent ; as, ^rf ^iHlri ' he obtains a cow :' not
else ; as, ^mt ^TTTrfiT ' he knows (the dwelling of) his
mother :' nor if the verb be preceded in such a sense by
a preposition ; as, yi1<4loh r[ mrnrrfiT ^: ^ the fool does
not recognise (or obtain) heaven.'
lift, ' to guide,^ in certain senses takes the Xtmane-pada : as,
' to excel in ;' ^^ •T"'^ ^ he excels in the S'astra :' — ^ to
determine ;' "?n# "^T^ ' he ascertains the principle.^ Also
after "g^, meaning ^ to lift up ;' ^HiH-^i-HH * he lifts up a
stafF.^ After T^, implying ' to invest with the sacred cord f
<«llo6HM?T'q? ^ he invests the boy with the string : ' — ' to
hire ;' cf;«^ohUHMH<M^ ^ he hires servants.' After f^, signi-
fying * to pay ;' ^ f^^nrw ' he pays the tax :' — ^ to grant'
or ^ endow ;' ^7T f^T^T^ ' he grants a hundred' (for some
religious purpose) : — ' to restrain,' when the object is in
the person ; "^N f^'^^ * he restrains wrath :' but not if
the object be in another ; ^: "^N i^rnrfir WW* * the
pupil assuages the wTath of the teacher :' nor if the object
be corporeal ; t^j? OfH^ftr ' he turns away his cheek.'
w, ' to praise,' is conjugated in the Atmane-pada after ^TT ;
^T"g^ ^ he praises.'
THT, used intransitively after "31^ and f^, takes the Atmane-
pada ; T^tt^, fTiHTW ^n§: ' the sun shines ;' also if it mean
^ to warm or heat a part of one's own body ;' "a^TTff, friT^
xrrftif ' he warms his hand :' not if a part of another ; "%^
^^^ "TrftlTIJ r^MPH * Chaitra warms or burns the hand of
Maitra :' nor when it means ^ to burn or melt substances f
as, ^^gwrfw yiUojiic ' the goldsmith melts the gold.'
When it means ^ to practise devotion,' it is used in the
fourth conjugation in the Atmane-pada ; rtujd riM^IM^:
' the ascetic practises penance.' According to some, it is
confined to the Atmane-pada after ^r^, in the sense of
' penitence ;' as, ^T^THTW ' he repents.'
264 VERBS.
^ (^T>t) ^ to give/ when preceded by "m, in any other sense
than that of ^ setting open/ as the mouth, &c., takes the
Atmane-pada ; as, VrpTT^ ^ he receives wealth ;' f^tllHlt^^
' he acquires knowledge :' but ^ ^T^^lfw ' he opens his
mouth/ ^ he yawns :' not, it is said, if it be another's
mouth ; as, ^TT^^ fxTTftfc??^: Mri^-^ ^ ' the ants open
the mouth of the grasshopper/ The Parasmai-pada is
also used after ^rr in other senses ; as, f^Rrf^ofif ^^T^^rffT
%?rt ^ the physician lays open the boil / Tf^t Wci ^mr^t^lfrf
' the river lays open (undermines) the bank/
^ {^W), ' to give/ is used in the i^tmane-pada after ^,
either singly or with another preposition, with a noun in
the third case, having the sense of the fourth : ^T^T ^nr^rff
or iR**jiiiodL^ ' he gives to the female slave/ If the sense of
the third case is preserved, the Parasmai-pada is retained :
^TBTT Vrf ^T^x[^a[1if f^riTR ' he gives wealth by the slave girl
to the Brahman/
g^ ' to see,' with "SRH, and used intransitively, takes the Xtmane-
pada ; ^i«T^ff ^ he considers well / so does rfrq' ' to ask,'
as a boon ; as, ^^1^ THIW ^ he asks for Ghee :' and TT^
^ to ask,' with W[; as, ^Jn^TsdW ^ he takes leave of/ and
with ^T^, used intransitively ; as, ^T'^^T^ ^ he inquires/
W^, ' to eat,' takes the i^tmane-pada ; ^^*f Wii ^ he eats boiled
rice / also ' to possess ;' -^^ "^fz^fhrTc?: '^^'h^ ' the king
possessed the earth / also ' to suffer / ^^ ^K'^^lrilPrT ^^
' the old man suffers hundreds of pains / not if it mean ' to
protect / as, 'T^>pTf^ tT^ ' the king protects the earth/
^ ' to bear,' with trf^ prefixed, is conjugated in the Parasmai-
pada : xrlxij^rH ^ he endures' or ' forgives/
TJm, ' to restrain,' varies the Pada according to different mean-
ings and prefixes. With ^rr used intransitively it takes the
Atmane-pada ; WRn33L^ TT^ ^ the tree spreads / but '^TR'^a^fiT
"sniT^lf ^he draws the rope from the well/ unless part
of one's own body be intended ; as, ^mrai^ "Tiftlf ' he
stretches out his hand/ Also with ■^ir, meaning * to take
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES.
as a wife j^ ^ii^-qd.ri olOT ^ he takes the maiden to wife/
In this form the third praeterite optionally rejects the
nasal ; Tr: ^fftTrr^^FTcr or "^ttTW ' Rama wedded Sita.' If
it implies taking the wife of another, it is xn^ ^i<5i*jm-
T[^fi{ : if it signifies acceptance in general, it is restricted
to the i^tmane-pada ; ^^T^TyTXRa^ ^ he accepts the dona-
tion.' It also takes the same voice after W{, "3^, and w^,
not signifying any thing relating to books ; as, N^HIil-edi,^
' he puts on the clothes ; HKH^'^^ ' he takes up the load ;'
'^t^'^ M*\^siji ^ he stacks the com :' but "^^Rafff ^^T«^ ^ he
studies diligently the Veda.'
w^ takes the Atmane-pada after "^5 and prepositions ending
with vowels ; as, "^^ ^ he makes effort ;' '^"'J^ ' he sets
after' or ^ according to ;' f«T^ ' he appoints ;' irg^J ^ he
arranges :' unless it refer to sacrificial vessels ; iT^nrrWlftlT
R^JriPrK ^ he sets in order the vessels of sacrifice.'
T?T ' to sport,' preceded by ^TT, V[ft, or fV, is restricted to the
Parasmai-pada ; WTT^ffrT ^ he rests;' xrfxwffT 'he goes
about ;' fTOlfw ' he takes rest.' Preceded by "3TT, in the
sense of ' dweUing with as a wife,' it takes either voice ;
as, '3'miTrTT or TqiTT^ vrrcqf * he takes a ^fife.'
'^, ' to speak,' is conjugated in the i^tmane-pada, when signi-
fying ' to excel in' or ^ to be acquainted with ;' as, ^T^
"^W * he is learned in the S'astra :' — ' to labour ;' "^^ "^^
* he labours in the field.' Also after ^^STJ, used intransi-
tively, and in the sense of ' articulate speech ;' as, 'STtJ^jr^rt
«R7: «Jk55T^^ ' Kat'ha speaks after or like Kalapa :' other-
wise, <J#iHH^?^rri ' he repeats the speech ;' and ^t^q^^fif
qfhrrr ' the lute sounds.' Also after "^tt, used transitively
to mean ' pacifying ;' as, ^JTTT^'^W ' he pacifies the ser-
vants :' — 'advising;' as, %Eryrsr^^ 'he advises the
scholar :' — or ' communicating -with privately ;' y^KI^M-
"^^ ' he intrigues with another's wife.' Also after f%, and
U optionally, implying difference of opinion expressed arti-
culately, ' dispute ;' as, f^TT^^ or friT^f^ %irr: ' the
M m
^66 VERBS.
doctors dispute.' Also after ^ and % to signify articu-
late speech uttered simultaneously ; as, ^Hl"c(t^^ WRTOt:
' the Brahmans speak or chaunt together :' but HHIcj(ir>ff
i^rn: ^ the birds sing together.' Also after ^HT, when the
result of the action reverts to the agent ; ^HT^^ V*ToRT-
jftsTiTR ^ the man desirous of wealth reviles improperly:'
otherwise, ^Mcj^^fri ' he speaks against' or ^ prohibits.'
^ ^ to bear,' preceded by TI, takes the Parasmai-pada, used
intransitively ; 17^ TT^T^f^ ^ the river flows.'
f^, ' to know,' takes the i^tmane-pada after ^J^, and option-
ally affixes ^ to the final in the third person plural ; 4?^^
or Tfrfr^^ *they know well.'
f%^, ^ to enter,' takes the i^tmane-pada after fiT ; Prin^^l^ * he
enters in.'
:^ ^ to swear,' when the eiFect of the oath reverts to the
speaker, is conjugated in the i^tmane-pada ; "^retrmT ^PT^
iffqt ^ the nymph swears by Krishna.'
"^ ^ to hear,' after tc^, used intransitively, makes ^Sliij^ ' he
hears well :' otherwise, "^r^ ^^wrfw ' he hears the sound.'
FT, ' to stay' or ' stand,' takes a variety of prepositions, and is
conjugated in the iitmane-pada after, ^SR, TT, f^, W{^, used
intransitively ; "^^^firlW ' he waits patiently ;' MPriaw ^ he
stands or sets forth ;' f^fwF^ ^ he stands apart' or * still ;'
^rfw^ ^ he stops or stays with' or ^ proceeds.' Also after wr,
used transitively ; as, ^"s^ f^i^lHlfdad ' he assents to the
eternal word.' It occurs with ^ also in the Parasmai-
pada ; fVPiTRniwrfT ' he observes the rite.' Also after •^, not
implying to stand up or rise, or to exact or demand ; as,
^chl^PrlS^ ^ he aspires to salvation :' but xftTTFlwfw * he
rises from the stool ;' ?|TTrsrfTT(wf(r ^ he levies a hundred
(rupees) from the village.' After TT, in the sense of per-
forming religious rites, of worshipping, of doing homage
to, of uniting with, of shewing affection to, or of tend-
ing towards, as a road, FT takes the i^itmane-pada ; as,
'31 1 H «l T' ^liyif fl^W ^ the Brahman preserves the sacred
CHANGE OF PADAS OR VOICES. 267
fire ;' ^^nf^m^firw ' he worships the sun ;' ^MiJMfriSd ' he
attends on, or does homage to, the king ;' tt^ ^Tg^TT^^rfww
^ the Ganges unites with the Jumna ;' ^I^^MTdyd ' he
befriends the pious ;' tp^ ajTH^rqfir?^ ^ the road leads to
the village.' It is also used intransitively in the i^tmane-
pada after Tcr ; as, H)9iH«ltlc4 ^ M fri y H ' he waits or stands
by at the time of eating :' and transitively in either Pada,
w-hen expeetation, or service not religious, is implied ;
fH^Tofi: TPT^xriwfjT or ^ q ffi a H ' the mendicant waits upon
the master^ (for alms) ; H^Ttg^rftrFfif or TtriWff rfT^ ' a
w^oman w^aits upon, or ministers to, her husband.' FT is
also used in the Xtmane-pada, without a preposition, to
signify ' to manifest dependence upon ;' as, iftrft "^WR
■fire^ ^ the nymph places her trust in Krishna :' or ^ to
adhere to,' as a leader ; cfi3§Tf^"j frr^ ^ he adheres to, or
foUow^s, Karna and the rest.'
^, ^ to sound, takes the Atmane-pada after ^t ; ^Ml^iS" ^ he
sounds.'
"^, ^ to strike' or ' kill,' takes the Atmane-pada after ^ if
used intransitively ; or when the object is part of one's
self, transitively ; as, ^TT^ ^ he strikes ;' or ^rr^ l^i:: ' he
strikes his head :' but ttt:^ f^ ^STT^fnT ^ he strikes the
head of another.'
^ ^to take,' preceded by ^g, implying ' to take after,' or ^act
like,' takes the Atmane-pada ;' MjchHH-ll ^"^^^ ' horses
take the nature of the father :' but not if actual presence is
implied ; as, f^'JfH^T.frr ' he takes after his father.'
^, ^ to call,' used intransitively, takes the i^tmane-pada after
'^% f^, f^, and ^; as, 4Md^iiri, fH<j^Mri, f^3p^;, ^*<j^^ri ' he
calls out,' ^ exclaims,' &c. : also after WT, used transitively in
the sense of ' defiance ;' "^^JTRf^ ^ he defies or chal-
lenges the enemy :' but ydHld^^fw ' he calls his son.'
Causal verbs ordinarily take the Parasmai-pada, and seldom
appear in any other ; but, as observed already, they may
assume the Atmane-pada when the effect of the action reverts
M m ij
268 VERBS.
to the individual ; as, WT"^ HllS^fff ' he causes the place to be
cleaned;^ WTTTR HTrt^ ' he causes himself to be cleansed' or
' purified.' There are certain causal verbs, however, which
are limited to one or other Pada, according to their meanings,
ipi ^ to be greedy/ in the sense of ^ deceiving/ takes the
i^tmane-pada ; "^TTcy 'I^Imk ^ he deceives the child :' otherwise,
"'Sr'R Jl^^fri * he excites the dog to be greedy,' So ^^, ' to
deceive,' makes cjniirf ^^n^ ^ he deceives the girl :' but ^rf^
^^girfir ^ he drives away the snake.' So ^, combined with a
word signifying ' falsely' or ^ erroneously,' takes the ^tmane-
pada ; as, f^^J chKiiw iTimiif ' he causes a false alarm or
proclamation to be made :' but ws ohKuPH "^ ^ he causes the
word to be accurately repeated.'
According to some authorities, the following verbs do not
admit the Parasmai-pada in the causal mode, xn ' to drink,'
^ ^ to tame,' itr ' to restrain,' and im ^ to make effort/ pre-
ceded by ^rr ; »t^ ' to be perplexed/ preceded by "qix ; ^^ ' to
shine,' «T1T ^ to dance,' ^ ' to speak,' ^RT ^ to dwell / as, xrT"^^,
^Tqw, -iiNiH^H, '^rrimni^, irfi^ft^^, d^^, "JT^irff, ^n^xrw, m^^rq^.
So also ^ ' to give suck ;' vm^i). This limitation is however
qualified as above ; and when the object of the action is dif-
ferent from the agent, these verbs take the Parasmai-pada ; as,
'^rMM m^^Mfd W^X ^ he causes the calves to drink the milk,' &c.
It is unnecessary to prosecute this subject farther, as it
would be impossible in this place to collect all the variations
that occur in books, and they will be readily recognised when
they are met with.
^
CHAPTER VI.
DERIVATION.
SECTION I.
Verbal Derivatives.
224. The derivatives of the Sanskrit language are arranged
under two principal classes ; the first comprises those nouns
VERBAL DERIVATIVES INFINITIVE. 269
which are formed from the verb ; the second, those which are
formed from other nouns. To the first is assigned the name
Kridanta, or nouns formed with terminations attached to verbal
roots : to the second, the denomination Taddhita, or nouns
which import relation to other nouns. We may be permitted
to distinguish them as verbal and nominal derivatives, and
proceed to treat of the former.
225. One principal class of verbal derivatives consists of
what we are accustomed to consider as parts of the verb itself,
or the infinitive and the participles.
Infinitive,
2i2!6. The infinitive of the Sanskrit verb is regarded by
native grammarians as an indeclinable noun, formed from the
root by affixing to it the syllables '^\, leaving "gn.
«. Whatever modifications the root undergoes in the first
future before the affix TTT (rule 193), it equally undergoes in
the infinitive before '^, inserting or not inserting ^, and
combining with the augment, or with the first letter of the
termination, conformably to the plan pursued in the first
future tense ; as a few examples will suffice to prove.
Verb.
First future.
Infinitive.
^togo
^TTT
"m.
^to go
^I#T
^t\
^V to grow
^dvwT
»rfVi3H
^ to do
^^
^f^
IPT to go
'tnti
^ to steal
-^Tli.rHfiT
^ to sing
TTiTT
'H\
»rT to bear
^rf^'cTT
'ff^jn.
f»r to conquer
^TfT
^
^ to burn
^^niT
^^?l
^ to give
^TrTT
v^
^ to cut
5[TfrT
<Ws.
^ to see
^T^
^1
270 DERIVATION.
XT^ to cook xf^ xr^
H^to be Hf^ffT HP^IgH^
1?T to sport TTiTT TlrJ^
xr^ to bear A ^ ^
^T to stay ^nWT ^TiJ'^
^Txr to creep <
f^H to hurt f^ftnn ^^^^^\
^ to take ^ ^^^
b. The Sanskrit infinitive presents a general analogy to the
Latin supine in ' um,' and in many instances the words are
the same ; as, WT^ ' statum ;' ^T^ ' datum ;' m j*^ ' potum ;'
ift^ ^ junctum ; ' ^TTTftlwiT ^ sopitum.' In others, we have
the same principles of formation displayed ; as tj^ makes XT^WT,
so ' facio' makes ' factum ;' as ^T^ makes ^jItKH , so ^ unguo'
makes ^ unctum ;' as ^cT^ may make ^FT^JJ^, so ^ rumpo^ makes
* ruptum/ The augment ^ also is observable in such supines,
as ' monitum,' ' domitum,' &c. ; and in some cases we have it
optionally inserted or omitted, as in ^ altum' or * alitum,' and
the like.
Participles,
2217. The participles are of two kinds, declinable and inde-
clinable : to the latter the denomination of Gerunds has been
given by Professor Bopp.
228. The declinable participles are of the present, past,
and future times, diversified according to the Pada, or the
voice, to which they are considered to belong.
a. The indeclinable participles, or Gerunds, are indeter-
minately past.
Present Participles,
229. The present participle may be active or passive ; and
the active is distinguished as belonging to the Parasmai or
j^tmane-pada.
230. The present participle, Parasmai-pada, is formed by
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 271
adding the syllable WiT, technically called ^, to the root:
the initial "^r indicates that the base undergoes, before the parti-
cipial affix ^, modifications which it derives from its conju-
gational peculiarities, especially before the termination of the
third person plural of the present tense : thus >|^ makes H^
^ being ;' ^, WWi{ ' conquering -,' xr^, W^\ ' cooking ;' tv\, T53[7r
' going ;' -qr, f^T^ ' drinking ,' m, ffl^TW ' staying ;' ^, ^r^^
' eating ;' ^, Wff ' kilUng ;' ^, g5r«!; ' sacrificing ;' f^, ^^
' playing ;' ^, "^^ ' producing ;' ^, "|^W * tormenting ;' ^,
"^T^ ' obstructing \' ^, "^^T^ ' doing ;' "=#, -^luirt^ ' buying ;' "^^,
■crti,HTT ' stealing ;' and the like.
a. The present participle ending in ^ is decKnable in the
three genders, according to rules already given : see p. 55,
rule 104, &c.
b. In the case of f^, ^ to know,' "^ is optionally affixed in
place of ^!TfT, making f^^ ^ knowing,' ' wise' (see p. 70) ; as
well as f^TT.
231. The present participle of the i^tmane-pada is formed
by adding ^T^T^, that is, ^TT^, to the inflective base of the
verb, as modified for conjugation in the present tense. When,
as in the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth conjugations, the inflec-
tive base ends with ^, then 17 is prefixed to the termination ;
as, ;^, TJVJTR ' increasing ;^ iqr^, M-MHM ^ cooking :' in the other
conjugations the termination is added at once to the verb ; as,
^, ^THTT^ ' sleeping ;' VT, ^VFT ' having ;^ ^, ^fro ^ making ;'
&c. These participles are declined in the three genders like
nouns in ^ ; xritr:, xp^TRT, M-«*H|rf. See p. 30.
a. There are some participial nouns formed with termina-
tions of an analogous character, and having the same letters ; as,
^, ^jm?T; ' enjoying;' ij, fwru: 'wearing;' ^, ffTTTFT: 'slay-
ing,' &c., formed with xdrj^^ : also ^T, M'«I*IH: ' purifying,' ' a
purifier,' ' the air ;' and X(1T ' to sacrifice,' ^M^iHiH: * sacrificing,'
' a sacrificer,' &c., formed with ^[TR'^f^.
b, ^rm, ' to sit,' makes ^TB^rf:, -•TT, -•?> ' sitting,' ' seated.'
232. The present participle of the passive voice is formed
272 DERIVATION.
with ^J^ attached to the inflective base of the present tense ;
as, ^ ^ to do/ f^ ; f^iXRTW: -WT -xjf ' being to be made :' ^T ' to
give,' ^^ ; ^"hRT^: -^ -^ ' being to be given :' ^iir^ ; Tf^,
H^HM: -«TT -"ff ' being to be destroyed :' tr * to go ;' J|W|HM
^ being to be traversed ;' n^HlA ^ riHI-^r^'Iri -^IHdl ^ ' That
which was to be gone over before (by the sun), was not untra-
versed by him (Hanuman) :' fimMl '^^MHIilji >fhT: ' Bhima being
overwhelmed with arrows/
Past Participles,
233. There are two participles which follow the analogy of
the second or reduplicate praeterite, one for the Parasmai, the
other for the ^tmane-pada ; which latter serves also for the
passive voice.
Participles of the second prceterite,
234. The participle past of the second praeterite, Parasmai-
pada, is formed by adding "^^ technically termed "^, to the
inflective base, as it occurs before the terminations of the dual
and plural numbers of the reduplicate praeterite (see p. ii8,
rule I 88).
a. The augment ^ is prefixed to ^w when the inflective
base consists of a single vowel followed by a consonant ; also
after certain other verbs. When the verb is reduplicated, so
that the inflective base contains more than one vowel, ^ is
ordinarily not inserted ; as in the following examples.
b. Participles in ^ are declined in the three genders ; as
in p. 70, rule 128.
^ to go ; ^1t?^ did go -, tf^RT"^, ^^y ^f^T^.
^ to go ; ^mto^ did go ; ^^uft^T^, ^5TF§^t, ^ift^.
^ to make ; ^'f\\ did make ; ^^^^, '^^»d, '^^^•
TiH to go ; ^TfxJT^ or ^PT^^ did go ; iffrR^^, ^TT^^,
^rng^, w^, irf^HTiT, im^.
inf to eat ; ^rf^^^ did eat ; irf^a^r^, 'T^"^, »TfTl^Trr .
»rPJ to be awake ; inTFlt^, »I»rr^^^ did wake ; *\»TFTtT'^,
W'TT'jm^, »nnn^t, »r5rrg^, T^inntTT, trt'J^.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 273
^T^ to give ; ^^ did give ; ^[■ngT^, ^T^, ^TOIT.
f^ to see ; <^r^|c|« or ^^^^ did see ; ^^f^^, ^l^SfT'^T,
^^^, ^^^» ^?f^, ^^\'
"q^ to cook ; ^IV^IT did cook ; ^fq^»T, ^^J^s ^f^"^.
fn^ to urine ; *fe^ did urine ; ?flyr?r, 'it^^j ^'^fl^*
■^ to weep ; ^^IT^^ did weep ; ^^T^, ^^i^, ^^^¥"ff •
f^ to know ; fVfVf ^ or f^fW^^ did know ; "Rf^^TT^,
fV^ to enter ; fMV^RT or fM^^fTT^ did enter^ &c. ; as in f^.
"^ to bear ; ^T3^ did bear ; ^l^|r|^, fll^M% ^TR^-
"^ to kill ; ^Qh^^^ or ^MH^^ did kill ; irr?rTr"!T, ^T^^T"^, &c.
236. The past participle of the reduplicate praeterite in the
^tmane-pada is formed by adding W[^ to the inflective base,
as it occurs before the termination of the third person sin-
gular : thus tr^5 ' to cook/ makes ^''^rR ; ^^ ^ to do/ -^^m ;
■q% ^to speak/ 2d praet. IR^, part. vh^H; '^, ^ to hear/ 2d
praet. ip^y part. 9i^gc|Kir ; &c. These participles are decHned
in the three genders like nouns in ^.
Indefinite past Participle.
237- The indefinite past participles are two ; one having
an active, the other a passive signification. Neither can be
said to appertain to any particular tense, as they do not, like
the preceding, follow any analogy of construction.
238. The indefinite past participle active is formed by
adding "^l^ to the root or crude verb, leaving KWfr; the effect
of the oR in this or any technical termination being to preclude
the Guna or Vriddhi change of the radical vowel, and to occasion
the rejection of a radical nasal penultimate : "^^ ^ to do/ there-
fore makes "^^5 ' was making' or ' made ;' ^^ ' to see/ ^^^
' was seeing or ' saw / ^ ^ to bite/ ^r^ ^ was biting.' It
is commonly used with an auxiliary verb ; as, ^ "^rR^^^
' I was doing* or * I did.* The declension of the participles
so formed has already been described (p. 55, r. 104).
239. The indefinite past participle passive is formed by
N n
274 DERIVATION.
adding to the root or crude verb the affix li, that is, w ; the
object of the "^ being, as just mentioned, to bar the substitu-
tion of the Guna or Vriddhi equivalent of the radical vowel,
and eject a penultimate nasal : thus "ftr, ^ to conquer,^ makes
f%rr, ^ conquered ;' "^ ^ to hear,^ ^w ' heard ;' >T ' to be,' HW
^ been ;' ^ ^ to take,' f 7T ' taken ;' fqw ' to think,' fq^ ^ thought ;^
^ ^ to bite,' ^ ^ bitten ;' and the like.
a. When following a verb ending in an aspirated consonant
or ^, the termination if is changed to V, and combined with
the final, analogously to the combinations of the same verb
before the K and "?j of the tenses (rule :2i3, c, 8) ; as, ^ ^ to
bum,^ ^Sfny * burnt ;' "R^ ' to bear,' ^ft^ ' borne.'
b. In verbs ending in consonants the augment ^ is occa-
sionally prefixed to the termination w, when a medial ^ or T
may be optionally changed to the Guna equivalent ; as, ^^^
^ to weep,' ^^f^ or rtf^ ^ wept ;' f^ * to know,' f^f^ or ^f^
' known.' jy^, ' to take,^ makes the ^ long, and optionally
substitutes the vowel for the semivowel ; as, i\{\^ or Jj^rf
' taken. ^ "^^ ^ to dwell,' and T^ and "^ ' to speak,' substitute
the vowel for the initial ; as, yfNiT ' dwelt,' "5^ and vJO^iT ^ said.'
c. Verbs ending with tt commonly reject the nasal ; so tth,
^ to go,' makes Tnr, 'gone;' 7^ 'to refrain,' xnr; TH ' to be
engaged in,' TIT : but ojnr, ' to desire,^ makes cRTnT, &c.
d. The termination of this participle is sometimes changed
to ^ ; as, '^, ' to cook,' makes '^w, ' cooked ;' V ' to shake,^
VTT ' shaken :' also after verbs ending in ^ or t, not inserting
^; as, fH^ ' to break,' f>T^ ' broken ;' "^ ' to fill,' ij^ ' filled.'
Verbs taking this form are denoted in the lists of roots by an
indicatory ^ (see p. io6).
e. Although not changeable to a Guna or Vriddhi letter, a
radical final vowel sometimes substitutes a different vowel.
Thus, of verbs ending in ^rr, FT * to stay' makes fWcT ; HT ' to
mete,' fi^iT ' meted ;' tn * to drink,' xftlT ' drank ;' ^ ^ to abandon/
^Ht * abandoned :' or a final ^sn may be dropped ; as, ^, ' to give,'
makes ^ : and in this root the initial may be rejected, when
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 275
a preposition ending in a vowel precedes ; as, T(W or IT^
* given aw ay/ If the vowel of the preposition be ^ or "^^ it
must be made long, when the initial of ^ is rejected ; as, xrO^
or xrft:^ ^ completely given ;' ^ or ^g^ *^ vv ell given.' ^fc^T,
' to be poor/ makes ^ftf?rw ' poor/ ' impoverished.'
/. Verbs ending in "^ substitute ^ for the final, and »T for
If ; as, "^ ' to scatter,^ ojS^ ^ scattered / "SJ ' to be old,' ^fl#
^ old.' "q ^ to fill,' and H ^ to kill,' substitute "3!^ ; as, ^^
' filled,' Ht ' killed.'
g. Verbs ending in i^ are anomalous in their participles
past: ^, ^ to cherish,' makes ^; v * to suck,' \fhT; ^ 'to
barter,' »fhT ; ^ ' to weave,' TW ; ^ ' to cover/ ^ ; ^ ' to
invoke,' "|TT.
h. Verbs ending in ^ usually change it to ^TT ; as, i^, ' to
meditate,' makes WHf, * meditated ;' % ' to be dirty,' HT?r ; but
^, * to sing/ makes jftif, * sung / % ' to waste,' ^ftlT. "5^, ' to
shrink/ makes, when it signifies ' being cold/ "^fhf ; when it
means ' congealed/ ^ftrf ; when it denotes ' shrunk,' ^^M. %
' to decay,' makes '^T^ ; and w ' to surround,' ^cfHr or ^cfhr.
i. Verbs ending in ^ optionally substitute^; as, "Sft'to
cut/ ^g[Trr or f^ ; ^ ' to cut,' ^fTiT or f^ ; ^ ' to pare/ ^nw
or f^,
J. Whether ending in W or rf, the past indefinite participle
is dechned like nouns in m ; ^:, "^^ "flf ; fM^, f%f^,
f^f^if ; f>T^:, fn^, ^tw ; &c.
A:. The participles formed with ^ from verbs signifying
motion, i^s^ ' to embrace,' ^ ' to sleep,' m ' to stay,' ^rw ^ to
sit,' ^^ ' to dwell,' iT»T ' to be born,' ^ ' to mount,' »T * to
grow old,' may be used in an active sense ; as, tj^ ttct: * he
went to the Ganges ;' WvyHI^<5: ' he mounted the horse ;'
gc^HlP^s: ' he embraced his son.' They are also sometimes
used absolutely, in place of the past tense ; as, ^ f^qir: * he
stood ;' F Tir: * he went.'
I. The past participle in the neuter gender is often used as
an abstract noun ; as, HlPMrt ' speech,' ' that which is spoken ;'
N n 2
S76
DERIVATION.
^rftnt ' sleep,' * repose ;' ^^Trf ' prattle ;' ^ftnf ' laughter ;'
f^ ' good.'
The following alphabetical list contains many of the verbs
ending in vowels which form the participle past with i\, or are
in other ways anomalous, and most of those ending in con-
sonants which do not insert the augment ^.
^srs^ to pervade, w?.
^!^ to move, ^sr^ ; but ' to
w^orship,' ^frNnr.
^r^ to anoint, ^T^j.
^ to eat, ^r^ or ^s^, and
sometimes irv. "^ food ;
what is eaten.
^r^ to spread, ^tf ; but ' to
eat/ ^^TiT.
^rnr to obtain, ^TTTT.
^;5^ to kindle, Jif.
"T?;^ to be wet, ^^ or "gr^,
•^"t to injure, '^.
■giJ^ to cover, "gj^w.
^gPT to weave, •gnr.
^ to go, ^TT gone ; also, true :
^ to cry, ■^.
^jH to be weary, ^iPiT.
fff^ to be distressed, ffiF or
ffr%Tf.
^;T to dig, i^TiT.
"^ to be patient, "sprfl".
f^ to waste, "ftp" or T^fhO".
f^ to be moist, f^.
f^ to throw, f^pr.
f^'^ to be drunk, ft^.
'Wf( to agitate, "^^f.
Vi^i^ to shake, "s^ihf.
f^ to be distressed, f^^.
im to go, xriT.
TiT^ to be thick, irre",
IT to void excrement, '^,
but when meaning a debt, ipT to preserve, ijff.
ip: to take pains, ip&.
ij^ to hide, T^.
IT to swallow, ifNt.
it to be sad, iTR".
to -' oo
^ to proclaim, "^ or "jf^.
UT to smell, inw or ITT^.
f^TT to be sensible, f%w.
?}--{?.
^ to cover, "S^w or 'g^f^ir.
f^ to cut, f^.
"^TT to touch, "^TT.
due, owed.
^5^ to go, ^F.
cii^T to shine, cR^.
"SFT to desire, ^rt'W or ^ifiTiT.
^ to extract, oR^.
"^ to cut, '3v^.
"^ to grow thin, '^.
Y^ to draw lines, to plough, '^.
"^ to scatter, ofij^.
^ to stink, ^7T.
nn to go, "gn^.
-5^1 to be angry^ ^.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.
277
»nT to be born, 'STTW.
ini to pray silently, Wff or arfVrT'
iri to kill, ir&.
g^ to be pleased, ■^.
aft. to decay, ^3§.
5T>T to yawn, ipf.
»T to grow old, "sft^.
'^ to know, ^TT or ^rfxnr.
rfU to decay, if^T.
aifV to instruct, ^ftn".
3jft to grow old, '^^.
'^ to fly, ^ or fh^.
W^ to bow, tfiT.
Tn^ to perish, rT^.
in^ to tie, '!^.
■ftjjTT to clean, f^.
w^ to send, "^ or "^.
TTS^ to pare, TT^.
mr to stretch, utt.
ini to be hot, irff.
^ to torment, "J^.
^ to kill, H^.
"J^ to be satisfied, ^.
"JTT to be satisfied, TjTr.
■ff to cross over, Tft^.
"jq^T to abandon, W^.
^TT to be ashamed, W^.
^^ to be afraid, ^m.
^ to preserv e, ^TrT or gw.
1^^ to pare, ?^.
1^ to hasten, "^ or hTm.
fi^if to shine, ft^2.
^ to bite, ^.
^ to tame, ^TnT or ^finr.
:^ to burn, ^ny.
f^ to play, ^ ; to game, ^.
f^ to show, f^F.
f^ to smear, f^nj.
^ to waste, ^ or ^hr.
^hr to shine, ?fhT.
J to suffer pain, rnr or ^irT.
it to kill, 5^.
^ to be made bad, ^^.
5^ to milk, F7V.
^ to fear, to arrange, if3^.
^ to see, jw.
^ to be firm, ^.
F to tear, ^t#.
ft^ to despise, igTR.
•^Tf to awake, ^[T^.
% to sleep, '^^m.
f^ to hate, fsr^.
VT to have, f^.
vt: to injure," "u^.
Tjt to injure, v#.
>i to shake, v^.
vt^ to injure, V3§.
Y^ to be proud, VF.
1^ to satisfy, inw.
IT^ to cook, xrii.
Tl^ to go, 1T^.
fqm to grind, fxfF.
"g^ to cherish, "j?.
"^ to stink, '^.
"HTC to fill, "0^ or "^iTfT.
■^ to mix, Y^.
^ to fill, T|5&.
urnr to grow fat, "qhr or TihT.
Tra[ to ask, "^F.
in to fiU, Tjt.
S78
DERIVATION.
'^ to blow, as a flower, xk^
with IT prefixed, TTgfWff.
q^ to bind, "q^.
^ to know, ^ir»
)nf to worship, Hi;.
\f^ to break, H^.
fk^ to break or divide, fW^.
>pT to eat, ^ ; to be crooked,
\J^ to wander, >JT«iT.
>r^ to fry, m.
^ to serve, \i^,
T{^ to be mad, »T^.
1T«T to mind, PTfT.
IT'FST to be immersed, Jpfif.
ik^ to be unctuous, Irr^.
Itt^ to urine, ?0t.
^ to liberate, ^.
^"j to fasten, ^^.
^ to be foolish, ^ or ^nj.
W^ to faint, H# or Hf^SlT.
TO to clean, ^.
*pt to consult, ^.
H to kill, i|^.
^^ to speak barbarously, f^.
% to be dull or dirty, ^gR.
inr to worship, ^.
^TfT to strive, xf^.
"^urr to restrain, inr.
^ to join, -pR.
gv to fight, ^.
t^ to colour, Tlv
:^iT to be engaged in, tiM ; so
with ^j prefixed, to begin.
t?T to sport, to be intent on, TjT.
1t^ to be separate, fr^.
"ftr^r to injure, ftF.
tST to kill, ^.
^*T to break, ^T^f.
^ to obstruct, "i^ii^.
^^ to injure, ^.
^ to be angry, ^ or ^^tlT.
^ to ascend, ^^^.
^ to sound, fv^,
cTJT to be in contact, HTf.
<W to gain, 75^.
c5^ to be ashamed, "c^r^ or
"c5fWrr.
f^^ to smear, foyff.
fc^ to be small, f^^.
frJ^ to lick, c^.
c^ to embrace, <^fhT.
Tf^ to lop, tjrr.
e!W to covet, <^.
<r5^ to covet, <^.
<^to cut, "^.
^^ to speak, "3^.
T^ to weave, to sow seed, ttt.
^H to vomit, ^PiT or wfNlf.
"^ to bear, gjs".
m to blow, TTiT or ^TT^ ; f^"tTT!I
blown out, extinguished.
"^T^ to shine, "^"ra".
f^^ to divide, f^.
f^iT to divide, f^rai ; to be agi-
tated, f^rq-.
f^ to gain, to find, f%^ or fr^.
f^^ to enter, fqfF.
f^W to surround, f^.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.
S79
^31 to leave, Y?.
jff to be, ^.
Y^ to be great, Y^.
"^^ to break, Tgj.
'^ to choose, '^'hrr.
t to go, ^^.
:5nB to be able, ^nu.
:^ to fall, ^r^.
'^R to curse, "^.
^TT to be quiet, ^"TfT ; tr. ^rfHcT.
^nr to praise, -^rer, TT^rer.
f^ to have, "%? ; to distin-
guish, ikf^.
'^ to sleep, ^iPMri.
"SJV to be pure, ^Ti".
^ to dry, 15TE^
^TCto injure, ^u§.
"5T to injure, T^ft^.
"^HT to be weary, ^i^H.
"^ to cook, 'zn^.
^ to cook, ''^TRir.
f%^ to embrace, f%F.
xg^ to breathe ; with fV,
fcimw trusted in : but mP^ri
breathed.
f^ to increase, "3T»T or ^rfVrf.
"^^ to adhere to, ^^.
"^ to faint, ^r^.
fipl to become perfect, fws.
"|T to be brave, ^^.
fw^ to be bland, fwv.
"B^^ to embrace, ^^.
■E^rf to sound, ^nRT or ^Prld ;
to adorn, with ^n prefixed,
^1^^ or ^myfriri.
"E^ to sleep, ^.
f^^ to sweat, 1%W.
^Fif to let go, to create, irw.
wq to creep, ^.
^j;^ to go, ^gs^.
W to cover, ^ciWr.
T^ to touch, ^iTF.
^^qiPT to swell, ?q5trr or ^TW.
Ti|i^ to thunder, ^^§.
■^ to void ordure, ^.
■^ to strike or kill, ^.
^ to be glad, ^.
"^ to be ashamed, "^hn or
IT^ to rejoice, ^.
Future Participles active.
240. The active future participles are two, one in each Pada,
and bear the same relation to the present participles as the inde-
finite future does to the present tense ; the terminations being
the same, with ^ prefixed. Thus the terminations of the
participles are ^^ or ^cT and ^HH ; and the insertion or
omission of the augment ^, or any other modification of the
base, follows the analogy of the indefinite future tense ; as,
H * to be,^ ^TfroiTr ' what will be ;' im ^ to go,' irf^Ton^;
280 DERIVATION.
f»f ^ to conquer/ W^Tr^ ' what will conquer ; ' "^ Ho hear,'
irfimc^^ ^what will hear/ This participle is declined like the
present participle in ^; as, m. nf^"^, f. nf^iarrft, n. HP^aift^.
So ^v, ^ to increase/ makes ^\|«rHli>I ^ what will increase /
^ ^ to torture,' rDji^HIH ^ what will torment / 5^ Ho liberate/
JTt^WRSr ^ what will liberate / ^ Ho do/ ohr^mHIHI ' what will
do,' &c. These are declinable like nouns in ^.
Future Participles passive or neuter.
241. A class of future participles, most extensively employed,
is formed by adding to verbs the affixes "fl^Tr, ^Trfhj^, xpf , "^"^5
or inrr[. Of these, the two first reject the final, leaving trt
and ^Rttr ; whilst the three last leave only xr. The participles
thus formed express not only the sense of futurity, but the
conditions of fitness, probability, or necessity ; or that which
is to be, which ought to be, which may be, or which must be :
^f^rT^, H^^'hr, H^, and the hke.
a. The participles thus formed are declinable in the three
genders like nouns in ^ ; and in one or other gender, but
especially the feminine and neuter, they assume very com-
monly the office of nouns : thus "^ ^ to be made or done,'
from "^ ' to do/ becomes "^FTT f. ' a magical rite,' and "^ n.
' motive' or ' cause.' Further instances will be specified.
242. rT^rrT is attached to the base analogously to the mode
in which the ITT of the first future is connected with it. If the
verb prefixes ^, so does the participle; as, ^ ' to be/ nf^nniT
* what is or ought to be / T?>I ' to increase/ irfVrf^ * to be
•increased :' otherwise, as, f»T ' to conquer/ Wrf^ ' to be con-
quered / "f Ho make/ "^if^ ^ to be made / ^^ ' to oppose/
^&^^ ' to be opposed / '^^ Ho bear,' wf^^ ' to be borne / &c.
243. WtT^iT:, is attached to the final consonants of verbs
without change, and to final vowels agreeably to the rules of
Sandhi. Short medial vowels are changed to their Guna
substitutes : thus, of the verbs above cited, ^ makes H^ritiT ;
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 281
&c. ; ^ to be,' ' to be increased,' ' to be conquered,' &c. This
and the preceding termination, irsEr, is annexed to all verbs
indiscriminately.
244. The participles formed with tt are not so indiscriminately
applied, but are restricted, with exceptions, to certain verbs or
classes of verbs. They affect the base also differently, accord-
ing to the letters with which the tt is combined.
245. ijlT is added to verbs ending in vowels, when it requires
a final ^rr or a diphthong, to become ij, and other vowels to be
changed to their Guiia equivalents ; as, ^, ^tj ' to be given ;'
^, iITT * to be sung ;' "^, %ii ^ to be cut ;' faT, ^'^ ' to be
conquered ;' Tn% %7r * to be guided.' In some cases the final
vowel being changed to the Guna letter, combines with iT, as
if it were a vowel : thus fsT, ^ to be conquered,' may be ^iil
(see rule 5, a, p. 13).
a. Tiir is added to verbs ending with a labial consonant, tf,
Tfi, -q, v{^ T{y if preceded by ^ ; as, "^HT, "^p^ ' to be sworn ;' c5H,
c5«I ' to be acquired ;' T?T, T?5T ^ to be agreeable :' but HH,
preceded by ^T, requires the insertion of H before '^ ; as,
^rT75T«T ' to be killed :' also when preceded by "grtr in the sense
of ^ commending ;' Ttn^T«f: ifrr^: ^ the virtuous man is to be
praised :' but not in its primitive sense ; as, 'g'trH^ Vrf * wealth
is to be acquired.' ^TT * to pray silently,' and «Th ^to bow/ preceded
by ^T, take T^nr, as well as "^w, making ^iiui or "STT, ^iHlwjj or
-nHHH* The following verbs also, although ending in labials,
form their participles with WfT : ''5R ^ to eat,' with WT prefixed,
-tHMi^ ^ to be sipped' or ' tasted ;' ^tt, ^Tct ^ to be ashamed ;'
^, ^pRy 'to be tamed;' r<T, TJ^ ^ to be spoken;' 75^1, T^V^
' to be spoken ;' ^^T, TTO ' to be sown.'
b, T[K is affixed to the following verbs : ^TT ' to seek,' ^qm ;
IHR ^ to laugh,' TI^T ; HW ^ to worship,' v^m ; inr ' to worship,'
^T^" ;' ^^ ^ to be able,' ^"^ ; ^T^ ' to slay/ "^j^ ; tr^ ^ to
endure,' ^r^ ; and ^rv substituted for ^ ^ to kill/ ^XR. Of
these, HIT, ^T5T, and ^, may also take ^if^, making hthi '. to
be divided' or 'portioned/ ^iq" ' to be worshipped/ ■^n??/ to
o o
282 DERIVATION.
be slain/ ^nr is also affixed to the following : 7p5[ ^ to speak/
'^T: ^ to go/ TT^ '^ to be wild/ "JR ' to restrain/ if not preceded
by a preposition ; iT?r ^ to be spoken/ ^t§ ^ to be gone' or ' prac-
tised,' iTSr ^ to be made frantic or drunk/ "qr?? ^ to be restrained :'
but ^rr may be prefixed to '^^ if not meaning a spiritual
teacher ; as, wt^^'V ^^: ' a country to be gone to / otherwise,
^n^"pnr: ' an i^Lcharya' or ' religious instructor/
c. The following words are considered as irregularly formed
with ^1^, and are used as nouns, as well as participles :
^nrctt mfn. ^imperishable;' but restricted to companionship
or friendship / as, W^fM H^lf ^ uninterrupted association /
from *r ' to decay.'
^nt: * a master,' ^ a Vaisya / from ^ ' to go :' otherwise, wn§:
* a respectable man.'
^cffi: -^ -if ^ improper/ ' bad,' ' what is not fit to be said/
* reprehensible,' ' blamable ; ' from "^ ' to speak,' w hich
more regularly takes "^r^, making W«|ir mfn. ^not to be
uttered.'
"giT^x^T ^ A female fit for impregnation / "^xj^ntl ^: ' a cow fit
for the bull / from ^ with "g"!! : otherwise, "^TTTEfT^ mfn. ^to
be gone to' or ' approached.'
xnm: -Wr -TPT * To be bought' or ^ marketed/ ^ to be pledged /
from TT'O ' to praise :' otherwise, ttRFI mfn. * to be praised.'
-^ -zt: -z^T -^ * Fit to be chosen' or ' solicited / ^T f. ' a
maiden to be sought / from "^ ' to choose as a bride' (a
maiden) : otherwise, wm ' to be chosen,' wdth ^17 ; or ^7^
mfn. ' to be appointed or selected generally,' with Wi^.
■^ ' a conveyance,' ' a vehicle,' ^ that by which any thing is
borne / from ^ : but with Tnn^ it makes WT^l mfn. ^ to
be carried.'
246. The termination "apTX^ intimates by its initial oR, that in
affixing Tf, the radical vowel is not to be changed to its Gufia
or Vriddhi equivalent, although it may be liable to such other
changes as its conjugational inflexion prescribes ; it also shews
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 28^
that a radical nasal penultimate is to be dropped : whilst xf
requires the insertion of w in some cases before tt. This
termination forms participles with verbs ending in consonants
having a penultimate ^ ; as, Y?T ^ to choose,' ^|7T ^ to be
chosen ;' ^ ' to increase/ ^^ ^ to be increased :' except ^gr^
* to praise/ "^Tf ^ to injure/ and "^ * to make/ which take xnr,
making ^ix§ ' to be praised/ ^^ ' to be injured/ "sf^ot ^ to be
made/ So titT, with the preposition ^r^ or ^, or iiifiry ^ the
hand/ prefixed, takes Wr^; as, W^^tt^ or ^^i^ ^ to be let go,'
Mlfiyyj^- ' to be let go by the hand.'
a, ^TT is added to the following verbs ending in vowels :
^, ^ * to be gone ;' 5", with ^rr prefixed, ^TTgTT * to be
respected / f ( "^^T ), ^ ^ to be chosen / ^, ^^ ^ to be
praised.' Also to these ending in consonants : ofirT, o|^t5 ^ to
be celebrated :' ^, "g^ ^ to be pleased ; ^nrr, f^fr^T ' to be
governed.' When annexed to W^ ' to dig,' Tj is substituted
for ^TfT ; as, ^ ' to be dug.' ^nT is optionally affixed to form
the following words :
'Si ' to make,' '^ ; or with innr , cfiT^ ' to be made.'
JV^ ' to hide,' ^^ ; or with in^, ttY^ ' to be hid' or • kept
secret.'
g^ ' to take/ with ^rftr or irfrT prefixed, ^rftpj^, ijPdJjm * to be
received / or with iniTf , ^^fiTTjT^, llPriilRI.
F^ ^ to milk,' ^^ ; or with "mr, ^'^.
^ ^ to nourish,' ^jw ; or with inn^, vrpc^ ' to be nourished.'
H»T ' to cleanse,' literally or metaphorically, ^sq"; or with WrT,
iTF^ ' to be cleansed,' ^ to be purified.'
■^ ^ to speak,' "gj^r ; or with "m^, "^^ : with any term signifying
' falsely' prefixed, it is only ^i?r ; as, ^rTl^, ^^nr, &c. :
with a preposition it takes inT7(; TT^ST ' to be declared.'
ji^ ' to rain,' Y^; or with ^n^, T^ ^ to be rained.'
^^ * to praise,' ^TCT ; or with ^, "^f^.
h» A number of words are considered to be irregularly
formed with this affix ; as the following :
002
^4- DERIVATION.
^Rpa?: -wr -^ ' Suffering no pain' or ^ fatigue ;' from ^HT ' to
pain.'
SHlTtf * Clarified butter ;' from w^ ' to anoint.*
•g^: The name of a river ; from g")iH. ' to leave (its bed).'
'^ Any valuable metal except gold or silver ; from tttt * to
hide.'
'<*SM^^: -'^m -^ ' Ripening or flowering in cultivated ground :'
so *H"*«q«l ' growing wild/ &c. ; from xr^ ' to ripen.*
ipn -^ -^ ' Dependent/ ' servile/ ^ confined / n^: ^pitT: ' the
encaged parrots :' attached to as a partisan, ^^tt^t: < a friend
of the gods :' with it prefixed, T(n^ a term in grammar,
an exception. Fem. only, and combined with other words,
* without ;* as, 'H'T^^T ^^ ^ the army outside of the
village / from ^ ' to take.'
r<IKIl ' A funeral fire ;' ^rfr^ff^mr ' maintaining a sacred fire ;'
from f% ' to gather.'
frTTTt * A plough ;' from f»f ' to conquer.'
finm One of the lunar constellations ; from "^ ' to please.*
"g^: One of the lunar constellations ; from xrq * to nourish.*
>TT^T A proper name. When meaning ' a wife/ it is formed
with IRTrf , from ^ ^ to nourish.'
fk^: The name of a river ; from fn^ ' to break (its banks).'
^nn ^^T^\ -ttJ To be used as a conveyance or carriage ; a
horse, an ox, a car, &c. ; from ^ ' to join,* ' to yoke.*
■;5^: -x^T -xTf * Agreeable/ ' liked ;' from ^^ ' to please.'
fsR^xi: ' Refuse/ * sediment / from Tot with f% prefixed, ^ to
take away.*
fcpjxf: ' Munja grass ;' from "^with f^ prefixed, ' to purify.*
■ftngr: A lunar mansion ; from fqv ' to accomplish.'
c. ^ with ^PT^ forms >|tt, to denote, in combination with
other words, ' state' or ' condition / as, ^^^ * divinity,' * the
being a god :* and ^ with '^m forms ^iqr ' killing,' which is
also used in composition ; as, fi^ij^ii^i ' slaughter of an enemy,'
'A^^f^l ' murder of a Brahman,* »Tl^mT ' homicide.*
d. The following participial nouns are considered as being
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 285
formed with this affix, which in the feminine gender become
denominations :
^5??T worship, from ^nr to worship.
^[iin' a Utter — ^ to go.
f^nrmr muddy earth — "qif to go.
frrmrr an assembly — "q^ to sit.
wmJ hvehhood — *T>r to nourish.
?rarr the jugular vein — ?nT to know.
"fwr knowledge — f^ to know.
Tnm wandering about as a mendicant — "giT to go.
^i^l a court, from "^ to sleep.
TFnn^rr an assembly — ^^ to go.
Jnm ablution, bathing — "et to bathe.
247. The last of these terminations, Wr^, indicates by its
initial that the radical vowel is to be changed to its Guna or
Vriddhi equivalent. It may be affixed — to verbs ending in "g^
or "3!, when ' necessity' is implied ; as, >t, ht^ ' what is to be,
necessarily ;' otherwise H^ : — to "J, itrt * to be mixed ;' and
"q, with W[ prefixed, ^rrer^ ' to be stirred up :' to verbs ending
in "^ or ^; as, '^, oFF§ Ho be made ;' tt, ^f§ ^to be torn :' —
also to verbs ending in consonants not labials; as, "Sf^, ^rr?r
* to be borne.' As noticed above, it is also annexed to some
verbs ending in labials.
a. When Wrf is added to verbs ending in palatals, they are
usually changed to gutturals, or "^ to cfi , and «T to it ; as, xr^,
xrnsT * to be cooked ;' ^IT, ^^nj ' to be made sick :' but there
are many exceptions. It does not effect this change if the
verb takes the augment ^ before the TT of the passive past
participle ; nor when * necessity' is implied ; as, VJ^ ' what
must be cooked ;' wn^T * what must be abandoned ;' "qnq * what
must be worshipped ;' TRT^ ' what must be said.' Some
verbs optionally admit the change in different acceptations ;
as, >|1T ' to enjoy' makes H^ ' what is to be enjoyed ;' but
>pT ' to eat' makes ^^^ : "JST, with frr prefixed, ' to appoint,'
makes fVnftTTT ' what or who is fit to be employed ;' frTiftiir
286 DERIVATION.
* what or who may be employed :' so ^^, ^ to speak/ makes
'^Tx^ ^ what may be said ;' but ^T^ ' a sentence/
b. The following are considered as irregularly formed with
'^nn^Wr or sh^i^i^i ^ Day of conjunction of the sun and moon /
from "^Jnrr ' together,' and ^tb" ^ to dwell.'
SHMltM: ' To be brought from a particular fire/ the Dakshin-
agni ; applicable only to a form of sacrificial fire ; from
Wt, ' to take,' with ^rr prefixed : otherwise, ^atn^.
■^xr^nr: A kind of sacrificial fire ; from fq" ' to collect/ with
TT prefixed.
^4!im^: A kind of sacrifice ; from "^^ ' an altar/ and tn * to
drink / in which the Soma juice is drunk.
Vnxrr ' A sacred text / from VT ' to have' or * hold.'
frTofiTZEr: * A dwelling / from f^ ' to collect/ with f^.
Trft^pir: ^ To be brought as fire for a sacrifice / from trft and
fq ' to collect.'
XTRI A sort of liquid measure ; from in ^ to measure / H being
changed to tf.*
Kiill^: -xqi -^ ' Adverse/ * disliked/ ^ disagreeable/ ^ not
approved of or ' agreed with/ from 55ft * to guide.'
T^mi ' A sacred text / from ^'ST ' to sacrifice.'
x:Ti^'^44 * A royal sacrifice/ held by a paramount sovereign ;
from tT'^n and tet * to bring forth.'
m^l ' To be carried as sacrificial fire / from ^^nr and ^ ^ to
bear.'
^x||i4: A sort of sacrifice.
^I^iai * Clarified butter / from TH^ and ;[rJt * to take.'
248. An affix of similar import, though not much employed,
is ^rc»5H^, which leaves ^fc^W, attached to verbs ending in con-
sonants without change of the radical vowel : thus xf^ makes
q^Po^H -m -HT -H ' what is to be cooked' or ' ripened / fvr^,
fk^fcJH -m -FT -'f ^what is to be, or may be, broken' or
* divided.'
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 287
, Indeclinable Participles.
249- There are two participles of the past tense, which are very
extensively used^ and which admit of neither gender, number,
nor case. They are formed by adding to the verbal base the
terminations WT leaving rcTT, or "^t^ leaving tj. The latter is
affixed in the place of FTT only when the verb is a compound,
or is preceded by a preposition. In either case the accom-
panying letters are indicatory, and denote that the radical
vowel is not changeable to the corresponding Guna or Vriddhi
letter, and that a penultimate nasal is to be rejected. When
however the augment ^ is inserted before ^, the Guna substi-
tute should take the place of the radical vowel.
a. Although implying past time, or something that has
been, the participles thus formed with r^ and "^ have not an
absolutely past signification : they rather suspend the mean-
ing, importing that although something has been, yet that
something else is immediately to follow ; as, '^ ijliT Tftr^ ci^^Pd
'having eaten and drunk, he goes ;^ ^Tm^J^ f^T^efit 3"jNtT^
* having heard this, Hiranyaka said.' The designation of
indeterminate past participles would therefore perhaps better
express their character than that of Gerund, by which, as
ordinarily employed, something remaining to be done is alone
intended.
b. As a general rule, whatever form the base assumes before
^, the sign of the indefinite past, it also takes before WT, that
of the indeterminate past ; as, '^ ; "^t, "^r^, ^ having done :'
"^ ; "^nr:, ^hi, ' having heard :' ttt ; xftwt, xfh^, ' having drank :^
^ ; ^^, ^^T, ' having given :^ VT ; f^TTt, f^r^, ^ having held i'
ITT ; fWff:, fWr^?, ' having stood :' ^^ ; T^, "T^, ' having
said :' ^tT ; Tfq^:, "^ftTi^, * having dwelt :' -^V ; "^iVrrt, vaPMril,
' having hungered :' ^ ; *FV:, WS5T, ' having eaten :' im ;
TTT:, 711^, ' having gone .' iTT ; ^Tff:, "^Tr^T, * having bowed to :'
^^ ; ^nr:, ^^TT^, ' having dug :' ^ ; ^fqrr:, ^fTOT, ' having
slept:' Hf^; gf^: or iTtfeir:, ^H^HI or jflH^HI, 'having been
288 DERIVATION.
pleased :' fq^ ; ^^TT:, ^H^Hr? * having served :' tj^ ; rv^%
TT-^lr^, ' having taken :' and the Uke.
c. The deviation from general rules affects chiefly the influ-
ence of the indicatory cB upon a penultimate nasal and the
augment ^.
d. Thus, although a penultimate nasal should be rejected,
the following are instances of its being retained : ^S^, ' to go/
makes t^^t ; and w»^ ^ to go/ ^eHtt, or with ^, ^fi^T ^ having
gone.' A verb ending with ti or tb, preceded by a nasal, and
which inserts ^, optionally rejects the nasal ; as, sppir, ^ to
arrange,* makes i^PvjHi or ^jfr^n^ ; "^^ ' to loosen,' "^rfqi^rT or
•^fV^n^T ; and ^^qi ' to tie together,' yPwir^l or ^PiihHU The same
with ^^ ' to deceive,' which makes either ^P^irMI or "^^rTT ;
and 7^ ' to cut,' ^jP^IHI or c^P^HI. Verbs ending with
"3T? preceded by a nasal, optionally reject it ; as, >T^ * to break/
HW or HW ; T^ ' to colour,' "C^ or XMl ; ^% ' to anoint' or
* to worship,' makes ^^niT, #^, or ^rf^r^ ; lU^, ' to perish,' may
retain the nasal which it inserts in conjugation; aSj Tf^T or
^T, or with ^, ^r^IHI.
e. With regard to the change of the radical vow^el when ^
is inserted, all verbs beginning and ending with a consonant,
excepting a final xf or % and having a penultimate ^ or "5,
optionally take the Guna vowel ; as, fc?"'^, ' to write,' makes
fc^fe^ or ^fji^rWT ; ^TT ' to shine,' ^fWr^TT or ^>fTTT^ ; "^^ ' to be
hungry,' "HrfvpafT or "^Vv?^. A vowel initial has but one form ;
^ ' to go,' irf^r^; and so has a final ^; as, f«R ' to serve,'
^f^FTT. f^ ' to know/ and ^ ' to weep/ are exceptions to
this rule having but one form ; fcjH^HI, ^5!T^. The fol-
lowing are additional instances to those already specified,
of the vowel being unchanged when the augment ^ is
inserted : ^if ' to embrace,' "^tn^ ; ^V ' to ply/ ^rfkim ; g^
' to steal,' gftTF^ ; ^ ' to be glad,' JdlTFrr ; ^ ' to trample,'
/. In the following, the vowel is optionally changed before
^ : ^ ' to go/ ^frfr^ or ^Brftr^ ; ^^ * to be thin,' ^f^T or
VERBAL DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 289
chf^lHT ; ^ ' to draw/ 'af^i^ or ^fiftrTT ; ^ ' to thirst/ ijCmHI
or irflT^ ; ^ ' to endure/ ^m^ or )Rfll^.
ff. Verbs having an indicatory "3" optionally insert i[ (p. io6) ;
as, ^, ' to be tranquil/ makes ^iPhhi or ^IWM\ ; a final it
requires the radical vowel to be made long, when ^ is not
inserted : but ^sm, ' to go/ has different forms ; -^fHWI, "^i^
or ^irWI ; f^^, ' to play/ makes itt^ or ^fcfwrr ; "^» ' to purify/
"^r^ or Trf^rMI ; ^n^ ' to go/ makes "^rwr, but when it means * to
worship/ ^^TF^ ; <5>T, ' to beguile/ forms c^frfWr^, but ' to be
covetous/ cg'^ssfT ; fir^ ' to be distressed/ f^P^Mi or ffifT ; &c.
250. The termination BT'^T is used when the verb is a
compound, particularly when it is preceded by a preposition.
The radical vowel is unchanged.
a. When affixed to a base ending in a short vowel, 7T is
commonly prefixed to tt ; as, "ss ^ to make/ ^rgofW ' having
made like' or ^ after;' f^ * to conquer/ MuHnKJ 'having
^ defeated / ^ ' to praise/ nw^ ' having celebrated :' and this
prevails though the radical vowel become long by combina-
tion ; as, i[ ^ to go/ with '^rfv prefixed, ^nfhq" ^ having studied /
or with n, Tm ' having deceased.' When ^ is attached to a
base ending in a long vowel, no change takes place : FT ^ to
stay/ TTWnr ^ having gone forth / ^'^ ' to fly,' "g-lfhr ' having
flown up / ^^ to be,' ^T^^ ' having perceived.' "^ is com-
monly changed to fr:; as, tj ^ to cross,' ^^hI'L^ ^ having come
down.' sTPJ^ ' to wake,' changes its vowel, TWPT^ ^ having
woke up.' Diphthongs, as in other instances, are usually
changed to ^; as, V ^ to suck/ TTVPT; ^ ''to sing/ TrrmT; "sft
* to cut,' IT^[R.
b. Some verbs ending in vowels or diphthongs modify
their finals in a special manner before Tf. Thus fg^, ' to
decay,' makes Ws^W or fr^'hr ; ^"t ^ to waste,' WJ^ ; <?r^ ^ to
dissolve,' 3Tc5hr or inTR ; ^ ^ to barter,' ^^*T?T or ^SRTR. ^
* to weave,' and ^ ^ to cover,' make T(^T^ and M«MI^ ; but afler
■qft or ^, ^ may make either xyfc^'hT, ifNhr, or qfti^liT, i(^JT(,
c. Verbs ending in nasals occasionally change them to W,
p p
290 DERIVATION.
or admit some other modification of the base. Thus W^J, ' to
dig,' makes either TIW^ or jp^mi ; ^m ^ to go,' ^STPT^j or ^TFTrT
' having come ;' »nT ' to produce/ 4^^ or H^im ; ^hjtr ^ to bow,'
TTO?^ or mrm ; TR ' to stretch, f^WTqr ; ?rH ' to mind,' ^g^TW
* having assented ;' ^HT * to refrain,' frnTR or "hfinq" ; ttt * to
sport' or ' rest ;' fTOT or f%T7T ; ^ ' to kill,' ^TT^?T ' having
beaten' or ' slain.' WJ, ' to desire,' makes its vowel long,
Uahi»f ' having desired much :' so does '^ * to go,' fcjxii^
* having considered.' ^STR, ' to obtain,' may substitute m^ ;
as, irrar or nmui ' having obtained.'
d. Causal verbs, and those of the tenth conjugation which
do not make the radical vow el long by virtue of a grammatical
rule, or in which it is not long naturally or by position, prefix
^PT to ^ ; as, f4Jimu| * having caused to compute ;' "nriim^
' having made to stoop,' ' having bent' or ' bowed ;' Mch<^m
* having declared' (from ^R^, tenth conj.) : but Y ' to hold
cause,' VK^fifr, makes ^cH^TRt * having caused to hold ;' and >|^
' to adorn,' tenth conj., iJ^^rfiT, makes ^"^^jor ' having similarly
adorned.'
Participles of repetition, or Adverbial Participles.
251. In one form the indeclinable participle of repetition
is nothing more than the indeterminate participle past repeated
— Ti^ "Tr^n ' having gone repeatedly,' "^ir^ "^j^ * having done
repeatedly^ — and is rather a case of grammatical construction,
than part of conjugation. There is another form, no doubt of
an analogous character, although specially provided for by
adding the termination TJT^c^ to the verbal base : this leaves
^11^, whilst the initial w indicates the change of a final vowel
to the Vriddhi equivalent, to be again changed before the
vowel of ^w agreeably to the rules of Sandhi : thus f^, ' to
gather,' becomes % which makes ^TR ^^R ' having collected
repeatedly ;' "^^ * to hear,' becomes w, and >|^ * to be,^ Ht,
thus making "^# "^tR * having heard repeatedly,' >TR HR
* having been repeatedly :' ^, Ho remember,^ makes WR Wit
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 291
* having remembered repeatedly.' A final ^TT inserts Tf before
the termination ; as, ^ ^ to give/ ^ ^"R ^ having given
repeatedly.^ When the verb ends in a consonant, a radical ^,
if not preceding a compound consonant, is changed to ^rr, and
any other short vowel to its Gun a equivalent : vowels long by
nature or position are unchanged : thus xj^ makes xtt^ xn^
* having cooked repeatedly ;* '^(rm, ^^pf ^TO ' governing repeat-
edly ;' f^, ^ ^ * knowing or having known repeatedly ;'
^, HV»f ^Tt»f * eating or having eaten repeatedly ;' &c.
a. The reiterated form of this participle is however by no
means the mode in which it most frequently occurs, and it is
much more often found singly in particular senses or combina-
tions in which it offers an analogy to an adverb. Thus it
occurs with words signifying ' first,' as "o^ vftif or w^ H^ or
IRH >Tt»f — 'mffif ' having first eaten, he goes.' "SF, ' to do,'
employs this form when used transitively, and with a verb
signifying ' to call ;' ^t "SfiTTFT^t^lf ' he calls out, having
made, or imputed, theft ;' i. e. he calls out, ' Stop thief.' The
same verb also uses it connected with cjnzn^ ' how,^ or ^7^
' thus ;' <*v^^'K or ^T^fR >J% ^ having done, thus or how he
eats :' or with ^TJ ' sweet ;' ^ijchiC H^ ' having sweetened it,
he eats.' ifl^, ' to live,' takes this form in conjunction with
"Tl"^; ^N-jraO^HMlri ' having lived so long, he studies ;' i. e.
he studies during life.' "^, 'to fiU,' takes it with ^»;^ or "^T^ ;
•«l*^yc ' having filled the skin ; ' ^t^o^ * having filled his
belly.' ^ also takes it ; as, ^4|c4mri jfR^ ' killing all entirely,
or to the very root, he slays ;' or xrr^Trnf ^f% * he strikes,
kicking with his foot.' Instances might be infinitely multi-
plied of the use of the indeclinable or adverbial participle
employed without repetition to signify an action indetermi-
nately past.
SECTION II.
Verbal Nouns,
252. The nouns that are derived immediately from verbs
p p ^
292 DERIVATION.
comprehend a great variety of terms, for which an unexcep-
tionable classification can scarcely perhaps be proposed. There
are two principal classes into which they might be divided, as
adjectives or attributives, and substantives or names; but the
same word is very frequently used in either form, the quality
or attributive constituting the appellation of the individual :
thus ci!^ or ofiTT: in their generic acceptation signify ^ any thing
or person that does an action, or makes any thing ;' whilst in
combination,- fcfi^jt; means * a servant,' oF»t«BR: * a potter ;' and
singly oR^: has for one of its meanings ' toll' or ' tax,' and ojrrt;
* a letter of the alphabet.' To distinguish derivative words
therefore according to their import, would lead at least to
much inconvenient repetition.
253. These different nouns are formed, agreeably to the
usual scheme of Sanskrit grammar, by affixing certain termi-
nations to the crude verb, which is modified in a greater or
lesser degree, and then forms the inflective base. These
terminations are very numerous ; but the greater number have
a very limited, in some instances almost an individual, appU-
cation ; others comprehend a large class of words. It would
be inconsistent with the object of the present grammar to
furnish very numerous examples of these derivatives ; nor is
such detail necessary, as they will be found, where they seem
to be most appropriately placed, in the Dictionary. It will
be sufficient therefore to give here a selection of such words
as may appear to be most useful, or as may best exemplify
the principles upon which they are constructed ; classing
them under the terminations by which they are formed, and
arranging them in alphabetical order, as has been done by
Professor Bopp. He has, however, taken only the essential
letters of the affixes ; but I prefer exhibiting them as they
occur in original grammars, as from the letter or letters by
which the essential element is accompanied, a clue is usually
obtained to the modification to which the inflective base, or
some word compounded with it, is subjected.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 293
^ is added to derivative verbs to form abstract nouns,
declinable only in the feminine gender, and -svhich therefore
add the feminine termination (tr) ^^; as, "Nofit^ * to wish to
do,' "N^iSMt ' the desire to do ;' Mc4«hl^ ' to desire a son,'
;jd°<il*^l ' desire of a son.' It is also added to verbs ending
with consonants preceded by a vowel long either by nature or
position, to form similar substantives : ^ * to endeavour/ |^
' effort' or * wish ;' "gs^ ' to reason,' "gr^ ' reasoning.'
^T, leaving ^ to be added to the verb, forms feminine
abstract nouns from verbs which have an indicatory t^, and
fir^ ' to break,' and others, forming the class "ftr^rf^. The
nasal prevents the change of the radical vowel ; as, f»7^T
' rupture ; ' "NnTT ^ reflection,' from "Nfff ' to think ; ' tJtTT
* worship,' from t^st ' to worship ;' ip(j ' cleaning,' from ^ ^ to
cleanse :' except in the case of a final ^ ; as, »T, ' to decay,'
makes ilTT ^ decay.' ^tt (^^)5 ^ to be ashamed,' makes ^th
' modesty.' '^fiq, ' to have compassion,' changes its t to ^ ;
as, "^rn ^ clemency.' ^r^ is also added to verbs in ^rr when
preceded by a preposition or analogous term ; as, ^ ^ to give,'
TC^ ' a gifl ;' HT ' to shine,' irm ' light ;' and "^rST ^ faith,' and
^Rrtr ' disappearance,' from VT ' to have' or ^ hold,' preceded
by ^1^ or WnT^.
W^, leaving ^, is one of the most widely applicable affixes.
I. It is added to the class of verbs called ^T^rf^, or, according to
most authorities, to all verbs whatever, to signify the agent ;
forming attributives which may take the three genders, but which
are commonly used in some one gender as appellatives. A final
vowel is changed before ^, according to the rules of Sandhi ;
as, xr^ ^ to cook,' TT^ ^ who or what cooks' or ^ ripens ;' ^
(^to) ^ to go,' '^ ' who or what goes ;' ^"5"^: ^ a male fol-
lower,' ^^^^ ' a female attendant ;' '^t: {^^ ' to steal,' ^^:
^ a thief;' >|^^ to be,' H^ ^ what is,' >T^: ^ the world,' or a name
of S'iva ; Tf^ ("T^^) ' to sound,' "«T^ ' what sounds ;' Tf^ ^ a male
river,' iT^ ^ a female river.' (Obs. Those verbs of the class
294 DERIVATION.
M-MlH^ which have an Anubandha t require the feminine to be
formed with ^, not ^rr; as, ^^, ^ft^, '^, &c.)
2. w^ is also added to certain verbs compounded with
their objects in restricted acceptations : as to ^ * to take/
bodily exertion being omitted ; as, w^r^: * an heir/ ^ one who
takes his portion / but HK^Ii.: ^ a porter/ ^ one who takes a
load :' also with ^TT prefixed ; "j^qr^ ' having flowers/ ' blos-
soming.' It is also added to ?7f , ^ to take/ in a similar
manner ; as in ^f^hii^: ' a spearman/ ^ one who holds a pike :'
— to ^ ' to be worthy / ^ifi^T ^ a female Brahman/ ^ one
worthy of reverence :^ — to *nT ' to whisper,' and t<r ^ to sport,'
compounded with "^^ ' the ear/ and ^^rif ' a bush,^ put in the
locative case ; as, chiiM q : ^ an informer / W^TH: ^ an elephant :'
— to verbs compounded with ^^n^ to form proper names ;
^n^'^': S'ambhava : — to "^ ^ to sleep/ compounded with various
terms / as, M\m\ ' who sleeps in the air,^ ^ a divinity / ^-cA^:
^ who sleeps in the heart,' * Cupid ;' ^rTM^r^: ' one who sleeps
supine.'
3. Verbs ending in ^ take ^^ to form abstract masculine
and neuter nouns ; as, f»T ^ to conquer,' iht: ^ victory / f^ ^ to
gather,' ^ir: * collection / ifl" ^ to fear,' irt * fear,' * peril.' It
is also added to a few other verbs, with a similar effect ; as,
^R ^ to rain,' "^t ' rain,' or ' the rainy season.'
^snrr , leaving ^, with the change of a short radical vowel to
Vriddhi, is added to verbs to express the agent when com-
pounded with the object ; as, "SR ' to make,' ^»?^rR: ' a potter,'
^ one who makes pots / ^ ^ to take,' HTTIfR: ^ a porter,' ^ one
who takes a load.' When added to ^ ^ to strike' or ' kill/ z
is substituted for the final in certain combinations ; as, ^tSt-
xnr: ' who strikes the tree,' ' a woodpecker.' When ^w is
prefixed, the final may be 1^ ; as, «|i&^i|ie: or ^#ff^Tff: * a
collection of letters,' ' an alphabet.'
^r^T^, leaving w^, is added to a few verbs, distinguished by
an Anubandha ^, to form masculine abstract nouns : tt (5^)
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 295
* to tremble/ W^"^* * a trembling ;' f^ (jf^) ' to increase/
"SEPtrg: ^ intumescence ;' g (jg) ^ to be distressed,' ^"^^: ' anxiety,'
^ pain.'
^rpFT is added to verbs to form masculine nouns implying
imprecation ; as, from "^fN ^ to live,' '^nf^Tf^^ *IF^ ' ^^J ^^^^
of thy life be ;' ^mayest thou perish.'
^"TX^, leaving ^, forms masculine appellative and abstract
nouns from verbs ending in "^j "gi, "^, "^ ; as, F ' to praise,'
^^: Upraise;' "g * to join,' nw: ^barley;' ""g^ ' to purify,' t^W*
^ winnowing corn ;' "^ ^ to make,^ «r?c; ' the hand ;' ^ * to swal-
low,^ ir: ' poison ;^ ^ ^ to spread,^ preceded by f^, makes f^^cR:
' prolixity,' ^ diffiiseness ;' but f^yu ^ a bed,' ^ a tree.' It may
also be added to aj^ ^ to take ;' as, Jjf : ^ a planet : — to f% ' to
collect,' preceded by "pFfiC ; fn^y^: ' certainty :' — to ipT ^ to go ;'
ttt: ^ going :' — also to xirr , substituted for ^ ^ to eat,' pre-
ceded by a preposition ; as, Phm^:, THHt:, f^xpfr:, ' food ' or
' eating :' — to »rT ^ to meditate,' and ^qv ^ to pierce,' not com-
pounded with a preposition ; irq: ^ silent prayer,' ^w: * wound-
ing:'— to ^TT ^to sound;' ^it: ^ sound:' — -^ ^ to laugh;'
^: ^ laughter :' — to im * to refrain,' either singly or preceded
by "3TT, fH, fV, and 'H'T ; as, itr: ^ restraint,' TtnnT: ^ marriage,'
Prl^H: ' fixed rule,' f^ilH: ^ cessation,' lErqrr: ^ restraint :' — to t[^
^ to speak,' »t^ ' to sound,' "q? ' to read,' ^Tf ^ to sound,' pre-
ceded by f?r ; as, Itttt^: ' speaking,' &c. : — also liiTj * to sound,'
either singly or with fff when it means ^ to sound as a lute ;'
WUft Ph^i: ^ the sound of the Vina. There are other com-
binations with this affix, of which it may be observed, that its
use very commonly alternates with that of Tr>^, which latter
makes the vowel long. Thus optionally with the preceding
words we may have, fwTT:, ttth:, ^T^:, ^PT:, ^th:, W^*, which
are formed with in^.
^n^ is added to 15T ^to injure,' and ^r^ ' to praise ;' as, ^ru^
* mischievous,' T?^T^ ' praising,' cirf^i^jt ' a bard.'
■^Icg-cf^ is added to a few verbs to form attributives implying
296 DERIVATION.
possession of *the quality signified by the verb : thus ?|^ ' to
take,' tenth conj., "J^^iilc^ ^greedy,' Sn satiable f ^ ' to be
compassionate,' ^m<^ ' kind,' ' pitiful ;' f^ ' to sleep,' frf'^Tc?
' sleepy,^ ' slothful ;' ^^ ' to envy,' ^'J^'mig ' envious/
^ is added to a class of verbs called <*mR^ to form masculine
or feminine abstract or appellative nouns ; as, oRit ' to plough,^
cRfq: ' ploughing' or ' agriculture ;' 'T ' to swallow,^ Wb ' a
mountain :' and the same affix, or ^, as derived from the
technical affixes 1[5t and ^^, forms similar nouns with the
classes "^rnf^ and ^Tsnf^ ; as, ^m ' a pond,' from '^^ * to sow ;'
and ^nftr: ' war,' from ^»f ' to go.'
^ is added to a few verbs to form neuter nouns chiefly
signifying an instrument ;' as, ^f?rw ' a spade,' from ^^R * to
' dig ;' c5f^ ' a sickle,' from 7^ * to cut :' but ^^ ' to go,'
viPj:^*, means ' instituted observance,' also ' a history' or ' nar-
rative ;' and "^ ' to purify,' xrf^ ' the sacrificial thread,' ' a
prayer of the Vedas,' or * sacrificial fire.'
^f^, leaving ^r^, is added to various verbs, either single or
compounded, to form attributives ; as, "ftr, '^ifMH ' conquering,'
* victorious ;' H^with T^fic prefixed, irfbrfV^ ' who is disgraced ;'
^ * to be quick,' TT^rf^'^ ' who is quick.' These, when inflected,
form ifqt, "SfftRt, »Tf^ (see p. 60,). To form mascuhne
appellatives ^[fiT is added to f%^ ' to sell,' preceded by the
article sold, as W^f^^nft ^ a vender of oil '' and sometimes in a
depreciatory sense, as ¥i\H r«l '*41 ' a low Brahman,^ ' a vender
of the Soma juice,' which is used at sacrifices.
^UM-M, leaving ^x^, forms attributives, declinable in three
genders, from various simple and compound verbs ; as, from
^^, -cin.tii} * going,' ' what goes ; ' from "q^, ^f^^ * what
endures ;' from "^ with ^r?^, as "^TcJ^It^ ' what adorns,' or
with f^ and ^rr, as Phi.! <*Q.u.u ' what annihilates' or * makes
nothing of,' &c.
"3" forms attributives with desiderative verbs ; as, f^ofit^ ' to
wish to do,' "NoiJ^f ^ desirous of doing :' also with a few others ;
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 297
as, ^ ^ to wish/ ^ ^ wishful ;* f^ * to know/ f^ ' know-
ing ;' ^Hl^iftr ^ to wish,* ^rr^^ ' desirous / and fvr^ ' to beg,*
"5?^ ' begging,' fW^: ' a mendicant/
■g"^!?^ forms attributives after various verbs ; the final indi-
cates the lengthening of the radical vowel ; as, from 7^^ ' to
desire,' HTWor ' wanton ;' cR * to desire,' cjrr^ ' desirous ;' >|^Ho
be,' HTfsfi ^ existing ;' ttcT ' to fall,' -qjw^ ' falling ;' "^if ' to kill,'
yi^oh * destroying,' ' destructive.'
im, leaving "T, forms a number of appellative nouns of
various genders and pui'ports : the radical vowel is made long
by virtue of the final ttt. Thus with ^ * to make,' w^: ' an
artisan ;' "ftr ' to overcome (disease),' wnj: * a drug ;' TT * to
blow,' TT^: * the wind ;' ^r^T ' to pervade,' "WTS^ ind. ' quickly,'
or ^rm: m. * a sort of rice ;' "iHT * to be born,' ^rrg n. ' the
knee.' The chief importance of "^rrr is, however, its standing at
the head of a very numerous class of terminations, thence
called Uiiadi, or Uii and others ; the effect of which, as will
be observed even in the few examples above given, is confined
to no particular signification, and which form derivatives not
always bearing an obvious relation to the verbs whence they
are derived. The principle of the Uiiadi derivatives is in fact
merely their resolution into conjectural etymological elements,
without much regard to the sense either of the primitive or
derivative. The terms are too numerous to be further parti-
cularized in this place, and they will all be found in the
Dictionary, which contains the whole of those specified in the
five Unadi chapters of the Siddhanta Kaumudi.
"55, leaving ^, forms attributives after verbs having any
penultimate vowel except ^ or "^ ; the change of which is
barred by the initial oR ; as, from fcT^ ' to wTite,' fc5'^ ' who
or what writes ;' — from ^V ^ to know,' "^ * who or what
knows.' It is also added to ift ^ to please,' ftnT ' what pleases,'
* dear,' ' loved,' ' liked ;' — to "SK ^ to scatter,' f^S^ ^ who or what
throws.' It is also added to verbs ending in ^ either as a
radical letter, or as a substitute for a diphthong, and with or
Qq
298 DERIVATION.
without a preposition, when the final ^ is cut off; as^ from
^ ' to know/ ^ or 1?^ ^ who or what knows/ ^ ' to call/ ^Tid^
' who or what calls/ It forms appellatives or attributives
with verbs in ^rr, preceded by a subordinate term ; as, ^ ' to
give/ ift^ ' who gives a cow / ^ ^ to preserve/ xrrfttSw ' the
rear of an army / and from trr ^ to drink/ f^TT: ' an elephant/
who drinks with two things, his mouth and his trunk. It is
added to WT ' to stay or be/ in various forms and senses ; as,
MH^ ' who or what is leveP or * at ease,' f^MHfr^ * who or
what is uneven' or ' in difficulty / TTF ' what goes first,' or
U^n ' a measure / the sibilant being unchanged in this as in
some other derivatives of the same class. ?y^, * to take/
changes its Ti to "^ before cF, forming appellatives ; as, tt^ * a
house,' TT^: (always m. pi.) ' a wife.'
cfi5^, leaving % is added to ^, when compounded with
pronominal nouns, to denote * likeness / as, TR and Hff make
^T^^t ; whilst oRT, leaving ^, is added to the same verb, simi-
larly compounded, when the two sibilants form T^ ; as, ^ilf^:
&c. : so irr^, ril^Hj, &c. : see p. 83.
foR, leaving ^, which is substituted for the radical final
vowel, is added to verbs in ^rr, or those which substitute ^31?
for a diphthong, when preceded by a preposition, to form
appellatives ; as, from \n ^ to have,' frrfV: ' a treasure / ^rf^
* a joint,' &c. : also when preceded by a subordinate term ;
as, ^TJ^fv: ' what holds water,' i. e. the ocean.
<Fr^, leaving "^j forms attributives from "5?^ *to break,' f^
' to know,' f^ ' to cut / as, f^Fi: ' who or what breaks :' f^?^
* who or what knows,' fs^Ht^ * who or what cuts.'
fin^, leaving frT, is added to verbs to form feminine abstract
or appellative nouns. There is a general analogy between the
mode of attaching the final to the base, with the formation of
past participles with ^ : thus "^ forms "^ffrr; ' act,' ' action / ^,
H^fiT: ' praise / '^, ^fri: ' hearing' or ^ the Veda / tRf ^ to go,'
with ^ or f^ prefixed, ^T«Tf%: ' prosperity,' f^tr(%: * calamity.'
HIT, ^ to sacrifice,' makes ^[%: ' sacrifice ;' FT * to stay,' f^frt:
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 299
^ staying,' ' station ;' ^ Ho sing/ iftfin ' singing ;' tn Ho drink/
jfffrr. '^drinking/ >r^ * to cook/ "qf^ 'cooking/ *^ maturity /
im ^ to go/ TifiT: * going/ ' motion / TiR ' to sport/ xfifr: ' plea-
sure/ Verbs ending with -gi or "^ change the "iT to ^; as,
V Ho be anxious/ "ufH: ' anxiety / "^ Ho scatter/ "aftfS: ' scat-
tering/ -q^, ' to destroy/ makes T^rrfw: ' destroying / ^ Ho
kill/ %fw: * a weapon / and ^ ' to celebrate/ ^itft: ' fame/
' reputation/
■f^H forms adjectives from verbs which have an Anubandha
I ; as tr^ (TtJr^) ' to ripen/ '^f'^ ' what ripens' or ' is ripe/
"m, leaving "J, forms attributives from f^, ^, W^, and '^^ ;
as, f^ ^ who or what throws / ?T^ ' greedy -,' W^ * fearful /
>IxnT ' arrogant/ >ft, ' to fear,' takes '^, f^^ or ^»^5 in all
which the "^ is indicatory, to form adjectives / as, H^, >ft^^,
or ^c§^, ^ timid,' ' fearful/
xMKM forms adjectives with ^ or its substitute xiTf * to eat /
as, ^RR, Tp^FTt, ' voracious / and ^ 'to go,' W^ ' movable/
* mo\dng/
^PhM; leaving TT, forms adjectives with a few words in
particular combinations ; as ^^ Ho see/ with the object pre-
fixed/ "tnTT'9f'?T ^ who has seen across / also "^V * to fight/ and
^ * to make / as^ tHf^sr^ ' who has fought the king / I.M*H'H
* who has made a king / ^r^^"^ ' who has fought with /
^^<*H'T ' who has done any thing along with (another)/
These words are declined like nouns in ^»T, p. 59.
fiiTT forms adjectives with ^ ' to go/ f»T ' to conquer,'
W^ ' to perish,' and ^ Ho go / as, ^7^ ' what goes/ HiiHi.
* victorious,' T^SR ^ perishing/ Wr^rc ' moving,' ' going / also
with iT^, which changes its final to it ; as, in^ ^ what goes/
These adjectives form the feminine with ^; as, ^hO, HiircjO,
jihO, &c.
fiirT, leaving a blank, or, in other words, annexing no addi-
tional letter to the final of the verb to form its derivative, is
subjoined to ^cf^, ' to touch,' to denote the agent combined
with the object or instrument, when the former is not water :
Q q 2
300 DERIVATION.
a final ^ before this affix is changed in inflexion to ^ (see
r. 119, p. 65): ^ri^3(^ ("^'J^) * who touches Ghee;' HtrH^ST
^ who touches (fire, &c.) by prayer:' but "g^ojiW^: ^ who
touches water ;' the affix being Tr>T . The following nouns
are irregularly formed with this affix : ^fi^ ' a priest/ from
^nr ^ to sacrifice ;' ^v^ ^ arrogant/ from v^ ^ to be proud ;^
B5|r ^ a garland/ from ^ * to quit / f^"5^ ' a quarter,' from
f^ ^ to shew ;' Tfw^ ^ a kind of metre/ from f^ri^ ^ to be
bland :' these form their nominatives in oF. The derivatives
of ^s^ ^ to go/ as ITT^ ' east/ Sec, and the words "giT ' who
joins/ and ^i^ * a curlew/ are also formed wdth this affix (see
nouns in ^ &c., p. 48).
ffjT^ is an affix of very extensive application ; its effect is
precisely the same as that of the preceding, which is separated
from it only to mark the peculiarities of inflexion to which
nouns formed with f^"^ are subject, ffixr adds nothing to the
verb. The derivative ends with the same final as the primitive,
modified occasionally, but never by the addition of a vowel.
The nouns it forms are both attributives and appellatives ; as,
p^ ^ a mother/ from "g ^ to bring forth / ^^ m. ^ one who
goes in the sky/ ' a deity,^ from "q^ ^ to go / irfl"^ (11%^) ' an
enemy/ from f^^ ' to hate / ^ng^»^ ("J^) ^ a lunar mansion/
from ^^ ^ a horse/ and ^ ' to join ;' ^^iifl": ' a general/ from
%^ ^ an army,^ and Trft ^ to lead / f^TJiT (u^) ^ Brahma,' from
tnr ^to shine.' Verbs ending in short vowels add ij^^ before
f^il, as the t^ indicates : thus f'^, * to collect,^ makes wfrTrfxTf^
* who collects the fire/ ^ a householder ; ' f»f, ^ to conquer,^
fWff . as ^f»ni[ * the conqueror of Indra/ a proper name ;
^ ^ to praise/ ^7^, as ^^^^ ' who praises the gods / ^ ^ to
sprinkle/ as WtT^ ' who sprinkles the Soma juice / ^ ^ to
make,' as "^i^^oJiTr ^ who does the work,^ ^ an artificer / >n«T«*it^
* who makes the gloss/ ' a scholiast.' ^ ^ to see,' ^ij^ ^ to
touch,' W5T * to leave,' take f^ to express the agent when
combined with the object, as «Sg5(^ (-ir^^) ' all-seeing / t^^rpfj^
('^^) ' sharp/ ' corrosive / fTO^W (-f^) ^ all-creating,' ^ the
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 301
Creator :' so does ^ ^ to eat/ as -sh^i?^ ' who eats flesh/ ' a
goblin / and ^^ ' to kill/ as ri^^*^ (^) ^ who kills a Brah-
man/ The following are modifications to which the base is
in some instances liable : w^-, * to cover/ makes its vowel
short ; as, fT"^^ ^ what covers the body/ * a garment / verbs
ending in a nasal, on the contrary, lengthen the vowel ; as,
^R Ho be tranquil,' Tf^TT'T (tt^T"?^) ^ who is tranquil / "fR 'to
stretch,^ TnTfrT ' who extends.' THT, "^, Tpr, and tr, however,
may change their finals to l^, and then the vowel remains
short; as, ^ScTTnf 'who goes along the road/ tfi^Trrf ^ every
way extended / ^nn^ ^ humble,' ^ lowly / wm[^ ' self-restrained.'
■^rnr, ' to instruct,' substitutes ^ for its penultimate : fflf^f^"^
(^:) * who instructs a friend :' also with WT prefixed ; as,
^nlV^, nom. ^T^l":, ' a blessing.' tj, ' to swallow,' makes frfx.
* speech.' H^, w^, ScRT, ' to fall/ &c., drop their nasals, and
substitute 1^ for the final ; as, "^T^iJl^ ' falling from a car /
"g^TFf^ ' falling from the pot / "q^xgw * falling from the leaf.'
■^ in various combinations as a radical letter is changed to "i"
or "3!, when f^ follows a verb : thus f^^, ' to play,' makes
^7^, as ^"^TT ' who plays with dice,' ' a gambler :' ^r^ ' to
preserve,' makes "31: ^ a preserver / which with a preceding ^
substitutes the Vriddhi letter, as »rt: ' who preserves man-
kind / ^, ^ to weave,' becomes "3!: ' a weaver :' ^jr: and i^ make
^ ' one who is ill / "flj ^ one who is quick.' "5^ and ^ final,
preceded by ^ are rejected ; as, H^, ' to faint,' makes sm ' who
faints / and ^ ' to injure,' "^j nom. v:, ^ who injures / as,
'sr^v: ' a load,' ' what injures the axle of a cart.' Some verbs
form nouns as it is considered irregularly with this affix; as,
•^^ ' to speak,' TT^ ' speech / TC^ ' to ask,' ITR^, nom. TTT^,
^ who inquires / IT '^ to move,' '^Tfl ' a worm / f^ Ho serve/
"^t: ' prosperity / W5T ' to go,' wfcdr^f ' who wanders about,'
' an ascetic / f^^ ' to shine,' f^^ ' lightning / tjjj ' to go,'
tPTI^ ' the world / i^ Ho meditate,' ^: ' understanding / and
many others, for which the Dictionary must be referred to.
302 DERIVATION.
^ is added to t^ * to colour/ T^T^t ' a washerman,* i^HdcM
' a washerwoman ;' but if the derivative be formed with ^^,
or the feminine noun signify ^ a wife^' the form is t»nK^.
^^ and its analogous affix ^3T, each leaving ^, form a
number of attributive and appellative nouns, compounded with
the object or instrument of the action, which the letter ^
indicates is to retain the terminations of the accusative case.
The ^ of the one indicates that the form of the derivative is
analogous to that of the conjugation : the "^ of the other, that
the radical vowel must be always short. Words formed with
^^^ are, from ^ ' to speak/ flTxn^: * who speaks kindly /
<«^IH<: ' who speaks authoritatively :' from tjtj ' to go,' P^^^-h:
* who goes in the sky :' from "31 * to make/ Hi[||fT: ^ fearful,'
'alarming / ^Hxr|jT: * what removes fear / ^j^ij^ ^ what brings
good:' from ^ 'to nourish/ fV^psH^ ^ what nourishes all/
f^T^TTJ * the earth : ' from mr ^ to scorch/ v:i:r(ti\ ^ who
scorches or subdues an enemy,' ' a hero : ' from iR ^ to
restrain^' TT^^IT: * an ascetic,' ' one who restrains his speech'
or ' observes a vow of silence :' from ? ' to tear,' "gx?^: (not
'JTLr;^) 'who tears or destroys a town/ a name of Indra.
^ * to be,' with WT^cT ' fed,' makes ^T%»n>^^: * food' or
' satiety.' Of words formed with 73^ the following are exam-
ples : from ^»fxr ' to cause to tremble,' ^pT^^nrt ' who awes
mankind/ the name of a prince : from ^HT ' to go/ "mrfH^Tt
* who goes with the wind,' ' a deer :' from V (^) * to suck/
^H'Vin, fem. "5?t, ' who sucks the breast,' * an infant :' from
i*n * to blow/ tfrfr^^rR: 'a piper:' from W^ ^ to torment/
fcj'j'ijf^: ' who tortures the moon,' ' the planet Rahu / ^T^'JJ^:
' what afflicts the marrow,' ' what is very painful :' from xf^
' to cook,' fi?7f«T^: ^ who cooks by measure,' ^ a niggard :'
from IHT * to scorch ;' («Sc»^ldfiM: ^ what scorches the forehead/
* the sun :' from »T^ ' to be or make mad/ ^t'SR^t * what mad-
dens or shines upon the water,' 'lightning.' From ^FTfT ^ to
mind' or ^ think/ implying conceit or imagination, come such
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 30S
compounds as "qf^Hrlwrai: ' one who thinks himself a PaA5.it ;'
TfRn^: ^ who fancies himself a cow.' It is unnecessary to
multiply examples further.
^S7^, leaving w, is added to verbs preceded by ^^7^, H^, or
V, to form adjectives implying the mode of the action ; as,
^^lich^ ' that which is made by a little at a time ;' HUhn ' what
is made with difficulty ;' ^oB^ ' what is made with ease.' This
affix is sometimes used indiscriminately with xi>^: see below.
f^^TPT^ and i^<+H^ are attached to H^Ho be,' and ^r^ to "^
^to do,' compounded with certain words, which, as in the case
of 1^^ and ^^, the ^ indicates must terminate in a nasal :
thus 'srreRff^w: and ^rreRfT^: ' a man who becomes wealthy,'
^not having been so before,' are formed with the two first
affixes ; and ^Hl^H<+l.ili ' the means of becoming wealthy,' with
the last : so ^^^r^rf^TEm:, W^^rwTTJsfi:, ' becoming blind ;' ^JFM>TofiT?!f
^ means of blinding ;' &c.
XT, leaving ^, forms nouns, for the most part masculine,
implying place, or instrument, or appellation ; as, from cF,
•^lohc ' a mine,' ^ where men work ;' "S^^ ' to cover,' ^^a^:
^ the lip,' * that by which the teeth are covered ;' WT ^ to dig,'
'llHsfH: ^a spade;' "qriT ^ to deal,' ^t^to: ^a market;' oR^ ^ to
touch,' f»T«R^ ^ a touchstone ;' ^T^ ' to go,' ifNTJ ^ pasture-land ;'
^ ^ to bear,' "^: ^ a conveyance ;' &c.
Tr>r is one of those affixes of which the application is most
extensive, and it forms a number of very useful masculine
nouns, signifying the act, the agency, the instrument, the
thing, or the abstract property. The essential element is ^;
but the "q indicates that a final palatal is to be changed to a
guttural; and the 5^, that a radical medial ^ is to be made
long, and a final vowel to take its Vriddhi element, whilst any
medial vowel but "^ is changed to the Guna equivalent : a
penultimate nasal is, with a few exceptions, rejected. Thus
xr^, ' to cook,' makes Tnofi: ^ cooking' or ' maturity ;' tt^ Ho go,'
VT^l ' a foot ;' "^J? * to desire,' cRTT: ' desire,' ' love ;' "^R ' to be
weary,' f^^TPfT: ^ rest ;' ^ ' to go,' ^nt; ' strength,' ' essence,' ^m)^k:
304 DERIVATION.
* diarrhoea ;' ^ Ho take,' ^tt: ^ a necklace,' ^T^Tt: ' food ;' ^ * to
cry,' with ^, ikR: ^ roaring ;' '^J to be,' irr^: ^ nature,' ' con-
dition ;' f^ ' to enter/ ^: ^ an abode ;' ^if ' to be sick,' rti:
' disease ;' '^^ ^ to touch/ Fi^ ^ touch ;' ^;?^ * to kindle,' v?six
' fuel ;' ^'7^ ' to loosen^' m^vj: ^ flaccidity,' the vowel remaining
short ; T^ Ho colour/ tFT: ' passion/ but t^ * a theatre :'
^J9I^, ^ to go/ makes either ^^: ^ speed/ or ^itt^: ^ dropping :'
^g^ and ^^Fif , ^ to throb^' make ^qiR: and ^ecrTc?: ^ throbbing :'
f^, ^ to collect,' changes its initial to oR ; as, oRHT: ^ the body/
fffcirnn ' a habitation.' Many words formed with Tr>T admit of
^nr also, as observed above ; taking one or other in different
senses or combinations ; as^, ^% ^ to guide,' makes tTR: ^ lead-
ing / but TTO^ ' affection,' Trftrii-nT ' throwing round/ "qfbSTiK
^ marriage :' ?j^ * to take/ w ith ^r^ and iiT prefixed, to form
terms of imprecation, makes ^T^JJT^: ' dishonour/ f^TilT^: ^ death,*
as ^"flJT^^ ^f?^' ^^^ ^H"^i|^*V >rT^ ^ acceptance or seizure of
the wealth,' ^hx:^ f^ZT^t ' confinement of the thief.' Some of
the distinctions are very fanciful : thus f^ compounded with
"JHT, ^ a flower/ takes xr>^ when it means ^ gathering by hand,*
as yuixj-ni: ; but ^TT when it means gathering in any other
way, as ^"4^14: ' gathering flowers (with a stick)/
frr^w forms attributives in ^^T, requiring the change of ^
to ^, and of any other short vow el to its Guna substitute :
iqiT * to leave,' mrf'T'T ' who leaves ;' ^ ' to join,' iflPnti * who
joins,' Tftift ' a religious man / f^i? ' to hate,' wf^rT ' who or
what hates / "^T ' to play,' "g^?"^ ' who plays / "^ * to
touch,' ^HTf^rT ' what touches' or ' is close to / "^ ' to speak,'
TTCmH^H ' who contradicts.' The class of verbs ^nnf^ (see
p. i524.) do not change the vowel ; "^rf'T'^T ^ who is calm /
except J?^, with "3T|^ or u prefixed, d •*! I ft; H or Tnrrf^*T 'mad,'
* intoxicated.'
11^, leaving Tt, is added to fi?^ ' to be unctuous/ HTO ' to
shine/ H^ * to break / as, ^^ * unctuous/ HT^ ' splendid,'
>T^ * fragile.'
7, leaving ^, is added to "^ * to do,' ^ ' to go,' and ^^ ' to
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. S05
go/ to form attributives and appellatives in composition with
other words, z indicates the formation of the feminine in ^;
as, f^Flf^: ^ a servant/ f%^ ' a female servant.' When the
feminine is f^tljTT, the derivative "SR has been formed with ^T^:
so "f^oT^^ ' who makes the sky/ ^ the sun / HT^r: ' who makes
light/ ' the sun :' T\^[hkilX -^ -t ' what makes fame/ * honourable/
' glorious :' so also ^T^in:: * one who goes before/ ' a leader /
fW^T^tJ ' one who goes for alms/ ' a mendicant / &c.
Z"^, leaving ^, is added to ^ in certain compounds, when
?r is substituted for the root, to signify the agent ; as, "STnTTTT:
* a man who kills his wife / qPri^ * a woman who kills her
husband / ^rtttt^: ' one who destroys or breaks open a door/
* a thief / f^W ' what destroys bile/ ' clarified butter.' Com-
pounded with TTTO and TTTT, in the sense of * manufacture' or
* art/ "^ is substituted for the root ; as, TTlf^Tn or Tff^^: * a
mechanic/ ^ an artisan.' It is also added to n * to sing/ and
■qr ' to drink/ in certain combinations ; ^?T7T:, '^wnt, ' a male
or female chaunter of the Sama / Hum -^ ' a winebibber :'
but 17T, ' to preserv^e/ takes ^ ; as, ^httt 1^T?r# ^ a female
Brahman, who keeps the milk.'
^, leaving ^, is added to tr ' to go,' and ^ ^ to kill,' to
form attributives and appellatives : the T indicates the elision
of the radical final : T^'t^^T ' who or what goes every where /
f^^ii: ' who goes in the air,' ' a bird / "grn: ^ what goes on its
belly,' ' a snake / ^[d^ ' a destroyer of an enemy / HH^M^:
* what drives away darkness,' ' the sun.'
J forms nouns with >j^^ to be,' preceded by fN", IT, and H ;
as, f^l ' who is every where,' ^ a deity / Tr>j: ^ a master /
;rt>t: ' a progenitor :' also with "5 ' to flow,' preceded by its
object ; fJlTT^: ' what runs in a measured course/ ' the ocean /
^Iri^: ' what runs in a hundred (streams),' ' a river.' l^F^:, a
name of S^iva, is considered to be formed also with this affix,
from ^ ' auspicious,' and >? ' to be.'
I!T, leaving ^, is added to verbs ending in ^n to form nouns
of various kinds / as, ^ ' to give,' ^rm ' a portion / vr ' to
R r
306 DERIVATION.
hold/ \Tn?: ' a possessor/ * one who has' or ^ holds / "^ ' to
go/ ^^Tf-p?: ^ frost :' also to ^ ' to go/ ^ ' to ooze/ "q*^ ' to
destroy/ ^ ^ to take/ preceded by prepositions ; as, ^stttr:
^ going away/ ^ end/ ' destruction / ^TTFR': ' trickling / ^H'WR:
' end/ ' conclusion/ or ^ who or what ends / ^h^^k: ' a shark/
also ^ who or what takes away :' also to TD*t ' to guide/ TfR:
^ a means / fc51 ' to hck/ ^: ^ licking / f^ ' to embrace/
^: ^ embracing / IJ^ ^ to take/ a[jT^: ' an alligator ; ^a^l * to
pierce/ ^"<i: ^ a hunter/ It is also added to IT^ ' to be born/
preceded by nouns or particles in various senses ; as, ^HT
^ unborn / fg»r ' twice born / f^aT: ' a Brahman / ^r»T5T ^ born
after / ^5r^: ^ a younger brother / ^Ti'ftjw ' a lotus/ ^ born in
a pool ;' ilrjT»Tt ' a monkey/ * one born in a stable / ^sr^aT
' born from accident/ or ' what has not been foreseen/ From
■^rf, ' to dig/ it forms tt1t.^T ' a ditch.' It is also added to ^
' to eat/ preceded by f^ ; as, "sr^: ' food :' and to ^^j * to be
possessed of/ oR ^ to desire/ H^ * to eat/ preceded by their
objects / as, irNr^fh^ ' having flesh/ ' stout / 5Fl'N?ofi'm ' desirous
of flesh / ^rhwsj ^ eating flesh :' also to ^ ' to see/ and ^'^
^ to go/ preceded by ^ ; as, ^WJrrfhf ' expecting happiness /
<*<5millHK ' one of good habits.' These make their feminines
in WT; as, nf^l^ftc^T &c.
fiilfn is an affix of extensive use to form attributives from
verbs. The essential termination is ^tt ; the initial ^ pro-
longing in most cases a radical short vowel. Nouns thus
formed are mostly declinable in three genders as nouns in ^
(p. 6'^,), It is affixed to a class of words called ?7^Tf^; as,
?ITf^"^ ^ who or what takes / ^iPMrl ' who or what stays' or
' is stationary ;' fTRft^r^ ' preserving/ ' protecting ;' ^S^TUfV^
' who or what offends ;' "qfbTTf^ ^ what disgraces.' It is
also added to ^^, preceded by "JJTR or -^fM ; as, ^KMlPri'i^
' who strikes the boy / ^q^rrfK^ ^ who strikes the head :'
— to verbs preceded by nouns ; as, "?"Q5PTtf»nT ' who eats his
meal hot ;' TEnVoSift:^ ' who does what is right / "^^Rlf^^
' who declares Brahma' (the Vedas or the true god). It is
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 307
also added to them to form attributives implying ' similarity/
as Tg^Rtf^"?^ ' who cries like a camel ;' or to denote a religious
obligation, as Frftl5c5^Tf^riT * who sleeps on the ground/ in
consequence of a vow.
inT7 is affixed to a few verba to form appellatives or attri-
butives : IJT prolongs the radical vowel ; z indicates the femi-
nine termination to be ^; and ^, wherever it occurs, indicates
the final of the derivative to be ^SPT : thus, from ^ ' to sing/
TFR:, '11^*1^, * a male' or * female singer ;' from ^ ' to aban-
don/ '^lin: * a year/ or * a kind of rice.^
f^ is added to Wt{ ' to take/ with the effect of fii^, except
that it prolongs the vowel ; as, ^f^RfST (nom. htsr) ^ one to
take his share/ * an heir/
?!T<?f^ is an affix to verbs in general to form nouns attributive
of agency : ^, as usual, lengthens the vowel ; whilst ^ indi-
cates the termination of the derivative to be ^ni : thus "sp, ' to
do,^ makes chKoh ^ who or what makes / xni ' to cook/ MMoh
' who or what cooks' or ' ripens / "^ * to kill,' iiid«h ' who or
what destroys / ^ ' to give/ ^nrsB ' a giver/ Some verbs do
not make the vowel long / as , ^, ^HoR ' who tames / wv,
^njofi ^ who kills / "ipf, »nT«R: ^ who begets/ ^ a parent/ Femi-
nine nouns usually substitute ^ for the penultimate vowel ; as,
oRlftcfiT, trrf%-^, &c. : so do some feminine nouns, names of
diseases, formed with this affix ; as, iT^ff'cfiT * vomiting/ UTT-
"fi^oRT ^ diarrhoea :' they are considered irregular : so are ^rftrcfiT
^ sitting,' and ^nf^T ^ lying down.'
"^^ is an affix of extensive use to form appellatives of
agency; it leaves i^, and nouns formed with this affix are
declined like nouns in "^ in the three genders (see p. 42) :
thus "^ ' to make/ '^^ ^ a maker,' ' a doer / xpT, "T^^ « a goer /
tr^, xr^ ' a cooker,' ^ a ripener.' It follows the analogy of the
original verb in inserting or omitting ^ before w ; as, ^"Vs" or
^f^W ^ who bears / '^^ or ^ ^ who wishes / "^Fir, "^iPIJ, or
•^PHfj, ^ who goes / &c. After some verbs, l^ is said to be
R r 2
308 DERIVATION.
used instead of ^; as, from ^ * to sacrifice,' ^Vg^ ' the minis-
tering priest.'
ff^, leaving it, forms substantives from ifiT ' to worship,'
TPr^ ' to ask,' ' inr * to strive,' f%^ ' to shine,' TT^ ' to ask ;'
as, x[^: * sacrifice,' ^r^»rr ^ soUcitation,' -q^: ^ effort/ "m^ ^ shin-
ing,' and Tl^: * a question. ^^Tf:, ^ sleep' or ' a dream,' is
formed from "b^ ^ to sleep,' with "SftT affixed.
•ff^T^ forms adjectives from '^[^ ' to sleep,' "^^ ^ to thirst,'
"^ 'to be proud ;' as ^MtI ' sleepy,' '^'Gtn'f ' thirsty,' Y^"^
' arrogant :' they are declined in three genders like nouns in
s^ (p. 48).
qft^H forms attributives and appellatives from verbs ending
in vowels ; as, from ^ * to give,' ^^^ a proper name ;' ^
' to injure,' ^(WT a title proper for a Brahman.
xr^, which, as remarked under the head of iigr^, leaves, for
the termination of the derivative, 'SR, forms attributives of
agency and appellatives after verbs that signify ' motion,'
* sound,' * ornament,' or ' anger ;' as, "^"FH ^ who or what is
going ;' 4iU(f^ ' who or what is shaking ;' t^w * who or what
is sounding ;' >TTO' ' who or what is adorning ;' "^^HT * who or
what is in a passion :' also after verbs beginning with a con-
sonant, and having the indicatory vowel gravely accented ; as,
^ * to be,' ^^^^ * who or what is abiding ;' ^v ^ to increase,'
^:t^ ' who or what is increasing :' also after various other
verbs ; as, ^ ' to be quick,' if^R ' fleet ;' 3fc5 ' to burn,' "^<5«T
' burning,' ^ shining ;' &c. The feminine termination of nouns
formed with ^^ is rn^; as, -^e^^HT, ^RWITT, &c. : it also forms
feminine nouns signifying the act, after verbs of the tenth
conjugation or causal s ; as, 'dsixm ^causing to do;' "^TJ^UT
* causing to take :' also after a few other verbs ; as, ^ra,
^HRT ' sitting ;' ^T^^, ^^F^zpTT loosing ;' "q^, q^HI ^ effort,' ' ex-
ertion ;' Tf^, ^r^HT ' praising ;' f^, ^*TT ^ perception.'
T^ forms attributives with 'w{^ * to bow,' cR^t * to tremble,' f^T
* to smile,' w\ ' to desire,' f^f^ ' to injure,' ^ ' to shine ;' as.
VERBAL DERIVATIVES NOUNS. 309
7{^ * bent,' ^.1^ * tremulous/ w^ * smiling/ "^ig ' desirous/ fi^
' mischievous/ ' cruel/ ^'hr * radiant/ It also forms the inde-
clinable noun ^a^H ' continual/ from »nT * to let loose,' with
the negative prefixed.
^ forms attributives with certain verbs ; as_, ^T * to give/
^ * to cut/ f^ ' to bind/ ^ ^ to decay/ ii^ ' to go ;' ^t^ ' who
or Mhat gives/ or ' who or what cuts / ^^ ^ who or what
binds / ^"5 ^ decaying / ^15 * what goes/
^oR forms appellatives with "STPT, * to wake,' and verbs in
the frequentative mode ; as, ITT'TC^R ' vigilant,' and ^r-M^<* ^ who
worships frequently,' ^"<f^^ ' who bites keenly,' ^f^"3|*: ' a
snake / from Tj»r ' to worship,' ^ ' to bite / &c.
"^ forms nouns of agency from a class of verbs called rpf^rrf^,
and from a variety of others : for the effect of ^, see iig^ and
xr^ above : tTT^ ^ to delight/ Hn^H ' who or what is delighted /
^^ ' to madden,^ t^^ ' who or what maddens / w^ * to accom-
pHsh/ 'mv[^ ' who or what effects / tr^ ' to bear,' TT^ ^ who
or what bears.' These nouns are very commonly used in the
masculine gender as appellatives ; as, H«<Ht ' a son,' ^"q":
^ Love,' »rg^^: ' the destroyer of Madhu/ a name of Vishnu ;
and the like.
•5177 is an analogous termination to the preceding, and also
forms derivatives ending in vTJT ; but they are not nouns
signifying an agent; they denote the object, the act, the
instrument, the site, or the abstract condition ; and although
sometimes masculine or feminine, are more usually neuter
nouns : vrrrRT: ' an article of food,' )^hnt ^ food in general' or
' feeding,' from H«T ^ to eat / »j<d4H ' chattering,' from "Sf^ ' to
talk / ^ff ^ laughing,' ^ laughter,' from ^ ^ to laugh / ■^mi^
^ accomplishing,^ or ^ means,' ^ instrument,' from "^rv * to effect ;'
VJ^ ^ drinking' or ^ drink,' from trr ' to drink ;' IT^^^r: * an
implement of cutting,^ * an axe,' from TT^ ' to cut / ift^^^t
' an implement of milking,' * a milk pail,' from 5^ * to milk.'
The z of the affix denotes the feminine formation in ^.
^^ forms attributives, which in one or other gender become
310 DERIVATION.
appellatives, from different verbs ; as, "fT ^ to stay,' WT*^ ^ who
or what is stationary,' WRC ' an inanimate product of nature ;'
f:5T ' to be powerful,' figt^ * who is powerful,' f^^gt.: ^ God ;' HnT
* to shine,' HUSrt ' radiant,' &c. It is also added to t^, ' to
go,' in the frequentative mode ; -MltlNi: ' who or what goes
repeatedly.'
■^ is added to f^«a[, ' to abuse/ and other verbs, to form
attributives signifying the agent ;' as, f^"3R ' who or what
reviles ;' f^Wofi ' who or what injures :' also to f^ ' to play,'
and '3»'S[T ' to cry,' preceded by ^T ; as, ^rr^"^oB ' who sports' or
plays ;' ^r^t^R! * who calls out' or ' cries.'
^iT> like the preceding, leaving w^, forms attributives with
W ' to go,^ TS ' to go,' and 75^* to cut ;' as, TnoB ' who or what
goes ;' ^iTofi ' who or w^hat moves ;' cSM^h ' who or what cuts.'
It also forms benedictory nouns ; as, »flc|<*, ' living,' is used
as wishing long life to ; »fl^ofc^* ^rm: * Mayest thou be a
liver,' i. e. live long.
^, leaving ^, is added to different verbs to form attri-
butives and appellatives. The "^r indicates that the derivative
follows the conjugational form of the verb ; as, in, "ftr^fif ' to
drink,' fq^ ' who or what drinks,' i^, if^^Pri ' to see,' ty^iT
* who or what sees ;' ^, >nTfw ' to suck,' \R ' who sucks,' vrm
' a boy,' \rm ' a girl.' So ^ * to give,' and VT * to hold,' third
conj. ; ^ ' who or what gives ;' ^v ' who or what holds.' So
fcycr ' to smear,' and f^ ' to know,' of the sixth conjugation,
make fc5'T and f^r^ ; as in fnTc^J-m: ' the unsoiled,' ^ the
gods ;' iftf^: ' who tends the cattle,' a name of Vishnu. So
derivatives from verbs of the tenth conjugation and causals
retain the sign ; as, f^ * to think,' ^THT ' who or w^hat
' reflects ;' tj, ihtTT ' who or what fills ;' ^^ and ^»T, "^^^HT
* what causes to tremble.' ^ is also added to various verbs
to form feminine abstract nouns ; as, f^fm ' act,' * action,' ^^sgrr
' wish,' T^ft^rSr ' worship,' irft^T ' wandering,' wnm ' hunting,'
wei«WI ' roaming,' inn^ ^ waking,' ' vigilance.'
irr^r^, leaving ^rr*, forms attributives from a few verbs ; as,
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES. 311
iT^rra ' prattling,' ' a babbler/ from IT^ ' to talk idly ;' fW^T^
' begging,' from f^ ' to seek alms ;' &c. The feminine is
formed with f^ — ir^TT^, f>TWT^% &c. — by virtue of the indi-
catory initial "R.
"E|fT, like Wc^ Sac, as above^ leaves ^nfi, and forms attri-
butives denoting the practiser of any art or business : the
feminine, in consequence of "sr, ends in ^ : thus "fjw, ^ to dance/
makes ^#^:, ^^^^3st, * a male or female dancer ;' ^rr ' to dig/
^^^T^:, ^H<*1, ' a male or female ditcher.'
"grT, leaving ^, forms neuter and feminine nouns from
various verbs, signifying the instrument or means by which
any end is effected ; as, ^ ^ to cut,' ^TW ' a sickle / f^ ^ to
' sprinkle,' %^* ^ a bucket f '^ and ^ ' to join/ Tft# or "ifl^*
' fastening of a yoke / ^m ^ to injure/ ^i^ * a weapon ;' 7^
' to guide/ ^ ' the eye / ^ ' to bite,' ^ ^ a tooth / ^iro ^ to
govern,' ^rn^ ' a scripture.' ^, ' to purify/ makes tft# ^ the
snout of a hog/ or ^ the shaft of a plough.' ^, ^ to suck/
makes VT^ ' a nurse / and VT ' to have (health by it),' VTqf^ a
particular shrub.
^chH is added to the verb ^, ^ to sing/ to form JI|V|«*: * a
singer.'
SECTION III.
Nominal Derivatives.
254. Having formed primitive nouns from verbs, other
nouns may again be derived from the primitive nouns, to
imply every possible relation to the things, actions, or notions,
which the primitives express. These derivative nouns, called,
as already mentioned, Tad-dhita (^ relating or belonging to that'
which is primitive), are formed in the usual mode by attaching
certain affixes to the base, and modifying the latter agreeably
to special rule, or to the indications afforded by the letter or
letters accompanying the essential elements of the termination.
255. The difficulty of an unexceptionable classification of
the Taddhita derivatives is still greater than even that of the
312 DERIVATION.
classification of Kridanta words, inasmuch as the former are
still more diversified in form and purport, and as many of the
affixes are applicable in a greater variety of acceptations. We
must therefore have recourse again to the alphabetical arrange-
ment of the terminations, distinguished under a few different
heads, and occasionally associating a few of an analogous and
limited application.
0,56, Some of the most extensively useful of the Taddhita
affixes are connected by an analogous diversity and extent of
apphcation. They are mostly employed in forming words
which are one or other, or sometimes all, of the following :
I. Patronymics and terms denoting lineal descent, or com-
munity of origin ; 2. Attributives of a variety of qualities and
circumstances ; 3. Appellatives, or names of persons and
things ; 4. Nouns of aggregation ; and 5. Abstract nouns.
These may therefore be classed under one head, as Miscellaneous
nouns. Another considerable class of terminations is employed
to denote possession of a thing or property by an individual
object ; and they may constitute another class, as Possessives.
The terminations forming the superlative and comparative
degrees are included amongst the Taddhita affixes ; and so
are those which form various pronominal derivatives, and
terms connected with number, as ordinals, &c. : these may
be grouped together. Finally, there are various indeclinable
and adverbial terms. Thus making four classes of nominal
derivatives ; in each of which the terminations may be alpha-
betically arranged. With exception of the last of the above
classes, Taddhita derivatives are declinable in either one or all
of the genders.
257. The letter or syllable which forms the essential
adjunct to the base, is sometimes merely added to it agree-
ably to the laws of combination ; but it more tisually takes
the place of the last vowel of the primitive, and if that be
followed by t^^, of the consonant also. Thus from f^ comes
|r^; from f%^, %^ift&; from f^^TlTT, %^TWTT. A final '3' or ^
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 313
may be changed to its Guna equivalent, and thus combined
with the vowel of the affix^ as "oR^, "^t^ ; but it may be some-
times cut off, as ^Wf , ^^Tcfi. ^r^*T, ' a stone/ makes "^i^H
' stony / "^^tT ' the Vedas' or ^ Brahma/ "^t^ ' relating to
Brahma' or ^ the Vedas ;' but as a generic term of descent, it
makes t^i^iii: ' a Brahman.' So nouns ending in ^ usually
preserve the final ; as, ^^^ ^ a car,' xj i pThiij ' belonging to a
car.' There are many varieties, however, in the annexation
of the affix to the base, for which the Dictionary must be
consulted.
258. It is also a general rule, that all those terminations
which contain an indicatory ttt, ^, or oB, require that the first
vowel of the base, whether it be a simple or compound term,
substitute the Vriddhi equivalent ; as, ^"S^ ' the eye,' ^'CT^
* relating to the eye.' In some polysyllabic words the Vriddhi
letter is repeated ; as, Tr^ ' a friend,' ^t^ff ' friendship ;' and
from ^rfrq" and T^T^ combined, comes 'HiDhhiInH ' sacred to
Agni and Marut' (fire and wind). If the primitive begins with
a compound letter, of which the second member is tt or % the
Vriddhi diphthong ^ or ^ is commonly prefixed to the semi-
vowel ; as, from "arnr, * logic,' comes H^lHl^: ' a logician ;' from
^mr ' a tiger,' T^mr ' covered with a tiger's skin / from ^^^W
to-morrow, ^"^fw^ ' of, or relating to, to-morrow\'
259* In some instances, nominal derivatives retain the form
of the primitives unaltered ; as, "T^n^ ' a native of Panchala,'
otherwise xrn^Tc^: ; "^^^ * belonging or relating to the Yavanas,'
otherwise xnT^f. In these cases, it is affirmed, that the usual
affix had been attached to the primitive, but again rejected,
together with its effects : this is called Taddhita-luk.
260. Attributives formed with affixes containing an indi-
catory W, >T, Z, ^, "R, and taking the three genders, form, with
a few exceptions, the feminine with ^ ; as, tti^Ic^I, %^Hf, "^^^j
HIt^mI, &c.
Class I. Miscellaneous affixes.
^T^r, leaving ^, forms, i. Patronymics; as, ^w: 'a son' or
s s
814 DERIVATION.
* male descendant,' of tt^B' : also generic terms of descent ; as,
"l*^ ' any divine being/ from ^^ * a deity :' 2. Attributives in
certain senses ; as, ^tr ' covered with an elephant's hide,^ from
ffT? * an elephant;' "^t:^' 'dyed with turmeric,' from "^It^T;
^Nfj^cj ^ made of the wood of the Devadaru pine :' 3. Appella-
tives ; as, "g" ^ a man,' tn^ ^ a woman ;' "^ftfcft * the earth/
xnf^^: * a prince :' 4. Nouns of aggregation ; as, W^ftlf * a
flock of pigeons/ from ofixfhf : and 5. Abstract nouns in certain
senses ; as, ^srNi * the nature of a horse.' In general, w*? may
be considered as forming similar derivatives with the analogous
termination '^m, and to be applicable to the same primitives,
although theoretically it is limited to words of which the first
vowel is gravely accented, which terminate in "3", or which
belong to certain specified classes ; as, i^^fechift^ or ^f?i2^, and
others.
^srj^ forms from cf.^#;ff , ' act/ the attributive cfi?^ ^ active,'
* energetic'
^rtrr , leaving ^, is an affix of very universal application. It
forms, I. Patronymics ; as, ^tyrj^: * a son or descendant of
T^TT ;^ TPR^^: ' the son of Vasudeva' ^tr^:, that is, Krishna :
also terms of descent in general ; as, WRTOt ' a Brahman/ from
jsl^ri . A final ^ is changed to "^ before the ^ of ^^ in this
sense ; as, Ittt^: ' the son of two mothers,' from fg; and mi^
* a mother.' 3. Attributives ; as, ?Tf»f?T ' Madder,' Jrffwsr ' of
the colour of, or dyed with. Madder ;^ ^^ ' cloth,^ c||^ ^ made
of, or covered with, cloth/ &c. ; ^^ ^ relating or belonging to,
or a worshipper of, S'iva / TOl"^ ^ relating or belonging to, or
a worshipper of, Vishnu / %iq>i ^ belonging to, or produced in
the country of, Nishadha.' ^<ng, ^ a horse,' makes "^t^ * belong-
ing or relating to a horse,' ^ drawn by horses / ^T^TT ' sugar/
^rr^t ' sugary,' ' made of sugar,' or ^ as sweet / ^^ ' woollen,'
* made of wool,' from "^r^t ' wool / 0^??, f^TnT, fTJT, * produced
in the hot or cold weather,' ^ summer,' ^ winter ;' ^n^ ^ diurnal/
from ^si^"?^ ' a day / ^ ' nocturnal,' from f^T ^ night / UNr^l.
* annual,' from B^Wt: ^ a year / ^"rtk ^ bodily,' ' corporeal,' from.
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 315
^nShc ^ the body.' It also forms possessive attributes ; as, TT^
* wisdom/ m^ * having wisdom/ ' wise.' 3. Many of the attribu-
tives ah-eady given are also appellatives : thus :^"^: and %^"^:
mean severally ' a follower of S'iva or Vishnu ; ' %qv: is a
proper name, ^ king of Nishadha ;' WT^: ' a carriage drawn by
horses.' "qt^, relating to the asterism tjhj^ is in the masculine
Ttrm, the name of a month, when the moon is in that asterism ;
and in the feminine, "^^ ' day of full moon in the month of
Paush.' 4. Aggregates ; as, "Tra ^ a flight of cranes,' from T^l
' a crane ;' H^ ' a troop of beggars,' from fW^t ^ a beggar.^ 5. Ab-
stract nouns ; as, "^1%: ' who is pure,' ^f^ ^ purification ;* nf^:
* a silent sage / m^ ^ silence ;' ^^ ' young,' 41«<«i ^ youth ;'
1J^: * a man,' ttt^ * manliness,' ' manhood,' * manly stature,'
&c. ; ^ ' large,' xrr#^ ' bulk,' ^ bigness.' ^mr is also some-
times used pleonastically ; as, "^^I or TFM^: ' a kinsman ;'
^ft^v: or ^mv ^ a drug / ^^frTT or f WTT: ^ a divinity.'
^, leaving ^, forms patronymics only ; as, ^rfiB^ ' a
descendant of Daksha ;' f^rnrfofi: ^ a descendant of Vyasa' (oR
being inserted).
^[rf^ and analogous terminations, gR and f^z^, are added to
"N^ and f%, substituted for f^, to form f^oRTf, f^ and fqfir^
signify ^ flat, as the nose,' "Nf«RT "JTTftroRT ; or ' flat-nosed,'
r^fMd: "5^:, &c.
^rf is added to a class of words to form nouns of multitude ;
as, wfc5*0 ^ a number of mills :' also to cfi?#r^ and <^\[ \ % seve-
rally authors of rules for an order of mendicants, and for
acting ; to imply their disciples ; ^?#fi^"^ * a mendicant,'
cK^rrf^*T ^ an actor.' ^f^ is of more extensive application as a
possessive affix.
SfqfHx^, leaving ^»^, forms abstract masculine nouns from
attributes of sensible properties ; as, ^ ' white,' igffin';?
^ whiteness ;' YS ^ large,' irftm^ ' bulk ;' ^^ * soft,' ^f^ra
* softness ;' H^if ' great,' nf^^ ' greatness ;' 3j^ * heavy,'
iTft]R»T ^ heaviness / &c. These form their nominatives in ^T ;
as, ^W, &c. (see p. 59).
s s 2
316 DERIVATION.
^finr is added to H\'^\ ^ the rainy season,' forming ITT^^IW
' what grows or is produced in the rains.'
^53^ is added to appellatives to signify ^ multitude ;' ^rf%ofi^:
* a flock of sheep :' also to various prepositions to form attri-
butives conveying their general purport ; Tf^sz ' manifest ; '
f^^t^ * large,' ^ extended ;' ^iNrt ^ contracted ;' "^rSR^ ' much ;'
fiT^Z ' near.'
■<*?i|^ added to t^ forms Ti^nKJ^n ' a multitude of carriages.'
•griT, that is, "gp, forms a variety of derivative words, mostly
attributives ; as, it5^ ' produced or born in the country of
Madra,' ^HcR ' stout,' i^hnfi ' dyed yellow,' Hrfi ' belonging to
me,' r^Ffi ' belonging to thee,' ^fr * sad,' tt^oR ^ bought with five,'.
* bearing or receiving five,' as tax or interest. It forms also attri-
butives implying ^ skill ;' as, ^^T^B ^ one skilled in dressing hair :'
or ^ limitation ;' as, f^g^ ^ cut,' f^^^ofi ' a little cut :' also * like-
ness ;' as, ^0 ri oh ' cold, as it were,' i. e. dull, slow ; TBC[l«fi ' hot,
as it were,' i. e. quick, smart. It is added to prepositions ; as,
to ^rfv * over,' ^rfVofi ' more than ;' and to ^TfT ' after,' and ^frfvT
^near ;' ^^, ^"firsR or ^whli ^ lustful.' It forms also appellatives ;
as, ^^[cfit ^ an heir,' ' one who takes his portion,' from ^r^: ^ a
part ;' particularly when pity or contempt is intended ; as,
g^fofi: ^ a stumpy tree ;' "ST^ToR: ' an inferior Sudra ;' ^^otii ^ the
poor child;' ^<4c( ■?(<*: ^ the unhappy Devadatta ;' W^^\ ^a vile
horse.' It sometimes implies ^ doubt ;' as, »5|syoh: * the horse (of
whom is this).' It is frequently pleonastic ; as, wfN": or ^PHoR:
* a sheep ;' irftii: or T{fw^\ ^ a jewel ;' &c.
oR^ and the analogous terminations ^^ and ^^Trj^ are
affixed to nouns to form appellatives implying ' inferiority ;'
P^^r»gM:, f%¥^:, f^¥^^:, ' an inferior scholar.' They are
also attached in an adverbial form to verbal inflexions ; as,
tT-'jn^qhgM &c. ^ he cooks incompletely,' ' he does not finish
cooking.'
TR and ^5T are analogous terminations, of which the essen-
tial adjunct is ^ ; the second requires the Vriddhi vowel :
they form, i . Words implying ' descent ;' as, from ^c5 ' a race,'
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 317
eh(^1^ or o^rjhr ' sprung from a good family :' 2. Attributives ;
as, ^T^'^T, ' a day,' makes ^T^T^f ^ to be done in a given number
of days ;' 'ii^iKMR: ^ either bank of a river,' ^T^nrrrtNT ^ who or
what goes or extends to both banks -^ Jjm: ^ a village,' TnrfNr
' rustic' ^village :' ^TTW^" makes ^TTiTri^ ' what is fit or good for
oneself ;' f^m^lH ' all mankind,' fWrpft^ ' what is fit or good
for all :' 3. Appellatives ; fiTFJ, * Sesamum,' makes ^c^M ' a
field of Sesamum ;' ^hm^ ' seven steps/ ^nmrcf^rf ' friendship,'
* intimacy / fq^c{lr( ^ fresh butter/ from ^^ ' to-day/ and m
* a cow.'
XT, leaving ^ir, forms, i . words of descent ; as, from "c^t ' a
man of the military caste,' Hjfd^: the same, as sprung from
him : 3. Attributives ; as, TTg: ' a country,' Tjft^ ' relating or
belonging to it.^
■?[ and 'S[OT are analogous affixes^ both leaving ^ : the one
requires Vriddhi ; the other not : they form, i . words of
descent in general ; as^ ^^'t^: ' a sister's son,' ^■^^^I'xr: ' the
son of a father's sister ;' 2. Attributives ; J?^*^^ or HT^t^
^relating to Mahendra / ^wtxr * suited to, or fit for, a calf/
UToRT^^ * fit for a wall :' ofi is inserted before the affix after
some words ; as, W^^ ' own^^ n'5T^^ ' royal :^ 3. Appella-
tives ; as, xj-frfhr: ' a mountaineer.'
■sgrrfTi and '^ are two affixes to nouns to form attributives
implying ' being known by / as, f%?rr^^ or f^lTT^^ ^ known
by, or on account of, learning.^
^, leaving ^, forms feminine nouns of descent ; as, xrrPtrr
* a female descendant of "^fzr^ / and nouns of action, com-
pounded with tfTTf * falling / as, ^l^imriT ' falling of an hour,'
' a lunar day.' After ^^^rf ' a hawk,^ and frTFJ * Sesamum,^ a
nasal is inserted ; as, ^HUflril ' hawking / tc^J^nfT ' an obla-
tion' (in which Sesamum is scattered).
f^ alternates with 3^5? after a few words, and like it leaves
^^ for the termination ; but it differs in forming the feminine
with ^rr; as, "SfirfV *a city' (Benares), "^iT%^ 'belonging to
Kasi / fem. -sfirf^T ; with z^ it would be ^if^f^^.
318 DERIVATION.
^, leaving Tt, forms a few appellative and abstract nouns ;
^H^ * the lapis lazuli,' from f%^ a mountain so named ;
TTT^t^ * depth/ from T\mtn ' deep ;' WT^T^ * infinity,' from
^rPrT ' endless ;' '^nfw^ * hospitality/ from ^rfrrf^ ^ a guest f
and others.
ZtZ^^ with the analogous terminations rfT^^ and >JZ^ are
added to the preposition ^"^ to form attributives implying
* flat,' as the nose ; ^R^trr, W^T3T, or ^T^HTT, TrrftrsfiT, ' a flat
nose ;' -a^lill, "^(wmzi, W^>JT:~"5^: * a flat-nosed man.'
^ or ?^, is an affix, leaving w?r, to form attributives from
adverbs importing ' time :' W is inserted : as ^rnt ' evening,'
KRnfTf * what is of the evening ;' "m^ ^ to-day,' "WSW^ ' what
is of to-day ;' ui^ ' in the forenoon,' mi^HH * what is of the
forenoon ;' fqt ' long/ "NT7fr«T ^ lasting' or ' delayed long / &c.
7^ is an affix forming a number of words, substituting ^
for the finals of nouns ending in ^ or ^t, or in w^, and
adding oR to others : it forms, i. a few patronymics from
feminine nouns in ^, the final of which is also cut off*; as,
T.^fffofi ' a descendant of T:T?ft :' but it also implies inferiority
in this form ; as, Trrfr:^ ^ an inferior,' ' a young or silly
descendant of irnff/ 2. Attributives ; as, c5T^T makes c^lfspR
* dyed with Lac / ^fv, ^Tfv=fi ' made with, or fed with, curds /
V^, Vrf'^ofi * virtuous,' but ^rnrft^cfi * wicked / iTPET, T?Tftrofi ^ given
or lasting for a month ;' ^, "qifMcR * annual,' ' lasting for a
year / ifTTT^ SPHcR ' belonging to an army/ 3. Appellatives ;
^frrfiB^: ' a gambler,' from wig^ * dice ;' ^mPuc},: * a logician,'
from Tin^ ^ logic ;' WlfWoK ' a believer,' TfrfwcR: ' an atheist,'
from ^Jrf^ ^ what is :' ^^, ' a sword,' makes ^STTftra;: ' a swords-
man / \nT^ * a bow,' VTJ^: ' a bowman.' 4. Aggregates of
inanimate objects ; as, ^T^ ^ a heap of parched grain :' but
also of elephants, "^TfenR ; and of kine, VrfcF.
7^ forms similar derivations as the preceding, but is mostly
limited to attributives, which sometimes become appellatives ;
as tf?[^ * relating to the Vedas/ ff^^: ^ a Brahman who
studies or teaches them ;' Trfurfi^ * relating to war or battle/
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 319
^lilirHofi: ^ a soldier.' It is extensively used to form adjectives
relating to measures of value, quantity^ number, or time :
%f^oRoR ^ bought with, or of the value of, a Nishka ;' 'ill^filloB
or ^rrt'^tftnofi * containing, or relating to, half a drona' (a
measure of grain) ; %*5i Pri oh ' bought with, or of the value of,
twenty ;' 'STtI^ * daily' or ' lasting for a day ;' TrrftrcB ^ monthly'
or * lasting for a month ;' ttrfw^ ' lasting for two nights ;'
oRTfcJofi ' continuing for a time.^ Some terms of philosophy
are also formed with it ; as, ^nf^fTSfi, ^rrfv^ftfrloB, ^rwirfw^,
relating to that which is celestial, elemental, or spiritual. It
also forms nouns of aggregation ; as, %^: ^ a field,' "3t<lW ' a
number of fields.'
^tT, like the two preceding, supplies ^ofi for the termination
of similar nouns, but it does not require the Vriddhi change
of the vowel ; as, tt^ ^ a jar,' tHtcF ^ what is placed in a jar ;'
fft * a boat,' HtP^cR ' who or w^hat goes in a boat, relating or
belonging to it ;' '^fSv^ ' who sells,' fr^rf^rsR ' who buys,' "gnrf^"-
^n^«+: ' a dealer,' ^ a tradesman ; ' "^nr ^ a hundred,' ^frrai
* worth, or bought wdth, a hundred.' It is affixed to ^ and
ifR to signify * rate of interest ;' ^#3r or Hlf^ "^Tff ^ half per
cent.' It is also a possessive affix ; as, ^555 * a staff,' ^fi!2oR
* one who bears a staff;' ^ ^ hair,' ^if^ ^ one who has much
hair ; ' ift and ^ ' a hundred,' af^^rfrrofi ' one w ho has a
hundred cows.'
THT^ is considered as an affix forming the words fxjTTT-
H^: -H^, HTlTFr^: -»T^ ^ paternal and maternal grandfather and
grandmother,' from fxr^ and irr^. "|H^ added to 1TT5 ^"^^'"^^
wq^X ' a maternal uncle ;' ^ to fir^, fxr^: ^ a paternal
uncle ;' and ^ to m^, >n^: * a brother's son.'
^ is a useful affix : it leaves ^nr, and forms, i . Patronymics
and terms of descent ; as, WF^: ' the son of Agni ;' %«TWxr:
name of Garucla, ^ the son of Vinata ;' H^ic * son of Mitrayu ;'
the final of the primitive being cut off: sometimes ^rf^ is
prefixed to the termination ; as, 0^75^: or chio^P^H^: ^ the son
of a respectable woman,' '^cjdl ; when ^htt means ^ a harlot/
320 DERIVATION.
the derivative implying * her son' is "^T^zn, being formed with
the analogous affix ^. So either of these, forms words imply-
ing ' descent' from a disfigured or a base person ; as, cRTOin or
«fiTOt: ' the son of a one-eyed man ;' ^^xft or ^t%t:: ^ the son
of a slave.' T^Tf, ' a sister,' in combination rejects its final
before ^"^ ; as, ftr^yi^C ' the son of a father's sister/ HM^^^:
' the son of a mother's sister.' 2. ^ also forms attributives
signifying ' produced in/ or ' derived from ;' *n^"q ' aquatic,'
from rR(t * a river ;' JTT%"T ' earthen,' from rr^ * the earth :' and
3 . a few appellatives ; as, from "a^: ' rice/ ^%^ ' a rice-field.'
^cjf>T is analogous to the preceding, adding oB to the termi-
nation ; as, cWc^-M* ' belonging to, or derived from, a family '/
otherwise ^fc5^. It is also added to a few words in a con-
temptuous sense ; as, ifm, ' a village,' makes in^TRi: ^ a clown ;'
•TTR ' a city,' "ttrTTT^: ' a libertine,' ^ a profligate.'
^3T is another termination alHed to the preceding ; differing
from ^ofi only in being restricted to certain words ; as, "g^,
' a man,' in particular acceptations ; as, 'i^'qift W^l ' a killing
of men ;' t^^^th ^h^: * an assemblage of men / ift^ift f^^fiTt:
^ mortal or human change / tfi^^i^: -xfl" -t^ ' done by a man' or
' human being.'
?Tr, leaving "% forms a few feminine nouns that signify
^ striking in sport / as, f^i<KT * quarter-staff/ and ^FT ' boxing,'
from ^?J5 * a staff,' ?|f? ' the fist :' also some attributives ; as,
ifft ' all,' ^ ' fit or good for all.'
TRT, leaving ij, forms words implying ^ descent ;' as, %iin ' a
demon,' ' a son of Diti ;' "^JTif^: ' an j^ditya,' * son of Aditi /
cJli^cq: ' a descendant of Kuru.' It is added to trfw, when
preceded by a noun ; as, TrnrTTTm: * son or descendant of
Tnrnrfir ;' and to words signifying ^ an artisan ;' as, irgTR, ' a
weaver,' makes TrngTRj: ^ a weaver's progeny :' it also forms
appellatives ; as, "qft^ makes mfl^M^: ' an assistant at an
assembly.'
H7^ forms feminine nouns signifying, i . Aggregation ; ^mai
* a number of villages / WTin * a number of men / JMrfi ' a
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 321
herd of elephants :' 2. Abstract property ; ^WT ^ womanhood/
TftiTT ' cowhood/ tr^TTT * childhood.' It is also added pleonas-
tically to ^^ ; as, ^^ril * a divinity.'
^ is added to some words to denote ' time ;' as, ty^^ ' of
last year ;' MuHj^ ' of the year before last ;' f^TT^ * of a long
time ago : ' also to "^ substituted for "^"^^ t^ * new :' the
latter takes TirR in the same sense, "?nr?r, and, as above,
7T^ is added to terms of place to form attributives ; ^^T^WTTT
' produced in the south/ ' a native of the south/ &c. : so
"qT^JTRT, ifil^ftii, ' produced in the west, east,' &c.
W^iT forms feminine appellatives after the prepositions ^rfv
and TT ; as, ''J^f^RjoM ' an acclivity ;' TtnT^FT ' land, the foot of
a mountain.'
WJ is affixed to indeclinables to form attributives implying
* production / as, '^^ ' produced where ;' W^m ' born or pro-
duced there / ^m * born or produced here :' with w^n, ' toge-
ther,* it forms ^nn?i: * a minister.'
^ is added to jft, ' a cow/ to denote * multitude / jft^ ' a
herd of cattle.^
Tq" forms neuter abstract nouns from any other nouns ;
ril^<llr4 ' Brahmanhood/ ^Tro?^ * childhood,' }^mt^ ' hohness.'
^"^ and ITT^"^ are added to nouns to denote ' measure of
height / "^"^^fj yi^'^^*^ ' as high as the thigh.'
^ is added to ^?f% in the sense of ' milk / sjff^dJH ' ewe's
milk.' *!^Nr and ^f^, equally anomalous affixes, and probably
obsolete words, meaning ' milk,' are similarly employed ; as,
wf^^T^ and wf%^^.
li^j and the analogous affix ^>r are added severally to ;^
and "5^ to form appellatives ; ^ijir ' produced from, or by, a
woman ;' t^% ' produced of, or by, a man.' In the neuter
gender they may be abstract nouns ; ^§^ ' womanhood,' iqf#
' manhood.'
"gr^TT^ forms attributives from nouns in the sense of ' infe-
riority / as, fW^^^T^: ^ an indifferent physician :' compounded
T t
DERIVATION.
with ^ it signifies ' quantity ;' ^^mi^i: ' abundant hair :'
^^IM^f: has a similar purport.
ftr^ and ^ are added to "firH to denote ' barrenness ;' fro-
1xr^: or fiTc^^'T: ^ barren Sesamum/ ' not bearing seed.'
T?!^ and f^f^ are affixes forming principally patronymics or
terms implying ^ descent :' the former furnishes the termina-
ton wnnr, the latter wnrfrf ; as ITF^FIW: or J||ji1 Infill: ' a
descendant of the sage T^riiJ' Analogous to them is "oifioF,
forming attributives of which the feminine takes ^, as denoted
by the sibilant : thus from aFftr^, * a country,' comes ohifl^rNH
* produced in it ;' as, ctilfM^nHH JT^ ' honey of Kapisa ;' "Sfirftr-
^rnnfl" '^JW ' a grape of the same.'
iTXT^ is added to nouns to import ^ made or consisting of ;'
as, W^JT'nT ' made or consisting of stone,' ^ stony,' ^ marble ;'
ofiTOTR"^ ^ wooden,^ ^ made of wood ;' ^tt?t^ ' earthen,' * made of
earth or clay i' it also implies * containing^ or ' abounding
with ;^ as, WWTT ^ containing food' (a dish, &c.) ; irt^^R-JT
^ containing sweetmeats' (a shop or the like) ; XTrPPniV "T?: ^ a
sacrifice abounding with clarified butter/ i. e. one in which
many oblations are offered. It also forms with jft, ' an ox/
the term jflH^:, which may mean either ' cow-dung,' or * the
nature or property of a cow.'
*rr^^ is added to words to denote ' measure,' either of
height, capacity, or number ; "STT^T^ ^ as high as the knee ;'
U^HI'^ * as much as a Prastha ;' ^^H V^ ^ five in tale ;' TTTT^TTW
* so much.'
TT is added to a few words to form, i . Attributives ; as,
^jm * a village,' i||U| ^ rural,' * rustic ;' g^ ^ the face,' H^
* principal ;' ^^ ^ punishment,' ^1(5^ * deserving punishment ;'
^a^ * respect,' ^jr^ * deserving respect / ^m ' killing,' ^Xfl * de-
serving death :' 2. Abstracts ; as, ^^ ^ a friend,' ^i^ ^ friend-
ship ;' FW * a messenger,' ^ ' mission :' ^ftjTiT, ^ a merchant,'
makes ^fiHTm ' trade :' ^ ' a thief,' makes ^ ' theft,' ' thiev-
ing.' TT is more frequently combined with other letters, as in
55^5 ^, ^^, "q^, and in^.
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.
ifoB forms a few abstract nouns : TTinT, ^a king,* makes TTrif
* kingdom ;' ifTfmfrr ^ a general,' S*iii|?f * command ;' ^^ftf^ * a
family priest,' qlCir^f4 * priesthood.'
^, leaving % forms, i. Patronymics or terms of descent ;
as, ^>Tf^ ' a proper name,' ^rrfH^rm: ' the son of Abhijit ;'
"1^ ' sprung from a god ;' ^t^ ' a native of the outer (^f^^)
country :' 2. Attributives ; as, ^XR ^ is produced in or on an
island/ #it: 3. Aggregates; as, ^R 'a field/ %T^ 'a
number of fields ;' %Z[r; ^ hair,' %^Tf ' a quantity of hair ;' "RT^:
* a noose,' xrr^rn ^ a number of snares ;' &c.
TTrT, leaving % and requiring no change of the radical vowel,
is of much more extensive application than either of the pre-
ceding : it forms a few terms of descent ; as, TTSRT: ^ a man of
the military tribe, sprung from a Raja / "^'^ ^ of a good
family :' but its chief application is to form attributives imply-
ing derivation, relation, or fitness, becoming frequently appel-
latives ; as, ^SJI * what is fit for a carriage ;' T^nr: ' a horse fit
for harness ;' liisq ' a carriage-wheel :' ^ relating to the root,
or to original price ; h;^: ' price,' H^ ' profit ;' ^il^ ' suited in
age,' TEnr, whence ^rj^: * a friend.' Of other attributives
formed with this affix are ^^ ' like,' '!^'^^ ' suitable,' xfTX^
* appropriate,' ^^ * agreeable,' \^^ ' wealthy,' ^T^JT ' chief,'
VT^ ' virtuous,' "5n^ ' relating to the people,' ' popular,' ^ cur-
rent,' T^pX ' fame,' ^T^TRT ^ famous,' ^O^i^T ^ deserving decapi-
tation,' from ^t for f^t^ and %^ * cutting.' Nouns ending
in "3" and the word jft take Guiia before "xnr ; as, ^r|j ^ a stake,'
5[^!3| ' fit for a stake' (wood ) ; tt^ ^ relating to a cow' or
^ derived from one,' t\^ ' cow's milk :' '^"^, ' a dog,' changes
the semivowel ; as, ^PiT or ^n? ^ canine :' TrrfW, * the nave of a
wheel,' makes «T«T * fit for the nave ;' and tTT^ ' the nose,' •T^
' fit for the nose,' »TO ^ a nozzle :' xf^HT, ' fame,' makes ^\\^
' famous ;' HFT ^ a part,' Hf4 ' half (at interest),' m^ ^
' half per cent.' Of the appellatives, besides those specified,
are, "irm ' a bridemaid,' from iTift ' a wife ;' V^^TT ' a milch
cow,' from v^, the same, with tt inserted ;' t^t: ' an actor,'
T t 2
324 DERIVATION.
from ^ ^ dress ;' <*4^ii4 ^ vigour/ from ^i#7r * act ;' and ^^
* thing,' ^ wealth,' from '5' ^ a tree.'
t is added to nouns to form diminutives ; "Sfi^t ^ a house,'
^^ ' a small house ;^ 1^ ' the Sami tree,' "^nfti:; ' a small
S'ami tree.'
"C^ is added to words to imply ' cause' or * origin,' if the
latter be man ; as, ^HHisvUf ' what proceeds from the same
cause ;' ^'^^^"Ccqr ' what originates with Devadatta.'
<^ is added to f^<!^, 'J?^, and fxTH, substituted for f^
* moist,' making fq^, "^^, and ftrw? to signify ' blear-eyed.^
f%T^ and f%^hr^ are added to the preposition f^f to form
attributives ; as, fVrf^, liffV^hr, ' thick,^ ^ coarse ;' also ' flat
or crooked nosed.'
^ is a useful affix : ^ always, as in the Kridanta deriva-
tives, denotes the addition of ^^. It forms attributives sig-
nifying chiefly ^ produced in' or ' from ;' as, jft^ * the hot
season,' @"^Tcfi ' growing or produced in summer ;' "3^ ^ a
camel,' "^t^oR ^ produced from a camel ;' "^^To5^ ' made by a
potter,' <^fA\A ; SHKIk^oH ^ produced in a wood,' ^ wild.' It is
also added to names of countries to signify either the place
or people ; TTTTl^rjW^: is synonymous with t^^fc5■gwt ' Pali-
bothra ;' ^TI^t: means ^ the people of Anga :' also any thing
peculiar to the country ; as, from "^^, ' Cutch,' comes chi-osichV
^^: ' a man of Cutch ;' "^rr^^ ^f^lf ^ a Cutch laugh.' It
also forms nouns of aggregation ;' as, ^^cR, from T8f'?(^ ^ an
ox,' ' a herd of oxen ;' wtR^ * a number of the descendants
of Upagu,' or ^ his family or tribe collectively.'
^*T, like the preceding, adds ^r«R, but does not change the
vowel of the primitive. It forms such attributives as Wi**,
from "^m ' order,' ' one who knows the order ;' MrV^oh * produced
in or on the road ;' ic^ch ' one who knows the road ;' M^l^oh
' produced in the forenoon :' also a few feminine nouns in
particular acceptations ; as, from tj^ for "qi^, ' a quarter,' comes
Trf^oBT ' quarter,' when succession is implied ; as, flr^i^W ^Tfjf
* he gives two and two quarters ;' fl^frniif f^^rfir ' he gives
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 325
two and two hundreds :' or when succession is not implied,
but legal proceedings are ; as, fw^fw^ ^"fein ' fined two
hundred.'
"^ also forms feminine nouns from compounds implying
* enmity between the objects;' as^ ch|chtc^r<*<*T ^ the natural
hostility of the crow and the owl.^
^T?5^ forms an attributive noun with the preposition "f^;
f^r^TTc^ ' large/ ' extensive.'
^rrsfi^ and ^TfsR are added to names of vegetable substances
to denote * a field ;' as, ^^^T^ or s^w^nf^ ^ a field of sugar-
cane.'
^T^ is added to nouns to form appellatives with the sense
of * diminutiveness' or ^ inferiority :' ifkft ' a sack,' iflilOriO ' a
small sack;' ^Klrii.: 'a young calf;' w^jOX 'a foal,' also ^a
mule ;' "^"^iTTTt: * an ox unfit for the yoke.'
^rT forms attributive nouns analogous to those formed with
TrT, as above, but in particular senses ; and the feminine
termination is ^. The words imply, i . ' Who or what goes
by means of ;' as, ^fig^ ' one who goes on a horse ;' "qfcq^: --cSt
* a cripple,' ' one who goes by means of a wheel-chair,' X|i§: ;
<|p^qfe: -ofii' ^ a traveller,^ ' one who goes along the road ;' or, as
applied to inanimate things, ^rfbrf^HB 'what comes, or is
brought, by water :' 2. 'Who or what takes by means of;' as,
vr^ ' an inflated skin,' Hfi^^^ ^ a ferryman,' ' one who takes
passengers or goods across a river on a skin ;' f^^v: or ^"^v:
' a yoke for carrying burdens by a rope at each end,' f^fv^:
or ^wfVcn: ^ a porter carrying loads by a yoke :' and 3. Con-
taining a given measure ; as, iTirf^^ ' containing two ^rhakas
of grain,' ' a field,' &c.
^gc5 is similarly applied to a few words ; as, '^T^'^: -"^ -'^
' who or what goes by being dragged.'
iBf5>T is added to ^j^, ' the S'ami tree,' to signify ' made of
its wood,^ ^iPHrii: -"e^ -l4'
xqsr forms abstract neuter nouns from a variety of words ;
as, ^ ' white,' ^IT1''4 ' whiteness ;^ l^ ' firm,' ^tI4 ' firmness ;'
326 DERIVATION.
itVT: * sweet/ »rr^ * sweetness ;' jj#: ' a blockhead,' ;^#f ^ folly ;'
^: * a thief/ ^qm ' stealing / ^: ' a thief/ #^ ' steahng /
fxT"^: ' a knave,' ^^ ' dishonesty ;' TH^m: * a Brahman/
"j^i^TW ' the nature or office of a Brahman ;' xjrigij: * the four
castes/ x^i j|$i[ ^ the duties or institution of the four castes /
XRwra ' successively/ miui^* ^ succession/ ' tradition/ If
taking the feminine gender, these nouns reject tt before ^; as,_
•?f^ ' right/ ' fit/ makes Wlf^ or ^'^ ' fitness/
^n and W( are added pleonastically to w^ * earth / so is
f^cfiiT, making ^f^"^, ipm or ^t, * earth/
Class II. Possessives,
^fr^5 leaving ^, is substituted for the terminations of a few
words ending in vowels, and added to others ending in con-
sonants, to form possessive adjectives ; as, iRT makes iTT
' who has braided hair / -gx^^ ' the breast/ "57::^ * breasted /
^irr ' sin/ w^ ' sinful / w^^ * who has haemorrhoids/ from
'SI^^; &c.
W^"^ and ^rTc5'^ are added to nouns to signify possession
or use of the object they denote, but in a depreciatory sense ;
as, TT^, ' speech/ makes 'qr^T^ or "^T^Tc? * one who speaks
much and nonsensically.'
'mfTR^ added to ^, * property,' makes ^^rfir^ -^ -f^T^t ' a
master' or ' mistress/ ' an owner of property.'
'^fnTofirT is added to :5T^ ^ a horn,' and "^r^ ' a heap/ to form
attributives ; as, ^"^=TT«R ^ horned,' «jr^Kofi ' preeminent.'
^n<5^ forms attributives of possession, with the sense of
* non-endurance / with "^ftw * cold/ "g"!!?! * warm,' and "^IT ' oiled
butter / as, "^ftTTToy ' suffering from cold,' ' freezing / TWTcJ
^ suffering from heat / prn^ ' having, but not liking, oiled
butter.' ^^, ' the heart,' forms ^^"THg ' kind-hearted.'
^ir^ forms possessive attributives from the class of words
called KTToRTf^ ; as, wrcsfiT ' a star,' riKf^hH ' starred,' ' starry ;'
^^ ' a flower,' "gf^ir ' flowered,' * flowery / ^^ * a flower/
J«r*<ri ' having flowers / t^R[? ' a part,' ^f^TT ' parted,' * di-
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES POSSESSIVES. 327
vided/ * having parts ;' fqinfii ' thirst,' fwrfiETa" * thirsty ;' 5:^
'pain/ |:f7^ * afflicted/ 'pained/ ^ 'pleasure/ ^Hnh
' happy/ ' at ease / &c.
^[rf^ forms tRfoT^T ' fruitful/ from t^ ' fruit / and "c^f^iu
' peacock-tailed/ or ^ff^ ' a peacock/ from "^ ' the tail of
that bird.' f^, ' dirt/ makes »?fc5^, or with ^?ra^, J^cTNtt
* dirty/ ' foul/ ' wicked/
^fir is affixed to nouns ending in ^ to denote possession
actual or figurative ; ^^ ' a staff/ ^f?l?^ ' one who carries a
staff/ iR ^wealth/ \lf^ 'wealthy/ ^^f 'happiness/ ^f^
' happy / f:;^ ' pain/ 5:"%^ ' sorrowful :' also to t^ in parti-
cular meanings ; '^^•T ' one who has priority/ i. e. one w^ho
has done (eaten or drank) any thing on a former occasion ;
"^inj^ oB^ ' he formerly made the mat.' ^TTif makes 'iiif^TT
* one who has partaken of a S'raddha' or ' funeral feast /
and '^X^ ' visible/ ^nlV^ ' one w ho has seen any occurrence/
' a w itness/ It is also added to certain words in ^rr or ^ ; as,
r^K^I ' a crest/ f^f^^ ' crested/ f^^ ' a peacock / WTc^ ' a
garland/ Jrrf^"?^ ' having a garland/ 'm^ ' a gardener / ^tf^
' rice/ cfH^^ ' having rice :' also to numerals connected with
age ; as, M^ Ph rf ' having the fifth (month or year) / "q^jfl' "^rr^:
' a boy in his fifth year.' Occasionally "^ is prefixed to B^iiT ;
as, Tnrfcfi"?^ ' one who suffers from disordered wind.' It forms
various feminine nouns of locality ; as, ^isfsfJCTfft ^ a pool having
the lotus :' so Trf^^ft, "^fr^t, &c. It forms various appellatives,
as above, and as '^f%rr ^ an elephant/ from ^t^T ^ his trunk.'
^<AM is affixed to a class of words termed ftj'^jf^ to form
possessives ; as, fq"53LT ^ mud/ fiTfe?5 ^ muddy / "grt^ ' the
chest/ "^Tf^H * broad-chested / IT^ ' knowledge,' ir%c5 ' wise :'
also to ^ ' froth/ ^tTc5 ' frothy :' to "ftnRTTT ' sand/ and ^tT
' gravel,' as epithets of place ; fRcfifwc55T or '5i^ft:c5T H^t: ' sandy
or gravelly soil :' also to "^r^ and other w^ords ; dfr^c^ ^ corpu-
lent/ -^fb^ ' big-beUied,' &c.
"^T?^ is added to ;^^, ' a tooth/ to form ^tj^ ' having large
or prominent teeth/
3S8 DERIVATIOX.
^ic5 is added to ^H ^ force,' and ^TW * wind/ to signify
^ impatience ;' '^c\<A * not enduring force -/ THTc^ * not bearing
wind :' the latter is also an appellative ; '^nmi ^ a gale,' ^ a
whirlwind.'
fnrfrT forms ^TfTTT"^ ^ eloquent,' ^ well spoken/ from TT^
' speech.'
1^5^ is added to Tf^ and ^T^ ; as^ Tf^TJ ^ abounding with
reeds ;' "^rTfH * abounding with young grass' (a field, a
country, &c.)
TT, as a possessive affix, is added to a class of words termed
TTRTf^, and which imply * diseased ;' as, xrrJT"7T ' itch/ xr"R«T
^ itchy ;' c?^«T ^ a worm/ "^fir*? ' affected with worms.' It also
forms irregularly rsftr^T ' moonlight,' from teW^"^ ' light.'
H is added to the words "gf^, ^^, and ^c5 ; as, Trf?^ * hav-
ing corpulence/ ^ corpulent ;' ^H ^ lousy ;' ^c5H ' wrinkled.'
TTfR is in an especial degree the affix implying possession :
the essential element is iTW or ^5 inflected as HFT, Trfl", ITIT,
or c(T^, "^t, "^ (see p. ^5). The ?T is changed to ^ afler a
final or penultimate ^ or wt, and after any consonant except a
nasal or a sibilant : it is so changed after a final or penultimate
IT; it is unchanged after any other vowel than ^ or wt, and
after a nasal or a sibilant : but there are special exceptions to
these changes : thus f^i?^ makes f3N"IT ' having something ;'
i|^^ ^ fame,' "JTSfT^T^ ^ famous ;' ^^t ' prosperity/ €5^*^^
* prosperous.' A great variety of attributives and appellatives
are formed with this affix ; as, V»T^ ' wealthy/ T."^r^ ' fla-
voured/ WRW ^ intelligent/ TftiTrT ^ having cows,' ^jf^nT?^ * hav-
ing land.' trsT^ retains its final, if meaning ' well governed,'
TlNHff) ^: ' a well governed country / but t:t'3T^ ' having a
king.' ^ of), ' water,' substitutes "gr^ «T before ir^ ; as, "^^^
' having water/ g^^T"5T ' the ocean.' The following are irre-
gularly formed with this affix : ^^^qfT^ ^ the knee' (having a
bone) ; ^'T^'^T^T the name of a king (having a country) ;
<i^Hi!=iM the name of a mountain (having salt) ; ^^IjTift ' the
river Chambal' (having a skin or hide). In their literal
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES POSSESSIVES. 329
acceptation these are regular ; as, ^rf^er^, ^'^i^, &c. In
place of wjT^, the affix in certain senses is termed TRIHT, the
initial ^ causing the elision of the final vowel of the primitive ;
as, ^r^ ' a lotus,' ^^j^ril ' a place abounding in lotuses ;' hP^^
' a buffalo/ HH^^rfl" the name of a city.
Wl is added to a few words to form attributives ; as, f^rq
* snowy;' jn^ ^excellent,' 'having merit;' ^rif 'having a
handsome form :' also ^nn ' a coin,' i. e. having an impression.
^ is added to ^Ptr ' wool,' "gi^T'J * woolly :' also to ^^ ' I,'
^r^^ ' arrogant ;' and ^H?^ ' good,' Wlk^ ' lucky :' also to cB
and "^f ; as, oRW, "^fxg ' happy,^ ' prosperous.'
t. forms attributives and appellatives after certain words ;
xn^ ' paleness,' Ml^^. ' pale ; ' J^v ' honey ,^ jt^ ' sweet,'
' honied ;' ^n ' a hole,' ^f^ ' perforated ;' "gj^ ' saline soil,'
■grR^ ' having or abounding with such soil.' ^ttt, ' a mountain,'
makes '^^jxt ' a city' (having houses as lofty as mountains) ;
and fnnT ' darkness,' TrfT^^ or wf^WT the same ; the penultimate
being changed to ^.
<^ forms attributives with various words ; ^^ ' the
shoulder,' ^fNrc5 * strong ;' ^w ' a child/ AxH(A * affectionate ;'
^TT ' a crest,' ^Tr?5 * crested ;' ^ ^ froth,' \aa ' frothy.'
'^ is added to ^^ ^ hair,' ^^ ^ having fine or abundant
hair;' in which sense it may be also "^fifT"^, %%cfi, or 4S^Nci;
as a name of Krishna, it is %^: alone. It is added to a few
other words ; as, to ^rf^ * a jewel,' and f^Tn? ' gold,' to form
'rfiu'^: ' a particular Naga ;' f^T^riR: ' one of the treasures (per-
sonified) of the god of wealth :' also to ^n&^ ' water,' which
rejects its final, ^?^^: ' the ocean.'
^c6^ forms attributives, used 'chiefly as appellatives, after
certain words ; f^WT^c5 ' crested,' f^r^T^lcJ: ' a peacock.' A
final short vowel becomes long before it ; as, ^ ' a tooth,'
<*dNc^: ' an elephant ;' oRJ^ ' culture,' "SRift^c?: ' a husbandman;'
^I^Pri ' spirit,' HHI^riT^c^: ' a distiller ;' xrft:q^ ' a court,' Trfr^i^:
' a Raja ;' Tifff * menstrual excretion,' M^oiT * a woman at
that period.' "gr^S^, ' strength,' makes "gi^^ci ' strong,'
u u
330 DERIVATION.
W»T is added to words ending with ^m ; as, TnT^ ' penance,'
lfTTf^'?r ' who practises penance/ ^ an anchorite ;' xr^T^ ^ fame/
^"^rf^"?? * famous :' also to iTRT ^ ilhision/ ^rnrrfr?^ ^ deceptive/
^>n ^ apprehension/ wrfV^ ' intelligent / ^ ' a garland/
^^ ^ having a garland / and 'w:fp^ ' sickness/ with the
final made long, ^HHMlf^H ' sick/ ^ ill.'
^ forms attributives from a class of words termed rflH 1 0^ ;
as, e^y^TrT and ^tiT^T ' hair of the body/ cJW^, ^N^, ' hairy /
ofifq ' an ape,' ohfii^i ' tawny / &c.
Class III. Degrees of Comparison : Pronominals: Numerals.
261. The affixes which form the comparative and superla-
tive degrees have already been specified, as iTt^ or im'^, and
^TT^ or fw?T, and ^ or ^F^; they are noticed here only as
belonging to the class of Taddhita affixes (see p. 74).
262. Pronouns take some of the preceding affixes, with the
same effect and signification as those already specified : thus
^rrrr is added to the possessive cases plural of ^r^ff?^ and g^T^,
making ^^T5R, '^T'^ToR, * what belongs or relates to us' or ' to
you :' also to the same cases singular, w^ith cR inserted ; as^
"cTRoF, TTJIoR, ' what relates or belongs to thee' or ' me.' "?[ is
also added to ^rw^ ; as, "»uWf{hT ^ relating or belonging to me /
and to H^ ^ you' (respectfully) ; vr^^hr ^ yours' or ' your
honour's.' Besides these, they have some peculiar to them-
selves.
^Tofi^ is sometimes substituted for the proper terminations
of foRT, "ipr, and TT^ ; as, oRoR * which,' ttoB ^ who,' ^ToR ^ that.'
Trnc^ and "STHT^ are added to the same pronouns, also to
Tjofi, to form comparisons between two or many ; as, oRjTt, "mTT,
' which of two / cRTm, "mnr, * which of many / TTiTC, "rnTT, ^ that
of two' or ' of many / ii<+HI., ^^^RTHT, * one of two' or ' of many.^
TfiT is added to fcRir , forming ofifw * how many.'
■q^ is added to several of the pronouns to imply * quan-
tity :' it leaves ^7^, as already noticed (p. 83). To these may
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES^— PRONOMINALS, &C. 331
be added fifT^, forming attributives from them ; ^Nrriv^
* having or being how many ;^ HNPd'ii * having or being so
many/
263. Nouns of number take Taddhita affixes to denote
ordinals and other modifications: some of them have been
already noticed (p. 89).
"5 is added to ^iT and its compounds, to fr^rfw and the
decimals ending in ^, to form numerals in addition to others
with which they are inflected. ^, leaving ^, causes the elision
of the final letter ; TjoRjc^'^f ^if ^ one hundred and eleven ;' f^
^ ' a hundred and twenty.'
^Z forms ordinals from cardinals for all above ten ; ii*lr^^l
* eleventh/ f^ ' twentieth,' &c. ; or those from twenty
upwards prefix im^ to "5^, making fr^rfwim, &c. (p. 90).
f^'^ added to ^Tf^, ' first/ forms the ordinal ^if^H ' first :'
it also forms terms signifying ^ relative order/ either in place,
degree, or time, with ^ttj * before/ ^i^ ' end,' and nvyirt^ * after /
as, wfTjH ^ first/ ' prior / ^^f^ilH ' subsequent / xrft?^ ' posterior.'
inr>7 added to numerals implies ' division ;' as, ^^1\^ ^T^
* wood in five pieces/ or ^ five pieces of wood.' It forms
similar derivatives with ff" and f^ in alternation with "xr^; as,
fkinr or i"^, f^TR or ^if, Hwo' or 'twofold/ 'three' or
* threefold.'
ifhr is added to f^ and f^, the latter of which changes ft
to ■^, to form ordinals ; as, fflfhT * second,' "jTft^ ^ third :'
to these, ^^, that is, ^, taking the place of the primitive ^,
is added, to imply ' division ;' as, -feirhft wrm: ' a second part,'
'a half/ -jirhft HT^: 'a third:' so '^wt tr^H 'a fourth, a
fifth,' &c. ; ordinals being in fact the same as fractionals. "TO
and ^rerr take optionally tj, making either "TO or ^1? ' a sixth/
"^STT or ^TFfT * an eighth.'
^^ is added to %, f^, and ^^^, making f^, f^, ^TO^j
* in value twdce,' * thrice/ ' four times.' ^ becomes Visarga,
and that again ^ before a sonant ; as, fi'H^ ' he eats twice.'
^m is added to "^TW and ^r^ to signify ' bought with' or
u u 2
332 DERIVATION.
worth :' ^tTiT ^ bought with a hundred ;^ ^T^ ' bought with a
thousand :' also to signify general relation to those numbers.
ofi*^ may be added to numerals not ending with ^n^ or fir
to signify ' bought with ;' M^ch ' bought with five :' the
exceptions take Z^ ; T^f^cfi ^ bought with twenty ;' -«ilHinC^rFh
' bought with forty.' It may be added to them to form deno-
minatives ; as, f^^rffT«Rt ' a book containing twenty (chapters).'
It is also added to terms of quantity, formed with T^; as,
ri l'<N t^, or with ^7 inserted, ITT^fircfi ^ bought with so much.'
eft";^ is added to numerals forming attributives to imply a sum
given, either as interest, tax, profit, or bribe ; as, xp^oRt TTSTT
' the king, who has received a tax of five ;' ^^W^ ^^^:
' Devadatta has taken five (per cent, interest) ;' &c. Deriva-
tives with other affixes are similarly employed ; as, ^fw^: l^:
' one to whom a hundred has been given,' &c.
;^ may be added to f^^frfir when preceded by a numeral or
by ^r»rt ^plus a half:' to signify ^ value;' oR is inserted; as,
flf^frr#«T ^ worth twenty-two ;' ^T«rtf^^Tfw#^ ' worth twenty
plus a half,' i. e. worth thirty.
77^ or TTr^ may be added to "^jw to signify ' being worth' or
* bought with ;' "^rfffofi or ^rw ' what is worth a hundred ;' also,
as above, * he to whom a hundred is given.'
■JtT is added to numerals ending in frT or ^n^ to signify
* value ;' r45|«*i, f^'^T^? '^Tr^t^I^j, ' bought with, or worth,
twenty,' &c.
jnnr, added to numerals, implies ' equal or equivalent to in
value ; as, f^T^g^f^cf tj^tRT ^ the butter-milk is worth two (it
is twice the value) of the barley.'
Class IV. Indeclinables,
264. A variety of indeclinable words, chiefly significant of
time or place, are formed with affixes considered as belonging
to the class of Taddhita terminations.
^ is affixed to f^m^ * what,' which is changed to ^ in the
sense of * place ;' as, igi * where.'
NOMINAL. DERIVATIVES INDECLINABLES. 333
^ _^ forms with "gr^t ^ north/ and ^tb^W ' south,' or ' on
the right/ the indecUnables ^-^jm: ' in or from the north,'
^^WfT: ^ in or from the south,' or * on the right hand/
^srftr and ^^cTrfw form adverbs of place or time with "J^, ^rvr,
and "^j considered as substitutes for "^, ^nn:, and '^mr:; as,
^, "gT^smr ' before,' * prior,' ' in front,^ ' in or on the east ;'
■^ny:, ^rvrerrrr ^ down,' ' below,' * inferior / ^n":, ^T^^n^ ^ behind,'
* after,^ ' in the west :^ the latter is also optionally ^sr^TMTTT .
TR optionally takes -Hri^-cr or ^i\h\\x[\ as, ttot:, "qrien^ ^ after,^
^ subsequent/
^STVrTT is considered as irregularly substituted for ^;^, Hhis,'
' in this time,' ^ now/
^ri%?5 is added to different pronouns to signify ^ time ;'
^IT^ ' this,^ as ^TfTft ' in this time,' ' now ;' cfiff and xrft ' when ;'
Trff * then,^ ' at that time/
^fT^ is added to "gr^i: and ^iBpiir to signify * in' or ' from ;'
TWU or ^f^HjT "^^rfiT ^ he dwells in the north' or ' in the south ;'
TWTT or ^f^prr y^lCI'Iri: ^returned from the south/ They
take ^rrf^ in the same sense ; TWnf^, ^f^^lf^.
7r»T"«^ is added to the same words ; <d rl^ill, ^ftj^iT, ' in or on
the north' or ' the south/
oR?^^^ is added to numerals and to "^ to signify ' times,'
M^hen alluding to the reiteration of an act essential to life ;
fw^t^ >J#i ' he eats twice :' so i^^*,cJH, "^ITT^r^, ■«5fg^r^*^, and
the like.
fs^ converts into indeclinables, nouns compounded with any
of the derivatives or inflexions of '^^ or H^' to be,' or "^ ' to
make,' to imply that the object is, or is made, what it was not
before. A final ^ or ^rr, except when the word is already an
indeclinable terminating with the latter, is changed to ^; ^
and "T are made long ; and ^ is changed to ^ ; as, ^Lufl^ri
* made black,' ^ blackened ;' Sj^lohOPrt ' he makes white' or
* whitens ;' fflMl*|riH^: ^the day has become evening ;' ^tvRfif
'he becomes pure;' ^^^^^ 'becoming eloquent;' *n5f^>Jrrr
334 DERIVATION.
* become a mother.' 'ST^^, ^^^ , and ^^^ drop their finals ;
W^E^I?C?!f ' making sore ;' TJiTJftwnr ^ he will become mad ;'
T^TllfhClPd ' he looks upwards.'
"^T^^ is an affix similar to the preceding, attaching ^ to the
end of a word joined to the derivatives or inflections of the
verb ofi * to make -/ as, F:^T«IR&frf ^ he pains' or * distresses ;'
^^^TSR^dfw ' he makes happy ;' ftnrradfw * he pleases :' also
after reiterated words expressing inarticulate sound ; TfZ^ZT-
<4iCirri ' he makes the sound pa^ pat' :' also after particular
words used in the sense of ' ploughing ;' ffTrhrr or riril^lchOfrt
* he ploughs (a field) twice or thrice ;' ^^lohClPri ^ he ploughs
(a field) back again ;' ^hTTspfrffT ' he ploughs (a field) with the
seed,' ' he drill- sows it.'
fTftr is substituted for the terminations of the instrumental
and ablative cases ; the former implying * cause :' ^It^tt: ^ by,
or on account of, behaviour ;' "fWiT: ^ by or on account of, its
rotundity ;' a3"nnf: ' from the village ;' wrf^t ' from the first ;'
*TWrTt ' from the middle :' also as implying ' descent ;' "sfWcT:
'^^W* ' Pradyumna was descended from Krishna.' It is added
to the names of diseases, to imply their removal ;' if Tr^rf^cRTrT:
"oK^ ' make him (free) from flux.' It is considered to represent
the genitive case in such sentences as ^^T ^^HiflsHT^T ^ the
gods were (on the side) of Arjuna.'
Trf^cJ, which, like the former, leaves im, is added to pro-
nouns and pronominals in the sense of the ablative and loca-
tive cases : Wrf"^ or ^cT^ * hence' or * here ;' HK^^ ' thence,'
' therefrom,' also ' therefore' or ' there ;' Trtf^ ' whence,'
' wherefrom,' ^ wherefore,' ' where ;' ^"rfWrt^ * here and there/
' every where.' f^.^^ before an affix beginning with IT or "^
becomes "^ ; "^Tnr ' whence,' * wherefrom/ or ' wherefore/
' when ;' ^"tw^, fV^THT , ' every where ; ' "^H^Tinr ' on both
sides :' so ^HW^ ' on both sides / ^qfriT^ ^ all around ;' ^fTHr
' in many places' or ' ways.'
^c^ is affixed to pronouns and pronominals in the sense of
NOMINAL DERIVATIVES INDECLINABLES. 335
* locality ;' as, "JW ' where,' tc^ ' where,' K^ ' there/ ^"t^
' every where/ ^ is substituted for TTfnr ; as, ^l^ ' in this
place,' ^ here.'
^ is added to certain words wdth the sense of the accusa-
tive or locative case : \^^\ '^^ ^ I salute the gods ;' jt^WWT ^
^ I delight in the "men ;' ^jJ^i ^ in many ways.'
^qicjy is affixed to pronouns and pronominals to denote
' manner,' ' kind ;' as, ^r^ ^ as,' ^ in what manner ;' w^ ^ so,'
* thus/ ' in this manner ;' cR^T ^ how.'
^ is added to ^H and fcfi^, substituting severally ^ and
ofi in the same acceptation : ![r^H * thus/ "SR^ ^ how.'
^T is added to pronouns and pronominals to imply ^ time ;'
as, "ir^ ' at what time,' ' when ;' K^ ^ at that time/ ' then ;'
cB^ ' when ;' ^^oR^t * once ;' ^^^\ ' at another time ;' ^%^
' always :' also ^ being substituted for Tl"t» ^l^.
• ^T?ftH is added to ^?^ and w^ to signify ^ time :' the initials
of the primitives only are retained ; ^;^T^'hT ^ now/ ^ at this
time ;' lT^T?ft»T ' then/ ' at that time.'
VT is affixed to numerals to imply ' numeration / as, ^oPH
^ once,' * one/ ^ singly ;' "%VT or ^VT ^ twice/ ^ twofold / f^\|T
or ^T ' thrice,' ^ threefold / XT^VT ' five times' or ^ fivefold' or
* five parts / as, jr^ trf^ "T^VT "^ ' make one heap into five.'
The analogous affix vg^r is added to % and f^, making ^V»^,
SvT, ' twofold,' ' threefold.' ^5^ niay be added to ^oR,
making ^cjjiqj^.
rfT is added to the preposition f^, making fV?TT * without/
'except/ and ^n^ to the negative rji^, ";iT"nTr ' manifold/ 'various/
fTH and ftFrffTc^ are added to Tq, substituted for "^H;
as, T^tIt or TqftFTfT ' up,' ' above.'
cnr affixed to words forms indeclinables implying * resem-
blance in act / as, 'gri'41 ^NH^ ^like a Brahman / "^f^^rif ' like
a Kshetriya :' also denoting ' fitness/ ' suitableness / TTiTTfr
' fit for, or worthy of, a king :' also if the preceding word
have the sense of the genitive or locative case ; H^O"^ * as in
Mathura / ^^W^IT ' like ( the figure of) Devadatta.'
SS6 COMPOUND WORDS.
^n*' is added to ^T^tT and ^ to imply ' degree ;' "^WW ' ^
little ;' "W^: ' much;,' ' abundantly,^ ^ for the most part :' also
to numerals and terms of measure^ to denote ^ successive
order ;' f^: ^ two and two ;' t{XW^\ ' Masha by Masha.'
^fiff is added to words like fx^ to signify a thing's becoming
what it was not before, in combination with the same verbs ;
also with verbs signifying ^ production ;' as, H^TOTrT "Sfi^rfw ' he
reduces to ashes ;^ "^r^^rfnT^Tf^ ^n^RJW ' the weapon is produced
as fire,* or ^ is in a blaze ;' also wfTrHTT^rfw ^ is fire.' It also
means ^ dependence ;' as, TIiT^Tgwfw rrk ' the country becomes
dependent wholly on the king :' or ' appropriation ;' as, ^T«f
f^inrnr ohCiPri ' he makes the gift wholly the property of the
Brahmans.
CHAPTER VII.
COMPOUND WORDS.
^Q5. The composition of words prevails in Sanskrit to an
extent that much exceeds its occurrence in any other language.
It is termed in original grammars, Samasa ^EHTRr:.
^QQ. When a greater or lesser number of words are com-
bined, so as to form one new term, the characteristic signs of
case and number are, with occasional exceptions, rejected by
all the members of the compound except the last.
267.* Compound words are arranged, agreeably to the
nature of this construction, under four classes.
1. The first class consists of substantive nouns simply
aggregated under one head, which, if not compounded, would
be Held together by the intervention of a copulative ; as,
* Rama and Lakshmana,' TX^^ "FJ^gFWn"^, make, when united,
UHc^i^^. This is termed Dwandwa, * doubling' or ^ aggre-
gation.'
2. The second class, termed Tatpurusha, is not confined to
substantives, but combines nominal and verbal derivatives in
COMPOUND WORDS. 337
different relations ; such as that of the object and the act, as
■^WT^'T: ^ dependence upon Krishna ;' that of the object and
the agent, as jyTTTTTTT ^ arrived at the village ;^ or that of the
attribute and the object, as rfic^flr^c^ ' a blue lotus/ It also
comprises adjectives, participles, and particles aggregated, so
as to form compound attributives or appellatives ; as, otiuioi^
^ black and white ;' cFrTTo^ ' done and not done ;' ^rfwu^
* surpassing the king.' The two last are, however, considered
as forming either a subdivision of this class, or a separate
class termed Karmma-dharaya, gH^Amk^: ; and so is the com-
bination of a numeral with a noun ; which subdivision is
termed fl'n: . Of these terms, Tatpurusha, ^ the man of him,'
refers to a word that commonly exemplifies this kind of com-
pound, or o^fligiCM: * the king's man.' Karmma-dharaya implies
^ that which comprehends (dharayati) the object (karmma).'
Dwigu is a technical word derived from Dwi * two.'
3. The third class of compounds, called ^f^f^, is the
association of any given number of terms, simple or com-
pound, to form an epithet to a noun, of which the word Bahu-
vrihi furnishes an example : as separated, it means ' much
rice ;' as compounded, ^ that which has much rice,' a field
or the hke. In compounds of this class, the last member,
whatever its original gender, takes that of the noun with
which it is connected ; as, t^^nlxWT^: ' (a man) who has
a beautiful wife.' These epithets are sometimes used abso-
lutely as appellatives ; as, y<(jO«hlH|: ' having eyes like the
lotus ;' a name of Vishnu. As an instance of the multipli-
cation of terms in a Bahuvrihi compound, we may take «T^r«B-
riH^I^M|j^^1c(ah: ' (a place) of which the waters were sanctified
by the bathing of the daughter of Janaka.'
4. The last class is termed Avyayi-bhava, ^oq^lni^^:, being the
construction of indeclinable or adverbial compounds (A\yaya),
consisting for the most part of a preposition and the noun
governed by it in the objective case neuter, as "^goj^if, and
requiring a verb or verbal derivative, expressed or understood,
X x
838 COMPOUND WORDS.
to complete the sense ; as, "^xT'^'Btif fw^fcT * he stays near to
Krishna ;' •grr'^WT^'T: * Arjuna (is) near to Krishna.'
268. In forming these several kinds of compounds, various
peculiarities occur, the most important of which we shall
specify under their respective heads.
SECTION I.
Dwandwa Compounds,
269. When words are combined in this form of compound,
the final usually takes the sign of the dual number where
there are two objects^, as ^Hl^Q ' Vishnu and Siva ;' and that
of the plural if there are more than two, as ^JTTOTtjft^:
* desire, virtue, wealth, liberation' (the four objects of human
existence).
270. The following words, when compounded, terminate
in the neuter singular : terms for parts of the body, as xnirrnTRf
' the hand and foot :' players on musical instruments, iri^r^-ohm-
mf^cft ' players on different kinds of drums :' component parts
of an army, Tf^oRT'^rft^ ' the chariots and horse :' members of
different trades, t*T«Fff^'^ ' a washerman and weaver :^ specific
terms not signifying living things, \irHi^|tsRrc*^ ^ fried grain and
barley water :' names of small insects, "^oRTfc?^ ' flies and
lice :' names of animals, natural enemies, ^f^H^H ' the snake
and ichneumon :' a class of words beginning with tt^t^ * the
cow and horse :' names of rivers and countries, if in different
genders, <*^'^^^<4 ^ Kuru and Kurukshetra ;' but if the gen-
ders are the same, then they vary the number, as T^M^^^
' the Ganges and Yamuna.^ Some words take either form,
when more than one is meant, as JT^'J'T'ftV or 5r^'^'T?ftVt
^ Plaksha and Nyagrodha trees ;' but it is confined to the
dual to signify a Plaksha and a Nyagrodha tree; "'jtr^t or
^§HR ' first and last ; ^STVTlr^ or ^Pjdwt ^ upper and lower,'
' many or one of each.' Qualities, if contrariety be meant.
DWANDWA COMPOUNDS. 339
take either form, ^firilm) or "5[fhftW ' cold and hot/ A com-
pounded word preceded by a definite number takes only the
first form, as ^^T^nfVffT: ' ten teeth and lips i' but if the number
is indefinite, and the numeral is converted into an attributive
which is not part of the compound, the form is optional, "^i^^*
^^'ifV^ or TT^^ ^nftFT: ' about ten teeth and lips.'
271. Various rules are given for the order in which the
words are to be arranged in Dwandwa compounds ; but they
are liable to many exceptions. Thus in general the shortest
term should come first, as ^^i^^i^ ' S'iva and Vishnu :' so
should words ending in ^ or "g", as ^iTf $, or ij^P^iun ^ teacher
and pupil.^ Names of seasons and asterisms, if of equal
length, follow the natural order, as ^JT^fi^lf^K^^fii: ' winter,
^ dewy season, spring ;' but i/)'+m^»d^ ^ summer and spring,^
the first being the shorter. When names of castes or persons
come together, the precedence is to be given to the most
worthy or the senior ; l^i^iii Bj Q^ M P^ ^ ^jj* i: ^ the Brahman,
Kshatriya, Vaisya, and S'lidra ;^ ^fvfTOlf^ ^ Yudhishthira
and Arjuna. "m is sometimes interposed, as f^TWHi^^fl * Mitra
and Varuiia.
272!. In some compounds different terms are occasionally
substituted for the first member ; as, "STH or ^ for TTFTr^ ' a
wife,' in ^T«nft or ^rqift ^ wife and husband ; VJ^ for f^^ in
iirm^fv^cm ^ heaven and earth :' so ^TRPTJft, ^KIHf^, &c. ^m^l
is substituted for T^^ in <jm^|^* ' the dawn and the sun ;'
and w^ repeated makes ^rsnr , as ^n^ft^l ^ one and another,'
^ one another ;^ and xit, MUM^ ' mutually' or ' in succession.'
273. Single words have sometimes the force of Dwandwa
compounds : thus TT'f) means ^ the two Ramas ;' Tjmx ' the
three Ramas,' who were Parasurama, Ramachandra, and Bala-
rama. A masculine noun in the dual comprises the feminine :
thus "^^ is put for ^ and ^^, or * the gander and the goose :'
so miT^ means * sister and brother ;' "j^ ' daughter and son ;'
fcTiT^, ^ parents,' may be used for HTrilPMHO ' mother and
father ;^ and "s^^l^, ' parehts-in-law,' for "sg^'g^a.
X X a
340 COMPOUND WORDS.
SECTION II.
Tatpurusha Compounds,
274. This class includes, as above remarked, three sub-
divisions ; to the first of which the term Tatpurusha may be
for the present restricted. In compounds of this order, the
words stand in a relation to each other which would require,
if they were separated, the use of different cases ; the one
exercising a syntactical government over the other, and not
being connected, as in the preceding class, by copulatives
understood, nor, as in the subdivision Karmmadharaya, by
simple concordance. The words thus formed are mostly
attributives and appellatives.
275. The following are arranged in the order of the cases.
a. Words in the sense of the objective case are mostly
compounded with the past participle as the governing member ;
as, ^IHUIH ^ one who has reached the village -^ g:ismfhf ^ one
who has overcome pain ;' if^T^^: ^ a fool,' * one who lies in
his bed : in the literal sense it is not compounded ; ^^|HI^<J:
' mounted or lying on the couch.' They may also be com-
pounded with verbal derivative nouns denoting the agent ; as,
<**HchK: ^ a potter ;' Tng^TRt ' a weaver.'
b. With the instrumental case nouns as well as partici-
ples are combined ; as, ^^cTH^ ^ a piece cut by the nip-
pers ; ' vi*^lQ: ' wealth acquired by grain ; ' fi^fj^^^i: ' ( a
son) like his father ;' »TWP[# ^ prior by a month ;' ^TT^FS^:
* dispute by or with words ;' ^^£ft^: ^ rice sprinkled by
curds,' ' dressed with them ;' JJiHl»4 * rice mixed with sugar :'
also ^sfV^ ' killed by a snake ;' ^rdH^^ ^ cut by a sickle ;'
cMchMXT ^ to be drunk by a crow,' as chiohM^l "JT^ ' a river with
muddy water, fit only for a crow's beverage.' In some com-
binations the third case is retained ; as, wtinrr^ ^ done by
force ;' g«r^»f: * younger by a male' (having an elder brother) ;
iT5!FT^^ ' a goddess mentally,' a proper name ; ifnfWwiM**: ' a
TATPURUSHA COMPOUNDS. 341
penitent, by his braided locks/ Where these and similar
combinations with the third or any other case retaining its
inflexion are used as appellatives, they may be admitted to be
compound terms ; but where the latter member is a participle
or adjective, w^hich qualified by the preceding term forms an
attributive declinable in the three genders, it must be regarded
as constituting an exception to composition ; ^ffinrr «JnT, for
instance, cannot be considered as properly a compound term.
c. Compounds are formed with words in the sense of the
dative case, as expressed not so much by the sign ' to,^ as by
that of ^ for' or ' on account of ;' as, ^5^T^ * timber for a
stake :' this sense is also conveyed by ^r§, with which words in
the dative case form attributives ; as, %1TT^: W^Tt, fw^lHI ^^MC,
fi'^TlW '^:^\ ^ broth, gruel, or milk, for, or on account of, the
Brahman.' The grammatical terms m.^i|r{ and ^STTW^xj^ are
compounds of this class retaining the sign of the case.
d. Attributives are formed with participles preceded by
nouns having the sense of the ablative case ; as, ^r^TWff
^ removed from happiness,' ^ unhappy ;' ^^^^TTftrrf * fallen from
heaven.' Composition does not take place after words signi-
fying ^ near,^ ' far,' ^ a little,' or ^^ in the ablative case ; as,
^rf^tT^lT^fr ' brought from near ;' FTT^FTTT ' come from afar ;'
ixTlofiirij^ ' loosed from a little ;^ ^^^TrRTW ' obtained from
penance ;' &c.
e. There are many compound terms, in which the first
word has the sense of the genitive case ; as, TT^nr^: ^ the
king's man ;' ^rra^ ' a grove of Mango trees ;' ^UT^^aR: ^ a
cutter of wood,^ i. e. a hatchet ; ^f^HI^* ' dulness of intellect.^
Verbal derivatives terminating in w or ^r^, and denoting the
agent, do not form compounds with words in the sense of the'
sixth case, with the exception of words belonging to the class
^rnnfiTf^ ; as, ^^^rrsnK ' a worshipper of the gods ;' WT^ninT'sni:
* a reverencer of the Brahmans ;' wtr ' a lord of the earth.' If
the agent is not meant, composition may take place ; as,
^^nf^pRT ' eating of the sugar-cane :' also if play or profession
342 COMPOUXD WORDS.
be intended ; as, xrEtwf^cRT ' who breaks the flowers (in sport) ;'
(jflc^^ch: * a cleaner of teeth,' ' a dentist.* The sign of the
sixth case is retained in these compounds ; f^'^^fff: ^ lord of
heaven/ ' Indra ;' ^t^wTit: * lord of speech,' a name of Vri-
haspati,' the preceptor of the gods ;' f^^^^Pfft * the servant of
heaven,' a proper name.
/*. Compounds in which the first member has the sense of
the locative case are formed with "^ft^iJ and other words ; as,
^sr^i^n^: ' a gambler,' * one skilled in dice ;' ^II^MHli^ri: ^ one
learned in the S'astras ;' cRWoirsfn^ ' one skilled in work,' ' an
artisan ;' ^HIU^^J ' one dependent on, or trusting in, God ;'
•^HlriMaiMi ^ what is dried in the sun ;' ^ic«5lM^ ' what is boiled
in a pot ;' HI4^«(I(1 ' born or produced in a month ;' W^^
^ done there,' ' in that place ;' Tjtl^^fT * done in the forenoon.'
Terms of ridicule are formed in this manner ; as, rilQ <*!<*: ' a
crow at a holy pool,' i. e. a man out of his place ; <*MH^^: ^ a
frog in a well,' i. e. a man ignorant of the world. In this
sense it is also usual to form compounds retaining the sign of
the case ; JJ^sip * a hero in his house,' ' a cot-quean ;' m^ch^ic^:
'one dexterous in his dish,' 'a gourmand.' Various nouns
ending with ^ or a consonant, and forming appellatives or
proper names, retain the sign of the seventh case ; as, w%t?T:
' who sports in a clump of grass,' ' an elephant ;' ^^^x: ' who
goes in the sky,' ' a deity ;' <+iiMi|: ' who whispers in the ear,'
' a spy,' ' an informer ;' ^i^^fii: ' who sleeps in water,' ' a
fish ;' ^fvf^: ' the firm in battle,' ' the elder of the PanAus :'
so 7ft, ' a cow,' makes nf^llR: ' firm in cattle,' a proper name .
Some words take both forms, hPm^IU: or HTohfiR: ' what has
strength in its skin,' * a kind of deer ;' TRTf^W or ^Cl»{ ' born
in a lake,' * a lotus ;' ^^ or f^f%^^ * who resides in heaven,'
* a deity.'
g. Certain words which imply the part of any thing, when
compounded with the word signifying that whole of which
it is a part, are prefixed to it ; as, ^^RHT: * the front of the
body ;' ^SMi:<*m: ' the back of the body.' If it is a part of a
KARMMADHARAYA COMPOUNDS. 343
part only, composition does not take place ; as, tr|f TfiH: ctm?^
' the front of the navel of a body/ ^?|f in the neuter gender,
but dropping the sign, is also prefixed ; as, -^njpMmr^^ ^ a half
of the pepper :' but not if used in the masculine ; as, JETTHTt:
' half a village.' Fractional numbers may be placed first or last ;
as, fk^lffril^ or fi'ril^fHHir ' half of the alms ;' JTHf and ^T^
governing the objective case, may take either form ; as, irrff-
M\ n^ <*: or ^ir^chiuiw: ^ a man who has obtained a livelihood :'
so ^^TRWrfHTafi: or »iir«ichin^:.
Karmmadhdraya Tatpurusha Compounds.
276. Compounds of the Karmmadharaya division of Tat-
purusha do not require that the members of which they
consist should exercise any government the one over the other ;
they are connected together by implied, though not expressed
concordance, or by copulatives understood.
a. The most numerous series of Karmmadharaya com-
pounds is that in which the attribute is combined with the
object ; as, ^ftc5H"TO ' a blue lotus ;' ^iW^: ' a black snake \'
v^^TUW* ' a great king ;' frpRFtr ^ a dear wife ;' t^t^;:^:
* the northern Kurus' (a country) ; ^\{^i\\ ' the seven Rishis,^
' the constellation of the Great Bear.^
b. Compounds of this class may consist of attributives
only ; as, ■<+.Bi!l3J^ ' black and white ;' ^nTRfcTW ' anointed
after being bathed ;' '^^TOTT * equally white ;' ^ftTiflUjl ^ warm
enough to be eaten ;^ ^^^T^ ' a httle red :' or of substantives
and attributives forming attributives to a third term ; as,
yn^AIIH ' black as a cloud ;' uf^l^H ' made as a heap ;' MPjl^riHri
' considered as a Pan&it ;' PhvitIjih ' gone to death,' ' de-
ceased;' &c.
c. When the sense of the term is complete in itself, com-
bining the object and the attribute, the latter usually precedes
the former, as in the instances "fftcTtrXTFJ, &c. When it forms
an attribute to a third term, the adjective or participle is
usually placed last, as in TTf^T^rif and the hke : but there are
344 COMPOUND WORDS.
many varieties in this respect. Words denoting ' excellence,'
or used metaphorically for that purpose, are placed after the
object ; as, '!JxrY?^TTofi: ' an excellent king ;' TftTrT^ofiT ' a
capital cow ;' "J^^'^^mr: or "g^^ftr^t ^ a man-tiger,' ' a man-
lion,' i. e. a superior man. "Q'§ and other terms implying
'relative position' or 'merit' precede the object; ^§M^m: *a
preceding or superior man ;' WtTT^T^: ' a subsequent or infe-
rior man ;' Jfawg^: ^ a middle man,^ ' an impartial one,' or
' a middling man,' ' one of indifferent character :' so '^tt, ' a
hero,' forms "^hrg^: ^ a heroic man.' "ijt, forming an attri-
butive of time, is placed after a participle ; ^xi't ' formerly
seen ;' ^JTPjS ' formerly been.' Terms of depreciation require
the object to be placed first ; as, ^^l<*i.ilK<^4f^: ' a very bad
grammarian :' except when compounded with VJ^ or WITcli ;
as, XTRTTTf^TT: ' a vile barber ;' ^^4i|qh^,c^ic5: ' a bad potter.^
fsTT, also used in a depreciatory sense, precedes the object;
as, foRUiTT ^ what sort of a king is this,' ift rf iy^?A THTTt ' who
does not protect his subjects.' cKTR ^ young,' or ' a boy/
precedes certain terms ; as, "^hhjjh: ' a gentle boy ;' fTRjiJ^
' a tender girl :' so it does when substituted for ohHiO ' a girl ;'
as, "JJTTC^nft ' a slave girl ;' **<K<sj»M<*l ' a young harlot.' '^
is placed before ^rnr , trf^W, and ^fcTcT, to form ^^»rt»r ' an
aged or infirm youth ;' ^cmPc^ri: ' a grey-haired youth ;' "g^^-
f<^: ' a wrinkled young man.' On the other hand^ V'J and
others are always last ; as, Tftv"^: ' a milch cow ;' l^Hgrfir: ' a
young elephant ;' ^pHlcfhR: ^ a little fire ;' &c.
d. In Tatpurusha compounds, of whatever class, certain
words, forming the second member of the compound, undergo
changes of termination ; T^ , that is, a final % being substi-
tuted for ^ or for '5r'«T, or added to a final ^: thus ^f^, ^a
friend,' forms fVgv^T^: ' a friend of the gods ;' Tlf^: ' night ;'
g^W^Ic^: ' a holy night ;' ^HKfzT, * the thigh/ when similitude is
implied, ^tto"^ ' a thigh like that of a deer ;' Uip^, as iTt;RU»r:
' a supreme king ;' ^"^ ' a day,' ^f^^TT^: ' a fine day ;' or
^ is sometimes substituted, as ^"tl^: ' the whole day/ or
KARMMADHABAYA COMPOUNDS. 345
** lasting for the whole day :' -"H^HH makes 9I^|^h: ' a white
stone :' "^^ becomes "^^ in such terms as jh^pI^: ' a Brahman
of Gaur.' After "g and h^t^, implying ^ baseness/ the change
is optional ; ^?f: or ^^m, fl'^T^^: or H^T^^T, ^ a low Brah-
man ;' JT^ being used ironically. Tg»T ' a dog,' preceded by
an indecHnable, takes z^ ; as, ^rfW^ ^TT^: ^ a boar sw ifter
than a dog ;' "^ffw^ ^^ ^ service worse than that of a dog :'
but not if similitude to living beings is implied ; as, H^uimi
^a dog-like man/ ^a cynic;' ^sni^, 'iron/ makes oSic*>i<4ti
* black iron / ^SR^ ' food / »?^H^: ' a kitchen.^ 7^ is added
to ift, as xnrm^: ' an excellent ox / and to ift compounded
with ^, as ^r[T^ ' half a boat ;' or with numerals, fw^
* two boats collectively/ when even combined with a Taddhita
affix, as flT'ir^^m: * what comes from two boats.' When ^ or
^cf or a negative, however, are prefixed to these words, form-
ing appellatives, the finals are unchanged ; as, ^wf%: ' a good
friend / ^ff^fif : ' an excellent friend / 'sraf^: ' not a friend,'
' an unfriend / or ^^OT &c. : so ^TT^HT , ^rfTOW*^, -«i<i»t>t^5 &c.
^^9 being the first member of a Tatpurusha compound,
becomes w^ ; as, i^^^ 'the great deity S^iva / JT^Rm: 'a
great king/ &c.
e. The following are considered by some as irregular com-
pounds of the Karmmadharaya class : "^^TR^ ' high and low /
fn^H-^ ' picked out and heaped up / ynr<*^H ' having nothing,'
' poor / ^sr^rfV^Txr ' fearless / fg^wrr^ ' the mind alone / ^ST^hr-
f^TfTT ^ drinking after eating.' Derivatives of "^ ' to do,' com-
bined with '^ ' I / as, '^^r:, ^^ff:, ' self-sufficiency,'
' egotism / also SH^'Mflohl, W^J^^^T, ' contending to be first^
or * foremost.' Compounds with ^rf^ ^ come / as, ijf^^Tlin
' come and w elcome / ^f^^Tf%f»T^ ^ come and trade / ^^ff-
^Tftfrfw^fiT * go and leave trade :' also with ^rff , * abandon,' in
particular acceptations ; as, wf^^W* ^ ^^^ ^^^ cries. Leave
the clump of grass.' These and others of a like anomalous
character very rarely occur.
Yy
346 COMPOUND WORDS.
Dvngu Tatpurusha Compounds with Numerals.
277. Compounds are formed with numerals to signify
attributes of weight, measure, or number ; as, M^ohMic4 ^ mea-
sured by five cups ; ^ M^ctiqio^: ^Cl^l^i: ' butter offered at
sacrifice to the extent of five cups ;' ^ST^n ^^^ ^ gold of the
value of eight oxen ;' STW*' ^ of the measure of two inches.'
a. Aggregates of any given number of things are formed in
the same manner, when the final takes either the neuter
gender or the feminine, with the termination ^; as, fw^^
^ three worlds ;' f^ciift^ the same ; M"5^t| ^ the four ages ;'
M=diw|i4) ' a work in five chapters ;' f^3^ or fw^*^ ^ a col-
lection of three bedsteads.'
b. The changes to which finals are subjected, as enumerated
above, are of course applicable here ; as, f^THT ' three kings
collectively ;' v^wvi ' five cows ;' f^f;wm ^ three friends ;' XT^^TT^
* a term of three nights ;' ^■jbij'^ ^ a meeting of four roads ;^
'^gHR ^ an assemblage of eight boats.'
c. These same compounds may be used as possessive attri-
butives ; as, "fe^TR ^ who or what has three boats ;' xf^rj^ ^ who
or what has three cows '' flTT^ ^ what lasts for two nights.'
d. The combinations of cardinal numbers to form multiples
are considered to be compound Tatpurusha terms ; as, ^cfiT^^r,
TT^Rf^fff, &c.
Tatpurusha Compounds with Particles and Prepositions.
278. Besides the two subdivisions usually specified, the
class of Tatpurusha compounds comprises a number of words
formed with nominal or verbal derivatives, preceded by parti-
cles and prepositions, which may be conveniently separated
from those compounds which are formed with nouns alone.
a. Compound attributives and appellatives are formed with
negatives prefixed to nouns ; as, ^r^'RTTir: or HSUtMHi: ' a man
not a Brahman ;' "^^^^^x ^ an animal not a horse :' ^sr^W ' who
or what is not ;' ^smw * untrue,' Hl^f4l ' who are not untrue,'
TATPURUSHA COMPOUNDS WITH PARTICLES, &C. 347
' the Aswini Kumaras :' rp^: ^ what has not space/ ' a finger
nail :* ^m: or "JTT: * what does not go/ * a mountain or ' tree ;'
tT-^STsfi ^ what does not depart/ tTToR: * sky :* ^T^ ' what does not
decay / 'sn^ ^ a letter of the alphabet / HHjcJ ^ a constella-
tion :' TTj^ofi ' not male/ ' neuter :' and in short, most words
to which a negative is prefixed, retaining either their literal,
or assuming some conventional, meaning.
b. The combination of the indeclinable words comprehended
under the term Gati with the verbal derivatives of the verbs
^ra or H ' to be,^ or ^ ^ to do,' is considered to form a class of
Tatpurusha compounds ; as, ^0«hl.iLi ' promising,' ^i3*W * hav-
ing promised,^ "gx^^TrT ^ promised/ &c. ; of which examples have
already been given (see p. loo). To which may be added the
following : W^^TT * having set / ^rx3[iTm ' having met / ^I^giVsr
^ having spoken to / yi:i^K^ ' having placed before / flTJ^^nr
' having disappeared / ^iHjiT^TT * having made present' or
^ visible/ Analogous compounds are formed with the deriva-
tives of oR and H, with nouns retaining the inflections of case;
as, c5^^i<*KI * having made salt ;' irrftr^ or "^ii^rT ^ having
made up the mind/ ' having determined / Tcf^T^ or "^r^
^ having placed on the breast ;' ^W^ or trTisft<*W ' having
placed in the hand,^ i. e. having married or promised to marry.
c. The following are Tatpurusha compounds with preposi-
tions : wfTRT^T * surpassing the king ;' ^sn??^ ' more than a
day ;* -^PhhIo^ ^ exceeding the necklace (in beauty) / WT5fiVfe5
' overcome by the cry of the Koil / f5T^:5CT^rr% ^ gone from
Kausambi / "qzqxqrrrr ' weary of study / UMi<iA ' over whom
the teacher has authority.' These are attributives ; as, SHPrtUift
T^ * the minister more powerful than the king / ^T^^IFtf^ficJ
inrt ^ the mind overpowered by the KoiTs song ',' &c.
279. Tatpurusha compounds, when attributives, take the
gender of the substantives with which they agree ; but when
they form appellatives, adopt for the most part the gender of
the concluding member of the compound, in which respect
Dwandwa compounds agree with them. There are, however, a
Y y 2
348 COMPOUND WORDS.
few exceptions : thus, in the latter class, ^STBJ * a horse/ and «r2^T
*a mare/ form SNHJI«li^; and 'sn^ *a day/ and zjf^^ night/
^sr^kr^t. uf^ with numerals in the sense of ' aggregation'
becomes neuter, as ffUcf ' a term of two nights / and ^STf •=(^
masculine, as gr^: ^ a period of two days i' so ^^, substituted
for SH^H is masculine, as HXflT^: ' midday / when joined with
an adjective, it may be neuter, as "JWT^ ' a lucky day.'
a. Nouns of aggregation are formed with numerals ; the
gender is either neuter or feminine, as already noticed. xrfTZfrT,
preceded by a preposition to form an appellative, is neuter ;
as, fw^ * a cross-road,' ' a by-way.'
b. TRT, preceded by a word meaning ' king,' except TJ^TT ,
and one not meaning ' man/ implying ^ an assembly,' is
neuter; as, ^t^W 'an assemblage of princes;' ^f^f^^ ^a
company of women :' but TT^nwr, T'g'ontWT. When it signi-
fies the place of assembly, it remains feminine ; as, ^"s^HT
' the hall of Indra ;' V#^>n ' a hall of justice.'
c. ^TfT ' an army,' ^nc5T * a hall,' "S^rm ' shade/ ^ * wine/
frf^ ' night,' when members of a Tatpurusha compound,
retain the feminine, or adopt the neuter gender ; as, ^lljvfl -tf
' an army of heroes ;' Tft^fTT^JT -75 ' a cow-house ;' ^^^^ -'^
* the shade of a tree / ^^^trtt -t ^ barley wine/ i. e. beer.
SECTION III.
Bahuvrihi Compounds,
280. Two or more words, or two or more compound terms,
may be put together to form the attribute or epithet of an
object. There is no limit to the component members of such
a compound, and the final may be a noun of any gender ; but
it loses its own distinctive mark, as it takes, hke all attribu-
tives, the gender of the word to which it is related : thus "3^,
* water,' makes TTirftcRt »TTO: ' a village at which the water has
come ;' WTsrl^T ^RcJ^ ' a pitcher which has been filled ;'
MI*ri<"5R ^Rt^ * a pool with water in it.' ^TT'siT, * a wife/ may
BAHUVRIHI COMPOUNDS. 349
become masculine ; as, "C^^r^Tnft H ^m: ' a man who has a
handsome wife :' Tpt ' a cow,' masculine or neuter ; as, f^^pr:
"5^: a man ' who has a brindled cow ;' f^efW^ i^ a field * in
which such a cow is feeding/ Compounds of this class may
be formed with particles ; as, ^T^: 'srjWT ' a childless (man or
woman) ;' TTxrtfV Y^: a tree ^ of which the leaves are fallen ;'
^rf^cT^U ^: a cow ' in whom there is milk :' also with nume-
rals ; as, "^xrf^ ' near to twenty,' &c. Nouns implying
' intermediate space' are also compounds of this class, the
substantive f^'5^, ' quarter,' being either expressed or under-
stood ; as, ^fw^ijr^ ^ the south-east,' Mpja^TlriU * the north-west.'
«. In general the order of the words of which a Bahuvrihi
compound consists places the term indicating the principal
subject of attribution, and which will be the substantive, last ;
as in the preceding instances. When the principal term
retains the sign of the case, it may be put first ; as, 4<!^chlc^:
^ who is black in the throat,' S'iva : otherwise, cKr?5oR!^:. Pro-
nominals and numerals are usually put first ; as, ^§"%(T ^ who
is white all over ;' f^W^ * what is white in two places :' when
they are combined, the numeral precedes ; as, spi ' having
other two.' Participles are usually put first ; as, ^MfT^Tjg ' one
by whom what was to be done has been done ;' oRJoR^ ^ one
who has made the mat ;' trhft^ ' by whom water has been
drunk :' but not always, when connected with words implying
* species' or ' time,' or the term "^^ ; as, ^TT^^^rny ^ by whom
venison has been eaten ;' iTRnrrrT * produced in a month ;'
?r^»rr?T * produced easily.' In the compound signifying ^ one
(a Brahman) by whom a domestic fire is maintained,' the par-
ticiple takes either place ; as, ^iH^hiOh: or ^spi^rrff Tt:. Forms
implying ^ using a weapon' place the participle last ; as,
sh^^h: '(a soldier) lifting up a sword (to strike):' but
fM'Jrilftrt ' one who has his sword sheathed.'
b. As an epithet is commonly formed by a feminine sub-
stantive, preceded by its adjective, and the former being
changed according to the gender of the new term to which
350 COMPOUND WORDS.
it is attached, it becomes a question what is to be done with
the latter : thus, for instance, f%wr 'ft: being converted to an
epithet, in becomes tj, and may be mascuHne, it:, as the
epithet of a man having cattle. In 'that case is f^Wl to
remain feminine ? So ^xj"^7ft HfSt becoming an attribute of a
man ' having' a handsome wife, and HT^ accordingly becom-
ing vrR§:, what is to be done with "^qTcft? In general, adjec-
tives so circumstanced are reduced to their crude forms, and
in the examples given the compounds are f%^:, "5^^^^^T^:.
There are, however, exceptions to this rule.
I. When a compound epithet, of which the final was
originally feminine, is preceded by more than one adjective,
all except that preceding the final retain the feminine termi-
nation ; as, r<ic4Mig: or ^TOftf^^nj: ' one who has an old
brindled cow.' According to some authorities, both should be
feminine, as fg^WTcft^: ; but this appears questionable.
3. When the preceding term is necessarily feminine, it
retains its termination ; as, JI^MHI^: * he who has the river-
goddess Ganga to wife :' also if it ends in "gj feminine ; as,
TrV^HI^: ' one who has a wife of elegant shape^ (handsome
thighed) : also if the first term have no necessary relation to
the second ; as, cg-^cn^l'JniT'f * having for its head an illustrious
woman^ (a family) ; ^luiHIHi: * having a woman for witness or
authority' (a suit, &c.) Feminine nouns having a penultimate
cR preserve their final ; as, xrrfTSfiPTR^: ' one who has a wife
that can cook.^ ^, used either as an attribute or as a name,
retains a feminine termination ; as, ^^WR§: ' one who has a
wife given,' or ' whose name is Datta.^ Ordinal numbers do
the same ; as, xr^HHTT^: ^ he who has a fifth wife :' so do
nouns ending in ^ implying part of the body ; as, ^^i^fWr^:
' who has a wufe with fine hair :* so do nouns implying caste ;
as, ^T^THnt: WRTOtHF^: ' one who has a wife of the S'udra or
the Brahman caste.'
c. The final members of Bahuvrihi compounds occasionally
undergo some modification.
BAHUVRIHI COMPOUNDS. 351
1. The most common is the substitution of ^ for the final
vowel, or in some cases for the penultimate vowel and final
consonant of the last member of a compound epithet ; as,
W^ff^ ' a thigh,' ^"M^"^"^ ^ long-thighed ;' (but not if used figu-
ratively, as ^^"5fifTZ| ^T^ ^ a cart with long axle ;') '^^ ' the
eye/ M^iOoRT^ ' lotus-eyed ;' ^sr^fc55 * a finger,' when applied
to any thing of wood, iT^i^-"?5 ^T^ * a rake ;' but TT^T^fc^fw:
^ the hand.' rrrfW * the navel,' and other words, optionally
change ^ to w ; as, "^Tfj^T or ^^SrilP*? * having a woolly or
hairy navel ;' so ^fc5 ' a furrow,' ^"^"ftr ' the thigh,^ or, accord-
ing to some, "^rf^ ' utility,' optionally change the final after a
negative, ^ ' bad,' or ^ ' good ;' as, ^r^"?5 or ^r^fn ' unfur-
rowed,' 5'tc5 or nffc?, &c. Numerals preceded by particles
or by other numerals, to signify ^ approximation,' take ^ for
their finals ; yiir^^R: those which are ' near ten,' i. e. nine or
eleven ; %^: ^ two or three ;' ^^^\\ * five or six ;' f^fr^Tt
' twice twenty.' It is added to "^^j preceded by certain parti-
cles ; ^:n=rgT. ^ what is not four ;' T^r^^ * what is about four.' %"ff,
^ a leader,^ takes ^ when preceded by the name of a constel-
lation ; as, ^RJiiH^T * what has Mriga for a leader.' After a
numeral, Jj^rf substitutes ^ for its final syllable ; fi'^J, fd^?
* two-headed, three-headed :' so does c5^Jr?r after w?jT^ and
^f^ ; as, ^Tfl^Vr ' hairy internally ;' ^%^rtH ' hairy exter-
nally.' The following are considered as irregularly taking "^ ;
Ulr!^ ' morning,' ^TTTIT ' having a good morning ;' f^^TT ^ a day ;'
^^^ ' having a good day ;' ig^ ' morrow,' w^ ' having a good
morrow ;' '^^ ' the belly,^ "^ft^ 'green-bellied,' as ^1t^^: ^Tcr:
* the green-bellied parrot ;' ^f^ ' an angle,' ^"jt^ ^quadrangular.'
2. In a few instances a final »!r is changed to another vowel,
or substitutes ^"^r or ^HT; thus t^^, ^ smell,' makes with TrT,
TjfiT, ^, and ^W, <Jrfr«4| ' emitting smell,' ^nf^ and ^Tif^Jlf^
^ fragrant,' ^frfTif^ ' fetid :' also in compounds implying * a
little ;' as, ^ri^r"^ * smelling slightly of Ghee :' and intending
simihtude ; as, xjirnf^ ' fragrant as a lotus :' but not if the
odour is separated from the object ; as, wpc^ ^T^f^URt: ' a shop
COMPOUND WORDS.
of fragrant things,' ^ a perfumer's.' ^^^^ * a wound/ in one
combination takes ^!rr[^; as^ <^f^|^^T ^l ' a deer wounded by
a hunter :' so does W^, * a tooth' or ' food/ after ^, ^trT, TIW,
or ^ ; as, ^§W»T^ ^ having good teeth / ^TITtRT'JT ' having
green teeth / ij'iir»i+vr"?T ^ eating grass ;' ^fh=nT^^ ^ eating the
Soma plant :' but not after any other term ; as, MPriri^**?
' toothless.' v^ takes w^ in composition ; as, ohV-miim^rr
* who performs his duty well.' THTT ' offspring/ and ^VT
' understanding/ take ^^ when compounded with a negative
or with 5^ or ^; as, WIR^ ^without progeny / ^m*rr: 5^:
' a childless man/ 'snnnt ^ ' a childless woman :' so gm^^
^THHT ^ having bad or good children / ^mvnr * stupid/ ^^viTf
* dull/ ^V^ ^ intelligent.'
3. In various instances the final term of a Bahuvrihi com-
pound substitutes a different form, and especially when the
word signifies a part of the body : thus fTH is put for ^rftrcRT ;
as, "^^^ ' high-nosed/ inim ^ prominent-nosed.' With ^r: and
' ^t the substitute may also be ff^ ; as, ^n?IRr: or ^^fCilii:, ^T?IjRi:
or ^t?iit: "J^t ' an ass-nosed or hoof-nosed man.' After ^^
the primitive is unchanged ; as, ^c5^Tftr^ ' large -nosed.' After
f^ the syllables ^ jj, and ^ may be substituted ; as, f^w,
f%Tr> "f^ ; also P^fHfl * noseless.' Xfj^ is substituted for ttt^
when ' resemblance' is implied ; as, ^^THTT^ * having a foot like
a tiger :' but not after the class f^lf^ ; as, ^f^cRT^ ' elephant-
footed.' After numerals and ^ the substitute is used ; as,
fW^^, f^T^j ' biped, triped/ &c. ; ^T^ * well-footed.' -q^ is
used in the feminine after 'srnj ' a jar,' jr^ * one/ firfT^ * with-
out,' and other words; as, ^^f^TT^, ^cjTcr^, fq^a^, * (a woman)
having a foot like a water-jar,^ &c. If masculine, the form is
as in ^JiH^IT^, 'jar-footed' (a man). ^, making in inflection
;^, is substituted for i^ * a tooth,' preceded by iff; as, ig^r^
^ having good teeth :' by a numeral when age is imphed ; as,
f^r^ ' having two teeth / f^^ ^TH: ' a child old enough to
have two teeth :' but %^7jft ^^ ' an elephant with two teeth.^
The feminine is formed with ^ ; as, fi^rft WTHT ' a two-toothed
BAHUVRIHI COMPOUNDS. 553
female infant.' In feminine appellatives the same form is
used ; as, ^HT^ a proper name : but ^Ht^'ril ^ ' a woman
with even teeth.' ^ is substituted after certain other words,
as, ^, "^nj? and t(^, and others ; as, ^>J^ ' white-toothed ;'
^cti^Hijt^ri ' having teeth as sharp as the tip of Kusa grass ;'
j]^*{(^f|^ * ass- toothed,' &c. : also optionally after ^ttr and 4iCl<* ;
as, ^RT^rl[^ or ^ttr^ 'black-toothed ;' ^id^fi^ or ^d^B^ ' hav-
ing discoloured teeth.' ^ is substituted for »rrj, ^ the knee/
after it, ^m , and optionally after ^ ; as, IT^ ' prominent-
kneed,' #? ' compact-kneed,' if|^ or "^ff^TT^ ^ high-kneed.'
4. In words not signifying parts of the body we have TilPH put
optionally for WPn ' a wife ;' as, ^^TfiPn: or ^^frnrnn ' a man who
has a young wife :' "35^ for ^fi>|TT ' an udder ;' as, "qftWt ' (a cow)
having a large udder :' \n^ for vg-^ ' a bow ;' as, ^TT#>F^
' having a bow of horn :' optionally if the compound is a
proper name ; as, i^friMHI or "^TfTV^: the name of a prince, ' he
who has a hundred bows.' ofi^, ^ a hump' or * a peak,' drops
its final when denoting age ; as, ^nfnr=fi^ ' a young ox,' ' one
whose hump has not grown :' or when signifying a mountain ;
%**^< ^ ^ three-peaked mountain.' ^RT^, ^ the palate,' drops
its final after gi^ or f^, and optionally after "^ ; as, TFliT^ or
f^-oRT^ ^ without the hard palate '/ i4i5«*l*< or "Mi5chij«^ ' having
a complete palate.' ^ is substituted for ^^, ' the heart,'
after ^ and ^ ; as, ;ff^ ^ kind-hearted,' i. e. a friend ; Ff ^
' bad-hearted,' i. e. a foe : in a literal sense the compounds
would be ^f^, 5t^-
5. cR, technically termed cRT^, is added to many Bahuvnhi
compounds ; as, to "37:^ * the breast,' cUfTlC^ ^ broad-chested f
to ^^rPl^ ' ghee,' finnrf^^ ' fond of ghee :' to ^r^, ' object,'
after a negative, ^TT^ ' useless,' and optionally after a prepo-
sition, ^nrrt or ^umi'^**; to ^r^, ^fame,' optionally, as H^N^f^
or *<^l^^(l<<» ' very famous.' It is substituted for the finals in
^iT to form feminine attributives ; as, from t^fen * an ascetic
bearing a stafi^,' * a Dandi,' come clg^^Qijohl "^UV^ * a city haWng
many Dan^s 5' ^gmpH*! ^HT ^ an assembly of many eloquent
z z
354 COMPOUND WORDS.
persons.' If masculine, "SR may be optionally substituted for
the final nasal ; as, «|g(^4|i1 or «|gr^fe<*i Tjjm ' a village with
many DaA&is.' When added to feminine nouns in ^rr, the
final is optionally short ; as, JTT'?5T * a garland,' <4gHMIc(i or
^§Hlc4«h ' having many garlands.' •Ttfl' and "rP^ do not take
eR when used anatomically ; as, ^^r^TTfet "SFRt * the many-
vesselled body ;' oi^rin^t l(hn ' the many-fibred neck :' but
they may add it in other senses ;' as, "cijSHI^flh: H'h: ' a clump
with many pipes' or ' reeds ;' WglTf^t ^hjrr * a many-stringed
lute.' cR is added to >rrff in a depreciatory sense ; as, ^^tHT^:
' one who has a foolish brother :' otherwise Il^nRWT^ ' having
an excellent brother.'
d. TR^ * with,' forming the first member of a compound, is
commonly changed to ^ ; as, ^rgW ' having a son,' ' being with
a son ;' ^ch4^o|i ' having an office or object, occupied,' ' transi-
tive j' ^c5)Hch ' being with hair,' * hairy.' When the compound
is connected with a term of benediction, ^ is retained ; as,
^rftcT t1% W5PT^ ' health to the king, along with his son :' but
not before the words ift ' a cow,' ^75 ^ a plough,' or ^i^ ^ a calf;'
as, ^TT% ^^c4N, ^cirHI^. i7^ usually substitutes iT^ in a
similar situation in this as well as in other kinds of compounds ;
as, ?TfT7JT«T * great- souled,' ' magnanimous ;' w^ToFR ' great-
bodied ;' H^Hc»5 * very strong :' but »T^ is unchanged before
words signifying ' become grown' or ' made ;' as, h^^h * become
large' or ' great.'
€, Words implying * mutual striking,' when repeated, pro-
long the final of the first member, and substitute ^ for that of
the last; as, ^^n^Q^f 'pulling hair,' ^Hilr^flli * cudgelling,'
H^^Pg * boxing.' Although these words are used adverbially,
without a substantive, they are Bahuvrihi compounds, and
regarded as epithets of ^, * fighting,' understood.
SECTION IV.
Avyayi-bhdvO'-^Indeclinable Compounds,
281. Indeclinable words are formed by combining a noun
INDECLINABLE COMPOUNDS. 355
with a preposition or particle, when the former is put in
the accusative case neuter. These compounds being in fact
compound adverbs, and Hke all adverbial terms, when not
otherwise inflected, taking the sign of the invariable neuter
accusative.
«. The following are examples of indeclinable compounds
formed with prepositions and particles, which, it will be
observed, retain their own sense, and exercise the same effect
upon the purport of the noun which they would do if uncom-
pounded. The sense of each term is complete in itself, but,
agreeably to its adverbial character, requires a verb, either
present or understood, to connect it with a substantive.
I. Prepositions.
^fw * beyond :' ^^friJIg* ' beyond the Ganges,* ■^PriJiff Ijrm * the
village (that is) beyond the Ganges ;' ^srfirf^if * afler the
cold weather,' ^rffrf^iTRPT^[ffT ^RFcT; ' spring comes afler the
cold weather;' ^HfrirHJ 'after sleep,' ^rriPH^gnNarri ^^:
' the man gets up after sleep.' These examples will suffi-
ciently explain the relation in which this sort of adverbial
compound stands to the other members of a sentence.
^rfv ' upon,' * near to :' wfv^fic ' upon Hari or Vishnu ;' VHUifj*!
' near to or upon the fire.'
^ ' afler,' ^ according to,' ' near to :' ^^le^P^ttii * afler VishAu'
(following or worshipping) ; ^H«J-*H ' according to order ;'
'il»j54(a ^ according to seniority ;' ^T^^ ' near to the wood ;'
'ilfjil^' ^ near to or upon the Ganges.'
^nr ' off,' ^ from ;' as, ^rqf^ ' in the off-point,' i. e. in the
intermediate point ; ^qP^Ujj ' from VishAu,' ' withdrawn
from,' * hostile to.'
ysn, limitative ; as, ^ngf^ * until final liberation ;' SHI^H^* * unto
the sea ;' ^TTTTc? ' to the boys,' as, SHHIe4* '^PcNP^hA^rfw ^ faith
in Hari extends even to the children.' The termination of
the fiflh case may be also used with this preposition ; as,
2 Z 2
356 COMPOUND WORDS.
TXI ' near to :* yM<JBin ^ near to KrishAa ;' ^Mi|i4 * near to the
village/
f»T^ * out of/ * exempt from :' fpf^ * lonely,' * void of men ;^
fVf^ft|cR ' free from flies/
xtIt ' about' or ' against :' Trftrfrog * about or against VishAu/
It follows numerals and the words ^r^ ' dice/ ^^TcyToRT ^ a
man (at draughts, &c.)/ or a numeral, when signifying
* loss at play ;' as, ^J^uqft: ^ losing one / ^reRfc ' having the
dice against one ;' ^c^JTofiFTft: ' losing a man/
nfrT ' to^ or ^ towards :' UKJ 0 H "^ToS^t ^TTrfnT ' the grasshoppers
go towards the fire/ It also implies * severalty^ or * suc-
cession / as, irm^ ' according to each several object or
signification -' TrffHTT ' birth after birth/
^ is usually substituted for ^, signifying ^ similarity^ or
' sameness/ as ^ft: ^ like Hari ;^ also ' association/ imply-
ing ^ finality/ as ^JumPw ' he eats with the grass/ i. e. even
to the grass ; also * possession/ as a property, as ^^^4
* having, or rich in, fields/
2. Particles.
?[fw, implying * so,' ' such,' and the like ; as, ^fir^ft ^ such is
(the word) Hari.'
5^ * bad,' and ^ ^ good ;' as, ^^^A ' bad with the Yavanas ;*
^jiT^ * well or prosperous with the Madras/
ipirr, ' according to ;' as, ^l^i^rpFK ' according to power or abi-
lity / but not when it signifies ' analogy ;' as, inn ^iT^^nTT"^
^ such as Hari is, such is Hara.'
m^ ^ as many as ;' as, trr^ g<l^iiir>^ ^(H*^^^ ' as far as
there may be food (for them), invite the Brahmans.'
f^^ and ^nnrr ^ near ;' as, f^T^RTTTTJ^ ' near to Lanka ;' ^frnrrgt
* near the city.'
b. The derivatives of ^n?r * to go,' implying ^ direction,'
optionally form indeclinables ; as, mij>4H or iUHHIrt^ * east from
the wood / so does ^f^ * out of,' ' without / as, ^rf^TH or
^f^TTTf^ ' out of the village,'
INDECLINABLE COMPOUNDS. 357
c. Indeclinable compounds may be formed with numerals,
except ijofi ' one^' referring to families or classes ; as, rg'^jPn
Pc^C^Ph * bom in or belonging to a family in which there have
been two or three Munis :' so f^^rf cq i oh4^ii.i ^ the grammar of
which the three Munis (Panini, Patanjali, Katyayana) are
the authors.' Names of rivers are also combined with nume-
rals to indicate the place of junction ; as, f^TT^ ^ at the meeting
of the two Ganges \* f^^TJ^f ' at that of the three Yamunas.'
They are also combined with other words in a like accepta-
tion ; as, 4»^rlJ|^' ' at the place where the Ganges is furious ;'
cfrf^WTT^ ^ where the Ganges is red;' as, ^flMJI^- m^lill^fl
* Benares (stands) where the Ganges is rapid.'
d. Inr this, as in preceding forms of composition, the finals
of the last member of the compound are sometimes changed.
When the final is a long vowel or a diphthong terminating
a feminine noun, its change to a corresponding short vowel is
nothing more than the alteration required by the substitution
of the neuter gender (p. 41); as, J^, *a female/ makes
-^pHf^ ^ surpassing the woman ;' ift ' a boat,' ^rfk'^ ' beyond
the boat.' But the more special alteration is analogous to
that which occurs so frequently in Bahuvrihi compounds, the
substitution of ^ for a final vowel, or a final ^r«T ; or its addi-
tion to words ending in consonants ; as, ^qDiC or ^MP'lft
^ near the mountain / >jmr( or TtRf^ ^ near the river ;' TiJTTW
^ under the king ;' ^RflTW ' over or in the spirit.' If the noun
ending in ^n^ be already neuter, it may retain its own termina-
tion ; as, 'iim*4^ or ^Txr^^ ' off the skin.' ^n^ ' the autumn,*
and other words, add ^ ; as, T^rsflT]^ * near the autumn :' or
sometimes words with final consonants, not nasals, semivowels,
or sibilants, add ^ optionally ; as, "5X1^^ or TTl^ ' near to
the stone.' ^rftlf, ^ the eye,' substitutes ^ when compounded
with the prepositions ^, tr, xrfrT, or ^H ; as, ^hhhi ' accord-
ing to the eye,' ' visibly,' ' perceptibly.' tR substitutes ^ for
its own final, whether in a Tatpurusha or Avyaya compound ;
as, iKhaf ' away from the eye,' ^ absent,' * invisible ;' im^
358 COMPOUND WORDS.
' before the eye,' ^ present ;' and wr?^ also ^ before the eye,'
* visible' or * present.'
€. ^1$ ' in front,' w^ * in the midst,' "qiT * on the further
side/ may be compounded with nouns in this form ; as, ^ijuH
* in the presence of Rama ;' in&JT^ ' in the midst of the
Ganges ;' Mfifl*J^* * beyond the ocean :' or the terms may be
optionally used with the signs of the case, either their own or
the noun which they govern ; as, qil-Hg^irt^ or ^*}^m qiUr^
' from beyond the ocean.'
/. The following words are considered as forming inde-
clinable compounds of an anomalous description : ^(^ ' a
day,' as TTT^ ' in the forenoon ;' ift ' a cow or ox,' friS^ ' at
cow-standing (time),' i. e. when they stand to be milked, "^^
* at ox-bearing,' i. e. ploughing (time), ^^mifiJN* * at cattle-
coming,' i. e. at the time of their coming home ; ^^^ ^ the
right hand,' li^ftpf ^ walking round a person or thing, keeping
it on the right ;' ty^rfrT ^ a foot-soldier,' fiH^^lPri ' at drill-
time,' or when the soldiers are in line ; ijftr ' earth,' ^fmwfH
' (at a place) where it is level ;' ^ ' a deer,' TRn ^ at deer-
coming,' f^^ ' at deer-going ;' Tm ' barley,' I<<^n4 * when
barley is on the threshingfloor' (the season), c^^m^ ^ at barley-
cutting ;' and other compounds : so ^ * chaff,' iNc^^q ' at
chaff on the floor' (time), &c. ; t^ ^ a car,' w^ ^ at chariot-
going ;' wn ' a year,' "qi'^TER ^ during a wicked year,' m^<m^h
* during a virtuous year ;' ^HT ' equal,' ^r^ ' level' or * even,'
fwf ' uneven.' ^TR is compounded with Trfir, as Wf^fH * now,'
* at present,'
SECTION V.
General Rules,
S82. There are some changes which are common to all or
most of the classes of compounds. Some, as the substitution
or addition of a final ^, have been noticed : the most useful
of the others are the following, affecting either the final
member of the compound or the initial :
GENERAL RULES. 359
«. I. ^ * water/ is changed to ^^TT; as, fclHc^lM ^having
pure water/ f^Hc^lM ^It; ' a clear lake/ After ■%, ^RTt, or a
preposition ending in any vowel except '^y the initial ^ is
changed to ^ ; as^ ifhf ' an island/ ^ having water on both
sides / also 'il^dOM ^ an island/ * in the midst of water / mfhr,
^ reverse.' ^n? with ^R makes fl«/)M ^ near / but in a Uteral
sense ^nm ' having water equally.' After ^rg the vowel becomes
"31, if applied to a country ; as, ^"^T^ft ^: ^ marshy land ;' but
^r?^hf * upon or along the w^ater.' After a preposition ending
with % the change to ^ is optional ; as, XR and T( make either
iltnr or "qxTT ' where the water has retired / irni or pxr * where
it has gone forth.'
ij. qPaw, ' a path/ is changed commonly to xnr ; as, H^mvj:
' 2l great road;' xiHU|vj ^a place where four roads meet/
TT^cpTzft ^: ' a place having a pleasant road / 4MMv| ' near to
the road.'
b, I. oB, a particle implying 'inferiority/ ^vileness/ or some-
times * a httle/ is variously modified before different words.
In a Tatpurusha compound, and preceding a w^ord beginning
with a vowel, it is changed to csir ; as, cR^^ ' a bad horse,' ' a
hack / ^1^: ' a bad camel / but "^ Tl»n ' a prince who has a
bad camel :' also before t:^ and "^ ; as, cF^^ ' a bad chariot /
"Sfig^: ' one who speaks ill :^ before ij^, signifying ' a species/
ch^nf ' a kind of grass / but ^TO ^ bad grass in general.' "g is
changed to "SfiT before xrftiiT, as cMmvj; * a bad road / ^if^ ' the
eye,' as cRT^: ' a tear / and optionally before "J^t? as <+im^m:
or ^MixM: ' a mean despicable man,' ^ a coward.' cRT is also a
diminutive ; as, ^smvi: ' a little sweet / "SfiT^ ' a Uttle sour :'
before ^m, * hot,' either ^, ^i^, or ^ may be used ; as, ^i^,
chvfluil, ^FtWj ' a httle hot,' ^ tepid.'
3. The infinitive mood is used as the first member of a
compound with ^im and H^, when it optionally rejects the
nasal ; as, ^ijchiH or ^TT^TH * desirous to know / ^r|»T^ or
cR^WR^ * incHned to do.'
3. ^R^Ti, * certainly,' optionally rejects its nasal when com-
360 COMPOUND WORDS.
pounded with a future participle ; as, ^rf^ir9Fn§ or ^H'^^^qhl-t^
' what is necessarily to be done.' m^, ' flesh,' compounded
with XTRi or tf^^ ' cooking/ optionally rejects its final vowel ;
as, irhnrT^: or JTRITT^:, *rNnr^ or iT"Nq^ ^ cooking meat/
4. w^ becomes w??Tr^ before various words, if not in the
sense of the instrumental or genitive cases ; as, ^RT^T^ ^ hope
in something else ;' W^T^t ^ benediction in or on another ;'
^nqrfiKSR: ' one who does something different/
5. The substitution of ^ for ^ has already been noticed ;
but it is also substituted for ^hIH ' same,^ ' like ;' as,' ^MVSJ
' being of the same party -/ w^fr^ ' observing the same duties :'
whence ^TTV^ ' community of the duties of caste, profession,^
&c. ; TT^^prr^ * a fellow-student,^ * one studying under the
same teacher :' so ^rOQ: also ' a fellow-student,' ' having the
same holy object' or ' preceptor.' ^ is substituted for ?nrnT
before ?^ ^ to see ;' as, ^J^: ' like,' ' similar,' ' of like appear-
ance :' so fi^oh and ^^Hj: . It is also substituted before the
following words in the sense of either class of compounds :
jJlPri^ ^ light,' ^nnr^ * country,' TTf^ ^ night,' Trrfn 'navel,'
^T^ ' a relative,' ir^ ' smell,' fxn!? ' a lump of rice,' &c. ; "?ytfipr
^ blood,' "^ft^ ' side,' ^t ' braided hair,' tj^ ' a wife ;' as,
^tMIPh: * equal in lustre ;' fi^lHMt^ ' of the same country ;'
^hPm^^ ^ of the same cake ;' fifqi!^: ^ a relative connected by
offerings to the same ancestors ;' &c.
The following take either ^ or ^HR ; ^ij ' form,' ^TTT ^ name,'
iftw ^ family,' ^ * caste,' T^ ' age,' ^^^T ' speech,' V?^ ' duty,'
^Irf)^ ' specific,' "g^x^ ' uterine ;' as, ^T^tT or l^HM^M ^ of the
same form ;' ^jfld or flHIH^fld * of the same race ;' ^r^x^ or
^RPft^ ' related in the female line,' as ^FTt^^ HTin ' a brother
by the same mother ;' &c.
SYNTAX. 361
CHAPTER VIII.
SYNTAX.
283. The great body of Sanskrit composition is in metre,
and the construction of sentences has consequently been sub-
ordinate to the necessities of rhythm. Examples therefore of
syntactical arrangement are not so diversified as might be
expected ; and it is not always certain^ whether any unusual
combination may not be a license of the poet, rather than a
law of the language. The use of protracted compounds also
in a very great degree supersedes the occasion of individual
inflexion ; as a sentence or a stanza, embracing a great variety
of circumstances, may be made up of a nominative and accusa-
tive, with a single copulative, the rest of the words, however
numerous, being compound epithets of one or other of the
nouns. There also prevails very commonly an elliptical style
of construction, in which the verb is altogether omitted, or its
tenses are supplied by participles and analogous words.
In the following line from the Mahabharata we have two
sentences without a verb or any other copulative, and only a
nominative case : fxnn n^ ^T^^ ^^fwm^: TTH: * A father (or)
a spiritual preceptor (is) the lord, the giver (of) knowledge, of
the Vedas : (there is) no doubt (of this).' Instances of the
absence of a verb are numerous in the didactic verses of the
Hitopadesa. ^Ets-^. ^^ W^r 7ft tt f^^T^ ^ vrf^^. l ^FTO^ ^"^
"Ntt ^"^t "*fl[t^ %T?5 II ^ What (is) the use of a son (being)
bom, who (is) neither learned nor pious? What (benefit is
there) from a sightless eye ? (such) an eye (is) even only
pain.^ In the following stanza from the Kumara Sambhava
there is only one verb, and one change of inflexion from the
nominative to the instrumental, which, if the metre had not
needed a long syllable, would probably have been dispensed
with : f^T&fv^nTtfT*!55njt?TWt « '?pR>ftFinnTp'?rKTfwf^ II H^ldHT^T-
7iTT^»J?rRH I mft^ W^ ^>|5 mw^ II 'And that grove of
3 A
362 SYNTAX.
penitents was pure ; (for in it) animals of hostile natures (had)
abandoned their former animosity ; guests (were) reverenced
by its trees with desired fruits ; and within its new-reared
cottages the (holy) fires (were) enshrined.' There is a little
more variety of inflexion in the following verse from the Raghu
Vansa ; but it is sufficiently rare to show how much syntac-
tical construction has been set aside for rhythmical disposition,
even in the works of authors who have not indulged in that
abuse of elaboration which characterises later and inferior
writers. W^ ^ f^^nr^n^^TWT ^T^nf^fv ^55^ I ,^f(fnfi^ ^f^
fH?3T^Tf5T^ f^ "5c5'i3'ff II ' He then, whose mind was liberated
from objects of sense, having delivered to his young son the
symbol of royalty, the shelter of the white umbrella, with the
usual solemn rites, repaired together with his queen to the
shade of the trees of the grove of hermits : for such is the
observance of the princes of the race of Ikshwaku, when in
the decline of life.' In this long stanza we have but one
verbal inflexion, f^rPJI^, besides the indeclinable participle ^1^.
Although however in this manner dispensed with in com-
position to a great extent, yet the relations of words in sentences
are expressed in modes analogous to those adopted in other
cultivated languages ; as the following rules will exemplify.
SECTION I.
Nouns,
284. The noun substantive expresses as usual the subject
or object of a proposition by the different modifications of
number, gender, and case. Its relations to other parts of a
sentence depend especially upon the latter, and will therefore
be better explained, as in native grammars in the chapter
to which the title of "sfrcr: is attached, in the order of the
cases. When, as not unfrequently happens, more than one
case may be employed to convey a similar relation, the alter-
NOUNS. 363
natives will be found, with some exceptions, under that case
which is subsequent in order, according to the scheme given
under the head of declension (rule 46).
285. Nominative case (cfrtl or Tn^rrr). The nominative
case declares the simple sense of a word ; as, »r"?nR: ^ a man,*
^ * a woman,' ^FT ' knowledge.^ Its employment in a defi-
nite or indefinite manner is usually indicated by the context,
as there is no article. The numeral ^o|;, or a pronoun, however,
sometimes performs the same office ; as, tjcK "J^: ^ a man,^ i!
-g^: ' the or that man,^ ^liftj^q: ' a certain king,^ ^ ^J^cqin:
^ an old tiger.'
a. Two substantives may be connected absolutely in the
nominative case ; as, "5^ wtf^: ^ rice a drona (in measure) ;'
■'*l^ft fTTix: * the mountain a kos (in extent) ;^ JnTTT ^^: ^ a
mother an enemy ;' ftnrr %^ ' a father an enemy ;' f^ ^WT
^ftr^^ ' Society (is) poison to the poor i' but in these cases
the copulative ^ is' must be understood, as in similar phrases
it is expressed ; H'^T^vSt V#: ' iniquity becomes virtue.' The
nouns in apposition may be in different genders and numbers :
^n^ohlPH "^.^n?!^ ^T't: "iP^: ^ The acts of the Vedas (are) his
path to heaven ;' ^ ^ rT ^: trfbrTT^^ f^T^hc^ K**T^^: ' Who
engaged in unprofitable undertakings do not become a subject
of disgrace ?'
b. The nominative case is connected with the active verb,
or governs it, when it expresses the agent, and with the
passive when it signifies the object : ^"^^: ^ chOfri ^ Deva-
datta makes the mat ;^ ^^t^^H fw^ ciur: ' The mat is made by
Devadatta.' It is also put absolutely sometimes in a sentence,
as the object of an action, but where the accusative that
should express that object is omitted: fr^^sfq #q^ ^n|
^ifH^IHirt ^ Even a poison-tree, having reared (it), one should
not of oneself cut (it) down.^ In this the complete construction
should be, ^^ ^R^ w "S^WPFgif ^sfq fciM^aj: WH^^ ' Having
reared a tree, it is not proper to cut it down, even though it
be a poison-tree.'
3 A2
364j syntax.
c. When various nouns^ separated by a disjunctive particle
expressed or implied, occur in a sentence with a common
verb, that which is nearest to the verb may become its nomi-
native : ^ TPfr m TT^ c5^# ^ Hri:mrri ' I or Rama, the
king, or Lakshmana, will die :' •? ^HH^r<*^ ^'^^^*1 ^ ^^T-
T^: I grr xrw^f TT tfj ^s-q^ j^uu ll ^ Neither was the sun
able, nor I, by motives of affection, to conciliate him, or
(induce him) to enter into amity with thee :' •? inrr ^i^iijiifH:
^ IT^TTT ^ ^fiW?5: I ^Ori'mriir^H 7^ TT^ IT^ ^^T^l 11 ' Fire
gratifies not, neither do clothes nor q blanket, the region that
is afflicted with cold breezes, so much as thy rays (O sun).'
d. When two or more nouns are joined together by a
copulative conjunction, they usually govern a verb in the
plural number : ittt: ^t ^ TT»n ^ vfNr^ ^ T'^gfW: I ^; "Zfvi
iT^ xrnifh i^VT^TTTR ?r^ U * Then afterwards Kunti and the king
and Bhishma, with the kinsmen, gave to Pan^u the obsequial
offerings, with libations to the manes.* This is not invariably the
case, however, and the verb may have for its nominative only
the nearest of the nouns combined by copulative conjunctions :
m ^ ^nq^rft ^^ "^^TBTT ^ ^I^Tf^t I U'^^Kt vft^ ^11*^1^ "^jf^
rH54t H ' And the queen Satyavati and the illustrious Kau-
salya, and also Gandhari, attended by the wives of the king,
went forth :' '^nf^W^^f^T^^c'ftsiTH^ ^Hfroift f ^ '^^^ I '^Tf^
rrf^ W ^ ^I^ V^sf^T iTT^nffT ^TT:^ ^ H ' The sun and
moon, wind and fire, the sky, earth, waters, the heart and
Yama, and day and night, and both dawn and evening, and
also Dharma, knows the conduct of a man.'
286. Accusative case (^3# or f^TrfHn). The accusative
expresses, after a transitive verb, the object of the action :
■^TH chClPH ^^TaRTt: * The potter fabricates the vessel ;' ^ir: H»rfw
H^K ' The votary worships Hari.'
a. The accusative follows a neuter or intransitive verb, when
it denotes place or time : "^^ ^f^fiT * He sleeps in the
country of the Kurus ;' "#^ TrfiT?^ ' He proceeds for a Kos;'
f^fiW ofci<^HM«^ trtw TTT^rrr^ ' They dwelt for some time on
NOUNS. S65
the mountain Gandhamadana ;' Tnm JJj^'JJ^ fWiT: ^ He stayed
two months in the house of his preceptor/
b. Verbs signifying ' motion to,' literally or figuratively,
govern the accusative case : Km ii-cdfrt ' He goes to the vil-
lage ;' T(t{W( fnmfif ' He goes mentally to Krishna/ he wor-
ships him ; f^wri ^Tt?f ipn * He went to (or felt) great
astonishment.' The accusative is also employed when Agoing
along a road ' is intended ; xjt^tR "'Tlfw ^i^: * The traveller
goes along the road:' but not if Agoing to a road' is meant ;
TrW^T ''7^ Tj-^fTf ^ He goes by a byeway to the road.' The
dative case may also be used optionally, when actual ' motion
to' is signified ; 'il\^\^ JI-oaPh.
c. The accusative case follows verbs of giving, to signify
the thing given ; 7JJ^ ril^iij«ft t^^lPH ^ I give the village to the
Brahmans :' also verbs of hearing, to denote the thing heard ;
- ^^»^C ^ 3p5 ^ Hear from me the i^sura (creation).'
d. A double accusative follows a number of verbs, when
the thing done, and the thing or person that is the object of
the action, are both designated. These are mostly verbs that
signify, i. speaking, 2. asking, 3. instructing, 4. knowing,
5. conquering, 6. leading, 7. dragging, 8. taking, 9. collecting,
10. stealing, 11. fining, 12. cooking, 13. milking, 14. churning,
and 15. obstructing ; whether they have these meanings lite-
rally or metaphorically, i. xn^M* ^' ^ "^R: ^ The spy tells
the whole to the king ;' TfH'a'^tiT "^t ^T^rrrr^^ * Kunti said
to him words full of meaning :' 2. ^si^-e^^H+jiij ^^ftflf ^ He asked
Lakshmana (after) Sita :' 3. r5l ^ 1"^ V^ ^T^ ^rrftcT ^ The Guru
teaches the disciples virtue :' 4. ^^ M^ ^^|^» ' The wise
know punishment (to be) virtue :' 5. Phhi Tj5?f «T?J •T'T ' Hav-
ing conquered his kingdom (from) Nala the king :' 6. i^lHH^R
H^Pri jriMio^: ^ The shepherd leads the goats to the village :'
7. "^ chKNIK ^fitfff tilliMIc^: * The officer of justice drags the
thief to prison:' 8. ^ ^T^TTTTXnnTTvftTd: * He took the i^bhira
women to the forest :' 9. •jHjH'^P^HlPri ihc6 1 Ph ^TH: ^ The boy
gathers the fruit (from) the tree :' 10. ^^^ V^f gwrfff v#:
366 SYNTAX.
'The rogue robs Devadatta (of) his wealth:' ii. ^nmfiS^ ^"ff
^^SJnrflT TT5n ' The king fines the debtor a hundred (rupees) :^
12. fRJ|c5IHl<H M-MPri ^jMohlC * The cook dresses the grain (and)
the boiled rice :' 13. irf ^VfHr t^r: ' He milks the cow (for)
milk ;^ ITRUT'T H^PN'MlrHM ' Milking (abandoning) life (from)
himself :' 14. "^vf T^fkf»Tfv JTR^Y* ^^^^* ' '^^^ g^^^ ^^^ Asuras
churned the milky ocean (for) ambrosia :' 15. if|P^it{l ^»1H<^iN-
^"fe it: * Govinda shuts up the cows (at) the cow-pens ;'
^fVoR fxi^HMr^vnr ' He confined his grief (in) his heart.' ^, ' to
bear,' is sometimes similarly used ; '^"^* Jj^H'^^rf' or 'J^^l^MN^rf
' He bore the damsel to the house.' In common with other
transitive verbs, these verbs may govern a single accusative,
when only one object is designated ; ^TTTR^TT^ "^h:: ' The hero
said to his mother.' Several of them may govern the object
in other cases also, as will be subsequently noticed.
e. The causal modes of verbs signifying, i. motion, 2. speak-
ing or articulate sound, 3. or eating; 4. the causals of intran-
sitive verbs, and 5. of ?j^ * to take/ 1^ ' to see,' and "^ ' to
hear,' govern a double accusative, when the object and the
subject of the act are both expressed, i. ^^rfTTH'^f^ ^^* ' He
caused the enemies to go to heaven :' 2. ^r^Hi^m^ld fg^ ' He
caused the Brahman to read aloud the Vedas :' 3. ^JTT^nr^'PJrf
^"^TR * He caused the gods to eat nectar :' 4. SHm^^r^ ^fc5c5
Y^* "^t ^ ^ 'iO^Mrfi: * That Hari is my refuge, who placed
(caused to sit) the earth upon the waters ;' ifhfts"^ >Tt»ffirHrrf»T
H^T >J^ ^ ' If I am pleased, I will cause thee, lady, to
enjoy the three worlds :' 5. eJIc^H^l^^r^Kf ' He made the boy
take learning ;' r^^^Mpshl. TJ^ ifftrrf ' They shewed (caused to
see) Sita to Rama ;' ^W^ 'mfr^T^ f^^«B ' Recite (cause to
hear) the drama to the company.^
y*. There are some exceptions to the preceding rule. The
causals of ^ and ^T^, ' to eat,' require the instrumental case
for the subject of the action ; ^n^Trfff or ^STT^XTWW ^crii n^
* The Guru causes the rice to be eaten by the pupil.' So H^,
when it means ' eating ;' 7ftm>T«j^r<^>Tg| ^ He caused the food
NOUNS. 367
they liked to be eaten by the cowherds :' but if it means
destroying by the act of eating, it may be followed by a
double accusative ; vr^^TrflT TOt^fr^ ^T^ ' He makes the oxen
eat up the com/ "^r^, * to sound,' in the causal mode requires
the subject to be put in the instrumental case ; ^r«45^nrd '^l'^^
^N<-^H ' He causes the sound to be uttered by Devadatta.'
W^ and some other verbs, signifying * articulate sound,' are
similarly combined. The causal of ^ ' to bear/ when it
implies ^ driving,' governs a double accusative ; Nl^^fri T^TT-
3^"5T ^nr: ^ The charioteer makes the horses draw the car :'
otherwise the subject is put in the instrumental case ; ^\h{
tjl^^Pri mt ijw^ * The master makes the load be borne by the
hireling.'
g. The causal modes of "a; ' to make,' ^ * to take,^ ^ ^ to
speak' with ^rf^T prefixed, and of ^ ^ to see^ in the i^tmane-
pada, may take either a second accusative or the instrumental
case for the agent or subject of the action : cRTr.^fif cR^ f^rf5T«t
or %f^T«n ' He causes the workman to make the mat,' or ^ he
causes it to be made by the workman :' so ^TT?Tfw ^?J Fff or
^^ ' He causes the messenger to take the message,' &c. ;
^rftr^T^W ^ iT# or >T%^ ' He makes the devotee salute the
deity,' &c. ; ^tiw <jU!iH^H or ^IT^HH ' He makes Arjuna see
Krishna,' &c. The fact being, that when the causal is used
in a passive sense, the subject or subordinate agent is speci-
fied in the instrumental ; when it is used in an active sense,
it is specified in the accusative case.
h, A second accusative may sometimes follow a verb, as a
qualification of the first, being put absolutely or in apposition :
i^n^vfl' ^T^T^iT^ ^f^ ^ f^^iTW^ * Give me, O lord of the Danavas,
earth, three paces.'
L The accusative case may follow various prepositions and
indeclinable words or particles. Of the former class are
^rfw, ^rfv when reiterated, ^rfW, ^, "^tt, "qft, and irfiT. ^rfw
^TFT ^fb ^ Hari is beyond the gods ;' ^rffTOT ' Superior to
Rama' (^, * I am,' understood); ^^nqfVcJft^ ^t^ fTOT: *VishAu
368 SYNTAX.
abides over and above the worlds ;' HrJlH^^fHrfT ^T ^ The army
will halt at or along the river ;' ^nPRTJ TrRt f^ ^ It rained after
the prayer ;' ^^fxnn?^ n^W ^: ' The son goes after, or
imitates, the father.' ^r^ and "gtr, indicating * inferiority,' also
govern the accusative : Tf VRT'rjtT't "^7^ * If you are not infe-
rior to Rama ;' ^MSjiL «T ^ fW ' If thy conduct is not beneath
a hero.' ^rg, Xfft, and irflT govern accusatives designating any
particular object ; as, fhfbTg (^rft or Trfir) f^tDriri f^^ ^ The
lightning flashes at or toward the mountain ; ' f^^'iTFrT^
riHil'^ ^H^t{^ ^ ^irf Trfir * He considered that grave matter
concerning his daughter :' — a part of any thing or person ;
cJ'a^'ttftTT'g (^ trft: or irfrT) ' Lakshmi is part of Hari :' — and
several and successive order ; ^"^"^ (^t or TTPrf) ftr^lT HT?jt
' The gardener waters tree by tree ;* trfi^ ^* (^r^ or irfff ^* )
^mnnT^: ' In love with every (successive) woman.' The
indeclinable words governing accusatives are ^gnftsv:, Tcp^xrft,
ts»du, ^Ffft?!T, ^r^Tir:, xrirrr:, "^Hxrrr:, "^rfif:, ^nrin, fiohMi, fv^, ?rT ;
as, ^snftsv: ^^ "TTITTTJ: * Patala is below the earth ;' "^xnltrft:
TjOq^T ^: ' The sky is above the earth ;' HiHtlTT ^fOirfH^fw
' Krishna tarries away from thee ;' ^^ ^*}^U| TT^^t ^Jcf^lT^:
^^^hr^fTrr ' Ravana, of dreadful form, having raised up his sword
(to cut) Vaidehi in two ;' fTPTTTrftrir •? ^ ' There is no happi-
ness without a mistress ;' ^HTTt (or trfbft) UHH^^*t, ^T^^*
' The Rakshasas ran upon or around Rama ;' "g^Txrif: "SRHH Tfttn:
' The cow-herds (were) on both sides of Krishna ;' ^Frflf: srr^l<
Wnrfff ^IIJVTfiOT: ^ All around the palace watch the staff-
bearers ;^ ^nrm JP^ fnclim "gt Vr^ftf ' He goes near to the
village,' ' near to the city ;' fv^ «RTjnH>T^ ^ Fie on one not
devoted to Krishfia ;^ ^ ^'^^TP' * Alas ! (for) the enemy of
the gods.' Several of these may be combined with other
cases ; as, Tq^tfix ^^TTrf^W 1^^ ^tT^ ' Above and over all,
like the sun in splendour ; ' "^"'np^ ^ * or inferior to
heroes.'
j. The neuter verbs :5ft * to sleep,' wi * to stay' or ' be,' and
^rnr * to sit,' when compounded with wfv, govern the noun
NOUNS. 369
expressing the site of the action in the accusative : ^fuji^i
T'T'^ *HlO ^ The maiden sleeps upon the couch ;' ^^^M^ria^<^l^*^K
"i^: ' Kesava presides in (or over) the soul ;^ ^TWTTW %^?!5 ^ft:
^ Hari abides in Vaikun^ha.*
^. f^, ' to enter into/ as a transitive verb, governs an
accusative ; xf^ Mf^^lfff ^ He enters the house.' When pre-
ceded by wfW and fff, it may govern either the accusative or
locative ; as, ^Hprir^^ifrT ^n»nW ' He enters upon a good path ;'
wfHf^f^frT trr^ ' He enters upon (or falls into) wickedness.'
When preceded by Tq", and implying ^to sit/ it is followed by
the locative only ; ^TO% s-ftq^ m fcj ^| h * Sit down on this seat.^
h ^^ 'to dwell/ preceded by ^fv, ^g, ^T, or "^tt, may
govern an accusative case; wfVm^rffT (^fTJ^^fw^ &c.) ^ t^x
^ Rama inhabits the wood / aMj^jrcjcj^^H ' He inhabited a
lonely wood / ^d*T"iftmT^^T^^ ' He dwelt at the city Ayo-
dhya / ^TTHym^frT ' He inhabits the village :' but when ^^^^^
means ^ to fast/ the site is expressed in the locative only ;
>jiim^rri «r% ^^t: ' Rama fasts in the forest.'
287. Instrumental case (cJOT or frfhn). This case expresses
the agent, the implement, or the means by which any thing
is done, or any end is accomplished, whether active effort is
implied or not : ^r^TRin '?"m HTiTT "TrfrrcT; ' By me, unknowing,
my brother has been slain / TTOT ^TT^'^T ^t ' Killed by Rama
with an arrow ;' "gi^^ ^Tt ^fb ' Hari is seen by (or through)
virtue / ^r«IT"'T%*T ^^ ' He subsists by teaching / lT^?rr '^T^:
^ Beautiful by nature.' It also expresses the manner or degree
in which any object is effected : ^i^H '^fl^rrT ' He lives with
ease' (happily) ; g:^^ ^mfw ' He goes with difficulty / in^w
iTT%cfi: ^ For the most part (usually) a sacrificer.' It also
denotes any mark or^ circumstance by which an object is
characterised : ^TnfW^cTR^: ' He is an ascetic, by his clotted
hair / iTTTTT "STinir: ^ a Brahman by caste ;' ift"^^ m^X ^ a
descendant of Garga by family.'
a. The instrumental case may be employed with words
signifying ' object' or ^ result :' "g"?!^ ofits'^: * What is the
3B
370 SYNTAX.
object of effort?' mPi^^^^h f^ tRc^ * What is the fruit of
lamenting ?'
h. Words implying * bodily deformity' require the instru-
mental case for the organ or member in which the defect
occurs : ^^T^^ WRU: * blind by an eye ;' trf^TT 13^: * lame by
a foot/
c. Prepositions signifying ' with,' ^ along with/ are con-
nected in sentences with the instrumental case : WT^^ ^FTTSfi »nn
* Stay along with me ;' ^hr^ f^ ^fri^lri ^: ^ ^RFmTlf ' The
mind is depraved, O sire^ from association with the base.'
Verbs signifying ' association' also govern the object in the
same case : r^^n ^nvt '-HHNl«< *' Having met, O pious man,
with thee.'
d. The particle ^TcT'^, implying ' enough of/ governs the
instrumental case : WFJ^rfrff^^a^ ' Enough of prolixity.'
e. The instrumental case may be used optionally with the
accusative in various instances ; as after the verb f^^ * to play,'
^Bp^ or ^sr^^farfif ^irsfin:: ' The gambler plays dice,' or ^ with
dice :' also after ^ ^ to know/ preceded by ^; as, IT"^ fViTt
(or fxr^r) ^Hrn=ft^ ' Recognise thy father.' When it signifies
* calling to mind' or 'thinking upon,' it governs the accusative
only : ^STl'flN f^m ' Meditate on Vishnu.' When ' space' or
' time' are spoken of, in connexion with an act or event com-
pleted, the instrumental case is employed : ^^ or -^l^n jti^
i^^*^M^'qAri ^ Having gone for a day, or for a Kos, he arrived at
home.' But if the act or event is incomplete, the accusative :
ilT^ irfWjft ^ i^l^l'ri: ^ He has been travelling (for) a month,
but is not arrived.'
/. Words signifying ' weight,' ' measure/ or ' number,' when
succession or repetition is also implied, are put after verbs
either in the instrumental or accusative case : ^i^ ^rf (or
^ ^) ^x^\\ m^^Pri tnr: ^ He gives milk to the calves to
drink, by a hundred at a time ;' i%<fli)H or "fe^f^ "^tarfw VT^
* He buys corn by two DroAa (measures) at once.'
288. Dative case (^rf9^T«t or ^rw^). This case expresses
NOUNS. 371
the object or recipient of a gift, either literal or figurative :
wrsrSr«ft frluhiTT ^ * He gave Nishkas (gold coins) to the
Brahmans ;' t?^' f^HN ^^Tfrr ^ He offers an animal to S'iva ;'
•T 'sr^iVJ Tfif ^^^rnr ^ Let him not give understanding to a
S'udra:' and it may be used after verbs which imply * pre-
senting' or * offering,' although not bearing such import ori-
ginally ; as, T7TR "^ ^ H'^T^jCh: ' The great sage made (or
offered) worship to Rama.'
«. Although, however, the fourth or dative case most appro-
priately follows verbs that imply * giving,' of some kind or
other, yet the genitive case is frequently used with a similar
purport, and sometimes also the locative : TTE f^T^W ^ %
^^rf^ TR ^^^ ' Spirit of air, I may give thee the prosperous
kingdom of the S'ivis ;' i^F^sfTTfir«ft ^«i: f^T^. 4^^H^ ^
^ Having given (food) to guests, gods, ancestors, and his own
household ;' t(^ TJ^ "^fzT^* ^T5ffl"^H ' Thou who wishest to
give the earth to Rama.' When the genitive case is thus
used, however, an elHpse is implied, to be filled up by a noun
understood in the dative case : i\'^ ^^^^: ' to the hands of
thee ;' y=*ir|W ^rf^SW: ' to the persons of his own family.^
b. Nouns expressing ^ cause' or ' purpose,' that for or on
account of which a thing is done, or that for which a thing is
fit or suitable, follow verbs in the dative case : ^^ ^Ix HTffiT
^rrv: ' The pious man worships Hari for the sake of liberation ;'
Mf^^MI^ <*«d4rt * Devotion is practised for the sake of holy
knowledge ;' ^TiTR ohfMcJI f^\ ' The pale hghtning is on
account of (it is a sign of) a gale ;' TW^ig?Tofii#TOT: '^Sf^U^ *rnft
sfs^TTK ' The unfriendly performers of cruel acts are born for
the destruction of the world ;' TUWfJT^ f^ V#: * Virtue is fit
for a Brahman.'
c. Connected with this appUcation of the dative case, is its
optional substitution for the infinitive after a verb : ifi^wit
Jlxdcfri * He goes for fruit,' for TfiHT^m^* Jl-od^frt ' He goes to
bring fruit ;' "m^rnrr^nTRfir ' He gives orders for a sacrifice,'
for ^SHI^m^fd ' He gives orders to sacrifice.'
3 B ^
372 SYNTAX.
d. Intransitive verbs signifying * to be agreeable' or ^ accept-
able' govern the dative ease : i^^ ^N^ >Tf^: ' Devotion is
acceptable to Hari ;' WT?5"R ^^ T*^^ ^ The sweetmeat is
pleasant to the boy.'
e. The verbs "^ni ' to praise,' w * to conceal, W[ * to stay,'
igfPT ' to curse,' may be connected with the object of the act in
the dative case, when some particular feeling is implied by it :
nhft ^RTTl^ ^WR ^IMri ^W fww^ ^xr^ * The Gopi praises, hides
from, stays with, vows by Krishna, through love.' When no
such feeling is implied, such of them as are transitive govern
the accusative : lT3rnt "^ni^ ^T^t * The minister flatters the
king.'
f. With a similar kind of relation, verbs signifying ^ desire,'
* anger,' ^ wrong,' ^jealousy,' or ' detraction,' govern the object
in the dative case : IT^ ^PJ^xpTTTts;^ ^ He being filled with
desire for her ;' ^ftcTR Tr^"W4^immiri ^ He was not angry with
Sita, nor did he revile her ;' ^i^nr f^R^m^T^ TT^ ^ He vowed
to her, dissembling with her. When the feeling is not excited
by the object, they govern the accusative : H|<LMiH)(Mrff tffrr:
^ The husband is jealous as to his wife,' that is, he cannot
endure that others should look at her ; fT^^^i^ ch(j|x|r| * Let
(the pupil) never offend him.' W3( and '^ preceded by pre-
positions govern the accusative : fofi nf ^rajwftr * Why art thou
angry with me ?' m tf^^'TfW'^f^T^n: ' Commit not violence against
another's property.'
g, Y> ' ^^ hold,' in the causal mode, having the sense of
' owing,' literally or figuratively, governs the person to whom
the debt or obligation is due in the dative case : ^^^WR ^7T
>nT?Tfff * He owes a hundred to Devadatta ;' HW^ "fN" VTdfiT
^fb ^ Hari owes liberation to his worshippers.'
h. "^ preceded by '^t or llfw, signifying ' to promise,' governs
the person or thing to which the promise is addressed in the
dative : fVJTPT ^MHIT^iuirri or ufff^TTiT^fTT i:T»n ^ The Raja promises
a cow to the Brahman ;' spjsrsi: ufw ^p^f^ mfl^n: * Common
persons promise assent to those who counsel them.'
NOUNS. 37S
i. n, * to sound/ preceded by ^g or irflT, implying * to
conform to' or ^ comply with,' governs the dative case : ^t^
TrfrT^prrfTT or ^"gjjui I «<^£cri|: * The Adhwaryu (or reciter of the
prayers of the Yajur-veda) acts in conformity to the Hotri (or
Brahman of the Rig-veda) ;' 'pry'gft s-g:ijT?i ipr^ rf ^fg\tn ' Others,
such as I am, do not conform to those who flatter us.'
j. TTV ^ to accompHsh,' and ^ ^ to see,^ when signifying
' to think or consider about,' govern the object in the dative :
^tmNl.n^lT or <*U!INV4|^ ^: ^ Garga considers concerning or
about Krishna.'
k. Forms of reverential address or religious invocation, such
as tTTW, ^fe, ^T^5 ^\rr, &c. are followed by nouns in the
dative case : «TTt: f5I"^nT * Salutation to Siva ;' iT^TtTWPT ^f%
* Health to the king ;' ^TfT ^«t: ^ Salutation to the gods ;'
^rVT f^^«f: ^ Salutation to the manes.' TpT^ compounded with
"^ governs either the accusative or dative : iTH'^^t*^ ^^: or
"?nT^i^tf(T ^THT ^ We make, or he makes, salutation to the
gods.'
/. ^T^H, when signifying ^ to be sufficient for' or ' equal to/
governs the dative : ^TTcy ^^OT^l ^5^> ^fTTc5 ^Wm ^T^^t ^ Friends
are not (alone) sufficient for happiness, nor enemies for misery ;'
W<5J Wt ^W^ ' One wrestler is a match for the other ;' ^-^vq^sH
fVwr: ^ Vishnu is equal to, or a match for, the Daityas.' Com-
pounded with a transitive verb, it governs the accusative : VJ^
HI<^<*W ^HT^sf^ * He is not able to be a match for, or over-
come, sin.'
m. The prohibitive jtt may be used with the dative case,
wdth the verb understood : iTT '^Ttr^'R ' Be not for unsteadi-
ness,' i. e. do not act unsteadily.
n. Verbs of motion, as noticed above (rule 286, b), are most
usually followed by the noun in the accusative case ; but they
may also be associated with the dative : ^TRTR ST^afif * He goes
to the village.'
* 0. WT, ' to mind' or ^ think,' when of the fourth conjugation,
and implying ^ disrespect,' governs a subsidiary noun, signi-
374 SYNTAX.
fying ' degree' or ' comparison,' in either the dative or accusa-
tive case : »T }^ W^ "JWR or "^TJ ' I value thee not a straw.'
iTrf of the eighth conjugation is followed by the accusative
only : "q" T^ ir?^ "JW. If the comparison be intimated by the
terms tn: ^ a boat/ oRTSR: ^ a crow,' ^ ' food,' 'spst ' a parrot,'
or 3i/Me4: ' a jackal,' the accusative only is employed : tT rTT
•TT# H^ ^ I hold thee not of the value of a boat,^ &c. If ' dis-
respect' be not intended, the accusative only follows the verb :
^R^ oRrff^cJnSTc? ' I suppose the mortar to be wood.'
p. When a term of number or quantity is used to signify
* rate of wages' or ' hire,^ it takes either the dative or instru-
mental case : ^HTR or '5J'ff»T ^fTTH^ "qfc^^nfd ' He hires servants
by or for a hundred.'
g. ^nrrr, * to give/ preceded by trit, and implying ^cohabita-
tion,' governs the dative when the act is legal ; the instru-
mental when criminal : m^ OT^^ ^TWT ^^T^ xifw: ' The
husband cohabits with his wife,' ^with his bondswoman.'
289. Ablative case (w^n^'R or xr^rft). This case denotes
' a taking away,' ' a separating of or from,' * removal' or
' departure' of any kind ; as, ^TRT^mrffT ' He comes from the
village ;' "g^TTR T^Tm: ^rf^TJT^T^i^f^^^ ^ He returned from
the water of the Ganges afflicted ;' VTW^s^gri^ inrfw * He falls
from a galloping horse.' It also implies metaphorical dis-
jimction ; as, mmr^UHPri * He refrains from sin / Vi#TrJmT?rffT
' He strays from virtue.'
«. The ablative case has also an inceptive signification,
implying the cause or motive of any act or feeling, or the
origin from which any thing proceeds, literally or figuratively:
■^Efklfk*^ ^ 'The woman is afraid of (or from) the thief;'
^ftm^lHH THifT ^ The king protects from thieves ;' iflifV TiSt
^^rim^in^Pri m ^W^ »R: ' People will think of me thus, he is
afraid of Arjuna in battle ;' l^^nu: inTTt UHl^'rf * Progeny are born
from Brahma ;' ^3r^: f^niT ^K \k<^^ ^tH«r ^^FRT: * ReU-
gious acts proceed from wealth, like rivers from mountains.' ,
b. Verbs signifying, i. hinderance, %. disappearance or con-
NOUNS. 375
cealment, 3. being ashamed of, 4. acquiring knowledge from,
5. being averse to, govern nouns in the ablative case. i. "inwft
TR^ ^TTTrflT ^fbTTc?: ' The cowherd keeps off the cows from the
barley :' 2. HT^f^^jh?^ '3^\ * Krishna hides from his mother :
3. HJISKir^^fd ^ He is ashamed of his father-in-law i' 4. "^XTT-
"HnTTT^vtw flSfTsr: ' The pupil (reads with or) acquires learning
from the teacher:' 5. ^nxHRTl!;^ ^ITT'ST^ f^TO: ^ The pupil is
averse from (or tired of) reading ;' 'm ^I.N^*^M^ ^^TFRTTT * She
(Sita) averse to (or abhorring of) Ravana.' When f»T with
TJTT prefixed is used transitively, it of course requires the accu-
sative : ^^♦^(^ MCr^jilH ^hc: ^ The hero overcomes the enemies.'
c. The ablative is used to express the site from which any
act is performed : i||^^|f{)Hjri ' He looks from the palace ;'
^TRnrrj^^fFffT^ * He rose from his seat.' Also a place or period
from which distance or time is computed : miri "g^ "iftinf
* From the wood the city is a Yojana distant ;' chir^^iji ^Jf^-
Hii.nHT& * From Kartik into the month Agrahayaiia.'
d. The ablative is also sometimes used to express the
means by which any end is accomplished : "SfiTT VJ^ oR^TORT
^^ I f^R^^rr dlQimHI^rfT^fri^fMH "^ II * Committed sin is
destroyed by good acts, by refraining from it, by (from)
visiting holy places, and by repeating texts of the Vedas and
the institutes :' ^?f^^T^tt^TTrrfVr f^ ^MiPh ^rf^: ' Their places
in heaven have been obtained by the gods through violence.'
e. The words w^, 5[rrt, ^rpCTlT, "^^j TT^jfifr, ^f^^ terms
significant of relative place or time, and compounds ending in
words derived from ^n^ ' to go,' are connected with nouns in
the ablative case : ^nift ^Ti: ' other than Hari ;' ^TTTt ^u»lii|^
' different from Krishna ;' -^ilKi^Hif^ ^ near to the wood ;' "^
■g^irnf ' without the man ;' WTT: HcfT or TfWnf IT^frf ^ thenceforth,'
' thereafter ;' ^tr?^ n^jfir ^ from after a year ;' WJIU^P^: ^ out
from the city ;' iTPRTfT Tjft Y^: ^ a tree east from the village ;'
^^n^ "^: ifiT^MH: * The month Phalguna is before Chaitra ;'
■gt MM^HIft^ ' a city east of the wood ;' ^nmi^ Hiilf^fo ^ a
mountain west from the village.' When ij^ and similar terms
376 SYNTAX. *
denote ' a part' of any thing, they require the genitive case :
Tjf: ofirq^ ^ the fore part of the body ;' ^^: MOjanV mn: ' the
latter part of the day/
f. The preposition ^TT requires the ablative case in the
sense of ' hmitation/ either of place^ time, events, or things :
^Ifl^^lfT ^ as far as to the ocean ;' ^T^JUftTTT ' to the end of
the age ; ' WT^ii: ^^r: ' Repeated birth occurs until final
liberation ;' ^rnrcfic5Tf^ WST ' Brahma extends unto (or compre-
hends) all things ;' H^^r^iTBn??: "^n^Tl^Tf^'ThpTTTr ' We will
practise mendicity even until liberation from the body.'
g. ^nr and Trft: implying ^ separations^ and irfw signifying
^ substitution' or ^ equivalent,' require the ablative case : wxr
c!ft%«ft "FJUmf ^^fw: ' Dwelling in Lanka, away or apart from
the world ;' trfrfwrW^ft "^ ^^: * The god (Indra) sent rain
away from Trigartta ;' IT^^t ^^roiTTi^ Trfff ^ Pradyumna is the
substitute or representative of Krishna ;' fTT^vq: irfifT ^Ef^rfiT
iTRT"?T ^ He gives Masha (pulse) in place of, or return for,
sesamum.'
A. Words implying * bound on account of a debt' may be
connected with the ablative, when the reason, not the debt, is
intended : ^TTT¥^ "5^ ^ Property pledged on account of a
hundred ;' ^^lyi^^ ^ * Like one bound on account of debt /
but ^T^T^^irt ^ Bound by a debt, held in bond, or indebted, by a
hundred.' Either the instrumental or ablative case may be
used, when the state or circumstance of the person is the
result of some property, not expressed by a feminine noun :
irnq^ or wn^mn: ^ Bound by or from stupidity ;' ^ m^Ti^
UPria^ ^ Thou goest to the wood through folly.'
i. The words W^, ^T^j "^"^5 cfifjnnT, may be used after a
verb, either in the instrumental or ablative case, to imply
^ degree' or * manner ;' as, ^i^f or ^<*i"fg^ ' left or liberated
a little ;' <**^ill or "sin^Tr^ ^: ^ made with difficulty;' <jx^ii|^
^H r<H ra ' having come with difficulty ;' cjrfirq^ or ojrfiftrijTrJTITi:
* obtained in some degree.' When used with a substantive,
they agree with it in case ; as, w^^ f^^ ^: ' killed by a
NOUNS. 377
little poison.' When employed adverbially, and not signifying
* instrumentality,' they are put in the accusative neuter ; as,
Wt4 'T^rffr ^^ ofidfff ' he goes or does a httle/ * a short way,'
or * for a short time/ or * a small quantity.'
j. The particles Y^' -rRTj and f^m, govern either the
accusative, instrumental, or ablative case : ^viijiH T^^W or
tTTTr^ * separate from, or without, Rama ;' f^rrr or •fRT ^ ^^
or ^^ ' without a deity ;' f^^ ^^ -^ ^fnT timmi irninrnrf
* Penitents do not practise emission of breath without destruc-
tion of life ;' ^^ 5:^ff«n »T ^«nr ' Pleasure is not obtained
without pain ;' xr^oR vi^c^^l ^ 'done without deceit ;' '^^T^J'^TH^Tr:
* except the wind.'
290. Genitive case ("^N: or ^r^p^: or "^). This case is
employed when one noun follows another, expressed or under-
stood, having a different meaning, and to which the latter
intimates soine relation ; as, TT^: tr^: * the man of the king ;'
-^^m wnn ' the mother of the boy ;' ^f^^ >nf * the wealth of
the rich man ;' "^^^nf^ Jjm: ' the quality of the thing.' The
prior noun may be understood: 'SRi} ^r4^!)lf^: I HWf^ fl«4<f
^^ftHpH^dlri^ w ' Fearlessness, purity of nature, &c., are of a man
born to a heavenly condition:' they are the qualities, tttut:
imderstood.
a. Verbal derivatives signifying * the agent' are followed by
the object in the genitive case ; as, »TTrf: FTT ' the creator of
the world ;' md M\c6<*: ' the protector of the good ;' Hl.«+^
n»|yji: ' the victor of (over) hell.' Those formed with "3" from
desiderative verbs govern the accusative ; TTiH r^ f^^J ^ The
king is desirous of seeing thee.' So do those with "5^ ; as,
"IwriT ijlf1«h) ift: ' Hari is the destroyer of the demons :' but
not when the root is WJ ; ^nFcTRT: chiHod: ' the lover of the
beloved.'
b. Similar derivatives, implying * the act,' may be followed
by the agent or the object of the act in the genitive : i^^M^
fwn " the act of a man ;' ciitMillMf V'^: * the duty of Brah-
mans ;' Jppsi ^TFT ' the drinking of milk ;' W ^: ' the milk-
3 c
378 SYNTAX.
ing of kine/ The subject also may follow the property in the
genitive ; as, ^T^PBT ^t: ' the speed of a horse ;' »t>r: ^T?r ' the
sweetness of honey/ When the act is followed by both the
agent and the object, each may be put in the genitive case;
sfnif: ^fFt^rw: ' the creation of the world of (by) Brahma :' or
the agent or instrument may take the instrumental case ; WlKl
^fFi^TOT. A term expressing * aggregation' is followed by the
objects collected in the genitive : tl^ ^MT- ' an assemblage of
princes ;' xrmrrf ^RT^TT. ' a flock of cattle ;' VJ^HRftfrT: JHTc^c^SHiNiil
^P^MTTT: ^ a collection of wind, water, light, and smoke.'
c. Verbs of ' speaking to/ * communicating or representing
to,' ' conveying to, as speech and the like,* are commonly
followed by the person spoken to in the genitive case : TTi^^
* Tell me that ;' c^^d|^^ml^*^ W ' I will tell thee ;' SHI^a^ ^ H^NI^'^
^1^^ ^rftr ^ inr: ' Tell me, mighty armed, for thou art thought
of me to be all-wise;' rH^<i|IHI« P^d^HI^ ^ '^^(^M^ ^^5^
' He represented to Chitrasena, and he to (of) Indra ;' ftnrRT:
^"^^ ^ ^ * Bear news of me to my beloved.' Instances of
their occurrence with similar terms in the accusative and
dative cases have already been given. Trnr, * to ask' for any
thing, governs the object in the genitive : ^TFH Hl^^ * Ask for
firmness ;' V«T^ «TT^ ' He asks for wealth.' But when the
person is designated, it governs an accusative : rfivjp'ri ^ •TTT "JT
oiflchHI^* * Who do not implore the lord of the world ?' Trai,
' to ask,' may govern the person in the genitive, the thing in
the accusative : ^r^^ac^ oR^tN^»TT^* ' not asking the way from
any one.' It also governs a double accusative, the person
being one : <^^[<i ""J^aifiT mi ' He asks thee after thy health.'
d. The verb ^, ' to hear,' governs the genitive case of the
person speaking ; as, ijTdLHPM ^ ^ ' Asking, hear of me ;'
inW riNxad^M ohvjiirt: (^) ^ Hear from me, describing it, the road :'
but this is considered as an eUiptical form of expression, the
word c(x|*i, or some synonyme of words or speech, being
understood. The verb governs also the ablative : ^"Vorwwni^^
Mm^figfn * She will hear very attentive from me.'
NOUNS. 879
c. >T, * to be,* preceded by ir, signifying ' to have power or
authority over,' may govern the object in the genitive case :
iwr^ f^T»f^ ch>^|9iH4:M H^KM: ' The prince has power over
his own daughter ;* THTRT TWrfif TI»TT ' The king is lord over
the people.' Verbs expressing * to be stronger than,' or ' to
prevail over,^ govern the genitive : Hllfl'^ll^f*! oh^H * No one
prevailed over him.' Verbs signifying * to be angry with,'
' to do violence or injury to,' or ' to desire,' may govern the
genitive : it "^ TT^ V#^ "«? i^ ^5^ 'TT * I am not angry with
thee ; thou hast done no wrong to me :' ^Ts^ ^hhmI «T
<5^rH ^ cj,|d.K|rH I <*«HitlT T^nrr TT^ ^^ ^«4€l^ rT^ II ^ When a
man neither does wrong to, nor wishes for, all beings, either in
act, thought, or speech, he obtains Brahma' (final fehcity).
These latter verbs may also govern other cases (rule 288,/.)
f. ^ * to know,' when signifying something else than true
knowledge, and w^hen knowledge is not a property of the
thing known, governs the genitive case : «fiAi(t "«T(vfld ^ He
knows ghee.' "^ ' to have pity on,' f;^? ' to be lord of,' and
"^ ' to make,' implying some particular effort, and verbs signi-
fying ^ to remember,' also govern the genitive : f{lHMI ^'T^
* Have pity on the wretched ;' VTRT^ft^ tc^w * The Yaksha%
rule over riches ;' ^vt^cB^qtT^^ ^ He prepares the fuel and
water for an oblation ;' ^m^mHIH U«i«tlNIJ|Hf4i^ ^ The two
princes have made preparations for coming hither ;' HTj: ^RRfir
* He remembers his mother ;' ^lif^^:^ '^'^hth: tAHm W^rH-adLfH
* Who, being in pain, wishes to remember pleasure ?' ^rwfrT TT^
cTS^nrr: ^ LakshmaAa thinks of thee.' In these cases, however,
an ellipse is supposed, a prior substantive in the accusative
case being understood : ^rW^ ^pn"?^ »TT»ftw * He understands
(the properties of) ghee ;' fflHMIH^^Jilf ?pT5^ ' Pity the condition
of the wretched,' &c. Otherwise these verbs govern the accu-
sative :' ^rfT^^* *iih1^, ^bn^ ^t?w, c*I<+h1^, 'fnwt wtf^.
9' S^> ' to see,' in the causal may govern the person in the
genitive instead of the accusative (r. 286, ^) : ^ >j|ri^^^lHlfl
■^ «F§ ' He shewed of (to) his brother those two hands.'
3 c 2
380 SYNTAX.
h. Verbs implying * sickness/ except from fever, govern the
person in the genitive : M^^W ^^TTiTlwiT: * Dysentery affects
the man :' but 7f ^W^rfTT^i:: ^ Fever affects him.'
i, ifnT ^ to hurt,' Uterally or figuratively, "^ * to kill,* pre-
ceded by f^ or IT, or both, WZ and "^r^T ^ to hurt,* and fxTW * to
pound,' when it implies * hurting,' govern the object in the
genitive case : ^^^tD^ftWRnrflf tl»n * The king punishes the
thief ;* «^>^1<vTf(lf(^lr^H: * Remove or destroy thy sorrow ;' tT^-
^fTRT uPiir^rH^^rH (H^rcw^frf or PH^fH ^MPrt) tTR: * Rama will destroy
the Rakshasas ;* Y^c5^£flTf7^Tfff or "^ivi^ifd ^ He destroys the
outcaste ;' ^I'^f^^.^ fcRftr tht: ' The elephant grinds the felon/
If injury is not meant, fxp^ governs the accusative : VT«TT: iTT"!Tf^
' He grinds the corn.' Other verbs signifying ^ to injure'
usually govern the object in the accusative : TrfVcfi f^Hftcr ^trm:
* The tiger destroys the traveller.'
j. The compound verb ^n^ * to transact business,' and
xniT ' to deal,' or * engage in any office,' govern the word signi-
fying the terms of the transaction in the genitive : ^|ri^
'^'=1^1.01 or tTO^ * He sells or buys or deals for, or stakes, a
hundred ;' MUlllHmMrillgnfl i:r^^lMirH^M^«^ ^ Ravana, bringing
^hee hither, has trafficked for (or staked) his life.' So f^ ' to
play,' meaning ^ to deal,' or ' pledge :' 'ei^^^'g^irRf * He has
played for his kindred and enjoyments.' But when f^^ is
preceded by a preposition, it may govern either the accusative
or the genitive ; Tn^^^^TW^R'^'^ or W^^X * He haa staked, or
has trafficked for, his own fortune.'
k. Participles, whether past or future, having a present
application, govern the object in the genitive case : TT?": ^'Tift
or "^1^ f^: ' The Brahman is esteemed or reverenced of the
king ;' ^ >n#: ^ ^RWf ^nn ' that which is thought virtue of
(by) the good ;' ^rftr^rFT ^ TTR^ JH^HH * He gave the signet,
recognised or cherished of Rama ;' TT^ cJ^^fiTJ^^ fWi^ ^ Both
worlds are conquered of or by him ;' ^^: "|p?f Tl^nrfrnr^
* (marked) by the feet of the chief of Rama's race, praised
of (by) men.' Participles of the neuter gender, signifying
NOUNS. 381
* site* or * circumstance/ have a similar government : TTH^
' Sita having repeatedly inquired after the sleeping, eating,
talking, laughing, staying, going of Rama, dismissed Hanuman.'
(The participles are in fact used as nouns, and are consequently
followed by the noun to which they relate in the genitive.)
/. The word ^, * cause,* * motive,' or ^ object,* follows a
verb in the genitive case : ^sr^^ ^fftt^rr^fTf « He follows for
the sake of food ;' ^ri1?lUl:U SPq^tim; HiiHNl^lHflcfcVjf ' He
repeated the praise of Rama, for the purpose of apprising
Maithili.' It is also used interrogatively and responsively in
this and in other cases, with a pronoun ; as, "SivJEiT %ift:, i^ t^^U
' For what reason?' 'why?' Svherefore?' in^ %fft:, ^ ^ij*iT»
"nwr^lft:, * For this or that reason,' * thus,' ' therefore.' Its
synonymes may be similarly used ; as, ^J5^ frifit^^, "Sfi^ inft-
9ir|^, &c. : but they are more usually employed adverbially in
the accusative neuter ; as, f^ PriPH^, f^ Tnftinf, and the like.
m. Indeclinable words formed with the affix "s^j^tft govern
the genitive case : ^|ri*HW^<*^i: W^K^j^l T:f?R: ' The best of
the race of Raghu thinks of thee alone a hundred times of a
day,' Numerals in a similar sense of repetition have a similar
government : "fex^s^ft^ ^ He reads twice a day.'
n. Indeclinable words, or words so used, being terms of
relative site, may govern the genitive (as well as the ablative)
case : Tf^ Pbf^HI ^i^snTf7 "Ji:^: ' Having stood in some manner
before (it) the cloud ;' t^^f^ "JCT ^ ' Thou art before or in front
of me ;' ^^^fhff ^TSrn^ ' before your friends ;' umi^ ^jT: * in
front, or on the east, of the village ;' ^^l^ifhTft: or 4^0,1; iff
* above the tree.' When such words are formed with ^rj,
they may govern the accusative : ^TH or jjjw^ ^ft^^«T ' south
of the village.'
0. Words implying ' propinquity' or * distance' may govern
a genitive case : HWTWt HIM^lHIjiMW ^ near to the Madhavi
bower ;' "Wt JUn ITW ^nn^ ' she having gone near him ;*
f^^TTCT ' They alighted near to Damayanti ;*
SYNTAX.
HUiAM ^ TcT: * He went far from the city.* They also govern
the accusative : cj^ir^^lH^'«ll.^l'ilHHr»H«hrf^ ^ Once Rama ram-
bling about from the neighbourhood of the hermitage/
p. Words implying * likeness' or ^ equality' may govern
either the genitive or instrumental case : ip^ Tfifw ^Enrt ^t^
ijrvfaiiHrM cR'^SR ^ The equal of whom in valour is no one upon
earth ;' oKts"^sf^ ft^^H 'TR ^ Who else is like me ?' or if r^rrr
^F5T: ohHyrT f^ "?ft^ PNilH ' The like to thee is not known in
the three worlds ;' vwfw ^hfT TT-srftr: ^hmi: ' Devoid of virtue,
(men) are like beasts.' The substantives "jcJT ' equality,' <JMHI
' resemblance,' are followed by the genitive only : ^ ejiUii^
"jcsjf or 4i|Hf *T irr>T: * He has not the equality or similitude of
KrishAa.'
q. Neuter or indeclinable nouns importing ' benediction'
are followed by the object in either the dative or genitive
case : ^srrj'*^ ^^^^^ or ^^^^r«I ' Long life (be) of or to
Devadatta.'
r. The genitive case is used absolutely with a participle :
JI-odLHU^ * as he was going ;' ikmn m ' as we were looking
on ;' %^^: I|H|HMI^U ' whilst Vaidharbhi was beholding.' It
is also used with the auxiliary verb ^^ in the sense of ' pos-
session :' ^srftcT ^ ' there is of me,' i. e. I have ; ^R^ «nT^
r«*n«5l<r« W^ * There is of this person some power,' i. e. I
have some power.
s. The term "^ governs a genitive case : ^^ohic«^^ 4^1 tM^
^ * for the sake of a brief dominion.'
291. Locative case (^rfVr«5T3^). This case expresses the
site or receptacle of any object, whether substantial or ideal,
that, in or upon or over which, any other thing is situated,
any act performed, any property exhibited, or any notion
comprehended, &c. H^ frTFfw •Tt: * The man stands on the
ground ;' ^ MiTa fw^: ' The lion roams in the forest ;' oR^
^TT^ ssil^iU: ' The Brahman sits on a mat ;' WT^n'?^ M^frt * He
boils the rice in a pot ;' or%^ "SF^nrfiT ' He speaks or whispers
in the ear ;' ^flift Xj^ ' timid in war ;' f^f^ ^ ' fortitude in
NOUNS.
adversity ;' ^ :)l ^H i * whiteness in the swan ;' SHIf*<»^lf4^iH ^ff
M^^fri ' He beholds spirit in himself.'
a. This case is sometimes used to express the thing or
purpose for which any act is performed, when it is essentially
connected with some other thing, the object of the act : ^?#ft!T
ifHxpf if^ ^^inft "tf'iT ^r^jdH I ^i^ ^^inSI'* ^f^r ^ftf^ yMic4<*l ^w: ii
^ He kills the tiger for its skin ; the elephant for its two tusks.
He kills the Yak for the long hair: the musk-deer is slain
for its musk.' If the connexion is not intimate, that for or
on account of which the act is done requires the dative case
(288, h). The locative is also used when the object is of a more
general nature : xnrnjFtsf^ Vim ^fi^ TTl^ ' As thou art made
by the Creator for acts, perform them.'
h» The locative case is usually required in connexion with
prepositions signifying ' being over' or * upon' in any manner :
Tqxrnif ^\yiUi: ' The virtues of Hari are above infinite number ;'
^rfv Hf% tm: ' Rama is over the world :' but both these may
signify ^ inferiority' also ; as, "5R in::^ ' inferior to heroes ;*
wfv TTH ^: ' The earth is under Rama.^ When ^rfv is com-
pounded with ^, and the verb implies ' subjection,' it governs
the accusative case : ^ HTJrfv^fifbiTfw ^fi«^ f^PH ^'^'cij^ri ' If he
will acknowledge me superior (lit. If he will make me over
him), he shall be appointed to the work.' In the sense of
' superiority' the ablative case may be also used : Tft^ or
cytcfiT^fvsRt ^ft: ^ Vishnu is greater than the world.'
c. The words FTg and f^T^ are followed by the object in
the locative case, unless the prepositions ^rg, Trfr, or irfif
intervene : HIhHl WTV: * pious to his mother ;' fwftl Ph Mill:
' dutiftd to his father :' but imrt irfrf ^nv: Pmhi^h^ Phmiii:.
d. The locative case is sometimes used to signify that from
which any result may be expected, in the Hke manner as the
ablative ; as, fV^ (or fV^TT^m^) VHUgRll f^ TO cW^ * In (or
from) the destruction of the sons of Dhritarash^ra what advan-
tage is obtained?'
e. A frequent use of the locative case is its employment as
384 SYNTAX.
the ablative case absolute, in connexion with a participle in
the same case : ^f^ nk ' I being gone ;' Trf^fTJ^rffT ' that being
so ;' ITWIH^ «T>Tf^ ' The month S'ravaAa being at hand ;' cRt^
^ in^ ' A lucky time being arrived.' More than one sub-
stantive may be thus connected with the participle, when the
latter will agree in number and person with the substantive
nearest to it : ^s1>TR^ ^W "WT^ ^M€IIW*i^^ * The boy Abhi-
manyu being slain, and the sons of Draupadi:' (^""^ being
understood). As mentioned above, the genitive is similarly
employed ;' as, ^5^: "J^^ or ^fw "5^ ITT^TIT^ * (Though) his
son was weeping, he went forth (to lead a life of mendicity).^
y. Words signifying ' proximity' or * distance' may be used
adverbially in the locative case : TT^ctt: ^hIm Hr^T ' having gone
near her' (in her vicinity) ; ^ ?T"R^ ' at a distance from the
village.' These and similar words may be used in like manner
in other cases; as, ijiH^ nt ^F &c. iror takes only the
locative case : H^pft ^nsfhrx^ TT5TW 19? ^ Bhaimi was resplendent
amongst (in the midst of) her companions.'
£f. The names of asterisms, employed to signify the period
of their being above the horizon, may follow a verb either in
the locative or instrumental case : ^ (or JJ^^) ^TT^T^^^^*
tjf^ (or 'il^iiJfT) fw^t^ * Let a man invoke Devi at the time
(or rising) of the lunar constellation Mula, and dismiss her at
that of S'ravaAa.' If the asterism itself is intended as the site
or receptacle of a planet, the locative alone, of course, is used :
"5^ "^^ ' The moon is in Pushya.'
h. The locative case is used to designate any given period :
wftR''^ ^BT^ ' at that time ;' ^^ ^^TE^T f^TM^ ^ upon the close
of this speech ;' ^s^ Wc5^OTfc5^ ^ TTprf ^ ^ ' Hke the
Sthala-padma flower on a cloudy day, neither awake nor
asleep.' It is also optionally used with the ablative to denote
any intervening term, either of time or space : ^frer ^Wl^'^ ST^
(or ar^) >Tt^ ' Having eaten to-day, he will eat in or after
two days ;' ^^wts^f ^^ (or IKt^mi^) «5^ f^iq^ ' Standing here,
he pierces the mark at (or from) a Kos.'
ADJECTIVES. 385
i. The words iiPHri and Tr^"5fi govern either the instrumental
or locative case : irftllft ^fWT or ^ ' attached to Hari ;' "qmx
irf^eiTR or xiT^ MP^ri xfH^jigcRT ^ The wife is anxious for her
absent husband.'
j. The words ^[^Hi and "^^m govern either the genitive or
the locative case, when not used literaUy : ^TTJ^ "^ftTnT^T^ or
"^R^ * intent upon worshipping Hari :' so ^^Tcvj: tJiTH or tjjtT^
' happy in w orshipping.^ If literally employed^ they govern
the locative only : WT^^ f^* ^^ ' ^^^ bullock harnessed to
the cart ;' cRwf^ cF^r?j: ' skilful in work.*
k, A noun following either of the words T^jft, ^['SR:, ^rfV^fiT:,
^"RT^:, Wl"^, lTffT>|:, or TT^:, is put in either the genitive or
locative case : tT^ or xfVj ^irft ' the owner of kine ;' ijOa^m:
or trp2T^rni1"^gi:: ' lord in or of the world ;' T(T^'^ or a^iHIilUHfv-
xrfiT: ^ chief in or over the villages ;' ftr^^j^^q or ftr'^T^ ^TTT^:
* heir of the paternal portion ;' oq^j^iX or <«<^n.^ WT^ ' witness
in or of a suit ;' ^^?T^ or ^^ ^^^^^ ^ a surety in or of (for)
appearance ;' t^^ or xj-qf TfW^ ifhr: ' the cowherd born amongst
or for cattle,' i. e. to tend them.
292. Vocative case (^f^hnr). This is considered in native
grammars to be not a distinct case, but the nominative
employed in addressing or calling, with a slight modification
of the singular number only. Its use is the same as in other
languages : ^^ ijf^ ^ O Indra^ come ; ^V^^^-^^ m^jft ' Gan-
dhari, rise up.^
a. The vocative case is commonly used without any inter*
jection ; but it is also frequently employed with one, when,
as above stated (r. 162,, a), different particles are employed
to signify respectful or disrespectful address : >ft Ht: MfljidU ' O
Pandits ;' "^ xn^ * Ho, traveller.'
SECTION IL
Adjectives,
293. The adjective agrees with a corresponding substantive
noun or pronoun, expressed or understood, in gender, number,
3 o
SYNTAX.
and case : «lc*c|R ^^: ' a strong man ;' i^M^rit ^ * a beautiful
woman ;' w "^ ' a white umbrella ;' ftTfTf^R «Ic5)p*<^ * like
two mighty Hons ;' ^rwm^ ^^TRt^ ^^R%^ ^Tl^f^ ^^JTH^ ' He
approached the steeds, spare, vigorous, and able for the road/
a. When a common adjective occurs in a sentence with
more than one noun or pronoun, it may take the plural
number and the prevailing gender, and agree with them
collectively: ^^ ^T^'hrr^ ^|f WTT^: ^I and mine are all
dependent upon thee ;' ^^ ^ Hlrilfqrid ^uft HTt^T wn: f^m
^»*iohi«H "^Hf ^rsrr HW^T ^^rJ^^TT * Manu has said, that both
parents when aged, a virtuous wife, and an infant son, are to
be nourished, even if they do a hundred improper acts.' If
the words admit of the disjunctive copulative, expressed or
understood, the adjective will be put in the singular number,
and agree in gender with the word nearest to it : "^im <^c^^:
"SR^: JyiHlHI ''^ ^W * Sorrow, strife, or itching, being yielded
to, augments/
b. Many words properly attributives are used as substan-
tives : TT^T 'HHt5t: ^*^WT "^ f^^t^sf^ cR^aTf ' Mortals are
become immortals (or immortal) ; there is no difference what-
ever/ Most attributives of agency, derived from verbs, admit
of this apphcation ; »lJ|r*#r * the maker of the world,' * a deity ;'
S H IH f %7rr * the leader of armies,' ' a general,' &c. ; as has
already been intimated in considering the cases of the nouns.
c. Adjectives, when expressing degrees of comparison, influ-
ence the inflexions of the nouns with which they are con-
nected. When they express the comparative degree, the noun
is put in the ablative case : "?T i^Tpftsf^ >rTTiT * There is nothing
better than wealth ;' ^H^HI^firf?^ i^'im^ * Yudhisht'hira is
older than Arjima/ When the superlative, the noun takes
either the genitive or the locative case : VT#TT^ or vrtTTSTOT
5■^f*^fT: mfyy: ' Duryodhana was the wickedest of the sons of
Dhritarasht'ra.' The comparative may also be used with the
instrumental case : ^ "g WfTTT^ ^"m ' Who has a more happy
ending than I ?' ^ %i»WR ^^T ^wAgril^M^r ^rr^rnim:^ HT
ADJECTIVES. 387
Mc^inHHUfv^i: ' If he has died who was four times more pros-
perous than thou, and more virtuous than thy son, grieve not
for thy son.' The termination of degree may convert a sub-
stantive into an adjective : ^ra^w: ^^iHT: ' Contentment is most
heavenly.'
d. The adjective is sometimes employed in a comparative
signification, whilst retaining its positive form ; as, mMKuTH^
<*r<JH ^^ ' a heart hard (or harder) than stone ;' "^Ml^if or
^Qm %^\ ttt: * Maitra is clever (the cleverest) of, or amongst,
the scholars.'
e. "^, either singly or compounded, expresses the super-
lative degree, and governs either the genitive or locative case :
-ciriuir^f 7n: TT^TT 75^^ Ml* chi^H ^ ' The cow is the best of
quadrupeds ; gold the best of metals,' This word, may be
similarly used in the neuter gender and singular number in
apposition with nouns in any gender or number, and in con-
nexion w ith a negative : ^nTT7TH7T^#RT}f ^l^HI^Ji ^ -^^ifniH: * Of
^sons) unborn, dead, or silly, the two first are the best, not
the last;' ^7^^ n^ -q^ ^ ^ H^^^l^l^fq ^ One son of good
qualities is better than a hundred blockheads.'
f. Terms implying ' less' or * more,^ either in quantity or
•degree, and used in a comparative relation, govern the ablative
case : ^jrildH ' less than a hundred ;' ^irr^fy^ ' more than a
hundred ;' ^TRTt^: ^^-Hlr^ f^Ff%H»t ' Intelligence from a lover
is something less than a meeting.' ^f^ofi may also be con-
nected with the noun in the genitive and locative case : ^^
sfvofi: TCm\ ' A Prastha is more than a Kudava ;' rlmfmAl<>lil
Trai: "^i^ ' five months more than those (years).'
^. The government of numerals has already been adverted
to (p. 88) ; to which it may be added, that their Taddhita
derivatives may be used analogously to "^rffj wdth the invariable
neuter termination, with nouns of any gender and in any
case: inf^ M^l^lH ^Im^t: ^1^"^ ^rfWll'^ 'After that, he had
fifty maiden daughters;' t(^t^ J^ft: ^dl^H^^MS^^ f^
' Fifty other sons of the Manu were upon the earth.'
3 D 2
S88 SYNTAX.
SECTION HI.
Pronouns,
294. Personal pronouns of the first or second person have
but one gender : those of the third, and pronouns of the other
classes, vary their gender according to the noun to which they
relate, expressed or understood : "iR^ "J^t ' that man ;' ir^ "JTrQ"
* this woman -,' ^ f^rfeRT ^ ' made by that artist.'
a. The optional inflexions of the two first personal pronouns,
TT, ^, tft, m, r«rr, ^, ^P^, ^:, are not used indiscriminately, but
with certain limitations. They are not to be used at the
beginning of a metrical foot or period, nor in construction
with the conjunctions ^, ^T^, ^, or the expletives ^ and ^?^,
nor with a word meaning ^ seeing,^ used metaphorically : TH"
^m^ tnr^ «m WSurrH^iy^: ^Thy enemies, O king, they are
still more mine,' not w ^^^: at the head of the line, even if
the metre allowed it ; ^^Tfl"|Tifl^, not "sft and ^* with ^, * of
us two, and of you two ;' ^Mr^ t:^ ' May Hari even pre-
serve me,' not in ; ^rw*^ TT "5^*4 ^hnrf ^ Let it be given to us
or to you,' not "^ft ^ "q^ ^ ; ^Rwrf^^Fn' f ^^ ' '^^^ wealth is in
vain,' not ^ ^. In these prohibitions euphony is consulted,
and also distinctness. When ' seeing' is intended in any other
than a literal sense, the substitutes are not employed : '^^T
HI^Hj? ' He sees thee by his mind.' When the ' seeing' is
literal, either form may be allowed, ?n or ^rf, i^ or i^ "^^TrfrT
^ He beholds me,' &c. ; xr^xrj Hlf^o^ftlrt ' Let him see thee
without delay.'
b. These substitutes may not be used after a noun in the
vocative case, being the first in a sentence, unless an epithet
intervene : ^^ im t|H4t^«4 ' O my Guru ! salutation to thee ;'
but ^"t <*mrt1 ^: Tqrf^ ' O merciful Hari ! protect us.'
c. The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in num-
ber and gender : the case is determined by its connexion with
other parts of the sentence : x|^ ^ ^stjK 75^ ^^^^^ ^ ^ift'l^'iT
* Let a wise man associate that with that, with which any thing
PRONOUNS. 389
in the world corresponds ;' "J^: ^ ttt. ^T^ ^^rMini^^lPH ^irrfVr
^■5T ^|rH({ "fTff ^ He is the supreme male, O Partha, in whose
interior all beings abide, by whom the universe is pervaded/
d. The masculine and feminine inflexions of the third per-
sonal pronoun are not unfrequently used in combination with
the pronouns of the first and second person, or as substitutes
for them, Hke ' ipse,' ^ ipsa,' in Latin : ^s^^rrf Tifif imr: ' I
(ego ipse) have come to this condition ;' ^s^ ^^iMi^i c5^
^l^llf ' 1 (ego ipsa) am the vilest of women in the world ;' ^
ik HnrfTPTFT irfw Hr^^i**! * Do thou (tu ipse) console these
thy brothers ;' ^ ^if t^H^n<<W '^TCR: TjHqVirHHf ' We (nos ipsi)
traverse this earth in search of Damayanti.' It is used some-
times without the proper personal pronoun : "m fa^UHlfritf tjiJ
Tiq" TT ^ Do thou (ipsa) quickly mount either an elephant or
chariot ;' ^ iTrarT WT^ ^ A^^^ "q^T fVfv I ^^f^ I ' Do thou
(ipse), having gone quickly to the Bahuda river, offer fit liba-
tions to the gods/ The third personal pronoun may be also
used in a similar manner with a demonstrative pronoun : '^s^
r^^c^HUiiH Tf^s^fk ' That very man approaches to an extended
road.'
e. A relative pronoun may be sometimes used in like
manner with a personal pronoun, when the sentence is inter-
rogative : inrr r<H I <*ri I ^if^s^pHTsiirH iftf^ ' Thus bereft of
my children, who (am) I, (that I should) wish to live ?'
y. The relative and interrogative pronoun, the latter in
combination with the particles f^ or ^^t, are sometimes used
together to form an indefinite distributive pronoun : <**^ni| ^
^rff^ ^ by some act or other ;' ^n: cJilOaWl^ril T^I^TT: ^"f^T^-
■qf^T: ^ Whatever acts of enjoyment may be done by a living
man.'
SECTION IV.
Indeclinables.
295. Adverbs. The greater number of these, as already
observed, are merely nouns in an invariable neuter inflexion ;
390 SYNTAX.
most commonly that of the accusative neuter, although other
cases are sometimes admitted ; as, f^ or frou "WTTr^ ' Having
meditated for a long time ;^ HP^ril^ ^\»^ill f^rf^W ^l!i<i
^ The two earrings were begged by the king of the gods, for
the good of thee ;' tRR: chvui^f ^rgTrPTOi^ ^ The kings came
for the maiden ;' ^nqr^ ^^c(^HM)^^iri^ ' He kneaded others,
kneadingly with his hands ;* ir^# "^TEff "q^^: ^ Indra was rain-
ing, according to the season ;^ ^ST^IT^W TT^iW * He dwelt there
privately.'
a, A number of adverbs are formed of nouns in the inva-
riable neuter, compounded with xrt ; as, 1T»T^ xr^nf^fv ' Offer
sacrifice according to rule ;' "^[^Tf •M'^MN «»5f^ * Having made
worship as was fitting ;' w^ iisiii^^ chVjiiiHIfi ' He told him as
it had happened ;' TnrrSfTf^ *i4lr(^ ^ Let him do according to
his ability.^ "f^fv ' sort,' * kind,' becoming in composition fc[V,
is also used adverbially with ^?, "TRT and the like ; as, TRT-
f^ '■ in various ways ;' and so is ^, * before,' combined with
a noun, to express something prior to an act done ; as, ^cj^j^i
'^gr«(*l ^ire|M||* ' Being thus addressed in many ways, preceded
by acts of conciliation ;' ^r|f^'«^* HT^ H ^^\m "^TTT ^HTT ' Through
(previous) ignorance, thy cow, O sage, was killed by me ;' l^*
^ft^f^ron'ftffT ^nr^njlf W^ ^«^IH * Having been promised by him,
I will liberate thee, preceded by an oath.^
h. Many adverbs are also formed from pronouns, or are the
pronouns themselves, in the invariable neuter accusative, or in
some other case; as, inr, ^, ^IWHT, 'wherefore,' 'whence;*
T\^ l^y ITWn^, * therefore,' ' thence.' They are frequently
put correlatively, as in a familiar verse in the Hitopadesa,
which exhibits most of them : xrwra^ ^ ^HTT ^ ^T ^ '^^ \
-MN^ "TW "^ ^HnjHHTrRofi'^ I riWI^ W«T ^ inn ^ TT^ ^ (TW t
ITR^ ira' ^ r^Ml^^l^llrf'^'fif I * Whence, and wherefore, and as,
and when, and what, and how much, and where, one's own acts
are good or evil ; thence, and therefore, and so, and then, and
that, and so much, and there, (the condition of a man) pro-
ceeds from subjection to destiny.'
INDECLINABLES. 891
c. The adverb ^ * thus/ * so/ * ita/ is of constant use, not
only in its own sense, as ^l^W ' having so said/ ^i*||<+ll^ ' hav-
ing thus heard/ but to mark a quotation or a parenthesis, or
separate one part of a sentence from another : *T 1^1^ M<JHirrt
chKiif * He reads the S'astras : this is not the cause :' j;^ f^
rnrr ^TRT ir^rnr ^ "T: W * Indra is the chief king of the
gods : so it has been heard by us :' ^STTWjrrfi^nwN^ ' Be
seated : thus they said :' ^w ^^T^'tT IT^: ' In this manner
sang the quiristers of the gods :' ^s^H^^Pnfw '^^mr ^*^J||^-
^T^fk * Who waits (so) ? I am here ; (thus) let him say ; and,
Give your commands' (thus let him speak) : ^nfts"^ "gofHk
cti^»iil^ TT "^ft^N ^iTrf^ ' Therefore I say, By desire of a bracelet,'
and so forth, ^fff in combination with thtT forms an adverb
of assent, ^ so be it,' the verb being understood : "N^W H^i^^l
* Vidura having said to him, So be it/
The influence of adverbs on the cases of nouns has already
been indicated. The manner in which they are connected
with verbs will be presently adverted to.
296. Prepositions. It is unnecessary to make any further
remarks upon their government, as, whether singly or in
connexion with verbs, sufficient instances have already been
given (p. 97).
297. Conjunctions. The employment of copulatives of
this description requires no particular observation, as they
fulfil their usual offices, and being sometimes omitted, or
sometimes multiplied, for the sake of emphasis or perspicuity.
a. The copulative conjunction in most frequent use is ^
' and ;' which, when it connects words in the same sentence,
connects nouns either in the same cases or in those having a
similar government, and verbs in the same tenses or in different
ones of like purport. -Ulim JTTWt ^TU^ ^W^ W ^nSi: ^ tiriPm
* Having taken the wives and sons of PanS^u, and those two
(dead) bodies, they set out :' v^pr^XRr^^ THmr f^>j^H^ ' From
his proficiency in the science of arms, and by his intense
devotion :' ffpft ^ ^nftnrr TfNt ^ fVr: shtPmi ^^^Q^^va "gr^iw:
392 SYNTAX.
*And the harlot was punished, and the cowherd's wife was
banished, and Kandarpaketu was honoured :' ^|rH^IHI^i.«Mi4l
^^ %^Tr^"^ ' Tranquil they consoled her, and said these
words.' When the sentences are different, they have their
several construction, although connected by the copulative :
-rfftrm ^Tt^ ^nf^: ^ijHn^n: i w ^iit^r^ft ^nrn: xm^^^
xqrnf: I * The son of Kuru was left in that wood, and the
Nagas disappeared even as the Pandava was looking.' The
conjunction is sometimes repeated, either for emphasis or to
imply immediate connexion: ^ '^ Hlg^^'^'H* ^^ ^Tf^^J^J
' And they reached the ocean, and VishAu woke ;' i. e. * as
soon as.' '^ is frequently combined with other copulatives,
either for the sake of emphasis or for the convenience of the
rhythm : ^ TTTT^ ^T^l^gf f^^T".*!^! fill' ^^ I ^^F^ W^ ^^mk ^tfw
^11^ IT^ ^ I ' He having heard of the science of arms, and
also the heavenly weapons of Rama, fixed his mind upon
them, and also upon the science of polity.'
b. Disjunctive copulatives may likewise combine words in
similar inflexions : ^^iftir ^ "^I^ '^T "^TT ' Choose the arms
or my person ;' ^TWT "J^: Tff^T Hl^T ^i^ Hf^ f^ ^ A man's
self, a son, a wife, or in difficulty (in their absence) even a
daughter ;' "grTT^ ^ril*^ri'^ tr^ ^^^ mfhnT I "^T ^ Jl^fn^ ^^
TT^TO «MMin^^ I * That which thou sayest, O rich in devotion,
is the progeny of the benevolent ; but this grief is not to be
removed by a human being.^
c. The connexion of certain of the conjunctions with parti-
cular tenses of the verbs will be subsequently explained.
298. Interjections. These are used sometimes with nouns
in the vocative case, or sometimes in the accusative or dative, as
already intimated. They also occur singly as exclamations.
The following verse from Bhatti collects some of either kind :
^rr: ^ "^w ^ f%^ ^ Hid<^=iriir»{ fVr^ i ^ ftnr: urftr i^ ^ ^rsi^
f^HcTR ^: ^ Ah sad ! O ! alas ! strange ! O mother ! Shame on
the gods ! O father ! Where art thou, O lovely-browed ? Thus
he frequently exclaimed.^ Various nouns and phrases are also
VERBS.
employed as interjections : WT^ ' well done !' * bravo !' ^ or
'^^{c6 ' good luck ! ' ^nif ' welcome ! ' lyftjf ' hail 1 ' f^WT
* lucky,' ' prosperous,' and the like : and also others which
are specially employed in offering libations to the gods or
manes, as noticed above.
SECTION V.
Verbs.
298. The different voices in which the active verb may be
conjugated have been already described (p. ii3)> as well as
the changes to which either may be subjected when a verb is
compounded with an inseparable preposition (p. 259). Besides
those distinctions, and their derivative forms or modes, the
verb occurs also in construction in the passive voice, and as
transitive, intransitive, or neuter, impersonal or reflective ; as,
TfT^TPf ^[^: ^^^TS'^Tj^ ^ Suparna quickly seized the large
serpent ;' niohmn H^lflc^: * The vast mountain shook ;' MiiNlHI
Fh^H: "^^ * The sound of drums is heard ;' ^Sifn >|Trrf«T
JJ^^SQl^"^ ^ All beings are supported by householders ;' »nn
r*i|ff ^ It is done by me ;' * I do or have done :' lanu n«T^
* It is gone by thee ;' ' Thou goest or art gone :' d^r^Hl'^A(d ' It
was risen by the moon ;' * The moon rose :' •rrarn^'if^ (*m^
3lli(ri "^ ' It is not (by any one) deceased or born out of season :'
fWff ofiT? * The wood breaks ;' it breaks of itself : ini|H M^^^
' The rice boils ;' it boils of itself. When a verb is not
impersonal it agrees with a nominative, expressed or implied,
in number and person, as exemplified under the nominative
case of nouns. When impersonal, it may be considered that
a nominative, the name of the thing or action intended by the
verb, is understood. Thus r^^ P+HH, ^ It is done by thee,' is
nothing more than the ellipse of the perfect sentence, l^m
f^fi^ oF§ * The act is done by thee ;' cR^# being understood.
The powers of the different tenses have also been already
3 E
394 SYNTAX.
described (p. iii); but their application in construction is
subject to some modifications, which it is necessary to notice.
299. Present tense ('^I^HI*^ TJ^). This tense indicates
present time, actual or continuous, that which is now, or
which is occasionally or always : wf^*T "S^ ^II^^HVl^ * At
this moment he reads the S'astra :' trjH ^^n^fff ' He eats flesh ;'
he does so habitually : ?[^ oWKT: "^trf^ ' Here the boys play ;'
either now or occasionally : WT i<<^^chlc^MJ|^^W ' The world
lasts until the time of dissolution.'
a. The present tense may also express other modifications
of time, or the absence of any distinction ; as when used with
^rftr or »TT'3 to intimate ' censure' or * condemnation :' IJ^tsfrj
?Tnrf FI»TfiT ' A man even abandons a wife ;' he either does so
now, or has done or will do it :' WTW TT^H^"?^ l^'^'T^ ilM^fri
^ Your reverence ever conducts sacrifices for S'lidras.'
b. The present tense may be used in reply to a question
referring to either past or future time, when not remote :
'SR^TTTftsftr ' When hast thou come ?^ ^s^HFT^Tf^T or ^pm»^
' I come, or I have come, now ;' oR^ ilPH'uifjH ' When wilt
thou go ?' Wts^ ii^iPh or JirHmiPH ' I go, or I shall go, now/
It may also be used in reply to a question referring to time
past, when it is preceded by »T"g; as, foPTSRT^: *What hast
thou done }' rfg ofcClfH «I3# ' Verily I perform an action ;*
instead of ^roFT%* ' I did.' It may be used in the same way, it
' is said, when preceded by tT or by g ; oh<!Ho»»|i(T: f^ ' What hast
thou made the mat ?' Tf 4iC\Ch ' I do not make (for, I have not
made) it ;' g ohO Ph * Verily I make (for, have made) it.' The
present tense may be used with a past signification when
connected with "jrr ; as, ^THift^ "JU NI^^IT: ' Brahmans formerly
dwell (for, dwelt) here.'
c. The present tense may be used for the future in con-
nexion with the particles iTRT^, ^, ^SR^, or ^fiff ; as, in^ >j9i
WT^ ^f^ ^ Give him as long as he will eat ;' tT 1^1 (h "JCT
c^^MHig^N^ ^VTHT^ * I go not (I will not go) again to Lanka
VERBS. 895
as long as I have (shall have) life ;' cR^ or cRf^ y^mfH 'fVfV'^
' When do I (shall I) see Govinda ?' It may also be used for
the future when in connexion with a word expressing a short
time to come : "3?^* f^ ij^^if^ ' I die (shall die) after an hour.'
d. When deliberation or election is intended^ the present
tense may be used for the future : f^ ^RrrfH * What do I ?' for
f^ chri^miPH ' What shall I do ?' ^Tnfh ^Ffft or ijw^ afiinf ^>f^
or TfT:Brftr * Which of these two, or of these, wilt thou choose P
^ ^ "j^ltH 7:^T#r 'Whom sorrowful do I (for shall I) ask?'
It may also be used for the future, when conditional conse-
quence is imphed : "^^s^ ^^rfrT H ^T^* xprfrT ' Who bestows food
goes (for, wiU go) to heaven.' And it may be employed in a
future sense with the usual signs of the conditional mood, xrf^
and ^iT; as, ^^s^^^Pd VT^ TTR: ^ If the heaven rains, we
sow (for, shall sow) the com.' In such a sort of phrase the
future or the past may also be employed.- The present may
alternate with the future also, in a similarly constructed sen-
tence, with irf^ or ^IT, when the consequence is expressed by
the imperative : ^^i||U||^ WRT^fw (or ^MiPHUirri) 1^ ^^"^^
^ If the teacher comes (or will come), do thou read the Veda/
€. A more remarkable modification of the present, and one
of frequent occurrence, is effected by the addition of the
particle m, which gives it a past signification. This particle
appears to be derived from the first person plural of the
present tense of the auxiliary verb, ^(K ' sumus,' ' we are,'
rejecting the Visarga. It is used, however, indifferently in all
the persons and numbers of the verb to which it is attached.
^nrfcT ^ ^;f>TfTC ' Yudhish^hira sacrificed ;' ^rfmiNPfl W ^ftlT:
' The citizens ran quickly ;' ^ ^lud W ' by whom it was
stood.' It may precede the verb, either immediately or in a
different part of the sentence i R W ^r^ T^TOST "TTT FTT^ "T
f%*fNw: ' Thou didst not acknowledge, O great king, what
Vibhishana said -/ n^ W Pi^riHM^ ' He said in council what
was good.'
300. First praeterite or imperfect (^H^H^ c5^). As already
3 E 2
396 SYNTAX.
remarked (p. iii), this tense indicates action that has taken
place at any time prior to the current day ; and although it is
very commonly used in a vague manner, yet the past is in
general not absolute or perfect, but implies continuity or con-
nexion with some other action : ilN'od^l^l^ ' He gave com-
mand (to do something) :' XTT^^^ fH"^TR^Tfl[^ ' He gave alms
as long as he lived -^ the giving was continuous : ^ MliSHIW-
fd^l^FHlH^H ^HHNg * This full moon being passed, he read
the Agni prayers, and sacrificed with the Soma juice ;' these
acts were dependent upon a period not remotely past: mft
'After that Indrajit was seen ascended into the air, striking
the illusory Sita with his sword, the son of the wind spake
to him.'
a. The imperfect may be used in connexion with the pre-
sent tense of verbs implying ^ recollection,' if preceded by xn^;
^rftnrRTftr ^"^^ ^ cM^Hfl^K^^Rrm ' Thou knowest, Devadatta,
how we did dwell in Kasmira i' or "ir^ may be dispensed with,
if a connected action is also described ; as, wrftf cjrrgpR'ftE^-
AH\H W^^^^^TTgW'f^ ' Thou rememberest we did dwell in
Kashmir, and did eat rice there.'
b. Either the imperfect or the perfect may be used with
the expletive ^ ; jff( ^ 'HoJiCli^ or '^^Bn: ^ Thus he did :' also
after ^fPSTiT * continually ;' ^(mt^ohClif^ ^(HI^<*K * He did continu-
ally.' They may also be optionally used in question and
answer, if the time be not long past ; as, ^TTSaif^ f^ ^ Did he
go ?' ^iiJ|<cd(t^ * He did go :' ^i\\H "N ^ Has he gone ?' ipTR
* He went.' But if the time of the act be remote, the perfect
only is used : "^Wt: «WT HMM f^ * What ? slew Krishna, Kansa ?'
a '^HIH ^: ^ He slew him.'
c. The negative m, derived from ?rr^, may be conjoined
with Wy and attached to the imperfect, to which it gives the
sense of the prohibitive-imperative. When jto is used in this
manner, the temporal augment ^ is rejected : HT^RH^: * Be
thou not ;' mw «Krti^ * Let him not do ;' itrr JT^f^ff "g^* * Do
VERBS. 897
not you two weep ;' inFf fwTT ' Do not ye tarry/ The nega-
tive is also used without the particle W; but not in the
imperative sense, although it causes the loss of the augment :
W^tT!^ m ^Tfl^: ' Thou hast not known my disposition/
301. Praeterite (xrct^ f<^). This tense denotes something
absolutely past : ^^FR ' he made ;' MMM ^ he cooked ;' Wift
f^rtnr ^JK^ Tnnft ^^'^^t: ' Krishna having gone forth from
the city departed ;' rildoMIgm* PH^tMM Tjm ' Rama killed the
female demon called Ta^aka;^ ^^^f^* ^^PTTTRr fr^Nrrfrnrf^fW:
* The Rishi did him honour with particular attentions/ The
tense may also be used when mental absence or unconscious-
ness is implied: ^rfts^ f%f5 f^T^cynr 'Whilst I slept he still
talked.^ It is employed in construction, however, without
much attention to any particular specification of past time,
and alternates, at the convenience of the writer, with both the
imperfect and the indefinite past.
302. Indefinite past (^IHI-^ cgr). This is properly used
in a general and indefinite manner for time past, whether
proximate or remote, ^sw ^<ir^<^IM*<» PMriHrimfTri^ ^H^M
^■^ I ^T^ ^T^:^TOcT ^ift ^*J<4yiri >*j^ifl<0''« I ' He studied
the Vedas, he sacrificed to the gods ; he made Ubations to the
manes, he respected his kinsmen ; he subdued the class of
six (evil feelings), he dehghted in regal polity, and utterly
destroyed his foes / ^nprf^TSr * Rain was, or it rained, to-day :'
?rf ^ ^^^ 'Having seen her, he was happy:' ^ryfyif
«<iiHMlHMlKj1^lVij^|tj^ ' He asked the Rakshasas, Why have ye
awakened me ?'
a. This form of the praeterite, or either of the others, may
be used as well as the present (see r. 299, b) when preceded
by "gxT ; as, ^^TTTiwIt^ tjh f?r»rr: * Brahmans formerly dwelt
here v* also ^r^ro^ or "grg: as well as ^?rf^, as above. It
may be used also optionally with the future or present, when
the conditional consequence of a past action is expressed:
^T^^"^^ \IMH^mf7: * If it had rained, we had sown the grain.*
b, m, derived from iTT^, is frequently used with the indefi-
398 SYNTAX.
nite past, when it gives it the" force of the imperative, and
causes the rejection of the temporal augment : m h^: * Do
not fear ;' in ST^: ' Do not grieve ;^ TT >pr ^ Let it not be ;'
^i ^»T^: ■J't: lif^ * Never do so again ;' W[ ^TW T^: f^l
' Do not give your mind to wickedness.' It may also be
employed with w, as, in ^ "^WTt ' Do not go.' It is also used
in the same manner with another negative, in an affirmative
sense : m f|r^ rf ^>ft^ ' Do not not-kill (i. e. kill) my foes.^
There are examples, however, especially in the older writers,
of the use of this negative with the indefinite past, in which
the augment is retained ; as, iTT PHMIr^ ilfriyi r^^iTt ^ Do not
thou ever obtain reputation, O barbarian?^ Ramayana: and
when the verb is compounded with a preposition, the augment
of the imperfect and the indefinite past may be retained ; as,
^r§rr '^ Wt itt ^mn^ ^ Let not faith depart from us ;' Manu : in
ing^^nr^^Trr: ' Do not be subject to wrath ;' Mahabharata.
On the other hand, it is rejected in compounds also ; as,
TRiTWr ^innrnf ' Do no disrespect to thy own soul.' The
difference is explained by affirming that a different negative,
m not irr^, is employed ; the former not requiring the elision
of the augment. It, and not iTT^, is also said to be used with
other tenses ; as with the imperative, wi H^, or the future,
ITT Hfcimrri ' Let it not be.'
303. Definite future (^HHilriH ^). This tense indicates
future time, defined either expressly, as in the example above
given (p. 112), or by some circumstance or event not immedi-
ately proximate, or, as it is expressed, not of day ; as in the
following example from Bhatti : ^UMprt^riKMl Wfl V^irm^l
f^ I nnrr* ^ Sf^rarwt¥T ^ HTTT. ^ 1 ^ Our mothers having
seen thee shall be delighted, and shall ask after the welfare
of us both, along with Maithili ; and Bharata will rejoice
exceedingly.'
a. This form of the future is used optionally with the inde-
finite future or the present in certain phrases or combinations ;
as with cR^T or cuff ; o»s^ >ftWT or >ft^, ^ wnn or ^I^Prt,
VERBS. 399
^ When will he eat ? Where .will he remain ?* also with the
interrogative implying ' preference ;^ f^ oF»Tt or ojnm ^^OrilPH or
^O^mP^ ' What or which wilt thou choose ?' also when it
denotes the consequence of a conditional act ; xft fW^ ^TITT or
^TWfw ^ ^^* "Tnrr or xrrwfrT ' He who shall give alms will go
to heaven.'
304. Indefinite future {'^ %^). The time expressed by
this tense may be either immediately or remotely future : •rr^
^t^f^^s^ ' I shall not be seen to-day ;' H Pl.^ I Ph fw^ ^
^irr%^rnTT TT ^ Since my sons are slain, I will die or conquer.*
«. When connected with verbs implying ' recollection,' this
tense may be used with a past signification ; as, ^Rxftr cRW
iftofii^ ^T^TR: ' Rememberest thou Krishna ; we shall dwell
(for, we were dwelling) at Gokula:' also optionally, when one
action is dependent upon another ; as, miS^ ^^^ cET^Tt^
^^WT'TOT^^ ^"IviMIH^ ' Rememberest thou Devadatta ; we dwell
in Kashmir, and dressed (shall dress) rice there :' otherwise
the imperfect may be used, as above.
b. It alternates, as above remarked, with the definite future
after oR^ and cfif^ ; also when * choice' or ' consequence' is
signified, or when an act contingent upon some event is
predicated : ^T^lft'orfif vt^ ^^i^mih: ' If it shall rain we will
sow the corn.'
c. The indefinite future is to be used where dispatch is
signified; as, rff: "^W jiP^ismPh *The messenger will go swiftly:'
also when continuous action is implied ; i4nW)«4H^* ^Twfw ' As
long as life lasts he will give food :' also when an act is
followed for a certain time without interruption ; ^^MHHNI^I-
illP^^rf) ril^mHMlHUitM^ ^"^HH ^ ^«*lri ' When this future day of
new moon (is), on that (day) he will read the prayers to Agni,
and sacrifice with the Soma juice.' It is used in like manner
when ^RT, * after,' is employed to denote immediately subse-
quent place or time : iftsTm««TT i\*ii^ ^IMIdPcigc^lH^ IRinT^^
«£i^lNl4rigfl<H >d^TR% ' This is the road to Pa^aliputra, (and
ha\dng gone) subsequently by that of Kausambi, we will there
400 SYNTAX.
eat food :' ifts^ ^HrH^ VHMiml cT^ ^^'M^HIij^l^H^IM^ pit ^-
tqTH% * When the future (next) year (is arrived), then imme-
diately, on the full moon of the month ^grahayaiia, we,
entering upon devotion, will study (the Vedas).' If xjttt be
used instead of ^r^ the definite future may be used ; Ml^jllj-
^l^llMl^d ^TiflTfW?^ or ^rWHTR^ ; and the latter only is to be
employed if days or nights be specified ; as, ^si} JTRT SHN(l«ft
H^NU M^<^:^|l.M^g<luirilH^ * When the future (next) month
(is arrived), and fifteen days after it (have passed), then we
will study.'
d. When disbelief, doubt, or intolerance is signified, and
especially if put interrogatively, the indefinite future may be
used optionally with the potential: tT ^mTT^^lf*!, or ^T H^
HTr«T "^ix PH'^i^ or rnrt^mftr * I cannot believe, or I cannot
endure, that you revile Vishnu,' i. e. either should or shall
revile or have reviled : ^ ^Krrd or ^fttr^ ^ f^T^ or rHPrf^mrrf
' Who or which may or will revile Hari ?' cR ^^ >T^T^ ^n»I^
or xrnTftrorfrr ' For what S'lidra may or will your reverence
perform sacrifices?' If preceded by the compound particle
rchr«hc6 or by ^rftcT or its synonymes in these senses, the future
only, not the potential, is employed : ^ Hi^\^i\\{H ^TSTR f^f^
OTf5 xrrSTftroiffr ' I cannot think it possible your reverence will
sacrifice for a S'lidra:' also ^f%, H^fiT or f^raw, K^T^ "^TO
HT^Tftr^rfir * Is it (possible, can it be) your reverence will sacri-
fice for a S'lidra?' The same tense may be used optionally
with the potential when possibility is admitted or expected:
fl^HmPH ^a*l^ (or ^J^hr) ^^"^ ' I think it possible your
excellency will eat ;' ^ ■^iHlf^'f ITTW ^»TomS^ Xjyrm \ TJ^ <*iiSrd
J I leaf I fill *r*^ I fill ^ r^HiiSfw I ^ By whom is it supposed, that in
battle Raghava will cut to pieces the limbs, or scatter the
members, of KumbhakarAa.'
e. The indefinite future is used with exclamations of,
astonishment, if any conditional particle, as ira or xrf^, be not
inserted : ^msR^^T?^ ^ ^^fif ' Wonderful ! the blind man
will see (can see) KrishAa.' It may also be used with the
VERBS. 401
particles TiT and ^rftr when implying ^ doubt ;' Trf ^5[|?V MPrimfri
' Will the staff fall (or not) ?' ^tr\nFTflT ITR 'Will he shut the
door ?' and must be used with '^H'T when it signifies ' cer-
tainty' or ' capability ;' ^c5 fu^ "^f^cHT ^fH^flT ' Certainly
Krishna will kill (that is, is able to kill) the elephant.'
305. Imperative (f%f>l<5t^). The uses of the imperative
tense require no particular illustration. It has, however, a
first as well as a third person ; to which, ^ command^ or
* injunction' is not appHcable : but as the powers of this mood
correspond with those of the potential, and consequently com-
prehend ^ permission' and * capability,' as signified by ' may/
' let,' ' can,' there is no difficulty in understanding their appli-
cability to any person indifferently, trf^ l|U|e{>r "Jift^ <*I^'^H1*IW
W nfw: ' Let this be thy determination, I may not cause the
dreadful destruction of the servants :' ijfv ohl^^l^M ^ Tr^
in^ TTER ' Be thou my messenger ; and having gone, say
(thus) to Raghava.^
a. The imperative is very frequently used in the third per-
son singular of the passive, either with a nominative expressed,
or with the agent in the instrumental case expressed or under-
stood; in which latter case it is used indefinitely: ^I'HT^rif
^ ^ Let the queen be brought ;' >ft ^: ^Wini ^imf ' Ho
Panclits, be it heard,^ i. e. "^i^TrfW: ' by you ;' ^^hnrf ' Let it be
done ;' ^TTJ|»^ril' * Let it be come,' i. e. "i^rf^ ' by some one '/
1^ TXT^inWif: ' Sita, let it be gone hence,^ i. e. by thee, or ' Go
thou away ;' T?er: ^efNnrf ' Let the carriage be stopped,' or t^
^^efhiwt ' Let it be stopped by the carriage ;' g^^PflTRT^TT: ' Let
all hopes be dismissed,^ t: ' by them.'
b. When any act enjoined is to be done afler a short time,
the imperative may be used in relation to the future, the
present or the potential : "^TTfl^^^^TTtnxqnr^^Tnftrorfrr (^TFT-
^acfir or 'STnr^if ) rk ^^HmTh ' If the teacher shall (does or
may) come afler an hour, do thou (then) read the Veda.^ Or
it may be used where time shortly past is implied, without
any condition, when ;?? may be combined with it: "giW H^iff
3 F
402 SYNTAX.
^iPH^fl ^ >T^ ftp: ' After an hour be mistress of the
earth/
c. The imperative may be used optionally with the poten-
tial to express ^ wish :' ^[^aLTfiT >T^rT^ ^J^hr or ^ * I wish your
worship may, or would, eat.' So with -srtr^, itt^, ' I desire,'
* I beg,' or other synonymous verbs.
d. When desire to have any thing done that should be
performed is expressed, FT is used with the imperative : j^
^l<4HUimn FT * Do thou cause the boy to read ; do thou teach
him/
e. The third person singular of the imperative of the sub-
stantive verb is often used with the particle ir# ' so,' * thus,'
absolutely, to signify ^ assent f as, ;^ «^, ;^^JT^, ^ So be it ;'
^^'RftrErfw if "^tItT tng^T^ ^vfro * And Yudhisht'hira also thus
replied to him, So be it.'
/. The negative ?n is prefixed to the imperative sometimes,
with a sense equivalent to that of the present tense : m >T^
' there* is not ;' m "^ W fVnnr: ^^ 'T^f^ Vjf^ ' There is not
(or may not be) any crime in thee, O prince, killing thy foes.'
g. Trnr is substituted for the terminations of the second and
third persons singular of the imperative, when used in a bene-
dictory sense : H«<HI<r«(^^ r^W "^i^* ^45^f?T ' Mayest thou be
undivided from thy husband henceforth in thine own dwelling.'
306. Potential mood (f^ rHH>^ii|IH>^lilli|lg^*i|i{JMI'^H^ fc5^).
The senses of the potential mood, as detailed in the citation
from Panini, have been explained above (p. 112). It is suffi-
cient here to add a few examples of its application. ^^^^T^-
lOTOTt >TtiT^^ ^T^: ^T^t ^ Let a man pleased make the Brahmans
happy, and feed them deliberately:' riWl^^J ^^ ^"^ ^[ft^»^
' Therefore let a man of fortitude neither rejoice nor grieve :' •?
* Let not a wise man disturb a cow drinking, nor tell of it to
another ; nor, having seen a rainbow in the sky, let him point
it out to another.'
a. The potential mood is very commonly employed as the
VERBS. 403
conditional or subjunctive mood in combination with particles
indicating * condition,' ' contingency/ * alternative^' ^ uncer-
tainty/ * doubt/ ^ astonishment/ and the like ; as, xrf^, ^,
* if / ^ ^ as/ ' since / XRT * as / tt^ ^ as/ * so/ * that / xrW
^ where/ ^ how / tt^ ^ when / »rr'g ' ever / ^tj ^ although/
* since / ^ or TrT or TfTTftr * whether / f^ ^ what / ^ff^ ^ how /
f^^ ' wonderful / &c. »mr# ^ H^I^O^^T^ ^^> ^ Tn75^ ' If
punishment does not protect, people may not recognise pro-
perty :' ^^!3^ HT#^ r^H^^^ri.HI 13RT: ' If there were not
punishment in the world, the people would perish :' ^r^ h:^
— lirjiHI WT^ 'SR'twwr: n^^HrlHf ^ O grief! that, having done
manly deeds, thou (shouldest) abandon glorious fortune :' trt
)g^ ^^t: tT "^I^ * I did not beheve that thou couldest act
thus :' »nfrTt^ •*) tcj Ht tT^ «T H%4 "^TnT^ I -T ^Tt^ "JT ^ m»Ol|gq
vrt^ chVj^H I ^ So that I may not be also in other races a
destroyer of my kin, I will not eat, nor partake in any way of
drink :' XT^ tt^ I^ ^ ^ ^ I m^^r^mOri* ^ 7T^ i^l^jiH^j
vfif I ' When he may judge his own army in good condition,
and that of his adversary in the reverse, let him march against
the enemy :' xn^:^ xft 5:^ rf ^ ^ ^^ vr^ * He who is
distressed by the grief of others can never be happy :' ^^i^^ii:
"sraiT PH'^OT ^snr^J^* * That such persons should revile Krishna,
astonishing !' or vf^ may be used with similar exclamations ;
"N^ irf^ ^svhfhr ' Surprising ! if he read/ TjT and ^fxT may
be used to imply ^ doubt of will,^ or ' capability :' TH or 'srftr
■^r^jl^'q ^ft: ' Will Hari destroy sin ?' ' Will he be pleased to
do so ?^ ^rfxf fjift fsflJ^ f^riiii^ ' Can he indeed break a moun-
tain with his head ?' fofiJTg^ft^ * Why should I grieve ?' ojr^,
when used reproachfully, may be connected with the present
or the potential :' oirq 1^ \plf tetw: or W»ff^ ' How canst thou, or
dost thou, abandon virtue ?'
These particles may be also understood, or dropped alto-
gether, when the condition can be expressed by the use of
correlative terms, or by a preceding phrase : ^"Fpft ^^ ^"tfTT
^Rnf WTHPT^^l^: ^ (Since) Ravana carries (may carry) off Sita,
^v 2,
404 * SYNTAX.
(so) the binding of the great sea may occur i' ftnnTT^ it ftnrft:
^ifqi^l^ PH^Mft^ ' But if the father be Hving, let him offer hba-
tions to those prior to him.'
b. The potential mood is also used to intimate * fitness/
^ propriety,' or ' capability :' r# «fi^ "^: ' Thou shouldest or
oughtest to marry the damsel / ^ vrn^TT^TT^ * He may or can
carry the load ;' cfRST^TT^rifts^* i^WrfiT ^m^ ^ Aided by Karna
and Arjuna, I could conquer even Indra.'
c. Verbs signifying ' to wish' or * desire' may use the
potential optionally with the present : n^f*?^^ or ?[^1T * He
wishes to go ;' ITTmfcSSl^ftrg "SfiTTRTT or ^FTHXiff ^ He desires to
embrace her.' The object of the wish may also be expressed
in the potential, instead of the infinitive ; as, riHIM:^*^rf^ chlHMH
' He wishes he may or might embrace her.'
d. The potential often takes the place of the imperative,
with a similar signification ; TThRT^'R T^: ^ Having taken
water^ thou mayest go,' i. e. go thou: especially when pre-
ceded by mi[¥i ' to order' or ^ enjoin ;' <M4>^f'.M^I<^ft i^Tnjhihn:
' If the teacher come, I desire that thou read.'
e. The potential may be used with a present or future sense
when time not remote is specified : irrTr:afiTc5^ IT'ti: ^^: * The
time is come that thou perform thy penance ;' ^fWTW^* WrT
* Let him sacrifice after an hour.'
f. In didactic and injunctionary sentences the potential is
constantly employed without a nominative expressed, referring
either to a noun previously enunciated, or to such words as
' some one,' ' any one,' ' a man,' or the like, understood :
* Let a man preserve his wealth against misfortune ; but his
wife even by his wealth : let him even preserve himself by a wife
even, or also, by wealth:' trt^^ f^»rer^^T^HWr. ^ Let
(one) not a niggard give to the Brahmans that which may be
agreeable to them.'
g. The potential is used in a future sense to signify the
conditional result of an act which a person may perform :
VERBS. • 405
^fiCrf I ^ ^^^'^ ^i^j||U4 ^r^Hlcft+^HI^ilM^ I ' Whatever Brahman
may read attentive this Birth of Skanda, or may cause it to
be heard by Brahmans, or may hear it repeated by a Brah-
man, he, having obtained abundance and happiness, may
obtain the heaven of that divinity/
307. Benedictive mood (fci^MP^lf^). The term by which
the power of this mood is defined imports * blessing ;* but as
there is also connected with it the notion of ' wish,* and as
this wish or desire may concern oneself as well as another, the
term ' optative' would better indicate its character ; as, w^
^^ fwiT^xR U^ilN^4 I ^wvaf^^l^iw ^Hjk ^ ^"^tJT^ I ' May
the gods direct us, so that we may either conquer such enemies
as Ravana, or die.' It is used sometimes optionally with, the
imperative in a benedictory sense : f^t ^ft^TTr^ or fqt 'ft^
vr^TT ' May your excellency live long.'
308. Conditional mood (fc?'^ f^fH^ ''^)« This mood is
considered as the equivalent of the potential when cause is
indicated as well as consequence, or when one act or condition
is contingent upon another act or condition, and whether the
cause and consequence be future or past. Like the poten-
tial, it is commonly used with the same conditional particles,
irf^, ^-n , &c., as specified above ; as, ^^fF%^Hfw?r w^ ^^T^-
TWP^mfi ' If there shall be abundant rain, then there will be
plenty ;' irf^ ^ JHTT ^^Vsi^fTHn^ TfrfVsifr^nf ' If he had been
seen by me, he should have been devoured (by me).'
a. Although the same notion of contingency prevails, yet
this mood is also used analogously to the potential, to signify
* uncertain consequence,' ' doubt,' ' suspicion,' ' possibihty,' ' in-
quiry,' and the like ; as in this exemplification of its application
from Bhatti: ^^ Km ftj: ^tirf m^^fmMri g'^fk I ^ mi^-
^MIH^H^m^M^ TTH ^IhiPH'^'^ il ' O Rama, unjustly thou
wouldest entertain suspicion of Sita ; for although the vile
enemy warmly solicited her, and sometimes menaced and some-
406 ' SYNTAX.
times vaunted his own magnificence, yet she, pure of mind,
would never bestow a thought upon him/
b. The conditional mood, like the potential, is employed with
exclamations of surprise, but they require the addition of xra"
or TJ^ ; as, ^mynf xf^ or ^TW^ ^R^s^,i3f44d TT^ ' Strange that a
woman should in any way abide in thy evil opinion.' When
used interrogatively, it requires an interrogative adverb ; as,
f^ HIU^^IH 1 1*^151 HIHliiijd VTTRit ^ What ! do you know your-
self to be the unborn Narayaiia?' <^i^|(^^f P^hsni f^fi f^-
c6M:M^i: X|i<^ * She being dead through fright, what then ? what
benefit wouldest thou obtain ?' In the following example many
of the particles with which this mood or the potential may be
connected, are illustrated : ^?T^ 'T^TTUT "TW ^(jflMPdm'ili: I
^HiPh ^ W^TfiT f^ HI^«MM*Dn^H I * Mighty king, as whatever
and however thou mayest have (or hast) accomplished in the
destruction of the demons, what ! wouldest thou not ever thus
also bring (or have brought) thy desired purposes to fulfilment.'
309. Infinitive mood. This, as shewn above (p. 369), is
considered to be a verbal derivative noun, and is attached in
the invariable accusative apparently to a verb ; as, ''siVgfN'^rrfH
' I wish to hear ;' chvirgriHtf^ ^ Thou art able to tell -,' iftwf^
«T "sftfTJ ^ I will not endure to live.'
a. Like other verbal derivatives, the infinitive may exercise a
similar government as one of the moods or tenses of the verb
from which it is formed: ^^ ^tf^TIT n^ "qr^T^rr: y^*^<.
' They resolved to go together to Draupadi's marriage elec-
tion.' It cannot as a noun, however, admit the difference of
active and passive voices, and the effect of the latter is given to
it by its association with participles, and especially with the
future participle of the verb 1^ ' to be able,' in connexion
with the object; the agent, when expressed, being in the
instrumental case : ^br ^s^ ^ 51 ««^ ^iTfir ' Now that
blockhead is to be conquered ;' iT i^^H^H f%HtTO«T ^l<WI ^
^mrUff FRTS^ ' We are not to be intimidated to-day by thee
with this terror ;' wk frg: "^f ^ns?: ^ How is' the enemy to be
VERBS. 407
seen ;* %^ ^^ftftnn^^Tms^ ^H*<IM^» >T^ * Nor can these gods,
sages, and progenitors^ be thus now nourished by thee.'
b. The infinitive is also used after nouns and participles ; as,
^o5T vrt^ ^ time to eat -^ crW ^nrt: ' able to do ;^ ^ irin ' gone
to see :' but these are evidently elliptical phrases, in which
the verbal copulative is understood ; oR\c^sf^ ipj ' It is time
to go.' The same may be said of the like combination of the
infinitive with adverbs or adverbial nouns ; as, *T "J^TR Pri^n
^^ ^nft ^7| huPmiii: * (It is) not right, O princes, to slay again
a slain enemy ;' mfllr^lff^f "gTjftrg'Tc^ ^ Palaces (are) fit to be
compared to thee ;' nwrefti: H>n%?: ^ ^ j:^ "JRtfvw * There-
fore Yoga is the desired object of the eminent ; but it (is) to
be made known with difiiculty.'
SECTION VI.
Derivative Verbs,
310. The derivative forms of the verb are not of common
occurrence, with exception of the causal, which is of very fre-
quent use. As this must from its nature be a transitive verb,
it will govern an accusative case, either singly or doubly, as
exemplified above (r. :z86,^). The following are a few additional
illustrations of its use : l^twn ^frf M ^^TTin: HW ^IM^IH^ * We
are called severe ; this we apprise you' (cause you to know) ;
r^sjIM^fiT ^ ' The queen represents ;' ^TP^T^rrWw ' Nay, she
commands ;^ ^ r^ f^ftrarf^ f t^rTRJ ^T^t ' Those evil dis-
posed ones will alienate thee from me' (will cause to separate
from) ; m ^BSrfH: l^^^l^mi * Let the king cause her to be
devoured by dogs ;' i^T^ ^ tnifftrsifTT fr^iHT ^m ' The enemy,
being valiant, shall strike off thy head' (cause it to fall) ;
^KIH^MIHI^ ^rtrft^T f^^T. * He caused the women, with their
attendants, to be brought ;' TTTOT.'iT'T^'fJ^ ' He did not cause
him to be disunited from his life' (he did not put him to death).
a. The desiderative form is also from its nature transitive,
and has the government of transitive verbs : mf^l^pr ^ ^^
408 SYNTAX. «
HI^IVjMri JINHI^ \ TTR VkMjiHm^^^ ^fifxT ftT3^j:%?f I ' The monkey
(Hanuman) did not wish (or would not) look at the dance, nor
hear the singers, desirous of remembering Rama, suffering the
pain of absence/ This form of the verb implies ' volition' as
well as ^ wish -/ as, in^i^HH ^'^T ^ fq-sHH^ tT f^r^rftr ' Thou
wilt not give my father's share, being asked for by me.' The
desiderative form of "^, ' to hear,' implies not only ^ to wish to
hear,' but ' wait upon or ' obey ;' that is, to wish to please by
service : -illfJHIH: ^^6tW "^^ '^'^liri tj^ I ¥ T^W^TfT Jf^m: WH
^1 im ri I * He who until the end of his life waits upon his Guru,
goes assuredly to the eternal mansion of Brahma.'
b. The frequentative mode expresses either repetition or
intensity — the doing of an act repeatedly or energetically — but
it is of very unfrequent use in either : ^chohi ^ TKT^BRT«TT-
fWFf^ ' They stand, like Chatakas, crying aloud repeatedly ;^
ijxrea' ^Ph^nSi 'Wll * Again the bird eagerly assailed him ;'
xr^ <9V<^5T^ Mrin^lii: ' He cut the wings of the bird to
pieces.' With verbs of motion this form may also imply
' going crookedly' or ' badly ;' as, mpl^^iri ^^^: ' The lame man
goes awry.' With certain verbs it also intimates ' defect'
or * impropriety ;' as, W?5rc?^ "^T^RITt ' The Brahman prays
hypocritically.'
c. From a desiderative verb others may be formed ; as,
f^r^TRf^T^fw yuiUlfH ' He wishes to cause the people to hear
the Puranas ;' f^ ^TRV: TTTilfwftT ' Why dost thou wish to cause
me to go downwards?' A desiderative may not be formed
from a desiderative, unless some other mode intervene ; as,
^irH«1 Thjftr^ftnrfrT 1#: ' The blockhead wishes to cause the
desire of frequent existence in the sage.' And in this manner
the forms might be compiled without end ; but the practice is
not adopted.
d. The conversion of substantives into verbs is not unfre-
quent, and depends apparently upon the pleasure of the writer.
A few examples of the use of such verbs in construction will
be sufficient to illustrate their application. f^Tt^cRT^ ^"5^
PARTICIPLES. 409
^t?^sftr "^TR^ * In a spot destitute of trees the castor oil
plant becomes a tree ;' ^wt ^[^^ ^TlTt: "^ftwt <*U!II^^ "^ * A
burning coal burns the hand ; when cold it blackens it :' "gTTf-
Sj-^IHiriVsTnur: ^ TI»n^ TcT: *A minister who is made the
companion of (a king's) private amusements, if active, kings it
himself:' HPrit^c^l^^ ^ ^ITT^ wtf^Ht ' The mind of the
virtuous oscillates (or swings) by the speech of the wicked :'
g;i^in'il ^fiTT: TfT Tjtcfi: ^^pq^ ^AU men are in sorrow; he
alone is happy :' Hl^^^ii^tfM^mriM^* r^fTB^^TfT %rT^ ^Rt: * If the god
of love should see thee, he would not grieve much (for his
absent bride) :' ^ cqiiim"^ ^THT ^§wr: <*1«^*1M^ <*ei«il'a ^ITTT&
»n=ft ^ ^Puil^^ ^ This maiden is the hunter ; her eyebrow is
her bow, her glances are arrows, and my heart is the deer/
SECTION VII.
Participles.
311. Those participles which are declinable are, like adjec-
tives, inflected in the gender, number, and case of the noun
with which they are connected in construction. Both the
declinable and indeclinable may exercise the same government
as the verbs from which they are derived.
312. The present participles active of transitive verbs ordi-
narily govern the noun in the accusative case : ^•T or ^Si^t
Tffi "^iffT ' Brahma is making (or makes) creation ;' ^^T^TVhrf-
Tf^m: ' The pupil is reading the Vedas ;' -nlr*<IH HH^MHMI ^
'The woman (is) decorating herself;' ^Hrl^>ril ^T^ 'They
two (were) crossing rivers ;' ^ W'sn^TTremT^ ' They search-
ing that hermitage ;' ^ ^75 ^H^HW f-^fiUM: ^T^^TW * He,
considering the strength of Bhimasena, was consumed (with
envy).' The participle present of ff^, ^ to hate,' optionally
governs the genitive case : ^ or ^gr:^ %^ ^fb * Hari (is)
hating (of) Mura.' The participles of verbs of remembering
may also govern the genitive ; as, jtt or ?th ^FTJCnft ' remembering
(or thinking of) me.' The present participle may be used
3G
410 SYNTAX.
with particles in the sense of the potential mood ; as, 9Hin^c(
T^^ '5'tw V*^H*<M«<ii * Listen, that so acting (for, that you may
so act that) you will not fall from duty/
a. The present participle of the passive voice involves no
notion of past time, but implies the continuance of the state
or thing suffered. Thus ^ ^^xhtr^ ^PHilll irm ' He also
being thus bitten by the reptile,' signifies that the biting
has not ceased, but is going on : so ii^ r^^inwnf H^jot
* When he perceived himself being devoured ;* ^^^jj^i^iSHiiifT
^^Tf^^: ^ Being pursued by numerous guards.'
313. The participles of the perfect tense are not of very
frequent occurrence : they follow the general rules relating to
concord and government, and are not unusually employed
without a verb in the sense of the perfect tense : ^ fTOJTTxr-
^5^ PHMH^rMg: * They desired the death of the animals that
were near (them) ;' r^^'ftl'^rT'Tftr ' Thou art arrived ;' tret f^^-
f^TPT ofi^oR'^: ^ fro^ ^ He (was) seated (or sat down) on a
couch in the presence of the destroyer of Kansa.'
313. The indefinite past participles are of much more
universal use than the preceding, and bear an important part
in the formation of sentences : they take the variations of
inflexion according to the noun or pronoun with which they
are connected, expressed or understood.
a. The active indefinite past participle governs the same
cases as its verb, and may be used absolutely, with the
auxiliary verb implied : "frfrt nT»}^<=ll«f ^T^t ' Then S'ankara
said to Rama ;' "^TTR "^rt^lM "^wr: ' Krishna slew the demons.^
b. The passive indefinite past participle is ordinarily con-
nected with the agent in the instrumental case ; TT^rf ^TTT
^ftUT f?r|jf "fhTT * Sita, seized by RavaAa, (was) conveyed to
Lanka:' but in some cases it may be optionally connected
with the agent in the genitive ; as, n^: or TT^ »nft f^: ' The
Brahman is respected by or of the king ;' "fl^ or "jHT T^H "ftfTTT
This earth is conquered of or by him.' It also governs the
agent in either case, when signifying the site or subject of the
PARTICIPLES. 411
action ; as, ^^wwf or i^. ^rf^Trf ^ This was (the) slept of or by
them ;' i. e. the place where, or the time when, they slept :
^t^Hri^ or ^T5T TW ^ This was (the) gone of or by him ;^ i. e.
the time or manner of his departure.
c. When derived from neuter or intransitive verbs, this
participle may be used with a noun in the place of the past
tense of the verb : TT^f^lft TTWT tTsprf ' The king of the Rakshasas
wept ;* wr ^^ Tffts^ * Ah ! he has died (or is dead) of himself.'
d. The indefinite past participle of verbs of motion, and of
others already specified (p. :Z75), takes an active sense, and is
used in place of the past tense, governing a noun in the same
manner as a transitive verb : H^ui^ohl f^^ Hpciyl m^lfi: ^^FT
iTW: * Hiraiiyaka entered his hole ; the crow went to his own
nest :' ^ ^xij: ^ hi^^ImI ^ f^TVf ^TTH ' That hero is not to be
mourned (who is) departed to death.' Other verbs than those
above enumerated, which bear analogous imports, may also be
used in this manner : ^n^t^iT^f^wf TTTTT: * Alas ! I have incurred
impurity ;' ^ K^rii tts^^r^ ' She bore an excellent offspring.^
The time expressed may also be indefinite ; as, TT»rT«f^ ^^rrrr-
»<lP^rii: ' Kings (affecting) dwelling in the south. The past
indefinite participle of intransitive verbs may also be used to
denote time indefinitely present or continuous ; as, rif^HI't)
^rft "^^ ' At the end of his day Brahma sleeps.'
e. The past participles of verbs signifying ^ to speak,* * to
ask,' and the like, when used with a masculine or feminine
noun, imply * spoken to,' ^ inquired of,' referring the object to
the noun with which they agree, and being followed by the
agent or speaker, when specified, in the instrumental case : ^
<d^*^':hM nf^: ' That sage thus spoken to ;' ^ ^TTf^fTT ^ ' She
addressed by him ;' ^ t: "^f: ' He inquired of by them.' The
participle may also govern the matter of the speech, like an
active verb, in the accusative : *^M "^T^T^^sf^ ^ Thou art
spoken to, a speech by Krishna ;' ^Hj-*! "ftn^TIinT "^TT^ ^^-
dhu|«{ ' Thus spoken to by the king of Sindhu, a heart-
agitating speech.'
3 G a
413 SYNTAX.
/. The indefinite participle past is often used for a noun,
the noun or pronoun being understood : ^?^ ^^ ^ijiP^
* Punishment watches over those who sleep ;' ^T^"^, * people/
understood : XT^TT^'^r "^#TT ^ subsisting by ripe and unripe ;*
TROT, * fruit,' understood. In the neuter gender it is used,
not only as an abstract noun (p. 275), but absolutely or
adverbially : ^rzft^ ' as it is said ;' rivjicKd * so it is done ;'
^<Mlgri> ' as it is proper,' ^ fitly/ ^ rightly.'
g. Both the past participles indefinite are commonly used
with the different tenses of the auxiliary verbs ^rt and >T,
forming in fact compound tenses, which might be comprised
within the scheme of conjugation with as much, or rather
perhaps with as little, propriety in Sanskrit as in other lan-
guages ; as, Tuftsfe or iTrT^ R fw ^ I am or have gone / iTTT
^srnr TnftsH^, ttH^RT^, ninn^H^, ^ I was or had gone ;' JTift
Hf^TTTftR or nf^xiTTf^, or inrm^ >Tf^nnfi5R ' 1 shall be or have
gone ;' ^nft or tttt^*^ >t^ * I may be or have gone,' &c. ;
'«JirimH^Hjohl^ir^l ' I have done improper acts ;' inft ^ "jrft
Hf^rffT TTT: ' Rama will be gone to-morrow to the forest /
^TFgTff: chi r^HTTTSf >TfTorftr ^ Thou shalt have obtained unequalled
fame.' When used alone, either absolutely or transitively, it
may be inferred that the form is elUptical, and that the verb
is understood ; as, f^T^RHRt fV^ Trf^r^s>Jc^ ' HiraAyaka was or
had entered his hole.'
314. The indefinite past participles indeclinable are also of
very extensive and important application. They are especially
used to suspend the close of a sentence, acting at the same
time as copulatives, and connecting something which precedes
with something which is to follow ;' as, ^W ^ ^nn ' Having
so spoken, he went away ;' f^THTrJ^ ^v:\ "^ ^ (I) having
long considered, it was done by me.' They may be repeated,
to imply a succession of actions preparatory to some final one :
^fiT TR^twrfir^ ^Hirc^'^-*! "^'^f^in ^ Having thus discoursed (to
them), treated (them) with hospitality, and embraced them, he
Bent (them) away.'
PARTICIPLES. 413
a. As ordinarily employed, these participles undergo and
exercise the same government as the tenses of the verb ; that
is, they are connected with the subject in the nominative, and
the object in the accusative or some other case : "rniTOt^ft tHTT
^PHfiuf ^r^ ^ The king having presented gifts to the Brahmans ;'
r^C<W<*l f^^ ^r^ PH-Mflfrf ' Hiranyaka, having made a hole,
dwelt ;' cfivj^^ wi WW ' Speak, having dismissed fear.'
h. It often occurs, however, that these participles are used
elhptically or parenthetically, and in appearance absolutely
or without government ; whence it has been inferred *, that
they are rather gerunds than participles. It is doubtful,
however, if in any case the deficient nouns may not be readily
supphed : thus, W^T ^n^ 7Tll^f4«H«Mi; f^^W WH^ fw^tf * By
that fowler, (he) having scattered the grains of rice, a net w^as
spread :' 3[fir ^: "TftjftrP^ftjW 'pft ^IMlf^: ' The vulture was
killed by all the birds, (they) having thus concluded :' ^!R%-
tinrr ^T^W ^*^>W MClM«*i.^n<*ri: ^ By the unwise, the self or
person, (they) having diligently adorned (it), is made the tool
of another.' This sort of construction is, no doubt, often
complicated, but it may perhaps be always unravelled in this
manner : ^^Tirn?rNT ^ ftft^T IX^ ^TTi^ ^owShihI P^jdltj^ Hmi^l-
^ ^RTT IRl^T^T^ ^^R^"t Y^t ^ The cat named Dadhikarna
was placed by that lion in his cave ; (he) having thus reflected,
and having gone to the village, and having given (the cat)
flesh and other kinds of food, and brought (him) thence with
much trouble.^
315. The participles of the future tense are said to have
these significations in common with the imperative mood,
^ directing,^ ^ commanding,' and indication of season or oppor-
tunity : ofi^: <*^cn: oRTjirfhr: "SfiPt: ' The mat is to be made ; it
must be made ; it is time for it to be made.' They also
intimate * fitness' or ^ propriety ;' ^jnm ^^^T ^ The girl is to
* This was first proposed in a very elaborate and interesting investigation
of these and some other verbal forms, by the late Baron W. Humboldt,
pubhshed in the Indische Bibliothek.
414 SYNTAX.
be married ;' she is marriageable : V#s'»j^iiijni|: * Duty is to
be observed :' and they denote ' ability' or ' competency ;' r^m
md ^^^fN: ^ The load is to be borne by thee ;' ^nST^ '^thm<1
^^■oi: ^ If I am fit to be killed, I am to be killed.' In these
and the like phrases they agree with the object, and are used
without a verb, although it is evident that the verb is under-
stood ; ^ft: "Sfif^: being properly ^agz: ^^sf^ ; so ??if^: is
properly ■^•d«*fls'ftR.
a. Future participles are used absolutely in the neuter
gender, either in place of a noun, or with the noun implied :
-^m ^n^ri^M TT^^ ^ As it is to be, so be it ;' TT?^ <jt!^riMI^< Wm^-
mi^l^-^fi^ * He caused to be said what was to be said to him
asking what was (fit) to be asked.'
b. These participles, when capable of a transitive effect,
govern the object in the same case as the verb to which they
belong '/ as, ^ 7^J^ "rui^^ ^ It is to be gone by him to the
village ;' ^ri«m TRt '^il'T "^W«T ' The cows are to be taken to
pasture by Krishna ;' t^^^R: ^f^^^trr^TT^jf * He is to be fined
an eighth part of his property ;' J|t(*^riri^H^I ^m ' That is to be
said by thee of (to) me.' The agent, agreeably to their passive
signification, is usually in the instrumental case ; but it may
be also sometimes in the genitive ; wm or J{^ ^^ ^f^:.
316. Some verbal derivatives of a participial character
exercise the like government upon nouns as already noticed
(r. 290, a). To the examples there adduced the following
may be added. The derivative from oR with "Hc^H prefixed,
and ^ affixed, governs an accusative : ti(^Hc4^»r4^u.uA^i ' The
husband adorns, or is the adorner of, his wife.' Derivatives
from "^ with the affix ^1^ may require the instrumental case ;
^^lr:hi.: i^MVt ^fwr ' The material w^orld is easily made by
Vishnu :' or the genitive ; "Sf % rT^ljHwl^ f^fifNl^xin^TiTRf
* Nothing here is difficult to the persevering.' Derivatives with
"ji? are followed by nouns in the accusative ; f^w: ofi#T c^^«^
* VishAu is the maker of the worlds :' but considered as substan-
tives, such derivatives may be followed by other substantives
' PROSODY. 415
in the genitive case, and •sr^t TfNTJff is equally allowable.
Words formed with ^, when * futurity' is implied, govern
the object in the accusative : W»Tl=T»ft ' Who is going (will go)
to the pasture ?' ^Hr^iifl * Who is giving (will give) a hun-
dred?' A noun formed with ^^ from the indefinite past
participle may be connected with another in the locative case :
^1(1 ffl cqiohuur ' well read in grammar.'
CHAPTER IX.
PROSODY.
SECTION I.
General Rules.
317. It would be inconsistent with the plan and limits of
the present work to attempt any lengthened detail of the
infinite varieties of the metrical system of the Hindus ; but
a brief description of the principles by which it is regulated,
and their illustration by a few examples of the most frequently
occurring kinds of metre, will not be out of place, and may
be of use.
318. The essential element of Sanskrit prosody is Quantity.
As the long and short vowels have distinct symbols, their
value is at once determined. A short vowel, however, is
considered to be prosodially long when it precedes a conjunct
consonant, also when it precedes Anuswara or Visarga. At
the end of a line or stanza, also, the last vowel is regarded as
long or short according to the exigence of the metre.
319. Syllables of various quantities are arranged in certain
definite groupes to form prosodial feet. This is effected
according to two different methods.
a. The first method is that which is employed in the
greatest number of popular metres, and is the formation of tri-
syllabic feet. Of these, eight varieties are enumerated. Each
416 PROSODY.
has its equivalent denomination in Greek prosody; but by-
native writers each is designated by a distinct syllable, having
the term Tm, ' class' or * number,' attached to it, as in the
following Ust :
1. Na-gaAa rprro: www Tribrach.
2. Ma-gaiia JU\W. — Molossus.
3. Ja-gana ^FHTn w — w Amphibrach.
4. Ra-gaiia TTTWt —^— Cretic.
5. Bha-gaAa WTOt — w w Dactyl.
6. Sa-gana f|J|iii: ww— Anapaest.
7. Ya-gaAa tptWJ ^ Bacchic.
8. Ta-gaiia wmx ^ Antibacchic.
With given numbers of these feet a monosyllable or dissyl-
lable may be further necessary to complete a line, but they
are regarded as supplementary syllables, not feet, and are
specified accordingly as one or two long or short syllables, or
one long and one short, as the case may be.
b. In the second method of forming prosodial feet, which
characterises a peculiar class of metres, the element is a syl-
labic instant, or short syllable : of these, four constitute a
foot ; that is, a foot consists of either four short syllables or
their equivalents, viz. two long or one long and two short
syllables.
c. There is another mode of measuring verse, which dis-
penses with, or only partially permits, the use of regular feet.
In this a definite number of short syllables, or their equiva-
lents, without further subdivision, constitutes a verse ; certain
portions of which, however, commonly consist of feet of the
first class.
320. A varying number and disposition of these several
feet, or syllabic instants, form a verse, which differs as to
length and proportions. This verse is a stanza or Sloka,
which, with some exceptions, consists of two Unes or hemi-
stichs : each of these is again subdivided into two parts : so
GENERAL RULES. 417
that the entire stanza is for the most part a tetrastich, com-
posed of four Padas or Charanas, Hterally ' feet,' or, in our
understanding of the term,hnes or semi-hemistichs : the intervals
between the first and second, and third and fourth of which
are not always so distinctly marked, as that between the
second and third.
a. When the metre consists of feet of the first order, and
is single, the Padas are of equal length, and of corresponding
quantities. Sometimes, however, two or more kinds of metre
may be mixed in one stanza, and then the hemistichs or
Padas may vary in length and in quantity. When feet of
the second kind are used, the Padas are of different, though
definite lengths.
b. Rhyme is not employed in any of the older, or in the
higher order of, writings. It is met with in poems of a lyrical
character, and of later date ; and in them also great inequality
of metre is introduced. In the best and oldest compositions
great regularity prevails, although the metre is occasionally
varied even in the same work.
SECTION II.
Varna-vritta.
321. Of the two classes of measures which depend upon
feet, the larger and more popular is also regulated by another
principle, viz. the number of syllables contained in the stanza.
The class is thence denominated Variia-vritta or Akshara-
Chhandas, ^ Literal or syllabic metre.'
a. The number of syllables in a verse of this class may
vary from four to nearly four thousand ; but of the prevailing
orders of this class few contain less than twenty-four syllables,
or six syllables in a line ; or more than one hundred and four
in a verse, or twenty- six in a line. Within these limits
twenty-one orders are specified, each of which, by the varying
disposition of the feet, and of the pause or caesura, comprises
3H
4<18 PROSODY.
different species. The number of species ordinarily enume-
rated is above two hundred ; but of these, many are of rare
use, although the whole number is infinitely less than the
possible combinations of this class of metre, which, as a matter
of arithmetical computation, is reckoned at many millions of
milHons. The forms in popular use do not perhaps exceed
twenty or thirty, and range from thirty-two syllables to fifty-
six in the verse. When they exceed the latter number, the
verse is very rarely employed in continuous passages of any
length, but is inserted occasionally, or occurs at the close of a
canto or section, as a more stately and sonorous close. We
shall specify the different orders of this class, with a notice of
their varieties, and exemplifications of a few of their most
ordinary species.
1 . Gayatri, 5 x 4 = 24. Eleven varieties. This metre is not
of frequent occurrence in profane versification, and when used,
as it is in the hymns of the Vedas, it is most commonly a
triplet, somewhat varying in length. The most usual form is
a triplet of three lines of eight syllables each, as in the follow-
ing, which is the most sacred verse of the Vedas, and known
emphatically as ' the' Gayatri. It is held in such reverence,
that it is never to be uttered in the hearing of ears profane.
^ Om ! let us meditate on the glorious splendour of that divine
sun, that he may inspire us.'
2. Ushnih, 7 X 4 = 28. Eight varieties ; none of frequent
occurrence, except in the Vedas.
3. Anushtubh, 8 x4 = 32. Twelve varieties. This is by far
the most frequent and useful form of Sanskrit verse. It is
that in which the great body of metrical composition, whether
narrative or didactic, exists. AU works of considerable extent are
written in it, reHeved by the occasional introduction of other
measures. It is the prevailing form of metre in the laws of
Manu, the Mahabharata, the Ramayana, and the Puranas.
a. The Anushtubh or (in the nominative inflexion) Anushfup
VARNA-VRITTA. 419
stanza is divided into four Padas, of eight syllables each. In
its most regular form the first foot is any one except a
tribrach ; the second may be a dactyl, a tribrach, cretic, or
anapaest ; the other two syllables are indifferently long or
short. In the twelve species, however, other dispositions
occur. Thus in that termed Vidyunmala the whole stanza con-
sists of long syllables, or is a verse of molossi and spondees :
in another, Pramaiii, we have alternately short and long sylla-
bles, a stanza of amphibrachs or iambics : in a third, Samani,
long and short syllables alternate, forming a verse of cretics or
trochees : whilst in a fourth, Tunga, the first six syllables of
each line are short, or two tribrachs.
b. Another rule given for the formation of the Anusht'up
verse is, that the fiflh syllable of each line shall be short, the
sixth long, and the seventh alternately long and short ; whilst
the four first syllables and the eighth are arbitrary. This will
be found to be usually the form adopted, with occasional
exceptions. The following are examples.
|_ ^-1— II |^^-|w- II -.._|wo^|--l|^-v.|^^_|v.-||
* This universe had become darkness, undiscerned, uncharac-
terised, indescribable, incomprehensible, as if every where in a
deep sleep.' Manu.
_ ^ _| |_ ^||v^v^_| _ ^ _|v.- I
m fpRT^ irfiTFf HHiiH: ^TTwhnn:
^ Never, barbarian, mayest thou acquire fame for endless years,
since thou hast slain one of these birds, heedless through
passion.' Ramayana.
Tradition affirms of this, that it is the first S'loka or
Anush^up verse ever composed.
|_v.v>|v. - ||v.-v.|^^-|w- II v.__|v. ^-1 _ _||ww_| - w -|v._||
^ At Gangadwara was a great holy sage, Bharadwaja by name,
3 H 2
420 PROSODY.
ever engaged in devotion.' Mahabharata. In the first Pada
the sixth syllable is short ; and the seventh is short in the
first, second, and fourth.
1^ —I- -II -- -Iwv. -1^- II _ ^--1 V. ^_ I _ -II w^ _ I ^ ^ 1^_|1
* Maid with the long and lotus eyes, O look upon me again.
It is an ancient saying, that in the vrorld poison is the antidote
of poison.' S'ringara Tilaka.
The following is given in the S'ruta Bodha both as the rule
and the example of a verse of long syllables :
^W ^^#r ^t^ T!(^ fV^TRtwrfT tif^ in^ i
— I _i_ _ ii_ - -I _ - -I — II
* That (verse) in which all the vowels are long, and there is a
pause at each Pada, is called, O lute-voiced, Vidyunmala by
the learned.'
4. Vrihati, 9 x 4 = 36. Twelve varieties : not much used.
5. Pankti, 10x4 = 40. Fourteen varieties : not much used
alone, but sometimes mixed with the following.
6. Trishfubh, 11x4 = 44. Twenty-two varieties. Some of
the species of this order are next in frequency of use to the
Anush{ubh, and are generally employed, even in poems written
for the most part in the latter metre, in passages affecting a
more elevated or animated tone. Many parts of the Maha-
bharata, the Puranas, and the plays, and the greater portion
of the Raghu Vansa, Kumara Sambhava, Bhatti Kavya,
Magha, Kiratarjuniya, and other popular poems, are written
in one or other form of the eleven-syllable metre, either singly
or alternating with other kinds, especially with the next or
twelve-syllable metre ; or sometimes mixed with it or with
the ten- syllable metre in the same stanza ; but then it is
considered to belong to the third class of metres, under the
name of Vaitaliya or Aupachchandasika, as will be subse-
quently noticed.
«. The most frequent form of the order Trish^ubh is that
VARNA-VRITTA. 421
called Indravajra, a verse of four Padas, each of which contains
two antibacchics, an amphibrach, and two long syllables. Instead
of a double antibacchic, the first foot may be an amphibrach,
when the metre is termed TJpendravajra : and a third variety,
named Upajati, is said to be formed when these two are, as is
very commonly the case, mixed in difierent Padas of the same
stanza, as in the following examples ; the first of which is in
the Indravajrd, the second in the Upendi'avajra, and the third
in the Upajati metre.
_ _ w|- l^|v.-w|_ - II _-^|__^|v. _^|__||
' These princes returned to their tents, displaying in their
appearance and attire the vexation which their disappointed
love for Bhojya had excited, resembling planets, whose lustre
fades before the dawn of day/ Raghu Vansa.
^_^i__^i^_ ^i__ II _ _ ^i_ _ ^i^_^i_ _ II
* The grief that tvas felt (by Yudhish^hira) for the loss of his
most precious jewels, his treasure, or his kingdom, was not so
severe as that which was inflicted by the glances of Krishna,
darting anger and shame.' Mahabharata.
^_^|__ ^|^_^|_ _^ II __ ^|_ ..|^_ v.|__||
- - -I- - -I— -i-- II v> _ V.I - _ ^|w - wl_- II
' When the sun, having completed his (southern) sojourn,
commenced to travel towards the quarter protected by Kuvera
(the north), the region of the south breathed forth a fragrant
zephyr, like a sigh of regret.' Kumara Sambhava. In this
the first and fourth Padas are in the TJpendravajra, the second
and third in the Indravajra metre.
7. Jagati, 12x4 = 48. Thirty varieties. This order of
metres is also of frequent employment, and very commonly
422 PROSODY.
alternates with the preceding in the same passages, or in
separate cantos. The most common variety of it is the Van-
sastha, a stanza in which each line consists of an amphibrach,
an antibacchic, an amphibrach, and a cretic.
* With the music of the waves that murmured against the
borders of the pool, with the songs of the flocks of koils, and
the graceful dance of the peacock, an entertainment was pre-
pared for him in the forest. Where is it that the man who is
prosperous meets not with delight?' Naishadha.
Another variety, the Indravansa, differs from this only in
the first foot, which may be an antibacchic as well as the
second ; and these two being mixed in the same stanza, as in
the foregoing order, form a species of Upajati. They may
both, again, be blended with the two first varieties of the
Trish^ubh, as in the following, in which the first Pada is in
the Indravajra metre, the second in the Indravansa, the third
in the Upendravajra, and the fourth in the Vansastha.
_ _ ^|_ _^|^ -..I- _ II - -..I- - v.|w- ^l-w- II
fwr irtWt^ir ^Fr»o|f?T: i ^TTjrn^ 5^^^ fro^nn i
^ Varanasi, the eternal, is the city of salvation, the native land
of the acquirement of true wisdom : hence he wishes to dwell
perpetually here, being desirous of observing the practices
that cut off (the bonds) of family attachment.^ Prabodha
Chandrodaya.
8. Atijagati, 13 x4 = -52. Sixteen varieties. In the earlier
writers this order of metres is not common, although occa-
sional stanzas occur in the plays. In works of later date, and
especially in the Magha and Kiratarjuniya, whole cantos are
composed in one or other of its varieties.
a. One species, the Manjubhashini, consists of an anapaest
and an amphibrach, each repeated, and a long syllable ; as.
VARNA-VRITTA. 42S
^ Waft me home upon the new cloud, converted into a chariot
for our happy journey, decorated with the many-coloured bow
of Indra, and waving the swifl gleaming lightning for its
banner.' Vikramorvasi.
b. Another species, the Praharshini, consists of a molossus,
a tribrach, an amphibrach, a cretic, and a long syllable :
1^ w v..|w- w|- V. -I - (I 1^ ^ ^\^-^\ 1- II
^The speed of my flight through the sky invests me with
terror as well as grace, being musical, instead of with bells,
with the fierce clanging sounds of the skulls that form my
necklace, striking against each other in my undulating motion/
Malati Madhava.
c. A metre composed of twelve and of thirteen-syllable
lines is also to be found in some extended passages in the
same works in which other varieties of this order are used.
This, however, which is termed Pushpitagra, is also considered
to be a variety of the third class of metres, or of those regu-
lated by syllabic instants.
9. S'akkari, 14 x 4 = 56. Twenty varieties. The forms of
this order are also not unfrequent, and one of them especially,
the Vasantatilaka, is often used. This contains in each Pada
an antibacchic, a dactyl, two amphibrachs, and two long
syllables.
-- w 1-^ ^i^_ ^|^_..|__ II __^|_^ ^l^_ ^|^_ ^i-_ II
Tii^^^jTnw ^^: mHjcikuht: i ^mf^ ir^ Qm^t "^^Trft f^r^: i
' The enemy, hastening from many parts, seized the women of
his family, and plundered the treasures of the king, thus fallen
from his throne, as a rocky fragment carries away the fruit
and flowers of a tree that has been hurled from the summit of
a mighty mountain.' Raja Tarangini.
494 PROSODY.
10. Atisakkari, 15 x4 = 6o. Eighteen varieties. They occur
occasionally, though not in passages of any length. The most
common is the species termed Mahni, which consists of two
tribrachs, a molossus, and two bacchics.
..V.V. I w^w|- - -I-- -Iv. _ _ II w w ^l^v^^l Is. _ _ Iv. _ -11
' Rememberest thou, O lovely-formed, those days which we
passed happily together in that mountain, when all our service
was performed by LakshmaAa ? Rememberest thou the borders
of the lake, or the Godaveri river? Rememberest thou our
habitation upon its shore ?' Uttara Rama Charitra.
11. Ash{i, 16x4 = 64. Twelve varieties. They are very
rarely met with.
12. Atyashft, 17 x4 = 68. Seventeen varieties. Some of
these are popular, occurring principally in short passages at
the close of a section, although sometimes forming the only
metre of entire poems, when they are not of great extent.
Thus the whole of the Ananda Lahari is written in a popular
variety of this metre, termed S'ikharini, in which each Pada
contains a bacchic, a molossus, a tribrach, an anapaest, a
dactyl, and one short and one long syllable.
I |ww.>Iwv.-|_ v.v.lw_|
' Some blessed sages worship thee, the wave of spiritual feli-
city, having thy resting place with the supreme S'iva upon the
throne in which his fivefold form is typified, in the temple of
the all-bestowing jewel, which stands in a grove of Kadamba
trees, near a lake surrounded by the trees of heaven, on the
island of gems, in the midst of the sea of ambrosia.'
Another variety of this order, the Mandakranta, forms also
the metre of the whole of the Megha Diita. It consists of a
VARNA-VRITTA. 4^
molossus, a dactyl, a tribrach, two antibacchics, and two long
syllables or a spondee.
* Enveloping with thy shade the region Brahmavartta beneath
thee, go thence to the field of Kuru, infamous for the slaughter
of heroes, and with thy falling rain-drops pelt the lotus flowers,
as the wielder of the bow Gan'diva here showered his sharp
and countless arrows upon the faces of the warriors.'
13. Dhriti, i8x4 = 7:z. Seventeen varieties, but of rare
occurrence : and of all these higher numbers it may be
observed, that they are seldom used in books, except in
occasional and closing stanzas, and that it is only in elabo-
rate and commonly turgid panegyrical inscriptions that they
extend to wider limits. The concluding verse of the twelfth
book of the Raghu Vansa is an example of the variety of this
order termed Mahamalika, in which the Pada is formed of two
tribrachs and four cretics.
finrw^f^ r^THl It ill ^^Hzq f^nf %ft<t!i:
* Rama having received his bride, purified by fire, and trans-
ferred the kingdom of his foe to his friend Vibhishana, set out,
accompanied by the son of the sun and Saumitra to his city,
in the heavenly car which his arm had won.'
14. Atidhriti, 19 x 4 = 76. Thirteen varieties. One of these
is a favourite metre as an occasional stanza. This is the
S'ardula vikn^ita, in which the Pada consists of a molossus,
an anapcest, an amphibrach, an anapaest, two antibacchics, and
a long syllable.
3 I
426 PROSODY.
1^ v.-!^ - w| ..^ -I - _ ^|__^|_
* Having contracted his body, and examined the whole of
Lanka, whose rows of white palaces shone with augmented
beauty, as glistening in the autumnal moonlight, and having
beheld Janaki in the Asoka garden, surrounded by Rakshasa
females, the son of air ascended a Kaiikelli tree, and there
remained concealed.' Hanuman Nataka.
15. Kriti, 20 X 4 = 80. Four varieties : not often used.
16. Prakriti, 21 X4=84. Three varieties; of which one,
the Sragdhara, is met with in an occasional verse. The Pada
comprises a molossus, a cretic, a dactyl, a tribrach, and three
bacchics; as,
' Who are they, and for whose use created, who were formed
by Brahma treasures of every excellence ; surpassing in their
splendour the lords of the elephant herd, when shedding the
dews of passion from their brows? Like the haughty and
proud monarch of the forest tribes, who submits not to have
his teeth broken, so sovereigns such as those emperors of the
world suffer not their orders to be disobeyed.' Mudra
Rakshasa.
17. ^riti, 22 X4=88. Three varieties.
18. Vikriti, 23 x4 = 92. Six varieties.
19. Sankriti, 24 X 4 = 96. Five varieties.
20. Atikriti, 25 x4=ioo. Two varieties.
21. Utkriti, 26 X 4= 104. Three varieties.
GANA-VRITTA. 427
Z2. DaAclaka is the general name given to all metres of
this class exceeding the Utkriti measure.
SECTION III.
Gaha-vritta,
3212!. The second class of metres consists of those in which
the feet are formed of four short syllables or their equivalents.
There are sixteen classes of this metre, and each of them
admits of sixteen species ; but it will be sufficient to notice
the five principal classes.
I . i^rya. This is a stanza of four Padas, the first of which
contains twelve short syllables, the second eighteen^ the third
twelve, and the fourth fifteen. As regulated by the feet,
however, the division is best adapted to the hemistich^ and
the Arya stanza may be more conveniently regarded as a
couplet ; the first half of w^hich contains thirty syllabic instants,
distributed amongst seven feet and a half; and the second,
twenty-seven syllabic instants^ distributed also amongst seven
feet and a half, but in which the sixth foot consists of one
short syllable only ; as in the following :
^^^\^ - v^l - - -I ^ - V.I- - I ^1- -I -
* In like manner as the secretion of the unconscious milk
occurs for the nutriment of the calf, so the activity of (igno-
rant) matter takes place for the hberation of spirit.' Sankhya
Karika.
* Fall not in love with women, for they disdain the man who
loves. If one should bear you affection, love her ; if she be
scornful, let her go.' Mrichchakati.
a. The disposition of the feet in the i^rya verse is not
3 I ^
428 PROSODY.
altogether arbitrary : in the first hemistich the sixth foot must
either be a long syllable between two short, that is, an amphi-
brach, or else four short syllables. In the second hemistich
the sixth foot consists of one short syllable. The odd feet in
either hemistich^ the first, third, fifth, and seventh, should
never be amphibrachs.
h, A variety of the ^rya, and of the other classes also, is
termed Chapala ; in which it is required that the second and
fourth feet should be amphibrachs, the first a spondee or an
anapaest, and the fifth a dactyl or spondee. This rule may
apply to both hemistichs, or to the first or to the second only ;
constituting thus three varieties in addition to the regular one,
or four in all.
c. In like manner, when the pause occurs after the third
foot, the verse is termed Pathya ; when after any other,
Vipula : and this variation may prevail in either hemistich or
in both, forming therefore four modifications of the pause ;
which being applied to the four modifications of the metre,
compose the sixteen varieties of each order of this class of
metres.
d. The j^rya metre is in general employed only in occa-
sional verses ; but the whole of the Sankhya Karika is com-
posed in it, as is the Nalodaya of Kalidasa.
3. Udgiti. This differs from the j^rya only in inverting
the order of the second and fourth Padas. The first contains,
as before, twelve short syllables ; the second, fifteen ; the
third, as before, twelve ; and the fourth, eighteen.
3. Upagiti. In this class each hemistich consists of but
twenty-seven short syllables ; the second as well as the fourth
containing but fifteen ; the first and third are unaltered.
4. Giti. Both hemistichs consist of thirty short syllables ;
the fourth Pada as well as the second consisting of eighteen.
5. ^ryagiti. In this class each hemistich consists of eight
full feet, or thirty-two short syllables, divided into Padas of
twelve and twenty syllabic instants.
MATRACHHANDAS. 429
SECTION IV.
Mdtrachhandas.
323. The third class of metres is regulated in the first instance
by the number of short vowels or syllabic instants, or Matras,
as in the preceding class ; not by the number of syllables,
without regard to their syllabic length, as in the first. It so
far partakes, however, of the character of the first class, that,
after having defined the number of short syllables, or their
equivalents, which the stanza shall contain, they may be,
either wholly or partially, distributed into trisyllabic feet ; so
that the verses may in many instances be identified with
recognised varieties of the first class of metres, more or less
intermixed in the same stanza. The principal orders of this
class are the following.
I. Vaitaliya. This is a stanza of four Padas ; the first and
third of which contain the time of fourteen short syllables ;
the second and fourth, sixteen. Each Pada should end in a
cretic and iambic, or else in a dactyl and spondee. Of the
remaining moments, which are six in the first and third, and
eight in the second and fourth Padas, neither the second and
third, nor the fourth and fifth, should be combined in the
same long syllable ; nor, in the second and fourth Padas,
should the sixth and seventh Matra be combined in one long
vowel. There are exceptions, however, to these rules, which
constitute varieties of the class. Entire cantos in this form of
metre occur in the Magha, Kiratarjuniya, and Naishadha ; and
occasional verses in it are found in other works ; as in the
following, in which the last syllables of the three first Padas
are long by position.
IJ^: ufrirM^HNriff I ^^^ M?^l.^ f%e^ ^ I
* This was (an act) prohibited to a king ; but Dasaratha (did
430 PROSODY.
it), having transgressed the prohibition. Those even who are
learned in the Vedas, when they are bUnded by passion, set
their feet on a forbidden path.^ Raghu Vansa.
The first and third Padas of this stanza correspond to the
Sanyukta species of the Paiikti, or ten -syllable metre ; the
second and fourth to an undefined variety of the Trishtubh,
or eleven- syllable.
a, A variety of the Vaitaliya in not unfrequent use, termed
Aupachchhandasika, is formed by merely adding a long syllable
to each Pada ; making the first and third therefore contain
sixteen, and the second and fourth eighteen, syllabic instants.
^ Those princes who are now joined in alliance with the enemy,
but who know themselves, will quickly fall from him, like
cuckoos soon deserting the nest of the crow.' Magha.
This stanza might be resolved into a verse of mixed metre,
in which the first and third Padas would belong to the eleven
syllable order, and the second and fourth to the twelve ; in
each corresponding Pada admitting of precisely the same dis-
position of the syllables into trisyllabic feet.
b. There are several sub-species of each variety of the
Vaitaliya ; and one of the Aupachchhandasika, termed Pushpi-
tagra, is of frequent occurrence. The whole of the tenth
Sarga of the Kiratarjuniya, from which the following is taken,
is composed in it.
' The celestial nymphs, beholding the form (of Arjuna), effacing
the splendour of the universe, and capable of protecting the
three worlds, felt that all attempts to distract the penance in
which he was immersed, for the sake of victory, would be
in vain.'
MATRACHHANDAS. 431
The verse, in fact, is a compound of the twelve and thirteen-
syllable metres, and the trisyllabic feet in each Pada are
regular, and correspond throughout.
3. Matrasamaka. This, which is the second order of the
class, consists of a verse of four Padas, each of which contains
sixteen short syllables, or their equivalents : the ninth syllabic
instant must be single, and of course short, and the last long.
Varieties are made by restricting other syllabic instants, as the
fifth, eighth, and twelfth, to single or short quantities, or by
allowing the ninth to form part of a long syllable. The
following is an example of this metre :
' Life is as unstable as the water that trembles on the leaf of
the lotus. Association with the virtuous, although for a
moment, is the only vessel to bear us across the ocean of
existence.' Moha Mudgara.
3. Gityarya. This is, hke the preceding, a verse of which
each Pada contains sixteen Matras, or syllabic instants ; but
they are all short, except sometimes the last of each hemistich,
which may be long. Varieties are also formed by constructing
one hemistich entirely of long syllables, and the other of
short ; or by slightly altering the number of short syllables in
the stanza ; so that each hemistich may contain but twenty-
nine, or the first may contain twenty-nine, and the second
thirty-one ; or the first thirty, and the second thirty-two.
These forms of metre are not often met with in works of
standard reputation.
As a specimen of irregular metre, as well as of rhyme, the
following stanza is inserted from the Gita Govinda, in which
lyrical poem a great variety of anomalous, but exceedingly
melodious versification is exemplified. The passage is left
432
PROSODY.
untranslated, as a short exercise for those who may have
accompanied this Grammar to its termination.
INDEX I.
Abstract nouns, p. 312.
Accents, grave, acute, circumflex, 6.
Adjectives, 74. degrees of com-
parison of, 74, 75. syntax of,
385.
Adverbs, 91. alphabetical list of,
92. syntax of, 389.
Affixes, (i) inflectional; of declen-
sion, 27. of conjugation, 1 14.
(2) comparative, 74, 75. (3) de-
rivative ; of verbal derivatives,
2 9 2 . of nominal derivatives, 313.
of miscellaneous nouns, ib. of
possessives, of degrees of com-
parison, pronominals, and nume-
rals, 330. of indeclinables, 332.
Aggregative nouns, 412.
Akriti, a kind of metre, 426.
Akshara-chbandas, a class of me-
tres, 417.
Alphabet, i. order of, 2.
Alphabetical list of adjectives,
76. of adverbs, 92. of affixes
(verbal), 293. of affixes (nomi-
nal), 313. of conjunctions, loi.
of Gati prefixes, 100. of inde-
clinables, 90. of indicatory let-
ters, 105. of particles, 103. of
past participles, 276. of pro-
nouns, 78. of verbs not inserting
1^, 127. of verbs of each conju-
gation (see Conjugations).
Anga or inflective base ; of nouns,
27. of verbs, 107.
Anubandhas, or indicatory letters,
104. general and special, 105.
Anusht'ubh, a kind of metre, 418.
Anuswara, 2. changes of, 19.
Appellatives, 312.
Arddha-visarga, 23.
Arya, a kind of metre, 427.
Aryagiti, a kind of metre, 428.
Asht'i, a kind of metre, 424.
Atidhriti, a kind of metre, 425.
Atijagati, a kind of metre, 422.
Atikriti, a kind of metre, 426.
Atisakkari, a kind of metre, 424.
Atmane-pada, or reflective voice,
113. terminations of, 114. sub-
stituted for the Parasmai-pada,
260.
Attributives, 312.
Atyasht'i, a kind of metre, 424.
Augment, temporal, 1 1 7, 1 24, 131.
the letter 7^, 1 26.
Avyayi-bhava compounds, 354.
Bahuvrihi compounds, 348.
Base, inflective; of nouns, 27. of
verbs, 107.
Benedictive mood, 113. termina-
tions of, 115. formation of,
130. syntax of, 405.
Cases of nouns, 27. syntax of, 363.
Causal verb; formation of, 135.
inflexions of, T04. voices of,
267. governing double accusa-
tive, 366. syntax of, 407.
Classification of letters, 2, 6, 7.
Combination or conjunction of let-
ters, 7. of vowels, 8. of conso-
nants, 15. of hard and soft con-
sonants, 16. of dentals, 17. of
nasals, ib. of Anuswara, 19. of
semivowels, ib. of sibilants, 20.
of ^, 2 1, of Visarga, 22.
Comparison, degrees of, 74.
3 K
434
INDEX I.
Comparative degree, 74, 75.
Compound consonants, 3.
Compound metre, 417.
Compound prseterite tense, 121.
Compound verbs, 260.
Compound words ; classes of, 336.
Dwandwa, 338. Tatpurusha,34o.
Bahuvrihi, 348. Avyavi-bhava,
354. general rules, 358.
Conditional mood, 113. termina-
tions of, I J 5 . formation of, 1 3 1 .
syntax of, 405.
Conjugation, principles of, 116.
Conjugational inflexion, 107. ter-
minations, 114. tenses, 109.
Conjugations, how named and dis-
tinguished, 108. first, 153. se-
cond, 191. third, 209. fourth,
214. fifth, 226. sixth, 231. se-
venth, 237. eighth, 241. ninth,
243. tenth, 250.
Conjunction of vowels, 8. of con-
sonants, 15.
Conjunctions, 101. syntax of, 391.
Consonants, order of, 2. com-
pound, 3. hard and soft, 7.
combination of, 15.
Dand'aka, a kind of metre, 427.
Declension, general rules of, 27.
Declension of '^, 28.
of nouns, ending in ^
and ^, 29. in ^ and "3", 33. in
^and "ai, 37. in ^, "^, "^^ and
0^5 42. in ^ and ^, 45. in Wt,
46. in W, 47. in consonants,
47. in gutturals, 48. in palatals,
ib. in dentals, 53. in labials,
59. in nasals, ib. in semivowels,
65. in sibilants, ib. in ^, 71.
of participles in ^Tr^
and ^, 55.
of possessives in Tf^
and^, 55.
Derivation, 268.
Derivatives; verbal, 269, 291.
nominal, 311.
Derivative verbs, use of, 407.
Desiderative verb ; formation of,
138. inflexions of, 145.
Devanagari alphabet, i.
Dhatu or root, 104.
Dhriti, a kind of metre, 425.
Dwandwa compounds, 338.
Dwigu compounds, 346.
Expletives, T02.
Feet, in prosody, 415.
Frequentative verb, 141. inserting
^, 141. omitting IT , 143. form
of, 147. syntax of, 408.
Future, first or definite, 112. ter-
minations of, 115. formation of,
128. syntax of, 398.
second or indefinite, 112.
terminations of, 115. formation
of, 129. syntax of, 399.
Gana-vritta, a class of metres, 427.
Gati prefixes, 97, 100.
Gayatri, a kind of metre, 418.
Genders of the noun, 27.
Giti, a kind of metre, 428.
Gityarya, a kind of metre, 43 1 .
Guna letters or substitutes, 6.
^, augment, 126. when not in-
serted, 127.
Imperative mood, 112. termina-
tions of, 115. formation of, 1 29.
syntax of, 401.
Imperfect tense, or first prseterite,
III.
Impersonal verbs, 150, 393.
Indeclinables, 90. syntax of, 389.
Indeclinable nouns, 90.
Indicative mood, no.
Infinitive, formation of, 269.
Inflectional terminations of nouns,
27. of verbs, 114.
INDEX I.
436
Inflexion, principles of, 27.
Interjections, 102. syntax of, 392.
Jagati, a kind of metre, 421.
Karmmadharaya compounds, 343.
Kridanta (verbal) derivatives, 269.
Kritij a kind of metre, 426.
Letters, i. classification of, 6.
combination of, 7.
Matrachbandas, a class of metres,
429.
Matrasamaka, a kind of metre, 43 1 .
Metre, principles of, 415. kinds
of, 417-
Moods, no. indicative, ib. impe-
rative, 112. potential, ib. bene-
dictive, 113. conditional, ib.
Nagari letters, i .
Nominal derivatives, 311. classes
of, 3^3-
Nominal verbs ; formation of, 1 50.
syntax of, 408.
Nouns ; inflexions of, 27. declen-
sions of, 29 (see Declension) ;
indeclinable, 90. verbal, 291.
syntax of, 362.
Numbers of the noun, 27. of the
verb, 114.
Numerals, 85, 331.
Optative or benedictive mood,^ 113.
Ordinals, 89, 331.
Padas or voices of the active verb,
113. changes of, 259.
Pankti, a kind of metre, 420.
Parasmai-pada, 113. changes of,
259-
Participles ; kinds of, 270. of the
present tense, 271. of the se-
cond prseterite, 272. indefinite
past, 273. hst of irregular past,
276. future active, 279. future
passive or neuter, 280. inde-
clinable, 287. of repetition or
adverbial, 290. syntax of, 409.
Particles, 90. words used as, 100.
prefixes or affixes, 103.
Passive voice, formation of, 134.
Patronymic derivatives, 312.
Persons of the tenses, 1 1 4.
Possessives ; declension of, 55.
derivation of, 326.
Potential mood, 112. terminations
of, 115. formation of, 130. syn-
tax of, 402.
Prakriti, a kind of metre, 426.
Praeterite ist or imperfect, in.
terminations of, 1 14. formation
of, 116. syntax of, 395.
2d or perfect, in. ter-
minations of, 115. formation of,
n8. compound, 121. syntax
ol 391'
3d or indefinite past.
III. terminations of, 115. form-
ation of, 122. syntax of, 397.
Prepositions, 97. in combination,
ib. singly, 100. alphabetical hst
of, 97. efiect upon voices of
verbs, 260.
Present tense, in. terminations
of, 114. formation of, 116.
syntax of, 394.
Pronominal nouns, ^'], 84, 330.
Pronouns, 77. personal, 78, 80.
demonstrative, ib. id. relative,
79, 82. interrogative, ib. id. ho-
norific, 79, 84. syntax of, 388.
Pronunciation, 4.
Prosody, principles of, 415.
Quantities of vowels, 6.
Quantity in prosody, 415.
Reduplicate prseterite, 118.
Reduphcation, rules of, 118.
Root or Dhatu, 104.
S'akkari, a kind of metre, 423.
Sandhi, rules of, 7.
Sankriti, a kind of metre, 426.
3 K 2
436
INDEX I.
Scheme of terminations for the
noun, 27. for the verb, 114.
Sonant consonants, 7.
Superlative degree, 74, 75.
Surd consonants, 7.
Syntax, 361. of substantives, 362.
of cases, 363. of the nomina-
tive, ib. of the accusative, 364.
of the instrumental, 369. of the
dative, 371. of the ablative,
374. of the genitive, 377. of
the locative, 382. of the voca-
tive, 385.
' of adjectives, 385. of
pronouns, 388. of indeclina-
bles, 389.
— — of verbs, 393. of tenses.
ib. of the present, 394. of the
first praeterite, 395. of the se-
cond praeterite, 397. of the in-
definite past, ib. of the definite
future, 398. of the indefinite
future, 399. of the imperative,
401. of the potential, 402. of
the benedictive, 405. of the
conditional, ib. of the infinitive,
406. of derivative verbs, 407.
— - of participles, 409. of the
present part., 410. of the past
part., ib. of the indeclinable
past part., ib. of the future
part., 413. of participial nouns,
414.
Taddhita (nominal) derivatives,
311.
Tatpurusha compounds, 336. kinds
of> 337* examples of, 340.
Karmmadhdraya, class of, 343.
numerals, or Dwigu class of,
346. with particles and prepo-
sitions, ib.
Temporal augment, 117. rejected
after a negative, 396, 397.
Tenses, conjugational, 109. pre-
sent, no. prseterites, ni. fu-
tures, 112. inflectional termi-
nations of, 1 14.
Terminations, inflectional ; of de-
clension, 27. substitutes for,
after nouns, 30. after pro-
nouns, 78.
of conjugation, 107,
114. modifications of, after the
second prseterite, 121. after the
third, 123.
Trisht'ubh, a kind of metre, 420.
Udgiti, a kind of metre, 428.
ypagiti, a kind of metre, 428.
Upasargas or prepositions, 97.
Ushnih, a kind of metre, 418.
Utkriti, a kind of metre, 426.
Vaitaliya, a kind of metre, 429.
Varna- vritta, a class of metres,4i 7.
Verb, principles of inflexion of,
107. conjugations of, 108.
moods and tenses of, no.
voices of, 113. numbers and
persons of, 1 14. not taking ^,
126. formation of, 132. conju-
gations of, 153 (see Conjuga-
tion); syntax of, 393.
Verbs, derivative, 135. causals,
135. desideratives, 138. fre-
quentatives, 141.
Verbs compounded with preposi-
tions, 260.
Verbal derivatives, 291.
Vikriti, a kind of metre, 426.
Visarga, i. changes of, 22.
Voices ; active, 113. passive, 1 14.
changes of, 259.
Vowels, 2. initial, ib. medial and
final, 3. quantities of, ib. sub-
stitutes for, 7. conjunction of, 8.
Vriddhi substitutes for vowels, 7.
Vrihati, a kind of metre, 426.
INDEX II.
VERBS IN THE DIFFERENT CONJUGATIONS.
^a^ to mark, page 155.
^r^ to pervade, 155.
ignr to go, 155.
'^a^ to become manifest, 238.
WS to go, 155.
^ to disrespect, 253.
^ to eat, 194.
^!Tf to breathe, 195.
^ to pain, 253.
^ to be fit, 155.
^?r^ to pervade, 2,2,7*
W^ to eat, 244.
^RT to be, 195.
^m to throw, !zi^, aao.
^WTO to obtain, 22y.
^rm to sit, 196.
isiT^ to speak, izoij.
1^ to go, 156, 197.
^ to remember, 196.
^ ('^nft) to study, 197.
3[5if to shine, 239.
^ to send, 254.
^ to wish, 232.
^ to go, 216.
^ to see, 156.
^ to praise, 197.
^to go, 198.
^ to envy, 156.
^ to rule, 197.
•g" to sound, 156.
^n^ to go, 157.
T^ to assemble, 220.
Tr^ to wet, 239.
"gr^ to cover, 198.
•gjf to reason, 157.
^ to go, to gain, 157, 210.
^^ to go, 242.
^»T to be straight, 157.
^ni to increase, 216, 220, 227.
^togo, 245-
^V to increase, 153.
^f^ to be dry, 158.
^Rir to wink, 254.
oF^ to speak, 254.
«K^ to call, 167.
^PT to desire, 158.
cirf55 to count, 254.
■fer to cure, 158.
oR to sound, to coo, 203, 232.
■^ to contract, 233.
oK3 to be crooked, 232.
"^ to contract, 254.
-^ to be childish, 233.
^ to speak falsely, 258.
438
INDEX OF VERBS.
'^PH to suffer pain, 245.
^ to be angry, ^^o.
^iTR to play as a child, 255.
"^ to embrace, 220.
^to astonish, :Z54.
^to sound, 234.
^ to injure, ddS.
^ to do, 243.
^ to be thick, 2^^.
^ to cut, 2^6.
^ to be able, 158, 170, 255.
^ to be feeble, 255.
^^ to injure, 228.
^ to become thin, 220.
-mq to plough, draw furrows,
^33-
"Sfi to throw, 2^'^.
"^ to injure, 247.
^ to utter, to celebrate, 255.
% to sound, 160.
jf!^ to call, 167.
W^ to go, to walk, 159.
^ to buy, 244.
"^ to be angry, 220.
^ to cry, 159.
-pJT to be sad, 224.
f^ to be moist, 167, 220.
f^r^ to be distressed, 245.
orajT to speak, 199.
"^TUr to kill, to hurt, 242.
iG^ to be patient, 159, 224.
f^ to waste, 160.
ftpr to kill, to hurt, 242.
f^ to let loose, 220.
fOT to throw, 216.
"^ to sneeze, 203.
"^ to send, 240.
W^ to be hungry, 220.
"^ to agitate, 170.
"^vr to be agitated, 220, 245.
"^ to waste, to decay, 160.
T^FT to whet, to sharpen, 203.
^Tf to dig, 161.
f^ to hurt, 236.
Wn to speak, 199.
iTO to count, 254.
TX^ to speak, 254.
ipFT to go, 161.
TTT^ to agitate, 162.
7p{ to sound, 233.
Jj? to make effort, 233.
g? to preserve, 233.
jpi to advise, 254.
TiTj to protect, 162.
gxr to blame, 162.
gxf to disturb, 220.
^ to sing, t6o.
ipr to be greedy, 220.
T^ to take, 163, 254.
IT to swallow, 233.
IT to sound, 247.
^"^ to serve, 186.
jjp?r to arrange, 245.
H^ to take, 246.
%to be weary, 160.
ITF to eat, 163.
vz to exchange, 1 70.
OT to proclaim, 256.
Tm to shine, 242.
TTT to smell, 163.
INDEX OF VERBS.
439
^chl^ to shine, 199.
^^ to speak, 199.
^^tr to pound, %^6.
'^^^ to eat, 164.
^i:to go, 164.
^ to pound, %^6,
f% to collect, 228, %^6,
fqif to think, 1^6.
^ to cut, 10,'>,,
^ to steal, 252.
"^If to hurt, 234.
"^ to make effort, 258.
"^giT to drop, 164.
f^ to cut, 240.
^ to cut, 233.
-^to cut 233.
1^ to play, to shine, 239
"sft to cut, 225.
"Sf^ to eat, 199.
«nT to produce, 210.
^T«T to be born, 216.
^TH to yawn, 165.
IT^ to let loose, 220.
^TPT to wake, 220.
ftr to conquer, 153.
^fk to live, 165, 257.
^ to bind, 233.
^ to yawn, 165.
m to grow old, 216.
»T to decay, 247*
^ to know, 256.
^ to know, 246.
3irr to become old, 246.
^g^Cto have fever, 165.
f^-q to throw, 220, 233.
^ to fly, 217.
^ to go, 165.
l!!W to hurt, 170, 220.
Ttnr to bow, 166.
iirgfT to perish, 217, 220.
Tir^ to bind, 217.
"ftCTTr to cleanse, 200, 210.
"ftlj^ to blame, 166.
lift to lead, 166.
XT to praise, 203, 234.
m to praise, 234.
■fT^ * to support' a family, 258.
"fHT to stretch, 242.
mr to heat, 217.
im to be distressed, 224.
"cTO to toss, 220.
fifnT to endure, 167.
^ to make a riot, 233.
WT to inflict pain, 233.
H^ to inflict pain, 231.
HH to hurt, 170, 220.
"^■q to be pleased, 220.
im to eat grass, 243.
■fftr to be satisfied, 218, 220.
-^ to satisfy, 234.
"ff^ to thirst, 220.
lj^ to injure, 239.
If to cross, 167.
ii[^ to abandon, 167.
^ to cut, 233.
1^ to hasten, 165, 258.
^ to bite, 168.
^ to give, 168.
^V to have, to hold, 168.
^ to tame, 224.
440
INDEX OF VERBS.
^T>T to deceive, 228.
^ft5T to be poor, 200.
^ to toss, :i30.
^ to burn, 168.
^ to give, 169, Sill.
^ to cut, 201.
f^ to play, 21S'
f^ to anoint, i^oij.
^to decay, a 18.
^(hft to shine, :iOi.
^ to shine, !Zi8, !257.
5 to run, 169.
5^ to become bad, zzo,
gf to milk, :20i.
^ to be proud, 318.
U^ to see, 169.
H to tear, 347, 258.
^ to protect, 170.
^ to cleanse, 160.
^ to cut, 225.
w to assail, 203.
^ to shine, 170.
^ to fly, 201.
-^ to run, 171.
^toinjure,tooppress,2i9,22o.
ftr^ to hate, 202.
VT to have, to hold, 211.
>ft to uphold, 22 T.
^ to shake, 229, 246.
^to shake, 229.
^ to hold, 174.
^ to drink, 171.
Vt^ to gallop, 171.
UJT to blow, 171.
"S to meditate, 160.
^ to be firm, 171.
^ to be firm, 234.
^a[^ to fall down, 170, 190.
S5R to sound, 254.
^ to be happy, 167.
^TTT to dance, 219.
iT^ to cook, 172.
X(z to tie, 254.
TTrT to fall, 172.
r^ to go, 219, 254.
iT^r to tie, 255.
trr to drink, 172.
TjT to preserve, 201.
int to cross over, 257.
fij^ to be organized, 236.
frr^ to grind, 241.
xft to drink, 221.
iflr to pain, 257*
"g7 to contract, 255.
xr^ to abandon, 233.
g^ to nourish, 219, 247*
^to purify, 247.
^ to dehght, 229.
^ to extend, 234.
jpt to throw, 257.
i| to fill, 247, 257-
^^ to serve, 186.
"ornr to grow, 173.
ir^ to ask, 234.
inr to declare, 257.
in to fill, 201.
ift to be pleased, 221.
jft to desire, 244.
ift to please, 248, 258.
^ to bum, 220.
INDEX OF VERBS.
441
Wr to eat, 20 1.
TJRir to approach, 173.
TRf5 to bear fruit, 173.
"^V to despise, 173.
W^ to bind, 248.
^c5 to live, 257.
^ to know, to understand,
174, 221.
'^to speak, 202.
>T^ to break, 240.
>TO to shine, 211.
>Tr to shine, 201.
HT^ to speak, 257.
WTS to shine, 257.
^T^ to break, 239.
\ff to fear, 212.
H to nourish, 174, 212.
^ to fall, 220.
^ to threaten, 247.
>j^ to fall, 221.
H^ to fall, 170, 190.
HH to whirl, 175, 224.
^i^ to fry, 235.
>jra to shine, 257.
Wt to support, 247.
W^ to advise, 258.
n^ to be mad, 221, 224.
^m to respect, 221.
i{r{ to understand, 243.
T{7Zf to chum, 175, 246.
JT^T to bind, 175.
im to weigh, 220.
»r^ to be immersed, 235.
HT to measure, 20 1, 212.
TTR to investigate, 175.
f^ to throw, 229.
f^ to be unctuous, 170, 222.
»ft to injure, to kill, 218, 244,
248.
jfr?5 to close, 257.
g^ to hberate, 235.
^ to break, 220.
^ to be perplexed, to be silly,
220, 222.
^ to die, 236.
ipx to seek, 255.
ipf to clean, 203.
H to injure, 247.
^ to barter, 176.
^ to serve, 186.
^ to remember, 176.
^ to trample, 258.
inr to worship, 176.
iTiT to make effort, 1 76.
XR to restrain, 176.
iR to feed, 257.
TTBT to take pains, 220.
TTT to go, 201.
5 to join, 203, 249.
"gpT to engage in devotion, 222.
^W to join, 240.
^ to fight, 222.
g^T to disturb, 220.
T?^ to make, 255.
T^ to colour, 176, 222.
T>I to hurt, 220, 222.
T>? to commence, 177.
TH to sport, 178.
t:^ to leave, 255.
Tj to give, to take, 201.
3 ^
442
INDEX OF VERBS.
TT*I to propitiate, 223.
TT^I to accomplish, 2^30.
ft:^ to purge, 240.
7^ to injure, 221.
;^ to roar, 247.
^ to sound, 204.
;^ to shine, 170.
^ to resist, 170.
^ to weep, 204.
^ to obstruct, 238.
^ to disturb, 220.
^ to be angry, 220.
:^ to grow, 178.
t to sound, 160.
<;jvr to gain, 178.
H^ to be ashamed, 235.
c5T to give, to take, 201.
fi;jTr to smear, 236.
f75^ to lick, 204.
c^ to embrace, 218, 247.
c^ to melt, 258.
<^ to resist, 170.
<g7 to roll on the ground, 220.
<57 to resist, 1 70.
cgT? to be lost, 220.
(jxr to cut, 236.
c5H to covet, 220, 223.
^ to cut, 248.
cJjVcR to see, 178.
^^ to speak, 204.
•qz to surround, 255.
^ to speak, 179.
"^TT to ask, 243.
^t; to weave, 179.
^X:to choose, 255.
^ to subdue, 205.
^^ to dwell, 179.
'^^ to fix, 220.
^ to bear, 179.
^ to blow, 201.
f^ to separate, 240.
"f^ to discriminate, 213.
f^ to fear, 240.
f^ to know, 205.
f^ to exist, 223.
1^ to find, 236.
f^ to surround, 213.
f^ to convey, 220.
^ to go, 206.
^ to cast off, 220.
^ to choose, 230, 249*
^oR to accept, 180.
^W to be, 170, 180.
^ to grow, 170.
^ to choose, 248.
^ to weave, 180.
^ to go, 206.
^ to surround, 258.
tq^ to deceive, 236.
iqv to pierce, 223.
^ to cover, 181.
W^ to cut, 236.
eft to choose, 221, 248.
^ to support, 248.
^ to praise, 181.
-^ni; to be able, 224, 230.
^ to speak ill, 255.
^ to wither, to decay, 181.
"51?? to be tranquil, 224.
^^ to desire, to bless, 181.
INDEX OP VERBS.
443
l^rnr to instruct, 206.
ftpr to distinguish, 241.
^ to sleep, 206.
^[ftoR to sprinkle, 182.
^^ to sorrow, 182.
^ to be clean, 220.
31>T to be beautiful, to shine,
170, 182.
tm to become dry, 220.
SIV to break wind, 179.
^pl to laugh at, 259.
^ to injure, 249.
^> to pare, 225.
TSSK to drop, 164.
'^R to be weak, 255.
'^F'T to loosen, 246.
"^PT to be weary, 224.
TSrr to cook, 201.
f^ to serve, 182.
"^ to hear, 183.
'^ to melt, 160.
f%^ to embrace, 220, 224.
ig^ to breathe, 207.
f^ to increase, 183.
fw to be white, T70.
iq:^ to embrace, 184.
"^^ to give, 243.
ij^ to decay, to be sad, 184.
^5f3T to go, 184.
Tq^ to bear, 184, 225.
"qrvr to accomplish, 223.
f^ to bind, 249.
f^ to sprinkle, 236.
f^ to accomplish, 185.
fTW to become perfect, 220.
f^ to sew, 225.
^ to bear children, 185, 204.
^ to extract juice, 226,
"i|^to bring forth, 207, 225.
"^ to hurt, 1 85.
^ to serve, i85.
% to decay, 160.
•R^ to destroy, 225.
¥H to stop, to hinder, 186.
^ to praise, 207.
FT to stand, 186.
■fe^ to spit, 187, 225.
WT to bathe, 201.
fW5 to be kind, 219.
"OJ to distil, 203.
"OT^ to vomit, 219.
f^ to smile, 187.
^xf to sleep, 207.
f^ to sweat, 187, 220.
^TR to tranquilhze, 259.
^ to go, 188, 213.
^if to abandon, let go, 226,
^37-
^ to creep, 188.
;gF^ to go, 188.
^;»T to stop, 250.
"^ to leap, 249.
^wr to stop, 250.
M^ to sound, 255.
^cr»>T to stop, 250.
iJTiT to stop, 250.
^ to cover, 230.
m to spread, 258.
m to spread, 250.
^q^ to envy, to emulate, 188.
3 L 2
444
INDEX OF VERBS.
W^ to touch, 258.
?=^ to touch, 2^6.
^ to envy, 255.
^qrnr to increase, 189.
"^ to bud, to expand, 233.
^^ to throb, 233.
^ to remember, 189, 258.
^qr^ to ooze, to drop, 170, 189.
^'^ to fall, 189.
^r»T to trust in, 170.
^ to drop, 190.
^^ to sound, 255.
1^ to kill, 208.
1^ to abandon, 213.
l^T to go, 213.
f^ to injure, 241.
^ to sacrifice, 209.
:^ to take, 190.
^ to rejoice, 220.
"^ to be ashamed, 214.
^T^ to be glad, 3 90.
^ to call, 190.
CORRECTIONS.
Page
Line
I
4
5>
' chchhra read chhra
4
8
Aa
Ma
7
2
t
^
II
21
^TT^TT^iT
-^tr^^hrfff
13
16
t
14
32
r^ejiiH^H:
16
26
^^
^f^
iii
18 /or
• such a ^ is
changed to re«6/ it is
changed
to TT, which becomes
23
20 /or
f^ read f^:
^4
5
5
TTT^T
24
^51^191
27
5 c?e/e Section I.
'
29
14 /or
• Section II. read Section I.
39
27
^WK
■?ft«t:
40
10
^.
^
49
20
H^
H^
51
9
inr
in^
51
9
irwT
TTWf
51
27
fintT
flT^^
55
4
^■f3rr:
"'T^^sr:
55
7
tr^^
88
23
fu^^riinH-nr
90
12
^^«p
Tj^^w:
95
5
JITT
97
30
lOI
7
with verbs
the verbs ^, ^3^, and ^
108
II
1^'f^
^ur<^
III
14
^HH^^
^rfW^T^
123
9
ft?
ftri-.
123
31
^nn
124
33
^3*^H
130
9
rTTiT
inif^
446
CORRECTIONS.
Page
Line
133
28 for VT^rf read
H^*
134
27 .
^wrf^RiT
136
32
141
27
^m^ud
MIM^Md
2
^1?^
c."N
143
^^C^^
143
2
M*t!^rf
T^ijt^^i
146
8
f>|MI^*IH
^^^m^aim
146
10
^fHf^:
'si^ftr^
146
10
^^>|ftFRr:
146
31
f^Whrr^n
156
9 dele vM^^H
-^si
3
^51^
157
33
^^tfftfTT
171
5 for ^«irtiifi reca
171
12
^^^^^\
^f^^^if
171
31
^vtft
§vrft
172
20
2
' to go'
* to go ;' ' to fall.'
-^n
^wm^fi;
^15
5
>JH;J
^^:
175
7
f^Hftf^fW
r^HrHMfd
176
27
*u^4iaiflfr
'5I^T^
178
7
^T75^
^c!J<*T
180
18
^S^^d
^<=l^d
181
26
«II^(«^
-ill^l^l^
181
27
:^ir<H«qrt
^ 1 ^1 Pti *M n
184
7
10
^rrftriHi^
190
191
7
■^i^irrf
202
17
n
%ffe
202
17
f^f
f^H
203
16
28
214
\^H\\^
214
28
^'R
^
216
6
^
$^5r?T
221
24
5^Hir<
^mrf^
CORRECTIONS.
Page
Line
237
16 for iffr^ read
^liiMff
228
3^
^
^>T^.
238
5
W^
^^
244
2
in vowels
in long vowels
249
28
^^HlfT
^r^^TTlT
2
-^k^jihI
253
''fli.^m^
254
13
-i<<*!iirf?rarH
254
22
P^c+yniMprf
254
27
T^
Tm
256
32
^^1-*(^H^
w^t^?^
262
23
"^TOT
^TBCf
271
7
fifwl^
fir?f|;
'^n
8
fTf^f^ii:
f^r^fc^^cf
291
20
«*
#
291
21
^
i^
345
18
§^^1
^^WT
345
348
20
17^^^
31
mih1<*I
HlW^cfct
z^^
23
^^f^
^f^
zs^
16
^x
^nr
361
30
^Ip^l^l
^rrftirr
3^9
15
-^muTrr^
-iqTHi^lr^'^T^
374
16
^ftr^
^nr^
375
3
ITT
375
20
^l^lff
Hl^^lif
?>n
28
^7n&
?>H
6
<*qg
^3
386
8
^
^
391
4
^
^
394
12
5^*^
S^nI
39<^
7
??T^
»<IW
397
34
^tx^t:
^rt^i
400
8
i^wmt
iflTTRRt
411
29
^^
^^
422
6
^jTJxnj
^JITTTTV
447
WORKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR,
To be had of Messrs. Madden and Co.
DICTIONARY, Sanskrit and English. 2d edition. Calcutta, 1832.
51. 105.
SELECT SPECIMENS of the THEATRE of the HINDUS.
2 vols. 8vo. 2d edition. Allen and Co. 1/. 1^.
SANKHYA KARIKA. Hindu Philosophy. London, 4to. lO^. Qd..
VISHNU PURANA. Hindu Mythology and History. 4to.
J. Murray, 1840. 21. 2s.
MILL'S BRITISH INDIA, with Notes. 6 vols. 8vo. Madden
and Co. 145. per vol.
In the Press.
ARIANA ANTIQUA. Antiquities of Afghanistan, with Plates. 4to.
21. 2s.
HISTORY OF BRITISH INDIA, in continuation of Mill's
History. 2 vols. 8vo.
Also latelij published by Madden and Co.
HITOPADESA ; First Book : Sanskrit Text, with Glossary. By
Professor Johnson. 4to. 155. "X^
RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT J
TO— ► 202 Main Library |
LOAN PERIOD 1
- HOME USE
2 3
4
5 6
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 1
1-month loanr. rr>ay be renewed by raffing BJ<?'^>^* 1
1-year loans roay D- rrachafged by bringing tii; . • r. '-ps t:irsulSfl<S#5-3405 I
Renewals and rociiurgca may be noade 4 (iay.-. i'.;:^:, s^. „>.. ..wa ' '"'■'"" *'" "" ^
DUE AS STAMPED BEL
ow
KK OCT 2 11985
}Gr 2 2 1991
^ ^.M
mum <^CT 1 B,
991
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
FORM NO. DD6, 60m, 1/83 BERKELEY, CA 94720
®$
w
GtMtR^^-
UBR^B''
.U.C.
BtRKtLtV
J.
If-'-- *1
\1<